r 


^: 


^. 


J^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


^- 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommag^e 


I      I    Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 


I? 


Couverture  restaur6e  et/ou  pellicul6e 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


rXy  Coloured  maps/ 

\Jj\^   Cartes  gdographiques  en  couleur 

I      I    Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 


Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bieue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


D 
D 


D 


^ 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
Relid  avec  d'autref  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serrde  paut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int6rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
11  se  peut  que  certain  >  i  pages  blanches  aJout6es 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  film6es. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppi^mentaires 


A  of  3 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  iui  a  6td  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  m6thode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquds  ci-dessous. 


I      I   Coloured  pages/ 


D 
D 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 


Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagtos 

Pages  restored  and/oi 

Pages  restaur6es  et/ou  peliiculdes 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxei 
Pages  ddcoiordes,  tachet6es  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d6tach6es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 


I — I  Pages  damaged/ 

I      I  Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 

I — I  Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

I      I  Pages  detached/ 

J      I  Showthrough/ 


I      I    Quality  of  print  varies/ 


Quality  indgale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppl^mentaire 


Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  M  fllm6es  d  nouveau  de  fapon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


10X 

14X 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

Z 

12X 

16X 

20X 

24X 

28X 

3. 

i^.jM^w^i>«awt.ajft>iB'va6iai 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — ^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


1 

2 

3 

L'exempiaire  film6  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  dt6  reproduites  avec  ie 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetd  de  l'exempiaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimde  sont  fiimds  en  commenpant 
par  Ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration.  soit  par  Ie  second 
plat,  selon  Ie  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  film6s  en  commenpant  par  la 
premidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  Ie  symbole  — ►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  Ie 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
film^s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diff6rents. 
Lorsque  Ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6,  il  est  film6  d  partir 
de  Tangle  sup6rieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  Ie  nombre 
d'images  n6cessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  m6thode. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

mm»mm\mi in 


'«'''^**B6ife»,(,-...;, 


No.  108. 


III 


1/^    C^     HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE. 
<  > 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS 


TOB 


THE  GREAT  LAKES 


AND 


CON^NECTING  WATERS. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OPEICB, 
1896. 


'     i 


^^'p 


m   ♦ 


-.^i,  . 


1 


'***»tej:*; 


*'  ♦• 


•&-s}^i£^''~^ 


-.S»3^  4  — , 


CONTENTS. 


Preface Page. 

Note .*""... ^ 

Index  chart *■•"•---•■-•—•.-........      vii 

Index '.".... ^"^ 

List  of  Hydrographic  Office  publications '...''.'.'." ^ 

List  of  HydrograpMc  Office  airents  

*  239 

CHAPTER  I. 

Currents 

1 

CHAPTER  II. 

Lake  Superior .... ... 

" 6 

CHAPTER  III, 
St.  Marys  river  and  Detour  passage 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Strait  of  Mackinac. .. 

■■' 48 

CHAPTER  V. 

Lake  Micliigan  ........ 

59 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Green  bay 

106 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Lake  Huron 

; 117 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

St.  Clair  and  Detroit  rivers  and  lake  St.  Clair 

.................  ,,,,,______^      jjjjj 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Lake  Erie 

145 

CHAPTER  X. 

Lake  Ontario 

• 180 

III 


■"*«■•■•«*. 


>■  k  .^ii*..«to»„,„  , 


if: 


.*  ♦--^ 


PREFACE. 


n  5  M  ?  ^'^""l'  comprising  four  volumes,  was  prepared  by  Lieut. 

m  > '  A.  !"'  Z""'^  ^^^^'  ^^^y'  ^'''^  ^y  Mr.  James  H  Reid, 
Uuited  States  Navy,  aud  Mr.  R.  O.  Ray,  United  States  Navy. 

The  present  edition  has  been  revised  and  corrected  to  date,  for  the 

latest  mformation,  by  Mr.  R.  O.  Ray,  United  States  Navy.    In  this 

edition  It  has  been  thought  best  to  present  in  one  volume  complete 

saihng  directions  for  the  Great  Lakes,  leaving  out  the  several  a^Ss 

It!  T  nT  "'^^"l  ?  "^^"°""«-    ^«  *»»i«  ^o^J^  «  necessarily  incom- 
plete  the  Office  must  depend  upon  the  cooperation  of  those  who  dwell 
near  the  lakes,  as  well  as  those  who  navigate  them,  for  prompt  info 
mation  con^ming  any  errors  or  omissions,  or  the  discovery  of  new 
dangers,  and  such  cooperation  is  earnestly  requested 

The  charts  were  prepared  by  Mr.  G.  W.  Littlehales,  in  charge  of  the 
Jlriron.  *  ^«-*-««-  of  this  Office,  and  p'rintedTdL  S^ 

liZnl^^^r^'^^J'^.  *^**  "^^""^  "^*°S««  ^^^^  P^^  i^  the  buoys, 
lights,  and  other  parts  described  in  this  volume;  consequently  the 

volume  has  to  be  corrected  for  the  Notices  to  Mariners  foHhe  Great 

Lakes,  which  are  published  monthly  by  the  Hydrographic  Office  and 

which  contain  the  latest  information  obtainable  from  alnurces' 

^  ^  0.  D.  SjtO'  BEE, 

TT.„         o  ComwojMfer,  United  States  Navy,  Sydroaratther 

United  States  Htdeogeaphio  Office,  ^y^'-oarapner. 

WaHhington^  D.  0.,  August  1, 1896. 


"  "*"»■-  i«Mi)ia 


NOTE, 
distances  are  given  in  ZrLl^^  '"'""'«'  "'"'  «»"«»  "«  *■•«.• 


'■''Ste.JSw  iVv....i^sti*v:9  i.,;-,rf#i-ij,^,j,j, J,;, ; 


^.J*^-' 


J%e  ekartt  rtferr«d  to  in  black  are  imued  ttp  Ou 

Hifdrogrt^ie  QgUe,  Ifavp  Drpartmenf. 

J%oie  vhoae  UmiU  are  indicated  bm  dotted  Unet 

are  in  eouree  of  oonttrmefion. 


Thr  charts  referred  to  in  blue  are  imind  by  thr  11/ 
of  the  Chief  nf  Bnginerrt,  War  Dt-parimml 


aj' 


HI" 


BO' 


13' 


7«- 


IT 


If 


IV 


IV 


IS* 


H' 


ir 


70* 


8»' 


-| — r—T — r-| — I — 1—7 — I — I — I — r    ■y    i — r  -i — f 


T — TT 


-j-y, — r-  J  r- 1    I    { -  f    r- < Y  I   ;r  r' ] T-r—i — j—t — f    t | — i — r—T' 


Mil       "11       <Hl        *ll|IWIHl»*«WIW*MHIII  llllfcl 


\ 


¥ 


ruronta-Ilby-li^l^^-j.-  f  ~0 


^ 


'Jt 


T     A. 


S 


jr       id       TF  T  '    O       31       > 


.^ 


p  t;  w  y  s  Y  X  v  jt  jr  j  a 


-wv 


-«' 


--W 


THi:   GREAT   X.:A.8J>:$ 

IKDEX 

TO 

COAST,  SPECIAL 
HARBOB    CHARTS 


M 


M 


-W 


—  'tit 


-w 


-.»2" 


_J k—J L_J J L'.  1  .-,L_1.-L.-J.     J  _) L  -.i_  l—L..  ' t—L  X^J-  i. 

82*  »i'  80*  -ft'  i«"  ,:•:• 


J    I,... I,   t  .1., 


J.    -I L 


..L.j__i...i--L 


w 


j_j l_^j 1     I    ■  t  ■  t     I r  _i«0' 

■:i'  70°  «;>• 


if  erred  to  in  blue  are  intiutd  by  tlu-  offtrt- 
ief  of  Engineert,  War  Di^irfmmt 


The  tkartt  nferrtd  to  i»  red  an  imuieA 
by  the  BKNi*  il<iin<r«U|r. 


E 


CHAPTER  I. 

CURRENTS. 

EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  "PTTRRPvra  ^t,  m,,^ 

'ae  theory  haa  ofteu  Ln  prtL„Cr,r™"''  ""^  "'""'"'"-^ 

the  corrent,  and  the^S  an  wI»T    T"  '^*'™  ""'  "■'°'»  '°»'""e 
return  eurr^nt.  '     *""  "*'"''8  »"'  ''"^P'.  fo'-ni-g  the 

OTHBB  FEATURES. 

of  s'urm™,  levellleT'l  :Xto  1":    't^^^^^^^^ 

of  water  to  the  soathward  ^„I        ■  .•     ^'"' ""''  "  '"'"Iting  flow 

eudurefora-ygrttlSof  .1,        "'°"''  ''°™™'  «"»"»  """"^ 

wWohTafaUeH^eSr"''^  "-  ""  «''"'  '"'^-  »  *"»»—. 

1944— No.  108 1  I 


Mm 


2 


CURRENTS. 


"These  seiches >  are  nninodal,  stationary  vibrations  of  lake  water. 
They  appear  in  the  form  of  waves,  which  alternately  raise  and  depress 
the  water  of  the  lake  on  each  side  of  the  nodal  line  of  the  oscil- 
lation.   •    *    • 

"As  the  area  of  the  Great  Lakes  is  so  large,  the  nninodal  seiche 
would  naturally  be  of  infrequent  occurrence,  as  a  powerful  blow  must 
be  struck  on  a  comparatively  large  area  to  produce  it. 

"But  this  nninodal  vibration  does  exist  on  the  Great  Lakes.  Gen. 
0.  B.  Comstock  states  in  the  United  States  Chief  of  Engineer's  Report 
for  1872,  page  1040,  that  there  is  a  wave  constantly  passing  between 
Milwaukee  and  Grand  Haven  on  lake  Michigan.  The  tide  gauges 
show  that  there  are  eleven  great  waves  per  day  at  each  of  these  places, 
and  the  waves  have  a  period  of  a  trifle  over  two  hours. 

•  •  •  •    .  #  «  * 

"A  tracing  of  the  tide  gauge  at  Grand  Haven,  Mich.,  for  the  month 
of  April,  1893,  shows  a  two-hour-andtwelve-minute  period  with  great 
exactness.  Every  day  in  the  month  this  period  can  be  distinguished, 
although  on  some  days  it  is  almost  obliterated  by  minute  seiches,  or 
'embroidery,'  while  a  crest  is  often  marked  by  another  superposed 
seiche  in  stormy  weather;  but  the  succeeding  crest  appears  after  the 
two-hour  period.    •    •    • 

*'In  his  report  for  1872,  General  Comstock  cites  some  remarkable 
seiches  observed  by  Major  Wilson  at  Oswego.  The  first  one  occurred 
on  June  13, 1872.  Its  period  was  from  twenty  to  thirty  minutes,  and 
during  its  continuance  a  white  squall  passed  to  the  north,  over  the 
lake,  accompanied  by  a  small  waterspout.  An  employee  of  the  survey, 
who  happened  to  be  out  on  the  lake,  reported  that  he  heard  strange 
noises,  bubbles  came  to  the  top  of  the  water,  and  the  fish  rose  to 
the  surface  as  if  stunned.    •    •    • 

"On  Friday  morning,  April  7, 1893,  the  port  of  Chicago  was  visited 
by  a  tidal  wave,  bore,  a  phenomenon  called  seiches,  or,  in  plain  terms, 
a  sudden  vertical  motion  of  the  water  in  the  southern  portion  of  lake 
Michigan,  for  it  appears  the  wave  swept  over  the  beach  at  St.  Joseph, 
Mich.,  700  feet  back  from  the  high-wat>er  mark,  the  vertical  rise  at  that 
point  being  given  as  4  feet,  a  report  which  is  duly  authenticated  from 
Chicago.  At  the  latter  port  a  recurring  wave,  which  also  characterized 
the  St.  Joseph  phenomenon,  caused  great  damage  to  the  shipping  and 
called  forth  the  assistance  of  tugs  and  port  officials  to  secure  the  dis- 
abled vessels  broken  adrift  through  the  force  of  the  tidal  wave.  *  •  » 

"The  following  extract  from  a  letter  of  H.  C.  Frankenfield,  local  fore- 
cast official  at  Chicago,  will,  perhaps,  give  a  good  idea  of  the  weather 
conditions  there  on  April  7,  the  date  of  the  above-mentioned  seiche: 

"'High  winds  commenced  about  2.30  p.  m.,  April  6,  blowing  steadily 
from  the  SE.  until  1.30  a.  m.,  April  7,  when  they  shifted  to  ]N^KE.,  blow- 


■Extracts  from  an  article  on  "The  Seiche  in  America,"  by  E.  A.  Perkins. 
liBhed  in  the  American  Meteorological  Journal,  October,  1893. 


Fub- 


lake  water. 
md  depress 
'  the  oscil- 

)dal  seicbe 
blow  must 

ikes.  Gen. 
ler's  Report 
ig  between 
ide  gauges 
lese  places, 


the  month 
with  great 
liinguisbed, 
seiches,  or 
superposed 
-s  after  the 

'emarkable 
e  occurred 
inutes,  and 
I,  over  the 
;he  survey, 
rd  strange 
sh  rose  to 


ras  visited 
lain  terms, 
ion  of  lake 
it.  Joseph, 
ise  at  that 
cated  from 
irac'terized 
ipping  and 
[re  the  dis- 
ive.  *  •  • 
,  local  fore- 
le  weather 
I  seiche : 
ig  steadily 
NE.,  blow- 
kins.    Fab> 


«*■-. 


tr 


«• 


1 

I 

r 

u 
e 
d 

a 


CURRENTS. 


d 


ing  from  tbat  quarter  niitil  I  a.  m.,  when  tliey  again  went  to  SE,  Tlie 
velocity  varied  from  30  miles  per  hour  at  2.30  p.  m.,  April  6,  to  43  miles 
per  hour  at  1.50  a.  ni.,  April  7. 

'"The  wave  occurred  between  1.30  and  1.46  a.  m.,  April  7,  and  its 
hei'-jht  was  from  4  to  G  feet.  The  damage  done  was  princii)ally  to  ves- 
sels anchored  in  the  river.  Several  were  torn  from  their  moorings  and 
carried  toward  the  laive,  cansing  numerous  collisions  with  other  ves- 
sels. Some  were  carried  out  into  the  lake.  I  do  not  think  the  wave 
was  preceded  by  smaller  ones,  but,  judging  from  the  barometric  oscil- 
lations after  the  principal  wave,  there  must  have  been  several  smaller 
ones  during  the  next  two  hours.  These  waves  occur  from  time  to  time, 
and  I  have  observed  that  they  always  occur  at  the  time  of  a  sudden 
and  decided  rise  or  fall  in  the  barometer.'    *     *    • 

"I  have  received  accounts  of  several  nnnor  seiches  on  the  (Ireat 
Lakes,  but  nothing  that  will  bear  comparison  with  the  great  seiche  of 
April  7, 1893.  This  seems  to  be  one  of  the  largest  oscillations  ever 
observed  on  the  lakes.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  synchronous  observa- 
tions of  this  phenomenon  were  not  taken  by  tide  gauges  at  different 
points  on  the  shore. 

"As  to  the  forecasting  of  seiches,  this  can  not  be  done  with  accuracy 
until  we  obtain  further  knowledge  of  the  bore,  and  ascertain  by  numer- 
ous barographs  the  advance  of  sudden  changes  in  the  pressure  of  the 
atmosphere." 

From  the  precedtng  remarks  it  will  be  seen  that  the  steadiness  and 
persistence  of  the  lake  currents  have  not  yet  been  determined  accu- 
rately. Their  velocities  have  been  found  to  vary  in  speed  from  4  to  12 
miles  a  day. 

The  prevalence  of  westerly  and  southwesterly  winds  favors  the 
strength  and  persistence  of  these  currents,  and  it  must  be  remembered 
that  when  the  motion  of  the  surface  water  has  been  communicated  to 
the  strata  below,  a  brief  change  of  wind,  while  affecting  the  surface,  is 
not  so  soon  communicated  to  the  underlying  water. 

OUEEENTS  IN  LAKE   SUPERIOR. 

As  has  been  stated,  the  main  current  of  lake  Superior  is  to  the 
eastward,  along  the  south  shore.  From  the  Apostleislands  to  the  east- 
wcird  of  Keweenaw  point  this  current  has  great  width,  and  toward  the 
eastern  end  of  the  lake  spreads  out  in  the  shape  of  a  fan,  while  a 
branch  ftassing  to  the  northward  and  westward  reaches  the  extreme 
northern  coast  of  the  lake. 

Another  branch  turns  to  the  southward,  around  Keweenaw  point, 
reaches  the  south  coast,  moves  to  the  eastward,  and  again  joins  the 
main  current  east  of  Marquette,  Mich.  In  Whiteflsh  bay  there  are 
evidences  of  a  whirl,  and  to  the  westward  of  the  Apostle  islands  a 
distinct  westerly  set  exists. 

Along  the  NW.  coast  the  current  moves  to  the  westward,  turning, 
apparently,  to  the  eastward  near  Two  Harbors,  Minn. 


1 


*  CUKRENT8. 

All  interesting  conannation  of  the  main  current  is  found  in  the  drift 
from  wrecks.  Prom  the  "Currents  of  tlie  Great  Lakes,  as  deduced 
from  the  movements  of  Bottle  Papers  durinj,'  the  seasons  of  1892  and 
1893,"  published  by  the  Weather  Bureau,  it  is  learned  that  a  consider- 
able portion  of  oil  jettisoned  from  the  steamer  Northerner,  stranded  on 
Keweenaw  point  in  November,  1892,  was  recovered  at  Deer  l»ark 
between  Grand  Marais,  Mich.,  and  Whiteflsh  point,  on  the  south  shore 
of  the  lake,  distant  over  200  miles.  Many  barrels  of  oil  were  chopped 
out  of  the  ice  by  the  life-saving  crew  and  fishermen  at  Deer  Park. 

Isle  Royale  furnishes  indications  of  a  current  from  the  NE.  in  the 
Blind  spits  extending  to  the  SW.  This  is  very  distinctly  shown  along 
several  small  islands  on  the  south  shore. 

CURKENTS   IN   LAKE   MICHIGAN. 

A  fresh  wind  of  several  days'  duration  is  well  known  to  be  of  impor- 
tance to  the  generally  shallow  harbors  of  the  lake.  Such  a  wind  has  a 
well-recognized  eftect  on  the  depth  of  water  in  the  Chicago  river. 

As  a  result  of  experiments,  it  has  been  found  that  a  main  current 
exists  in  lake  Michigan,  setting  down  the  west  coast  about  10  miles  off- 
shore, sweeping  around  the  south  end,  and  stretching  to  the  northward 
close  to  the  east  coast.  Hugging  the  east  shore,  the  current  sweeps 
through  the  narrow  passage  east  of  the  Manitou  islands,  and  thence  by 
the  Strait  of  Mackinac  into  lake  Hnron,  forming  a  whirl  around  the 
Beaver  island  group  on  its  way  to  this  outlet. 

This  current  is  more  clearly  and  strongly  marked  on  the  east  shore 
than  elsewhere,  and  it  is  to  this  that  the  freedom  from  extensive  shoals 
and  barb  off  the  east  coast  is  due,  while  brojad  shallows  line  the  west 
coast. 

Between  the  margin  of  the  current  and  the  west  shore  there  are 
varying  currents,  sometimes  to  the  northward  and  sometimes  to  the 
southward. 

There  is  a  whirl  around  Beaver  island  in  a  direction  contrary  to  the 
hands  of  a  watch. 

The  average  speed  of  the  current  was  found  to  be  4  to  4^  miles  per 
day.  Through  Manitou  passage  the  velocity  was  from  6^  to  10  miles 
per  day. 

Private  observations,  taken  with  great  care,  showed  a  current  of 
from  36  to  96  miles  per  day  (IJ  to  4  miles  per  hour)  to  the  northward  off 
Manistee,  Mich. 

Some  confirmation  of  these  conclusions  can  be  obtained  from  the 
disposition  of  sand  spits,  shoals,  bars,  etc.,  the  piling  up  of  sand  against 
the  breakwaters,  and  the  directions  of  the  rivers  after  entering  the 
lake,  the  eastern  ones  trending  to  the  northward  and  western  ones  to 
the  southward. 

In  Green  and  Traverse  bays  the  currents  run  up  the  different  arms, 
but  very  little  is  known  about  them. 


in  the  drift 
as  deduced 
uf  1892  and 

a  consider- 
^tninded  on 
Deer  I'ark, 
south  shore 
sre  chopped 
r  Park. 

NE.  in  the 
[lown  along 


)e  of  impor- 
wind  has  a 
river, 
ain  current 

0  miles  off- 
northward 
ent  sweeps 
i  thence  by 
around  the 

east  shore 
isive  shoals 
le  the  west 

there  are 
imes  to  the 

rary  to  the 

\  miles  per 
to  10  miles 

current  of 
thward  oflf 

1  from  the 
md  against 
itering  the 
m  ones  to 


rent  arms, 


THE  PREVAILING  CURRENTS 
Of 

LAKE  HURON 


,-V!'.>^.¥.v«^«;«-i^!;ii^^'>VLi«¥i„^_.-,*a*iiiii5»MWiH 


i* 


ut 


iA 


lO* 


8<r 


I 


tovt 


THE  PREVAILING  CURKENtS 

IN 

LAJB:ES  ERIE  AND  ONTARIO 


8t 


•tf 


Tr 


CUBRENTS. 


OUBBENTS  IN  L^KB  HUBON. 

The  currents  in  lake  Hnron  differ  from  those  iu  lake  Michigan  in 
having  the  main  current  along  the  west  coast  instead  of  the  east  coast. 
This  current  along  the  west  coast  is  strong  some  distance  out,  and 
extends  the  length  of  the  lake,  turning  near  the  south  end  and  passing 
up  the  east  coast.  There  is  also  a  return  current  passing  not  far  south 
of  Manitoulin  island  and  at  some  distance  from  the  coast.  At  the  N  W. 
end  of  the  lake  there  are  also  signs  of  a  return  current. 

A  current  passes  into  Great  Saginaw  bay  and  a  current  which  some- 
times attains  a  strength  of  i  knot  an  hour  passes  into  Georgian  bay  by 
the  main  entrance. 

CUBRENTS  IN  LAKE  EBIE. 

A  general  northeasterly  surface  drift,  rather  more  marked  along  the 

south  coast.  ^    « T        r.  •  «. 

A  slight  return  current  along  the  north  coast  west  of  Long  1  omt 

island.  , 

A  series  of  eddies  among  the  islands  in  the  western  end,  very  van- 
able  in  character. 

This  lake  being  very  shallow,  and  its  axis  lying  nearly  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  prevailing  winds,  great  inequalities  of  level  may  be  noticed, 
depending  upon  the  strength  of  the  wind. 

The  velocity  of  the  main  current  is  about  6  miles  a  day  in  calm  weather, 
but  with  heavy  westerly  winds  it  has  been  known  to  run  at  the  rate  of 
10  miles  an  hour. 

OUBBBNTS  IN  LAKE  ONTABIO. 

The  general  surface  current  is  to  the  eastward,  strongest  along  the 
south  shore.  There  is  no  noticeable  return  current.  West  of  a  line 
joining  Niagara  and  Whitby  point  the  currents  are  variable.  There 
are  seldom  aiuy  great  fluctuations  of  level  in  this  lake.  The  velocity  of 
the  main  current  is  about  8  miles  a  day. 


CHAPTER  II. 

liAKE  SUPERIOR. 

On  a  map  published  by  the  Jesuits  in  1771  this  lake  was  called  "Lac 
Tracy,  or  Superieur,"  but  it  was  visited  by  Pere  Mesuard  as  early  as  lC(iO 

Lake  Superior  is  almost  everywhere  noble,  grand,  impressive,  m^estic, 
and  was  called  by  Crowfoot,  a  Blackfoot  chief, "  The  Brother  to  the  Sea." 

The  ascent  from  the  ocean  to  lake  Superior  does  not  average  more 
than  6  inches  to  the  mile,  and  even  this  ascent  is  not  markedly  notice- 
able till  we  proceed  westward. 

It  is  the  largest  known  lake  in  the  world,  the  United  States  Geo- 
logical Survey  giving  it  an  area  of  31,200  square  miles,  its  length  412 
nules,  maximum  breadth  1G7  miles,  maximum  depth  1,008  feet,  and  its 
height  above  the  sea  level  602  feet;  but  depths  have  been  found  as 
great  as  1,386  feet.  Its  shore  line  is  about  1,600  miles  in  length.  It 
receives  the  waters  of  200  rivers  and  drains  a  territory  of  r)3,000  square 
miles.  It  practically  belongs  to  the  United  States.  Although  Canada 
owns  the  north  shore,  it  owns  but  little  of  the  lake  itself. 

The  water  of  this  lake  is  so  clear  that  objects  may  be  easily  distin- 
guished at  a  depth  of  25  feet.    Mirages  are  frequent  and  very  deceiving. 

HABBOBS  OF  BEFUGE. 

Grand  Marais,  Minn.,  is  the  only  harbor  of  refuge  on  the  north 
shore  of  the  lake  between  Agate  bay  (Two  harbors)  and  the  interna- 
tional boundary  line. 

Eagle  harbor,  Mich.,  and  Grand  Marais  harbor,  Mich.,  both  on 
the  south  shore,  have  been  improved  so  as  to  make  them  harbors  of 
refuge. 

NAVIGATION. 

As  a  rule,  navigation  opens  the  middle  of  April  and  closes  the  middle 
of  December. 

The  two  great  evils  to  navigation  are  fogs  and  snow. 

There  are  no  tides  and  but  light  currents  for  the  master  to  contend 
with  on  the  lakes;  and  as  these  are  the  most  uncertain  of  all  elements 
for  the  navigator  to  calculate  and  allow  for,  it  reduces  yery  much  the 
per  cent  of  danger  in  lake  navigation;  hence  the  safe  navigation  of 
the  lakes  is  confined  to  a  correct  compass,  with  a  knowledge  and 


'■ 


W 


DANGERS — SOUTH   SHORE. 


filled  "Lac 
rlyaslGlIO. 
;,in{^estic, 
[)  the  Sea." 
irnge  more 
ily  notice- 
bates  Geo- 
longth  412 
ct,  and  its 
I  found  as 
eingtii.  It 
K)0  square 
^h  Canada 

ily  distin- 
(leceiving. 


the  north 
e  interna- 

,  both  on 
arbors  of 


le  middle 


contend 
elements 
Duch  the 
gation  of 
)dge  and 


frequent  use  on  the  part  of  the  master  of  the  azimuth  tables ;  the  precau- 
tion to  take  cross  bearings  of  prominent  points,  and  from  them  plotting 
the  position  frequently  on  the  chart;  also  the  familiar  use  of  the  chart 
in  laying  courses  and  correcting  the  same  for  variation  and  deviation. 

BANOEBS,  HOUTH  SHORE. 

From  Dnluth  to  Detour  station,  south  of  Sand  island,  the  south 
shore  of  the  main  can  be  approached  with  safety  to  one  mile. 

From  Detour  station  through  Apostles  islands  to  Chequame- 
gon  bay. — From  Detoui  point  to  Red  Cliff,  thence  to  Bayfield  and  to 
Chequamegon  bay,  there  is  deep  water  close  along  the  shore.  The  NW. 
shore  of  the  bay  is  steepto;  at  the  bottom  of  the  bay  the  12-foot  curve 
extends  off  1^  miles.    The  eastern  half  of  the  bay  is  shoal. 

Sand  island. — Slioal  water  extends  from  this  island  to  the  main  shore, 
and  the  passage  between  should  not  be  attempted  by  vessels  drawing 
more  than  6  feet.  There  is  a  shoal  about  a  mile  east  of  the  north  point 
of  the  island,  and  a  doubtful  shoal  is  shown  halfway  between  Sand 
isliind  and  Devils  island  lights. 

York  island. — A  spit  extends  from  this  island  ^  mile  southerly. 

Rocky  and  South  Twin  islands. — These  islands  are  connected  by 
shoal  water. 

North  Twin  island. — A  spit  extends  from  this  island  ^  mile  south- 
westerly. 

Outer  island. — Shoals  lie  one  mile  north  of  this  island. 

Michigan  island. — Two  dangerous  spots  lie  ^  mile  south  of  the  light- 
house on  this  island. 

Magdalene  island. -^A  spit  extends  from  the  NE.  end  of  this  island  ^ 
mile  easterly,  and  from  the  SW.  end  of  the  island  a  4-foot  spit  extends 
^  mile  southwesterly. 

From  La  Pointe  lighthouse  to  Fourteen-mile  point  the  coast  can 
be  approached  to  ^  mile,  but  at  Fourteen-mile  point  a  spit  extends  off 
over  i  mile. 

Caution. — Vessels  should  not  approach  the  shore  within  a  depth  of 
12  feet. 

From  Fourteen-mile  point  to  Keweenaw  point — At  one  mile 
If  E.  of  Portage  a  spit  extends  over  ^  mile  off  shore. 

From  Eagle  river  to  Eagle  harbor  a  succession  of  reefs  extend 
along  the  shore  northeasterly  from  j^  to  f  mile  distant. 

Maniton  island. — A  rocky  flat  extends  from  this  island  to  Gull  rock, 
as  also  i  mile  to  the  NW.  from  Manitou  island. 

Onll  rock.— A  shoal  of  12  feet  of  water  i  mile  S.  ^  E.  (S.  3°  E.) 
from  the  lighthouse.    It  is  marked  by  a  retl  spar  buoy. 

From  Keewenaw  point  to  Abbaye  point — At  ^  mile  south  of 
Keweenaw  point  is  a  3  foot  spot. 

Isabelle  point  is  surrounded  by  shcal  water  to  the  distance  of  a 
mile. 


'  -a  lawnMiwiiawi  iimiffig> 


8 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


Traverse  island. — Shoal  water  extends  from  the  SW.  end  of  this 
island  for  over  i  mile  southwesterly. 

Portage  entry  is  almost  illled  up  by  a  flat. 

Fequaming  point. — A  spit  extends  SW.  from  this  point. 

Abbaye  point. — A  dangerous  shoal  lies  1  (1^)  mile  east  of  this  point. 
Buoyed. 

Huron  River  point — A  large  shoal  extends  1^  (If)  miles  NE.  from 
this  point. 

Big  Bay  point. — A  dangerous  spit  with  only  8  feet  of  water  extends 
one  mile  to  the  northward  from  this  ])oint.    Buoyed. 

Little  Iron  river. — I'^rom  the  point  east  of  this  river  a  spit  extends 
^  mile  to  the  northward. 

Qranite  point. — On  a  line  between  this  point  and  the  northern  point 
of  I'resque  He  are  several  rocks  running  parallel  to  the  coast,  and 
Middle  island  is  in  this  line. 

Marquette  lighthouse. — East  of  this  lighthouse,  distant  1  (1^)  mile, 
are  rocks  and  shoal  water. 

Shot  point  and  Laughing  Fish  point — A  spit  extends  ^  mile  north- 
erly from  Shot  point.  A  spit  also  extends  J  mile  northerly  from 
Laughing  Fish  point. 

Train  island  has  shoal  water  extending  from  it  about  a  mile  to  the 
northward  and  also  to  the  westward.  Between  this  point  and  the  main- 
land are  several  shoals. 

Train  point — Shoals  also  extend  a  mile  from  Train  i>oint  to  the 
NW.  and  for  nearly  If  (2)  miles  northeasterly  toward  Wood  island. 

Wood  island. — Shoal  water  extends  ^  mile  from  the  north  point  of 
this  island,  along  its  western  side,  and  toward  Williams  island. 

Williams  island. — There  are  numerous  rocks  and  sand  spits  between 
the  south  point  of  this  island  and  the  main  i?hore  to  the  south  on  which 
there  are  but  8  and  10  feet  of  water,  m.aking  it  dangerous  for  vessels 
drawing  over  8  feet  to  attempt  the  passage  between  the  island  and  the 
shore. 

Sandy  point — From  this  point,  opposite  the  beacon  on  Grand 
island,  a  spit  extends  North  and  NW.  for  J  mile,  with  but  5  feet  of 
water  over  it. 

Point  au  Sable. — A  small  spit  extends  out  about  ^  mile. 

'Isle  Royale  and  vicinity. — There  are  many  detached  rocky  shoals 
lying  SW.  and  N W.  of  the  Rock  of  Ages,  distant  IJ  (IJ)  miles.  Wash 
ington  island  is  surrounded  on  the  South,  SW.,  and  NB.  by  rocky  shoals 
which  must  be  carefully  looked  out  for  in  making  Washington  and  Grace 
harbors.  Siskiwit  bay  has  a  double  set  of  islets  stretching  for  7  miles 
in  the  general  direction  of  the  south  shore,  connected  ^i  ^..^ken  reefs 
and  having  also  reefs  outside  of  the  islets.  Vessels  shouiu  not  attempt 
any  of  the  channels  between  these  islands.  The  north  shore  of  Isle 
Royale  can  be  approached  with  safety  to  f  mile.  On  the  NW.  coast 
from  McCargoe  cove  to  Blake  point  the  shore  should  not  be  approached 
too  close.    Off  the  SW.  end  of  Amygdaloid  island  there  are  rocks  i  mile 


DANGERS — NORTH  SHORE. 


9 


end  of  this 

f  ihi8  point. 

es  NE.  from 

iter  extends 

spit  extends 

rthern  point 
)  coast,  and 

1 1  (li)  mile, 

J  mile  north- 
rtherly  from 

).  mile  to  the 
tnd  the  main- 
point  to  the 
)d  island, 
orth  point  of 
)land. 

ipits  between 

ath  on  which 

for  vessels 

and  and  the 

on  Grand 
but  5  feet  of 


rocky  shoals 
liles.  Wash 
rocky  shoals 
on  and  Grace 
g  for  7  miles 
^..iken  reefs 

not  attempt 
shore  of  Isle 
e  NW.  coast 

approached. 

rocks  i  mile 


distant,  and  from  the  NE.  end  is  a  chain  of  small  islands  and  interlying 
shoals  and  rocks  terminate<l  by  a  4-foot  shoal  lying  ft  mile  ENE.  from 
the  Canoe  rocks.  East  of  Blake  point,  f  mile,  is  a  4-foot  patch,  for  which 
a  sharp  lookont  shonld  be  kept.  Abont  midway  between  Blake  point 
and  Passage  island  is  a  shoal  dangerous  to  deep-draft  vessels.  On  the 
east  coast  from  Blake  point  to  Menagerie  island  there  are  no  outlying 
dangers  witii  the  exception  of  a  4-foot  patch  ENE.  i  mile  from  the  light- 
house on  Menagerie  island.  From  Menagerie  island  going  scnith  a  clear- 
ance of  at  least  a  mile  should  be  given  the  land.  This  will  keep  clear 
of  several  outlying  patches  having  from  .'J  to  18  feet  of  water  on  them, 
with  the  deeper  water  close-to. 

Passage  island  is  apparently  clear  outside  of  ^  mile,  but  all  of  these 
islands  should  be  approached  with  care,  as  from  their  conformation  there 
may  be  pinnacle  rocks  heretofore  undiscovered  by  the  surveyors. 

Gull  island. — There  is  a  reef  ^  mile  south  of  Gull  island,  and  a  dan- 
gerous 9-foot  spot  2  (2^)  miles  WNW.  from  the  island. 

Batteau  rock  (Canadian).— East  of  Batteau  rock,  ^  mile,  is  also  a 
dangerous  patch  with  3  feet  of  water  thereon. 

DANGERS,   NORTH  SHORE. 

From  Dnlnth  going  north  the  coast  can  be  approached  to  a  mile. 

Qranite  point. — Oft'  this  point  is  the  isle  aux  Boches,  with  shoal 
water  near  and  between  it  and  the  shore. 

Encampment  island  is  connected  with  the  mainland  by  a  shoal 
extending  to  the  West  and  NW. 

Gooseberry  river. — Off  this  river  is  a  dangerous  reef  of  small  area, 
^  mile  from  shore,  with  12^  feet  in  the  shoalest  spot  aud  deep  water  all 
around  it.    It  is  a  dangerous  obstruction  to  vessels  coasting. 

Two  Islands  river. — Off  this  river  are  two  rocks  or  islands,  which 
should  be  approached  with  caution. 

Rock  island,  near  the  entrance  to  Good  Harbor  bay,  should  also  be 
approached  with  care. 

Bmle  river. — One  mile  west,  a  little  south,  from  Brule  river  are  two 
rocks,  one  above  water,  the  other  awash. 

Grand  Portage  bay. — From  the  west  point  of  this  bay  to  Pigeon 
point  are  several  outlying  islands  and  rocks.  Wauswaugoning  bay  is 
comparatively  clear,  however. 

Pigeon  point. — From  this  point  along  the  north  and  east  coasts  to 
Gros  Cap  vessels  should  give  the  coast  good  clearance  until  accurate 
surveys  of  this  practically  unsnrveyed  region  can  be  made,  the  dangers 
specially  warned  against  being: 

Victoria  islands,  rocks  to  the  southwesfward.  ( 

Knob  island,  rocks  to  the  southwestward. 

Pie  island,  rocks  to  the  southeastward. 

Thunder  cape,  rocks  to  the  southeastward! 

Porphyry  point,  rocks  to  the  westward  and  the  shoalc  in  center  of 
Black  bay  entrance. 


10 


LAKE  RUPEBIOR. 


Slate  islands  (Canadian)  should  be  approached  with  care,  especially 
on  the  North  and  NE.  coasts,  a  shoal  spot,  10  feet,  lying  1^  miles  off 
tho  north  coast,  and  several  rocks  the  same  distance  off  the  NE.  coast. 

Michipicoten  island  (Canadian)  is  surrounded  with  outlying  shoals 
and  rocks,  and  should  be  approached  with  great  caution. 

Caribou  island  (Canadian)  has  shoals  out  from  the  north,  west,  and 
south  sides  from  2  to  4  n  iles.     It  is  well  to  give  this  island  a  good  berth. 

Leach  island  (Canadian),  Lizard  island  (Canadian),  Montreal 
island  (Canadian). — These  islands  should  be  a])proached  with  extreme 
caution,  especially  on  the  inshore  sides,  where  there  are  numerous  out- 
lying rocks. 

Montreal  shoal. — On  a  line  drawn  from  the  west  end  of  Montreal 
island  to  point  aux  Mines,  and  halfway  between  the  two,  is  this  very 
dangerous  shoal,  ^  mile  in  diameter,  having  but  5  feet  of  water  on  it. 

Mica  shoal,  11  feet  water,  is  4^  (5,^)  miles  northward  of  Ooppermine 
point  and  about  4  {i-i%)  miles  offshore. 

Coppermine  point  (Canadian)  has  many  rocks  near  the  point  and 
to  the  northward. 

Pancake  and  Outer  Pancake  shoals,  SE.  of  Pancake  point,  are 
dangerous  shoals  and  should  be  avoided.  Pancake  shoal  has  only  4  to 
6  feet  water  over  it  and  is  marked  by  a  bell  buoy. 

Sandy  islands  (Canadian)  should  not  be  approached  within  2  (2^) 
miles  on  the  north,  west,  and  south  coasts,  except  by  vessels  of  small 
draft. 

saw.  from  Sandy  islands  4J  (5)  miles  and  N.  by  E.  from  Parisian 
island  2  (2^)  miles  is  a  shoal  spot  having  a  least  depth  of  8  feet  thereon. 

Parisian  island  (Canadian)  should  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  one 
mile  on  account  of  outlying  rocks. 

Superior  bay.— At  the  western  extremity  the  shores  of  lake  Supe- 
rior converge  under  a  sharp  angle.  At  a  point  in  the  angle  where  the 
opening  is  about  0  (10,^)  miles  wide  a  low  sandy  point  extends  across 
and  incloses  a  great  natural  harbor,  the  bay  of  Superior.  Only  one 
natural  break  occurs  in  it,  and  here  the  waters  of  the  St.  Louis  and 
Nemadji  rivers  effect  an  outlet  to  the  lake.  The  outlet  is  near  the 
southern  extremity. 

Something  less  than  a  mile  inside  this  natural  breakwater,  where  the 
lake  shore  lines  converge  to  an  opening  of  about  5  miles,  occurs  another 
spit  lying  substantially  parallel  to  it.  Here  again  the  opening  is  near- 
est the  southern  end.  It  furnishes  an  outlet  for  tho  St.  Louis  river. 
The  angular  opening  of  the  lake  behind  this  spit  is  a  large  sheet  of 
water  called  St.  Louis  bay,  the  upper  portion  of  which  is  the  estuary 
of  tho  St.  Louis  river,  which  river  in  this  locality  forms  the  boundary 
between  the  states  of  Minnesota  and  Wisconsin. 

The  exterior  formation  making  out  from  the  north  shore  is  called 
Minnesota  point.  It  is  nbont  G^  (7^)  miles  long.  That  proceeding 
from  the  south  shore  is  called  Wisconsin  point,  and  is  nearly  2^  {2-^) 


re,  especially 
;  14  miles  off 
le  NE.  coast, 
tlying  sboals 

th,  west,  anil 
a  good  bertli. 
i),  Montreal 
with  extreme 
umerous  out- 

of  Montreal 
),  is  this  very 
rvater  on  it. 
f  Coppermine 

the  point  and 

bke  point,  are 
has  only  4  to 

within  2  (2^) 
ssels  of  small 

rom  Parisian 
1  feet  thereon. 
)f  at  least  one 

of  lake  Sape- 
gle  where  the 
xteuds  across 
or.  Only  one 
St.  Louis  and 
is  near  the 

ter,  where  the 
iccurs  another 
ening  is  near- 
Louis  river, 
arge  sheet  of 
s  the  estnary 
the  boundary 

lore  is  called 
it  proceeding 
early  2^  (2-i%) 


DULUTH  HARBOR.  11 

miles  long.    The  two  have  widths  varying  from  200  to  1,     '  feet,  and 
rise  but  a  few  feet  aiiove  the  level  of  the  lake. 

MINNKSOTA. 

Dnlnth  harbor. — This  harbor  is  said  to  be  the  best  for  entrance  of 
any  on  the  chain  of  lakes.  It  is  in  reality  an  artificial  harbor,  having 
originally  been  closed  to  the  lake,  and  only  accessible  by  way  of  the 
opening  formed  by  the  Nemadji  and  St.  Louis  rivers. 

Improvementa — 1.  A  cut  through  Minnesota  point,  the  banks  being 
revetted  with  crib  and  timber  piers.    This  is  known  as  the  canal. 

2.  The  harbor,  inside  the  canal,  of  over  100  acres. 

3.  A  channel  200  feet  wide  along  the  east  side  of  Bices  jMint,  parallel 
to  the  harbor  line  and  150  feet  from  it,  with  a  curve  250  to  300  feet 
wide  around  the  end  of  Eices  point  to  the  junction  with  the  St.  Louis 
river  channel  at  the  gate. 

4.  A  channel  along  the  north  shore  of  St.  Lonis  bay,  200  feet  wide 
and  parallel  and  150  feet  distant  from  the  harbor  line,  with  wide 
curves. 

January,  189G:  A  minimum  depth  of  18  feet  is  maintained  in  the 
canal  entrance  and  16  feet  in  the  older  (and  greater)  portion  of  the  har- 
bor basin.  The  channel  along  Bices  point  leading  to  West  Superior 
has  a  width  of  200  feet,  wider  in  the  bends,  and  a  depth  of  16  feet. 
The  north  shore  channel  of  St.  Louis  bay,  which  extends  from  the 
natural  deep  channel  at  Bices  point  to  the  deep  channel  at  Grassy 
point  and  the  West  Dulnth  mills,  has  a  width  of  185  feet  on  the 
straight  portions  and  250  feet  or  more  in  the  bends,  and  a  least  depth 
of  15  feet.  A  branch  channel  runs  Arom  the  last-named  channel  toward 
the  City  Wharf  at  Twenty-first  avenue  west,  having  a  width  of  75  feet, 
depth  of  15  feet,  and  length  of  3,500  feet. 

The  two  principal  channels  above  mentioned  are,marked  and  lighted 
by  range  beacons.    All  depths  given  are  for  low  water. 

Latest  date  of  opening  harbor,  June  12, 1861. 

Earliest  date  of  closing  harbor,  November  9, 1859. 

ObstmctioiL — ^There  is  a  bad  obstruction  in  Dnlnth  harbor,  in 
the  shape  of  a  sunken  pier,  called  the  Dy.ke,  which  is  a  menace  to 
navigation. 

Bnoys. — ^Bed,  even-numbered,  and  black,  odd-nnmbered  buoys  mark 
the  channels.  A  tag  makes  a  daily  inspection  to  keep  the  buoys  in 
position. 

Current. — There  is  no  perceptible  current  fh>m  the  St.  Louis  river 
through  the  canal,  but  an  ebb  and  flow  of  water,  which  seems  to  be  due 
to  oscillations  of  the  lake  surface,  as  they  change  direction  too  fre- 
quently to  be  caused  by  tidal  action.  When  heavy  winds  prevail  from 
the  NE.  the  water  is  forced  to  this  end  of  the  lake,  raising  the  wat^r  in 
Superior  and  Duluth  bays,  and  causing  a  very  strong  outward  set 
through  the  Duluth  canal.  This  current  meeting  the  incoming  waves, 
renders  navigation  at  such  times  very  dangerous. 


It 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


PUoU.— The  captains  of  all  tugs  are  pilots,  and  pilotage  is  incladed 
in  the  towing.  Kates  vary  from  $5  to  $100,  according  to  tonnage  and 
diHtance. 

Lights.— On  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  of  the  canal  is  a  light- 
house, from  whicli  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light  visible  at  a  distance  of 
11^  (1.3)  miloa.  This  liglit,  in  connection  with  a  flashing  red  light 
every  six  seconds,  on  the  inner  end  of  the  same  pier,  and  1,165  feet 
SW.  J  W.  (8.  48°  W.)  from  it,  furnishes  a  range  to  guide  vessels 
through  the  canal.    This  light  is  visible  13^  (15^)  miles. 

Cantion.— Give  the  end  of  the  south  pier  a  berth  of  at  least  20  feet, 
to  avoid  the  stone  riprapping. 

Life-saving  station  on  Minnesota  point,  ^  mile  south  of  the  canal. 

Ohio  Central  coal  dock  light.— A  fixed  red  light,  shown  from  an 
upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles,  and  13  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  is  in 
12  feet  of  water,  southerly  of  the  easterly  corner  of  the  Ohio  Central 
Coal  Dock,  and  marks  the  turning  point  into  the  chauue?'  marked  by 
the  liico  Point  range. 

Rice  Point  range.— The  front  liglit  is  white,  and  is  ehown  from  an 
upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles,  and  13  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It 
stands  in  7  feet  of  water,  southeasterly  from  Bice  point. 

The  rear  light  is  red,  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles  and 
18  feet  above  the  lake  level,  510  feet  S8E.  §  E.  (8.  27°  E.)  from  the 
fh)nt  light. 

These  two  lights  in  line  guide  through  the  dredged  channel,  east  of 
Bice  point,  from  the  Ohio  Central  Coal  Docl  Voacon  to  the  turn  round 
Bice  i)oint  to  the  southwestward. 

N.  B. — The  rear  light  of  this  range  is  also  the  rear  light  of  Connors 
Point  range. 

Connors  Point  range. — The  front  light  is  white,  in  7  feet  of  water, 
southeasterly  from  Bice  point,  and  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster 
of  piles,  and  13  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light  is  510  feet  NE.  by  E.  (N.  56°  E.)  from  the  front  light. 

The  two  lights  in  line  guide  through  the  dredged  channel  past  Bice 
and  Connors  points  to  the  Northern  Pacific  Bailroad  bridge  at  West 
Sui>erior,  crossing  the  South  channel. 

Note. — Wishing  to  make  the  North  channel  from  the  above  range,  a 
course  of  NW.  |  W.  (N.  64°  W.)  must  be  headdd  just  before  the 
Suiierior  Bay  channel  upper  light  and  the  front  light  of  the  St.  Louis 
Bay  North  channel  east  range  come  in  line.  This  course  will  carry  to 
the  Northern  Pacific  Bailroad  bridge,  crossing  the  North  channel. 

North  Channel  east  range  (St.  Louis  bay). — ^The  front  light  is 
white,  in  7  feet  of  water,  at  the  easterly  end  of  the  North  channel  and 
westerly  of  Bice  point.  It  is  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of 
piles  13  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light  is  also  white,  600  feet  NE.  ^  E.  (N.  46°  E.)  from  the 
front  light.  It  is  in  7  feet  of  water,  and  shown  from  an  upright  on  a 
cluster  of  piles  18  feet  above  the  lake  level. 


DULUTH — ROUTES. 


18 


is  incladed 
innage  and 

is  a  light- 
listanee  of 
f  red  light 

1,165  feet 
ide  vessels 

iast  20  feet, 

['  the  canal,     i 
ivn  from  an 
b1.    It  is  in 
hio  Oentral 
marked  by 

■xn  from  an 
e  level.    It 

of  piles  and 
a.)  from  the 

inel,  east  of 
I  turn  round 

of  Connors 

et  of  water, 
on  a  cluster 

firont  light. 
)l  past  Bice 
ge  at  West 

[)ve  range,  a 
before  the 
le  St.  Louis 
ill  carry  to 
lannel. 
tnt  light  is 
channel  and 
a  cluster  of 

3.)  from  the 
Ipright  on  a 


North  Channel  weat  range  (8t  Louis  bay.)— The  rront  li^lit  is 
Mrhite,  13  feet  above  the  liilte  level,  and  Hh<»wii  from  an  upright  on  u 
cluster  of  piles  standing  in  about  7  feet  of  water. 

The  rear  light  is  white,  18  feet  above  the  lake  level,  SCO  feet  SW.  j^ 
W.  (8.  46°  W.)  from  the  front  light.  It  i»  shown  trom  an  upright  on  a 
cluster  of  piles  standing  in  7  feet  of  water. 

These  lights  in  range  ahead,  and  the  East  Range  lights  in  line  astern, 
guide  through  the  North  channel  from  ott'  Hice  point  nearly  up  to 
Grassy  point. 

N.  B. — The  rear  light  of  this  range  is  also  tlie  roar  light  of  the  South 
Ohannel  range. 

South  Channel  range  (St  Louis  bay).— The  front  light  in  wliite,  Kt 
feet  above  the  lake  level,  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles 
standing  in  0  feet  of  water. 

The  rear  light  is  960  feet  W8W.  J  W.  {8.70°  W.)  fi-om  the  front 
light. 

These  lights  in  line  guide  through  the  dredged  channel  on  the  south 
side  of  St.  liOnis  bay  trom  just  above  the  railroad  bridge  oft'  West 
Superior  to  the  westward. 

The  clusters  of  piles  referred  to  above  are  all  square,  black,  pyram- 
idal, surmounted  by  a  wooden  platform  and  box  with  an  upright  of 
natural  color. 

Fog  signal — In  connection  with  the  outer  pier  lighthouse  is  a  10- 
inch  steam  fog  whistle,  which,  in  thick  or  foggy  weather,  gives  a  blast 
every  five  second,  with  a  silent  interval  of  thirty  seconds. 

BOUTEB. 

I>nluth  to  St  Marys  river. — From  Duluth  lighthouse  steer  ENE. 
i  E.  (S.  70°  E.)  for  60  (69)  miles,  when  Devil  island  should  bear  South, 
thence  steer  ENE.  f  E.  (N.  76°  E.)  for  109i  (125if^)  miles;  this  should 
bring  a  vessel  in  sight  of  Eagle  Harbor  lighthouse  by  day,  or  light  at 
night.  When  the  lighthouse  bears  South  distant  5  (5|)  miles,  change 
course  to  East  and  continue  in  this  direction  for  23^  (27^)  miles,  until 
the  lighthouse  on  eastern  end  of  Manitou  island  bears  South,  when 
shape  course  ESE.  (8. 68°  E.)  for  118  (135f )  miles;  this  should  bring  a 
vessel  2  (2^)  miles  north  of  Whiteflsh  point.  The  point  can  be  rounded 
at  this  distance,  and  when  Whiteflsh  Foint  light  bears  West,  a  SE.  $  8. 
(8.  37°  E.)  course  tor  20  (23)  miles  should  carry  a  vessel  midway 
between  Iroquois  point  and  Gros  Cap;  then  follow  directions  for  St. 
Marys  river. 

Dtiluth  to  Ontonagon,  passing  through  Apostle  islands.— From 
Duluth  lighthouse  steer  ENE.  J  E.  (N.  73°  E.)  for  52  (60)  miles,  when 
the  passage  between  York  and  Baspberry  islands  will  open  out;  thence 
steer  to  the  southeastward,  keeping  about  in  mid-channel  and  passing 
Baspberry  Island  light  at  a  distance  of  ^  mile.  When  the  8W.  point  of 
Oak  island  bears  North,  change  course  to  eastward,  passing  north  of 


mtmmmtmumi) 


14 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


HermitH  iHlaiul  and  midway  between  Magdulouc  uii  tlio  south  and 
Stockton  and  Michigan  islands  on  the  north,  remembering'  Mio  Hhoals 
oft'  NE.  ])oiiit  of  Magdalene  and  south  shore  of  Michigan  ishuulH. 
When  Michigan  Island  lighthouse  hears  North,  distant  not  less  tlian  1^ 
(IJj)  miles,  change  course  to  E.  J  N.  (N.  87°  E.)  and  continue  on  this 
course  for  40  (5(1^^^)  miles,  which  should  bring  a  vessel  oft'  Ontonagon. 

Dnluth  to  Ontonagon,  passing  north  of  Apostle  islands. — I'rom 
Duluth  lighthouse  steer  ENE.  ^  E.  (N.  70°  E.)  for  00  (69)  miles,  until 
Devil  island  bears  South,  distant  about  one  mile,  when  steer  East  for 
13J^  (l^i)  miles,  until  the  NE.  poiutof  Outer  island  bears  South,  distant 
about  3  (3i)  miles;  thence  ESE.  ^  E.  (S.  73°  E.)  for  40  (53)  miles  should 
bring  a  vessel  oft  Ontonagon. 

Duluth  to  port  Arthur  and  Silver  Islet  landing.— From  Duluth 
lighthouse  steer  NE.  by  E.  (N.  56°  E.)  for  149  (171A)  miles,  until  the 
highest  peak  on  the  west  end  of  Pie  island  bears  NW.  ij  N.  (N.  37° 
W.),  distant  OJ  (7i)  miles,  when  steer  NE.  J  N.  (N.  37°  E.)  for  10 
(11^)  miles,  till  Thunder  cape  bears  North,  thence  shape  course  for  Port 
Arthur  or  Silver  Islet  landing. 

WISCONSIN. 


Superior  City  is  5  (6f)  miles  SE.  of  Duluth.  The  natural  chan- 
nel connecting  Superior  bay  with  lake  Superior  is  at  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  bay.  It  was  obstructed  by  a  bar,  but  has  been 
improved  by  dredging  and  building  piers,  and  now  a  depth  of  15  feet 
is  maintained. 

Superior  bay  is  quite  shallow  except  where  the  waters  of  the  St. 
Louis  river  form  through  it  a  narrow  channel.  Harbor  room  for  large 
modern  vessels  has  to  be  provided  by  dredging. 

The  channel  between  the  piers  makes  an  abrupt  bend  at  the  point 
where  it  enters  Superior  bay,  consequently  a  vessel  entering  during  a 
severe  storm  has  great  difticnlty  in  following  this  channel.  Tliis  can 
not  be  remedied  because  the  Nemadji  river  enters  the  bay  so  near  the 
entrance  that  the  bar  which  the  river  maintains  will  not  permit  a 
change  in  location  of  the  channel. 

The  Nemadji  river  is  navigable  for  tugs  and  vessels  of  light  draft 
for  4  (4§)  miles  from  its  mouth. 

The  channel  in  Superior  bay  has  neither  the  directness  nor  width  to 
permit  vessels  to  reach  Oonners  point  in  safety  without  the  assistance 
of  1^  tag  or  pilot;  and  in  rounding  from  the  entrance  into  Quebec 
channel  in  a  high  wind  a  tug  is  very  necessary. 

Buoys. — Bed  even-numbered  and  black  odd-numbered  buoys  mark 
the  channels.  A  tug  makes  daily  inspection  to  keep  the  buoys  in 
position. 

Light. — There  is  a  fixed  white  light  50  feet  from  end  of  the  outer  end 
of  the  south  pier,  which  is  visible  12^  (14^)  miles. 


Konth  and 
the  hIiouIh 
111  iBlnudH. 
OBB  than  1^ 
lue  on  tUiH 
[)ntoiiagoii. 
ids.— I'roin 
iiiilcH,  until 
jer  I?iii8t  tor 
utli,  distant 
uiloH  should 

:om  Duluth 
}.Sj  until  the 
{  N.  (N.  37° 
5  B.)  for  10 
irse  for  Port 


atural  chan- 
,he  southern 
lit  has  been 
th  of  15  feet 

rs  of  the  St. 
lom  for  large 

at  the  point 
ing  during  a 
This  can 
BO  near  the 
ot  permit  a 

f  light  draft 

nor  -width  to 
le  assistance 
into  Quebec 

buoys  mark 
ihe  buoys  in 

;he  outer  end 


8UPEEI0R   BAy — LiaOTS. 


IS 


Fog  signal — AOinuli  steam  wiiistlti  in  on  the  outor  end  of  the  Houth 
pier,  aiHl  souiids  a  bhiHt  of  tlirut)  seconds  followed  by  a  silent  interval 
of  twelve  seconds  during  thick  weather. 

Superior  Bay  entrance  range. — The  front  light  is  white,  18  fe^t 
above  tli<  lake  level  and  shown  from  a  white  wooden  upright,  just 
inside  the  southeasterly  entrance  to  Superior  bay  and  on  Wiscjnsin 
I>oint. 

The  rear  light  is  white,  24  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  shown  from 
a  white  wooden  upright,  320  feet  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  58°  W.)  from 
the  front  li|i..t. 

This  range  in  line  guides  through  the  natural  channel  from  lake 
Superior  into  the  southeasterly  end  of  Superior  bay. 

Superior  Bay  range — The  front  light  is  white,  IG  feet  above  the 
lake  level  on  a  white  wooden  upright  on  Wisconsin  ]>oiut,  close  to  the 
west  end  of  the  south  pier. 

The  rear  light  is  white,  21  feet  above  the  lake  level,  on  a  wooden 
upright,  290  feet  SE.  ^  Vj.  (S.  5:}°  E.)  from  the  front  light. 

This  range  in  line  guides  up  Superior  bay  from  inside  the  entrance, 
past  the  old  dock  on  Minnesota  point,  to  the  entrance  to  the  dredged 
channel  to  Quebec  dock. 

Quebec  Channel  light. — A  Axed  red  light,  13  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  lake,  is  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles  standing  in  7 
feet  of  water  in  the  west  angle  formed  by  the  intersection  of  the  main 
channel  with  the  dredged  Quebec  channel. 

It  marks  the  entrance  to  Quebec  channel. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  lower  light— A  fixed  white  light,  13  feet 
above  the  Jake  level,  is  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles 
standing  in  13  feet  of  water  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  main  channel,  and 
3,500  feet  NW.  from  Quebec  Channel  light. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  lower  middle  light — A  fixed  white  light, 
13  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  an  upright  ou  a  cluster  of 
piles  standing  in  15  feet  of  water  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  main  channel, 
and  3,800  feet  NW.  f  W.  (N.  63°  W.)  from  the  lower  light. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  upper  middle  light — A  fixed  white  light, 
13  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of 
piles  standing  in  li  feet  of  water  on  the  NE.  side  9f  the  main  channel 
and  4,700  feet  NW.  f  W.  (N.  55°  W.)  from  the  lower  middle  light  and 
about  midway  of  the  middle  ground. 

Superior  Bay  Channel  upper  light— A  fixed  white  light,  13  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  an  upright  on  a  cluster  of  piles 
standing  in  12  feet  of  water  on  the  NE.  end  of  the  middle  ground  and 
NE.  side  of  the  main  channel.  It  is  2,000  feet  NW.  from  the  upper 
middle  light. 

All  the  above  lights,  excepting  the  pier  headlight,  are  tubular  lan- 
terns, and  the  clusters  of  piles  are  square,  black,  pyramidal,  surmounted 
by  a  wooden  platform  and  box  with  an  upright  of  natural  color. 


IG 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


St  Louis  bay.— Xortlmest  from  a  line  joining  Rice  point  and  Oon- 
110T8  point  lies  St.  Louis  bay,  a  continuation  of  Superior  bay  and  the 
outlet  of  the  St.  Louis  river,  which  enters  it  at  Grassy  point 

West  Duluth  occupies  the  north  shore  and  West  Superior  is  now 
stretching  up  in  the  southern  side. 

Eight  miles  in  a  direct  line  from  Grassy  point  is  Fond  du  La«,  but  by 
the  river  it  is  15  miles.  There  is  very  little  fall  to  the  river  except  for 
the  upper  mile.  * 

This  portion  of  the  river  is  now  being  improved. 

Pilots.— The  same  as  mentioned  under  Duluth. 

Dry  dock.-There  is  a  dry  dock  at  West  Superior,  500  feet  over  all 
with  a  depth  over  sill  of  20  feet.  ' 

Routes.— The  routes  from  Superior  to  the  entrance  of  St.  Marys 
river,  as  also  to  the  different  ports  on  the  lakes,  are  practically  the  same 
as  from  Duluth.  '       r  j     « «»uic 


SOUTH  SHORE  OF  LAKE  SUPERIOR. 

Coast— The  coast  from  Superior  to  the  NE.  is  low,  although  bold 
and  there  are  no  refuges  from  the  winds  from  the  North  and  NE  Bark 
point  with  Bark  bay  36  (41^)  miles  from  Superior,  offers  protection  from 
all  westerly  winds.  The  bay  is  2J  (2^)  miles  deep  northeasterly  and 
southwesterly.  On  the  east  side  of  Bark  bay  a  small,  though  hieh 
point  separates  it  from  Siskiwit  bay.  Both  of  these  bays  affbrd  protec- 
tion from  southerly  winds. 

Prom  this  point  vessels  of  all  but  very  light  draft  must  run  outside 
ot  Band  island  on  account  of  the  bar  connecting  Sand  island  with  the 
mainland,  which  has  but  6  or  6  feet  of  water  on  it  at  extreme  low  water 
Passing  from  Siskiwit  bay  outside  of  Sand  island  give  Eagle  and  Steam- 
boat islands  a  good  berth  en  account  of  the  shoal  spots  which  surround 
and  connect  them. 

Sand  island  is  the  most  western  of  the  Apostle  group,  which  group 
comprises  19  islands,  extending  29  miles  ENE.  and  WSW.  This  island 
can  be  approached  close-to  on  the  nortli  and  west  coast,  but  great  care 
should  be  exercised  when  on  the  South  and  SE.  oidc2.  On  its  extreme 
north  point  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  (16)  miles  in  clear  weather  is 
on  top  of  an  octagonal,  red  sandstone  tower,  which  rises  from  a  sand- 
stone  building. 

Vessels  taking  the  outside  route  continue  their  course  to  the  NNE 
passing  north  of  Devils  island.  '  '' 

Devils  island.— This  island  is  the  extreme  northern  one  of  the 
group,  and  on  its  northern  point  is  a  lighthouse. 

u-ft^JT^  ^^^^  ""^^  "*^^*'  ^'^^*''®  ^^1  (13)  """^s  in  clear  weather,  is 
exhibited  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal,  open-framework  tower,  the 
upper  part  of  which  is  inclosed. 


point  and  Con- 
or bay  aud  the 
point, 
uperior  is  now 

du  Lac,  but  by 
iver  except  for 


K)  feet  over  all, 

i  of  St.  Marys 
ically  the  same 


although  bold, 
,ndNE.  Bark 
)rotection  from 
theasterly  and 
,  though  high, 
3  aiibrd  protec- 

ist  run  outside 
stand  with  the 
Bme  low  water. 
?le  and  Steam- 
'hich  surround 

>,  which  group 
^  This  island 
but  great  care 
>n  its  extreme 

lar  weather,  is 
from  a  sand- 
to  the  NNE., 

n  one  of  the 

ar  weather,  is 
)i'k  tower,  the 


SOUTH   SHORE — WASHBURN. 


n 


Fog  BignaL— Five  hundred  feet  NW.  of  the  lighthouse  is  a  10-inch 
steam  whistle,  which  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds'  duration,  followed 
by  a  silent  interval  of  ten  seconds,  then  a  blast  of  five  seconds'  dura- 
tion, followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  forty  seconds.  This  occurs  every 
minute  during  thick  weather. 

Continuing  the  outside  course,  vessels  would  here  change  their  course 
to  about  East  and  pass  to  the  north  of  Outer  island. 

Outer  island  is  the  northeastern  of  the  group.  A  shoal  lies  one 
mile  north  of  this  island.  About  the  middle  of  its  uorthei'u  shore  is  a 
lighthouse. 

Light — ^A  Hashing  white  light  every  ninety  seconds,  visible  17^  (20) 
miles  in  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  from  the  top  of  a  conical,  white,  brick 
tower,  which  is  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  a  brick  dwelling. 

Fog  signaL — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  eight  seo 
ends,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  fifty-two  seconds. 

From  Outer  island  vessels  can  shape  their  course  to  any  ports  to  the 
eastward. 

Sand  Island  light  marks  the  turning  point  for  vessels  bound  to  Bay- 
field or  Ashland,  as  also  for  those  taking  the  route  through  the  Aj^ostle 
group  and  bound  for  ports  farther  to  the  eastwiu*d. 

It  is  not  advisable  to  pass  to  the  west  of  York  island,  as  slioal  water 
extends  ofi"  its  SW.  and  South  shores.  Vessels  therefore  pass  to  the 
NE.  of  the  island  and  keep  close  to  Baspberry  island. 

Raa^/^tenry  island. — Pass  to  the  southward  of  this  island,  on  the 
extreni'-  SW.  point  of  which  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  minute, 
is  visible  14j^  (16^)  miles  in  clear  weather.  It  is  exhibited  from  the  top 
of  a  square  tower  on  a  white  frame  building. 

All  through  these  islands  the  shores  can  generally  be  approached 
close-to,  but  by  keeping  an  approximate  mid-channel  course  vessels 
will  be  sure  of  good  water. 

The  south  shore  of  Stockton  island  affords  good  anchorage  from 
northerly  winds,  and  all  the  larger  islands  from  westerly  winds. 

Passing  between  Oak  island  and  Bed  Cliff,  both  uf  which  are  com- 
paratively high,  vessels  bound  through  the  West  channel  keep  a  mid- 
channel  course  until  off  Bayfield. 

Bayfield  is  an  open  roadstead,  with  deep  water  up  to  the  docks. 
"While  protected  from  westerly  gales,  during  NE,  gales  vessels  have  to 
run  under  La  Pointe,  Magdalene  island,  for  anchorage. 

Bunning  south  from  Bayfield  the  coast  is  bold  and  can  be  approached 
close-to.    Bounding  Houghton  point  the  town  of  W^ashburn  is  seen. 

Washburn. — Here  are  two  docks  extending  into  deep  water  and 
connected  by  a  bulkhead. 

Lights. — Two  private  lights  are  here  exhibited,  both  red;  one  on 
the  end  of  a  warehouse  on  one  dock,  and  on  the  otlier  dock  one  from  a 
window  in  the  elevator. 
1944~No.  108 2 


18 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


Chequamegon  bay.— The  eastern  point  of  the  bay,  Chequamegon 
point,  is  a  low,  narrow  spit  6  (7)  miles  in  length  and  forms  a  partial 
natural  breakwater  to  the  bay,  much  as  Minnesota  point  offers  to 
Superior  bay.    At  its  NW.  end  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  in  clear  weather  11 J  (13)  miles,  is 
exhibited  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white  frame  dwelling. 

Fog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds, 
followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

This  lighthouse  is  known  as  La  Pointe,  and  serves  as  a  guide  for 
South  channel,  as  also  for  the  turning  point  for  Chequamegon  bay. 

This  bay  has  deep  water  along  its  Avestern  shore  for  about  2  (2^) 
miles  south  of  Washburn,  when  shoaling  water  commences.  On  the 
east  side  of  the  bay  shoaling  water  commences  on  a  line  joining  the 
lighthouse  and  the  mouth  of  Fish  creek.  Vessels  should  be  careful  of 
soundings  when  to  the  east  of  this  line.  Give  La  Pointe  lighthouse  a 
good  berth. 

Ashland.- The  southern  end  or  head  of  Chequamegon  bay  forms 
the  harbor  of  Ashland,  and  as  the  length  of  the  bay  is  considerable  it 
was  necessary  to  protect  the  wharves  from  the  waves  to  enable  vessels 
to  use  tliem  at  all  times.  When  the  proposed  breakwater  is  finished 
it  will  be  8,000  feet  long.  It  is  as  yet  of  insufficient  length  to  give 
protection  to  all  the  wharves  of  the  city,  but  its  influence  in  diminish- 
ing the  turbulence  of  the  waters  of  the  harbor  is  distinctly  apparent. 
January,  1896,  there  was  an  available  depth  of  17  feet  up  to  the  ore 
docks. 

Sunken  cribs.— There  are  two  cribs  filled  with  stone  about  500  feet 
from  shore  and  200  feet  east  from  the  central  ore  dock.  There  is  only 
4  feet  of  water  over  them. 

Wreck.— There  is  a  wreck  about  J  mile  ea  it  of  the  fog-signal  build- 
ing on  Chequamegon.  point.  There  is  only  9  feet  over  it,  with  18  to  20 
feet  close  outside. 

Michigan  Island  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  17J  (20)  miles, 
is  shown  from  a  conical,  white,  stone  tower  attached  to  a  stone  dwelling. 

MIOHIOAN. 

Coast — From  Chequamegon  point  eastward  the  coast  is  low,  com- 
mencing to  rise  about  Clinton  point  and  continuing  until  Porcupine 
mountains,  1,421  feet  'ligh,  are  reached.  Beyond  Union  bay  the  coast 
again  becomes  low.  Into  Oronto  bay,  18  (20f )  miles  from  Chequamegon 
point,  empties  the  Montreal  river,  which  forms  part  of  the  boundary 
line  between  Wisconsin  and  Michigan. 

At  61J  (70f )  miles  E.  by  N.  fi-om  South  channel  is  the  mouth  of  the 
Ontonagon  river.  AH  this  coast  is  generally  steep-to.  Lone  rock,  9 
(lOJ)  miles  west  of  Union  bay,  lies  a  short  distance  offshore. 

Ontonagoa — The  Ontonagon  river,  forming  the  h;  rbor,  has  fairly 
deep  water  in  it,  but  its  mouth  is  obstructed  by  a  bar  with  varying 
depths.    In  order  to  maintain  a  sufficient  depth  of  water  two  parallel 


-s 


ONTO?  AGON — ^PORTAGE  LAKE. 


19^ 


Chequamegon 
)rins  a  partial 
)oiut  offers  to 

[  (13)  miles,  is 

>• 

if  Ave  seconds, 

as  a  guide  for 
legon  bay. 
r  about  2 (2^) 
nces.  On  the 
ae  joining  tbe 
i  be  careful  of 
9  lighthouse  a 

;on  bay  forms 
sousiderable  it 
enable  vessels 
ber  is  finished 
ength  to  give 
;e  in  diminish- 
ctly  apparent, 
up  to  the  ore 

ibout  500  feet 
There  is  only 

^signal  build- 
with  18  to  20 

.7^  (20)  miles, 
tone  dwelling. 


b  is  low,  com- 
til  Porcupine 
bay  the  coast 
Uhequamegon 
the  boundary 

mouth  of  the 
Lone  rock,  9 
lire. 

•or,  has  fairly 

with  varying 

two  parallel 


piers  have  been  built.  During  fi-eshets  large  quantities  of  sand  arc 
earned  by  the  river,  and  the  bar  at  the  entrance  forms  as  fast  as  the 
piers  are  extended.  The  channel  over  the  bar  is  shifting  and  uncer- 
tain.   There  is  an  available  depth  of  12  feet  through. 

•  ^*?m*?:T)  ^""^  "^^'^  "^^''  ^'«**'^®  12^  (14)  miles  in  clear  weather, 
18  exhibited  from  a  square,  yellow,  brick  tower  rising  from  a  dwellinjr 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Ontonagon  river. 

A  fixed  red  light  (lantern)  is  shown  from  a  square,  brown,  pyramidal 
oi.en-fmmework  tower,  upper  part  inclosed,  on  the  west  pier.  45  feet 
liom  the  outer  end.    Tliere  is  an  elevated  walk  along  the  pier  to  the 

Fourteen-mile  point  is  12  (14)  miles  east  from  Ontonagon. 
Oft  this  point  a  spit  makes  out  with  2^  fathoms  on  its  outer  edge. 
Vessels  should  approach  it  with  caution. 

Beyond  Fourteen-mile  point  the  laud  rises  as  Keweenaw  voiixt  is 
ai)proached.  * 

Pourteen-mile  Point  light-A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  red 
flash  every  twenty  seconds,  is  shown  from  a  square  red  tower,  rising 
in  the  center  of  the  front  of  a  red  dwelling  with  a  red  roof.    The 
watchroom  and  lantern  are  black.    It  is  60  feet  above  the  lake  level 
and  IS  visible  in  clear  weather  13J  (15|)  miles.  ' 

Fog  signaL-A  lO^inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
followed  by  silent  intervals  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

Keweenaw  point  is  a  rocky  promontory  projecting  into  the  lake  in  a 
northeasterly  direction.    It  is  65  (63*)  miles  long  and  25  (28f )  miles 
wide  at  Its  base,  with  a  coast  line  of  120  (138)  miles.    The  shores  of 
this  promontory  are  bold,  with  outlying  reefs  dangerous  to  navigation 
and  with  no  good  haibors  to  afford  refiige  in  storms. 

Portage  lake.-About  35J  (41)  miles  from  its  extremity  the  promon- 
tory is  cut  in  a  northerly  and  southerly  direction  for  14  (16)  miles  bv 
a  natural  navigable  channel  known  as  Portage  lake,  which  occupies  a 
narrow  and  deep  chasm.  It  receives  also  fh>m  the  NE.  the  waters  of 
Torch  lake.    Its  outlet  is  Portage  river,  which  empties  into  Keweenaw 

Portage  Lake  canal  connects  tbe  north  end  of  the  lake  with  lake 
Superior.    The  canal  is  2  (2*)  miles  long,  has  a  bottom  width  of  70  feet 
and  ,8  to  have  a  16.foot  depth.    It  has  a  breakwater  at  its  entrance  on 
lake  Superior. 

Portage  river,  formerly  shallow,  with  a  tortwoua  channel  obstnicted 
by  bars,  has  been  improved  by  having  a  tolerably  straight  channel  cut 

Improvement8.-January,  1896:  The  deep  channel  is  narrow  at 
places.  Lily  pond  has  been  widened  to  300  feet,  to  allow  vessels  to 
pass  each  other  or  to  tie  up.  It  should  be  noted  that  during  each 
winter  a  bar  forms  at  the  lake  Superior  entrance  to  the  canals,  leaving 
only  about  UJ  feet  of  water  on  it,  which  will  be  removed  by  dredging 
a«  prompt  y  as  possible  on  the  opening  of  navigation.  The  project 
caUs  for  a  16-foot  channel  of  70  feet  bottom  vnm  from  bay  to  lake 


20 


LAKE  SUPERIOB. 


LIGHTS. 

Portage  Lake  Ship  CanaL— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  (16) 
miles,  is  shown  at  the  west  side  of  the  cut  from  a  squaie,  red  brick 
tower  on  the  canal  front  of  dwelling. 

Portage  Lake  Ship  Canal  Pierhead.— A  fixed  red  light  on  the  end 
of  the  west  pier,  visible  7i  (8^)  miles,  is  exhibited  from  a  square, 
white,  pyramidal,  open-framework  tower,  the  upper  part  of  which  is 
inclosed.    It  serves  as  a  guide  into  the  canal. 

There  is  an  elevated  walk  from  the  ligi  "chouse  along  the  pier  to  the  end. 

Pog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  iiouuds  blasts  of  three  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  seventeen  seconds. 

Portage  Lake  Ship  Canal  range  (front).— On  the  south  end  of  the 
pier  of  Portage  Lake  Ship  canal,  at  the  entrance  from  Portage  lake,  is 
shown  a  fixed  white  light  from  a  small,  square  lamphouse. 

Real-.- About  600  feet  N.  f  E.  (N.  9°  E.)  of  the  front  light  is  a  fixed 
red  light,  shown  from  a  wooden  upright  with  white  triangular  day 
mark. 

These  lights  form  a  range  for  approaching  south  end  of  ship  canal. 

Portage  River  range  (north).— In  the  lake,  from  the  window  of  a 
white  lamphouse  with  pyramidal  white  day  mark,  is  shown  a  fixed 
white  light. 

South. — In  Portage  river,  near  its  head,  and  1,650  feet  8.  by  E.  §  E. 
(S.  18°  B.)  from  the  north  light,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light  from  a 
small,  square,  white  lamphouse  on  crib. 

These  lights  form  an  open  range  for  leaving  or  entering  the  river. 
The  lights  should  be  left  to  the  westward. 

Portage  range  (front).— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (11)  miles, 
is  exhibited  from  a  white  tower.  This  light  is  on  the  west  side  of  the 
Portage  river  near  its  mouth. 

Rear. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10^  (12)  miles  is  shown  from  a 
square  tower  on  white  frame  dwelling.  It  is  730  feet  N.  f  W.  (N.  9° 
W.)  from  the  front  light. 

These  lights  serve  as  a  range  on  which  vessels  can  run  on  leaving  or 
entering  the  cut  between  Portage  river  and  Keweenaw  bay,  the  range 
for  entering  from  the  b«y  being  N.  9<^  W. 

A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  minute  and  visible 
13  (15)  miles,  is  shown  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance  to  Port- 
age river,  from  a  cylindrical,  white  stone  tower,  connected  with  a  red 
brick  dwelling  by  a  covered  way. 

Life-saving  station,  3  mile  from  the  north  end  of  the  canal,  on  the 
east  bank. 

Directions. — The  light  at  the  outer  end  of  the  west  pier,  with  the 
lighthor.se  at  the  inner  end,  serves  as  a  guide  to  and  into  the  west 
entrance  of  the  canal.  From  this  the  canal  runs  in  a  SSE.  (S.  23°  E.) 
direction  until  a  short  distance  beyond  the  United  States  life-saving 
station,  when  it  changes  direction  to  the  south,  passing  through  Lilly 


le  13  (15) 
red  brick 

on  the  end 

a  square, 

if  which  is 

■  to  the  end. 
ee  seconds, 

end  of  the     ' 
age  lake,  is 

it  is  a  fixed 
ngular  day 

hip  canal, 
window  of  a 
)wn  a  fixed 

i.  by  E.  f  B. 
Light  from  a 

g  the  river. 

(11)  miles, 
side  of  the 

)wn  from  a 
\  W.  (N.  9° 

leaving  or 
f,  the  range 

laud  visible 
ice  to  Port- 
with  a  red 

mal,  on  the 

ar,  with  the 
to  the  west 
(S.  23°  E.) 
life-saving 
rough  Lilly 


TORCH   LAKE — EAOLE   RIVER  HARBOR. 


21 


pond  and  entering  Portage  lake  at  Monders.  Here  project  two  bulk- 
heads, and  at  the  extremity  of  the  eastern  one  is  the  south  light  of  an 
open  range  for  leaving  or  entering. 

Vessels  drawing  14  feet  of  water  can  now  pass  through  tlie  Portage 
river  and  upper  ship  canal. 

Keeping  to  the  southward  a  general  course  of  SSW.  g  W.  (S.  29°  W.) 
is  made  until  Oscar  is  passed,  thence  S.  by  E.  §  E.  (S.  18°  E.)  as  a  gen- 
eral course.  Having  rounded  the  bend  just  below  Swedctown  creek, 
Hancock  and  Hought  ju  are  passed.  These  towns  lie,  Hancock  on  tlie 
north  and  Houghton  on  the  south  side  of  Portage  lake,  8^  (10)  miles 
from  the  west  entrance,  and  are  the  principal  sliippiug  ports  of  this 
lake.  A  short  distance  east  of  Houghton  a  course  ESE.  ,^  E.  (S.  09<^ 
E.)  will  carry  clear  of  danger  until  about  midway  between  the  entfance 
of  Pilgram  river  and  Dollar  bay.  Prom  here  a  course  of  8.  by  E.  ^  E. 
(8. 15°  E.)  will  carry  through  the  wide  part  of  the  lake  and  to  the  north 
entrance  of  Portage  river.  Enter  the  river  on  the  range  8.  by  B.  §  B. 
(8. 18°  E.)  and  keep  a  mid-channel  route,  passing  through  cuts  Nos. 
4, 3,  and  2  and  through  and  out  of  No.  1  cut  on  the  Portage  rivi^r  range 
S.  SE.(S.doB.). 

In  this  system  there  ai'e  no  locks. 

The  improved  parts  of  the  channel  will  be  kept  well  buoyed. 

Torch  lake. — Fourteen  feet  of  water  may  be  carried  through  the  cut 
from  Torch  bay  to  Torch  lake. 

The  cut  is  marked  by  three  lights  on  cribs  on  the  west  side,  and  by 
a  row  of  stakes  on  both  sides. 

Vessels  bound  from  Torch  bay  to  lake  Linden  follow  the  center  of  the 
bay,  taking  care  to  leave  red  stakes  to  port  and  black  stakes  to  star- 
board. When  the  nearest  two  cribs  are  in  range  steer  for  them  until 
the  stakes  can  be  seen,  then  follow  them  through  the  cut. 

In  coming  from  Torch  lake  to  Torch  bay  a  red  barn  on  the  south  side 
of  Torch  bay  is  a  good  mark  for  running  through  the  out. 

Coast. — Proceeding  to  the  northeastward  from  Portage  Lake  canal 
a  shoal  makes  out  for  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  harbor, 
another  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Gratiot  river,  and  from  there  on 
to  Eagle  river  the  shore  should  be  given  a  good  berth. 

Eagle  River  harbor  is  practically  abandoned  as  a  commercial  port 
There  is  a  pier  which  is  falling  to  pieces  and  the  channels  are  filling 
gradually.  There  are  shoals,  |  of  a  mile  off  shore,  flW.  and  NNB.  of 
the  month  of  the  river,  with  from  6  to  10  feet  of  water  on  them  and  a 
channel  between  them  and  the  beach.  This  channel  is  about  20  feet  in 
depth.    The  shoals  extend  2  (2^)  miles  in  a  NE.  and  SW.  direction. 

Direotions.— Approaching  from  the  west,  head  ESE.  ^  E.  (8.  73°  E.) 
for  the  north  end  of  the  pier  and  run  in  on  that  heading  until  close  to 
the  dock,  when  head  up  to  the  northward.  Approaching  from  the  NE. 
and  through  the  passage  between  the  shoals  head  8.  4  W.  (8.  3°  W.) 
for  the  end  of  the  pier,  and  run  down  on  this  heading. 


inmibiimwMni«>irriiiii«i<i' 


29 


LAKE  SUPEBIOB. 


Light — There  is  a  fixed  white  light,  shown  from  a  square,  white 
stoue  tower  on  a  dwelling,  on  the  west  side  of  the  month  of  the  river. 

Vessels  coasting  should  keep  well  clear  of  the  land  running  in  either 
direction. 

Eagle  harbor  is  6^  (7^)  miles  from  Eagle  river  and  is  one  of  the 
harbors  of  refuge  on  the  south  shore  of  lake  Superior.  Through  a 
rocky  led^e,  with  8^  feet  of  water  at  the  shoalest  part,  which  originally 
obstructed  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  a  channel,  130  feet  wide  and  14 
feet  deep,  has  been  dredged. 

Directions. — This  channel  is  marked  by  two  guiding  cribs,  one  on 
either  side.  The  course  going  in  is  SSE.  J  E.  (S.  28°  E.)  on  the  range 
on  the  south  shore  of  the  bay.  This  course  will  carry  clear  of  a  shoal 
lying  north  of  the  entrance,  about  i  mile  distant. 

Approaching  by  the  east  channel  bring  the  lighthouse  to  bear  WS  W. 
(S.  68°  W.)  and  run  in  on  this  course  until  on  the  range,  when  head  in, 
passing  between  the  cribs. 

Light— On  the  west  point  of  the  entrance  there  is  a  fixed  white 
light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  minute,  visible  13  (15)  miles  in  clear 
weather.  It  is  shown  from  a  red  brick  tower,  octagonal  in  shape,  rising 
from  the  comer  of  a  dwelling. 

Fog  lEdgnaL— The  building  is  100  feet  NNW.  §  W.  (N.  30°  W.)  from 
the  lighthouse.  A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  as  follows: 
Blast  three  seconds,  silent  twelve  seconds,  blast  six  seconds,  silent 
twenty-four  seconds. 

Range  lights. — On  the  south  shore  are  two  lights,  which  show  the 
range  at  night;  the  towers  mark  it  by  day. 

The  front  light  is  a  fixed  white  light  shown  from  a  white  frame  tower j 
and  is  20  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light  is  1,000  feet  SSE.  ^  E.  (S.  28°  E.)  from  the  front  light, 
of  the  same  character,  and  is  29  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  is  shown 
from  a  square  tower  on  a  frame  dwelling. 

From  Eagle  harbor  to  Agate  harbor  the  coast  is  dangerous  and  should 
be  avoided,  especially  in  the  vicinity  of  Agate  harbor. 

Agate  harbor.— This  harbor  is  4^  (6)  miles  from  Eagle  harbor,  is 
surrounded  by  shoals,  and  when  inside  there  are  many  shoal  spots.  It 
is  no  longer  used  as  a  harbor  of  refuge. 

Directions. — The  target,  which  was  used  as  a  guide,  is  still  in  exist- 
ence, and  to  enter  the  harbor  head  for  the  target  on  a  course  SSE.  ^  E. 
(S.  28°  E.)  until  the  houses  on  the  south  shore  of  South  harbor  are  seen 
clear  of  Agate  point,  then  steer  E.  ^  N.  (N.  84°  E.)  to  anchorage  in  North 
harbor. 

Copper  harbor,  8  (9^)  miles  nearly  east  of  Agate  harbor,  is  a  good 
natural  harbor,  having  a  narrow  bar  with  a  least  depth  on  it,  when  on 
the  range,  of  16  feet.  It  is  protected  from  the  waves  by  the  mainland. 
Porters  island,  and  the  shoals,  and  affords  good  anchorage,  being  2 
miles  long  and  1,200  feet  wide.  The  town  of  Copper  Harbor  is  on  the 
SW.  side. 


COPPER   HARBOR — BETE   GRISE   BAY. 


23 


aare,  white 
)f  the  river, 
ing  in  either 

one  of  the 

Through  a 

h  originally 

(vide  and  14 

'ibs,  one  on 
n  the  range 
r  of  a  shoal 

bear  WSW. 
ten  head  in, 

fixed  white 
ilea  in  clear 
hape,  rising 

>o  W.)  from 
as  follows: 
>nds,  silent 

h  show  the 

rame  towerj 

front  light, 
It  is  shown 

and  should 

)  harbor,  is 
.1  spots.    It 

till  in  exist- 
e  SSE.  ^  E. 
tor  are  seen 
ge  in  North 

r,  is  a  good 
it,  when  on 
3  mainland, 
kge,  being  2 
>r  is  on  the 


Light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13§  (15f )  miles  in  (jlear  weather, 
is  on  the  etist  point  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor,  and  is  shown  from  a 
square,  yellow  brick  tower,  which  rises  from  a  dwelling. 

Range  lights.— On  Fort  Wilkins  military  reservation,  on  the  sonth 
shore,  a  fixed  white  is  the  front  light  of  a  range  for  the  channel  in  the 
bar.  It  is  exhibited  from  a  white  frame  tower,  and  is  22  feet  above 
the  lake  level.  At  470  feet  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  13°  W.)  from  the  front 
light  is  a  second  light  of  the  same  character,  exhibited  from  a  square 
tower  on  a  white  dwelling  and  39  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Directions.- Head  in  on  this  range  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  13°  W.)  until 
well  past  the  rocks  which  show  on  the  west  side  of  the  range,  when 
head  for  the  town,  anchoring  nearer  to  the  north  shore  for  the  better 
protection. 

Copper  harbor  is  the  last  port  on  this  part  of  the  promontory. 

When  rounding  the  promontory  to  the  southward  Manitou  island 
and  Gull  rock  are  sighted. 

OuU  rock  is  about  i  mile  from  the  west  end  of  the  island  and  is 
surmounted  by  a  lighthouse. 

Light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  llj  (13)  miles,  is  shown  from  a 
square,  yellow  brick  tower  rising  from  a  dwelling. 

Bnoy.— A  16-foot  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  marks  a  gravelly  shoal  J 
mile  8.  i  E.  (S.  3°  E.)  from  Gull  Kock  lighthouse.  This  shoal  has  but 
12  feet  of  water  on  it. 

Manitou  island  is  2J  (3)  miles  long  and  one  mile  wide,  and  should 
be  given  a  good  berth,  having  shoal  water  near  it,  especially  on  its 
western  side. 

Light.— On  the  east  point  of  the  island  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by 
a  white  flash  every  minute,  is  shown  from  a  brown,  skeleton  tower, 
which  has  a  cylindrical  staircase  and  is  connected  with  a  white  frame 
dweUing  by  a  covered  way.    It  is  visible  14^  (17)  miles  in  clear  weather. 

Pog  signal- A  little  way  east  of  the  lighthouse  a  lOinch  steam 
whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  three  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of 
twenty-six  seconds,  then  a  blast  of  five  seconds  followed  by  a  silent 
interval  of  twenty-six  seconds.  This  occurs  every  minute  during  thick 
weather. 

Bete  Gkrise  bay.— Prom  Keweenaw  point  (small)  the  coast  trends 
away  westwardly,  and  Bete  Grise  bay  is  the  first  anchorage  on  the 
eastern  side  of  tne  promontory.  This  bay  oficers  good  protection  to  all 
winds  from  the  SW.  to  NE.  by  way  of  west  and  north.  At  its  head, 
10  (11  J)  miles  from  the  point,  is  a  ship  canal,  which  gave  outlet  to  Lac 
la  Belle;  the  town  of  Mendota  is  here,  but  the  canal  is  not  kept  up.  On 
the  south  shore  there  are  shoals  and  rocks  extending  out  over  a  mile 
from  Isabelle  point,  the  southern  point  of  Bete  Grise  bay.  To  the 
southward,  past  Traverse  point,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Portage  river,  care 
should  be  exercised  in  approaching  the  coast. 

Mendota  light — At  the  entrance  to  Lac  la  Belle  is  a  square  red 
tower  rising  from  front  of  dwelling,  from  which  is  shown  at  44  feet 


^t]^'?: 


m^ 


m 


H 


v 

!i 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


above  the  lake  level  a  white  light,  fixed  and  varied  by  a  flash  every 
forty-five  secondH.  It  illuminates  345°  of  the  horizon  and  is  visible 
from  all  points  of  approach. 

Traverse  island  lies  S.  by  W.  J  W.  of  Traverse  point,  distant  4  (4^) 
miles.  There  is  shoal  water  around  this  island,  and  a  spit  extends 
SW.  about  one  mile  from  it. 

Portage  river  is  on  Keweenaw  bay.  It  is  described  on  pages  19  and 
20,  which  see  for  the  direction  and  lights.  The  harbor  is  exposed  to 
the  north  and  east,  and  there  is  no  good  anchorage  within  9  (19,^)  miles. 

Keweenaw  bay.— The  west  shore  of  this  bay  trends  to  the  south 
from  Portage  river. 

Sand  point— There  is  no  break  in  the  shore  line  until  Sand  point  is 
reached,  12  (14)  miles  away,  to  the  west  of  which  is  an  excellent  harbor. 
When  J  mile  east  of  Sand  point,  run  SW.  by  S.  (8.  34°  W.)  not  quite  a 
mile,  when  head  up  for  Baraga  on  a  course  of  WNW.  ^  W.  (N.  73°  W.), 
having  due  regard  for  a  spit  which  makes  to  the  southwestward  about 
300  or  400  yards. 

Light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  8J  (9f )  miles,  is  shown  from  Sand 
Point  lighthouse.  The  lighthouse  is  a  square,  red-brick  tower  rising 
from  a  dwelling. 

Two  miles  from  Sand  point  and  at  the  head  of  Keweenaw  bay  lies  the 
little  town  of  L'Anse. 

Pequaming  point— From  L'Anse  the  shore  line  keeps  oflf  to  the  N. 
and  NB.  to  Peqnaming  point.  Around  this  point  is  the  most  secure 
anchorage  near  Portage  River  entrance,  the  south  side  giving  protec- 
tion from  gales  from  the  north  and  east,  the  north  side  from  southerly 
gales.  The  only  danger  around  the  point  is  a  spit  extending  a  mile 
SSW.  from  the  SW.  point.  By  running  in  until  4  fathoms  is  found  will 
give  good  anchorage. 

From  this  point  the  coast  trends  NE.,  and  6  (7)  miles  from  the  point 
a  spit  having  18  feet  on  it  runs  out  a  mile.  The  NE.  extremity  is  known 
as  Abbaye  point,  and  is  surrounded  by  dangerous  spots.  Give  it  a  wide 
berth.    This  point  forms  the  west  shore  of  Huron  bay. 

Bno3rs.— Two  black  can  buoys  mark  the  shoal  oflf  Abbaye  point. 

Huron  bay,  lOJ  (12)  miles  long  by  a  mile  wide,  aifords  good  anchor- 
age, and  a  vessel  can  ride  out  nearly  all  winds  in  it,  especially  if  in  the 
bay  to  the  southward  of  Sand  point. 

There  is  a  lighthouse  on  Sand  point;  no  light  is  shown.  With  Huron 
light  dead  astern  a  WSW.  f  W.  (S.  72°  W.)  coarse  will  cany  in;  a 
course  of  SW.  |  W.  (S.  62°  W.)  from  the  first  low  sandy  point  on  the 
east  shore  will  carry  to  Sandy  i>oint,  which  can  be  approached  close-to. 
Off  Valley  creek  a  sand  bar  with  but  2  feet  of  water  on  it  makes  half- 
way across  the  bay,  with  a  breadth  of  i  mile. 

From  the  most  NE.  point  of  Huron  bay  the  coast  trends  eastward  to 
the  Huron  river,  NNE.  of  which  and  distant  3J  (4)  miles  lies  the  west- 
ernmost of  the  Huron  islands. 


Tfi'-  ■a'V.iATiSt^- 


HURON   ISLANDS — STANNARD   ROCK. 


25 


flash  every 
1  is  visible 

tant  4  (^) 
pit  extends 

ages  19  and 
exposed  to 
(1%)  miles. 

[)  the  south 

and  point  is 
lent  harbor. 
)  not  quite  a 

(N.730W.), 
bward  about 

t  from  Band 
lower  rising 

bay  lies  the 

»ff  to  the  N. 
most  secure 
eing  protec- 
m  southerly 
ding  a  mile 
s  found  will 

m  the  point 
ty  is  known 
Ive  it  a  wide 

e  point, 
ood  anchor- 
bUy  if  in  the 

Vith  Huron 
carry  in;  a 
oint  on  the 
led  close-to. 
makes  half« 

eastward  to 
)B  the  west- 


Huron  islands. — This  group  consists  of  two  ialandH;  the  Rhoros  are 
bold  except  for  two  small  patches  of  rock  oft'  the  east  end  of  EnHt 
Huron.  There  is  a  channel  over  2  (2^)  miles  wide  between  the  inlands 
and  the  mainland,  as  al8(»     ';hannel  between  the  two  islands. 

Light. — On  the  north  side  of  the  West  IJiirou  island,  at  197  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light  visible  20^  (23^) 
miles.    The  lighttower  is  square  and  rises  from  a  dwelling. 

Fog  signal — C)n  the  NW.  corner  of  the  same  island  a  lOinch  steam 
whistle  gives  a  blast  of  eight  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of 
flfty-two  seconds. 

Coast — The  Huron  mountains,  one  peak  of  which  is  1,<)30  feet  high, 
are  here  seen  rising  back  from  the  lake.  Off  Huron  lliver  point  is  a 
shoal  spot  extending  NE.  1-,^  (1^)  miles;  this  should  be  carefully 
avoided.  From  here  to  the  eastward  there  are  no  outlying  dangers 
until  Big  Bay  point  is  reached,  off  which  a  shoal,  having  but  7  feet  on 
it,  extends  over  one  (IJ)  mile  N.  by  W.  This  shoal  is  marked  by  a 
black  spar  bnoy.  From  Big  Bay  point  the  coast  takes  a  general  SSE. 
direction.  A  short  distance  from  Big  Bay  point  shoal  another  small 
shoal  makes  out  from  the  land,  and  midway  between  Sanks  head  and 
Garlic  point,  a  short  distance  ott'shore,  is  Garlic  island.  Granite  point 
is  the  next  point  SE.  of  Garlic  point. 

Between  Granite  point  and  Presqne  He  the  shore  recedes,  forming  a 
shallow  bight,  clear  of  danger  on  the  NW.  side,  but  with  rocks  and 
shoals  in  the  remaining  portion,  and  with  Middle  island  as  a  prominent 
mark.  To  the  east  of  Presque  He  is  a  large  rock,  20  feet  in  height, 
the  most  northerly  of  three,  showing  well  above  water.  Between  these 
rocks  and  the  mainland  is  a  narrow  channel.  Vessels  bound  to  the 
southward  should  keep  outside  of  these  rocks  and  not  head  down  until 
the  red  light  on  the  breakwater  at  Marquette  is  well  open  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  main  light. 

Onmite  island  lies  4^  (5^)  miles  ENE.  of  Garlic  point. 

Granite  island  light — A  fixed  white  li^ht,  varied  by  a  red  flash 
every  ninety  seconds,  visible  16^  (17f )  miles,  is  shown  from  a  square 
tower  attached  to  a  dwelling  at  93  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Fog  signal — A  bell  struck  by  machinery  every  twelve  seconds  dur- 
ing thick  weather. 

Sf?*Tnard  rock,  lying  29  (33tV)  miles  N.  by  E.  i  E.  (N.  17°  E.)  of 
Granite  island,  is  a  dangerous  shoal  spot  extending  H.  by  W.  and  S.  by 
E.  2,910  feet,  with  a  width  of  1^500  feet  and  having  deep  water  close- to. 

Light — On  a  circular  pier  near  the  northern  end  of  Stannard  rock, 
a  flashing  white  light,  every  thirty  seconds,  is  shown  102  feet  above 
lake  level  from  a  conical,  gray  stone  tower.  It  is  visible  in  clear 
weather  16  (18^)  miles. 

Fog  signid. — ^From  a  house  on  the  deck  of  this  pier  10-inoh  steam 
whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  three  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of 
ten  seconds,  a  blast  of  five  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval 
of  fody-two  seconds.    This  every  minute  during  thick  weather. 


ae 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


Beacon.— A  granite  beacon,  8  feet  high  and  «  feet  in  diameter  at  its 
base,  with  a  wrought-iron  shaft  surmounting  it,  Uom  been  built  120  feet 
from  tlie  extreme  south  end,  and  2,190  feet  H.  by  K.  J  E.  (8.  20°  E.) 
from  the  lighthouse. 

Marquette.— This  harbor  is  of  the  greatest  importance,  its  commerce 
being  extensive  and  (constantly  increasing,  and  it  is  also  valuable  as  a 
harbor  of  refuge.  Tlie  breakwater  runs  out  due  south  from  a  point 
just  north  of  the  city,  and  on  the  (lovernment  reservation.  It  now 
extends  into  over  a  30- foot  depth. 

Lights.— On  the  north  point  of  the  harbor  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
14i  (16J)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  77  feet  above  lake  level 
from  a  square,  yellow  brick  tower,  vising  from  a  dwelling;  and  a  fixed 
red  light  is  shown  on  the  breakwater  from  its  south  end.  This  light  is 
visible  7^  (8^)  miles,  and  is  shown  from  a  square,  brown  skeleton,  iron 
tower,  with  a  cylindrical  watchroom. 

Pog  eignaL— Olose  to  the  lighthouse  on  the  point  a  lOinch  steam 
whistle  gives  a  blast  of  five  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of 
twenty-flve  seconds. 

Cantioii.— Vessels  should  give  the  point  a  berth  of  at  least  i  mile  to 
keep  clear  of  dangers. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  main 
light,  at  the  north  end  of  the  break  ^vater. 

Coast — From  Marquette  to  Shot  point  the  trend  is  eastwardly,  and 
off  Shot  point  a  shoal  makes  out  i  mile  with  10  feet  on  it.  From  here 
on  past  Laughing  Fish  point  to  Train  island  there  are  no  outlying 
dangers,  but  vessels  should  keep  at  least  J  mile  off  shore. 

Train  island  lies  in  the  N£.  part  of  Shelter  bay.  There  is  shoa! 
water  to  the  north  and  west  of  this  island  extending  out  IJ  (2)  miles, 
and  also  shoal  water  between  it  and  the  mainland.  From  the  west 
point  of  Train  bay  a  shoal  extends  to  the  northeastward  about  the 
same  distance.  In  Train  bay  vessels  can  find  anchorage  from  all  winds 
except  those  from  the  northward.  Skirting  the  shore  near  Train  point 
is  dangerous,  and  although  there  is  a  channel  between  Wood  island  and 
Williams  island,  it  is  well  to  keep  to  the  northward  of  Wood  island, 
and  between  it  and  Grand  island  if  bound  for  Grand  Island  harbor  or 
Sontb  bay.  When  near  Williams  island  do  not  go  to  the  westward  of 
the  range. 

Lights.- Grand  Island  Harbor  range  consists  of  2  lights.  The  front 
light,  on  the  mainland  at  the  west  entrance,  is  fixed  white  shown  from 
a  white  tower  and  23  feet  above  the  lake  level.  About  376  feet  S.  by 
E.  ^  E.  (S.  16°  E.)  from  this  front  light  is  another  of  the  same  charac- 
ter shown  from  a  square  white  tower  on  a  dwelling  and  41  feet  above 
the  lake  level. 

Directions  for  entering  from  the  westward. — Bring  the  lights  or 
towers  in  range  on  a  course  8.  by  E.  J  E.  (S.  10°  E.),  continue  this 
^course  until  Powells  point  opens  well  clear  of  the  red  spar  buoy  neaf 


I  meter  at  its 
>uilt  120  ieet 

1.  (8.  20°  E.) 

ts  comiueroe 
tilnable  as  a 
t-oin  a  point 
on.    It  now 

liglit,  visible 
e  lalie  level 
and  a  fixed 
This  light  is 
keleton,  iron 

)-inch  steam 
b  interval  of 

last  ^  mile  to 

lar  the  main 

'.wardly,  and 

From  here 

no  ontlying 

kere  is  shoal 
1}  (2)  miles, 
am  the  west 
d  about  the 
Dm  all  winds 
'  Train  point 
d  island  and 
rood  island, 
id  harbor  or 
vfjcstward  of 

The  front 
shown  from 
75  feet  S.  by 
ame  charao- 
1  feet  above 

the  lights  or 
ontinne  this 
IT  buoy  near . 


GRAND  ISLAND. 


91 


WillianiM  landing,  then  head  K.  J|  N.  (N.  85"  E.)  until  the  harbor  opens, 
when  proceetl  to  au(;hornge.  One-fourth  of  a  mile  oft'  shore  gives  plenty 
of  water,  except  on  the  east  side,  where  a  Hpit  makeH  out  with  from  8 
to  11  feet  on  it.  If  bound  for  South  l>ay,  continue  course  E.  ^  N.  (N. 
85°  E.),  ronnding  Towells  point  not  nearer  than  ^  mile.  Soutli  bay  is 
entirely  fi'ee  from  dangers  ^  mile  oft'  shore  until  in  the  region  of  Sand 
point,  when  vessels  hIiouUI  keep  nearer  to  Grand  island. 

Directions  for  entering  from  the  eastward. — When  4  mile  off 
Castle  point,  head  HW.  (S.  46°  W.);  this  will  bring  Grand  Island  liar- 
bor  light  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow,  and  will  lead  clear  of  the  shoals 
off  Sand  point.  If  there  is  any  set  to  the  southward,  haul  up  and  head 
for  the  red  spar  buoy  until  Sand  i)oiiit  is  abeam,  when  a  course  can  be 
shaped  into  Houth  bay.  If  bound  for  the  harbor,  (continue  the  SW.  (S. 
45°  W.)  course  until  the  village  above  Williams  landing  is  well  open 
of  the  land  forming  the  east  side  of  the  harbor. 

Bnoys. — A  red  spar  buoy,  16  feet  long,  is  on  the  south  point  of  the 
12- foot  curve  of  Williams  Landing  shoal.  Vessels  should  no^  i>a8B 
between  it  and  Grand  island. 

A  red  spar  buoy,  10  feet  long,  marks  the  extreme  end  of  a  shoal  off 
Grand  Island  Harbor  light.  Vessels  can  run  close  to  this  buoy  with 
safety,  but  should  Tiot  pass  between  it  and  the  lighthouse. 

L'%ht. — Grand  Island  Harbor  light  is  fixed  white,  visible  12J  (14) 
mile^j,  and  is  on  Sand  point.  It  is  shown  from  a  square  white  tower 
at  40  feet  above  lake  level.  A  shoal  extends  about  900  feet  eastward 
from  the  lighthouse. 

Grand  island. — To  the  northward  from  this  light,  Grand  island 
trends  north,  and  when  well  clear  of  the  entrance,  vessels  should  not 
shut  in  the  light  on  the  island  until  well  up  with  Trout  point,  as  a  shoal 
of  12  feet  makes  out  a  good  ^  mile  from  shore.  Trout  point  Hhould  not 
be  approached  on  the  northward  nearer  than  J  mile  by  vessels  drawing 
over  12  feet.  To  the  west  of  Trout  point  lies  Trout  bay,  which  is  sep- 
arated from  Grand  Island  harbor  by  a  low  strip  of  laud  f  mile  wide. 
From  here  the  coast  stretches  away  to  the  northwanl  and  on  its  extreme 
north  point  is  Grand  Island  lighthouse. 

Grand  island  is  surrounded  by  shoal  water  ^  to  f  mile  off  shore.  It 
should  be  approached  close-to  with  caution. 

Light — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  ninety 
seconds,  visible  17|;  (19f )  miles,  is  shown  from  a  square  yellow  tower 
rising  from  a  dwelling  at  205  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Coast — From  Sand  i)oint  east,  past  Grand  Portal  to  Point  an  Sable, 
the  coast  is  free  from  dangers.  Sail  rock,  one  mile  SW.,  and  Chappel 
rock,  one  mile  ease  from  Grand  Portal  being  close  to  shore.  The  deter- 
mination of  the  coast  lines  by  the  wearing  action  of  the  waters  upon 
the  rocks  of  diffei'ent  degrees  of  hardness  is  remarkably  exemplified 
everywhere  along  the  shore  of  lake  Superior,  but  nowhere  more  so 
than  on  this  stretch  of  the  coast.    Here  are  precipitous  cliffs  of  red  sand- 


28 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


Ht«no  wlii<'li  liavo  boflii  so  <'iirv«Ml  by  the  wavos  m  to  bnvo  rwelveJ  th© 
luuno  of  "  PictiiroU  Uocks."  Tlioy  Htiuid  opixtsite  tlie  ^rentoHt  width 
ol'tho  bike  nnd  are  t'xpoHed  to  tlio  trenieiidoiiH  force  of  the  lieavy  atorniH 
from  th«^  iiortli.  The  effe<;t  of  the  waves  in  seen,  not  only  in  tlieir  irreg- 
nbir  shaiKis,  bnt  the  sand  formed  by  the  disintegration  of  the  rocks  is 
swept  by  the  wind  down  the  coast,  and  raised  by  tlie  samo  force  into 
long  lines  of  sandy  cliff'k  KK)  feet  high. 

Off  Point  au  Sable  a  shoal  makes  cat  ^  mile  to  the  northward. 

Light. — On  the  i>oint,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  U\\  (18^)  miles,  is 
shown  107  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical  white  tower,  con- 
nected with  a  red-bri(^k  dwelling  by  a  covered  way. 

Q-rand  Marais  harbor— Harbor  of  refuge.— This  harbor  is  7  (8) 
miles  east  of  Point  an  Sable.  Once  within  tliis  harbor,  there  is  ample 
depth,  to  float  large  vessels,  and  as  a  harbor  of  refuge  it  is  of  the  great- 
est importancte  to  the  ship])ing  navigating  the  lake.  The  entrance  to 
the  harbor  is  to  bo  .'J0()  feet  in  width,  protected  on  either  side  by  crib 
piers.  A  channel  of  175  feet  in  width,  with  a  depth  of  14  feet  in  the 
shoalest  part,  now  exists.  With  any  swell  on  it  will  not  be  safe  for  a 
vessel  drajving  over  1'2  feet  of  water  to  attempt  the  entrance.  Sonnd- 
ings  taken  in  Detiember,  18!>5,  shfiwed  a  bar  working  in  from  the  west 
across  the  front  of  entrance,  on  which  was  but  12^  feet  of  water.  The 
edge  of  the  bar  having  reached  the  axis  of  the  channel,  a  pile  dike  for 
closing  the  nal:iir»l  opening  to  the  harbor  was  partially  constrm^ted. 

Light. — <  )n  the  outer  end  of  the  west  pier  is  a  flxed  white  light  40 
feet  abov(^  the  lake  level  and  visible  11 J  (13)  miles.  A  black  lantern 
surmounts  the  s<]uare,  white,  pyramidal  skeleton  tower,  and  an  eleva- 
tion walk  extends  shoreward  810  feet. 

Fog  signal — A  bell  struck  by  machinery,  a  single  blow  every  thirty 
seconds. 

Coast — From  Grand  Marais  to  Whitefish  point  the  coast  is  clear, 
excepting  a  reported  shoal  oif  Vermillion  point. 

Shoal. — This  shoal  is  reported  as  having  24  feet  water  over  it,  and 
lying  NNW.  (N.  23°  W.)  from  the  life-saving  station  on  Vermillion 
point.    It  extends  east  and  west  ^  mile  and  is  200  feet  wide. 

The  following  life-saving  stations  are  on  this  stretch  of  (toast: 
'    Mnskallonge  station  is  near  the  mouth  of  the  Sucker  river. 

Two  Heart  River  station  is  near  the  mouth  of  the  river  of  the  same 
name. 

Crisps  station,  15^  (18)  miles  west  of  Whiteflsh  point. 

Vermillion  Point  station,  8^  (9$)  miles  west  of  Whiteflsh  point. 

'Whiteflsh  point  is  the  western  jwint  of  Whiteflsh  bay  and  is  the 
turning  point  for  vessels  bound  into  the  St.  Marys  river.  On  the  point 
is  a  light  and  fog  signal.  There  is  a  good  and  secure  anchorage,  in 
northwesterly  gales,  under  Whiteflsh  point. 

Light. — A  flxed  white  light,  with  a  white  flash  every  flve  seconds, 
-  visible  14^  (16^)  miles,  is  shown  76  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a 


WHITEPI8H   BAY. 


29 


re  received  the 
[jreatost  width 
B  lieavy  storms 
■  ill  tlieir  irreg- 
)f  the  rocks  is 
laiiio  force  into 

rthward. 
(18!^)  miles,  is 
ite  tower,  cou- 

rtrbor  is  7  (8) 
tliere  is  ample 
is  of  the  great- 
le  entrance  to 
r  si«le  by  crib 
14  feet  in  the 
i  be  safe  for  a 
ance.  Sound- 
from  the  west 
f  water.  The 
a  pile  dike  for 
onstructed. 
vhite  light  40 
black  lantern 
md  an  eleva- 

w  every  thirty 

coast  is  clear, 

r  over  it,  and 
»n  Vermillion   . 
ide. 
coast: 
•  river, 
jr  of  the  same 


tflsh  point, 
ly  and  is  the 
On  the  point 
Einchorage,  in 

five  seconds, 
level  from  a 


It  is  connected  with  a  white 


white  skeleton  tower  with  a  stair  cylinder, 
dwelling  by  a  covered  way. 

Fog  signal. —A  KJ-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds, 
followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  thirteen  seconds;  then  ii  blast  of  two 
seconds,  followed  Ity  a  silent  interval  of  forty  stM-onds.  This  cvoiy 
minute  during  thic  k  weather. 

Whiteflsh  bay.— From  Whitertsh  pohit  the  coast  makes  u  sudden 
change  of  direction  to  the  southward  as  fur  as  the  mouth  of  the 
Taqnamenon  river. 

A  bay  of  very  shallow  water  makes  in  here,  and  Taquainenon  island 
is  a  (2^)  miles  outside  of  a  line  joining  the  NW.  and  UK.  pc.ints  of  this 
bay.    All  inshore  of  the  island  is  shallow,  with  rocky  bottom. 

Off  Menekaunee,  at  the  SE.  jwint  of  this  shallow  bay,  and  as  tar  as 
Salt  point,  are  numerous  rocks. 

All  of  this  coast,  from  Whitetish  point  to  Salt  point,  should  be 
approached  with  caution.  From  Salt  point  to  Iroquois  point  the  shore 
is  more  bold,  but  2  (2^)  miles  west,  a  little  north  from  the  latter  point, 
a  shoal  makes  out,  and  near  its  NW.  end  is  Iroquois  island.  Iroquois 
point  is  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  to  St.  Marys  river. 

Light— A  flashing  white  light  every  thirty  seconds  is  shown  from 
this  jioint.  It  is  exhibited  from  a  conical  white  tower,  connected  with 
a  dwelling  by  a  covered  way.    Visible  14  (16J)  miles. 

Pog  aignaL—A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  flvo  seconds, 
followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

ONTARIO. 

The  eastern  shore  of  the  bay  belongs  to  Canada.  Gros  Cap  is  the 
north  entrance  point  to  St.  Marys  river,  and  is  steep-to.  Gouluis  point, 
north  of  Gros  Cap,  is  also  8tee;).to.  Within  this  point  are  Goulais  bay 
and  river. 

Pariaian  island  (Canadian)  is  almost  in  the  center  of  Whiteflsh 
bay  and  6  (7)  miles  west  of  Goulais  point.  It  is  4^  (5^)  miles  north 
and  south,  about  one  mile  wide,  and  surrounded  with  rocks  which  are 
close-to. 

Shoal.-— A  rochy  shoal,  least  water  8  feet,  lies  2  (2^)  miles  north  of 
Parisian  island,  it  extends  over  a  mile  east  and  west,  and  is  marked 
by  a  buoy  on  its  N  >  V.  end. 

Remarks.— The  northwestern,  northern,  and  eastern  shore  of  lake 
Superior  from  Duluth  east  will  now  be  described. 

NORTHWESTERN   SHORE   OK   LAKE   SUPERIOR. 
MINNESOTA. 

Coast— From  Duluth  north  the  shore  is  rocky  and  bold,  with  no 
dangerous  reefs.  At  16  (18^)  miles  fi-om  Duluth  is  the  Knife  river, 
and  at  its  mouth,  extending  to  the  northeastward  from  Granite  point, 
is  isle  aux  Eoches,  known  as  Knife  island  in  this  part  of  the  country. 


80 


LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


Isle  aux  Roches  is  joined  to  the  mainland  by  a  rocky  reef;  vessels 
bound  for  Knife  river  mast  round  it  to  the  northeastward.  From  here 
on  to  Agate  bay  the  shore  can  be  approached  close-to. 

Agate  bay  is  a  small  indentation  on  the  NW.  shore  of  lake  Superior, 
23^  (27)  miles  from  Duluth,  and,  although  it  has  ample  depth  of  water, 
it  is  neither  j^rotected  naturally  from  the  SW.  nor  from  the  reverse 
swell  of  the  more  dangerous  storms  of  the  NE.  To  protect  shipping 
at  the  wharves,  which  would  otherwise  be  greatly  exposed,  it  is  the 
intention  to  construct  two  breakwater  piers  on  a  line  toward  each 
other  from  the  eastern  and  western  points  of  the  bay,  leaving  an  open- 
ing of  1,340  feet  between  their  extremities.  There  is  not  yet  perfect 
security  from  the  SW.  storms  for  vessels  lying  at  the  docks,  but  it  is 
no  longer  necessary  to  put  to  sea  and  seek  security  elsewhere. 

Two  Harbors  light — On  the  point  separating  Agate  and  Burling- 
ton bays  a  fixed  red  light  is  shown  78  feet  above  the  lake  level  and 
visible  11^  (13)  miles.  The  lighttower  is  square,  red  brick,  and  rises 
flrom  the  SW.  corner  of  ».  two-story  dwelling. 

Fog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle,  giving  blasts  of  five  seconds 
duicition,  with  alternate  intervals  of  silence  of  seventeen  and  thirty- 
three  seconds,  is  sounded  from  a  building  100  feet  SW.  from  the 
lighthouse. 

Two  Harbors  breakwater  light. — On  outer  end  of  breakwater 
at  east  side  of  entrance  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light.  It  is  suspended 
from  a  brown  post  30  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Coast — To  the  northward  of  this  light  lies  Burlington  bay,  and 
from  here  on  the  coast  is  bold  and  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile.  About 
2f  (3^o)  miles  above  this  bay  a  rock  lies  close  to  shore,  and  2^  (3)  miles 
from  this  rook  lies  Encampment  island.  When  within  4  mile  of  Goose- 
berry river,  a  good  lookout  must  be  kept  for  an  offlying  reef.  This 
dangerous  reef  lies  ^  mile  from  shore,  is  of  small  area,  and  has  but  12^ 
feet  of  water  over  it  at  the  shoalest  place.  There  is  deep  water  all 
around  it.  It  is  a  dangerous  obstruction  to  vessels  coasting  the  north 
shore  of  the  lake. 

Between  Beaver  bay,  10  (11})  miles  beyond,  and  Palisades,  are  a  few 
shoal  spots  close  to  shore. 

To  the  northward  from  these  reefs  the  coast  is  clear  until  Two  Islands 
river  is  reached,  off  the  mouth  of  which  are  2  islands ;  from  these  on, 
the  only  outljring  danger  is  Bock  island,  f  mile  off  shore,  and  1^  (1^) 
miles  E.  by  N.  (N.  79°  E.)  from  Terrace  point. 

G-rand  Marais  is  3^  (3f )  miles  from  Bock  island,  and  offers  the  only 
harbor  of  refuge  during  storms  betweon  Agate  bay  aad  Pigeon  river, 
the  international  boundary  line,  a  distance  of  110  (126^)  miles.  It  is 
the  intention  to  build  one  pier  from  the  east  point,  and  dredge  an 
anchorage  to  a  depth  of  at  least  16  feet.  The  anchorage  basin  now  is 
25  acres  in  extent,  with  16  feet  at  low  water  (January,  1890).  This  will 
make  an  excellent  harbor  of  refuge.  The  anchorage  is  compact  in 
shape  and  fairly  well  protected. 


ty  reef;  vessels 
rd.    From  here 

f  lake  Superior, 
depth  of  water, 
om  the  reverse 
rotect  shipping 
)osed,  it  is  the 
le  toward  each 
laving  an  open- 
not  yet  perfect 
docks,  but  it  is 
where. 

;e  and  Burling- 
lake  level  and 
trick,  and  rises 

of  five  seconds 
len  and  thirty- 
SW.  from  the 

of  breakwater 
b  is  suspended 

gton  bay,  and 
i  mile.  About 
*nd  2J  (3)  miles 
mile  of  Goose- 
ng  reef.  This 
Dd  has  but  12^ 
deep  water  all 
ting  the  north 

ades,  are  a  few 

;il  Two  Islands 
from  these  on, 
re,  and  IJ  (1^) 

offers  the  only 
Pigeon  river, 
r)  miles.  It  is 
nd  dredge  an 
>  basin  now  is 
96).  This  will 
is  compact  in 


NORTHERN  SHORE. 


31 


m  .oimtAvmiti&i::- 


Light— On  the  outer  end  of  the  breakwater  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  llj  (ISJ)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  shown  from  a  square,  white, 
pyramid<il  tower. 

Fog  signal— A  bell,  hanging  in  front  of  the  tower,  is  struck  by 
machinery,  a  double  blow  every  thirty  seconds. 

Coast— From  Grand  Marais  to  the  eastward  the  shore  continues 
bold,  with  the  exception  of  a  shoal  ENE.  J  E.  (N.  69°  E.)  4J  (5)  miles 
from  Grand  Marais  light.  In  Portage  bay  it  is  shoal,  and  a  shoal  spot 
of  7  feet  lies  westward  of  Hat  point.  To  the  east  of  Wauswaugoning 
bay  many  islands  and  shoals  project  south  from  the  mainland,  Lucille 
island  being  the  farthest  off  shore,  with  a  few  rocks  J  mile  oft'  its  south 
point. 

Pigeon  point  forms  the  SE.  point  of  Pigeon  bay.  Through  this  bay 
the  boundary  line,  dividing  the  United  States  from  Canada,  runs  to 
the  mouth  of  Pigeon  river.  The  south  half  of  the  bay  belongs  to  the 
United  States,  the  north  half  with  the  islands,  lying  in  the  center  of 
the  bay,  to  Canada. 

NORTHERN  SHORE  OF  LAKE  SUPERIOR. 
CANADA. 

General  remarks. — Coast — From  here  on  but  little  surveying  has 
been  done.  All  along  this  north  shore  the  coast  is  bold  and  wild,  rocky 
and  bluff,  presentiiig  almost  continuous  ranges  of  cliffs,  which  vary  in 
height  from  300  to  1,500  feet,  and  rich  in  mineral  wealth,  native  copper 
and  silver  being  found.  The  only  ore  of  lead  met  with  in  Canada  is 
the  sulphuret  of  galena.  At  Thunder  bay,  and  in  the  Nipigon  region 
to  the  north  of  lake  Superior,  very  numerous  and  valuable  veins  of  ore 
are  found.  Innumerable  small  islands  and  rocks  extend  for  a  short 
distance  from  the  shore.  Cascades  without  number  can  be  seen  falling 
down  the  steep  cliffs,  and  the  air  is  generally  so  clear  that  objects  can 
be  distinguished  at  a  great  distance.  The  caution  must  again  be  given 
not  to  approach  this  north  shore  too  close  until  more  accurate  surveys 
have  been  made. 

On  account  of  the  incomplete  surveys,  the  outside  course  in  making 
Thunder  cape  will  only  be  regarded  until  complete  information  can  be 
obtained.  From  the  Pigeon  river  the  land  trends  to  the  northeast- 
ward, and  along  the  coast  are  found  Pigeon  bay;  Pine  River  bay,  and 
Big  Trout  bay.  Two  (2J)  miles  from  the  NE.  point  of  the  latter  bay 
lies  Victoria  island,  sometimes  known  as  Knob  island.  There  are  a 
few  islets  and  rocks  lying  off  its  east  shore. 

Victoria  Island  light— A  fixed  white  light,  89  feet  above  the  lake 
level  and  visible  15  (ITJ)  miles,  is  exhibitedfrom  a  white,  square  tower, 
with  a  red  lantern.    This  lighthouse  is  near  the  west  side  of  the  island. 

Islands.— Passing  to  the  NE.,  Spar  island  and  Thompson  island  are 
passed,  with  no  outlying  dangers,  but  in  the  passage  between  are  many 
rbcks,  and  its  passage  should  not  be  attempted. 


32 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


Oflf  the  NE.  end  of  Thompson  island  a  chain  of  small  islands  extends 
for  a  mile,  and  IJ  (1^)  miles  farther  on  are  several  groups  of  rocks 
awash. 

Pie  island  is  generally  smrounded  by  reefs,  and  2  (2^)  miles  oflF  its 
eastern  side  are  several  rocks  and  reefs.  It  should  be  given  a  berth  of 
2J  (2^)  miles.    Le  Pate,  a  hill  on  its  8W.  end,  is  850  feet  high. 

If  entering  Thunder  bay,  it  is  best  to  get  about  2  (2^)  miles  from 
Thunder  cape  before  shaping  coarse  in. 

Pie  Island  light— On  the  west  extremity  of  Pie  island  from  a  square, 
white  tower  surmounted  by  a  red  lantern  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light, 
29  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  10  (11^)  miles.  The  light  is 
intended  to  guide  through  the  inside  channel,  west  of  Pie  island. 

Wharf.— There  is  a  wharf  400  feet  NE.  of  the  lighthouse,  which 
extends  500  feet  in  a  northwesterly  direction. 

Thunder  cape  is  an  immense  mass  of  trap  1,350  feet  high,  and  on 
its  extreme  SW.  point  is  a  lighthouse  from  which  is  exhibited  a  light, 
and  near  the  lighthouse  is  a  fog  signal  station. 

Light— A  revolving  white  light,  attaining  its  greatest  brilliancy 
every  minute,  and  visible  12  (13f )  miles  in  clear  weather.  It  is  46  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  and  shows  from  a  square,  white  tower  with  a 
dwelling  attached. 

Pog  signal— A  steam  horn  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds,  followed 
by  silent  intervals  of  twenty-flve  seconds. 

Thunder  bay  is  an  extensive  diamond-shaped  sheet  of  water  sur- 
rounded by  grand  scenery.  All  around  it  are  cliffs  rising  fh)m  1,000  to 
1,500  feet  out  of  the  lake.  It  is  30  (34^)  miles  NE.  and  8  W.  and  13  (15) 
miles  NW.  and  SB.,  and  narrows  at  its  SW.  and  NE.  ends. 

Directions.— In  entering  Thunder  bay.  Thunder  cape  should  be 
approached  bearing  N.  by  E.  |  E.  (N.  15°  E.),  nothing  to  the  eastward, 
and  when  the  cape  is  2  (2J)  miles  distant,  shape  a  course  NW.  J  W. 
(N.  50°  W.)  for  Port  Arthur,  or  until  the  Kaministiquia  Ughts  for  Fort 
William  come  in  range.  This  course  should  carry  a  vessel  a  good  J 
mile  clear  of  the  Welcome  islands,  after  passing  which  Fort  William 
will  open  out. 

Port  William  is  in  a  beautiful  valley  at  the  foot  of  mount  McKay, 
which  rises  900  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  is  near  the  mouth  of  the 
Kaministiquia  river,  on  its  north  branch.  The  mouth  of  this  river 
forms  a  delta  of  three  branches,  the  Big  Fork  or  southern,  the  Little 
Fork  or  center,  and  the  main  river  or  northern  branch;  all  of  these  are 
navigable  for  small  vessels,  but  it  is  on  the  noith  shore  of  the  northern 
branch  that  the  docks  are  situated.  The  channel  through  the  slight 
bar  that  exists  is  indicated  by  six  buoys,  three  on  either  hand,  and  on 
the  mainland  two  range  lights  show  the  course  at  night. 

Kaministiquia  river — Inside,  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  completely 
sheltered,  and  is  from  300  to  400  feet  wide,  having,  with  the  exception 
of  two  or  three  shallow  places,  a  depth  of  from  16  to  25  feet  for  a 


mS&^'^ 


PORT  ARTHUR — BLACK  BAT. 


88 


nds  extends 
ps  of  rockB 

miles  off  its 

n  a  berth  of 

liigh. 

I  miles  from 

)m  a  square, 
white  Ught, 
The  light  is 
island, 
rase,  whioh 

ligh,  and  on 
ited  a  light, 

it  brilliancy 
It  is  45  feet 
>wer  with  a 

ids,  followed 

f  water  sur- 
from  1,000  to 
.and  13  (15) 

■ 

should  be 

eastward, 

NW.  i  W. 

hta  for  Fort 

lel  a  good  ^ 

ort  William 

int  McKay, 
louth  of  the 
this  river 
the  Little 
of  these  are 
16  northern 
the  slight 
ind,  and  on 

completely 
excei>tiou 
feet  for  a 


distance  of  3}  (4)  miles.    The  bed  is  of  stiff  clay,  and  is  subject  to  no 
shifting  sand  bars. 

Lights. — On  the  north  shore  of  the  river,  just  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Ganadiau  Pacific  Railway  docks  and  elevators,  is  exhibited  a  fixed 
white  lig1>t,  visible  11  (12§)  miles,  and  879  feet  ENE.  (N.  68°  E.)  from 
this  one  is  a  second  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (11^)  miles.  These 
lights  in  range  lead  through  the  dredged  channel  at  the  mouth  of  the 
river. 

Signals. — There  is  a  signal  mast  near  the  range,  the  signals  here 
made  being  the  same  as  those  shown  at  Port  Arthur,  from  which  place 
they  are  ordered. 

Port  Arthur. — The  harbor  is  an  open  one,  the  docks  being  protected 
by  two  breakwaters.  Thirty-one  feet  from  the  southwestern  end  of  the 
northern  breakwater,  and  serving  as  a  guide  to  the  passage  between 
the  two,  is  a  light  tower. 

There  is  a  consular  agent  of  the  United  States  stationed  at  this  port. 

Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  43  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible 
11  (12§)  miles,  is  exhibited  from  a  white,  square  tower  on  crib  work. 

Signal  mast. — ^The  signal  mast  is  on  the  Canadian  Pacific  Railway 
dock,  its  position  being  48°  26'  05"  N.  and  89°  12'  55"  W.  Elevation 
above  the  sea  level  650  feet. 

A^^aox  master. — ^A  harbor  master  is  stationed  here  who  has  charge 
c'^'T  .i:  vessels  calling  at  the  port,  and  who  must  be  obeyed  accord- 
ir  ...  failure  to  comply  with  his  orders  subjects  the  person  to  penal- 
tioji  imposed  by  the  Revised  Statutes  of  Canada. 

Silver  islet— A  little  over  5  (5|)  miles  ENE.  from  Thunder  cape 
lies  Silver  islet,  a  patch  of  rock  of  small  extent,  but  from  which  large 
quantities  of  silver  have  been  taken. 

Continuing  to  the  eastward,  the  entrance  of  Black  bay  is  passed,  in 
the  middle  of  which  lies  a  group  of  islets  and  rocks  2^  (3)  miles  NE. 
by  N.  and  SW.  by  S.  The  east  side  of  the  entrance  is  shown  by  a 
light  fower  on  Porphyry  point. 

Light. — ^A  fixed  white  light,  56  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  here  shown 
from  ft  white  square  tower.    It  is  visible  13  (15)  miles. 

Blaok  bay  is  30  (34|)  miles  in  depth  from  the  light  tower  to  the 
mouth  of  the  Black  river.  The  channel  between  the  islets  and  Edward 
island  is  apparently  clear  of  dangers.  Off  the  NW.  face  of  Edward  island 
are  several  islands  with  shoals  between.  They  should  be  given  a  good 
berth.  The  point  north  of  Pearl  river  has  a  reef  extendi'ig  some  dis- 
tance to  the  SE.,  and  Granite  island  is  connected  to  the  shore  by  a  reef 
which  extends  also  SSW.  in  the  direction  of  the  above  point.  There 
are  also  some  rock  eastward  of  Granite  island.  The  point  abreast  the 
Paps  has  a  reef  extending  to  the  SW.  A  mid-channel  course  should 
generally  be  kept,  but  this  bay,  as  well  as  all  the  others  on  this  coast, 
has  been  very  imperfectly  surveyed,  and  should  be  navigated  with 
great  care. 

1944^jfo.  108 3 


34 


LAKE    SUPERIOR. 


The  rWers  emptying  into  these  bays  teem  with  trout,  and  there  is  a 
plentiful  supply  of  feathered  game. 

Nipigon  bay. — The  entrances  to  this  bay  are  the  west  channel  and 
Nipigon  strait,  St.  Tgnace  channel,  and  the  east  channel.  There  is  also 
an  entrance  along  the  north  shore.  The  bay  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Nipigon  river  to  Salter  island  is  27  (31)  miles  long,  and  is  studded  with 
islands.    St.  Ignaco  and  Simpson  islands  form  the  south  shore. 

Lamb  island  is  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  west  chan- 
nel, and  on  its  SE.  end  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light. — From  a  white  square  tower,  dwelling  attached,  is  shown,  90 
feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light  visible  16  (17f )  miles. 

Rock. — About  J  mile  north  of  the  lighthouse  is  a  dangerous  rock. 

Channels. — The  west  channel  is  12  (13 j^^,)  miles  from  the  lighttower 
to  its  outlet  into  the  bay.    It  separates  St.  Ignace  from  the  mainland. 

Nipigon  strait  leads  into  this  channel  between  Fluor  and  St.  Ignace 
islands.    Both  channels  have  many  rocks  and  reefs  in  them. 

In  the  channel  between  St.  Ignace  and  Simpson  islands  several  rocks 
and  shoals  are  shown.  Moffat  harbor  is  at  the  north  end  of  this 
channel. 

The  eastern  entrance,  east  of  Simpson  island,  is  4^  (5^^)  miles  long 
from  Battle  Island  light  to  the  north  end  of  Salter  island.  This  chan- 
nel is  wide,  bold,  ac.d  free  from  dangers,  except  at  its  entrance  north 
of  Salter  island.  Unless  locally  acquainted  it  should  be  used  in  enter- 
ing Nipigon  bay.  There  is  a.  shorter  and  narrower  channel  between 
Salter  and  Wilson  islands,  which  also  is  apparently  free  from  dangers. 

Caution. — Vessels  using  the  eastern  channel  are  warned  that  east 
of  a  line  tangent  to  the  west  point  of  Salter  island  and  the  west  shore 
of  the  high  bluff  on  the  north  shore  are  two  shoal  spots,  one  of  7  feet, 
t  mile  NW.  by  N.  (N.  34°  W.),  the  other  of  6  feet,  IJ  (If)  miles  N.  by  W. 
I  W.  (N.  20°  W.)  from  the  NW.  point  of  Salter  island. 

Battle  island  is  at  the  east  entrance  to  the  eastern  channel  and  the 
west  entrance  to  the  channel  next  east  of  it.  On  the  center  of  the 
island  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light. — From  a  white  square  lighthouse,  105  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  is  shown  an  alternating  red  and  white  light  every  half  minute. 
It  is  visible  16  (18^)  miles  in  clear  weather. 

Rossport  is  on  the  main  shore  of  Nipigon  bay,  abreast  the  channel 
between  Salter  and  Wilson  islands. 

Directions. — If  bound  to  Bossport,  use  this  channel.  A  mid-channel 
course  N.  by  W.  f  W.  (N.  20°  W.)  will  carry  through  the  channel  and 
into  the  harbor,  which  has  shoal  water  at  its  head. 

Coast. — Proceeding  eastward,  the  north  shore  of  the  main  coast  has 
many  indentations,  among  which  are  Terrace  bay,  Jack  Fish  bay, 
McKellars  harbor.  Bed  Sucker  cove,  and  Peninsula  harbor.  This  latter 
harbor  is  well  protected  and  has  deep  water.  Off  Jack  Fish  bay  5  (5J) 
miles  are  the  Slate  islands,  a  large  group.    North  of  Slate  islands  1^ 


■K.. 


id  there  is  a 

channel  and 

There  is  also 

nonth  of  the 

jtudded  with 

ihore. 

le  west  chan- 

is  shown,  90 
f )  miles, 
erous  rock, 
le  lighttower 
le  mainland, 
nd  St.  Iguace 
)m. 
several  rocks 

end  of  this 

»^)  miles  long 
.  This  chan- 
itrance  north 
used  in  enter- 
mnel  between 
from  dangers, 
[led  that  east 
he  west  shore 
one  of  7  feet, 
liles  N.  by  W. 

),nnel  and  the 
center  of  the 

>ove  the  lake 
half  minute. 

;  the  channol 

.  mid-channel 
channel  and 

laiu  coast  has 
ok  Fish  bay, 
This  latter 
ish  bay  5  (5|) 
ito  islands  1^ 


PENINSULA   HARBOR — OAROANTUA  HARBOR. 


35 


(1-^)  miles  is  a  10-foot  shoal.  Pic  island,  SB.  of  MoKcUars  harbor,  is 
about  ^  mile  off  shore.  East  of  Pic  island  are  many  outlying  rocks  and 
reefs. 

Feninsnla  harbor. — Directions. — If  from  the  westward  pass  south 
of  Pic  island,  and  do  not  head  to  the  northward  of  east  until  the  light 
at  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  bears  NE.,  when  head  in  on  this  bearing 
and  run  into  the  harbor  through  the  sonth  entrance,  leaving  the  light 
^  mile  to  port.  The  north  entrance  is  foul.  The  peninsula,  a  rocky 
bluff,  protects  the  harbor  from  the  south. 

Manitoba  shoal  of  8  feet  lies  in  the  northern  entrance  to  Peninsula 
harbor,  and  is  about  midway  between  the  island  at  the  entrance  and 
the  main  shore.    Its  position  has  not  been  well  established. 

Peninsula  Harbor  light — At  the  south  end  of  the  island  is  a  light 
revolving  white  every  thirty  seconds.  It  is  105  feet  above  the  lake 
level  and  visible  16  (18^)  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  white  and  square, 
with  dwelling  attached. 

Coast — To  the  south  firom  Peninsula  harbor  the  coast  trends  to  the 
southward  for  40  (46)  miles  to  Otter  head,  and  from  here  it  curves 
gradually  to  the  east  to  the  head  of  Michipicoten  harbor,  about  55  (63^) 
miles.  Bound  to  the  southward,  a  course  of  S.  by  E.  J  E.  (S.  14°  E.) 
ftom  Peninsula  light  will  carry  4  (ifg)  miles  off  Otter  head.  North  of 
Otter  head  12^  (14^^)  miles  and  6  (6^^)  miles  is  a  hill  1,530  feet  high, 
which  should  be  a  prominent  landmark  all  along  this  coast. 

Michipicoten  harbor. — At  Michipicoten,  a  river  of  the  same  name 
empties  into  the  bay.  It  is  navigable  up  to  the  falls,  a  distance  of  15 
miles. 

The  water  is  deep  and  the  harbor  affords  protection  from  all  north- 
erly and  easterly  winds. 

Bruise  bay. — Brul6e  point  is  the  sonth  point  of  Michipieoten  harbor 
and  between  this  point  and  Grindstone  point  is  Bruise  bay,  ^'.  ith  Great 
Lake  river  at  its  head.  Grindstone  point  is  the  north  point  of  cape 
Choyye. 

Cape  Gargantua  is  the  next  point  south,  with  Indian  harbor  small 
and  full  of  rocks,  just  north  of  it.  To  the  southward  of  the  cape  is  a 
small  bay  also  filled  with  rocks,  and  then  is  Gargantua  harbor. 

Gargantua  Harbor  light — ^The  tower  stands  on  the  summit  of  a 
small  Island  in  the  mouth  of  the  harbor,  and  Is  a  white,  hexagonal 
building,  43  feet  high,  wiLh  the  lantern  surmounting  it  painted  red. 

The  dwelling  is  on  the  mainland  on  the  north  side  of  the  harbor  in  a 
sheltered  position. 

The  light  is  fixed  white,  elevated  97  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lake, 
and  should  be  visible  from  all  points  seaward  16  (17^)  miles. 

Coast — South  of  Gargantua  and  between  cape  Gargantua  and  Cop- 
permine point  is  a  wide  indentation,  in  which  are  several  islands  and 
shoals,  and  vessels  navigating  in  this  vicinity  should  not  go  insid6  of 
a  line  joining  these  points. 


36 


LAKE  SUPEBIOR. 


Gull  island,  Lea«h  island,  the  Lizard  islands,  and  Montreal  island 
are  all  surrounded  by  reefs  and  shoals,  and  there  are  also  shoals  between 
these  islands. 

Montreal  shoal,  with  5  feet  over  it,  lies  on  a  line  joining  the  west 
side  of  Montreal  island  and  Point  aax  Mines,  and  is  west  of  the  mouth 
of  the  Montreal  river. 

Mica  bay  is  between  Point  aux  Mines  and  Mamainse  point. 

Mica  shoal,  with  11  feet  over  it,  lies  off  Mica  bay,  and  on  a  line  join- 
ing cape  Gargantua  and  Ooppf  rmine  point. 

Coppermine  point  is  the  NW.  end  of  a  broad  point,  the  SW. 
extreme  being  Pancake  point.  North  of  Coppermine  point  is  Sand 
bay,  small,  and  with  the  Hibbards  rocks  in  its  ajiproach.  Just  south 
of  Coppermine  point  is  an  offlying  rock  close  to  the  shore.  Pancake 
point  is  surrounded  by  shoals,  and  east  of  the  point  is  a  small  bay, 
into  which  Devil  river  empties. 

Pancake  shoal  lies  3^  (3f )  miles  SW.  of  Pancake  point.  It  is  a 
dangerous  shoal,  and  has  from  4  to  6  feet  water  over  it. 

Buoy. — A  bell  buoy  marks  this  shoal. 

Outer  Pancake  shoal  has  11  feet  over  it,  and  lies  2  (2^)  miles  SW. 
of  Pancake  shoal. 

Corboy  point  is  the  north  entrance  point  to  Batchewana  bay,  and 
on  the  point  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light — From  a  white  octagonal  tower,  dwelling  attached,  is  shown 
77  feet  above  the  lake  level  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  16  (18^)  miles. 

Batchewana  bay  is  between  Corboy  point  and  Budder  Heiul  point. 
The  bay  is  nearly  landlocked,  and  a  large  island  lies  in  the  mif'dle 
of  it.  It  is  sepi^  rated  from  the  north  shore  of  the  main  by  a  narrow 
channel  and  on  the  south  by  a  passage  of  shoal  water  (8  feet)  2  (2^) 
miles  wide. 

Goulais  point  is  9  (10^)  miles  south  of  Rudder  Head  point.  Mid- 
way between  the  points  and  a  mile  offshore  is  Maple  island,  surrounded 
and  connected  to  the  shore  by  a  shoal. 

Sandy  islands,  north  and  south,  are  south  of  Corboy  point  and  west 
of  Kudder  Head  point.  There  is  apparently  clear  water  between  the 
points  and  the  shoals  surrounding  the  islands. 

The  islands,  with  the  surrounding  shoals  and  reefs,  extend  north  and 
south  nearly  5  {5'^)  miles,  by  1^  (IJ)  miles  wide. 

Parisian  island  is  almost  in  the  center  of  Whiteflsh  bay.  It  is  sur- 
rounded by  rocks,  which  are  close-to.    See  page  29. 

ShoaL — A  rocky  shoal,  least  water  8  feet,  lies  2  (2^)  miles  north  of 
Parisian  island.  It  extends  over  a  mile  east  and  west,  and  is  marked 
by  a  buoy  on  its  NW.  end. 

Goulais  bay  is  within  Goulais  point.  The  Goulais  river  empties  into 
the  bay.  The  bay  is  deep,  and  affords  protection  from  all  northerly  and 
easterly  winds. 


Oii 


itreal  island 
oals  between 

ing  the  west 
of  the  mouth 

oint. 

n  a  line  join- 

iit,  the  8W. 
oint  is  Sand 
Just  south 
e.  Pancake 
a  small  bay, 

int.    It  is  a 


\)  miles  SW. 

ma  bay,  and 

ed,  is  shown 
18^)  miles. 
Heiid  point. 
I  the  mic'dle 
by  a  narrow 
8  feet)  2  (2^) 

point.    Mid- 
,  surrounded 

lint  and  west 
between  the 

id  north  and 

y.    It  is  snr- 

iles  north  of 
td  is  marked 

empties  into 
ortherly  and 


UNITED  STATES  ISLANDS. 


THE  ISLANDS  OF  LAKE  SUPERIOR. 


37 


IJnder  this  heading  will  be  considered  those  islands  in  the  lake 
which  lie  clear  of  the  coast  lines  and  which  can  not  be  regarded  as 
forming  bounds  to  any  bays  or  harbors.  Of  these,  there  are:  The 
Apostle  group,  nineteen  in  number;  Isle  Eoyale,  Passage  and  Gull 
islands,  Maiiitou  island,  Huron  islands,  and  Granite  island  in  the 
waters  of  the  United  States.  Slate  and  Pic  islands,  Michipicoten  and 
Caribou,  Leach,  Lizard,  Montreal,  Sandy,  and  Parisian  islands  on  the 
Canadian  side. 

UNITED  STATES. 

The  Apostle  group  is  composed  of  nineteen  islands,  stretching  E. 
by  N.  23J  (27)  miles  from  the  NW.  point  of  Sund  island  to  the  NE. 
point  of  Outer  island,  and  25  (28|)  miles  SW.  i  S.  from  this  latter  point 
to  the  SW.  point  of  Magdalene  island.  Sand  island  is  the  western, 
Devils  island  the  northern,  Outer  island  the  northeastern,  and  Mag- 
dalene island  the  southern.  There  are  no  important  ports.  There 
are  several  lighthouses,  which  are  described  on  pages  16  and  17.  The 
passages  through  the  group  are  generally  clear  of  dangers,  the  shores 
bold,  and  the  water  deep.  The  outlying  spits  are  described,  where 
necessary,  under  Dangers. 

ShoaL— The  steamer  Omaha,  drawing  14  feet,  struck  a  shoal  with 
Devils  Island  light  bearing  W.  by  N.  (S.  79°  W.),  distant  about  1^(19) 
miles. 

Mariners  are  cautioned  to  look  out  for  this  shoal,  as  it  is  not 
marked  on  the  charts,  although  the  charts  indicate  a  shoaling  of  the 
water  between  Devils  island  and  iforth  Twin  island. 

Anchorages.— Between  Sand  island  and  Detour  station,  in  4  or  5 
fathoms,  protected  from  north  winds  and  a  partial  breakwater  afforded 
by  the  shoal  connecting  Sand  island  with  the  mainland.  The  east  side 
of  Sand  island  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  Between  Rocky  and  South  Twin 
islands  in  10  fathoms.  The  SE.  coast  of  Stockton  island.  A  peninsula 
here  projects  IJ  (1|)  miles  into  the  lake,  having  bays  on  both  sides  with 
from  4  to  10  fathoms.  Fnder  the  NE.  point  of  Cat  island  in  4  fathoms. 
Outer  island  affords  anchorage  on  all  sides,  except  near  the  SW.  point. 
Magdalene  island;  many  good  anchorages  along  the  eastern  coast,  and 
at  La  Pointe,  protection  from  NE.  gales. 

Isle  Royale  is  40  (46)  miles  longNE.  and  SW.  by  7J  (8J)  miles  wide, 
the  widest  part  No  important  ports.  Dangers  described  in  first  part 
of  this  work.  There  are  many  harbors  along  the  coast  of  the  island, 
Grace  and  Washington  harbors  and  Rainbow  cove  on  the  SW.  end, 
Todd  harbor  and  McCargoe  cove  on  the  west  shore,  Duncan  bay,  Tobin 
and  Rock  harbors  on  the  NE.  end,  and  Chippewa  harbor  and  Siskiwit 
bay  on  the  SE.  shore.  Good  anchorage  can  also  be  found  between 
Wright  island  and  the  main  island  on  the  north  side  of  Siskiwit  bay. 


38 


LAKE   SUPERIOR. 


There  is  but  one  light,  that  is  on  Menagerie  island,  NB.  point  of  this 
same  bay. 

Light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  14^  (16J)  miles,  is  shown  from  an 
octagonal  white  tower,  connected  by  a  covered  way,  with  a  dark  brown, 
stone  dwelling. 

Canoe  rocks  are  nearly  2  (2J)  miles  NW.  of  Lock  point.  There  is  a 
4-foot  spot  a  mile  NE.  of  the  larger  rock  and  a  3  foot  spot  3  (3^)  miles 
8W.  of  the  same  rock. 

Passage  island,  1^  (If)  miles  long,  is  3  (3^)  miles  NE.  from  Blake 
point,  the  northeastern  point  of  Isle  Boynle.  The  shores  are  bold 
close-to.  A  small  bay  on  the  east  side  with  3 J  fathoms  aflfords  shelter 
firom  the  NW. 

Light.— On  the  SW.  point  of  this  island  is  a  fixed  red  light,  visible 
114  (13)  miles  in  clear  weather.  It  is  exhibited  from  an  octagonal 
tower  rising  from  a  dwelling,  both  built  of  gray  stone. 

Pog  signal- In  fi"ont  of  the  lighthouse  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle. 
During  thick  weather  a  blast  of  five  seconds  is  souuded,  each  blast 
followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

Shoala- East  of  Blake  i>oint  f  mile  is  a  4-foot  spot  with  an  18-foot 
spot  a  little  NB.  of  it.  A  shoal  dangerous  to  deep-draft  vessels  has 
been  reported  as  lying  midway  between  Blake  point  and  Passage 
island.    Its  exact  position  is  not  known. 

OuU  islands,  officially  Isle  Ohapeau,  lie  3  (3J)  miles  NE.  from  Pas- 
sage island.    They  are  a  group  of  low-lying  rocks. 

ShoaL— NW.  of  the  Gull  islands  2  (2J)  miles  is  a  9-foot  shoal  with 
flrom  11  to  31  fathoms  around.    South  of  Gull  island  J  mile  is  a  reef. 

Battean  rock  is  6^  (7^)  miles  east  of  the  Gull  islands.  A  little  east 
of  the  rock  is  a  3-foot  shoal. 

Manitou  island,  2^  (3)  miles  long  by  a  mile  wide,  Ues  off  Keweenaw 
point.    See  page  — . 

Hnron  islands.    See  page  25. 

Granite  island.    See  page  25. 

CANADA. 

On  this  side  of  the  lake  there  are  very  few  outlying  islands. 

Slate  islands  are  about  the  middle  of  the  north  coast  line,  the  north 
point  being  6  (6f )  miles  from  Victoria  cape  ou  the  main.  There  are 
eight  islands  of  any  noticeable  size,  the  largest  being  3  J  (4)  miles  north 
and  south  by  4J  (4,'^)  miles  east  and  west.  There  are  numbers  of  out- 
lying rocks,  and  a  10-foot  shoal  lies  IJ  (1  A)  miles  north  of  the  group. 

Pic  island,  760  feet  high,  8  (9^)  miles  west  of  the  peninsula,  is  of  an 
irregular  shape,  bold  with  deep  water,  and  has  small  islands  off  the 
NE.  and  south  coasts. 

Miohipieoten  island  is  the  largest  of  the  Canadian  islands,  being 
15J  (17 ^0)  miles  long  by  6  (7)  miles  wide.  The  shores  should  be  ap- 
proached cautiously  on  account  of  outlying  dangers. 


point  of  this 

hown  from  an 
a  dark  brown, 

t.  There  is  a 
•t  3  (3^)  miles 

D.  from  Blake 
wes  are  bold 
ffords  shelter 

light,  visible 
an  octagonal 

team  whistle, 
id,  each  blast 

ith  an  18-foot 
ft  vessels  has 
and  Passage 

E.  from  Pas- 

)t  shoal  with 
le  is  a  reef. 
A  little  east 

flf  Keweenaw 


nds. 

ine,  the  north 
I.  There  are 
I)  miles  north 
abers  of  out- 
the  group, 
mla,  is  of  an 
ands  off  the 


CANADIAN  ISLANDS. 


39 


Qnebec  harbor  Is  abont  the  middle  of  the  south  coast.  On  a  hesid- 
laud,  the  east  point  of  entrance  to  this  harbor,  is  a  liKhthouse. 

Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  15  (17:^)  miles,  is  exhibited  from 
a  white,  square  tower,  at  50  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Fog  signaL — A  bell  rung  by  machinery. 

Agate  island  is  a  snmll  island  in  Quebec  harbor,  and  on  it  is  a  light- 
house. 

Light — A  fixed  white  light  is  shown,  32  feet  above  the  lake  level, 
from  a  white,  square  tower. 

Shoals. — In  entering  Quebec  harbor  the  first  shoal  encountered  is 
south  of  Agate  island  and  west  of  the  main  light.  It  is  a  solid  edge 
with  8  feet  over  it. 

The  second  shoal,  of  bowlders  with  8  feet  over  them,  lies  in  the  cen- 
ter of  the  channel,  oppo8it.e  the  SE.  end  of  Agate  island. 

Buoys.— Both  shoals  are  marked  by  black  and  white  buoys.  There 
is  18  feet  on  either  side  of  the  buoys. 

Caribou  island,  19  (21  j<^)  miles  south  of  Quebec  harbor,  is  3  (3J) 
miles  north  and  south.  The  whole  west  side  of  the  island  is  lined  with 
dangerous  reefs,  which  extend  to  the  SW.  for  3  (3J)  miles.  There  are 
also  offlying  reefs  on  the  east  side  of  the  island.  Vessels  should  give 
the  island  a  wide  berth. 

Caribou  Island  light. — A  revolving  white  light,  attaining  its  great- 
est brilliancy  every  ten  seconds,  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  vis- 
ible 15  (17J)  miles.  It  is  not  on  the  island  proper,  but  on  a  \ery  small 
island  a  little  SW.  from  it.  The  tower,  white,  octagonal  in  shape,  has 
a  dwelling  attached.    The  lantern  is  painted  red. 

Fog  signal. — A  steam  horn  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds,  followed 
by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds  during  thick  weather. 

The  islands  south  of  cape  Gargautua  and  in  Whitefish  bay  have  been 
described  o  i  page  29. 


slands,  being 
hoidd  be  ap- 


iTgrmiita' . 


CHAPTER  III. 

8T.  MARYS  RIVER  ASTD  DETOUR  PASSAGE. 
ST.  MARYS  RIVER. 

Tliis  river  forms  the  connecting  link  between  lakes  Snporior  and 
Huron.  At  Sault  Ste.  Marie  navigation  in  the  early  days  was  inter- 
rupted by  the  rapids,  the  river  here  descending  22  feet  in  a  distance  of 
f  mile 

Through  this  river  runs  the  boundary  line  between  the  United 
States  and  Canada.  All  the  larger  islands  in  the  river  belong  to  the 
United  States,  excepting  St.  Joseph  and  Squirrel  islands,  which  belong 
to  Gauada. 

From  abreast  of  Iroquois  point  on  the  lake  Superior  end  to  Detour 
point  on  lake  Huron  is  71 J  (82  j)  miles.  The  only  places  of  any  impor- 
tance are  the  towns  of  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  situated  on  either  side  of  the 
river  at  the  rapids.  To  facilitate  navigation  at  this  point,  a  canal  was 
dug  on  the  United  States  side. 

St  Marys  Falls  canaL— This  canal  is  7,000  feet  in  length,  with  a* 
least  width  of  108  feet  at  movable  dam  in  upper  end.    Greatest  width 
is  256  feet  just  above  the  lock.    The  depth  of  canal  is  26  feet.    The 
canal  is  lighted  by  arc  lights. 

The  dimensions  of  the  new  lock  are:  Ler^th  800  feet  between  gates, 
width  100  feet  throughout,  with  21  feet  of  water  on  sills,  with  a  single 
lift  of  18  feet. 

Canadian  canal — The  canal  is  cut  through  red  sandstone  rock  on 
the  nort?'  or  Canadian  side  of  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  about  4,000  feet  north 
of  the  existing  United  States  canal.  The  cut  is  straight  and  is  6,900 
feet  long  between  the  extremities  of  the  crib-work  approaches.  The 
canal  prism  is  166  feet  in  width  at  the  surface,  143  feet  at  the  bottom, 
and  the  water  is  22  feet  3  inches  d  ?ep.  There  is  one  lock,  which  is  900 
feet  long  by  60  feet  wide,  with  a  depth  on  the  miter  sill  of  20  feet  3 
inches.  The  lift  is  about  18  feet,  varying  somewhat  as  the  waters  above 
or  below  the  canal  are  affected  by  drought,  rain,  wind,  etc.  Outside 
the  canal,  at  each  end,  a  channel  18  feet  deep  by  250  feet  wide  has  been 
dredged,  connecting  with  the  American  channels. 
40 


nU0Y8 — LTOHTS. 


41 


GE. 


3»ipprior  and 
ys  was  inter- 
a  distance  of 

tlie  United 
)elong  to  the 
which  belong 

nd  to  Detour 
)f  any  impor- 
er  Hide  of  the 
,  a  canal  was 

ngth,  with  a* 
reatest  width 
J6  feet.    The 

^tween  gates, 
with  a  single 

tone  rock  on 

1)0  feet  north 

and  is  5,900 

oachos.    The 

the  bottom, 

which  is  900 

of  20  feet  3 

waters  above 

)tc.    Ontside 

tide  has  been 


Bnoys. — Tho  appronchPH  are  niurked  by  spnr  bnoys.  Above  tlieranal 
there  is  lui  octagonal  timber  crib  siiriiiouiitod  by  a  diiy  bencon  built  on 
the  starboard  Hide  of  the  cliaiiiiel  od'  Davignoii  point,  to  mark  the  only 
torn  above  the  canal.  Tliere  are  two  red  buoys  between  the  end  of  the 
canal  embankment  and  this  beacon.  Tliere  is  a  black  buoy  on  the  south 
side  of  tlie  same  Htretch  and  two  black  buoys  to  mark  the  turn  op])o- 
sito  the  beacon.  Off  Vidal  shoal  there  »re  four  red  buoys.  The  outer- 
most of  tliese  bnoys  is  n  scinare  platform  buoy, -on  which  stands  a 
pyramidal  slat  work  surmonnted  by  nn  inverted  eon<».  On  the  port 
side  of  the  (;hanne1  are  fonr  black  spar  buoys.  The  platform  buoy 
indicates  a  point  where  vessels  bound  down  require  to  take  the  Cana- 
dian dredged  channel  and  \iiiere  vessels  upward  bound  can  leave 
the  dredged  channel  and  make  a  course  for  Algoma  Park  light.  The 
dredged  channel  east  of  the  canal  is  indicated  by  eight  red  and  four 
black  si)ar  buoys.  The  lowest  red  spar  buoy,  near  Plummers  dock,  is 
surmounted  by  a  slat- work  cone,  and  the  lowest  black  spar  buoy,  oppo- 
site the  International  dock,  is  surmounted  by  a  slat- work  drum.  13elow 
this  easternmost  black  bii(»y  there  is  at  least  15  of  feet  water  across  to 
the  wharves  on  the  American  side  of  the  river,  and  vessels  desiring 
to  cross  the  river  need  not  keep  close  to  the  red  bnoys  any  farther  east. 

Lights. — The  canal  itself  is  marked  by  eltictric  arc  lights  established 
at  regular  intervals  along  both  sides  of  the  canal  banks  and  crib-work 
approaches.  The  most  westerly  light  of  each  row  is  red;  the  others 
ai'e  white. 

Sanlt  Ste.  Marie  upper  range  (front).— A  group  of  white  incan- 
descent electric  lights  is  shown  in  a  wooden  lantern  on  top  of  the  crib- 
work  beacon  at  the  turn  in  the  west  approach  to  the  canal.  The  light 
is  elevated  39  feet  above  the  level  of  the  river,  and  should  be  visible  up 
the  river  to  Pointc  aux  Piu3  as  well  as  into  the  canal. 

Sanlt  Ste.  Marie  nppet  range  (rear). — A  bright  fixed  white  incan- 
descent electric  light  is  shown  from  a  wooden  lantern,  surmounting  a 
square  open-framed  wooden  tower,  the  whole  painted  white.  The  tower 
is  erected  on  the  ear^tern  extremity  of  Davigon  point,  2,100  feet  NE. 
(N.  45°  E.)  from  the  front  light.  The  light  is  elevated  61  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  river,  and  visible  to  the  south  shore  in  the  line  of  range. 

These  two  lights  in  one,  NB.  (N.  45°  E.),  will  guide  from  the  Ameri- 
can channel  past  Vidal  shoal  through  the  middle  of  the  dredged 
channel  to  the  tarn  at  the  beacon. 

Sanlt  Ste.  Marie  lower  range  (front). — A  red  electric  arc  light  is 
shown  from  a  pole  standing  near  the  outer  end  of  the  Lake  Superior 
Power  Company's  jetty,  the  pole  being  rendered  more  conspicuous  by  a 
target.  The  light  is  elevated  37  feet  above  the  level  of  the  river,  and 
visible  3  (3^)  miles  from  all  points  of  approach  by  water. 

Sanlt  Ste.  Marie  lower  rang'3  (rear). — A  red  electric  arc  light 
stands  1,300  feet  NW.  |  N.  (N.  38°  W.)  from  the  front  light. 

These  two  lights  in  range  will  lead  from  the  American  channel  up  the 
middle  of  the  dredged  approach  to  the  east  end  of  the  canaL 


-i!,rj;' 


42  BT.   MARTS  BIYER. 

Directions.— VesflelR  bnnixl  down,  nfter  pnRshig  tlio  rod  pyrainidnl 
buoy  off  the  woHt  extremity  of  Vidal  Hboiil  Hhoiild  koo])  the  range  NK. 
(N.  450  K.)  on  ahead  (this  ranpre  lea«ls  from  the  American  cJiannel) 
until  the  beacon  is  reached;  paHg  IL'5  feet  Houth  of  the  beacon,  and  steer 
E.  j}  N.  (N.  82°  E.)  for  the  entrance  to  the  canal. 

Vessels  bound  upward  should  keep  the  usual  course  in  making  t,r 
the  American  canal  until  they  bring  the  (Canadian  range  lights  below 
the  canal  in  one  bearing,  NVV.  |  N.  (N.  38°  VV.).  Tiiey  should  then 
follow  the  alignment  of  these  lights,  between  the  red  and  black  buoys, 
until  they  reach  the  axis  of  the  cannl,  due  west.  They  moor  to  the 
crib-work  at  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  while  waiting  to  go  through 
the  lock. 

Hay  Lake  channel  is  the  channel  cut  south  of  Sugar  island  through 
Sugar  Island  rapids,  passing  through  Hay  lake,  then  by  way  of  Middle 
Neebish,  and  rejoins  the  river  at  the  foot  of  Sugar  island,  saving  a 
distance  of  9i  (11)  miles  and  giving  a  channel  easily  navigated. 

DISTANCES  BV  THE  HAY  LAKE  CHANNEL. 

Milea. 

Detour  light  to  Anthonys  dock 2i\j  (2J) 

Anthonys  dock  to  Lime  Island  dock 7,",  (9  ) 

} '  Lime  Island  do(  k  to  can  buoy,  Mud  lake 8|}    (10) 

Can  buoy  to  Job  json  point,  Uains  island .'U    (4  ) 

Johnson  i)oint  to  intersection  Hay  Lake  channel 3%  (4^) 

Intersection  of  channel  to  Kains  dock,  Sugar  island 1^    (1^) 

Kains  dock  to  head  of  cut,  lake  George g"    (7  ) 

jr  Head  of  cut  (or  flats)  to  Churchs  point 5J^    (6  ) 

Ghurchs  point  to  intersection  of  Hay  Lake  channel 9^    (11) 

Intersection  of  channel  to  lower-lock  gates ] ;}    (2  ) 

Lower-lock  gates  to  abreast  point  Iroquois 13    (15) 

Total 03  (7^ 

Lights.— The  cuts  through  Hay  Lake  channel  are  regularly  lighted— 
red  lights  on  the  east  sides  of  the  cuts  and  white  lights  on  the  west 
sides. 

Bnoys.— The  cuts  are  also  regularly  buoyed— red  even-numbered 
buoys  on  the  east  sides  and  black  odd-numbered  buoys  on  the  west 
sides. 

Directions.— A  course  ESE.  f  E.  (S.  72°  E.)  will  cany  from  the  east 
end  of  the  canal  (United  States)  to  the  entrance  of  Hay  Lake  channel. 
In  making  the  turn  into  this  channel  vessels  should  pass  close  to  the 
black  25-foot  spar  buoy  at  the  west  side  of  entrance  to  avoid  being  swept 
by  the  strong  current  on  the  dangerous  shoal  at  the  east  side  of  new 
channel;  thence  through  the  channel  between  the  lights  and  bnoys  and 
on  the  Six-mile  Point  range  S.  by  E.  |  E.  (S.  21°  E.)  until  the  Frechette 
Point  range  comes  on  NW.  f  N.  (N.  37°  W.),  when  head  S.  37°  E.,  with 
the  range  on  astern,  into  Hay  lake.     When  in  Hay  lake,  with  the 


c«l  pyramidnl 
lie  range  NK. 
k;aii  chnnnel) 
i;uii,ntul  steer 

n  making  for 
J  lights  below 
Hliould  tlien 
i  black  buoys, 
r  moor  to  tlie 
to  go  tlirough 

iland  tlirough 
vay  of  Middle 
tnd,  saving  a 
gated. 

Miles. 

....  2^h  (2i) 
•  ■  -  ■  7A  (9  ) 
....  8|  (10) 
....  .'U    (4  ) 

. . . .  3A-  m) 

....   1^  (1^) 

....  «  (7) 

. ...  54  (6  ) 

....  U  (11) 

n  (2 ) 

....  13     (15) 

....  03  (72J) 

rly  lighted — 
i  on  the  west 

en.numbered 
on  the  west 

from  the  east 
lake  channel. 
1  close  to  the 
;  being  swept 
side  of  new 
id  buoys  and 
he  Frechette 
.  370  E.,  with 
ke,  with  the 


DIRKOTIONS. 


4t 


Mi«Ulle  H»y  Lake  range  on  N.  by  W.  I  W.  (N.  21^  W.),  steor  S.  21°  K. 
until  Nine  miio  Point  light  bears  K8K.  Jf  K.  (H.  7flo  ,,].),  when  change 
coum.  to  SSK.  g  E.  (8.  3()o  k.),  which  leads  into  the  cut  at  the  fiwt  of 
Hay  lake  and  is  the  range  for  this  Lower  May  Lake  cut.  When 
Middle  Neebisli  Cut  range  comes  on  WNW.  ^  \V.  (N.  iVA'^  W.)  steer  8. 
«9oE.  through  Middle  Xeebish  cut,  between  the  lights  and  buoys. 
This  course  will  carry  clear  until  the  Oarwood  range,  at  south  end  of 
Sugar  island,  conies  on  N.  i  W.  (N.  50  W.),  ^i.e,,  change  course  to  8. 
50  E.and  down  the  8t.  Marys  river,  as  directed  on  page  45. 

Caution.— There  is  a  very  strong  current  abreast  of  the  first  red 
stake  Just  below  the  dike  at  Middle  Neebish  cut  which  sets  toward 
Sugar  island;  and  about  1,00()  feet  farther  down  the  channel  the  cur- 
rent sets  in  the  opposite  direction. 

This  part  of  the  channel  is  considered  the  most  dangerous  in  the 
whole  river  for  vessels  meeting. 

In  leaving  Hay  Lake  channel  vessels  should  avoi  I  getti  .g  too  close 
to  the  red  buoys,  as  this  current  tends  to  carry  t.em  on  f'    shoal. 

For  a  description  of  range  lights,  buoys,  etc.,  used  in  the  St.  M,  vs 
river.  List  of  Lights  and  Fog  Signals  and  List  of  Beacons,  Buo ,  ,  uid 
Daymarks  published  by  the  United  States  Lighthouse  Board.  ' 

Directions,  west  to  east.— Standing  in  from  lake  m:   orior  bring 
Point  Iroquois  light  abeam,  distant  !{  (1^)  miles, 
head  a  course  SE.  J  8.  (8.  .39°  E.) 

until  St.  Marys  River  upper  range  comes  on,  then 

head  a  conrse,  on  the  range,  SE.  by  E.  ^  E.  (S.  02^  E.) 
until  St.  Marys  River  lower  range  is  made,  then 

head  a  course,  on  the  range,  ENE.  J  E.  (N.  73^  B.) 
until  Pointe  aux  Pins  light  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  (N.  17°  E.),  then 

head  a  course  NE.  %  N.  (N.  37°  E.) 

until  Pointe  aux  Pins  bears  abeam,  then 

head  a  course  NE.  by  E.  (N.  50°  E.) 
until  Big  point  bears  east,  when  a 

course  ENE.  f  E.  (N.  72°  y.) 

will  lead  in  for  the  South  Pier  light  at  er.tr,i-  -e  to  the  United  States 
canal.  If  it  is  desired  to  use  the  Canadian  canal,  see  directions  on 
page  42. 

After  clearing  the  canal  vessels  shorld  make  use  of  Hay  Lake  chan- 
nel, directions  for  which  are  given  on  page  42.  Directions  for  the  river 
will  now  be  given  from  the  east  eutrarde  of  the  canal. 

The  channel  beyond  is  marked  by  many  buoys,  visible  the  one  from 
the  other  excepting  the  bend  at  Garden  River  reach  around  the  NE. 
point  of  Sugar  island.    Here  it  is  best  to  keep  the  Canadian  shore 
close-to. 
Clearing  the  east  entrance  of  the  canal 

head  a  course  ESE.  g  E.  (S.  72°  E.) 


iffl'- 


-?'^K.^t^-S''1^ftr^h'*Vl?«-i»«»«»fri*>«i'»»*,i«jW»eo&-E*^  .Bi^a 


4il 


ST.   MARTS  RIVER. 


on  Bayfield  Kock  range  until  the  Sault  range  is  made,  when  bring  it  in 
line  astern  and 

head  a  course  on  the  range  E.  by  N.  (N.  79°  E.), 
When  near  the  spar  buoy  oflf  Jenkins  rock 

head  a  course  E.  J  N.  (N.  85°  E.) 

on  the  Topsail  Island  range  until  the  Farmers  Eidge  Eange  lights  come 
in  line,  when  a 

course  on  the  range,  NE.  by  E  (N.  56=-  E.) 
must  be  made  until  Partridge  Point  Eange  lights  can  be  brought  in 
line  astern,  when 

head  a  course,  on  the  range,  N.  by  E.  f  E.  (N.  18°  E.). 
(There  is  a  dangerous  current  just  below  the  cut  below  Topsail  island. 
Mariners  are  cautioned  to  make  due  allowance  for  the  current  when 
passing.) 
Continue  this  course  until  point  Lewis  is  abeam,  then  make  a 

course  NNE.  f  E.  (N.  31°  E.), 

keeping  in  mid-channel  past  Patridge  point.  On  nearihg  Bells  point 
take  a  mid-channel  course  past  it  auu  Palmers  point,  passing  Palmers 
Point  light  near- to  on  a 

course  ESE,  f  E.  (8.  76°  E.) 

until  close  to  buoys,  when  head  on  the  Catholic  Mission  range  a 

course  8E.  J  E.  (S.  51o  E.) 

until  Payment  range  can  be  made  astern,  when 

head  a  course,  on  the  range,  ENE.  J  E.  (N.  73°  E.) 
until  close  to  Payment  docks,  thence  a  channel  course  must  be  carried 
nearer  the  Canadian  shore,  rounding  the  point  and  passing  between  the 
red  spar  buoy  and  Manhattan  light. 

Form  this  light  a  mid-channel  course  between  Squirrel  island  and 
Sugar  island,  until  abeam  of  Church  point,  when  a 

course  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  (S.  17°  E.) 

will  carry  clear  of  Church  Point  bght.  Pass  the  black  buoy,  which 
marks  the  turning  point  to  the  south,  on  the  starboard  hand,  then 

head  a  course  SSW.  |  W.  (S.  2^°  W.) 

to  Upper  Lake  George  Crib  light,  keeping  it  to  port, 

shape  a  course  S.  bj  E.  J  E.  (8. 14°  E.) 

through  the  cut,  passing  between  the  buoys,  of  which  there  are  11  pairs, 
as  far  as  Middle  Lake  George  light,  then  between  the  buoys  in  mid  chan- 
nel to  the  lower  light.    From  the  lower  light,  the  Duck  Island  range, 

a  cf-m-se  8.  J  E.  (S.  5°  E.) 

will  carry  abeam  of  the  red  spar  buoy  off  Duck  island. 
Keeping  this  buoy  to  port,  head 

a  course  8SE.  (8.  23°  E.) 

until  between  Indian  point  and  Ned  point.  Here  the  East  liTeebisli 
range  should  be  taken 

on  a  course,  on  the  range,  8.  i  W.  (8. 1°  W.), 

the  United  States  lights  ahead,  the  Canadian  lights  astern. 


M* '  WWWMMHM 


l-^ 


DIRECTIONS. 


45 


hen  bring  it  in 


ige  lights  come 


be  brought  in 

8°  E.). 

ropsail  island, 
current  when 

make  a 

Dg  Bells  point 
ssing  Palmers 


range  a 


B.) 

ist  be  carried 

g  between  the 

■el  island  and 


buoy,  which 
ftnd,  then 


e  are  11  pairs, 
9  in  midchan- 
Island  range, 


Bast  Keebish 

W.), 
rn. 


Carry  this  course  until  on  Indian  Point  range,  when  a 

course,  on  the  range,  S8E.  f  E.  (S.  31"  E.) 

for  a  distance  of  IJ  (2)  miles,  passing  west  of  the  buoy  on  Merida  shoal, 
will  bring  close  to  the  buoys  off  Harwood  point.  Bound  the  black 
buoys,  when 

shape  a  course  SW.  J  W.  (S.  51°  W.) 

on  the  Hen  and  Chickens  range.  Ruv.  f  mile  on  this  course,  then  change 
to  a 

course  S.  f  E.  (S.  4°  E.) 

with  the  Harwood  liange  lights  astern  and  Dark  Hole  Eange  lights 
ahead.  Keep  between  the  black  and  red  spar  buoys  until  the  Point  of 
Woods  range  comes  on,  when  change  to  a 

course  SE.  J  E.  (S.  49°  E.). 

When  Encampment  Crib  light  is  well  open  steer  for  it,  keeping 
between  the  buoys  until  abeam  of  the  light.  Keeping  this  light  to  star- 
board, thence  on  the  Pilot  Island  range  a 

course  S.  by  W.  J  W.  (S.  16°  W.) 

carries  to  Mud  Lake  can  buoy,  3  (3f )  miles.    From  here  a 

course  SE.  |  E.  (S.  49°  E.), 

with  Winter  Point  Eange  lights  in  line,  astern,  until  Point  aux  Frenes 
bears  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (8.  62o  W.),  or  at  night  until  the  change  from 
the  red  sector  to  the  white  light  of  Round  island  is  made,  then  a 

course  south, 

will  carry  past  Kound  island.  Continue  this  south  course  for  2  (2^)  miles 
from  Bound  island  abeam,  when  a 

coufse  SE.  by  E.  i  E.  (S.  62°  E.) 

must  be  held  until  Sweets  Point  light  bears  abeam,  when  keep  in  mid- 
channel  between  Pipe  Island  light  and  Gaffney  point  on  a 

course  SW.  (S.  46°  W.). 

Keep  this  (leaving  the  spar  buoy  on  reef  to  starboard  and  Hoyt  Shoal 
buoy  to  port)  until  Point  Detour  light  opens  east  of  Frying  Pan  Island 
light,  when  a 

course  S.  J  W.  (S.  6°  W.) 

wiU  can-y  into  lake  Huron,  to  a  point  J  mile  distant  from  the  black 
buoy,  and  with  it  in  range  with  Point  Detour  lighthouse,  NW.  bv  W 
i  W.  (N.  58°  W.).  '  J      • 

DETOUR  PASSAGE. 

This  passage  is  between  Sweets  and  Dix  points  on  the  north  and 
Detour  point  and  the  shoals  off  Barbed  point  on  the  south.  In  the 
middle  of  the  northern  entrance  is  Pipe  island,  with  shoals  extending 
^  mile  to  the  northward,  and  i  mile  in  breadth,  with  islets  and  rocks 
at  the  northern  and  western  extremes.  The  shoal  also  extends  to  the 
eastward  from  the  island,  and  curves  to  the  southward  and  eastward 
for  J  mile,  with  2f  fathoms  at  its  extremity. 


46 


DETOUB  PASSAGE. 


WEST  SHOBE. 


Scoots  point,  the  NW.  entrauce  point,  Las  islets,  reefs,  and  shoals 
extending  northward  for  nearly  f  mile,  with  a  breadth  of  ^  mile.  There 
are  6  fathoms  close  to  tbe  edge  of  the  shoal,  which  is  marked  by  a  spar 
buoy.  The  shoal  follows  the  shore  from  Sweets  point  to  and  around 
Gaffney  point. 

Sweets  Point  buoy  marks  a  shoal  spot,  with  14  feet  of  water  over 
it,  to  the  uorthward  and  wes  }ward  of  Sweets  Point  light.  It  is  moored 
in  14  feet  of  water,  and  is  a  26-foot  spar  buoy,  painted  black. 

Sweets  Point  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  (7)  miles,  is 
shown  from  a  white  upright  rising  from  a  small  white  house  with  a  red 
roof,  built  on  a  crib. 

The  crib  is  in  7  feet  of  water,  oflf  Sweets  point,  2  (2i)  miles  NW.  I W 
(N.  650  W.)  of  Pipe  Island  light.  *     ' 

It  marks  the  turning  point  in  the  channel. 

Pipe  Island  light.— About  2  (2-,\)  miles  from  Sweets  point  is  a  fixed 
red  light,  visible  8^  (9f)  miles,  on  the  SW.  side  of  Pipe  island.  It  is 
exhibited  from  an  octagonal,  white  tower,  surmounted  by  a  black  lan- 
tern. A  detached  frame  dwelling,  one  and  a  half  stories  high,  stands 
60  feet  from  the  tower.  The  tower  is  37^  feet  above  the  lake  level, 
and  marks  the  east  side  of  the  channel  between  Pipe  island  and  the 
mainland. 

Gaffney  point— On  the  west  side,  and  nearly  opposite  Pipe  island, 
is  Gaffney  point,  a  short  distance  8E.  of  which  is  a  rocky  shoal  marked 
by  a  spar  buoy. 

Five-foot  Shoal  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  east  side 
of  the  5-foot  shoal,  SB.  of  Gaffney  point.  It  is  an  18-foot  spar  buoy, 
painted  black.  Vessels  should  pass  100  yards  to  the  eastward  of  the 
buoy. 

The  shore  is  then  steep-to  to  Detour  P.  O.',  where  there  is  a  pier 
called  Newells  Wood  wharf.  SB.  of  this  pier  is  Frying  Pan  island 
and  light. 

Hoyt  shoal,  with  from  13  to  18  feet  over  it,  lies  about  f  mile  SB.  of 
Pipe  Island  light.  This  is  probably  an  extension  of  the  shoal  extend- 
ing SB.  of  Pipe  island. 

Buoy.— A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  13  J  feet  of  water. 

Prying  Pan  Island  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  7J  (8^)  miles, 
n  Frying  Pan  'sland.  It  is  18J  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  is  shown 
from  a  conical,  white  tower. 

It  marks  the  west  side  of  Detour  passage,  and  is  If  (2)  miles  from 
Detour  light. 

This  light,  with  Pipe  Island  light,  forms  a  range  N.  |  W.  (N.  40  w.) 
for  entering  or  leaving  Detour  passage. 

From  this  to  Detour  point,  the  shore  is  bordered  by  rocks,  reefs,  and 
shoals,  but  it  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile. 


rNHiaiiii 


EAST   8HOEE. 


47 


>fs,  and  shoals 
!  mile.  There 
ked  by  a  spar 
o  and  around 

of  water  over 
It  is  moored 

ick. 
(7)  miles,  is 

ise  with  a  red 

lea  NW.  J  W. 


)int  is  a  fixed 
island.  It  is 
T  a  black  Ian- 
high,  stands 
le  lake  level, 
land  and  the 

Pipe  island, 
ihoal  marked 

the  east  side 
it  si^ar  buoy, 
bward  of  the 

3re  is  a  pier 
',  Pan  island 

\  mile  SE.  of 
hoal  extend- 


i  m)  miles, 
md  is  shown 


Detour  Ught— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  14^  (16 J)  miles,  is  shown 
from  a  white  skeleton  tower  with  a  stair  cylinder.  The  tower  is  con- 
nected with  a  white  frame  dwelling  by  a  covered  way.  It  marks  the 
west  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  St.  Marys  river. 

Fog  signal.— There  is  a  fog  signal  building  50  feet  east  of  the  light. 
A  10-inch  steam  whistle  gives  a  blast  of  eight  seconds  duration,  fol- 
lowed by  a  silent  interval  of  fifty-two  seconds. 

Detour  Shoal  buoy  marks  a  shoal  NE.  by  E.  of  Detour  point,  dis- 
tant f  mile.  It  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water,  and  is  a  25-foot  spar 
buoy,  painted  black.  Leave  this  buoy  J  mile  to  the  westward  in 
passing. 

Detour  Reef  buoy.-SE.  by  E.  J  E.  (S.  58°  E.),  distant  A  mile  from 
Detour  point,  is  a  3-fathom  shoal  marked  on  its  eastern  side  by  a 
black  can  buoy,  moored  in  18  feet  of  water,  on  the  easterly  side  of  the. 
reef. 

2AST  snoBE. 

Dnuninond  island,  from  Dix  point  to  point  Lookout  and  Barbed 
point,  forms  the  eastern  shore  of  this  passage. 

Diac  point  is  surrounded  by  reefs  extending  to  the  NW.  for  ^  mile. 
The  whole  eastern  shore  of  the  passage  is  bordered  by  shoal  water  and 
offlying  rocks,  but  can  be  approached  to  if  mile.  South  of  Barbed 
point,  T^  mile  d::;tant,  is  an  offlying  reef,  with  a  narrow  channel  between 
it  and  the  rocky  reef  extending  from  the  point. 

Port  Collier  is  to  the  eastward  of  Barbed  point.  There  are  many 
offlying  reefs,  rocks,  and  shoals,  and  several  large  islands  off  the 
entrance  also  between  Barbed  point  and  Fair  island. 

There  are  deep,  narrow  channels  among  these  islands  and  reefs. 
The  water  in  the  li  arbor  is  deep,  but  navigable  only  tor  small  craft,  and 
by  those  well  acquainted  with  this  coast. 

Barbed  point  is  locally  known  as  Crab  island,  the  neck  of  land  join- 
ing the  point  to  Drummond  island  being  covered  at  high  water. 

Reported  shoal.— A  dangerous  shoal,  J  mile  wide  and  J  mile  long, 
with  from  3  to  4  feet  over  parts  of  it,  is  reported  as  lying  from  f  to  1 
mile  SW.  from  Barbed  point.  As  the  position  of  the  shoal,  if  in  exist- 
ence, is  not  established,  vessels  bound  in  or  out  Detour  passage  should 
give  the  locality  a  wide  berth. 

The  detached  shoal  charted  as  lying  directly  south  of  Barbed  point 
is  reported  lying  about  1,000  feet  farther  to  the  eastward. 


\)  miles  from 
^  (N.  40  W.) 
s,  reefs,  and 


iTII»|ll|i>l|ftij^ll|jfcll|JW^S^^S^StL-   - 


CHAPTER  IV. 


STRAIT  OF  MACKINAC. 

The  Strait  of  Mackiuac  on  the  46°  50'  parallel,  between  Detour  point 
and  the  NE.  point  of  the  lower  peninsula  of  Michigan  on  the  east, 
and  Waugoshance  light  and  point  aux  Oht-nes  on  the  west,  is  41^  (48) 
miles  long.  At  the  eastern  and  western  entrances  between  the  points 
mentioned  the  Strait  is,  respectively,  22^  (26J)  and  11  (12J)  miles  wide, 
but  contracted  in  the  Strait  proper  to  4  (4J)  miles  in  width  between 
St.  Ignace  point  on  the  north  and  Mackinac  lighthouse  on  the  south. 
It  is  here  further  narrowed  by  Graham  shoals  on  the  north  shore. 
These  shoals  are  marked  by  buoys,  and  are  not  in  the  direct  route  of 
vessels  using  the  south  channel.  Vessels  using  the  north  channel  must 
pass  south  of  the  red  bell  buoy  on  the  south  shoal. 

The  north  shore  of  the  Strait  is  much  indented  by  bays  and  lined  by 
islands.  There  are  several  offlying  shoals,  but  the  water  is  deep  close-to, 
and  they  oflFer  no  serious  obstructions  to  navigation,  being  out  of  the 
direct  track. 

The  south  shore  of  the  Strait  is  comparatively  free  from  indenta- 
tions. Shoal  water  extends  some  4  (4J)  miles  WN W.  from  the  extrem- 
ity of  Waugoshance  point;  the  outer  extremity  of  this  shoal  being 
marked  by  Waugoshance  lighthouse. 

The  water  in  the  Strait  is  generally  deep,  and  the  slioals  lying  near 
the  usually  traveled  routes  are  marked  by  lighthouses,  lightvessels,  or 
buoys. 

EOUTES. 

Detour  point  through  Mackinac  strait  to  lake  Michigan.— With 
the  buoy  in  range  with  Detour  Point  light,  and  distant  *  mile,  a  course 
WSW.  i  W.  (S.  73°  W.)  for  23J  (26^)  miles  will  pass  Bois  Blanc  light 
abeam,  distant  IJ  (If)  miles;  thence  W.  f  N.  (N.  86°  W.)  7f  (8J)  miles 
to  the  channel  between  Mackinac  and  Round  islands,  with  the  red 
buoy  in  this  channel  abeam  to  starboard;  here  change  course  to 
WSW.  f  W.  (S.  720  W.)  for  6*  (6J)  miles.  This  should  bring  Old  Point 
Mackinac  abeam,  distant  IJ  (If)  miles.  From  this  point  a  W.  A  K  (N 
890  W.)  course  for  IGf  (lOJ)  miles  will  bring  White  Shoal  lightvessei 
abeam,  distant  1  (1/^)  mile,  and  a  W^W.  f  W.  (N.  77°  W.)  course 
for  21  (24)  miles  will  bring  Simmons  Reef  lightvessei  abeam,  distant 


NORTH   SHORE. 


49 


Detour  point 
ou  the  east, 
it,  is  415  (48) 
m  the  points 
)  miles  wide, 
dth  between 
n  the  south, 
north  shore, 
rect  route  of 
hannel  must 

Eind  lined  by 
leep  close- to, 
g  out  of  the 

om  indenta- 

the  extrem- 

shoal  being 

3  lying  near 
itvessels,  or 


gan.— With 
ile,  a  course 
Blanc  light 
I  (8|)  miles 
ith  the  red 
)  course  to 
?  Old  Point 
W.  J  K  (N. 
lightvessel 
W.)  course 
am,  distant 


1  (lA)  mile.  These  two  positions  are  used  as  points  of  departure  (m 
next  ..hapter)  for  ports  in  lake  Michigan.  aeparture  (m 

Strait  of  Mackinac  to  Thunder  Bay  island  and  lak«  Eri- 

Tt^uTii;'  "T-  ^  y- '''' ''°  ^-^ ''  oid%o!rMrkU?H,?Cai: 

S?l  V,  *^  T  fl  u^^  ''""'■'^  ^^'  ^^  ^'  *  E-  (S.  620  E.)  for  10  18S) 
miles;  this  should  bring  a  vessel  abeam  of  Cheboygan  light  with  the 
bghthouse  and  Cheboygan  Reef  buoy  in  line.     From  hereTance 

south;  thence  change  again  to  SE.  by  E.  i  E.  (S.  C2o  E  )  for  3fi  u\x\ 

nVrTo  I'Trih  "?'*  ^'^''"'^  ^'  abL;^i;el  inge  Jsl 
!i     IfV    I    -^  ^""^  ^**  (^^*^  "•"^«'  ^^^«»  Thunder  Bay  Island  light 
should  be  abeam,  and  a  course  shaped  for  the  port  desired 

Detour  pc^t  to  ports  on  West  and  SB.  shores  of  lake  Huron  - 

^Sr/^ir",,  f  ^^^P*^*'^^  ^  SSE.  i  E.  (S.  320  E.)  course  for  01^ 

TOJ)  mles  will  take  a  vessel  4  (4^)  miles  off  Thunder  Buy  Island 

^rta^Zt"  '  '"''"•  ^'"''^  '"^  *  ^•'"^^^  may  be  Shaped  for 
Detour  point  to  lake  Brie—When  off  Thunder  Bay  Island  light 
as  above  directed,  change  course  to  S.  by  E.  3  E.  (S  19o  e  Worm 
TalrorLr^  TVrt  '^"--ting'ligh^t  ai  tst  e^rauL' L' 
8  #  E  rS  fo  pf /':"  ^,«^?^r"»  *"d  distant  4  (4-.-)  miles;  thence  a 
8. 1  E  S.  70  E.)  for  49^  (57)  miles  will  take  a  vessel  north  of  St.  Clair 
Eiver  .ghtvessel.  The  directions  for  St.  Clair  river  and  lake  a^d 
Detroit  river  are  given  in  Chapter  VIII 

of^-^JV***"*  to  Georgian  bay  and  ports  on  the  eastern  shore 
of  lake  Huron.-From  off  Detour  point  a  SE.  by  E.  f  E.  (S.  60°  E) 
course  for  44  (60S)  miles  will  take  a  vessel  4  (L-)  miles  off  Dn.k 
Island  light,  with  the  light  abeam.    From  here  ihi"  uLlf  he 

^Testr  "''"  '"^  "  ^'"^  ^"^  ''''  «^«^  ^°-^  «^  '^^'^^ 

NORTH  SHORE. 

in?r  P?°i  ^°i"*  ^^^  "^'''^  "^^'^  ^^  ^^«  St^^^t  °f  Mackinac  ti^nds 
ma  westerly  direction  U>  the  head  of  St.  Martin  bay,  then  it  abruptly 
changes  its  direction  to  nearly  south  to  St.  Ignace  point.  From  E 
point  to  La  Barbe  point  the  trend  of  the  coast  fsWSw'thenc^Tlux 
Ch6nes  point  it  takes  a  northwesterly  direction.  -  '        ^'^  ^  ^'^^ 

Detour  point  is  a  long,  narrow  peninsula  forming  the  S W.  entrance 
to  Detour  passage.  There  are  18-foot  patehes  at  f  mile  SW.  and  SE.  of 
the  point,  the  latter  being  marked  by  a  buoy. 

St  Vital  point  is  SJ  (4)  miles  west  of  Detour  point,  the  shore  between 
r    ti""^^  '^^  aorthward,  forms  a  large  bay  open  to  the  southwaTd 
In  the  NE.  corner  of  thi,  bay  is  Carlton  bay,  which  might  aX  d  nro 
tection  to  sman  craft  from  northerly  winds^'   At  7  (8)  miles  ftom'st 
Vial  point  IS  Beaver  Tail  point.    There  are  several  outlying  shoa 

'^         W^Tir  lotl!!i"'  '''"^^  ""'  ""'  "P^^°"«^«^  wit'hiif  IJ  (Jj 


50 


STRAIT  OP  MACKINAC. 


miles.    At  1 J  (If)  miles  west  of  St.  Vital  point  is  Saddlebag  island,  and 
2i*o  i'H)  niilea  farther  westward  Albany  island. 

Martin  reef  is  a  rocky  shoal  having  3  feet  least  water,  with  shoals 
all  around.  The  SE.  end  of  this  reef  is  3J  (4)  miles  8.  by  E.  f  E.  (8. 
20'^  B.)  from  Beaver  Tail  point,  and  CJ  (7J)  milea  WSW.  \  W.  (S.  70° 
W.)  from  St. Vital  point.  The  reef  extends  1  (1  J)  mile  northwesterly, 
with  deep  water  between  the  shoal  patches.  It  is  a  menace  to  navi- 
gation, as  it  lies  nearly  in  the  track  of  vessels  bound  from  Detour 
passage  to  the  channel  between  Mackinac  and  Bound  islands. 

Between  Martin  reef  and  the  mainland,  in  a  northwesterly  direction, 
areTobin  reef,  Surveyors  reef,  and  other  patches  with  channels  between. 
None  of  these  channels  should  be  attempted  by  strangers. 

Buoy.— A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  off  the  SB.  end  of  Martin  reef 
in  20  feet  of  water.    Vessels  should  pass  south  of  this  buoy. 

Coast— Between  Beaver  Tail  point  and  Fuyards  point,  8f  (10)  miles 
to  the  westward,  is  a  large  indentation  in  which  are  several  large  and 
small  islands,  the  principal  ones  of  which  are  Strong,  Boot,  He  la  Salle, 
and  He  Marquette,  the  latter  a  large  island  with  Marquette  bay  on  its 
NW.  side.  Amougthese  islands  are  many  inlets,  Scammou  harbor  being 
the  largest,  but  on  account  of  offlying  shoals  they  are  practically  use- 
less except  tor  STnall  craft. 

Goose  island,  '^  (2^)  miles  WSW.  of  Fuyards  point,  is  surrounded 
by  shoals,  a  reef  extending  for  over  one  mile  SSE.  from  its  SE.  end, 
From  the  eastern  side  shoals  extend  out  J  mile,  with  deep  water  between 
them  and  Marquette  island.  From  the  western  side  shoals  extend  off 
nearly  f  mile  westerly  and  southwesterly.  This  side  of  the  island 
should  not  be  approached  within  a  mile. 

Reef.— At  2^*^,-  (3)  miles  8W.  by  W.  J  W.  (S.  62°  W.)  from  Goose 
island  is  a  6-foot  patch  with  a  9-foot  patch  a  short  distance  north  of  it. 
This  reef  is  J  mile  long  north  and  south,  and  J  mi  le  in  breadth,  being 
nearly  circular  in  shape.  It  should  be  carefully  avoided  in  navigating 
this  part  of  the  Strait. 

Brulee  point— Between  the  NW.  shore  of  He  Marquette  and  Brulde 
point  is  an  indentation  forming  Marquette  and  other  bays;  at  the  head 
of  Marquette  bay  is  the  village  of  Hessel.  There  is  deep  water  in  these 
bays,  with  many  shoal  spots,  and  they  are  only  suitable  for  small  craft. 

Search  bay. — West  of  Bruise  point  the  shore  recedes,  forming  Search 
bay,  open  to  the  southward,  its  western  boundary  being  St.  Martin 
I)oint.  The  bay  has  deep  water,  no  oflaying  dangers,  and  would  serve 
as  a  shelter  from  northerly  winds. 

St  Martin  point  is  steep-to  and  has  a  deep-water  ohanncfl  between 
it  and  a  rocky  shoal  extending  east  and  west  1  (IJ)  mile  in  a  direction 
parallel  to  the  face  of  the  point. 

St  Martin  bay,— Between  St.  Martin  point  and  Gross  point  is  St. 
Martin  bay,  a  large  bay  free  from  shoals  and  with  deep  water.  It  is  pro- 
tected from  all  winds  from  east  to  south  by  way  of  north,  and  from  SE. 


ILE   ST.   MARTIN— GRAHAM   8H0ALB. 


51 


,g  island,  and 

',  witb  shoals 
)y  E.  f  B.  (S. 
,JW.  (8.70° 
orthweSterly, 
lace  to  uavi- 
from  Detour 
mds. 

jrly  direction, 
fuels  between. 

i. 

f  Martin  reef 
aoy. 

;,  Si  (10)  miles 
ral  large  and 
otjllela  Salle, 
ette  bay  on  its 
11  harbor  being 
iractically  use- 
is  surrounded 
m  its  SB.  end, 
water  between 
pals  extend  oif 
of  the  island 

.)  from  Goose 
north  of  it. 
ireadth,  being 
in  navigating 

Itteand  Bruise 
s;  at  the  head 
water  in  these 
for  small  craft, 
lorming  Search 
jng  St.  Martin 
|d  would  serve 

mntJl  between 
in  a  direction 

Bs  point  is  St. 

Iter.    It  is  pro- 

,  and  Stom.  SB. 


winds  partially  by  He  St.  Martin  and  GroGse  He  St.  Martin.  Between 
these  islands  and  the  mainland  are  three  channels  into  the  bay,  all  hav- 
ing deep  water.  There  are  several  rivers  flowing  into  this  bay  at  tts 
head,  the  largest  being  the  Pine  and  Carp  rivers. 

He  8t  Martin,  circular  in  shape,  over  a  mile  in  diameter,  lies  1^  (1^) 
being  miles  to  the  westward  of  St.  Martin  point,  the  channel  between 
perfectly  safe  if  a  mid-channel  course  is  kept. 

From  the  South  and  SW.  sides  of  this  island  shoal  water  extends  out 
for  nearly  a  mile,  and  these  sides  of  the  island  should  be  given  a  good 
berth  in  rounding  it;  the  rest  of  the  island  is  steep-to. 

OroBse  Da  St  Martin  is  nearly  If  (2)  miles  long  NNW.  and  SSE. 
and  1^  (1^)  miles  broad  at  its  widest  part.  Shoals  extend  oft'  }  mile 
from  the  several  points  of  the  island.  The  channel  between  the  islands 
is  deep  and  safe.  A  course  should  be  kept  a  little  nearer  to  Tie  St. 
Martin  after  passing  the  shoals  extending  from  that  island.  This  course 
will  clear  the  spit  extending  ^  mile  off  the  low  east  point  of  Orosse  He 
St.  Martin. 

The  channel  west  of  Grosse  He  St.  Martin  is  also  deep  and  safe  in 
mid-channel.  Shoal  water  extends  to  the  eastward  from  Gross  point 
and  to  the  westward  f^om  the  NW.  point  of  Grosse  He  St.  Martin. 

Coast — Between  Gross  point  and  Rabbits  Back  peak,  3^  (4)  miles  to 
the  southward,  the  coast  recedes,  forming  a  bay  open  to  the  eastward; 
south  of  the  peak  is  a  small  bight  of  shoal  water,  open  to  the  SB. ; 
thence  the  coast  trends  SSB.  for  3^  (4)  miles  to  St  Ignace  point,  with 
East  Moran  bay,  which  is  small  and  open  to  the  eastward,  I4  (1^)  miles 
NW.  of  the  point. 

St  Ignace  is  on  this  bay,  and  projecting  into  the  bay  are  several 
railroad  docks. 

Graham  shoals. — North  Graham  lies  §  mile  SSB.  of  St.  Ignace  point, 
and  has  a  least  depth  of  8  feet.  South  Graham  lies  f  mile  SSW.  of 
North  Graham  and  1^  (1^)  miles  south  of  St.  Ignace  point,  and  has  a 
least  depth  of  6  feet.  There  is  a  channel  between  the  shoals  and  St. 
Ignace  poiot,  but  it  should  not  be  attempted. 

Currents. — ^The  currents  in  the  vicinity  of  Graham  shoals  and  in  the 
Strait  of  Mackinac  are  often  strong  and  irregular.  After  fresh  gales, 
vessels  anchored  in  the  Strait  often  tail  to  windward. 

Bnoys. — ^A  red  can  buoy,  is  moored  in  13  feet  of  \/ater  on  the  south 
side  of  the  center  of  North  Graham  shoal. 

A  red  bell  buoy  is  moored  on  the  southeasterly  edge  of  South  Gra- 
ham shoal  in  24  feet  of  water.    Vessels  should  pass  south  of  this  buoy. 

Coast — From  St.  Ignace  point  the  coast  treuds  WSW.  for  2^  (2f ) 
miles  to  La  Barbe  point,  thence  it  changes  its  direction  to  the  NW.  for 
2^  (3)  miles  to  West  Moran  bay.  All  this  coast  is  bordered  with  shoals 
and  should  not  be  approached  within  a  mile. 

From  West  Moran  bay  the  coast  is  bluff,  bending  to  the  northward 
as  far  as  Gros  Gap,  and  is  steep-to;  thence  it  takes  a  northwesterly 


I 


52 


8TEAIT   OF  MACKINAC. 


direction  for  3  j  (4)  miles  to  Aux  Clit'iies  point,  becoming  low  and  broken 
by  inlets,  witli  shoal  water  extending  off  some  distance.  From  Aux 
CbCnes  point  the  coast  trends  northwesterly  into  lake  Michigan,  and  ia 
described  in  next  chapter. 

St  Helena  island  lies  1^  (1$)  miles  off  the  bluff,  between  West 
Moran  bay  and  Oros  Cap.  It  is  about  a  mile  long  NE.  and  SW.,  but 
shoal  Avater  extends  from  its  SB.  side  for  nearly  §  mile,  its  outer  extreme 
being  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Buoy.— On  the  SE.  endof  a  shoal  extending  southeastward  from  St. 
Helena  lighthouse  a  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  of  water.  In 
entering  St.  Helena  harbor  from  the  westward  give  this  buoy  a  berth  of 
100  yards. 

There  is  deep  water  in  mid-channel  between  the  mainland  and  this 
island. 

Light— On  the  SE.  point  of  St.  Helena  island  is  a  white  conical 
tower,.  65  feet  high,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  a  red  dwelling, 
Laving  a  red  roof.  From  this  tower  a  fixed  red  light  is  shown,  visible 
14  (16i)  miles. 

This  light  is  a  guide  to  vessels  making  a  lee  under  St.  Helena  island, 
and  also  a  leading  mark  to  vessels  bound  to  the  westward  through  the 
south  channel  of  the  Strait  of  Mackinac. 

Caution. — Do  not  attempt  to  round  the  northwestern  end  of  this 
island  at  night  unless  its  appearance  under  Gros  Cap  and  the  position 
of  St.  Helena  shoal  are  well  defined  and  understood. 

In  rounding  the  SE.  end  of  the  island  at  night  remember  that  the 
buoy  marking  the  reef  extending  SE.  from  the  island  is  1,000  yards 
from  the  light. 

St  Helena  shoal  is  IJ  (If)  miles  west  of  the  northwestern  end  of 
St.  Helena  island,  with  deep  water  between,  and  with  from  8  to  15  feet 
of  water  over  it. 

The  shoal  is  760  yards  in  extent  NW.  and  SE.,  and  500  yards  NB. 
and  SW.,  with  8  feet  on  its  shoalest  (southeastern)  edtra.  The  sound- 
ings are  irregular,  bottom  rocky,  with  from  3  to  4  fathoms  close-to.  On 
the  south  side  of  the  shoal  is  a  buoy. 

Buoy.— A  can  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes, 
marks  the  southern  edge  of  the  shoal.  , 

SOUTH  SHOBE.  ' 

Coast— From  Nine-mile  point,  the  NE.  point  of  the  lower  peninsula 
of  Michigan,  to  Cheboygan  lighthouse  the  coast  takes  a  general  WNW. 
direction  for  about  8f  (10)  miles,  and  can  be  approached  to  f  mile. 
West  of  the  lighthouse  is  McLeod  bay,  extending  to  the  SB.,  but  almost 
filled  with  shoals,  having  deep-water  channels  among  them. 

In  the  western  part  of  the  bay  shoal  water  extends  a  mile  offshore. 
There  is  an  11-foot  patch  J  mile  NW.  by  W.  (N.  56°  W.)  from  the  Crib 
light,  and  a  3-tbot  rook  1  (1^)  mile  NW.  by  W.  f  W.  (N.  60°  W.)  from 
the  same  light. 


■uaiiiiii<itf«MriiiirisBwirfiiMin,MMwi 


CHEBOYGAN. 


53 


V  and  broken 

From  Aux 

liigan,  and  ia 

jtween  West 
md  SW.,  but 
•uter  extreme 

vaxA  from  St. 
of  Avater.  In 
iioy  a  berth  of 

and  and  this 

white  conical 
red  dwelling, 
ihown,  visible 

lelena  island, 
1  through  the 

a  end  of  this 
d  the  position 

nberthat  the 
s  1,000  yards 

estern  end  of 
m  8  to  15  feet 

K)  yards  NB. 
The  sound- 
close-to.   On 

ontal  stripes, 


nrer  peninsula 
eneralWNW. 
3d  to  f  mile. 
,  but  almost 
Bm. 
mile  offshore, 
rom  the  Crib 
60O  W.)  from 


Bnoy. — At  f  mile  NNE.  of  Cheboygan  lighthouse  is  Cheboygan  shoal, 
with  but  14^  feet  of  water  over  it.  A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  10 
feet  of  water  on  the  northern  side  of  the  shoal,  and  should  be  left  to 
the  southward  in  passing  it. 

Cheboygan  light — On  the  north  point  of  the  land  to  the  eastward 
of  McLeod  bay  is  Cheboygan  light  station,  a  square  towor33  feet  high, 
rising  from  a  dwelling,  fl'om  which  is  shown  a  tixod  white  light,  varied 
by  a  wliite  flash  every  minute,  (ind  visible  11^  (13)  miles. 

Fog  signal — The  fog  signal  at  this  station  is  a  10-inch  steam  whisMe 
giving  a  blast  of  five  seconds,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty- 
five  seconds.    The  fog-signal  building  is  NE.  of  the  lighthouse. 

Crib  light. — On  an  isolated  crib  off  the  west  side  of  the  dredged 
channel  into  Cheboygan  river  is  an  octagonal  tower  2(>§  feet  high,  from 
which  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  (13)  miles.  Vessels  bound 
to  Cheboygan  should  pass  the  crib  close-to  and  then  take  the  range. 

Range  lights  are  on  the  west  side  of  the  Cheboygan  river  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  center  line  of  the  cut,  and  form  a  range  for  passing 
through  the  cut. 

The  front  light  is  42  feet  above  the  lake  level,  shown  from  a  square 
tower  rising  from  a  frame  dwelling. 

The  rear  light  is  08  feet  above  the  lake  level,  exhibited  from  an  open 
framework  tower.  The  lights  are  ^xed  red,  visible  7-^g  (8^)  miles,  and 
the  towers  are  1,112  feet  apart.    The  range  is  SSW.  J  W.  (S.  32°  W.). 

Cheboygan  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Cheboygan  river,  which  drains  an' 
area  of  850  square  miles  and  empties  into  McLeod  bay,  locally  known 
as  Duncan  bay.  The  locality  is  a  heavy  lumber  producing  district,  and 
its  water  tratflc  is  important. 

Improvements. — A  channel  200  feet  wide  and  15  feet  deep  has  been 
dredged  from  the  15-foot  ourve  to  the  State  Boad  bridge,  marking  the 
upper  limit  of  improvement.  This  channel  has  somewhat  tilled.  In 
January,  1896,  the  channel  was  dredged  to  18  feet  and  120  feet  wide 
jQrom  the  Strait  to  Bakers  Steamer  landing. 

^timber  crib  40  feet  square  was  built  in  1881  on  the  north  side  of 
the  entrance  in  16  fe«t  of  water  to  mark  the  exact  position  of  the  cut 
and  to  serve  as  a  guide  for  entering  it.  The  crib  is  used  as  a  founda- 
tion for  the  lighthouse  previously  described. 

Directions. — When  a  mile  off  the  Crib  light,  bring  on  the  range 
SSW.  I  W.  (S.  32°  W.),  arid  stand  in. 

Coast — From  Cheboygan  the  coast  trends  northwesterly  for  13  (15) 
miles  to  Mackinac  City,  and  it  is  safe  to  keep  it  a  distance  of  a  mile. 
The  4-fathom  curve,  excepting  off  the  mouth  of  the  Cheboygan  river, 
in  the  western  part  of  McLeod  bay,  is  not  more  than  f  mile  offshore, 
but  it  generally  follows  the  shore  at  about  ^  mile. 

A  littie  NW.  of  Au  Sable  point,  4f  (5 J)  miles  NW.  of  Cheboygan  Cnb 
light,  and  at  the  village  of  Freedom,  3^  (4)  miles  farther  on,  the  edge 
of  the  curve  is  J  mile  off  shore. 


54 


BTSAIT   OF   MACKINAC. 


li 


Mackinac  Oity,  on  Old  Point  Mackinac,  is  an  open  roadRteail,  and 
only  protected  from  NW.  winds.  The  beat  anchorage  for  small  craft 
is  about  J  mile  offshore  BE.  of  the  railroad  pier. 

Light— On  Old  Point  Mackinac  a  light,  flashing  red  every  ten  sec- 
onds, is  shown  62  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  should  be  visible  in 
clear  w«>ather  13^  (ISJ)  miles. 

The  lighthouse  is  a  cylindrical  tower  50  feet  high,  and  forms  the 
NW.  corner  of  the  keeper's  dwelling,  both  bnilt  of  yellow  brick.  Roof 
of  dwelling  red ;  lantern  black.  Fog-signal  house  80  feet'Oast  of  tower; 
brown. 

Fog  signal.— A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds' 
duration,  with  alternate  silent  intervals  of  seventeen  and  thirty-three 
seconds. 

McG-tapin  point  is  IJ  (2)  miles  to  the  westward  of  Old  Point  Macki- 
nac,  the  shore  between  forming  a  shallow  bight,  with  shoal  water,  open 
to  the  northward.  The  point  is  a  bluff,  steep-to,  and  faces  the  N  W.  for 
over  a  mile.    On  the  north  extremity  of  the  point  is  the  lighthouse. 

Light— The  light,  102  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  fixed  white,  visi- 
ble  16  (18^)  miles. 

The  lighthouse,  on  a  bluff  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  an  octag- 
onal  tower  attached  to  the  NW.  corner  of  the  dwelling,  both  yellow, 
with  red  roofs. 

Coast- From  the  SW.  extremity  of  McGulpin  point  the  shore 
recedes  to  the  southeastward  for  a  mile,  then  trends  SW.  for  2  (2J) 
miles,  and  then  NW.  for  a  mile,  forming  a  bay  2  (2J)  miles  wide  and 
a  mile  deep,  with  shoal  water  extending  out  Ironi  the  shore  for  over 
^  mile. 

This  bay  affords  protection  from  all  winds  except  those  from  north  to 
west.  From  the  SW.  point  of  this  bay  the  coast  takes  a  general  west- 
erly direction  for  8  (9J)  miles  to  Waugosliance  point,  with  two  shallow 
bijrhts  open  to  the  NW. 

This  part  of  the  coast  should  not  be  approached  within  a  mile ;  and 
as  the  extremity  of  Waugoshance  point  is  neared,  a  nmch  wider  berth 
should  be  given  it. 

Waugoshance  point,  a  long,  low,  and  narrow  point,  extends  out 
fi-om  the  mainland  for  If  (2)  miles,  and  is  farther  continued  by  several 
small  islets.  The  point  is  the  top  ridge  of  a  long  shoal,  which  extends 
out  from  the  mainland  for  5J  (OJ)  miles  to  Waugoshance  lighthouse, 
the  shoal  having  a  mean  breadth  of  If  (2)  miles.  Waugoshance  island, 
1|  (2)  miles  westward  of  the  extremity  of  the  point,  is  a  mile  long  east 
and  west  and  1(  mile  broad. 

Caution. — In  rounding  Wangoshance  shoal,  do  not  pass  between 
Waugoshance  L'ghthouse  and  the  island;  keep  a  lookout  for  Vienna 
shoal,  and  give  it  a  good  berth. 

Waugoshance  light  is  on  the  northwestern  end  of  Waugoshance 
shoal,  If  (2)  miles  NW.  of  Waugoshance  island. 

The  light  is  fixed  white,  varied  by  a  flash  every  forty-flve  seconds, 
find  is  visible  14^  (16^)  miles. 


L 


oadRtenil,  and 
ibr  small  crafb 

every  ten  sec. 
1  be  visible  in 

md  forms  the 
V  brick.  Eoof 
■east  of  tower; 

'  five  seconds' 
id  thirty-three 

Point  Macki- 
al  water,  open 
jstheNW.  for 
lighthouse. 
Bd  white,  visi- 

1,  is  an  octag- 
',  both  yellow, 

int  the  shore 
IW.  for  2  (2J) 
ilea  wide  and 
ihore  for  over 

from  north  to 

general  west- 

h  two  shallow 

n  a  mile ;  and 
h  wider  berth 

extends  out 
led  by  several 
rhich  extends 
;e  lighthonse, 
shance  island, 
mile  long  east 

pass  between 
ut  for  Vienna 

Wangoshance 

'-five  seconds, 


ISLANDB   AND    SHOALS. 


56 


The  lighthonse,  65  feet  high,  iH  an  iron  tower,  with  a  dwdling  and  a 
fog-signal  buihliMg,  all  surronnded  by  a  sqnare  crib.    The  bnildings  are 
painted  rod  and  wliite  in  alternate  horizontal  bands, 
nf^!?  «i8«al-7The  fog  signal  is  a  lO-inch  steam  whistle,  giving  blasts 
slc^nds"''"  *'^'""'  ^^'"'''''''^  ^^  *  '"""*  '"*"'""*  ''^  twenty-tlve 

in«^?V?"*~^''r"  m'  ^'^"""'^  '""'*'  *'''*"  "  ^««^'  "f  ^"^or  "J-e  recom- 
S  buoy ''**''  northward  of  Waugoshaace  Sixteen-foot  (Rose) 

Under  no  circumstances  should  vessels  approach  Wangoshance  light 
closer  than  J  nule,  with  it  bearing  to  the  v,    ^tward  of  VV8W.  (S  680 

NNfTn  t"o ',m'^7  ^"'^^  J.^'  lighthouse  to  bear  to  the  northward  of 
^Hh.  .(^•^■J°  K)  when  standing  to  the  southward,  as  the  reefs  are  very 
loui  with  bowlders.  "^ 

A  description  of  the  shoals  outside  of  Wangoshance  and  of  the  east- 
ern shore  of  lake  Michigan  is  given  in  the  following  chapter. 

ISLANDS  AND  SHOALS  IN  STRAIT  OF  MAC^INAO. 

Under  this  heading  will  be  considered  the  islands  and  shoals  in  the 
Strait  which  he  clear  of  the  coast  line,  and  which  can  not  be  considered 
as  ibrmmg  bounds  to  bays  or  harbors.  They  will  be  described  from  the 
eastward. 

Spectacle  reef-This  reef  lies  9  (lOJ)  miles  east  of  the  east  point  of 
Bois  Blanc  island,  and  is  almost  in  the  track  of  ships  bound  from  Detour 
passage  to  the  South  channel  of  Mackinac  strait.  The  reef  is  A.  mile 
long  north  and  south  and  i  mile  broad  east  and  west,  with  a  depth  of 
7  feet  on  its  southern  part.    On  the  northwestern  edge  of  the  reef  ou 

about  1,000  feet  eastward  and  2,500  feet  southward  from  the  lighthouse 

f^^Jj~t  ''®?.*''"'  ^"''^  '^  '"""'■^'^  <*^  *^«  «o«t^  end  of  Spectacle  reef. 

Light-The  light,  86  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  flashing  red  and 
white,  alternately,  every  thirty  seconds,  and  is  visible  15  (17*)  miles 

The  lighthouse  is  a  conical,  gray  tower,  with  dome  and  railings 
painted  black,  surrounded  by  a  square  wooden  crib,  on  which  are  two 
white  fog-signal  houses  and  a  white  boathouse. 

Fog  aigoal—The  fog  signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  wliistlo,  sounding 
blasts  of  three  seconds,  with  alternate  silent  internals  of  twelve  and 
forty-two  seconds. 

Raynolds  reef,  3i  (3f )  miles  to  the  westward  of  Spectacle  reef,  is  a 
dangerous  shoal  with  from  12  to  13  feet  of  water  over  it.  It  should  not 
be  approached  nearer  than  J  mile. 

Buoy.-A  can  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  is 
m^red  in  17  feet  of  water,  and  marks  the  northern  edge  of  this  shoal. 

Poe  reef  18  li  (IJ)  miles  from  the  SB.  end  of  Bois  Blanc  island. 
The  reef  extends  east  and  west  2,000  yards,  with  a  least  depth  of  12 
feet  of  water  over  it.  There  is  a  narrow  channel  north  of  it,  which 
should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers. 


M 


8TRAIT  OF   MACKINAC. 


LightveMoL— A  llghtvesnel  is  moorwl  in  41  feet  ui'  water  to  tlie 
sonthwanl  and  eastward  of  the  easterly  end  of  the  reef.  Tlii-  vessel 
shows  simultaneously  from  three  lens  lanterns  encircling  the  foremast- 
head  a  fixed  white  light.  The  light  is  40  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and 
is  visible  llj?  (13^)  miles.  The  vessel  has  two  masts,  is  schooner  rigged, 
without  a  bowsprit.  There  is  a  circular  black  cage  work  day  murk  at 
the  foremasthead,  with  a  small  black  smokestack,  and  the  fog  signal 
between  the  masts.  The  hull  is  red,  with  Poe  Reef  in  large  white 
letters  on  each  side  and  No.  62  on  each  bow. 

Vessels  should  pass  south  of  this  lightvessel  when  using  South 
channel. 

Fog  signal.— A  6incli  stea?n  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds' 
duration,  separated  by  silent  intervals  of  ten  seconds.  If  the  whistle 
be  disabled,  a  bell  will  be  rung  by  hand. 

Buoy.— A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet  water  on  the  SB.  point 
of  Poe  reef. 

Bois  Blanc  island  forms  the  north  boundary  to  the  South  channel. 
Strait  of  Mackinac.  Its  greatest  length  is  9^  (11)  miles  WNW.  and 
ESB.  and  its  breadth  for  half  this  distance  is  4  (4^)  miles,  narrowing 
to  a  mile  at  its  northwestern  end. 

About  24  (2^)  miles  from  its  eastern  end  a  narrow  peninsula  extends 
out  from  the  northern  shore  northerly  for  IJ  (1^)  miles,  tapering  at  its 
northern  edge  to  a  breadth  of  but  J  mile.  On  the  NE.  point  of  this 
peninsula  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light— The  light  is  fixed  white,  53  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and 
visible  12$  (141J)  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  a  square  tower,  38  feet  high, 
on  a  yellow  dwelling. 

ShoaL— NW.  of  the  light  -^  mile  is  a  shoal  with  17  feet  of  water 
over  it. 

Life-saving  station.— Bois  Blanc  station  is  about  halfway  between 
the  East  and  SE.  points  of  the  island. 

Coast  of  the  island.— From  the  peninsula  the  coast  of  the  island 
trends  E8E.  for  2J  (2^)  miles,  and  is  safe  to  approach  to  ^  mile.  Shoal 
water  extends  oflf  the  east  point  of  the  island  for  nearly  j  mile,  and  fol- 
lows the  southeastern  side  at  this  distance  until  off  the  SB.  point,  when 
it  extends  off  as  a  spit  for  a  mile.  Prom  the  southern  edge  shoals 
extend  off  for  nearly  f  mile,  closing  in  to  J  mile  at  the  point  where  the 
southern  coast  changes  its  direction  to  the  northwestward.  The  shoal 
water  follows  the  trend  of  the  coast  to  the  NW.  end  of  the  island 
except  at  Zeia  point. 

Zela  shoaL— Halfway  between  the  if  W.  and  SW.  ends  of  Bois  Blanc 
island  a  narrow  spit  extends  out  northwesterly  for  If  (2)  miles  from 
Zela  point,  and  is  marked  on  its  extreme  NW.  end  by  a  buoy. 

Buoy.- A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
extreme  west  end  of  the  shoal.    There  is  no  channel  between  this  buoy 
and  the  island. 
The  northern  shore  of  the  island  for  3J  (3|)  miles  from  the  north  point 


ROUND   I8I.AND — MACKINAC. 


57 


i"  water  to  t>ie 
ef.  Tljfr  vesnel 
ff  the  foreiniiHt- 
lake  level,  and 
tliooner  rigged, 
k  day  mark  at 
the  fog  signal 
in  large  white 

n  using  South 

)f  five  seconds' 
If  the  whistle 

I  the  SB.  point 

iouth  channel, 
?8  WNW.  and 
les,  narrowing 

insula  extends 
iapering  at  its 
).  point  of  this 

lake  level,  and 
r,  38  feet  high, 

feet  of  water 

If  way  between 

of  the  island 
I  mile.  Shoal 
\  mile,  and  fol- 
E.  point,  when 
Q  edge  shoals 
}int  where  the 
■d.  The  shoal 
of  the  island 

of  Bois  Blano 

(2)  miles  from 

t)uoy. 

md  marks  the 

reen  this  buoy 

he  north  point 


has  shoal  water  extending  out  for  ^  mile,  and  Bois  Blanc  is  connected 
with  Kound  island  by  shoals.  A  roc^ky  shoal  of  3  feet  lies  almost  on 
the  edge  of  the  4-fatbom  curve  about  one  mile  NK.  of  the  north  iK)int, 
with  Tfi  feet  close  tf>.  This  is  a  dangerous  spot.  About  ^  (3i^)  miles 
to  Ihe  eastward  from  the  north  point  the  shore  becomes  steep  to,  and 
continues  so  to  the  end  of  the  peninsula.  The  bight  formed  by  the 
peninsula  gives  good  protection  from  8E.  winds. 

Round  island  is  ^  mile  from  Bois  Blanc  island,  with  which  it  is  con- 
nected by  shoals.  Shoals  extend  eastwardly  1^  (2)  miles  from  the 
southeastern  side  of  the  island. 

The  NW.  point  of  the  island  extends  in  a  long  narrow  point  for  J 
mile,  with  shoals  on  each  side. 

Light— On  the  extreme  N  W.  end  of  Round  island  is  a  light  tower  on 
a  brick  pier,  rising  8  feet  alwve  the  water.  The  light  is  shown  at  an 
elevation  of  53  feet,  and  is  visible  12,%  (14;|)  miles.  The  light  is  tlxed 
white,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  twenty  seconds. 

ShoaL— A  24foot  shoal  lies  1^  (2)  miles  NE.  from  tlie  extreme  NW. 
point  of  Round  island  almost  to  mid-channel. 

Major  shoal  lies  2^  (2^)  miles  SW.  by  W.  of  the  NW.  point  of  Round 
island. 

The  general  direction  of  the  shoal  is  NW.  and  SE.,  and  it  is  1,200  feet 
long.  There  is  a  least  depth  of  14  feet  of  water  400  feet  SE.  of  the 
buoy. 

Buoy.— A  can  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  is 
moored  in  19  feet  of  water  on  the  middle  of  the  shoal. 

Mackinac  island,  2J  (2^)  miles  eastward  of  St.  ignace  point,  is  2,% 
(3)  miles  long  and  If  (2)  miles  broad.  Its  southern  part,  on  which  is 
the  town  and  fort  of  Mackinac,  forms  the  northern  shore  of  the  nar- 
rowest part  of  the  Strait  of  Mackinac.  The  island  is  of  importance  as 
a  military  station. 

Mackinac— The  town  of  Mackinac,  at  the  SE.  end  of  the  island,  is 
on  the  north  channel  of  the  Strait  of  Mackinac.  Many  large  passenger 
and  transient  steamers  stop  here.  The  town  is  a  coaling  station,  and 
is  a  great  resort  for  invalids  and  tourists. 

Harbor.— The  harbor  is  between  Biddle  and  Mission  points.  It  is 
open  to  the  southward  and  exposed  to  tlie  wind  from  east  or  west,  which 
often  makes  such  a  heavy  sea  that  landing  is  impossible. 

The  water  front  of  Fort  Mackinac  comprises  nearly  J  of  the  water 
firont  of  the  whole  harbor. 

Buoy.— A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  at  the  end  of 
a  spit  extending  off  from  the  SW.  point  of  Mackinac  island.  Vessels 
should  pass  south  of  it,  and  avoid  the  shoal  oft'  the  NW.  point  of  Round 
island. 

Directions— From  the  eastward.— Steer  for  the  middle  of  the  pas- 
sage until  the  docks  are  ranged,  when  haul  up  for  them,  giving  the  SE. 
point  of  the  island  a  berth  of  ^  mile. 


M\ 


■*-s^«,^  ^?^^!  ;g^-g«^iiti-"  Jt/t.  ^--  ly 


sin 
fiij 


68 


STRAIT   OP   MACKINAC. 


island  not  be  seen  open  up  Bois  Blanc  light,  a  point  on  the  starboard 
bow,  «nt,    the  red  light  (private  light)  on  the  south  pier  bears  North 
when  haul  up  for  the  docks.  x^unu. 

For  clearing  the  spit  off  the  SW.  point  of  the  island,  a  good  range  is 
with  the  blockhouse  on  Fort  Mackinac  on  a  line  witL  the  south  pier 

Current—During  the  prevalence   of  strong  easterly  or  westerly 
wmds  a  strong  current  sets  through  the  channel  between  these  islands 
sometimes  as  great  as  6  or  8  knots  an  hour.     In  the  harbor,  inside  the 
range  of  the  points,  the  current  is  usually  contrary  to  that  in  the  pas- 
sage,  and  is  caused  by  the  eddy. 

Anchorage.-Good  anchorage  is  found  in  the  harbor  anywhere  north 
of  the  range  of  the  north  pier  in  from  3  t^  6  fathoms  of  water.  The 
docks  extend  out  about  500  fl  t  ESE.  and  have  16  feet  of  water  at  their 

There  ava  no  pilots,  but  tugs  are  available.  Wharfage  is  charged  at 
the  rate  of  5  cents  per  100  pounds.  o  &      »« 


1 


L 


'K.L£S'?;l.!r.?>',^g!^1a--,'t^ri; 


V.  point  of  the 
I  the  starboard 
r  bears  North, 

I  good  range  is 
the  south  pier 

y  or  westerly 
I  these  islands, 
bor,  inside  the 
liat  in  the  pas- 
ay  where  north 
)f  water.  The 
water  at  their 

is  charged  at 


CHAPTER  V. 


liAKE  MICHIGAN. 


Lake  Michigan  derives  its  name  from  two  Indi.an  words  of  the  Chip- 
pewa dialect,  niichi  (great)  and  sawgyegan  (Lake).  It  is  the  largest  lake 
wholly  within  the  United  States  and  the  second  largest  known  body  of 
fresh  water  in  the  world. 

Lying  in  a  north  and  south  direction  it  extends  from  longitude  84°  45' 
W.  to  longitude  88°  W.,  and  from  latitude  41°  37'  N.  to  latitude  46°  05' 
N.,  a  length  of  279  (320)  miles,  with  an  average  width  of  about  57  (65) 
miles.  The  area  of  this  grand  sheet  of  water  is  22,400  square  miles, 
its  circumference  nearly  821  (945)  miles.  Its  surface  is  581  feet  above 
the  Atlantic  ocean,  and,  being  1,000  feet  deep,  its  bottom  is  over  400  feet 
below  the  surface  of  that  ocean. 

The  Strait  of  Mackinac  connects  this  lake  with  lake  Huron.  It  is 
connected 'by  canal  with  the  Illinois  river,  and  so  with  the  gulf  of 
Mexico. 

The  shores  of  lake  Michigan  are  generally  low  and  sandy,  and  the 
land  slopes  gradually  to  the  lake.  The  northern  shore  of  the  lake  is 
irregular  and  more  rugged  and  picturesque  than  the  other  shores,  the 
summit  of  the  highest  peak  being  about  1,400  feet  above  the  sea.  On 
the  eastern  side  are  numerous  sand  hills  formed  by  the  wind  into 
innumerable  fantastic  shapes  sometimes  covered  with  stunted  trees 
and  scanty  vegetation,  but  most  generally  bare  and  rising  to  heights  of 
from  160  to  250  feet.  The  southwestern  shore  is  generally  low,  with 
sand  hills  covered  with  shriveled  pines  and  burr  oaks.  Along  the 
western  shore  woods  and  prairie  alternate,  Interspersed  with  a  few 
high  peaks.  The  cliffs  on  the  east  shore  of  Green  bay  form  a  bold 
escarpment,  and  from  this  ridge  the  land  slopes  gradually  to  the  lake. 
On  this  slope  there  is  a  remarkable  series  of  drift  hills  and  circular 
depressions  called  potash  kettles. 

From  the  appearance  of  the  coast  lake  Michigan  is  believed  to  be  mov- 
ing slowly  westward,  uncovering  the  eastern  and  encroaching  upon  the 
western  shore. 

With  the  exception  of  Green  and  Traverse  bays  lake  Michigan  has 
few  indentations  in  its  coast  line,  and,  excepting  the  north  end,  it  is 
free  from  islands.  The  waters  near  shore  are  shoal,  and,  having  few 
harbors,  it  is  dangerous  navigation  in  heavy  blows.  There  are  a  number 
of  streams  flowing  into  Che  lake,  but,  with  the  exception  of  the  Fox 

59 


L 


60 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


flowing  into  Green  bay,  and  the  Grand,  Kalamazoo,  and  St.  Joseph 
rivers  in  the  east,  they  are  unimportant. 

The  snrfiice  level  of  the  lahe  is  subject  to  fluctuations  from  one  season 
to  another  as  well  as  during:  the  course  of  a  season.  In  lake  Michigan 
the  point  of  the  lowest  low  water  has  been  falling  for  seven  years,  and 
has  so  far  fallen  5  feet.  The  average  now  is  0.16  feet  below  the  lowest 
average  recorded.  A  sl»t,''.t  variation  of  the  surface  level  is  also  due 
to  a  lunar  tidal  wave  of  its  own.  Observations  have  shown  the  dift'er- 
ence  of  the  level  due  to  tide  to  be  about  0.153  feet.  At  spring  tides  the 
difference  between  h^gh  and  low  water  is  0.2'15  feet.  High  water  occurs 
half  an  hour  after  the  meridian  passage  of  the  moon. 

Aroand  the  lake  the  climate  is  quite  equable  for,  though  the  wint«r  is 
cold  and  the  summer  hot,  the  waters  of  the  lake  modify  the  extremes. 
The  mean  temperature  around  the  lake  varies  from  46°  to  54°.  The 
average  rainfall  is  30  to  44  inches.  The  mean  barometer  varies  from 
29.5  to  30.01. 

The  country  around  lake  Michigan  is  exceedingly  rich  and  fertile, 
and  an  immense  commerce  has  sprung  up  along  this  lake. 

Snow  falls  in  the  north  before  the  occurrence  of  the  heavy  frosts. 
The  northern  part  of  the  lake  only  is  covered  with  ice  in  winter  and  it 
never  reaches  as  far  south  as  Milwaukee.  Milwaukee  river  remains 
Closed  on  an  average  for  one  hundred  days  from  the  end  of  November 
to  the  middle  of  March. 

The  Strait  of  Mackinac,  which  longest  retains  the  ice,  is  usually  open 
between  May  1  and  December  1. 

The  finest  agricultural  laud  in  the  United  States  is  near  the  lake,  and 
there  is  an  icanense  trade  in  all  grains,  fruits,  live  stock,  and  lumber, 
and  their  products,  as  flour,  pork,  hides,  leather  goods,  furniture,  etc. 
Bich  lead  and  copper  mines  abound,  as  also  salt,  iron,  and  coal.  Abun- 
dant water  power  promotes  manufactures  of  all  kinds.  Beer  and  dis- 
tilled liquors  are  made  in  this  region,  and  fine  building  stone  is  obtained 
fifo.!).  numerous  quarries. 

NAVIGATION. 

Navigation  generally  opens  on  the  lake  about  the  middle  of  April  and 
closes  about  the  middle  of  December. 

The  iron  buoys  are  taken  up  every  year  at  the  close  of  navigation  and 
the  places  marked  by  spar  buoys  of  the  same  colors  and  numbers, 
and  the  lightvessels  are  removed  about  the  same  time.  When  they  are 
replaced  on  the  opening  of  navigation  their  positions  are  sometimes 
altered;  masters  of  vessels  are  therefore  cautioned  to  obtain  the  latest 
information  on  this  subject  and  to  keep  their  charts  corrected. 

See  page  6. 

HABBOBS  OF  BEFUOE. 

Entrance  of  Sturgeon  Bay  canaL — The  entrance  of  the  Sturgeon 
Bay  and  Lake  Michigan  canal,  on  the  NW.  shore  of  the  lake,  has  been 


.'iiiiaaiiiiiBBa 


mm 


b   .,  xfiBS — DIRECTIONS. 


61 


id  St.  Joseph 

>m  one  season 
ake  Micliigan 
en  years,  and 
)w  the  lowest 
bI  is  also  due 
\vn  the  dift'er- 
ring  tides  the 
water  occurs 

the  winter  is 
the  extremes, 
to  a4o.  The 
r  varies  from 

1  and  fertile, 

heavy  frosts, 
winter  and  it 
iver  remains 
of  November 

usually  open 

the  lake,  and 
and  lumber, 
irniture,  etc. 
coal.  Abuu- 
ieer  and  dis- 
is  obtained 


of  April  and 

trigation  and 
numbers, 
hen  they  are 
sometimes 
n  the  latest 
ed. 


le  Sturgeon 
:e,  has  been 


improved  by  converging  piers,  and  is  now  a  fair  harbor  of  refuge  for 
small  craft.  Except  in  northerly  gales  the  bay  at  the  NW.  end  of  the 
canal  is  an  excellent  harbor  of  refuge. 

Milwaukee,  on  the  western  shore  of  the  lake,  has<  beeii  Improved. 
A  breakwater  sheltering  it  from  NE.  to  SE.  gales  has  been  half  com- 
pleted,   At  present  it  is  a  very  good  harbor  of  refuge  liom  NE.  winds. 

Chicago,  on  the  southwestern  end  of  the  lake,  is,  with  its  exterior 
breakwater,  an  excellent  harbor  of  refuge  from  northeiiy  gales. 

Grand  Haven,  with  an  entrance  width  of  390  feet,  is  the  best  harbor 
along  the  east  coast  for  refuge  from  gales,  but  has  no  exterior  break- 
water. 

Little  Traverse  has  an  excellent  and  well-sheltered  natural  harbor, 
though  it  is  small  and  some  distance  from  the  direct  routes  of  travel. 

DANGERS. 

All  the  southern  half  of  the  lake  is  free  from  offlying  dangers. 
Between  and  around  the  islands  in  the  northern  part  of  the  lake,  and 
in  the  approach  to  the  Strait  of  Mackinac,  are  numerous  shoals,  which 
will  be  described  as  they  are  met  with  in  the  description  of  the  coast. 

SAILING  DIRECTIONS. 

In  the  previous  chapter,  page  48,  directions  have  been  given  that 
will  bring  a  vessel  a  mile  south  of  White  Shoal  and  Sir^mons  Eeef 
lightvessels;  directions  will  now  be  continued  from  these  points  to  the 
various  ports  of  lake  Michigan.  These  directions  will  take  a  vessel  off 
the  port  desired,  and  special  directions  for  entering  will  be  found  under 
the  description  of  the  port. 

To  Traverse  City. — From  the  point  of  departure  bring  White  Shoal 
lightvessel  astern  bearing  N.  by  E.  J  B.  (N.  21°  E.),  and  steer  S.  by  W. 
J  W.  (S.  21°  W.)  44  (50§)  miles,  when  the  south  point  of  Northport 
point  should  be  abeam,  distant  1^  (IJ)  miles;  hnie  change  to  S.  by  W. 
(S.  11°  W.) for  21  (24^0 )  miles;  this  should  brii:.  ;  vessel  oft'  Traverse 
City. 

To  Chicc^o  and  porta  on  west  shore. — Cm  (he  course  S.  by  W. 
I W.  (S.  21°  W.),  when  He  aux  Galets  light  is  abeam,  change  course  to 
SW.  f  S.  (S.  37°  W.)  for  51^  (59^)  miles,  when  South  Mauitou  Island 
light  should  bear  West;  here  change  to  SV .  by  W.  f  W.  (S.  (}5<^  W.)  for 
6^  (7 J)  miles,  when  the  same  light  should  bear  North;  thenue  BW.  I  S. 
(B.  35°  W.)  for  20  (23)  miles  should  take  a  vessel  4^  (5)  miles  vest  of 
Point  Betsie  light,  which  position  is  the  point  of  departure  for  the 
ports  in  the  lake  to  the  southward. 

From  this  position- 
To  Chicago,  3.  by  W.  |  W.  (S.  18°  W.). 

To  Racine,  SSW.  |  W.  (S.  27°  W.). 

To  MUwankee,  SSW.  I  W.  (S.  33°  W.). 

To  Cheboygan,  SW.  (S.  45°  W.), 


.J?i 


62 


LAKE   MICHIUAN. 


To  ports  on  east  shore  of  lake. — Follow  the  shore  at  a  distance  of 
at  least  3  (3^)  miles  iiutil  ofif  the  desired  port. 

For  deep-draft  vessels  and  in  heavy  westerly  weather. — When 
abeaiu  of  Simmons  Reef  lightvessel  (see  p.  48)  shape  course  W.  f(  S. 
(S.  89°  W.)  for  29  (33,%)  miles,  when  a  vessel  should  be  abeam  of  Seul 
Choix  Poiut  light,  distant  2 J  (2^,-)  miles;  here  change  course  to  SW.  J 
W.  (S.  48°  W.)  for  38J  (44J)  miles;  this  should  bring  a  vesstl  abeam  of 
Poverty  Island  light,  distant  5  (5^)  miles,  which  position  is  the  point 
of  departure  for  ports  on  the  lake.  From  this  position,  after  passing 
the  shoals  off  the  entrance  to  Green  bay,  the  shore  should  be  kept  at  a 
distance  of  about  3  (3^)  miles,  which  will  give  smoother  water  and 
allow  the  position  of  the  vessel  to  be  well  established  at  any  time. 

To  Q-reen  bay. — Proceed  as  in  directions  for  deep-draft  vessels 
until  Poverty  Island  light  is  abeam,  when  change  course  to  W.  by  S. 
(S.  79°  W.)  and  head  directly  for  liock  Island  ligiit  until  within  a  mile 
of  it,  when  round  it  at  this  distance  and  enter  the  bay. 

By  keeping  Rock  Island  light  bearing  between  W.  by  S.  (S.  79°  W.) 
and  W.byN.  (N.  79°  W.,  the  9foot  shoal  to  the  northward  and  the 
rocks  to  the  southward  of  this  entrance  to  Green  bay  will  be  cleared. 
With  the  light  outside  of  these  bearings  a  vessel  will  be  too  near  one 
or  the  other  of  these  shoals. 

A  description  of  the  islands  and  offlyiug  shoals  in  the  northern  part 
of  the  lake,  and  the  coast  of  the  lake,  will  now  be  described  in  the  fol- 
lowing order: 

(1)  Islands  and  offlying  shoals. 

(2)  North  and  west  shores  of  the  lake,  omitting  Green  bay. 

(3)  East  shore  of  the  lake. 

(4)  Green  bay. 

ISLANDS  AMD  SHOALS. 


St.  Helena  shoal.    See  page  52. 

Manitou  Paymen  shoal  is  3^  (3^)  miles  from  the  north  shore  of  the 
lake  in  longitude  85°  04'  W.  The  shoal  is  about  ^  mile  in  extent  NB. 
and  SW.  and  800  yards  NW.  and  SE.,  with  a  least  depth  of  6  feet. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  nun  buoy  is  moored  in 
17  feet  water  on  the  SW.  point  of  this  shoal. 

Pelkie  reef  lies  2-,-o  (2^)  miles  WSW.  of  Epoufette  point;  it  is  about 
f  mile  in  oiameter  and  has  7  feet  over  it. 

Potter  leef  lies  5  (6^)  miles  E.  by  N.  of  Patterson  point;  it  ia  about 
l  mile  in  diameter  and  has  6  feet  over  it.  At  3  (3J)  miles  B.  by  N.  of 
this  shoal  are  two  10-foot  spots,  and  nearly  a  mile  SE.  of  them  is  a  13- 
foot  patch.  These  are  all  rocky  shoals,  and  as  they  are  unmarked  ves- 
sels should  give  tliis  locality  a  wide  berth. 

Simmons  reef  lies  almost  in  the  latitude  of  Aux  Chenes  point,  and 
its  east  end  is  12  (IS,*';,)  miles  west  of  it.  From  its  east  end  the  shoal 
extends  west  l/„-  (1^)  miles  and  widens  out,  it  being  about  J  mile  north 
and  south  over  its  shoalest  part,  wliich  has  C  feet  over  it. 


t  a  distance  of 

ither.— When 
ourse  W.  j^  S. 
beam  of  Seul 
urse  to  SW.  J 
!88t'I  abeam  of 
I  is  tbe  point 
after  passing 
i  be  kept  at  a 
ei'  water  and 
any  time, 
draft  vessels 
}  to  W.  by  8. 
within  a  mile 

3.  (S.  79°  W.) 
nird  and  the 
ill  be  cleared, 
i  too  near  one 

lorthern  part 
ed  in  the  fol- 


jay. 


WHITE   SHOAL — ROSE    SHOAL. 


63 


shore  of  the 
extent  NE. 
f  6  feet, 
is  moored  in 

it  is  about 

it  is  about 
E.  by  N.  of 
iiem  is  a  13- 
narked  ves- 

point,  and 

d  the  shoal 

mile  north 


Llghtvessel. — The  ligbtvessel  is  moored  in  1 9  feet  water  southward 
of  the  reef.  It  has  two  masts,  is  schooner  rigged,  and  has  a  red, 
oval  cage-work  day  mark  at  each  masthead.  The  hull  is  red,  with 
Simmons  Reef  in  white  letters  on  each  side  and  No.  55  ou  the  stern. 
The  ligbtvessel  shows  two  red  lights,  one  from  each  masthead,  30  feet 
above  the  lake  leve?,  and  visible  7/o  m)  miles. 

Fog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasti^  uf  Ave  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  fifty-five  seconds. 

■White  shoal  lies  4  (4-i%)  miles  NW.  of  Waugoshaace  lighthouse  and 
54  (6)  miles  8SE.  ^  E.  of  Simmons  reef  (6-foot  spot}  The  shoal  is  of 
small  extent,  and  has  3  feet  over  it. 

Lightvessel. — ^The  ligbtvessel  is  moored  in  42  feet  of  water,  to  the 
eastward  of  the  shoal.  It  has  two  masts,  is  schooner  rigged,  with  a 
black,  oval  cage-work  day  mark  at  each  masthead.  The  hull  is  white, 
with  White  shoal  in  large  black  letters  ou  each  side,  and  No,  56  on  the 
stern. 

A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  each  masthead,  each  being  elevated 
30  feet  and  visible  9iJ  (UJ)  miles. 

Fog  signaL — The  fog  signal  is  a  6-inch  steam  whistle,  which  sounds 
as  follows:  Blast  one  second,  silent  interval  ten  seconds;  blast  one 
second,  silent  interval  ten  seconds;  blast  three  seconds,  silent  interval 
thirty-five  seconds. 

3uo7. — A  spar  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  is 
moored  at  the  SW.  end  of  White  shoal  in  17  feet  of  water. 

Gray  reef  is  the  eastern  extremity  of  an  extensive  reef  extending 
easterly  from  Hog  and  Hat  islands.  It  consists  of  many  detached 
rocky  patches,  with  from  6  to  17  and  18  feet  of  water  over  them.  The 
easternmost  patch  has  14  feet  over  it. 

Ligbtvessel. — The  ligbtvessel  is  moored  in  20  feet  of  water  off  the 
easterly  end  of  Gray  reef.  It  has  two  masts,  is  schooner  rigged,  show- 
ing a  black  oval  cage-work  day  mark  at  the  foremasthead,  and  a  red 
one  at  the  main.  Hull  red,  bulwarks  white,  with  Grays  Reef  in  large 
black  letters  on  each  side,  and  No.  57  on  the  stern. 

A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  at  the  foremasthead,  and  a  fixed  red 
light  at  the  main,  each  30  feet  above  the  water,  and  visible  (white)  9f 
(llj)  and  (red)  7^  (8^)  miles. 

Fog  signal. — The  fog  signal  is  a  6-inch  steam  whistle,  which  sounds 
as  follows:  Blast  one  second,  silent  interval  twenty  seconds ;  blast  one 
second,  silent  interval  twenty  seconds;  blast  three  seconds,  silent  inter- 
val fifteen  seconds. 

Rose  shoal  consists  of  several  patches,  of  from  15  to  IS  feet,  lying 
between  North  and  NW.  by  N.  from  Waugoshancc  light,  distant  a  mile 
and  upwards.  They  lie  almost  ou  a  line  between  Waugoshance  light 
and  White  Shoal  ligbtvessel,  and  nearly  on  a  line  between  St.  Helena 
lighthoase  and  Grays  Reef  ligbtvessel.  These  ranges  will  be  usel'ul  in 
rounding  tli.e  shoal  at  night.  Deep-draft  vessels  should  not  pass  south 
of  Rose  shoal. 


64 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


Buoy. — A  black  imn  buoy  is  moored  in  23  feet  water  ou  the  north 
edge  of  the  16fuot  spot. 

WangoBhance  light,  shoal,  and  island.    See  page  54. 

Vienna  shoal  (the  shoalest  spot)  is  1,^0  iH)  utiles  WSW.  of  Waugo- 
shance  Mghthoase.  It  is  nearly  ^  mile  in  extent  east  to  west  and  ^ 
mile  north  to  south,  with  a  least  depth  of  11  feet.  In  a  southeasterly 
direction  1,200  yards  from  the  11-foot  spot  is  an  18-foot  rocky  patch, 
and  ^  mile  beyond  this  ESE.  is  a  12-foot  patch  on  the  NW.  extremity 
of  an  extensive  17-foot  shoal.  About  IJ  (l^^)  miles  west  of  Vienna 
shoal  are  depths  of  22  nnd  23  feet,  with  deeper  water  in  between. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  in 
18  feet  water  ou  the  NW.  point  of  Vienna  shoal. 

lie  aux  Oalets  lies  7^  (8i%)  miles  SSW.  |  W.  of  Waugosbance  light. 
The  shoal  extends  §  mile  NW.  and  the  same  distance  easterly  from  the 
lighthouse  with  least  water  6  feet. 

Light — On  He  aux  Galets  (SkiMigallee)  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
:y^  13  (lo^)  miles,  is  shown  58  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  aa  octagonal 
tower  connected  with  a  white  dwelling. 

Fog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle,  in  a  building  near  the  toTcr, 
sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  alternate  silent  Intervals  of 
ten  and  forty  seconds. 

Buoy. — ^A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  18  fef  t  water  and  marks  the 
NW.  end  of  the  reef  extending,  NW.  from  the  light.  Vessels  must  not 
attempt  to  pass  between  the  buoy  and  lij^hthouse. 

Ree£ — NE.  from  the  light  1  (l^)  mile  is  a  reef  with  from  14  to  16 
feet  over  it. 

Hat  island  is  the  NE.  island  of  the  group  in  the  northern  part  of  the 
lake.  It'is  small,  about  4  vaWe  square,  and  is  on  tW  northern  part  of 
an  extensive  reef  which  extends  southward  of  the  island  1  (IJ)  mile. 
On  this  reef  is  an  exiwsed  rock  and  very  shallow  water.  The  reef 
extends  to  the  eastward  in  disconnected  patches  and  terminates  m 
Gray  reef. 

Hog  island. — The  north  part  of  this  island  is  2^,^  (2|)  miles  west  of 
Hat  island.  It  is  3  (3^)  miles  long  and  It^  (IJ)  miles  wide  in  places. 
The  island  is  low  and  wooded  and  is  surrounded  by  shoals  which 
extfud  from  the  island  in  all  directions  for  some  distance.  The  shoals 
extending  eastward,  with  those  from  Hat  island,  term;  ^ate  in  Gray  reef. 
There  is  no  passage  between  Hat  and  Hog  islands,  nor  between  Hog 
and  Garden  islanc*  < 

Hog  island  reef  s  2^^  (3^)  miles  8'^E.  flcom  Hog  island.  It  extends 
east  and  west  |  roi''  aiid  220  yards  north  and  south.  There  are  only 
6  feet  on  the  west  end  of  the  reef. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  iu 
18  feet  water  on  the  SE.  end  of  the  reef.  ■ 

Garden  island— The  SE.  end  of  this  island  is  2^-  (3)  miles  west  of 
the  SW.  end  of  Hog  island.    From  this  end  it  extends  4^  (5)  miles  iu  a 


mmnwwm'.i.'M.-r- 


^f: 


ou  the  north 


V.  of  Waiigo- 
o  west  and  J 
southeasterly 

rocky  patch, 
W.  extremity 
3st  of  Yieuna 
)etween. 

is  luoored  iu 

)sbance  light, 
terly  from  the 

light,  visible 
aa  octagonal 

5ar  the  tcver, 
it  intervals  of 

dd  marks  tbe 
iscls  must  not 

i-orn  14  to  16 

n  part  of  the 
them  part  of 
1  (li)  mile. 
The  reef 
terminates  in 


er. 


miles  west  of 
le  in  places, 
ihoals  which 
The  shoals 
in  Gray  reef. 
>etweeu  Hog 

It  extends 
lere  are  only 

is  moored  in 

tiles  west  of 
5)  miles  iu  a 


GARDEN  ISLAND  SHOAL — TROUT  ISLAND. 


65 

It 


northwesterly  direction,  and  is  from  If  (2)  to  2-i^B  (2 J)  miles  broad, 
is  low  and  woocitid  and  surrounded  by  ten  rocks,  reefs,  and  shoals. 

Shoals. — On  the  east  side  extensive  shoals  connect  this  island  with 
Hog  island.  These  extend  around  the  south  and  west  sides,  7  feet  of 
water  being  found  in  spots  2,^  (2^)  miles  SW.  of  the  island.  The  NW. 
end  of  the  island  is  apparently  clear  outside  of  f  mile,  but  this  and  all 
these  islands  should  be  given  a  wide  berth. 

Oarden  Island  shoal  is  a  small  15foot  shoal  2^  (2f)  miles  NE.  by  N. 
ftom  the  NW.  end  of  Garden  island. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  bhick  horizontally  striped  spar  buoy  is  moored  in 
IS  feet  water  and  marks  Garden  Island  shoal. 

Squaw  island  is  the  NW.  island  of  the  group  in  the  northern  part 
of  lake  Michigan.  It  is  a  small  island,  low  and  partly  wooded,  and  is  ^ 
mile  north  and  south,  g  mile  wide  at  its  north  end  and  tapers  to  a  point 
at  its  south  end.  It  is  surrounded  by  an  extensive  reef,  and  should  not 
be  approached  nearer  than  l/o  {H)  miles. 

Light — A  fixed  red  light,  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  fifteen  seconds, 
visible  13  (15)  miles  is  shown  57  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  an 
octagonal  tower  attached  to  a  dwelling,  both  red,  on  the  north  end  of 
Squaw  island. 

Fog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds' 
duration,  with  alternate  silent  intervals  of  twenty  and  forty  seconds. 

Buoy. — A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  23  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
north  end  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  northwestward  from  Squaw 
island,  and  is  1§  (IJ)  miles  NNE.  from  the  light. 

Lansing  shoal  lies  4  (4^-)  miles  north  of  Squaw  Island  light.  It 
has  10^  feet  on  its  southern  end  and  23  feet  on  its  northern  end. 

Buoy. — A  red  nnn  buoy  is  moored  in  28  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
SE.  end  of  LaTising  shoal.  Vessels  should  pass  between  this  and  the 
black  buoy  marking  Squaw  Island  shoal. 

WliiskAy  island. — West  of  Garden  island  is  Whiskey  island,  about 
f  mile  square,  with  a  small  bill  on  tbe  western  side. 

Shoals. — Eocky  shoals  extend  from  this  island  a  mile  to  the  east- 
ward, A  mile  to  the  westward,  and  |  mile  to  the  northward  and  south- 
ward. Between  this  and  Garden  island  are  numerous  detached  14  and 
17  foot  spots,  and  the  passage  should  not  be  attemijted. 

Whiskey  Island  sboal. — This  shoal  has  a  spot  just  awash  one  (1^) 
mile  SW.  of  Whiskey  island,  and  from  this  point  it  extends  one  mile 
east,  J  mile  north  and  west,  nnd  J  mile  south. 

Buoy. — A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet,  and  marks  the  south 
end  of  this  shoal. 

,   Trout  island,  3-,^  (4J)  miles  SW.  of  Whiskey  island,  is  of  small 
extent.    It  is  ^  mile  NW.  and  SE.  and  |  mile  north  and  south.    It  is 
surrounded  by  .shoals  wliich  extend  from  it  :i  to  ^  mile.    Midway  between 
this  island  and  Hifjh  is'and  is  a  12-foot  patch. 
1944— No.  108 e 


66 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


ShoaL — West  of  the  north  end  of  Trout  ishind  If  (2)  miles  is  an 
18-foot  spot. 

High  island. — West  of  the  north  part  of  Beaver  island  3^  (4)  miles 
is  High  island,  3  (3^)  miles  long  north -and  south,  2,^,  (3)  miles  wide  at 
the  north  end,  and  one  (1^)  mile  wide  at  the  south  end.  The  island  has 
a  few  small  hills  on  the  W.  and  NE.  sides,  and  is  thinly  wooded. 
Exposed  rocks  skirt  the  coast  to  the  South  uud  NW.,  and  shoals  extend 
from  i  to  J  mile  from  the  shore.  At  the  NE.  end  5  feet  of  water  is 
found  1  (1^)  mile  from  shore. 

Gull  island. — This  island  lies  5§  (6^)  miles  west  of  the  south  end  of 
High  island  and  is  l,^u  (1^)  miles  long  north  and  south  and  §  mile 
vide.    Its  shore  is  lined  with  low  bluffs,  and  it  is  pnrtly  wooded. 

Shoals. — Shoals  extend  nearly  ^  mile  off  this  island,  and  a  16-foot 
spit  extends  SSE.  for  one  mile. 

anil  Island  reef  is  3^  (4)  miles  SSE.  of  OuU  island.  It  ia  about  ^ 
mile  in  length  NE.  and  SW.  and  §  mile  NW.  and  SE  ,  with  6  feet  of 
water  near  the  center.  Half  mile  to  the  eastward  and  southeastward 
are  several  detached  spots  with  16  feet  of  water  on  them. 

Bowlder  reef  lies  17  (19^)  miles  west  of  Beaver  Island  light.  It  has 
16  feet  over  it,  and  extends  in  a  NW.  and  SB.  direction. 

Bnoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  spar  buoy  is  moored  in 
19  feet  water,  and  marks  the  NW.  end  of  the  reef. 

Beaver  island  is  the  largest  of  the  group.  It  is  11  (12||)  miles  long 
north  and  south,  5§  (6^)  miles  broad  at  its  southern  end,  and  2 ;|^  (3^)  miles 
broad  at  its  northern  end.  It  is  well  wooded,  with  low  bluffs  on  the 
east  side  and  higher  hills  on  the  west  side.  At  the  NE.  end  is  Beaver 
harbor,  a  small  but  well-sheltered  anchorage. 

Shoals. — Shoal  water  extends  ^  to  f  mile  from  shore  around  the 
island,  excepting  the  middle  of  the  eastern  side,  where  the  shore  can  be 
approached  somewhat  closer.  A  10-foot  shoal  extends  one  mile  NW. 
from  the  N  W.  end  and  a  4-foot  spot  §  mile  NNE.  from  the  NE.  point. 

Buoy. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  iu  15  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
outer  end  of  this  latter  shoal.    The  buoy  is  1,100  yards  from  shore. 

Detached  16  and  17  foot  spots  lie  E.  and  SE.  of  this  bnoy. 

Beaver  Island  harbor. — The  deep  water  in  this  harbor  extends  | 
mile  NW.  and  SE.  and  J  mile  NE.  and  SW..  The  entrance  is  very 
narrow,  rendering  it  difficult  for  large  vessels  or  tho««  unacquainted 
with  the  harbor  to  enter. 

Light — Beaver  Island  Harbor  light,  37  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a 
fixed  red  light,  visible  11|  (13)  miles,  is  shown  from  a  cylindrical  tower 
attached  to  the  south  end  of  a  dwelling,  both  white,  on  the  north  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

Life  saving  station. — There  is  a  lifesiieing  station  165  feet  west  of 
the  lighthouse. 

Shoals. — On  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  an  1  Ifoot  shoal  extends 
east  f  mile,  its  south  edge  being  ^  mile  south  of  the  lighthouse. 

At  If  (2)  miles  E.  by  N.  from  the  light  is  a  15-foot  spot. 


■-iiiasi 


matmm 


em 


nmmi*'' 


(2)  miles  is  an 

»nd  3^  (4)  miles 
{)  miles  wide  at 
Tlie  island  bns 
thinly  wooded, 
d  shoals  extend 
feet  of  water  is 

be  south  end  of 
ath  and  §  mile 
y  wooded, 
d,  and  a  16-foot 

[.    It  ia  about  ^ 
,  with  6  feet  of 
southeastward 
tn. 

id  light.    It  has 
I. 
toy  is  moored  in 

(12^)  miles  long 
ad  2j^  (34)  miles 
>w  bluffs  on  the 
!.  end  is  Beaver 

ore  around  the 
bhe  shore  can  be 

one  mile  NW. 
he  NE.  point. 

and  marks  the 

from  shore. 

)uoy. 

rbor  extends  | 

trance  is  very 
uua/;qnainted 

le  lake  level,  a 
indrical  tower 
the  north  side 

65  feet  west  of 

t  shoal  extends 

thouse. 

)t. 


BEAVER   ISLAND SOUTH   FOX    ISLAND. 


ef 


Directlona.— With  the  lighthouse  bearing  NW.  by  W.  (N.  50°  W.), 
distant  one  mile,  bring  it  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow,  and  head  NW. 
by  W.  %  W.  (N.  65°  W.)  into  the  harbor.  Give  the  lighthouse  a  good 
berth.  Anchorage  can  be  found  on  a  line  between  the  inner  and  cater 
docks. 

Bearer  Island  light — On  the  south  end  of  Beaver  island  a  fixed, 
white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  minute,  visible  16  (18^)  miles, 
is  shown  103  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  cylindrical  tower  on  the 
weal  end  of  a  dwelling,  both  yellow.  This  is  a  coast  light  and  a  guide 
between  Beaver  and  North  Fox  islands. 

Fog  signal.— A  steam  siren  sounds  blasts  of  seven  seconds'  duration, 
with  silent  intervals  of  forty-two  seconds. 

Richards  reef,  with  a  least  depth  of  20  feet,  lies  6}  (7^)  miles  W.  |  S. 
(8.  82°  W.)  of  Beaver  Island  light. 

North  Fox  island  is  10  (11^)  miles  SW.  of  Beaver  island,  with  deep 
wat«r  between.  The  island  is  2  (2^)  miles  north  and  south,  and  a  mile 
wide  at  its  northern  end,  tapering  to  a  point  at  its  southern  end.  At 
this  end  is  a  small  hill.  The  island  is  wooded.  Shoal  water  extends  \ 
mile  firom  the  north  and  east  shores  and  |  mile  from  its  southwestern 
shore. 

Sonth  Fox  island  is  3|  (4^)  miles  SW.  of  North  Fox.  It  is  ^  (^) 
miles  long  NW.  and  SE.  and  l/o  (U)  miles  wide,  tapering  to  a  point  at 
the  NW.  and  SE.  extremities.  The  western  coast  consists  of  bluffs  and 
hills,  the  eastern  side  being  low. 

Around  the  south  end  of  the  island  shoals  extend  ^  mile  off  shore, 
and  off  the  NW.  end  there  is  shoal  water  for  ^  mile,  terminating  in  a 
narrow  spit  off  the  NW.  point,  which  extends  1  (1^)  mile  to  the  NW. 

Sonfh  Fox  Island  lifht — A  fixed  red  light,  varied  by  a  red  flash 
every  two  minutes,  visible  IS/i,,  (16)  miles,  is  shown  68  feet  above  the 
lake  level  from  a  square  yellow,  tower,  attached  to  a  yellow  dwelling 
on  the  southern  extremity  of  the  island. 

Fog  signaL — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  three  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  seventeen  seconds.  The  fog-signal  building  is 
brown  and  is  420  feet  SW.  by  W.  from  the  light  tower. 

Banka — From  the  northern  part  of  the  island  a  bank  with  from  4  to 
8  fathoms  extends  northward  3J  (4^)  miles.  It  has  an  average  breadth 
of  aboat  2§  (3)  miles.  From  the  southern  part  of  the  island  a  bank 
with  from  3  to  8  fathoms  of  water  over  it  extends  south  8^  (9f )  miles, 
varying  in  width  from  1  (IJ)  to  IJ  (If)  miles,  with  depths  of  12  to  50 
fathoms  outside.    On  this  bank  there  are  several  small  shoals. 

A  shoal  spot,  8  feet  of  water  over  rocks,  bears  S.  by  W.  (S.  11°  W.) 
fSrom  the  light,  distant  4  (4r,\)  miles. 

Bnoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  nun  buoy  is  moored  in 
20  feet  water  and  marks  the  south  side  of  this  shoal,  which  extends 
4  mile  north  and  south.  The  bottom  near  the  buoy  is  rocky,  the  sound- 
ings irregular,  and  vessels  must  be  careful  in  this  vicinity  in  thick 
weather. 


68 


LAKE    MICHIGAN. 


Two  otiier  spots  S.  f  W.  (S.  8°  W.),  OA  Hk)  in'l«8  from  tlie  light,  ha^e 
8  feet  over  tliiina.    Tlie  Hh()als  are  lir»()  yards  ivi)nrt  NW.   nid  8E. 

Buoy. — A  red  niid  black  borizoutivlly  striped  spar  buoy  is  moored  in 
17  fe«'t  water  and  marks  the  south  side  of  the  NW.  spot. 

A  ^lioiil  spot  with  11  feet  of  water  over  it  lies  S.  i  V  .  (S.  5°  W.),  dig* 
tuiit  6^  (7^)  miles  from  the  light. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  bhu;k  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  in 
2U  feet  water  niid  marks  the  south  end  of  this  shoal. 

Caution. — In  thiek  weather  vessels  should  not  shoal  the  water  to  less 
than  10  fathoms  in  this  vicinity. 

North  Manitou  island  is  G|  (7^)  miles  north  and  south  and  3^  (4) 
miles  wide  at  its  north  end,  2  (2fg)  miles  at  its  south  end.  The  island 
is  ){en«3ra11y  hilly  and  is  wooded.  The  north  shore  is  steep-to,  and  the 
east  and  west  shores  are  sho;  for  nearly  J  mile.  From  the  OW.  point 
a  rocky  spit  extends  ^  mile  SVV.  and  borders  the  SW.  face  of  the  island 
for  %  mile  off  shore. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  Pickards 
wharf  on  the  east  side  of  the  island. 

Wreck. — A  wreck  in  26  feet  water  with  12  feet  over  it  lies  4,^  (5|) 
miles  NE.  by  E.  jj  E.  (N.  G^o  B.)  of  South  Manitou  light.  Vessels  should 
give  this  wreck  a  wide  berth  as  it  is  a  dangerous  obstruction. 

South  Manitou  island  is  3^  (4)  miles  SW.  of  North  Manitou,  with  a 
clear  channel  between.  The  island  h  2)|  (3)  miles  north  and  south  and 
not  quite  so  wide.  The  western  half  of  the  island  is  hilly,  and  the 
eastern  side  lower  and  wooded. 

Ontsi(1«  rhe  distance  of  f  mile  there  are  no  shoals,  excepting  a  rock 
of  3  fathom  1  A^hich  lies  If  (2)  miles  SSW.  J  W.  (S.  28°  W.)  from  the 
SVV.  point  of  the  Island.  On  the  northeast'Crn  side  of  the  island  is  a 
symicircular  harbor,  with  deep  water  and  good  holding  ground.  It  is 
a  good  finchorage  in  all  westerly  winds. 

LigbC. — On  the  south  point  of  Manitou  harbor  is  a  fixed  white  light, 
104  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  16  (18^)  miles.  The  light 
tower  is  conical,  white,  and  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  a  yellow 
dwelling. 

Fog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  eight  sec- 
onds' duration,  with  silent  interval  of  fifty-two  seconds  every  minute. 
The  fog-signal  hon^^es  (two)  have  red  roofs,  and  are  100  feet  NE,  and 
200  feet  NNE.  of  the  lighthouse. 

NORTH  SH(:)RE  OP  LAKE  MICHIGAN. 

MICHIGAN. 

Coast— Epoufette  point  is  14  (16)  miles  NW.  by  W.  J  W.  of  Aux 
Chines  point,  the  coast  between  receding  slightly  to  the  NE.  The  SE. 
portion  of  this  coast  is  steep-to,  but  as  Epoufette  point  is  approached 
there  are  several  patches  of  from  16  to  18  feet  well  off  shore. 


rarinr- 


lie  light,  have 

md  SE. 

y  is  moored  in 

S.  50  W.),  dig. 

y  is  moored  in 

e  water  to  less 

nth  and  3^  (4) 
I.  The  inliuid 
lep-to,  and  the 
the  OW.  point 
e  of  the  island 

near  Pickards 

it  lies  4,%  (S|) 
Vessels  should 
3tion. 

ranitou,  with  a 
nnd  soatb  and 
hilly,  and  the 

ccpting  a  rock 

W.)  from  the 

he  island  is  a 

{ground.    It  is 

id  white  light, 
The  light 
with  a  yellow 

of  eight  sec- 

I  every  minute. 

feet  NE.  and 


EPOUFETTE    POINT — MANI8TIQUE   RIVER. 


69 


1 4  W.  of  Aux 

IE.    The  SE. 

Is  approached 


lore. 


St  Helena  shoal,  south  of  Aux  Cfaf'iies  point,  is  described  on  page  52. 

Manitou  Faymen  shoal.    See  page  02. 

Felkie  reef.    See  page  62. 

Epoufette  point  is  a  narrow  peninsula  and  forms  the  western 
extremity  of  a  narrow  shoal  inlet  at  the  head  of  which  is  Efwnfette. 

Biddle  point,  next  west  of  Epoufette,  projects  some  distance  into 
the  lake.  NE.  of  Biddle  point  is  Gilchrist.  Between  Epoufette  and 
Biddle  jjoints,  shoal  water  extends  from  the  shore  for  over  a  mile,  and 
there  is  an  ISfoot  patch  1^  (If)  miles  SE.  ^  E.  (S.  48°  E.)  from  Biddle 
point. 

Mille  Coquins  point. — Between  Biddh  nd  Mille  Goqnins  points  is 
a  small  bay,  the  shores  of  which  are  sb  tl  from  ^  to  |  mile  out.  Nau- 
binway  is  on  this  point. 

At  $  mile  south  of  Mille  Ooquins  all  island  surrounded  by 

exposed  rooks  and  shoals  extending  oui  o  <.  '"tt  and  west  and  ^  miJe 
north  and  south. 

SE.  from  this  island,  1  (1|)  mile,  is  a  7-foot  rocky  spot. 

Coast. — From  Mille  Goqnins  point  the  coast  trends  NW.  for  2§  (3) 
miles,  thence  SW.  9^  (11)  miles  to  Patterson  point.  There  is  a  rock  i 
mile  olf  shore  just  after  the  coast  line  changes  its  direction  to  the  SW., 
and  from  this  rock  the  flats  gradually  leave  the  shore,  and  midway 
between  this  rock  and  Patterson  point  extend  off  shore  2-^  (2^)  miles 
in  the  direction  of  Potter  reef,  which  is  described  on  page  62.  As  Pat- 
terson i)oint  is  approached  the  flats  draw  nearer  to  the  shore  line. 

Lansing  shoal,  SB.  of  Patterson  point,  is  described  on  page  65. 

Scotts  point,  on  which  is  the  town  of  Orville,  is  1^  (If)  miles  west 
of  Patterson  point,  and  Hughes  point  is  5|  (6)  miles  farther  west.  All 
this  coast  is  shoal  for  some  distance  off  and  should  not  be  approached 
within  a  mile.  South  of  Hughes  point,  about  a  mile,  are  shoal  spots  of 
15  and  17  feet. 

Between  Hughes  and  Seal  Ohoix  points  is  a  bay  with  deep  water  and 
sandy  bottom;  it  is  protected  fi'om  north  and  westerly  winds. 

Seol  Choiz  point  projects  into  the  lake  If  (2)  miles.  Its  SW.  face 
is  quite  steep-to. 

Light — On  the  eastern  extremity  of  Seul  Choix  point  is  a  fixed  white 
light,  83  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  14f  (17)  miles.  The  light 
is  shown  from  a  conical  brick  tower. 

Fog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  four  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  twenty-six  seconds.  The  building  is  red  brick 
with  red  roof,  and  is  124  feet  SB.  J  B.  from  the  light  tower. 

Manistique  river. — The  mouth  of  this  river  is  14  (16)  miles  W.  ^  N. 
from  Seul  Ohoix  point.  The  shore  between  is  rocky  and  recedes  to  the 
northward.  Vessels  should  not  go  inside  the  line  joining  the  two. 
Gulliver  lake  is  1^^  (IJ)  miles  inshore  and  nearly  midway  between  the 
point  and  the  river.  Manistique  river  is  shoal,  and  its  eastern  entrance 
point  has  a  rocky  spit  extending  out  for  over  J  mile.  Manistique  is 
near  the  mouth  of  the  river. 


TO 


LAKE    MICHIGAN. 


Coast— At  Manlstlqne  river  the  coaHt  line  cliangos  its  direction  to 
tlie  soutliwanl  m  tar  as  Aux  liarqucs  |)oiiit,  where  it  again  changes  to 
about  SW.  to  Detour  jxiint,  Mhicli  \n  lo)}  (IH)  niilcH  beyond.  Along 
this  latter  Htretch  are  Heveral  small  rocky  bays. 

Wiggins  point  is  4  ( t^)  n»il«8  nortii  of  Aux  Barques  point,  with 
Bourassas  point  midway  between,  llocky  shoals,  with  5  and  0  feet 
water,  extend  ofi"  VViKgins  point  IJ  (2)  miles  in  an  easterly  and  south- 
easterly direction. 

Parent  bay.— This  bay,  to  the  westward  of  Aux  Barques  point,  is 
full  of  rocky,  dangerous  shoals  1^(1^)  miles  from  shore,  and  these  con- 
tinue  to  and  around  Aux  Barques  iioint  at  3  mile  from  shore. 

Portage  bay.— From  the  west  side  of  Portage  bay  shoals  extend  for 
S  mile  from  shore,  and  east  of  the  bay  dangerous  5  and  8  foot  shoals 
extend  1}  (2)  miles  to  the  SE.,  while  lA(li)  uiilcs  to  the  NB.  are  some 
exposed  rocks  f  mile  from  shore.  The  shoal  water  at  the  head  of  this 
bay  extends  Ifo-  (IJ)  miles  from  shore. 

Detonr  point  is  the  north  point  of  entrance  to  Green  bay.  It  is  a 
narrow,  wooded,  peninsular  point  projecting  to  the  SE.  into  the  lake, 
and  has  shoal  water  projecMng  southward  from  it  for  g  mile. 

The  islands  at  the  entrance  to  Green  bay  will  now  be  described;  the 
description  of  the  bay  will  be  given  in  the  next  chapter. 

ISLANDS  AT   THE  ENTRANCE  TO  OUEEN  BAY. 

Summer  and  Little  Summer  islands  are  south  and  west  of  Detour 
point.  They  are  wor.!  I  a  1  connected  by  a  rocky  flat,  over  which, 
midway  between,  are  r  i.y  3  leet  water.  This  flat  extends  from  Little 
Summer  island  to  tli;  main,  leaving  a  very  shallow  and  unsafe  passage 
between.  Just  v  ■  ,  of  Little  Summer  island  is  Rocky  island,  which 
has  shoals  extending  from  it  westward  and  northward  for  over  ^  mile. 
There  is  a  detached  13-foot  shoal  1  (IJ)  mile  south  of  Rocky  island. 
A  rocky  spit  wit^h  13  feet  over  it  extends  nearly  |  mile  south  from  the 
south  point  of  Summer  island. 

Poverty  island  is  a  mile  SSW.  of  Summer  island.  The  channel 
between,  reduced  to  ^  mile  in  width  by  Summer  Island  spit,  carries  20 
feet  nearer  to  Poverty  island,  but  it  should  not  be  attempted  except  by 
those  locally  acquainted.  The  island  is  ^  mile  north  and  south  by  J 
mile  wide.  There  is  a  hill  on  the  western  side  of  the  island.  The  south 
shore  of  the  island  is  shoal  for  from  ^  to  J  mile  off.  The  TSW.  shore  is 
steep- to. 

Light— A  flashing  red  light  every  fifteen  seconds,  visible  14J  (16f) 
miles,  is  shown  78  feet  above  the  lake  l^-el  fr^m  a  conical  tower  con- 
nected with  a  whit«  dwelling  on  the  south  end  of  Poverty  island. 

Fog  signaL— A 10  inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds' 
duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  forty-five  seconds;  then  a 
blast  of  three  seconds'  duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  ten 
seconds. 


JisA, 


tmtfm^mmm'iv'-ntv,,-^ 


its  direction  to 
gain  changes  to 
boyund.    Along 

|uea  point,  with 
li  5  and  0  feet 
tcrly  and  south- 

arques  point,  is 

I,  and  these  con- 

shore. 

loals  extend  for 

id  9  foot  shoals 

le  NB.  are  some 

he  head  of  this 

)n  bay.    It  is  a 
i.  into  the  lake, 
mile, 
described;  the 

■  • 

AY. 

west  of  Detour 
lat,  over  which, 
lids  from  Little 
unsafe  passage 
j^  island,  which 
for  over  ^  mile. 

Rocky  island, 
soath  from  the 

The  channel 
spit,  carries  20 
pted  except  by 
and  south  by  ^ 
nd.  The  soath 
B  NW.  shore  is 

isible  14J  (16f ) 
cal  tower  con- 
ty  island. 
)f  five  seconds' 
tconds;  then  a 
interval  of  ten 


I 


I 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historicai  MIcroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


POVERTY   ISLAND   SHOAL — ROCK   ISLAND. 


71 


PoviBrty  Island  shoal  lies  WW.  J  W.  (N.  48°  W.)  2 J  (2f )  miles  from 
Poverty  Island  light,  with  14  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Bnoy.— It  is  marked  by  a  red  nun  buoy  moored  in  20  feet  water. 

This  buoy,  ^  mile  south  of  the  shoal,  marks  a  narrow  ledge  of  rocks, 
with  23  feet  of  water  over  them,  extending  about  500  yards  S.  by  E. 
from  the  buoy.  There  may  be  less  water  in  spots  over  this  ledge,  and 
caution  is  necessary  with  deeply  laden  vessels. 

Oull  island  is  almost  midway  between  Poverty  island  and  St.  Martin 
island.  It  is  connected  to  Little  Gull  island,  f  mile  to  the  southward, 
by  a  shoal  with  a  least  depth  of  3  feet,  which  is  |  mile  wide. 

GraveUy  island  is  f  mile  ¥.  by  W.  from  Gull  island.  It  is  sur- 
rounded by  shoal  water,  and  in  the  channel  between  the  island  is  a 
13-foot  shoal. 

G-raveUy  Island  shoal  is  one  (IJ)  mile  north  of  Gravelly  island. 
It  has  16  feet  over  it.    South  of  this  rock  J  mile  is  a  13-foot  shoal. 

Bnoy.— -A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water  to  mark  Grav- 
elly  Island  shoal.    Vessels  should  pass  northward  of  the  buoy. 

Poverty  Island  passage.— If  entering  Green  bay  by  this  passage, 
keep  at  least  one  mile  to  the  southward  of  Poverty  Island  light  and 
between  the  buoys,  not  approaching  Poverty  Island  Shoal  buoy  nearer 
than  ^  mile. 

Bring  GraveUy  Island  buoy  to  bear  south  before  keeping  to  the 
northward.  The  passage  between  Gull  and  Gravelly  islands  on  the 
north  and  St.  Martin  island  on  the  south  is  to  be  preferred,  as  it  has 
deep  water  and  no  dangers  if  a  vessel  keeps  on  the  St.  Martin  side  of 
a  mid-channel  course. 

St  Bbrtin  island  is  2  (2*)  miles  NNW.  and  SSE.  and  1  (IJ)  mile 
east  and  west.  The  island  is  hilly  and  wooded.  Shoals  extend  off 
the  southern  end  of  the  island  for  a  mile,  with  from  4  to  8  feet  water 
over  them.    The  rest  of  the  island  is  steep-to. 

Shoals.— At  If  (2)  miles  SSW.  of  the  SB.  point  of  St.  Martin  island 
is  a  9-foot  shoal  with  a  IS-foot  spot  ^  mile  NNB.  of  it.  These  shoals  con- 
tract the  main  entrance  (Kock  Island  passage)  to  Green  bay  as  they  lie 
almost  midway  between  St.  Martin  and  Rock  islands. 

Buoy.— A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  21  feet  of  water  on  the  8W 
side  of  the  small  9-foot  shoal. 

Vessels  entering  nust  pass  south  of  this  buc/. 

WISCONSIN. 

Rock  island,  the  south  entrance  point  of  Eock  Island  passage,  is 
hilly,  and  is  connected  to  Washington  island  by  shoals.  The  NE.  and 
W.  shores  of  the  island  are  steep-to. 

Light— On  the  north  point  of  Rock  island  is  a  fixed  white  light  137 
feet  above  tha  lake  level,  and  visible  17i  (19f )  miles.  The  light  tower 
is  square,  on  a  stone  dwelling. 

Rooky  shoals.— Prom  the  SB.  point  of  Rook  island,  between  the 


72 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


bearings  E.  by  8.  (8.  79°  E.)  aiid  8.  by  E.  f  E.  (8.  20°  E.),  and  (distant 
If  (2)  and  2%  (3)  miles,  are  two  rocky  shoals  separated  by  clear  water. 
The  northern  shoal  is  almost  bare  and  the  southern  one  has  3  feet  over 
it.  By  keeping  4J  (5)  miles  off  the  islands,  a  vessel  will  well  clear 
the  shoals. 

Rock  Island  passage  should  be  preferred  by  vessels  from  the  north 
and  NE.  It  can  be  safely  entered  if  the  Rock  Island  light  is  kept 
between  the  bearings  W.  by  8.  (8.  79°  W.)  and  W.  by  N.  (N.  79o  W.) 
until  within  about  a  mile  of  the  light.  All  this  part  of  Rock  island  is 
steep-to,  and  it  can  be  rounded  at  the  distance  of  J  mile,  if  necessary. 

Washington  is  the  largest  of  the  islands  at  the  entrance  to  Green 
bay.  It  is  connected  to  Rock  island  on  the  NE.,  Hog  island  on  the 
east,  and  Detroit  island  on  the  south  by  shoals.  Boyer  bluff  is  its 
NW.  extreme,  just  east  of  which  is  Washington  harbor. 

Jacksons  harbor  is  between  Washington  and  Rock  islands,  and 
Detroit  harbor  n  the  south  side  of  the  island  is  protected  by  Detroit 
island.    This  harbor  is  shoal  and  only  suitable  for  very  small  craft.      . 

Hog  island  is  |  mile  off  the  east  coast  of  Washington  island  and  is 
on  a  shoal  which  extends  along  this  part  of  Washingtou  island  and 
J  mile  into  the  lake  beyond  Hog  island. 

Detroit  island.— This  long,  narrow  island,  lying  to  the  southward 
of  Washington  island,  is  practically  part  of  it,  as  very  shoal  water 
connects  the  two. 

Shoals.— From  the  southern  end  of  Detroit  island  shoals  extend  | 
mile  to  the  8E.,  with  6  feet  of  water  and  rocks  awash  J  mile  from  shore. 

On  the  SW.  side  of  Detroit  island  the  flats  and  detached  shoals 
extend  ^  mile  from  shore,  the  northwestern  shoal.  Middle  shoal,  with  8 
feet  of  water  over  it,  being  marked  by  a  buoy.  Near  the  8W.  end  of 
the  island  are  two  islets  J  mile  offshore. 

Buoy.— The  8W.  point  of  Middle  shoal  is  marked  by  a  red  spar  buoy 
moored  in  11  feet  water. 

Wrecks.— Tliere  are  two  wrecks  on  Middle  shoal,  the  one  to  the 
northward  of  the  red  spar  buoy  having  but  8  feet  of  water  over  it, 
the  one  to  the  8W.  of  the  same  buoy  having  15  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Detroit  Island  £:assage.— This  passage  to  the  northward  of  Pilot 
and  Plum  islands  can  be  used,  but  great  care  is  necessary  to  avoid  the 
shoals  off  Detroit  and  Plum  Ws.  It  is  sometimes  used  as  an 
anchorage  during  easterly  gau 

rium  island  lies  in  the  cenusi  of  the  channel  south  of  Washington 
island.  Shoal  water  extends  i  mile  8E.  from  the  SB.  end  of  the  island 
and  i  mile  northward  from  the  north  coast.  This  shoal  is  apparently 
making  out  in  a  NE.  direction.  Ou  the  SW.  end  of  Plum  island  are 
the  ruins  of  an  old  lighthouse. 

Buoy.— A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  NE. 
point  of  the  north  shoal.  It  can  be  passed  close-to  from  the  north- 
ward, but  on  approaching  it  from  the  westward  it  should  be  given  a 
berth  of  at  lea ^t  ^  mile. 


E.);  and  flistatt 
.  by  clear  water. 
3  has  3  feet  over 
[  will  well  clear 

s  from  the  north 
id  light  is  kept 
r  N.  (N.  790  W.) 
f  Bock  island  is 
ile,  if  necessary, 
itrance  to  Green 
g  island  on  the 
oyer  bluff  is  its 

ck  islands,  and 
icted  by  Detroit 
Y  small  craft. 
■jon  island  and  is 
gtoa  island  and 

>  the  southward 
ery  shoal  water 

shoals  extend  f 
mile  firom  shore, 
detached  shoals 
die  shoal,  with  8 
the  SW.  end  of 

r  a  red  spar  buoy 

the  one  to  the 
>f  water  over  it, 

water  over  it. 
thward  of  Pilot 
ary  to  avoid  the 
DCS  used  as  an 

of  Washington 
:nd  of  the  island 
il  is  apparently 
i'lum  island  are 

ater  on  the  NE. 
from  the  north- 
uld  be  given  a 


PILOT   ISLAND PORTE   DES   M0RT8. 


78 


Pilot  island  lies  in  the  entrance  to  the  southern  channel  into 
Green  bay,  and  separates  Detroit  Island  passage  from  Porte  des  Morts. 
It  is  on  a  small  shoal  ^  mile  in  diiiroetcr. 

Light — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  p  white  Hash  every  fifteen 
seconds,  is  shown  on  Pilot  island.  It  is  38  feet  above  the  lake  level 
and  visible  11^  (13^)  miles.  The  liglit  tower  is  square  and  on  a  yellow 
brick  building,  with  red  roof.  The  fog  signal  building  is  200  feet  S.  by 
W.  from  the  lighthouse. 

Fog  Signal — A  lOinch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  thirty  seconds. 

Outer  Shoal.— Porte  des  Morts  entrance— This  shoal  is  If  (2) 
miles  off  shore  at  the  south  entrance  to  Porte  des  Morts,  and  has  14 
feet  over  its  northern  part.  It  is  the  extreme  easterly  shoal  on  this 
part  of  the  coast. 

Buoy. — A  bell  buoy  is  moored  in  19  feet  water  on  the  SE.  end  of 
this  shoal.    Vessels  sliould  pass  well  outside  of  it. 

Nine-foot  ShoaL — The  center  of  this  shoal  is  §  mile  off  shore  and 
If  (2)  miles  WSW.  ^  W.  (S.  73°  W.)  from  Pilot  Island  light.  There  is  a 
least  depth  of  0  feet  on  this  shoal.    Marked  by  a  black  bpar  buoy. 

Waverly  Shoal,  with  a  least  depth  of  12  feet,  is  about  700  yards 
northward  of  !Nine-foot  shoal. 

Buoy. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  near  the  NE.  end  of  Waverly 
Shoal  to  mark  it. 

Porte  des  Morta — Current. — Masters  of  vessels  are  warned  against 
the  currents  which  run  in  and  out  through  this  entrance,  particularly 
on  the  sonth  sides  of  Pilot  and  Plum  islands.  With  southerly  winds 
the  current  sets  about  NNW.,  passing  on  both  sides  of  Pilot  island, 
a  branch  passing  to  the  NW.  and  south  of  Plum  island.  Its  strength 
depends,  in  a  great  measure,  on  the  velocity  of  the  wind.  With  the 
wind  NW.  and  blowing  strong  the  current  sets  out  into  the  lake  and  is 
frequently  so  strong  that  sailing  vessels  can  not  make  headway  against 
it.    Sometimes  the  current  is  against  the  wind. 

Directions. — With  strong  southerly  winds,  vessels  standing  to  the 
westward  are  advised  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  Pilot  island  and,  in 
all  cases,  to  the  southward  of  Plum  island. 

With  any  but  strong  southerly  winds  the  passage  to  the  southward 
of  Pilot  island  is  recommended. 

Caution — The  most  dangerous  shoal  in  this  vicinity  is  that  pro- 
jecting to  the  southwestward  from  Pilot  island.  Over  this  shoal  the 
current  runs  with  great  strength  and  vessels  from  the  eastward  are 
frequently  carried  on  the  shoal.  This  may  be  avoided  by  watching  the 
bearings  of  the  lighthouse  when  standing  in.  If  the  bearing  is  not 
changed  to  the  northward,  it  is  evident  that  the  vessel  is  being  carried 
to  the  northward,  consequently  the  course  should  be  changed  well  to 
the  southward  of  west,  and  not  again  to  the  northwestward  until  the 
lighthouse  bears  north. 

Coast. — Southward  of  Porto  des  Morts,  lake  Michigan  is  separated 


®v^;Siil^f«si«MSai^&'i«fc*<4«iSS«S«^ 


74 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


from  Green  bay  by  a  long  peuinBula,  which  extends  northeasterly  60 
(69)  miles  from  a  linejoiuiiig  Kewaunee  with  Green  bay.  The  eastern 
shore  of  this  peninsula  is  much  indented,  but  is  safe  to  approach  to  3 
(3^)  miles. 

Rawley  bay  is  the  northernmost  of  the  indentations  in  the  pcnin 
snla  and  aflbrds  good  anchorage  and  i)rotuction  from  northerly  and 
westerly  winds,  but  it  is  much  obstructed  by  slioals  botli  at  its  entrance 
and  within  the  bay.  Off  the  north  entrance  point  to  the  bay  are  the 
Spider  islands,  which  are  connected  with  tlio  shore  by  slioals,  and  SB. 
of  tlie  islands,  f  mile,  is  a  13-foot  pntch.  Vessels  in  navigating  this 
part  of  the  coast  should  keep  well  outside  Outer  Shoal  buoy  to  avoid 
the  numerous  outlying  shoals  in  this  locality. 

ShoaL — Directly  in  the  entrance  to  IJawley  bay  is  an  extensive 
shoal  extending  north  and  south  2^*,-  (2f )  miles.  There  are  3  feet  on 
the  south  end  of  this  shoal  and  4  feet  on  the  north  end. 

Buoy. — A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water  and  marks  the 
southeastern  point  of  this  shoal.  Should  a  vessel  find  it  necessary  to 
enter  Rawley  bay  this  buoy  should  be  left  well  to  starboard  and  the 
course  not  changed  to  the  northward  until  well  over  to  the  shore  of 
the  main. 

North  bay,  next  south  of  Kawley  bay,  is  small,  and  affords  for  small 
craft  anchorage  and  protection  from  west  and  north  winds.  The 
anchorage  is  just  within  the  entrance  points  of  the  bay,  and  is  aboat 
'i  mile  deep,  all  the  rest  of  the  bay  being  shoal.  Sand  spits  extend 
from  both  entrance  points;  the  channel  is  between  the  buoys,  being 
about  ^  mile  wide. 

Buoys.— A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  24  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
shoal  extending  southward  from  the  north  entrance  point. 

A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet,  and  marks  the  extreme  point 
of  the  shoal  extending  northeastward  from  the  south  point  of  entrance. 

Oana  island  is  2^  {2^%)  miles  south  of  the  entrance  to  North  bay. 
It  is  a  small  island  close  to  shore. 

Light— A  fixed  white  light,  88  feet  above  the  sea  level  and  visible 
15J  (17^)  miles,  is  shown  on  Cana  island.  The  light  tower  is  conical, 
and  connected  by  covered  way  with  dwelling.    Both  are  of  yellow  brick. 

Mud  bay  is  jnst  within  Cana  island.  It  is  contracted,  with  a 
shoal  near  the  center,  and  having  neither  buoys  nor  lights,  is  not 
recommended. 

Bailey  harbor  is  a  good  and  well-sheltered  anchorage,  but  has  shoals 
extending  from  both  entrance  points,  also  in  the  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

There  is  an  old  whit^  tower  (formerly  a  lighthouse)  on  the  east  side 
of  the  harbor  abreast  the  north  entrance  point  which  serves  as  a  good 
day  mark,  and  opposite  it  on  the  otlier  side  of  the  harbor  a  shoal  makes 
out  J  mile.  Off  the  center  of  the  town  on  the  west  side  the  shore  can 
be  approached  to  J  mile.  Elsewhere  it  is  best  to  keep  at  least  i  mile 
from  shore.    Hills  rise  from  the  western  siiore  of  the  harbor. 


northeasterly  60 
iy.  Tbe  eastern 
to  approach  to  3 

18  in  the  penin 
II  northerly  and 
hat  its  entrance 
the  bay  are  the 
shoals,  and  SE. 
navigating  this 
al  buoy  to  avoid 

is  an  extensive 

re  are  3  feet  on 

i. 

r  and  marks  the 

I  it  necessary  to 

[irboard  and  the 

'  to  the  shore  of 

aflbrds  for  small 
rth  winds.  The 
ay,  and  is  about 
md  spits  extend 
;he  buoys,  being 

',  and  marks  the 

)int. 

le  extreme  point 

toint  of  entrance. 

e  to  North  bay. 

evel  and  visible 
cower  is  conical, 
B  of  yellow  brick, 
itracted,  with  a 
[>r  lights,  is  not 

e,  but  has  shoals 
ice  to  the  harbor. 
m  the  east  side 
serves  as  a  good 
or  a  shoal  makes 
ie  the  shore  can 
p  at  least  ^  mile 
larbor. 


BAILET  HARBOB — BTURaEON  BAY  CANAL. 


IS 


Eastern  shoal — From  the  eastern  point  of  Bailey  harbor  a  slionl 
1  (1^)  mile  wide  makes  out  to  tbe  southward  a  mile,  with  13  feet  of 
water  on  its  southwestern  and  15  on  its  southeastern  end. 

Bvoy. — Its  southwestern  end  is  marked  by  a  red  spar  buoy  in  18 
fbet  of  water. 

Bliddle  Ground  shoal  is  in  the  mouth  of  Bailey  harbor.  It  is  a 
rocky  shoal  with  14  feet  of  water  over  the  southern  end  and  7  feet  over 
the  northern. 

Bnoy. — The  southeastern  end  of  this  shoal  is  marked  by  a  black 
Spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water. 

Range  lights. — On  the  north  shore  of  Bailey  harbor  from  a  white 
tower  is  shown  a  fixed  white  Ught.  The  light  is  21  feet  above  the  lake 
level  and  visible  0}  (11)  miles. 

The  rear  light,  also  white,  is  950  feet  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  (N.  17°  W.)  of 
the  front  light.  This  light  is  35  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible 
11^  (13)  miles. 

^Thiteflsh  point  is  8§  (10)  miles  SSW.  of  Bailey  harbor.  In  the 
middle  of  the  bight  north  of  Gave  point  a  spit  with  6  feet  near  its 
outer  end  projects  from  shore  1/f  (IJ)  miles.  Whitefish  bay,  north  of 
Whiteflsh  point,  is  clear  of  shoals  and  open  to  the  eastward. 

ShoaL— A  shoal  of  13  feet  lies  ^  mile  SE.  of  Whitefish  point. 

Bnoy. — ^A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
SE.  end  of  this  shoal. 

Coast.— From  Whiteflsh  point  the  coast  trends  7  (8)  miles  SW.  to 
Sturgeon  Bay  canal.  This  shore  should  not  be  approached  to  within 
a  mile,  as  rocky  reefis  extend  out  in  places  to  nearly  that  distance. 

Harbor  of  reinge. — This  entrance  to  the  canal  leading  from  lake 
Michigan  to  Sturgeon  bay  is  a  harbor  of  refuge,  though  too  limited  in 
area  and  too  unprotected  to  be  very  efiicient.  The  village  of  Portage 
is  a  short  distance  to  the  northward.  In  shape  the  harbor  is  triangfu- 
lar,  being  bounded  by  two  converging  piers  850  feet  apart  at  the  shore 
line  and  335  feet  apart  at  the  outer  end.  Beyond  the  piers  on  either 
side  are  detached,  portions  of  crib  work  connected  with  the  main  piers 
by  fender  piling.    The  inclosed  area  is  nearly  10  acres. 

In  October,  1896, 16  feet  could  be  carried  into  the  harbor  midway 
between  the  piers.  From  here  the  depth  shoals  gradually  toward  the 
!NW.  and  SW.  angles  of  the  harbor. 

Btaxgfion  Bay  oanal  is  100  feet  wide  at  water  surface  and  65  feet  at 
bottom,  and  7,200  feet  long.  In  April,  1895,  the  canal  had  a  governing 
depth  of  13  feet.  Vessels  can  not  tie  up  in  the  canal,  but  must  continue 
mi  to  Sturgeon  bay. 

For  a  description  of  the  western  end  of  the  canal,  see  Ohapter  VI. 

Canal  Pierhaad  light — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  7,^  (8^)  miles,  is 
sbown  Arom  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the 
north  pier. 

Fog  wiffui. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle,  in  a  house  in  the  rear  of  the 


7€f 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


light  tower,  8onnds  blnsts  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  silent  intervals 
of  twenty  Ave  seconds. 

Note. — This  signal  has  been  reported  as  inaudible  and  unreliable  at 
certain  distances  therefrom  during  the  prevalence  of  a  fog.  The  area 
of  inaudibility  covers  a  space  of  about  4  square  miles.  Straight  out 
from  the  canal  for  nearly  a  mile  the  whistle  (  m  be  heard;  beyond  this 
distance  the  sound  becomes  muffled,  and  is  suddenly  lost  to  hearing. 
This  occurs  for  the  space  of  about  a  mile,  when  it  again  becomes  audible. 
This  phenomenon  extends  over  a  space  of  about  2^  miles  off  the  entrance 
to  harbor  north  of  SE.  ^  E.  (S.  50°  E.)  and  about  1^  miles  south  of  BE.  ^ 
E.  (S.  60°  E.),  and  is  about  a  mile  in  width,  and  has  the  same  trend  as 
the  shore.  Authorities  differ  as  to  the  exact  location  ut'  this  apace  of 
inaudibility. 

Life-saving  statioa — There  is  a  life-saving  station  about }  mile  from 
the  light. 

Directions. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  bring  the  Pier- 
head light  to  bear  NW.,  and  stand  in  for  it.  When  the  piers  are 
close- to,  keep  in  mid-channel.  In  passing  from  the  canal  into  Sturgeon 
bay  remember  that  the  channel  in  the  bay  is  buoyed  from  Green  bay  in» 

Coast — Between  Portage  and  Ahnapee  the  coast  trends  12^  (14^) 
miles  SSW.  Near  the  canal  the  land  is  low,  then  hills  60  feet  high  line 
the  coast.  Along  this  stretch  shoals  extend  from  ^  to  f  mile  from  shore. 
At  2-j^  (3)  miles  south  of  the  canal  entrance  and  one  mile  from  shore  is 
a  large  14-foot  spot,  with  a  smaller  14-foot  spot  ^  mile  to  the  northward 
and  another  the  same  distance  to  the  westward.  South  of  this  there 
is  a  17-foot  spot  f  mile  from  shore.  East,  a  mile  from  Ahnapee  light,  is 
a  17-foot  spot. 

Ahnapee  is  on  both  banks  of  the  Ahnapee  river  at  its  month.  The 
entrance  to  the  river  is  protected  by  piers  200  feet  wide  at  outer  end 
and  contracting  to  within  125  feet.  Soundings  in  November,  1896, 
showed  14  feet  at  entrance  and  12  feet  at  the  shore  end  of  the  harbor 
piers.    The  bottom  is  rocky. 

Range  lights. — The  front  light  is  fixed  red,  and  shown  from  a  post 
22  feet  above  the  lake  level  on  the  outer  end  of  north  pier.  The  rear 
light  is  also  red,  visible  6(7)  miles.  It  is  shown  from  a  square,  white, 
pyramidal  tower  near  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 

Directions. — When  1-^g  (1^)  miles  SE.  of  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range.  When  the  piers  are  close-to,  run  between  them  in  mid-channel 
until  the  shore  line  is  reached,  when  keep  to  the  southern  side  of  the 
channel  to  the  bridge. 

Coast — From  Ahnapee  the  coast  continues  in  a  SSW.  direction  for 
9^  (11)  miles  to  Kewaunee.  The  coast  has  rocky  shoals  extending  off 
from  i  to  J  mile;  halfway  between,  a  spit  extends  out  nearly  %  mile, 
with  13  feet  at  its  outer  end.  There  are  dangerous  rooks  i  mile  north 
of  Kewaunee  entrance  and  J  mile  from  shore. 

Kewaunee  is  on  the  south  side  of  Kewaunee  river.  The  entrance 
to  the  river  is  through  a  channel  300  feut  wide  at  the  point  where  tho 


'^Ig^j^^^g^p; 


KEWAUNEE — TWO   RIVERS. 


77 


;h  silent  intervals 

and  unreliable  at 
a  fog.  The  area 
)s.  Straight  oat 
ird;  beyond  this 

lost  to  hearing, 
becomes  audible. 
I  ofif  the  entrance 
es  south  of  SE.  ^ 
le  same  trend  as 

uf  this  space  of 

bbout}  mile  from 

bring  the  Pier- 
n  the  piers  are 
al  into  Sturgeon 
)m  Green  bay  in» 
trends  12^  (144) 
60  feet  high  line 
miie  from  shore, 
ile  from  shore  is 
D  the  northward 
th  of  this  there 
ihnapee  light,  ia 

its  mouth.  The 
de  at  outer  end 
rovember,  1895, 
d  of  the  harbor 

>wn  from  a  post 
pier.  The  rear 
a  square,  white, 

),  head  in  on  the 
in  mid-channel 
ern  side  of  the 

V.  direction  for 
8  extending  off 
i  nearly  f  mile, 
Its  ^  mile  north 

The  entrance 
oint  where  the 


J 


river  bends  to  the  north.  The  lake  end  of  the  channel  is  protected  by 
two  piers  200  feet  apart.  Soundiiiga  in  channel  Ai>ril,  1895,  Hhuwed  a 
channel  midway  between  the  piers  abont  80  feet  wide  and  13  feet  deep. 
A  basin  450  feet  long  and  11  to  12  feet  deep,  the  same  width  as  the 
entrance  channel,  has  been  formed  in  the  old  river  be«l  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  entrance. 

Range  lights.— The  front  light  is  fixed  red,  and  shown  at  outer  end 
of  the  north  pier.  It  is  24  feet  above  the  lake  level.  The  rear  light, 
also  red,  is  42J  feet  high,  and  visible  TiV  m)  miles.  It  is  shown  from 
a  square,  white,  pyramidal  tower  230  feet  from  outer  end  of  the  north 
pier. 

Pog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  three  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  seventeen  seconds. 
Life-saving  station  at  inner  end  of  the  north  pier. 
Directions.— When  1 ,%  (1^)  miles  E8E.  of  the  entrance  head  in  on 
the  range.    When  the  piers  are  close-to  keep  in  mid  channel. 

Caution.— If  approaching  from  the  northward  be  careful  of  the  rooks 
north  of  the  entrance. 

Shoal. — An  18-foot  shoal  has  been  reported  as  lying  |  mile  SE.  by  E. 
I E.  (S.  60°  E.)  of  the  north  pierhead.  It  is  200  feet  long,  15  feet  wide, 
and  extends  NE.  and  SW. 

Coast— Twin  River  point  is  the  easternmost  part  of  Bawleys  point 
and  is  south  14|  (17)  miles  from  Kowatiuee.  From  Twin  River  point 
the  coast  curves  around  to  the  SW.  to  Two  Rivers.  Between  Kewaunee 
and  Twin  River  point  the  coast  line  recedes  slightly  to  the  westward 
and  in  the  bight  are  Deans  and  Two  creeks,  both  at  the  mouths  of 
small  streams.  There  are  no  shoals  outside  the  distance  of  J  mile  from 
shore  along  this  coast.  South  of  Deans  and  ^  mile  offshore  is  a  rock 
with  3  feet  over  it,  and  north  of  Two  creeks,  about  the  same  distance 
offshore,  are  several  detached  17-foot  spots. 

Twin  River  light  is  4J  (5)  miles  from  Two  rivers  on  the  extremity 
of  a  low,  sandy  point.  It  is  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash 
every  thirty  seconds  and  visible  16J  (19)  miles.  ' »}  is  shown  111  feet 
above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical  tower  connect  d  with  a  dwelling; 
both  are  white. 

Pog  signal. — A  10-inoU  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  ttve  seconds' 
duration,  with  alternate  silent  intervals  of  ten  and  forty  seconds.  The 
fog  signal  building  is  on  the  beach  300  feet  SB.  from  the  lighthouse. 

Two  Rivers  is  on  the  SB.  side  of  Rawleys  point,  and  has  an  excel- 
lent harbor,  formed  by  the' junction  of  East  and  West  Twin  rivers, 
ill  the  fall  of  1893  the  city  dredged  the  inside  harbor  to  a  depth  of  10 
to  13  feet.  The  rivers  are  navigable  for  2^  (3)  miles  from  the  mouth. 
The  entrance  is  between  piers  210  feet  apart.  Soundings  taken  in 
April,  1895,  showed  a  governing  depth  of  11  feet.  An  11-foot  shoal 
projecting  from  the  south  pier  makes  the  channel  very  narrow  and  is  a 
seiions  obstruction. 
Light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  7^  (8jJ)  miles,  is  shown  from  a 


w 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


8<{uare  pyramidal  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.  It  is  SS} 
feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Life-Eaving  station. — There  i»  a  life-saving^  statfon  near  the  innm: 
end  of  the  east  pier. 

Tnga. — ^Tugs  are  owned  by  four  difl'erent  parties,  but  are  so  mnob 
engaged  in  flsbing  and  towing  rafts  that  they  are  not  always  obtainable. 

Directions. — When  1/,^  (1^)  niile:}  off  the  entrance  bring  the  Pier- 
head light  to  bear  SW.  (the  piers  run  NW.  and  SE.)  and  head  in. 
When  the  piers  are  close-to.  keep  between  them  in  mid-chanuel. 

Manitowoc  is  built  up  on  both  sides  of  the  mouth  of  the  Manitowoo 
river.  The  entrance  to  the  river  is  between  piers  240  feet  apart  at  the 
outer  end,  narrowing  to  220  feet  inside.  A  breakwater  commences  at 
the  prolongation  of  the  north  pier  and  SOO  feet  from  its  end  and  extends 
toward  shore  in  a  northwesterly  direction  400  feet.  A  channel  midway 
between  the  piers,  150  feet  wide  and  15^  feet  deep,  was  completed  in 
June,  1896. 

Diy  dock. — Length  over  all,  360  feet;  width  of  gate,  44  feet,  and 
depth  over  sill,  13^  feet. 

Lights. — On  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  is  a  square,  white,  pyr- 
amidal tower,  upper  and  lower  parts  inclosed.  A  fixed  red  light  is 
shown  Ax>m  this  tower  34  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  is  visible  7^^ 
(8^)  miles.  On  the  SE.  end  of  the  breakwater,  530  feet  E.  |  N.  (JS.  83° 
E.)  from  Pierhead  light  is  a  brown  corrugated  iron  structure  from 
which  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light,  34  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Fog  signal — A  10 -inch  steam  whistle  sounds  as  follows:  Blast 
three  seconds,  silent  twelve  seconds;  blast  three  seconds,  silent  twelve 
seconds,  blast  six  seconds,  silent  twenty-four  seconds.  A  reflector  over 
this  steam  whistle  throws  the  sound  toward  lake  Michigan. 

Direotiona. — When  l^i^  (I^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  W.  |  S.  (S.  83°  W.),  pass  south  of  the  b.reakwater  and  mid-ohannel 
in  between  piers. 

Shoals. — Several  detached  16-foot  shoals  »re  1  (1^)  mile  NE.  from 
Manitowoo  Pierhead  light  and  from  ^  to  f  mile  off  shore.  Another  shoal 
with  16  feet  on  it  is  1^  (If)  miles  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  from  the  same  light  and 
about  a  mile  off  shore.    This  patch  is  off  the  mo  ith  of  Silver  oreek. 

Coast — Sheboygan  light  is  20  (23)  miles  sou  hward  of  Manitowoc. 
The  coast  between  is  all  along  shoal  from  ^  to  $  mile  offshore  and  has 
several  detached  shoal  patches.  Oenterville  is  about  halfway  between 
the  two  points.  There  is  a  depth  of  0-feet  ^  mile  off  shore,  }  mile  SE. 
of  Oenterville. 

Sheboygan  light.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^  (14$)  miles,  is 
shown  80  feet  above  lake  level  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white  dwelling. 
It  is  on  a  point  a  mile  northward  from  the  town. 

Sheboygan  ree£ — East  of  Sheboygan  light  is  a  small  18-foot  spot 
South  of  this  spot  is  a  17-foot  spot,  and  SE.  4  E.  (S.  48°  E.)  ^  mile  is 
^e  north  part  of  a  reef  which  extends  south  600  yards.    It  has  7  feet 


pier.    It  is  85^ 

near  tlie  inner 

lit  are  so  mnob 
rays  obtainable. 
t)ring  the  Pier> 
.)  and  bead  in. 
-channel. 
'  the  Manitowoo 
Bet  apart  at  the 
r  commences  at 
)nd  and  extends 
hannel  midway 
«  completed  in 

te,  44  feet,  and 

are,  white,  pyr- 
ed  red  light  is 
d  is  visible  7-^ 
E.  I  N.  (N.  83° 
Btracture  firom 
level. 

follows :  Blast 
>,  silent  twelve 
II  reflector  over 
;an. 

lead  in  on  the 
id  mid-ohannel 

mile  NE.  from 
Another  shoal 
lame  light  and 
Silver  ore^. 
of  Manitowoo. 
shore  and  has 
fway  between 
>re,  I  mile  SE. 

14|)  miles,  is 
rhite  dwelling. 

18-foot  spot 
°  E.)  i  mile  is 
It  has  7  feet 


SHEBOYGAN — PORT  WASHINOTOM. 


79 


over  its  northern  part  and  13  feet  over  the  Bonthern.    The  passage 
betwtMMi  the  reef  and  sliore  Hhoiild  not  be  attempted. 

Buoys. — A  red  can  buoy  is  niouied  in  24  feet  water  off  the  north 
shlu  of  the  1 7-fuot  8pot.  A  red  can  buoy  is  niooied  iu  24  feet  water  off 
the  SB.  eud  of  the  reef.  The  7foot  depth  is  almost  midway  between 
the  buoys. 

Sheboygan  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  mouth  uf  the  Sheboygan 
river.  The  entrance  to  the  river  is  between  piers  270  feet  apart  out- 
side, iinrrowiiig  to  170  foot  nt  the  shore  line.  A  chiumel  midway 
between  the  piers,  17  feet  deep  with  a  width  of  about  lOU  feet,  was  com- 
pleted ill  Juno,  1805.  The  river  turns  to  tlie  S\V.  from  the  entrance, 
and  forms  a  deep  bight  soutli  of  the  main  portion  of  the  city.  There 
is  a  winding  basin  400  feet  in  width  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  the 
average  width  of  the  river  is  220  feet,  increasing  to  260  feot  at  the  first 
bridge,  about  2,200  feet  from  the  month. 

Light. — On  the  north  pier  near  the  outer  end  is  a  fixed  red  light  32 
feot  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  7^^  (8^)  miles.  The  light  is  shown 
from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  frameworic  tower,  upper  part  inclosed. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Signal-Senrico  station. — There  is  a  Signal-Service  station  on  the 
pier. 

Tnga. — The  Sheboygan  Tug  Line  charges  3  to  4  cents  per  ton  fw 
actual  load  carried. 

Fog  signal. — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds,  blasts  of  four  seconds, 
followed  by  silent  intervals  of  twenty-six  seconds.  The  fog  signal 
building  is  brown,  and  stands  immediately  in  the  rear  of  the  light  tower 
on  the  pier. 

Directions. — From  the  northward  the  pierhead  light  can  be  ap- 
proached on  a  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (8. 03°  W.)  bearing;  from  the  south  on 
a  NIHW.  i  W.  (N^.  2S°  W.)  bearing.  Nothing  inshore  of  these  beariugn. 
The  direction  of  the  piers  is  about  east  and  west. 

OoastL — Port  Washington  is  the  next  place  of  any  size,  and  is  22^ 
(26)  miles  to  the  sontlieastward  of  Sheboygan.  This  portion  of  the 
coast  is  more  bold;  the  hills  range  from  60  to  140  feet  iu  height,  and 
outside  the  distance  of  ^  mile  there  are  no  shoals,  but  vessels  coasting 
should  keep  at  least  f  mile  oft'  shore. 

Port  Washington,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Sank  river,  lies  22  (25j|^) 
miles  north  of  Milwaukee.  The  harbor  consists  of  an  inclosed, 
dredged  basin  of  5f  acres  in  area,  with  two  arms,  one  running  north, 
800  feet  long  and  200  feet  wide,  and  the  other  running  west,  500  fieet 
long  and  150  feet  wide.  The  Sauk  river  empties  into  the  lake  south  of 
the  south  pier.  The  entrance  is  between  piers  150  feet  apart.  The 
depth  in  the  entrance  channel  was  restored  to  12  feet  for  a  width  of  90 
feet  in  1895.  Soundings  taken  iu  April,  1895,  showed  a  depth  of  11 
feet  over  most  of  the  area  of  tlte  north  basin  j  north  half  of  west  basin, 


80 


LA\E  MICHIGAN. 


avertifre  depth  11  foet;  hoiUIi  liiilf,  iivvrii);(>  depth  iihout  4  feet.    A  short 
distance  iiortli  of  the  eiitriiiicu  Ih  nii  ohl  laiDliiif;  pit^r,  now  abandoned. 

Port  Washington  light. — A  fixed  white  iiglit,  113  feet  above  the 
lake  level  and  viHible  1<(^  (VJ)  miles,  Is  shown  from  a  square  tower  on  a 
yellow  dwelling  on  the  blutf  in  the  nortiicrn  part  of  the  town. 

Pierhead  light. — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  7,V  (8^)  miles,  is  shown 
fVom  a  square  white  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.  It  is  42^. 
feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Wharfage. — There  is  a  city  ordinance  to  collect  dockage  on  freight 
discharged  or  received  at  the  foot  of  streets  or  alleys  running  to  the 
harbor. 

Tngs. — There  is  ouo  fishing  tug  which,  wheu  in  port,  will  take 
vessels  in  and  out  of  |)ort  for  a  moderate  charge. 

Directions. — When  off  the  entrance,  bring  the  Pierhead  light  west, 
and  stand  in  for  it  with  the  piers  end  ou.  When  the  piers  are  close-to, 
keep  between  them,  changing  course  on  passing  the  foundry  as  desired. 

Coast. — South  of  Port  Washington  is  the  highest  land  on  the  west 
shore  of  the  lakes,  ranging  from  115  to  170  feet  at  Ulao.  As  far  as 
Ulao  the  coast  is  comparatively  steep-to.  Here  shoals  extend  out  to 
the  eastward  for  nearly  f  mile,  with  10  feet  on  the  outer  end.  They 
then  approach  the  shore  again,  until  off  Kemps  ^  mile  there  is  a 
detached  10-foot  patch.  North  of  Fox  point  3  (3^)  miles  a  spit  extends 
oat  J  mile,  with  13  feet  at  its  extremity,  and  off  Fox  point  is  "another 
spit,  with  a  depth,  g  mile  from  shore,  of  8  feet.  A  mile  north  of  Fox 
point  a  spit  extends  to  the  northeastward,  with  16  feet  }  mile  from 
shore,  and  in  the  north  part  o^  Whiteflsh  bay,  south  of  Fox  point,  a 
narrow  spit  extends  northeastward,  with  16  feet'}  mile  from  shore. 
South  of  Whiteflsh  bay  to  Milwaukee  there  are  no  shoals  outside  the 
distance  of  ^  mile. 

IffUwankee  bay  is  open  to  the  eastward,  with  no  oiflying  shoals. 

Milwaukee  light. — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash 
every  forty-five  seconds  and  visible  17^  (19f )  miles,  is  shown,  122  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  tcoia  a  brown,  octagonal  tower  connected  with  a 
white  dwelling.    It  is  on  the  extreme  north  point  of  Milwaukee  bay. 

Harbor  of  refuge. — ^This  harbor  will  have  an  anchorage  area  when 
completed  of  417  acres  beyond  the  18- foot  curve,  the  whole  inclosed  by 
a  breakwater.  The  present  area  outside  of  the  18-foot  curve  is  119 
acres.    The  20-foot  curve  is  ^  mile  off  shore. 

A  lightvessel,  painted  red,  is  moored  near  and  inside  the  southern 
end  of  the  breakwater.  Two  lights  are  shown,  one  directly  over  the 
other.  The  upper  light  is  white  and  the  lower  light  red.  The  lower 
light  is  30  feet  above  the  water,  the  distance  between  the  lights  being 
4  feet.   This  vessel  is  under  the  control  of  the  United  States  Engineers. 

Cribs. — North  of  the  breakwater  about  ^  mile  the  waterworks  pile 
bridge  pier  with  the  old  crib  at  the  end  projects  from  the  shore,  and  . 
NE.  of  the  end  is  the  new  crib,  ^  mile  S.  by  E,  from  MUwankee  light. 


■=i«Jti..-C-HH«M--' 


feet.    A  8hort 

w  tibaiiduned. 

uet  above  the 

ire  tower  on  a 

town. 

ilea,  iH  Rhown 

iier.    It  is  42^ 

ip^o  on  freight 
iiuning  to  the 

ort,  will  take 

(id  light  west, 
s  are  close-to, 
Iry  as  desired, 
id  on  the  west 
10.  As  far  as 
extend  ont  to 
er  end.  They 
le  there  is  a 
%  spit  extends 
int  is  another 
north  of  Fox 
t  }  mile  from 
'  Fox  point,  a 
)  from  shore. 
Is  oatside  the 

ing  shoals, 
b  whit«  flash 
own,  122  feet 
lected  with  a 
aakee  bay. 
^e  area  when 
e  inclosed  by 
curve  is  110 

Ithe  southern 

Btlyover  the 

The  lower 

J  lights  being 

fs  Engineers. 

erworks  pile 

shore,  and . 

iukee  light. 


MILW/.UKEB. 


81 


Mllwankee  Is,  next  to  Chicago,  the  largest  city  on  the  lake,  and  is 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Milwaukee  river  on  Milwaukee  bay.  It  has  a  large 
commerce  and  steamers  now  call  there  direct  from  Guroi)e. 

The  entrance  to  the  river  is  between  piers  200  feet  apart. 

In  May,  1805,  the  channel  between  piers  was  140  feet  wide  and  10 
feet  in  depth.  The  river  is  200  feet  wide  at  the  entrance  and  as  far  as 
the  principal  docks.  There  are  no  obstructions  excepting  the  bridges, 
the  nearest  of  which  is  2,000  feet  from  the  entrance.  The  average  depth 
of  water  in  the  river  is  about  16  feet. 

Pierhead  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  llt^y  (13)  miles,  is  shown 
40  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  tower  on 
the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.  The  keeper's  dwelling,  with  the  tower 
of  the  discontinued  light  attached,  is  on  the  north  pier  inside  this  light. 

Fog  signaL — A  10-inoh  steam  whistle  in  a  bouse  on  the  north  pier 
in  rear  of  the  light  sounds  blasts  of  Ave  seconds'  duration,  with  silent 
intervals  of  fifty-five  seconds. 

Life-saving  atation. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  south  pier. 

Dry  docks. — There  are  two  docks,  365  and  312  feet  over  ill;  widths 
of  gatec,  66  and  45  feet;  depths  on  Hills,  16  and  15^  feet. 

Whaifage. — ^There  are  no  wharfage  charges  for  vessels.  Twenty 
cents  per  ton  is  charged  on  cargoes. 

Toga. — ^The  Milwaukee  Tug  Boat  Line  owns  six  tugs  and  the  Inde- 
pendent Tug  Boat  Line  two  tugs.  There  is  a  published  printed  scale 
of  prices  for  towing  in  Milwaukee  harbor.  The  charges  are  about  6 
cents  per  registered  ton. 

Directioiia— When  2|  (3)  miles  east  of  the  entrance,  head  west  for 
the  Pierhead  light,  then  in  between  the  piers. 

Entering  the  outer  harbor  bring  the  lightvessel  to  bear  NW.,  distant 
one  mile,  when  head  west  until  the  lightvessel  bears  N.  by  E.  (S.  11°  E.), 
when  head  north  into  the  harbor.  These  directions  will  hold  for  a 
change  of  the  position  of  the  lightvessel.  The  distance  may  be  short- 
ened as  the  lightvessel  approaches  the  end  of  the  proposed  breakwater. 

Ciurrenta. — During  fresh  northerly  winds  there  is  a  current  along  the 
shore  setting  from  north  to  south  across  the  harbor  entrance. 

Buoy. — ^A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  20  feet  water  off  South  point, 
Milwaukee  bay.  The  bottom  between  the  bnoy  and  South  point  is 
rocky,  with  only  12  feet  water. 

Shoala. — ^There  are  two  small  shoals  with  17  and  18  feet  water  over 
them,  lying,  respectively,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  (S.  14°  E.)  and  S.  by  E.  i  E. 
(S.  21°  E.),  distant  a  mile  from  the  buoy. 

South  BCilwaukee,  at  the  month  of  Oak  creek,  is  7f  (0)  miles  south 
of  Milwaukee.  North  and  south  of  the  mouth  of  Oak  creek  the  lake 
shore  is  bold,  rising  in  high  clay  blufis.  The  shore  between  should  not 
be  approached  within  a  mile,  as  there  are  several  otflying  shoals. 

There  are  two  piers,  built  by  private  parties,  extending  into  the  lake, 
1044— No.  108 6 


82 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


with  a  clear  opening  between  the  piers  of  200  feet.  Originally  there  was 
a  depth  of  12  feet  between  the  piers,  but  it  has  shoaled  considoi  ably. 
It  is  proposed  to  continue  the  improvement  and  build  new  piers  out  to 
the  20-foot  curve. 

Coast. — From  Oak  creek  the  coast  trends  8|  (9^)  miles  BE.  to  Wind 
(Bacine  )  point;  it  then  changes  its  direction  to  the  south  for  2-^  (3; 
miles  to  Bacine.    This  portion  of  the  coast  is  quite  bold  and  hilly. 

Wind  (Racine)  Point  lights. — The  poiut  projects  some  distance  into 
the  lake,  and  on  the  point  is  a  flashing  white  light  every  thi3rty  seconds. 
The  light  is  112  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  16^  (19)  miles. 
The  lighthouse  is  a  conical  tower,  connected  by  covered  way  with 
dwelling,  both  cr  yellow  brick.  A  fixed  red  light  is  shown  from  the 
watch-room  windows  of  the  same  tower,  immediately  under  the  main 
light.  It  is  104  feet  above  the  lake  level,  visible  7^^  (^)  miles  between 
the  bearings  N.  and  N.  by  W.  f  W.  (N.  20°  W.),  covering  Bacine  reef. 

Fog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  alternate  blasts  of  three 
and  Ave  seconds,  with  silent  intervals  of  twenty-six  seconds. 

Racine  reef.— This  dangerous  reef  lies  If  (2)  miles  ESE.  ^  E.  (8. 73o 
E.)  ftom  Bacine  Pierhead  lighthouse.  It  extends  ENB.  and  WSW. 
a  mile,  and  north  and  south  §  mile,  with  8  feet  of  water  over  its  sboal- 
est.  part.  There  are  several  disconnected  shoal  spots  of  15  and  1^  feet 
north  of  the  reef  proper.  The  channel  between  the  reef  and  the  city 
has  a  depth  of  3  to  6  fathoms. 

Buoys. — A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  and  marks  the  eastern 
end  of  Bacine  reef.  A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet  and  marks 
the  westerly  edge  of  the  reef.  Between  these  buoys  is  a  depth  of  8 
feet. 

Racine  is  at  the  mouth  of  Boot  river.  The  entrance  to  the  harbor 
is  formed  by  two  piers,  250  feet  apart  at  the  entrance,  narrowing  to  160 
feet  at  the  shore  line.  Soundings  in  October,  1895,  showed  a  channel 
13^  feet  deep,  with  a  width  of  about  60  feet,  and  a  bar  at  the  entrance 
projecting  from  the  south  pier  about  halfway  across  the  channd,  with 
a  depth  of  from  12  to  13  feet  over  it. 

Racine  (Root  river)  light — A  fixed  white  light,  48  feet  i^ve  the 
lake  level,  visible  12  j^  (14^:)  miles,  is  shown  ftom  a  square  yellow  tower 
attached  to  a  yellow  dwelling  on  the  north  pier,  about  800  feet  from  the 
outer  end. 

Pierhead  light. — A  fixed  red  light,  35  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is 
shown  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier.  With  Bacine  (Boot  river) 
light  (white)  the  light  will  guide  clear  to  the  northward  of  Bacine  reef 
by  keeping  the  white  light  open  to  the  northward  of  the  red  light. 

Fog  signal — A  fog  beli  at  this  station  is  struck  by  machinery  dur- 
ing thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  single  blow  eyetj  twenty  seccmds.  The 
bell  is  suspended  from  a  frame  in  front  of  the  pierhead  tower. 

Life-saving  statioa. — ^There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  innw 
end  of  the  north  pier. 


BAniME — KEN08H4. 


^nally  there  vas 
led  considoiably. 
new  piers  oat  to 

ilea  8E.  to  Wind 
suath  for  2^  (3; 
lid  and  hilly. 
)me  distance  into 
:y  thirty  seconds^ 
le  16^  (19)  miles. 
)vered  way  with 
shown  from  the 
trader  the  main 
^)  miles  between 
rin^  Bacine  reef, 
ite  blasts  of  three 
econds. 

ESB.iE.  (8.730 
INB.  and  WSW. 
er  over  its  sbeal- 
of  15  and  1«  feet 
reef  and  the  dty 

larks  the  eastern 

7  feet  and  mtffks 
is  a  depth  of  8 

ce  to  the  harbor 
narrowing  to  160 
lowed  a  channeA 
r  at  the  entri;ttce 
le  ohatt&d,  with 

8  feet  al)oye  the 
are  yellow  tower 
800  feet  from  tlie 

the  It^e  level,  is 
Bine  (Boot  riyer) 
d  of  Bacinereef 
he  red  light. 

machinery  dnr- 
y  seconds.    The 

tower. 

near  the  innw 


Signal-Service  station. — There  is  a  Signal-Service  station  aboat 
400  feet  from  the  Boot  Biver  ligbthonse. 

Directions. — If  coming  np  the  coaei,  keep  %  (1)  mile  off  shore,  then 
midway  between  the  black  bnoy  and  the  shore  nntil  on  the  range  with 
the  piers  end  on,  when  head  in  between  the  piers.  If  coming  from  the 
northward,  stand  in  with  Boot  Biver  ligbthonse  bearing  WSW.  ^  W. 
(8.  73°  W.),  bvkt  nothing  to  the  westward  of  this  bearing,  to  avoid 
Bacine  reef. 

At  night — ^From  the  northward,  stand  in  with  Boot  Biver  light, 
white,  bearing  WSW.  J  W.  (S.  73°  W.)  until  Wind  Point  light  bears 
north,  when  stand  to  the  sontJi ward  until  the  lights  on  the  n<nth  pier 
come  on,  when  stand  in.  When  standing  in,  keep  the  white  light  opea 
to  the  northward  of  the  red.  light  to  eleir  Bacine  reef. 

From  the  southward,  bring  Wind  Point  light  to  bear  north  and  steer 
toward  it  on  this  bearing  until  the  lights  on  the  north  pier  come  0% 
when  stand  in. 

The  red  sector  from  Wind  point  covers  Badne  reef.  The  Boot  Biver 
(white)  light  should  be  brought  between  the  bearings  WSW.  ^  W. 
(S.  730  W.)  and  NW.  by  W.  (N.  56°  W.)  until  Wind  PodntUght  bears 
north. 

Konesha  is  8|  (10)  miles  south  of  Bacine,  and,  with  the  exoeiition  of 
Bacine  reef,  the  coast  is  clear  of  danger.  The  city  is  at  the  montli 
of  Pike  creek,  which  here  opens  out  into  an  extensive  basin. 

The  entrance  to  t^e  harbor  is  between  jMers  160  feet  apart. 

Soundings  in  August,  1895,  showed  a  channel  about  14  feet  deep, 
with  a  least  width  of  60  feet. 

Senosha  (Sontiiport)  Ug^ — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  whitd 
flash  every  forty-five  seconds,  visible  li^g  i^^)  miles,  is  shown  7^  feet 
ai)ove  the  lake  level,  from  a  conical,  yellow  tower  on  Washington  island 
on  the  north  side  of  tiie  entrance. 

Range  lights. — ^Tbe  front  light,  28  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  fixed 
red  and  shown  from  a  lantern  in  the  outer  end  of  an  elevated  conduit 
on  the  north  pier. 

The  rear  light,  100  feet  distant,  is  also  red  and  shown  from  a  square, 
white  tower  on  the  north  pier.  It  is  39  feet  above  the  lake  level  and 
visible  7^  (8^)  miles. 

These  lights  form  a  range  showing  the  dh*ectien  of  the  piers. 

Day  maA^—lS,  B.  Allen  Sons'  tannery  is  au  excellent  leading  mairfe 
when  entering  the  harbor.  The  tall  chimney  can  be  seen  for  a  distance 
of  15§  (18)  miles  and  is  a  more  prominent  mark  than  the  lighthouse. 

Ziife-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  on  the  north: 
bank  of  the  river  in  rear  of  tike  lighthouse. 

Tugs.— There  are  four  companies  owning  tugs,  and  the  charge  is  f6 
apiece  for  vessels. 

StraetioaMi.— When  1^  (1^)  mil«s  off  the  mtrffinoe  and  on  the  range 
of  the  lights,  head  in  for  them  with  the  piers  end  on.    When  the  piers 


84 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


are  close-to,  ran  between  them,  keeping  the  north  pier  as  close  aboard 
as  possible,  the  best  water  being  on  that  side.  The  inner  harbor  should 
not  be  entered  by  sailing  vessels  without  the  assistance  of  a  tug.  Ves- 
sels, however,  can  make  fast  to  different  points  along  these  piers. 

In  ordinary  weather  vessels  can  anchor  outside,  where  there  is  irood 
holding  ground. 

Pilotage.— The  captain  of  the  life-saving  station  is  always  on  duty, 
and  can  be  obtained  as  a  pilot  when  desired. 

^.  ILLINOIS. 

Wankegan  is  14J  (16J)  miles  south  of  Kenosha,  the  coast  between 
being  clear  of  danger  outside  the  3-fathom  line,  which  follows  the  coast 
line  at  a  distance  of  about  f  mile.  The  boundary  line  between  Wis- 
consin and  Illinois  is  6  (7)  mUes  southward  of  Kenosha,  just  north  of 
Spring  bluflf. 

A  basin  has  been  inclosed  by  piers  and  double  lines  of  piling  filled 
in  with  atone.  The  shore  line  along  the  north  pier  has  advanced  700 
feet  since  1879.  The  width  between  the  piers  is  236  feet.  In  April 
1895,  the  governing  depth  in  the  channel  and  basin  was  about  iO  feet' 
/..Y*"?**^  ^,"**^'  ^**'*^  light-A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^ 
(14f )  miles,  18  shown  75  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square  tower 
on  a  white  dweUing  on  the  bluff  on  the  south  side  of  the  mouth  of  the 
Little  Fort  river. 

Directiona-When  1^  (1^)  miles  east  of  the  entrance,  head  in  for 
the  light,  with  the  piers  end  on.  When  the  piers  are  close-to,  run  in 
between  them  and  nearer  the  north  pier. 

«i?  **"^r:^™"'  Waukegan  to  Grosse  point  the  coast  trends  8.  and 
SJii.  for  18§  (21  J)  miles,  then  a  little  eastward  of  south  for  11  (12»)  mUes 
to  Chicago  light.  The  coast  to  Grotse  point  is  low  and  wooded,  with 
numerous  towns  along  it.  There  are  no  shoals  outside  the  distance  of 
f  mUe  from  shore.  At  Grosse  point  a  spit  extends  out  BNE.  for  #  mile 
with  16  feet  on  it,  and  20  feet  at  1  (l^)  mUe  off.  South  of  Grosse  point 
there  are  several  spits  extending  out  nearly  f  mile.  Off  the  city  of 
Chicago  are  several  shoals  which  will  be  described  in  detail 

G-rosse  Point  light-On  Grosse  point,  Evanston,  is  a  fixed  white 
light,  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  three  minutes,  and  visible  17  (im 
miles.  The  light  is  shown  119^  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical 
tower  connected  with  dweUing;  both  are  yellow,  with  red  roofs. 

Fog  signaL— A  10-inch  steam  whistle,  in  a  building  east  of  the  tower 
sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  alternate  silent  intervals 
of  twenty  and  forty  seconds. 

Evanston  crib.-There  is  a  crib  in  21  feet  water  with  12  feet  over  it. 

with  Grosse  Point  light  bearing  W.  by  N.  (N.  79o  W.),  distant  1,148 

yards.    A  buoy  is  moored  50  feet  west  of  the  crib. 

^K^r^w!""*^  8tation.-There  is  a  life-saving  station  f  mile  south  of 
the  lighthouse. 


CHICAGO. 


86 


as  close  aboard 
er  harbor  should 
B  of  a  tug.    Ves- 
fcbese  piers. 
)re  there  is  good 

always  on  duty, 


e  coast  between 
follows  the  coast 
le  between  Wis- 
ba,  just  north  of 

IS  of  piling  filled 
as  advanced  700 
feet.  In  April, 
as  about  10  feet, 
^ht,  visible  12^ 
1  a  square  tower 
he  mouth  of  the 

tnce,  head  in  for 
)  close-to,  ran  in 

t  trends  S.  and 
or  11  (12f )  miles 
id  wooded,  with 
I  the  distance  of 
BNE.  for  I  mile, 

of  Grosse  point 

Off  the  city  of 

etait. 
a  fixed  white 

visible  17  (19J) 
fh)m  a  conictj 

ed  roofs. 

U9t  of  the  tower, 

silent  intervals 

12  feet  over  it, 
),  distant  1,148 

f  mile  south  of 


Chicago  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Chicago  river,  from  which  it  takes  its 


r 

■  name,  tne     lofinal  name  being  derived  from  an  Indian  word,  Ghacaqua, 
9  meaniii^>       uder.    The  city  is  14  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

■  The  Ch    ;»go  river  runs  through  the  city  from  the  lake,  nearly  one 
9            mile  west,  then  separates  into  two  branches,  one  running  NW.  and  the 

■  other  SW.,  dividing  the  city  into  three  divisions,  which  are  connected 
I  by  many  bridges  and  tunnels.    A  canal  connects  the  main  or  SW. 

branch  with  the  Illinois  river,  and  so  with  the  Mississippi  and  the  gulf. 
This  channel  has  been  so  deepened  that  the  waters  of  the  river  and  the 
lake  flow  through  into  the  Illinois  and  Mississippi. 

The  water  supply  is  drawn  from  cribs  well  out  in  the  lake  through 
tunnels,  carrying  it  under  the  streets  to  widely  separated  parts  of  the 
city  to  stations,  whence  it  is  distributed  by  powerful  pumps.  There  io 
also  a  system  of  cisterns  connected  with  the  tunnels,  for  use  in  case  of 
fire  or  other  emergency.  The  water  is  pure,  cold,  and  wholesome,  and 
the  supply  inexhaustible. 

There  are  numerous  hospitals  and  many  public  libraries. 

The  climate  of  Chicago  is  much  modified  by  the  lake;  the  mean  tem- 
perature for  seventeen  years  was  48.6°,  varying  between  a  mean  of  24° 
in  January  and  a  mean  of  72°  in  August,  the  mean  temperature  of  the 
water  for  the  same  period  being  48°,  varying  from  32.9°  to  67.6°.  There 
is  a  marked  preponderance  of  laud  winds  (SW.)  during  the  winter  and 
a  slight  preponderance  of  lake  winds  (NE.)  in  the  summer,  this  being 
an  average  of  eighteen  years'  observations.  The  mean  annual  rainfall 
in  the  country  surrounding  Chicago  is  34  inches,  taken  flrom  observa- 
tions of  forty-seven  years.  The  death  rate  was  lower  than  that  of  any 
other  city  of  its  size  in  1892  and  1893. 

Chicago  is  a  port  of  entry,  and  an  immense  amount  of  traffic  passes 
through,  it  being  the  first  city  in  the  country  as  far  as  arrivals  and 
departures  of  vessels  are  concerned,  though  it  is  second  to  New  York 
in  tonnage. 

Merchandise  may  be  shipped  direct  from  foreign  ports  to  Chicago  by 
being  transported  in  bond  from  port  of  first  entry.  The  number  of  ves- 
sels making  direct  trips  to  Europe  is  increasing.  There  is  also  a  large 
number  of  railroads  entering  the  city,  which  afford  facilities  for  shipping 
goods  to  all  parts  of  the  country. 

The  grain  elevators  are  great  features  of  the  city,  vessels  being  loaded 
and  unloaded  by  machinery.  The  principal  trade  is  in  live  stock,  pork 
packing,  and  other  products  of  the  farm  and  dairy,  flonr,  grain,  seed, 
mannfiMstures  of  steel  and  iron,  leather,  shoes,  chemicals,  wines,  brewing 
and  distilling,  cigars,  tobacco,  etc. 

Eburbor. — ^The  harbor  of  Chicago  consists  of  an  inner  and  an  oater 
harbor,  the  former  being  the  Chicago  river,  which  has  been  dredged 
and  its  month  protected  by  piers  500  feet  apart  at  the  entrance,  but  the 
river  is  so  filled  with  docks  as  to  be  very  cramped  and  crowded  for 
the  immense  commerce.    Constant  dredging  is  necessary  to  keep  oat 


•■vmiiammimim 


»6^!.*ia&^iSi^ff-»iS«SASifefe.*i«tt^'#B 


86 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


the  accamnlation  of  sand  brought  down  by  a  NE.  lake  current,  which 
has  made  many  acres  of  new  land  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance. 
The  outer  harbor  is  formed  by  the  North  pier,  an  eastern  breakwater, 
and  a  southern  breakwater,  and  incloses  a  basin  of  270  acres  to  tho 
south  and  east  of  the  river  entrance.  A  portion  of  this  basin  was 
dredged  to  a  Iti-foot  depth  prior  to  1887,  but  since  has  been  gradually 
filling  up.  A  red  and  black  horizontal-striped  buoy  marks  a  wreck  in 
the  harbor  with  but  7^  feet  water  over  it. 

The  North  pier  reaches  east  in  continuation  of  the  north  bank  of  the 
river  and  extends  200  yards  beyond  the  eastern  breakwater,  which  is 
commonly  known  as  the  Obicago  North  breakwater.  It  is  4,036.5  feet 
long,  running  perpendicularly  (S.  0°  37'  W.)  from  the  North  pier,  and 
about  3,300  feet  from  shore;  a  dock  line  1,300  feet  from  shore  and  2,000 
£eet  from  the  eastern  breakwater  and  parallel  to  it  has  bv^n  established, 
bat  the  docks  have  not  yet  been  built  out  to  this  line.  The  southern 
breakwater,  commonly  known  as  the  Ohicago  South  breakwater,  extends 
SW.  by  S.  3,000  feet  from  the  end  of  the  eastern  breakwater,  completing 
the  basin.    There  are  three  entrances  to  this  harbor. 

The  outer  breakwai»r,  beginning  at  a  line  running  north  from  the 
end  of  the  North  pier  and  about  5,000  feet  from  that  pier,  extends  5,413 
feet,  S.  S0°  34'  E.  with  a  depth  of  from  18  to  32  feet  of  water  inside 
of  it,  forms  an  excellent  harbor  of  refuge  for  vessels,  and  renders  it 
easy  fbr  vessels  to  enter  the  outer  harbor  of  Ohicago. 

The  western  half  of  this  area  has  but  20  feet  or  less  of  water. 

The  entrance  channel  to  the  harbor  has  been  dredged  to  a  dei^h  of 
20  feet,  with  a  width  of  250  feet  at  the  eastern  and  200  feet  at  the 
western  end.  At  the  latest  information  this  channel  had  slightly 
shoaled,  but  there  was  a  depth  of  18  feet  at  extreme  low  water.  There 
is  a  depth  of  18  feet  of  water  at  the  entrance  of  the  river.  Three  of 
the  tunnels  have  but  16  to  18  feet  of  water  over  their  crowns.  Only  a 
small  part  of  the  river  has  over  a  15-foot  depth  of  water. 

The  draft  of  vessels  entering  the  river  is  limited  to  the  depth  of 
water  over  the  crown  of  the  La  Salle  Street  tunnel,  which  is  16  feet  8 
inches  as  an  average.  This  depth  is  in  the  exact  center  of  the  river  on 
aline  between  the  central  piers  of  the  Olark  Street  bridge  and  Wells 
Street  bridge. 

There  are  no  public  wharves  or  docks.  The  buildings  are  in  many 
eases  so  near  the  docks  as  to  prevent,  dredging  deeper  than  16  to  18 
feet  close  to  them.  There  are  about  fbur  bridges  to  the  mUe,  whioh 
sfiKMNialy  interferes  with  navigation. 

Tugs  should  be  employed  in  all  movements  of  vessels  above  the 
j{Diioti<m  of  the  two  branches. 

The  navigaUe  length  of  the  Chicago  river  is  for  the  South  branch 
about  4^  (5)  miles  from  the  mouth  up  to  McOormiok's  Beaper  factory. 
The  North  branch  is  navigable  about  4  (4^)  miles  up  to  Western  ave- 
aa«k    The  i^eam  is  very  crooked  in  places  and  vwying  la  width|  as 


Si 

•5 


CHICAGO — LIPHTB. 


87 


ike  current,  which 
ie  of  the  entrance, 
hstem  breakwater, 
f  270  aeres  to  tho 
[)f  this  basin  was 
AS  been  gradoallj' 
marks  a  wreck  in 

north  bank  of  the 
akwater,  which  is 
It  is  4,036.5  feet 
e  North  pier,  and 
m  shore  and  2,000 
bv-^n  established, 
16.  The  soathem 
aakwater,  extends 
wateVf  completing 

ig  north  firom  the 
tier,  extends  5,413 
it  of  water  inside 
is,  and  renders  it 

a  of  water, 
ged  to  a  dei^h  of 
L  200  feet  at  the 
nel  had  slightly 
)w  water.    There 

river.  Three  of 
crowns.  Only  a 
ber. 

to  the  depth  of 
rhich  is  16  feet  8 
Br  of  the  river  on 
tridge  and  Wells 

ngs  are  in  many 

ler  than  16  to  18 

the  mile,  which 

tssels  above  the 

lie  Soath  branch 
Beaper  factory, 
to  Western  ave- 
ing  la  width,  M 


follows:  Main  branch,  274  feet;  South  branch,  205  feet;  the  Forks,  100 
to  150  feet;  North  branch,  100  to  200  feet,  and  somewhat  less  beyo-d 
the  Forks. 

Thwe  is  a  harbor  master  to  regnu^te  the  passage  of  vessels. 

Landmark.— The  new  Ferris  wheel,  305  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  a 
prominent  mark  when  approaching  Chicago.  It  is  visible  some  time 
before  land  is  sighted.  The  wheel  is  lighted  by  electricity  from  dusk 
until  midnight  daily. 

LIGHTS  AND  FOG  SIGNALS. 

Chicago  Outer  breakwater  (ITTr.  end).— A  fixed  white  light  is 
»hown  from  a  post  attaehed  to  the  SE.  side  of  the  building  on  the 
Emergency  Intake  Waterworks  crib,  an  extension  northwesterly  on  the 
outer  breakwater. 

Caiicago  breakwater— North.— A  fixed  white  light  24  feet  above 
the  lake  level  is  shown  from  the  top  of  a  white  post  on  north  end  of 
breakwater. 

Chicago  breakwater.— Sonth.— A  fixed  red  light,  35  feet  above  the 
lake  level,  and  visible  8^  (9J)  miles,  is  shown  from  a  square,  gray,  pyr- 
amidal open  framework  tower,  upper  part  inclosed,  on  south  end  of 
breakwater. 

CUcago  harbor.— A  light,  flashing  alternatdy  red  and  white  at 
intervals  of  ten  seconds,  visible  13 1*^  (16)  miles,  and  67J  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  lake,  is  shown  in  30  feet  water  inside  of  and  near  the  SE. 
end  of  outer  breakwater,  from  a  conical  red  tower,  with  black  fcrira- 
mings;  lantern  black.  Thwe  are  two  fog-sigual  houses  alongside  the 
tower,  one  NW.  and  the  other  SB.,  all  on  a  rock  pier. 

FogsignaL- A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds; 
silent  intervals  twenty-five  seconds. 

Pierhead  rai^e.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  llj  (13)  miles,  is  shown 
tcom  a  tower  40  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  North  pier,  entrance  to 
the  river,  and  a  fixed  red  light  is  shown  from  a  post  on  the  outer  end 
of  the  same  pier.    The  lights  are  35J  and  30  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Pog  B^snaL- A  bell  is  struck  by  machinery  a  double  and  a  single 
blow  alternately,  with  silent  intervals  of  twenty  seconds.  The  fog  bell 
is  attached  to  lighttower  near  end  of  pier. 

Caiieago  Avenne  Waterworks  crib.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible 
13^0-  (16)  miles,  is  shown  from  a  white  lantern  on  an  iron  framework 
tower,  58  feet  high,  built  on  a  stone  crib.  It  is  4,300  feet  N.  by  E.  |  B. 
(N.  15°  B.)  from  the  SB.  end  of  the  outer  breakwater.  This  station  is 
maintained  by  the  city  of  Chicago. 

Pog  signal — A  bell  is  struck  by  machinery  about  twelve  times  every 
minute. 

Cribs.— Off  Lake  View,  3J  (4)  miles  north  of  the  outer  breakwater, 
are  two  (vibs,  one  temporary  I  (1^)  mile,  and  one  permanent  If  (1^) 
miles  from  shore,  marked  by  white  lights. 


I 


88 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


There  is  a  crib  8E.  of  the  entrance  to  Chicago  harbor  3i  (4)  miles 

Uif    ^Y     r^^  *^«  «te-    "  i«  intended  to  increase  this  depth  to 
attafn^.         *    "'"^  ^'"  ^'  ^^'^^  *^^"'  '^^^  «^*«  "^""^  '^'  depth  fa 
A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  on  the  4-mile  crib. 

Hvde  PaT  W.'.  '"^'  i*  ^l^i^"^  '*  ^'^^ "'"««'  respectively,  from  the 
Hyde  Paik  Waterworks;  both  are  marked  by  white  lights.  A  tower 
is  to  be  erected  on  the  outer  crib.  ««"'.-«.  rower 

The  color  of  the  permanent  lights  on  these  cribs  Is  white  These 
lights  are  all  maintained  by  the  city  of  Chicago. 

of "nt:;:?s  SM^r^Ti  ve'r "  ^  "'^"^'^^  ^*^*^^^  ^^  ^•^^  ^^^^^  «^^« 

Dry  docka-MiUer  Bros.'  Dry  Dock  Company  has  three  docks  the 
largest  being  310  feet  long,  with  a  60-foot  gate  and  14  ftetTf  w'ater 
on  the  miter  sUlat  ordinary  stage  of  tide;  the  second  is  280  feet  w 

if  2^  l:^Jnf  if/n*  °'/*'"/"  the  miter  siU;  and  the  smlZ 
IS  260  feet  long,  40.foot  gate,  and  9  feet  of  water  on  the  miter  siU 

Lsrd:sl?auVmf*  ""t*  ^^"  '^"'«"  «^P*^^«  of  lifting  25  to  "; 
The  Chicago  Shipbuilding  Co  apany  has  at  its  shipyard  on  the  Cal 
umet  river  a  dry  dock  470  feet  long,  with  a  gate  loS  feet  wWe  at  t^^ 
and  70  feet  at  bottom  and  18  feet  depth  over  sUl  ^ 

nmo^""^  Hydrographic  Offlce.-The  United  States  Hydrographic 
wliiT  ^'T^'^^'^'''  the  Masonic  Temple.  The  offlceisSfed 
with  all  the  latest  information  pertaining  to  the  lakes,  also  naut  ell 

el  to'Le7.r"'"^  ""  °'  "*^*''*^  *^«  «P«"  ^-  consultetion  or  S 
euce  to  the  lake  manners  or  other  interested  parties. 

Tune  ball-A  time  ball  is  dropped  from  a  flagstaff  on  top  of  the 
Masonic  Temple,  by  the  Branch  Hydrographic  Offl^,  at  oLago  d^jv 
(Sundays  excepted)  at  noon,  central  standard  time.  ^  '       ^ 

.^If^ "  hoisted  five  minutes  before  noon,  central  standard  time 
and  18  dropped  by  electricity  exactly  at  noon!  Should,  throughTnv 
accident,  the  time  ball  be  dropped  before  the  exact  instant  of  noon  iJ 

r^J     ;      ^^'   .^^  *^*''  ^^""^^y  *°^*'«d.    Should  the  ball  fail  to  dron 
(ot*  ^"^^  ''  """^  ^®  ^«P'  mastheaded  until  five  minutes  S 
noon  (12h.  5m.),  and  then  slowly  lowered  as  before 

«n!5^?*^*T^'!,??  '^'^  ^'*^''  °^  navigation,  beginning  April  1  and 
endmg  November  30,  it  is  not  customary  to  charge  wharfaf  eVr/ong  as 
the  owner  does  not  wish  to  use  his  dock,  but  during  theTC  vefsd 
owners  pay  from  |10  to  $100  for  special  accommodations. 
r^^*^m  P  *''®  ''^''^^  ^y  *he  Chicago  Towing  Oomnanv  Ves««l 
TnTthe  InZ"^''Tr^^•^°'""^  ^*>"^^«  -d  Wreck^g  Com^r^ 
t^Vfor^sptrptt'es^  ^^^'  ^^-  ^  "-^-  o^  private Uefow^n 
Charges  are  moderate  for  the  distance  towed.    These  charges  are 


rbor  3}  (4)  miles 

I  and  there  is  a 
bse  this  depth  to 

II  this  depth  is 


ctively,  from  the 
ghts.    A  tower 

}  white.    These 

•n  the  south  side 

three  docks,  the 
4  feet  of  water 
is  280  feet  long, 
id  the  smallest 
the  miter  sill, 
lifting  25  tons, 
WKlen  vessels, 
^ard  on  the  Gal^ 
feet  wide  at  top 

I  Hydrographio 
iffice  is  supplied 
s,  also  nautical 
bation  or  refer- 

r  on  top  of  the 
Ohicago,  daily 

itandard  time, 
through  any 
ant  of  noon,  it 

minutes  after 
all  fail  to  drop 

minutes  after 

ng  April  1  and 

age,  so  long  as 

winter  vessel 

upany.  Vessel 
ing  Company, 
e  parties  own 

)  charges  are 


CHICAGO DIRECTIONS.  89 

regulated  by  a  tariff  scale  for  the  distance  and  size  or  tonnage  of  the 
vessel  towed.  Charges  are  on  an  average  of  $10  an  hour  for  ground 
work.  The  average  cost  of  towing  steamers  is  $75  per  trip,  consorts 
or  barges  $130,  and  sailing  vesseLs  $45. 

Pilotage. — Tug  masters  are  licensed  and  responsible  pilots.  All 
steamboat  masters  who  navigate  the  river  or  harbor  are  also  licensed 
pilots. 

Night  aignala. — A  temporary  search  light  has  been  mounted  on  the 
Auditorium  tower  for  the  purpose  of  giving  warning  to  mariners  of 
the  coming  of  severe  storms,  and  also  to  announce  the  approach  of  cold 
waves.  This  will  not  take  the  place  of  the  present  signal  flags  and 
lights,  but  is  in  addition  thereto.  As  a  rule,  the  time  for  using  the 
search-light  signal  will  be  immediately  after  the  receipt  of  the  evening 
reports,  and  if  these  show  conditions  dangerous  to  mariners  or  the 
approach  of  a  cold  wave  the  search  light  will  sweep  the  horizon  between 
8.30  and  10  p.  m.    The  signals  are  as  follows: 

White  light:  Cold  wave  and  frost  warnings. 

Bed  light:  High  easterly  winds. 

Bed  and  white  light  (pencil  of  light  half-and-half):  High  westerly 
winds. 

Cnrranta. — ^There  is  no  perceptible  current  in  the  Chicago  river, 
except  when  a  sudden  change  of  wind  raises  or  lowers  the  lake  surface 
or  when  an  exceptionally  high  flceshet  occurs,  setting  a  current  out 
into  the  lake.  Near  the  end  of  the  piers  at  the  entrance  to  the  river  a 
current  has  been  noticed  which  sometimes  forces  vessels  against  the 
piers. 

Direotioiia. — ^Vessels  approaching  Chicago  firom  the  north  or  south 
should  keep  2^  (3)  miles  off  shore,  to  avoid  the  numerous  shoals  and 
cribs.  When  east  from  the  Ohicago  Pierhead  light  a  vessel  may  enter 
from  the  west  or  east  end  of  the  outer  breakwater,  or  from  either  end 
of  che  eastern  breakwater,  these  ends  being  marked  by  lights.  Ves- 
sels may  then  come  to  anchor  behind  the  breakwaters  or  steer  for  the 
mouth  of  the  river,  which  is  marked  by  a  range  of  lights,  where  they 
will  be  taken  charge  of  by  a  harbor  tug  in  charge  of  a  licensed  pilot, 
who  will  take  the  vessel  to  the  dock  to  which  she  may  be  consigned. 

No  vessel  is  allowed  to  use  sails  in  the  river. 

Making  the  harbor  from  the  northeastward,  pass  i  mile  east  of  the 
Chicago  Waterworks  Crib  light,  on  a  course  of  south,  until  the  North 
Pierhead  light  bears  W.  by  S.  (S.  79°  W.},  when  run  in  on  this  course 
for  the  entrance. 

To  enter  the  outer  harbor  from  the  southward,  bring  the  light  on  the 
south  end  of  the  eastern  breakwater  to  bear  west,  stand  in  through  the 
entrance,  and,  as  you  pass  the  light,  haul  up  to  the  northward  for 
anchorage. 

Between  Chicago  and  Calumet  rivers  are  several  offlying  shoals, 
besides  the  shoal  water  which  lines  this  portion  of  the  coast,  and  extend 
out  in  places  for  a  mile. 


i9.iiia>attt<»4.iKi-is>Kfi'&»'s 


•9  LAKE  MICHIGAN. 

Oakland  ahoaL — Off  Forty-first  street,  Chicago,  4  (4^)  miles  from 
the  entrance  to  the  river,  a  sand  spit  called  Oakland  shoal  extends  out 
f  mile,  with  9  feet  least  water  near  the  center  of  the  shoal. 

Buoys.^ — The  outer  (easterly)  end  is  marked  by  a  black  can  buoy  in 
26  feet  of  water;  the  inner  (westerly)  end  by  a  red  spar  buoy  ^  mile 
from  shore,  in  16^  fieet  of  water.  These  baoys  are  |  mile  apart,  with  9 
feet  water  about  midway  between. 

Morgana  ree£ — About  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  Oakland  shoal,  ofif 
the  wharves  at  Hyde  park,  Morgans  reef  extends  a  mile  firom  shore;  the 
outer  end,  with  7  to  16  feet  of  water  thereon,  being  rocky  and  the  inner 
part  with  a  least  depth  of  3  feet. 

From  Morgans  reef  to  the  World's  Fair  pwc  shoal  water  extends  f 
mile.    At }  mile  east  from  the  pier  is  a  large  18- foot  spot. 

"Buoju, — ^The  outer  end  of  Mmrgans  reef  is  marked  by  a  black  spar 
buoy  in  13  feet  water  and  the  inner  end  by  a  red  spar  buoy  in  12  feeL 
naif  mile  south  of  the  outer  buoy  are  two  spots  with  18  feet  of  waXex 
on  them. 

There  is  a  narrow  passage  with  a  depth  of  12  feet,  which  small  vessels 
can  use  between  Chicago  and  Calumet,  passing  between  the  inner  bnoy 
and  the  shore,  but  closer  to  the  buoy. 

Hyde  Park  idKtaUi. — Half  mile  to<  the  eastward  oi  Morgans  reef  is 
the  Inner  Hyde  Park  shoal,  with  12  iieetof  water  on  the  northern  end; 
two  detached  spots  of  17  Mid  18  feet  depth  north  of  it  and  one  of  17 
feet  SB.  of  it.  Nearly  a  mile  to  the  eastward  and  2  (2^)  miles  from 
shore  is  the  Outer  Hyde  Park  shoi^  with  11  fiset  of  water. 

Bnoya. — Hyde  Park  Outer  shoal,  a  red  and  black  horizontal-striped 
nun  buoy  in  18  feet  water,  marks  the  northern  point  of  this  shoal. 

Hyde  Park  Inner  shoal,  a  red  and  black  horizontal-striped  spar  hamy 
in  17  feet  water,  mai^s  the  north  side  of  this  sheaL 

Iffadiaoa  Park  Shoal  bm^.'-At  |  mile  to  the  SW.  of  Hyde  Park 
shoal  is  a  red  and  blaok  horizontal-striped  spar  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water 
Mie  (1^)  mile  off  shore. 

Vessels  will  clear  the  shoal  by  giving  the  bnoy  a  berth  of  300  feet. 

Sonth  Park  ahoaL— One  mile  south  of  Outer  Hyde  Park  shoal  and 
If  (2)  miles  fhmi  shore  is  South  Park  shoal,  with  6  to  11  feet  of  water 
on  its  shoalest  part. 

Bnoy.— The  south  side  of  the  6-foot  shoal  is  marked  by  a  red  and 
black  horizontal-striped  can  buoy  in  28  feet  of  water. 

Inside  of  this  shoal  and  of  the  Hyde  Park  Shoal  bnoy  there  is  » 
channel  i  mile  wide.  Vessels  using  it  must  keep  ^  mUe  to  tbe  weal- 
ward  of  the  buoys,  being  earefol  to  avoid  the  Madison  Park  shoaL 

Oxiba— A  mile  south  of  this  and  a  mile  east  of  the  World's  Fak 
pier  is  the  Hyde  Park  Waterworks  innw  erib,  and  distant  |  mile  KB. 
by  E.  i  E.  (N.  590  E.)  from  this  crib  is  the  outer  crib. 

These  cribs,  marked  by  white  lighte  in  cupolas  fiO  feet  high,  are  not 
yet  completed.    The  inner  orib  is  to  ba  abandoned. 


CALUMET. 


91 


I  (4)V)  milea  firom 

ihoal  extends  out 

ihoal. 

iJock  ean  booy  ia 

spar  buoy  ^  mile 

ftile  apac^  with  9 

Hkkland  shoal,  off 
e  from  shore;  the 
ky  and  the  inner 

water  extends  { 
•ot. 

by  a  blaok  spar 
'buoy  in  12  feet 
38  feet  of  watw 

ich  small  vessels 
n  the  inner  buoy 

Morgans  reef  is 

e  northern  end; 

it  and  one  of  17 

(2^)  miles  li-om 

•rizontalstriped 
thisslMMd. 
riped  spar  buoy 

.  of  Hyde  Park 
IffiiMtofwatnr 

h  <tf  300  feet. 
ParlE  ^oal  and 
1  Ibet  of  water 

d  by  »  red  and 

inoy  there  is  a 
le  to  the  wesl- 
ParkdioaL 
B  World's  Waa 
ant  I  mile  KB. 

t  high,  are  not 


Prom  the  site  of  the  World's  Fair  pier  to  Clarke  point  the  shuul 
water  extends  ^  mile  from  shore. 

Clarke  Point  ahoaL— About  1^  (2)  miles  north  of  Oalumet  light 
Clarke  Point  shoal  makes  oat  i  mile  from  shore,  with  11  feet  of  water 
on  its  northern  end  and  with  rocky  5-foot  spots  J  mile  from  shore  and 
a  4-foot  spot  ^  mile  from  shore.  A  detached  18-foot  spot  i  (1)  mile 
from  shore  is  off  ite  uortbera  end. 

Buoy.— The  outer  end  is  marked  by  a  red  spar  buoy  just  outoide 
the  18-foot  patch,  in  18  feet  of  water. 

Caution.— Vessels  should  not  pass  between  this  buoy  and  the  shore. 

Cheltenham  ahoaL— Three-qmurters  of  a  mile  south  of  Clarke  Point 
•hoal  and  §  mile  from  shore  is  Cheltenham  shoal,  with  a  rocky  spot  of 
6  fiset  depth  of  water. 

Calmnet  bar  consists  of  sAveral  parte;  one,  havinir  19  feet  of  water 
on  it,  lies  1^^  (IJ)  miles  NE.  by  i»4.  |  E.  (N.  60o  E.)  from  Calumet  Pier- 
head light,  and  extends  f  mile  to  the  southward.  Outeide  of  the  North 
pier  are  bars  on  either  side  of  the  channel  with  but  17  feet  of  water  on 
them. 

Caution.— The  outer  bar  lies  directly  in  the  axis  of  the  channel,  con- 
sequently cnre  should  be  exercised  when  approaching  it. 

On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  to  Calumet  shoal,  water  extends  J 
mile  from  shwe,  and  for  2^  (3)  miles  to  the  southeastward  it  extends 
^  mile  Arom  shore. 

Bnoya.- A  black  spar  buoy  marics  the  south  bank  of  the  channel 
into  Calumet  river.    It  is  in  18  lieet  of  water. 

A  red  spar  buoy,  in  18J  feet  of  water,  marks  the  north  bank. 

Caltunet  (South  Cbioago).- This  harbor,  at  the  month  of  the 
Calumet  river,  is  lOiV  (12)  miles  from  Chicago  harbor.  The  haibor  is 
formed  by  two  parallel  piers,  300  feet  apart,  extending  into  the  lake 
from  the  river's  month  in  a  NE.  direction,  the  piers  being  sand  tight 
and  the  channel  being  dredged  between  them.  It  is  diffleult  to  keep 
the  channel  clear  of  sand,  which  here  has  the  nature  of  quicksand. 

The  channel,  as  &r  as  the  niinois  Steel  Company's  slip,  has  (June, 
1805)  a  dej^h  of  16  feet  for  a  width  of  200  feet 

A  basin  has  been  constructed  by  the  Illinois  Steel  Company  for  ite 
own  use.  It  is  3,000  feet  north  of  Calumet  harbor,  and  consists  of  a 
slip  1,500  feet  long  and  200  feet  wide»  the  mouth  being  contracted  to 
100  feet    It  has  a  depth  of  19  feet 

Three  red  buoys  mark  the  north  side  and  two  blaok  buoys  the  aoatii 
side  of  the  channel  to  this  slip,  the  inner  buoys  marking  the  turn. 

Calumet  Pierhead  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  11  (12$)  miles, 
is  shown  from  a  square,  gray  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 

Pog  signal— A  tug  usually  lies  near  the  end  of  th'e  pier,  and  if 
incoming  steamers  blow  four  whistles  the  tug  answers  night  and  day. 

Life-saving  station.— There  is  a  nfe-saving  station  on  the  north 
side  of  the  entrance. 


92 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


Dry  dock. — ^The  Ohicago  Ship  Bnilding  Company  have  a  dry  dock 
on  the  Oalnmet  river.  It  is  470  feet  long,  KM)  feet  wide  at  the  top,  70 
feet  wide  at  the  bottom,  with  a  gate  70  feet  wide,  and  18  feet  of  water 
over  the  sill.  There  is  also  a  100-tou  sheers  here,  as  also  all  con- 
veniences for  repairing  vessels. 

Onrrents. — A  carrent  sweeps  down  the  coast  fh>m  the  northward, 
and  strong  currents  across  the  ends  of  the  piers  have  been  noticed  at 
times,  necessitating  care  in  entering. 

Direotiomi.— When  one  mile  off  the  entrance,  with  the  light  bearing 
8W.  by  W.  4  W.  (8. 69°  W.)  head  for  the  piers,  end  on.  When  the  light 
bears  SW.  i  W.  (S.  51°  W.)  it  will  be  on  a  range  with  the  red  light 
on  the  Ninety-second  Street  bridge.  The  fair-weather  channel  lies 
between  the  entrance  buoys.  Light-draft  vessels  can,  after  passing 
Clarke  point,  bring  the  Pierhead  light  to  bear  SSW.  and  head  for  it, 
rounding  the  north  pier  100  feet  distant  and  keeping  50  feet  from  the 
north  pier  after  entering  the  channel.  In  heavy  weather  and  entering 
at  night,  light-draft  vessels  should  approach  the  entrance  with  the  pier 
bearing  south,  clear  the  pier  about  150  feet,  and  head  in  to  the  harbor.  In 
this  way  the  current  sweeping  past  the  end  of  the  north  pier  toward 
the  south  pier  is  avoided. 

It  is  safe  to  enter  here  in  ordinary  blows,  but  not  in  severe  gales,  the 
NW.  winds  being  the  most  dangerous.  There  is  good  anchorage  out- 
side with  good  holding  ground  of  clay  beneath  the  sand. 

Caution. — ^Tbere  is  a  shoal  south  of  the  entrance  on  a  line  with  the 
south  pier  and  outside  of  the  north  pier.  Keep  the  north  pier  closer 
aboard. 

An  electric  light  on  the  end  of  the  Illinois  Steel  Company's  ore  dock 
is  used  by  persons  familiar  with  the  harbor  as  a  guide  at  night.  As 
there  is  no  fog  signal  it  is  not  safe  to  attempt  the  entrance  in  thick 
weather. 

Entering  the  lUlnoia  Steel  Oompany'e  new  harbor. — Head  for 
Calumet  Pierhead  light  SSW.  (S.  2S°  W.)  until  the  stacks  of  the  fi^maces 
are  opened  up,  then  head  in  the  channel  between  the  buoys  until  the 
stacks  are  all  in  line,  when  head  in  on  this  range  W.  ^  S.  (S.  M°  W.)  until 
abreast  of  the  third  red  buoy,  when  haul  up  for  the  piers. 

Cantioa— There  is  a  bar  with  14  feet  of  water  on  it  extending  to  the 
dredged  channel  off  the  SE.  end  of  the  north  pier  of  this  harbor. 

The  eastern  shore  of  lake  Michigan  will  now  be  described  from 
Wangoshance  point  southward  to  South  Chicago. 

EASTERN  SHORE  OP  LAKE  MICHIGAN. 

MiomaAN. 

Wangoshance  light,  island,  and  shoaL    See  page  64. 
He  anz  Qalets  and  light    See  page  64. 

Coast — South  of  Wangoshance  point  is  a  large  bay  open  to  the  west- 
ward.   The  northern  part  of  this  bay  is  all  shoal,  and  shoals  extend 


LITTLE   TRAVERSE   BAY — GRAND  TRAVERSE   BAT. 


93 


lave  a  dry  dotsk 
s  at  the  top,  70 
8  feet  of  water 
8  also  all  con- 

bhe  northward, 
l)een  noticed  at 

e  light  bearing 
When  the  light 
1  the  red  light 
r  channel  lies 
r  after  passing 
nd  head  for  it, 

0  feet  from  the 
r  and  entering 
e  with  the  pier 
;he  harbor.  In 
th  pier  toward 

vere  gales,  the 
inchorage  out- 

1  line  with  the 
rth  pier  closer 

uiy's  ore  dock 
ftt  night.  As 
ttnce  in  thick 

>r.— Head  for 
f  the  furnaces 
loys  until  the 
840  W.)  until 

ending  to  the 
harbor, 
scribed  teom 


1  to  the  west- 
loals  extend 


1^  (1^)  miles  out  from  the  head  of  the  bay.  Cross  village  is  at  the 
southern  point  of  the  bay,  near  which  the  shoals  extend  off  nearly 
j  utile.  From  here  the  coast  takes  a  southwesterly  direction  for  about 
4^  (5)  miles  and  then  south  for  6  (7)  miles  to  Seven  mile  point.  This 
part  of  the  coast  is  hilly.  Middle  village  is  north  of  Seven-mile  point 
and  from  this  point  the  coast  carves  in  to  the  SE.  and  east  to  the  head 
of  Little  Traverse  bay. 

Little  Traveraa  bay  may  be  considered  as  having  Seven-mile  point 
as  its  north  entrance  point  and  Big  Uock  point  as  it^  south  entrance 
point.  From  a  line  Joining  these  points  the  bay  is  l(Mr  (12)  miles  deep. 
It  is  wide,  has  deep  water  and  good  holding  ground,  and  aflbrds  pro- 
tection from  all  but  westerly  winds.  Little  Traverse  is  on  the  north  part 
of  the  bay. 

Little  Traverse  light. — On  the  extremity  of  Harbor  point,  south  of 
Little  Travers,  is  a  fixed  red  light,  37  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visi- 
ble 114  (13)  miles.  The  light  tower  is  square  and  attached  to  the  south 
end  of  dwelling,  both  red. 

Fog  signal— A  bell  is  struck  by  machinery,  a  double  blow  every 
thirty  seconds. 

Charlevoix,  3^  (3f )  miles  SW.  of  Big  Bock  point,  is  at  the  mouth  of 
the  Pine  river. 

The  harbor  entrance  leads  through  Pine  river  and  Bound  lake  to  Pine 
lake,  3  mile  back' from  the  coast.  It  is  formed  by  two  piers  160  feet 
apart,  narrowing  to  100  feet  at  the  shore  line.  The  available  depth  is 
12  feet.    There  is  a  depth  of  40  tieet  in  Bound  lake. 

The  channel  from  Bound  lake  to  Pine  lake  is  between  revetments  83 
feet  apart,  the  depth  being  11  feet. 

Charlevoix  Pierhead  light — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  8^  (9|)  miles, 
is  shown  37  feet  above  lake  level  from  a  square  white  tower  ou  the 
outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 

Directioiis. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  for  the  light 
on  a  course  SE.  by  £.  (S.  56°  E.)  Mrith  the  piers  end  on.  When  close-to, 
run  in  between  the  piers,  keeping  in  mid-channel. 

Fishermans  island  is  a  small  island  ^  mile  off  shore,  and  is  sur- 
rounded by  exposed  rocks  and  extensive  shoals. 

A  12-foot  shoal  extends  I  mile  north,  an  11-foot  shoal  |  mile  NW.,  and 
about  the  same  depth  is  found  f  mile  to  the  westward  of  this  island, 
whUe  shoals  connect  it  with  the  shore.  SW.  by  W.,  1^  (1^)  miles,  are 
two  18-foot  spots. 

Grand  Traverse  bay  extends  south  into  the  mainland  27f  (32) 
miles.  A  narrow,  hilly  peninsula  extends  north  from  the  head  of  the 
bay  14|  (17)  miles,  terminating  in  Old  Mission  point  and  dividing  this 
part  of  the  bay  into  East  arm  and  West  arm.  Within  the  east  shore 
of  the  bay  are  Torch  Light  and  Elk  lakes,  and  on  the  west  shore  are 
Buttons  and  Northport  bays.  Bowers  harbor  is  on  the  west  shore  of 
the  peninsula.    There  are  no  ofBying  shoals,  although  iu  the  entrance 


>liitoi>ii>Tit-A' 


■&i.'>iUxi'-\'7i^'i. 


94 


LAn  MTCfllOAN. 


to  the  bay  are  Reyeral  patches  with  from  n  to  10  ftithotns  over  them. 
The  bottom  is  almost  everywhere  good  for  anchorage,  the  amis  afford- 
ing the  dee|)e8t  wat«r,  and  the  bay  Ih  only  exposed  to  north  winds; 
protection  from  these  may  be  fonnd  in  the  Hmaller  bays. 

Old  IflMdoB  point  has  a  reef  extending  north  from  it  nearly  1  ^ 
(1^)  miles,  with  abont  the  same  breadth. 

Light— On  the  NB.  end  of  the  point  is  a  fixed  white  light,  48  f^et 
above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  12  (14)  miles.  It  is  shown  ftvm  a 
square  tower  on  white  dwelling. 

Bowers  harbor,  on  the  west  side  of  the  peninsola  and  inside  of 
Tuckers  point  and  Hog   ^land,  affords  good  and  secure  anchorage. 

Bog  ialand. — ^There  is  a  rooky  spit  eztrading  ftvm  the  soutli  iM>int 
for  f  mile  to  the  SW.  with  11  feet  of  water  on  it,  and  a  smaller  one 
NB.  from  it*  northern  point.  Thia  island  lies  near  the  course  and  must 
not  be  approached  too  close. 

TraTonm  olty  is  at  the  head  of  West  arm.  There  is  good  anchor- 
age  off  the  town. 

Thero  is  no  light  under  Government  oontiol, 

Snttona  bay,  inside  of  Suttons  point,  is  at  the  west  entrance  ta 
West  arm.  It  affords  good  andiorage.  Shoals  extend  ^  mile  off  its 
west  shore. 

DonghortT*  baibor,  north  of  Buttons  bay  and  inside  of  New  Miaaion 
point,  is  a  snug  little  anehorage  in  northerly  winds. 

Novtbpert  bay,  between  New  Mission  and  Northport  points,  is  the 
most  extensive  harbor  within  Orand  Traverse  bay.  It  also  afforda 
good  anchorage,  but  tliere  are  one  or  two  shoafai  to  be  avoided. 

At  f  mile  north  of  Northport  point  is  a  rocky  spit  extending  soutti* 
easterly  ^  mile,  with  9  feet  of  water  on  the  outer  end.  Two  dangerous 
shoals  lie  between  Northport  point  and  NorUiport;  a  small  8-foot  shoal 
near  the  middle  of  Northport  bay  and  a  6-foot  shoal,  $  mile  long  north 
and  south,  is  f  mile  NE.  from  it. 

Brtlowa  island.— This  small  island  lies  ^  (2})  miles  S.  by  W.  from 
Northport  point,  in  the  entrance  to  Northport  bay,  and  thotA  water 
extends  ^  mile  north  and  east  from  it. 

South  of  Bellows  island,  and  extending  |  mile  N.  by  E.  fhnn  the 
northern  point  of  New  liission  point,  i«  a  rocky  shoal  with  IS  feet  of 
water  over  it. 

C^eneral  direotions. — Grand  Traverse  bay  can  everywhere  be  aafely 
navigated  if  a  vessel  keeps  a  mile  off  shore,  excepting  in  rounding  Old 
Mission  point,  when  the  lighthouse  ahoold  be  givtti  a  berth  of  If  (2) 
miles;  it  may  be  approached  aomewhat  closer  if  bound  down  the  East 
arm. 

Ti%^**V>""*  point,  the  north  point  of  the  peninsula  Ira^ng  the  west 
shoal  of  Grand  Traverse  bay,  has  a  rooky  spit  extending  ^  mile  to  the 
northward,  with  12  fbet  water  on  its  oater  end.  Just  within  the  point 
are  several  hills. 

Ught— On  the  NW.  extremity  of  Lighthouse  point  is  a  fl^ced  white 


oms  over  them, 
the  amis  afford- 
to  north  winds  f 
I. 
>in  it  nearly  1  ^ 

te  liffht,  48  fi^et 
I  shown  from  a 

k  and  inside  ot 
anchorage, 
the  south  i>oint 
d  a  smaller  one 
ouTse  and  most 

s  good  anchor- 


St  entrance  te 
d  i  mile  off  its 

>f  New  Mission 

t  points,  is  the 
[t  also  affords 
roided. 

tending  seatA- 
'wo  dangeroas 
all  8-foot  shoal 
lile  long  north 

S.  by  W.  fh)m 
1  BhoaA  water 

y  E.  ftom  the 
^ithlSfioetof 

horebeeafely 
rounding  Old 
lerth  of  If  (2) 
own  the  East 

ning  the  west 
i  mile  to  the 
hin  the  point 

a  fl^ed  white 


OOOD   HARBOR   BAY — ^FRANKFORT.  9i 

light  40  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  1  If  (13))  miles.   The  light 
is  shown  ttoin  a  square  tower  on  yellow  dwelling. 

Cathead  point  is  'J{  Of)  milcH  SW.  of  Lighthouso  point;  the  bight 
betwe<^n  is  shortl.    NE.  of  0;ithead  point  f  mile  is  n  l«-foot  slioal. 

Coaat.— From  «  thead  point  the  coast  trends  12J  (14,'„)  miles  8W. 
l^  8.  to  Carp  River  imut.    Within  the  point  is  Carp  lake. 

North  of  C5ftrp  River  point  the  shore  is  bluff  and  wooded,  with  shoals 
extending  ^  mile  from  shore. 

At  3)  (4)  miles  NB.  J  N.  from  the  dock  at  Carp  River  landing  and 
1-^  (Ig)  miles  tiom  shore  are  several  rocky  patches  with  12  to  16  feet 
over  them. 

Gtood  Huber  bay,  between  Garp  River  and  Pyramid  points,  is 
exposetl  to  northerly  and  northwesterly  and  protected  from  other  winds. 
The  western  half  of  the  bay  has  deq»  water  over  sand,  the  eastern  half 
is  shoal,  and  there  are  several  rocky  spots  with  7,  8,  and  10  feet  over 
them.    North  Unity  is  in  the  BW.  part  of  the  bay. 

North  of  Pyramid  point  about  a  mile  are  two  IS-fbot  detached  shoals. 

Coast — Between  Pyramid  and  Sleeping  Bear  ixtints  is  another  bay 
open  to  the  north  and  northwestward.  Glen  Arbor  is  at  the  head  of 
this  bay.  From  the  shore  north  of  Glen  Arbor  a  rocky  shoal  extends 
out  f  mile.  The  south  shore  of  this  bay  is  hilly  and  steop-to.  Within 
the  bay  is  Bear  lake. 

Maniton  tehmds  and  light    See  i>age  68. 

Coast— From  Sleeping  Bear  point  the  coast  trends  south  9}  (11) 
miles,  and  is  bold  with  high  bluffs.  It  then  becomes  lower  and  curves 
around  to  the  westward  to  Platte  River  point,  off  which  an  extensive 
reef  1  (IJ)  mile  wide  extends  north  1^  (1  J)  miles,  with  13  and  16  (teet 
on  its  outer  end.  From  Platte  River  point  the  coast  again  becomes 
bold,  with  hills  near  1%e  shore,  and  trends  4f  (5))  miles  WSW.  to 
Betsie  point.  At  2^  (2J)  miles  south  of  Sleeping  Bear  point  is  Sleep- 
Ingbear,  a  hill  dhrectly  on  the  shwe,  and  4f  (6J)  miles  farther  t onth  are 
the  Empire  bhifb. 

Betsle  point  is  a  rounding  point  with  a  prominent  hill  just  withtn  it. 
South  of  the  hill  is  Oiystal  lake. 

Light— On  Betide  point  is  a  flashing  white  light  every  ten  seconds. 
The  light  is  63  feet  above  the  lake  level,  visible  12t^  (14f )  miles,  and 
shown  from  a  cylindrical  tower  connected  to  west  end  of  dwelling  by  a 
covered  way,  both  yellow,  with  red  roofls.  The  ibg^signal  house  is  about 
17B  fieet  NB.  by  N.  from  the  tower. 

Fog  signal- A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
with  alternate  silent  intervals  often  and  forty  seconds. 

Life'saviag  statton,  |  mile  south  of  the  light  tower. 

Frankfort,  on  lake  Betsie,  is  df  (4^)  miles  south  of  Betsie  point 
There  is  a  hill  323  feet  high  just  north  of  Frankfort  and  another  265 
feet  high  south  of  it.  A  short  channel  connects  lakes  Michigan  and 
Betsie,  and  Idlie  entrance  is  protected  by  piers. 


96 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


The  width  between  the  piers  is  200  feet.  In  Jane,  1895,  there  was  a 
navigable  depth  of  13  feet  between  the  piers.  The  depth  in  the  inner 
lake  is  20  feet. 

A  line  of  steamers  ferries  freight  cars  across  from  here  to  Kewaunee, 
a  distance  of  55  (63^)  miles. 

Pierhead  light,  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  7^  (8^)  miles,  is  shown 
from  a  square,  white  tower  en  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

Fog  belL — ^A  bell  in  a  tower  on  the  south  pier,  8  feet  in  the  rear  of 
the  light  tower,  is  struck  by  machinery,  a  single  and  a  double  blow 
alternately,  at  intervals  of  twenty  seconds. 

ShoaL — A  dangerous  shoal  is  reported  a  short  distance  outside  of 
the  piers  at  this  harbor,  and  directly  in  the  track  of  vessels  coming  in. 
Its  exact  location  is  uncertain. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  south  pier. 

Directions.  -When  1^  (1^)  miles  west  of  the  entrance,  head  for  the 
light  and  run  in  between  the  piers,  keeping  close  to  the  south  pier  until 
well  inside,  when  keep  in  mid-channel. 

Coast. — From  Frankfort  the  coast  takes  a  southerly  direction  for 
16^  (19)  miles  to  Portage  lake.  All  along  this  stretch  of  coast  are  high 
hills,  the  highest,  400  feet,  being  about  midway  between  Herring  lake, 
(4^  (4f )  miles  south  of  Frankfort),  and  North  Bar  lake.  There  are  no 
outlying  shoals  and  the  coast  is  every whe<*e  safe  to  approach  to  ^  mile. 

Portage  lake. — This  harbor  was  originally  designed  for  a  harbor  of 
refuge,  being  favorably  situated  for  such  purpose.  Portage  lake,  into 
which  the  entrance  between  the  piers  leads,  measures  3  (3^)  miles  by 
one  mile,  and  is  close  to  the  east  coast  of  lake  Michigan.  The  width  at 
the  entrance  is  370  feet. 

In  June,  1895,  there'was  a  narrow  channel  with  6}  feet  of  water.  The 
depth  in  Portage  lake  is  ample  for  any  vessel. 

Pierhead  range. — The  front  light  is  fixed  red,  and  is  shown  from  a 
post  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  a  height  of  23  feet. 

The  rear  light  is  fixed  red,  visible  11^  (13)  miles.  It  is  shown  from 
a  square,  white  tower  40  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Directions. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range.  When  near  the  piers,  stand  in  between  them,  keeping  in  mid- 
chacnel. 

Coast. — Between  Portage  lake  and  Manistee,  7^  (8^)  miles  to  the 
SW.,  the  coast  has  the  same  general  appearance,  but  the  hills  are  not 
so  high.    Bush  lake  is  3  (3^)  miles  north  of  Manistee. 

Manistee  is  on  Manistee  lake  and  river,  at  their  lower  junction,  about 
8,000  feet  from  the  shore  of  lake  Michigan.  The  Manistee  river,  a  swift, 
narrow  stream,  flows  through  lake  Manistee  into  lake  Michigan.  There 
are  several  smaU  towns  on  the  southern  shores  of  Manistee  lake. 

The  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  formed  by  two  piers  185  feet  apart. 

In  November,  1895,  the  depth  at  entrance  was  13^  feet  and  11  feet  in 
the  river.    The  depth  in  Manistee  lake  is  ample  for  all  vessels. 


MANISTEE LUDINGTON. 


97 


1896,  there  was  a 
spth  in  the  inner 

jre  to  Kewaunee, 

I  miles,  is  shown 
nth  pier. 

let  in  the  rear  of 
d  a  double  blow 

itance  outside  of 
essels  coming  in. 

1  near  the  inner 

nee,  head  for  the 
i  south  pier  until 

ply  direction  for 
of  coast  are  high 
en  Herring  lake, 
e.  There  are  no 
proach  to  ^  mile. 
I  for  a  harbor  of 
trtage  lake,  into 
3  (3i)  miles  by 
.   The  width  at 

t  of  water.    The 

3  shown  from  a 

i  feet. 

i  is  shown  from 

lead  in  on  the 
i:eeping  in  mid- 

i^)  miles  to  the 
le  hills  are  not 

junction,  about 
le  river,  a  swift, 
chigan.  There 
itee  lake. 

feet  apart. 

and  11  feet  in 
ressels. 


Range  lights. — The  front  light  is  Axed  red,  23^  feet  aboye  the  level 
of  the  lake.  It  is  showi:  from  a  lantern  in  the  outer  end  of  elevated 
conduit  near  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 

The  rear  light,  iixed  white,  varie<l  by  a  red  flash  every  forty-five  sec- 
onds, and  visible  12-^  (14)  miles,  is  45  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  is 
shown  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white  dwelling  on  the  north  side  of  the 
mouth  of  the  river.  It  is  2,022  feet  ESE.  (S.  68<^  E.)  from  the  front 
light. 

.    When  a  vessel  is  within  800  feet  of  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier 
this  light  will  be  obscured  when  bearing  BSE.  (S.  68°  E.). 

Fog  signal — ^A  10-inoh  steam  whistle  in  a  house  on  the  north  pier 
sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  silent  intervals  of  twenty- 
flve  seconds. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  on  the  inner  end 
of  the  north  pier. 

Directions. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  and  in  between  the  piers. 

Coast-^From  Manistee  the  coast  cjntinues  its  southwesterly  trend 
for  13^  ( 16)  miles  to  Big  Point  Sable  2ight,  and  becomes  lower  and  the 
hills  more  scattering.  NE.  of  Big  Point  Sable  light  is  the  highest  hill 
of  168  feet.    Freesoil  is  nearly  6  (7)  miles  from  Manistee,  and  has  a  pier. 

Big  Point  Sable  is  a  long,  rounding  point  backed  by  hills,  and  just 
within  is  Big  Sable  lake,  with  Hamlin  at  its  south  end.  This  town  is 
connected  with  lake  Michigan  by  rail.  Lincoln,  on  Little  Sable  lake, 
is  4f  (5^)  miles  SE.  of  Sable  light,  and  Ludington  is  2^  (2^)  miles  far- 
ther south. 

Big  Point  Sable  light— A  fixed  white  light,  106  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  and  visible  16^  (18f )  miles,  is  shown  from  a  conical  tower,  connected 
•with  a  dwelling,  both  of  yellow  brick. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  one  mile  south 
of  this  lighthouse. 

Lndington  is  the  terminal  of  the  Flint  and  Pere  Marquette  railroad, 
which  maintains  a  fleet  of  lake  steamers.  Its  inner  harbor  is  on  Pere 
Marquette  lake,  which  empties  into  lake  Michigan  south  of  the  town. 

The  harbor  is  formed  by  two  piers  250  feet  apart  at  the  entrance,  nar- 
rowing  to  190  feet  at  the  inner  end  of  the  north  pier. 

In  October,  1805,  the  available  depth  in  the  channel  between  the 
piers  was  13  feet.    The  depth  in  Pere  Marquette  lake  is  over  40  feet. 

North  Pierhead  light-— A  fixed  white  light  on  the  outer  end  of  the 
north  pier  is  shown  fh>m  a  post,  and  is  25  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Pierhead  range. — ^The  flront  light  is  fixed  red  and  shown  from  a  post 
on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  and  25  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light,  106  feet  distant,  is  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  T^  (8^) 
miles.  It  is  shown  at  a  height  of  36  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a 
square,  white  tower. 

Fog  signal — A  lOinch  steam  whistle  gives  blasts  of  three  seconds; 
1944— No.  108 7 


98 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


silent  intervals  of  seventeen  seconds.     The  fog-signal  building  imme- 
diately in  rear  of  tower  is  brown. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Directions. — When  1-^  (1^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  and  in  between  the  piers. 

Coast. — ^From  Ludington  to  Pentwater,  10^^  (12)  miles  to  the  south- 
ward, the  hills  become  more  numerous  and  higher,  ranging  from  157  to 
248  feet.  Bass  lake,  with  a  small  outlet  into  lake  Michigan,  is  3  (3^) 
miles  north  of  Pentwater  and  close  to  the  shore. 

Pentwater  is  on  the  north  shore  of  Pentwater  lake,  one  of  the 
smaller  of  these  interior  lakes. 

The  entrance  to  lake  Pentwater  is  formed  by  two  piers  15U  feet  apart, 
extending  into  lake  Michigan.  The  channel  between  the  piers  aver- 
ages a  depth  of  9  feet.    Lake  Pentwater  is  25  feet  deep. 

A  bar  extending  from  the  lighthouse  on  the  south  pier  in  a  NW. 
direction  frequently  forms  during  a  gale. 

Pierhead  range. — ^The  front  light  is  fixed  red  and  is  shown  25  feet 
above  the  lake  level  from  a  post.    It  is  on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

The  rear  light,  fixed  red,  is  visible  7^  (8^)  miles.  It  is  shown  from 
a  square,  white  tower,  and  is  33  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Life-savii^  statioa — ^There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Tngs. — ^There  is  one  tug  owned  by  the  Sands  &  Maxwell  Lumber 
Gompauy,  the  charges  being  reasonable. 

Directions. — When  1^\  (t^)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range,  keeping  to  the  NW.  side  of  the  entrance  and  closer  to  the  north 
pier  until  within  the  entrance,  when  keep  in  mid  channel. 

Little  Point  Sable,  8§  (10)  miles  SW.  of  Pentwater,  is,  from  its 
rounding  appearance  and  interior  hills  and  lake  (Little  Sable),  some- 
what similar  to  Big  Point  Sable.  The  hills  are  not  so  high ;  the  highest, 
160  and  173  feet,  are  south  uf  the  lighthouse. 

Light. — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  thirty 
seconds,  visible  16^  (18^)  miles,  is  shown  firom  a  conical  tower  con- 
nected with  a  dwelling,  both  of  red  brick|  on  Little  Point  Sable. 

Coast — South  of  Little  Point  Sable  the  hills  become  higher,  with 
numerous  bluffs.  Benona,  on  Stoney  lake,  is  5^  (6|)  miles  SE.  of  the 
light  and  Clay  banks,  a  prominent  bluff,  246  feet  high,  3^V  (H)  miles 
farther  on.  The  entrance  to  White  lake  is  7-^-  (9)  miles  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  Cla>  banks.  There  are  no  shoals  more  than  |  mile  from 
the  shore,  excepting  a  small  spit  4|  (5^)  miles  north  of  White  Biver 
light,  whi'jh  extends  out  nearly  i  mile,  with  14  feet  water  over  it. 

'White  river. — White  river  flows  through  White  lake,  a  large  body 
of  water  near  the  coast,  into  lake  Michigan.  Near  the  upper  end  of 
White  lake,  about  4^  (5)  miles  from  the  eu  trance,  there  are  two  towns, 
Whitehall  on  the  south  and  Montague  on  the  north  shore. 

The  harbor  entrance  is  formed  by  two  piers,  with  a  width  between  of 


WHITE   RIVER — ^MUSKEGON. 


99 


1  boilding  irnme- 

1  near  the  inner 

head  iu  on  the 

les  to  the  sontli- 
ginjr  from  157  to 
ichigan,  is  3  (3^) 

ake,  one  of  the 

's  150  feet  apart, 
the  piers  aver- 

P. 
pier  in  a  NW. 

is  shown  25  feet 

)f  tlie  south  pier. 

t  is  shown  f):oin 

irel. 

1  near  the  inner 

iazwell  Lumber 

head  in  on  the 
tser  to  the  north 
lel. 

;er,  is,  from  its 

e  Sable),  sorae- 

fh;  the  highest, 

1  every  thirty 
ical  tower  cou- 
nt Sable, 
me  higher,  with 
iles  SE.  of  the 
ih'eiH)  miles 
ia  to  the  south- 
tan  I  mile  from 
>f  White  Biver 
er  over  it. 
e,  a  lurge  body 
e  upper  end  of 
are  two  towns, 
re. 
dtb  between  of 


I 


190  feet.  The  sand  is  constantly  shifting,  and  the  entrance  is  liable  tc 
be  barred  by  heavy  gales.  January,  1896 :  A  depth  entering  along- 
side of  south  pier  10  feet,  shoaling  to  8  feet  a  short  distance  inside,  and 
from  25  to  60  feet  in  White  lake. 

light. — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  red  flash  every  forty  seconds, 
visible  12^  (14)  miles,  is  shown  57  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  an 
octagonal  tower  on  the  NW.  corner  of  a  dwelling,  both  yellow,  on  thQ 
south  side  of  the  entrance  to  White  river. 

Pierhead  light — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  7^  (8^)  miles,  is  shown 
ftom  a  square  white  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

Life-Baling  statioa — ^There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

White  Lake  shoals.— There  is  a  5-foot  shoal  |  mile  east  of  the 
entrance,  and  one  mile  east  of  that  another,  none,  however,  on  the 
north  shore  extending  over  ^  mile  from  shore. 

The  south  shore  can  be  approached  to  |  mile  for  2^  (2})  miles,  from 
which  point  shoals  extend  $  mile  from  the  shore  as  far  as  Whitehall. 

Directions. — When  l-,\  (1^)  miles  west  of  the  entrance,  head  in  for 
the  Pierhead  light  with  the  piers  end  on.  When  close  to,  keep  between 
the  piers  in  mid-channel.  After  passing  the  shoal  at  the  entrance,  by 
keeping  ^  mile  off  the  north  shore,  and  following  its  general  trend,  all 
shoals  will  be  avoided. 

Coast— From  White  river  the  coast  trends  SE.  by  8.  for  9J  (11) 
miles  to  Muskegon  river,  and  is  lined  with  bluffs  and  a  few  hills.  Duck 
lake  is  2^  (2^)  miles  from  White  river. 

Mnskegon  is  on  the  south  shore  of  Muskegon  lake,  the  largest  of 
the  interior  lakes  along  the  east  coast  of  lake  Michigan.  The  Mnske- 
gon river  discharges  through  this  lake,  the  city  being  3  (3^)  miles  from 
its  mouth.  This  river  is  sei^nd  only  to  Grand  river  in  drainage  area 
and  volume,  and  its  current  keeps  the  harbor  open  the  year  round, 
except  when  ice  is  forced  upon  the  shore  by  strong  westerly  winds. 

The  entrance  to  the  lake  is  formed  by  two  piers  300  feet  apart,  con- 
verging to  190  feet  at  the  shore  line. 

In  July,  1895,  the  available  depth  in  the  channel  between  the  piers 
was  13  feet.  The  depth  in  Mnskegon  lake  is  30  to  40  feet,  with  15  to  20 
feet  at  the  head  of  the  landing  piers. 

Mnskegon  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^%  (14)  miles,  is 
shown  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white  dwelling  on  the  south  side  of  the 
entrance  about  100  yards  from  the  lake. 

Pierhead  range. — ^The  front  light  is  fixed  red,  24  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  and  exhibited  from  a  lantern  in  the  outer  end  of  an  elevated 
conduit. 

The  rear  light,  580  feet  uistant,  is  fixed  red,  visible  7^  (8^)  miles. 
It  is  shown  from  a  square  white  tower  36  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

^hese  two  lights  show  the  range  and  direction  of  the  piers. 

Fog  signaL— A  bell  is  struck  by  machinery,  one  blow  every  fifteen 
seconds. 


« 


liiniriiiritfnfiaiiip 


Mli>HUlMaiMil>IW*rt»M1fflllMIHIHl1l 


100 


LAKE  MICHIGAN. 


Ziak*  Seaeoil  light — On  the  north  side  of  the  inner  entrance  to  the 
lake  in  line  with  the  pierhead  lights  and  100  feet  from  tlie  east  extremity 
of  the  boom  piling,  from  a  post,  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light  25  feet  above 
the  lake  level. 

ZiifiHMVlBg  Btation. — ^There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Bhofils.*^In  Mnskegon  lake  shoal  water  extends  f  mile  from  the 
Booth  shore.    Booms  have  been  built  to  control  the  flow  of  sand. 

Bimk  Point  HhoaL — In  the  middle  of  the  north  shore  a  shoal  extends 
southward  f  mile,  with  6  feet  of  water  near  the  buoy  on  the  enter  end. 
It  extends  NB.  and  ISW.  from  the  bnoy. 

Bnoy.— A  black  can  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water  marks  the  extreme 
Boathefft  point  of  this  shoal  and  also  the  turning  point  of  the  lake. 
There  is  no  passage  to  the  northward. 

DireetionB. — When  1^  (IJ)  miles  of  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  with  the  piers,  end  on  at  first,  keeping  to  the  south  side  of  the 
bar  until  the  piers  are  approached,  when  run  in  between  them  in  mid- 
channel. 

On  leaving  the  channel,  head  east  (nothing  to  the  northward)  passing 
southward  of  the  buoy.  From  here  head  lilE.  )  N.  (N.  39°  E.)  until 
abteast  of  the  docks. 

Cantion.-  -Oare  is  necessary  in  entering,  especially  in  NW.  gales. 
Several  schooners  have  been  sunk  or  severely  injured  by  colliding  with 
the  piers. 

Coast. — From  Mnskegon  lights  the  coast  trends  4^  (4f )  miles  SBE. 
4  E.  to  the  entrance  to  Black  lake,  and  has  all  along  high  hills  close 
to  the  shore.  At  Black  lake  it  becomes  lower,  but  continues  in  the 
same  direction  7  (8)  miles  to  Grand  Haven,  when  it  again  becomes  hilly. 

GfttUd  Haven,  lying  near  the  mouth  of  Grand  river  on  its  south 
bank,  is  the  principal  harbor  of  refuge  on  the  east  coast,  and,  with  this 
object  in  view,  was  designed  with  an  ent>ranc4  width  of  400  feet  and  a 
depth  of  18  feet.  Two  piers  have  been  built.  Grand  river  is  the 
largest  stream  on  this  coast. 

Thete  are  large  sand  dunes  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  tcom 
which  quantities  of  sand  are  blown  into  the  river,  and,  being  carried 
by  the  current,  maintain  a  bar  opposite  the  middle  of  the  entrance  and 
outside  the  piers.  Vegetation  is  being  cultivated  on  theM  dunes  to 
prevent  this,  and  catch-sand  fences  are  also  used,  but  only  furnish 
temporary  relief. 

On  Kovember  22, 1895,  the  least  depth  in  southern  crossing  of  the 
ontetbar  was  19  fteet;  shoalest  depth  on  bar  being  13J  feet;  channel 
depth  between  piers  near  entrance,  15^  feet;  farther  inside,  20  feet  or 
more,  to  the  Grand  Haven  landing. 

Shoid.— There  is  a  rock  and  sand  shoal  inside  of  the  harbor,  about  ^ 
mile  firom  the  pierhead.  Which  has  a  least  depth  of  6  feet. 

#ruid  fintren  Ugfat— A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash 


GRAND  HAVEN HOLLAND. 


101 


r  entrance  to  the 
le  east  extremity 
;bt  25  feet  above 

near  the  inner 

\  mile  from  the 
(T  of  sand. 
)  a  shoal  extendH 
n  the  onter  end. 

^s  the  extreme 
int  of  the  lake. 

head  in  on  the 
mth  side  of  the 
3n  them  in  mid< 

lihward)  passing 
[J.  390  E.)  nntil 

in  NW.  gales. 
Y  colliding  with 

(4f )  miles  SBB. 
iiigh  hills  close 
mtinnes  in  the 
1  becomes  hilly. 
)r  on  its  sonth 
i,  and,  with  this 
400  feet  and  a 
id  river  is  the 

entrance  from 
,  being  carried 
le  entrance  and 
theae  dnnes  to 
It  only  famish 

crossing  of  the 
\  feet;  channel 
tide,  20  feet  or 

harbor,  about } 

b. 

^  a  white  flash 


every  minute,  visible  13A  (16)  miles,  is  shown  70  feet  above  lake  level 
from  a  conical  white  tower  on  the  blutt"  at  the  south  side  of  the  mouth 
of  the  river. 

Pierhead  light— At  75  ffeet  from  outer  end  of  the  south  pier  is  a 
fixed  wUte  light,  visible  llVo  (13)  miles.  It  is  37  feet  above  the  hike 
level,  and  shown  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  tower,  upper  part 
inclosesd.    Elevated  walk  along  pier  to  the  shore. 

Fog  signaL— A  steam  siren  on  the  south  pior  in  the  rear  of  the  light- 
house sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds'  duration,  with  silent  intervals  of 
thirty-five  seconds. 

liifO'saving  statloa— Thc-^e  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Wharfage.— Freight  is  cliarged  wharfage  here. 

Cantioa— The  greatest  depth  of  water  was,  at  the  last  notice,  on  the 
southern  crossing  of  the  bar,  but  this  and  the  depth  may  change  in  a 
sliort  time  during  a  gale,  so  great  care  is  necessary  in  entering  at  such 
times. 

Currents.— During  the  spring  months  the  currents  in  the  river  run 
from  3  to  4  miles  an  hour.  During  the  summer  months  the  eoirents 
are  light. 

Directions.— When  l^^  (IJ)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  with  the  south  pier  end  on.  When  close-to,  head  between  the 
piers,  closer  to  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  unta  inside,  when  keep 
mid-channel. 

Coast- From  Grand  Haven  the  coast  trends  almost  south  17  (19i) 
miles  to  the  Holland  lights.  Hills  are  scattered  all  along  this  stretch. 
Pigeon  hike,  with  an  outlet  into  hike  Michigan,  is  about  balfWay 
between. 

Holland.— Holland  (or  Black)  lake  is  a  large  body  of  water  near  the 
eastern  shore  of  lake  Michigan,  with  which  it  is  connected,  the  town  of 
Holland  being  at  its  head  some  4J  (5)  miles  from  the  entrance. 

The  entrance  channel  is  beuween  piers,  216  feet  apart  at  the  entrane«, 
diminishing  to  155  feet  inside. 

In  winter  the  depth  is  usually  reduced  to  7  feet.  The  depth  in  Black 
lake  is  24  to  40  feet. 

Pierhead  rang*.— A  fixed  red  light  is  shown  from  a  post  on  the 
outer  end  of  the  south  pier.    It  is  26  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light  is  also  red,  visible  8^  (Of)  miles,  and  32  feet  above  the 
lake  level.  It  is  shown  from  a  square,  white  tower.  The  lights  are  102 
feet  apart  and  form  a  range  for  entering  the  harbor. 

I4f«*8airing  ttation.— There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  south  pier. 

Diwcttona.— When  l^  (IJ)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range.  When  the  piers  are  close-to,  stand  in  between  them,  keeping 
in  mid-channel. 

If  not  acquainted  with  the  waters  of  Black  lake,  it  is  best  to  anchor 


102 


LAKE   MICHIGAN. 


and  get  a  pilot.  A  system  of  ranges  is  used  which  is  said  to  be  easily 
understood. 

Cnrrents. — There  are  no  currents  save  those  due  to  fluctuations  in 
the  lake  level. 

Kalamaxoo  River  entrance  is  7  (8)  miles  south  of  the  Holland 
lights.  The  coast  is  hilly  all  along,  and  can  be  approached  with  safety 
to  f  mile.  There  is  a  detached  18-foot  shoal  halfway  between,  about 
I  mile  off  shore. 

Saugatuck  and  Douglas  are  on  opposite  banks  of  Kalamazoo  river 
2^  (34)  miles  from  the  mouth,  Saugatuck  being  on  the  north  bank. 

The  stream  is  one  of  some  capacity,  draining  1,700  square  miles  and 
haying  a  natural  depth  of  6  to  8  feet. 

Below  Saugatuck  is  a  deep  bend  in  the  river,  and  bordering  this  is  a 
large  expanse  of  sand  extending  to  the  lake  shore.  Were  the  driit  of 
sand  from  this  vicinity  into  the  river  controlled  there  would  be  no 
difficulty  in  maintaining  a  channel  of  10  or  12  feet  depth. 

In  June,  1895,  6^  feet  could  with  difficulty  be  carried  in.  Thence  to 
above  the  bend  in  the  river  are  numerous  bars. 

Kalamazoo  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^  (14f )  miles,  is 
shown  53  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white 
dwelling  on  the  north  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

Pierhead  light. — ^A  fixed  red  light  is  shown  at  the  outer  end  of  an 
elevated  conduit  at  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

Directions. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  west  of  Kalamazoo  light,  head 
for  the  light  and  run  in  between  the  piers,  keeping  in  mid-channel. 
Kone  but  small  vessels  can  enter  this  harbor. 

Coast. — From  Kalamazoo  river  the  coast  trends  15^  (18)  miles 
southerly  to  South  Haven.  It  is  regular  and  lined  with  bluffs,  being 
highest  in  the  neighborhood  of  Saugatuck. 

South  Haven  is  at  the  mouth  of  Black  river,  a  narrow  stream. 

The  harbor  is  formed  by  two  piers  projecting  into  the  lake  from  the 
mouth  of  the  river,  the  width  between  the  piers  being  177  feet. 

The  main  obstruction  is  the  bar  outside  the  piers. 

Yearly  dredging  is  necessary  in  the  river. 

In  July,  1895,  there  was  an  available  depth  of  10  feet. 

Pierhead  light— A  fixed  red  light,  32  feet  above  the  lake  level  and 
visible  8^  (9|)  miles,  is  shown  from  a  square,  white  tower  near  the 
outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

Signal-Service  station. — ^There  is  a  Signal-Service  station  on  the 
lighthouse  reservation. 

Life-saving  station. — ^There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Directions. — When  1^  (1^)  miles  west  of  the  lig^'t,  i»  3ul  for  it.  As 
it  is  approached,  open  it  a  little  on  the  starboara  how  and  mn  in 
between  the  piers,  keeping  in  mid-channel. 

Caution. — Keep  the  piers  end  on,  as  there  is  shoal  water  on  either 
side  of  the  entrance. 


aid  to  be  easily 

fluctuations  in 

)f  the  Holland 
bed  with  safety 
between,  about 

'alamazoo  river 
north  bank, 
nare  miles  and 

dering  this  is  a 

)re  the  driit  of 

■e  would  be  no 

h. 

in.    Thence  to 

(14f )  miles,  is 
vet  on  a  white 

uter  end  of  an 

zoo  light,  head 
n  mid-channel. 

15§  (18)  miles 
th  bluffs,  being 

ow  stream. 
)  lake  from  the 
L77  feet 


)  lake  level  and 
tower  near  the 

station  on  the 

near  the  inner 

L»  3kl  for  it.   As 
ow  and  run  in 

rater  on  either 


ST.  JOSEPH — MICHIGAN    CITY. 


108 


Coast— From  South  Haven  the  coast  trends  about  19J  (22J)  miles 
SSW.  to  St.  Joseph.  It  consists  of  low  bluffs  and  some  few  hills. 
There  are  no  offlyiug  dangers. 

St.  Joseph  is  an  important  harbor  on  the  south  bank  of  the  St. 
Joseph  river.  Benton  harbor,  on  a  canal,  is  If  (2)  miles  NE.  A  small 
stream.  Paw  Paw  river,  empties  into  this  canal  near  its  junction  with 
the  St.  Joseph  river  f  mile  from  the  lake. 

Two  piers  have  been  built  out  from  the  river's  month,  the  width 
between  the  piers  being  263  feet.  The  shoaling  outside  the  harbor  has 
at  times  threatened  to  close  it. 

The  Benton  Harbor  canal  is  90  to  100  feet  wide.  A  wing  dam  has 
been  constructed  at  the  mouth  of  the  Paw  Paw  river  as  a  protection 
against  the  sand. 

In  January,  1896,  the  available  depth  in  St.  Joseph  harbor  and  in 
Benton  Harbor  canal  was  12  feet. 

St  Joseph  light — A  fixed  whit«  light  varied  by  a  white  iiash  every 
forty-five  seconds,  visible  15^-  (ISJ)  miles,  is  shown  101  feot  above  the 
lake  level  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white  dwelling  on  a  bluff"  in  the 
city  SE.  of  the  entrance. 

Pierhead  range. — The  front  light  near  the  outer  end  of  the  north 
pier  is  fixed  red  and  24  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light,  300  feet  distant,  is  also  fixed  red,  visible  8J  (9f )  miles, 
and  50  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  front  light  it  shown  from  a  lantern  in  an  inclosed  end  of  an 
elevated  conduit;  the  rear  one  from  a  square  white  tower. 

These  lights  show  the  direction  of  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier 
and,  in  range,  the  course  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Pog  signal. — ^A  bell  struck  by  machinery  every  thirty  seconds. 

Signal-Senrioe  station.— There  is  a  Signal-Service  station  400  yards 
north  of  the  lighthouse  in  the  town. 

Life-saving  station. — There  is  a  life-saving  station  near  the  inner 
end  of  the  north  pier. 

Buoy. — ^A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  20  feet  of  water  and  marks 
the  northwestern  point  of  the  shoal  on  south  side  of  entrance  to 
harbor. 

Directions.- When  1  ^  (IJ)  miles  off  the  entrance,  head  in  on  the 
range  with  the  piers,  end  on;  as  the  piers  are  approached  open  out  the 
north  pier  on  the  port  bow. 

Coast— From  St.  Joseph  the  coast  trends  13§  (15f )  miles  SSW.,  the 
first  portion  of  this  stretch  being  low  bluffs  and  the  latter  part  hilly. 
At  the  above  distance  from  St.  Joseph  and^i  mile  inshore  is  Bald  Tom, 
320  feet  high;  it  terminates  this  range  of  hills.  Here  the  coast  line 
trends  a  little  more  westward  and  runs  about  SW.  for  17|  (20J)  miles 
to  Michigan  Oity.  As  Michigan  City  is  approached  the  coast  again 
becomes  hilly.  The  boundary  line  between  Michigan  and  Indiana 
comes  in  to  the  lake  4^  (5)  miles  NE.  of  Michigan  Oity. 


-KUfmrnmniSismi* 


miSm-i^ss^i^^ 


lOi 


LAKE  MICHIOAN. 


INDIANA. 

BAiohigan  City  i»  at  the  SE.  end  of  lake  Michigan.  Trail  creek,  a 
small  stream,  winds  throngh  the  city,  emptying  into  the  lake. 

The  inner  harbor  is  formed  by  two  piers  100  feet  apart  at  the  shore 
line  (the  month  of  the  creek)  and  250  feet  apart  at  the  outer  end  of  the 
eastern  pier,  800  feet  from  shore.  The  western  pier  extends  to  the  line 
of  the  old  breakwater  and  600  feet  farther  out  than  the  eastern  pier. 
The  depth  is  from  11  to  14  feet.  The  east  pier  had  an  original  length 
of  1,500  feet,  bat  the  outer  700  feet  have  been  destroyed  by  the  waves. 
A  lookout  for  the  wrecked  portion  should  be  kept  when  approaching 
the  harbor. 

The  outer  harbor  is  formed  by  a  1,200-foot  pier  projecting  from  a 
point  on  the  shore  1,400  feet  east  of  the  entrance  and  a  breakwater 
1,400  feet  long  extending  west  ft-om  the  end  of  the  east  pier.  These, 
with  the  prolonged  pier  on  the  west  side,  inclose  an  area  of  40  acres. 
This  harbor  will  be  of  no  nse  nntil  dredged. 

An  outer  breakwater  is  under  construction. 

The  width  of  the  entrance  between  the  outer  breakwater  and  the 
northern  extension  of  the  old  breakwater  is  400  feet,  and  the  width  of 
the  entrance  between  the  west  pier  and  the  old  breakwater  is  216  feet. 

Lights.— Michigan  City  light,  a  flxed  white  light,  visible  12V\r  (14^) 
miles,  is  shown  52  feet  above  lake  level  from  a  square  tower  on  a  yel- 
low dwelling,  both  with  red  roofs,  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance. 

Four  lanterns  on  jMsts  are  maintained  by  the  United  States  Engin- 
eers, as  follows: 

A  flxed  red  light  on  the  breakwater  pier,  64  feet  from  the  outer  end 
and  36  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

A  flxed  white  light  on  the  breakwater  pier,  376  feet  from  the  outer 
end  and  42  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

These  lights  on  range  show  the  direction  of  the  breakwater  and  the 
course  for  entering.  « 

A  flxed  white  light  on  the  west  pier,  outer  end,  and  36  feet  above  the 
lake  level. 

A  flxed  red  light  on  the  outer  breakwater,  east  end,  and  16^  fSeet 
above  the  lake  level. 

Ziife-Miviiig  station.— There  is  a  life-saving  station  aboat  40  feet 
north  of  the  lighthouse. 

Direetioiis.— When  1-^^  (1^)  miles  oif  the  entrance  bring  the  lights 
on  range  and  stand  in,  keeping  the  breakwater  pier  a  little  open  on  the 
port  bow. 

Corrants. — A  strong  westerly  current  sets  past  the  entrance  to  the 
harbor;  the  breakwater  pier  was  built  as  a  protection  against  it. 

Coast — ^From  Michigan  City  the  south  shore  of  the  lake  curves  to 
the  westward  to  Calumet,  South  Chicago.  The  first  half  of  this 
stretch  is  hilly;  it  then  becomes  low  and  marshy.  The  boundary 
between  Indiana  and  Illinois  is  1^  (If)  miles  SE.  of  Calumet. 


•■^aar  ■ffssfijiyj^'^t- 


BHOAL. 


106 


Trail  creek,  a 
I  lake. 

rt  at  the  slifwe 
uter  end  of  the 
tnds  to  the  Hue 
e  eastern  pier, 
original  lengtli 
[  by  the  waves, 
in  approaching 

ejecting  Arom  a 
[  a  breakwater 
t  pier.  These, 
rea  of  40  acres. 


water  and  the 
id  the  width  of 
bter  is  216  feet 
iible  12W  {i^) 
ower  on  a  yeL 
)  entrance. 
States  Engin- 

the  outer  end 
from  the  outer 
Lwater  and  the 
>  feet  above  the 
i,  and  16^  iSeet 

aboat  40  feet 

ring  the  lights 
>tle  open  on  the 

Qtrance  to  the 
rainst  it. 
lake  carves  to 
)t  half  of  this 
The  boundary 
imet. 


ShoaL — A  bar  of  sand  and  gravel  with  5  fathoms  and  less  extends 
northeastward  into  the  lake  for  some  distance.  The  center  of  this  bar 
is  about  6  (7)  miles  SB.  of  Calumet.  The  least  water  is  '  "<  feet  and  is 
found  in  two  detached  patches  IJ  (If)  miles  olfsliore.  N.  .tral  causes 
probably  form  this  bar,  and  as  there  is  apt  to  be  less  water  over  it  than 
shown  on  the  charts,  navigators  are  cautioned  accordingly. 

The  west  shore  of  the  lake  to  Calumet  has  been  described  in  a  pre- 
vious part  of  this  chapter.    Qreen  b&y  will  now  be  described. 


CHAPTER   VI. 


^  OBEEX  BAT, 

Oreen  bay  opens  into  the  northwestern  part  of  lake  Michigan,  and 
has  a  greatest  length  of  102  (117^)  miles  in  a  8W.  ^  S.  and  NB.  ^  N. 
direction  from  the  head  of  Big  Bay  de  Noquette  to  the  entrance  of  Fox 
river.  Its  greatest  breadth,  21  (24)  miles,  is  abreast  of  Bock  Island 
passage  in  a  NW.  J  W.  and  SB.  ^  B.  direction.  Its  entrance,  between 
Detour  point  and  the  point  of  the  peninsula,  in  Portes  des  Morts,  is  25 
(283)  miles  wide.  In  the  entrance  are  numerous  islands  which  divide  it 
into  several  passages,  the  principal  of  which  are  Pov«,fty  Island  and 
Bock  Island  passages  on  the  north  and  Detroit  lalaad  passage  and 
Portes  des  Morts  on  the  south.  These  passages  and  the  islands  have 
been  described  in  the  previous  chapter. 

HiomaAiT. 

Coast — Detour  point,  the  north  entrance  point  of  Oreen  bay,  is  the 
narrow  termination  of  the  peninsula  bounding  Big  Bay  de  Foquette 
on  the  east  The  point  has  shoals  extonviing  from  it  f  mile,  and  the 
shore  of  the  peninsula  to  the  westward  U  the  point  is  connected  by 
shoals  to  Little  and  Big  Summer  islands.  From  Detour  point  the  coast 
trends  4$  (6^)  miles  NW.  to  the  head  of  Sag  bay,  and  from  Sag  bay 
it  trends  north  in  a  bluff  point,  called  Burnt  bluff. 

Big  Bay  de  Noqnette.— A  peninsula  extending  south  from  the 
main  divides  the  north  end  of  Green  bay  into  Big  Bay  de  Noqnette  and 
Little  Bay  de  Noquette.  The  entrance  to  the  Big  bay  between  Burnt 
bluff  and  Peninsula  point  due  west  is  lOy^  (12)  miles.  Stony  and  Pop- 
lar points  further  divide  the  head  of  Big  Bay  de  Noquette;  the  western 
head  is  known  as  Ogontz  bay,  and  is  shoal. 

East  shore.— The  east  shore,  which  has  several  indentations,  has, 
besides  Burnt  bluff.  Middle,  Garden,  and  Jacks  bluffs.  Vessels  navi- 
gating this  portion  of  the  bay  should  keep  close  to  the  westward  of  a 
line  joining  Burnt  and  Garden  bluffis.  On  this  shore  are  South  Biver 
bay,  south  of  Garden  bluff  and  Garden  bay,  between  Garden  bluff  and 
Ansels  point.    Both  these  bays  are  shoal. 

North  shore. — AU  the  north  shore  of  the  bay  ia  shoal  for  some  dis- 
tance, and  between  Stony  and  Indian  points  a  rooky  spit  extends  south- 
ward 6§  (6})  miles.    This  spit  separates  the  deep  water  in  the  east 
head  of  Big  Bay  de  Noquette  from  that  in  Ogontz  bay. 
106 


BOUND   IRLAND — CORONA   SHOAL. 


07 


e  Michigan,  and 
8.  and  NE.  i  N. , 
entrance  of  Fox 
of  Bock  Island 
trance,  between 
des  Morts,  is  25 
i  which  divide  it 
uty  Island  and 
id.  passage  and 
lie  islands  have 


reen  bay,  is  the 
>y  de  iN^oquette 
f  mile,  and  the 
B  connected  by 
*  point  the  coast 
from  Sag  bay 

oath  from  the 
e  Noqnette  and 
between  Burnt 
Stony  and  Pop- 
to;  the  western 

lentations,  has, 
Vessels  navi- 
I  westward  of  a 
>re  South  Biver 
arden  blufT  and 

%l  for  some  dis- 
)  extends  south- 
er in  the  east 


Wast  ahore.— The  west  shore  of  the  bay  is  shoal;  off  St.  Vital  point 
is  St.  Vital  island.  This  island  is  small  and  surrounded  by  shoals, 
which  connect  it  with  the  west  shore  in  all  directions  and  extend 
eastward  ^  mile,  narrowing  the  deep-water  channel  in  Ogontz  bay. 

Ronnd  ialand,  small  and  triangular,  is  2%  (3)  miles  oil'  the  west 
shore  of  the  bay  and  about  midway  between  St.  Vital  and  Ohippewa 
points.  The  island  is  surrounded  by  shoals  which  extend  north  in 
detached  patehes  1}  (If)  miles.  Midway  between  Bound  Island  and 
the  main  is  another  shoal. 

Paninaula  point  is  the  narrower  termination  of  the  peninsula  sep- 
arating Big  and  Little  Noquette  bays.  The  whole  point  is  surrounded 
by  shoals,  wliieh  extend  south  from  the  point  l-^r  (1^)  miles.  This 
shoal  is  rocky,  is  known  as  Peninsula  Point  shoal,  and  has  only  2  feet 
of  water  over  it  f  mile  south  of  the  lighthouse. 

Bnoy. — A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
south  end  of  Peninsula  Point  shoal.  The  passage  between  this  buoy 
and  Eleven-foot  shoal  should  not  be  attempted. 

Light — On  Peninsula  point  from  a  square  tower  at  southern  end  of 
dwelling,  both  yellow  with  red  roofs,  is  shown  a  flashing  white  light 
every  thirty  seconds.  •  The  light  is  41  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and 
visible  11}  (13^)  miles. 

Blavan-foot  ahoal  lies  2  (2^)  miles  S.  by  W.  $  W.  of  Point  Penin- 
snla  light.  It  is  a  detoched  shoal,  least  water  0  feet,  with  deeper  water 
all  around,  but  vessels  should  not  pass  to  the  north  of  the  buoy,  and 
it  is  safest  to  pass  south  of  Eleven-foot  Shoal  lightvessel  before  stand' 
ing  up  Little  Bay  de  Noquette. 

There  is  a  small  spit  with  14  feet  over  it  ^  mile  eastward  of  the 
Eleven-foot  shoal. 

Buoy. — ^A  red  nun  bnoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water  on  the  sonth  side 
of  Eleven  foot  shoal.  A  line  connecting  the  lightvessel  and  Peninsula 
Point  light  passes  over  the  buoy. 

Blavan-foot  Shoal  lightveBsal  is  moored  in  about  60  feet  of  water 
to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Oorona  and  Eleven-foot  shoals. 
The  lightvessel  is  schooner  rigged,  and  has  two  masts,  but  no  bowsprit; 
the  hull  is  painted  black,  with  Eleven-foot  Shoal  in  large  white  let- 
ters on  each  side  and  No.  60  on  the  bows.  A  fixed  white  light  is 
shown  from  the  foremasthead,  40  feet  above  the  bay  level,  and  visible 
11}  (13^)  miles. 

Fog  aignaL — A  6-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  ten  seconds.  If  the  whistle  be  disabled  a  bell 
will  be  rung  by  hand. 

Corona  ahoal  is  2|  (3)  miles  S.  ^  E.  from  Peninsula  Point  light. 
The  shoal  has  its  greatest  extent,  275  yards,  in  a  NNE.  and  SSW. 
direction.    The  least  water,  11  feet,  is  about  100  yards  NE.  of  the  buoy. 

Bnoy. — ^A  red  and  black  horizontal  striped  spar  buoy  is  moored  in 
18  feet,  and  marks  the  southern  point  of  Oorona  shoaL 


106 


uKEEN    BAT. 


Driaoo  ahoal  is  0^  (7^)  miles  8.  |  B.  fh>in  PeniiiHiila  Point  light.  It 
is  nearly  ^  mile  in  extent  Nli).  and  SW.,  and  haa  n  loHHt  depth  of  10  feet. 
From  it«  outlying  jiosition,  and  being  nearly  in  the  track  of  vesHols,  the 
shoal  is  very  dangerous  in  thick  weather,  as  the  soundings  in  the  vicinity 
can  not  be  depend«<d  upon  to  give  warning  of  an  approach. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontal- striped  cau  buoy  is  moored  in  21 
feet  water,  and  marks  the  northeaHtern  i)oint  of  Driw-o  Hhoal. 

Llttla  Bay  do  Noquette. — The  east  shore  of  the  bay  is  comparatively 
steep-to  until  abreast  of  Sand  point  and  Bscanaba.  North  of  this,  and 
as  far  as  ISquaw  point,  shoals  extend  from  the  east  Hhore  and  almost 
half  till  the  bay.  There  is  a  channel  between  Squaw  and  Saunders 
points  with  deep  water,  and  north  of  Saunders  point  there  is  a  good 
landlocked  anchorage  with  ample  water.    The  bead  of  the  bay  is  shoal. 

Shoala  extend  ^  mile  east  of  Sand  point,  and  then  take  a  southerly 
direction  5|  (0^)  miles,  where  they  abruptly  change  direction  to  the 
westward. 

Buoys. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water,  and  marks  the 
end  of  the  shoal  extending  NB.  from  Sand  point. 

A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  water,  and  marks  the  SW.  end 
of  the  shoal  on  the  east  side  of  bay  opposite  Sand  point. 

The  channel  is  between  these  buoys.  A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored 
in  18  feet  water  and  marks  the  eastern  point  of  the  shore  making  out 
from  Saanders  point. 

A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet  water,  and  marks  the  north- 
ern edge  of  the  shoal  making  out  from  Saunders  point. 

Escanaba  is  on  the  west  shore  of  Little  Bay  de  Noquette,  and 
affords  sheltered  anehorage  from  all  bat  soatherly  winds. 

Escanaba  light — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  llt\t  (13)  miles,  is  shown 
44  feet  above  the  bay  level  from  a  square  tower  attached  to  a  white 
dwelling,  both  with  red  roofs.    It  is  near  the  end  of  Sand  point. 

Coast — South  of  Escnnnba,  and  between  It  and  Indian  Town,  Btoals 
extend  off  ^hmre  from  1  (1^)  to  2§  (3)  miles.  SB.  of  Indian  Town  li^^ 
(1^)  miles  is  a  detached  4-foot  shoal.  From  here  to  Oedar  river  the 
ahoals  follow  the  coast  line  at  from  ^  to  f  mile  off,  excepting  at  4  (4i%) 
miles  north  of  Oedar  river,  where  there  is  a  rocky  spit  extending  in  a 
southeasterly  direction  for  nearly  a  mile. 

Whalabaok  aboal  lies  in  the  center  of  Green  bay.  It  extends  NW. 
and  Slii.  lit  (l^)  miles  and  inside  of  ^  mile  wide.  The  shoalest  spot, 
nearly  awash,  is  midway  between  the  ends  (buoys).  A  line  connecting 
Pilot  Island  and  Oedar  liiver  ligb(is  passes  almost  over  the  middle  of 
the  shoal. 

The  soundings  in  the  vicinity  are  very  irregqlar,  and  great  oare  sboald 
be  observed  in  approaching  the  shoal. 

Bnoya — Whaleback  shoal,  east  end,  a  red  i^ar  buoy  in  18  feet  of 
water,  marks  the  southeastern  point  of  Whaleback  shoal. 

Whaleback  shoal,  west  end,  a  black  spar  buoy  in  18  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  northwestern  point. 


Point  light.  It 
(lei)tb  of  10  feet. 
k  of  vessels,  the 
{Hill  tbeviciuitjr 
>aoli. 

is  moored  in  21 
)  Hhoal. 

8  coinimratively 
irtli  of  tbis,  and 
tore  and  almost 
r  and  Saanders 
bbere  is  a  goo<i 
tlie  buy  is  sboal. 
ake  a  southerly 
lirection  to  the 

:,  aud  marks  the 

ks  the  SW.  end 

t. 

>uoy  is  moored 

)re  making  out 

arks  the  nortb- 

Noqaette,  and 

s. 

miles,  is  shown 

ihed  to  a  white 

ad  point. 

ID  Town,  fiboftla 

dian  Town  1^^ 

ledar  river  the 

>ting  at  4  (<K%) 

extending  in  a 

■t  extends  NW. 

sboalest  spot, 

[ine  connecting 

r  the  middle  of 

eat  care  sboald 

y  in  18  feet  of 

feet  of  water, 


CEDAR   RIVER — MENOMINEE. 


109 


ss^m. 


Cedar  RiT«r,  on  the  wuHteni  shore  of  Green  bay,  is  at  the  month  of 
Cedar  river. 

The  entrance  to  the  river  is  between  piers  2()0  feet  ai)art,  rnnning 
nearly  H8K.  and  NNW.  Work  was  suspended  by  tlie  (lovernment  in 
1885  aii<l  has  not  been  resumed  since,  though  private  parties  h'lve  done 
some  d  edging. 

In  April,  1894,  there  was  a  narrow  channel  with  a  governing  depth 
of  14  feet. 

Cadar  Rivar  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13^  (15^)  miles,  is 
shown  06  feet  above  the  bay  level  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal 
tower  near  the  outer  end  of  the  east  pier. 

Cedar  River  range. — The  front  light,  fixed  red  and  21  feet  above 
the  bay  level,  is  showi  trom  a  lantern  on  the  south  corner  of  Cedar 
Rivet  light  tower. 

The  rear  light,  fixed  red  and  20^  feet  above  the  bay  level,  is  600  feet 
from  the  front  light  and  shown  from  a  post  attached  to  »n  elevated  walk 
near  the  light  tower. 

Rock.— A  rock  with  9  feet  of  water  over  it  lies  555  yards  S.  4  W.  (S. 
3°  W.)  from  the  light  tower. 

Bnoy. — A  black  spar  buoy  in  9  feet  of  water  marks  this  rock. 

Bntranoe  shoals  are  i  mile  from  shore,  with  11  feet  of  water  on  the 
outer  one. 

Directioiis. — Care  is  necessary,  as  there  are  unmarked  shoals  on  each 
side  of  the  range  in  entering.  By  keeping  Cedar  liiver  li^ht  ahead 
bearing  NW.  J  W.  (N.  48°  W.)  until  abreast  the  black  buoy  and  then 
bringing  the  range  on,  a  vessel  will  avoid  the  outer  shoals. 

Coast. — From  Cedar  river  the  west  shore  of  the  bay  trends  21^  (25) 
miles  SW.  by  3.  to  the  mouth  of  the  Menominee  river. 

Shoal  water  extends  |  mile  from  shore.  At  4^  (5J)  miles  below  Cedar 
river  there  is  a  10-foot  spot  a  mile  from  shore,  and  3^  (4)  miles  farther 
to  the  SW.  there  is  a  15-foot  shoal  about  the  same  distance  off. 

From  3^  (4)  to  5^  (6)  miles  north  of  Menominee  light,  and  west  of  the 
southern  part  of  Chamb^s  island,  are  several  detached  spots  about  a 
mile  offshore,  the  northern  one  having  12  feet  and  the  southern  14  feet 
of  water. 

At  2  (2^)  miles  MW.  of  Menominee  light  and  4  mile  from  shore  is  Bum 
island,  small,  with  tv  9-foot  shoal  extending  J  mile  to  the  SE.  and  j  mile 
from  shore. 

From  here  to  Menominee  light,  shoal  water  makes  out  J  mile.  South 
and  SE.  of  the  light,  flats  with  but  one  foot  over  them  extend  1^  (2) 
miles  from  shore. 

Chambers  island  and  light    See  page  115. 

Menoniinae  is  on  the  north  side  of  Menominee  river,  the  towns  of 
Marinette  and  Menekannee  being  on  the  south  bank. 

The  river  is  the  boundary  between  Michigan  and  Wisconsin,  Menomi- 
nee being  in  Michigan  and  the  two  other  towns  in  Wisconsin.  The 
river  is  wide  at  its  mouth,  bat  shallow. 


^.MmmmmammMm 


ms;iti?}!f^^wi'twfSimsMmmsmm: 


:IJ 


110 


GREEN    BAY. 


Good  anchorage  can  be  found  outside  and  NW.  of  the  light. 

The  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  between  piers,  rnnuiug  nearly  ENE. 
and  WSW.,  400  feet  apart. 

There  is  (January,  1896)  a  channel  200  feet  wide  and  15  feet  deep 
between  the  piers. 

Connecting  with  the  harbor  channel,  at  the  shore  end  of  the  north 
pier,  for  a  distance  of  6,800  feet  up  the  river,  the  channel  had  a  width  of 
about  200  feet  and  a  depth  of  14  feet.  Thence  up  the  river,  a  distance 
of  about  2,400  feet,  the  width  was  about  100  feet  and  depth  13  feet. 

Menominee  Pierhead  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  ll^tr  (12$) 
miles,  is  sliown  34  feet  above  the  bay  level  from  an  octagonal,  white, 
pyramidal  tower  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier. 

Shoals. — There  are  extensive  shoals  to  the  southeastward  of  the 
light. 

Directions. — When  oft'  the  entrance  bring  the  light  to  bear  SW.  and 
stand  in  between  the  piers,  keeping  in  mid-channel.  If  passing  the 
bridge  use  the  north  draw. 

WISCONSIN. 

Green  island  is  a  small  island  4^  (4f )  miles  SE.  by  E.  from  Menomi- 
nee light.  It  is  i  mile  long  by  4  mile  wide.  The  island  is  wooded  and 
surrounded  by  reefs  extending  §  mile  to  the  westward  and  ^  mile  to 
the  SE. 

Green  Island  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^^  (14f )  miles,  is 
shown  55  feet  above  the  bay  level  from  a  square  tower  on  a  yellow 
dwelling  near  the  SE.  point  of  Green  island. 

Coast — Below  Menominee  the  west  shore  of  Green  bay  is  generally 
low,  consisting  of  flats  and  oflSying  shoals  of  great  extent,  while  the 
east  shore  is  bolder  and  often  steep-to,  with  numerous  small  oftlying 
islands,  reefs,  rocks,  and  shoals. 

Peshtlgo  shoals,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Peshtigo  river,  are  from  1-^ 
(Ij)  miles  wide  at  Peshtigo  point  to  f  mile  at  their  extremity,  2^  (3) 
miles  SE.  from  the  point.  There  is  4  feet  water  near  the  extremity  of 
the  point. 

Bnoy. — A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  21  feet  water  off  the  extreme 
SE.  point  of  Peshtigo  shoal. 

Peshtigo  River  directionB. — ^Yessels  should  not  atL<^mpt  to  pass 
between  the  bnoy  and  the  pointj  and  if  bound  to  Peshtigo  river  from 
the  northward,  should  pass  the  buoy  f  mile  before  heading  for  the 
mouth  of  the  river. 

Coast — From  the  south  point  of  Peshtigo  Biver  entrance  the  coast 
turns  abruptly  west  for  7  (8)  miles  and  then  south  3-^  (4^)  miles  to  the 
mouth  of  the  Oconto  river,  tae  bight  thus  formed  being  filled  by  a  shoal 
flat.  Between  Oconto  and  Pensaukee  rivers,  shoals  extend  off  shore  3 
(3^^,  miles;  Pensaukee  shoal  off  the  mouth  of  the  river  having  only  5 
feet  water  at  its  outer  end. 

From  Pensaukee  point  to  the  head  of  Green  bay  the  western  shore  is 


f 


GREEN   BAY    CITY. 


Ill 


he  light. 

iig  nearly  ENB. 

Dd  15  fleet  deep 

id  of  the  north 
1  had  a  width  of 
'iver,  a  distacce 
epth  13  feet. 
iHible  11-iV  (12f ) 
ctagonal,  white, 

astward  of  the 

o  bear  8W.  and 
If  passing  the 


3.  from  Menomi- 
[  is  wooded  and 
1  and  ^  mile  to 

s  (14|)  miles,  is 
er  on  a  yellow 

ay  is  generally 

tent,  while  the 

small  offlying 

r,  are  from  1^^ 
remity,  2^^  (3) 
le  extremity  of 

ff  the  extreme 

L<^mpt  to  pass 
tigo  river  from 
sading  for  the 

ance  the  coast 
^)  miles  to  the 
iUed  by  a  shoal 
3nd  off  shore  3 
having  only  5 

estern  shore  is 


lined  with  rooky  flats  making  out  for  If  (2)  to  2 ,%  (3)  miles.  At  7  t^  (9) 
miles  from  the  head  of  the  bay  Little  Tail  point,  a  narrow  detached 
point,  extends  1  (l^)  mile  from  shore,  and  3^  (4)  miles  north  of  Fox 
Biver  entrance  Long  Tail  point  extends  2  (2^)  miles  to  the  SE.,  with  a 
lighthouse  on  the  outer  end. 

Long  Tail  Point  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  (15)  miles,  is 
shown  56  feet  above  the  bay  level,  from  a  square  tower  on  a  white 
dwelling.    It  is  on  the  south  end  of  Long  Tail  point. 

Fog  signal — A  bell  struck  one  blow,  by  machinery,  every  ten 
seconds. 

Long  Tail  shoaL — Shoals  extend  a  mile  to  the  south  and  east  f^om 
this  point  as  well  as  northerly  along  the  coast. 

Buoy. — A  red  can  buoy  in  16  feet  of  water  marks  the  south  point  of 
the  shoal  off  Long  Tail  point,  and  is  the  first  buoy  as  the  mouth  of  the 
Fox  river  is  approached. 

Oreen  Bay  city  lies  at  the  south  end  of  Green  bay,  at  the  mouth  of 
the  Fox  river,  a  very  important  stream.  The  town  of  De  Fere  is  about 
4^  (5)  miles  above  Green  Bay  city  on  the  same  river. 

The  head  of  Green  bay  is  full  of  shoals,  but  a  channel  has  been 
dredged  and  revetted  up  to  the  city,  cutting  through  Grassy  island. 
The  project  calls  for  a  channel  16  feet  deep,  200  feet  wide,  and  16,500 
feet  long. 

In  1895  a  channel  100  feet  wide  and  16  feet  deep  was  completed  for 
its  entire  length.  In  November,  1895,  the  channel  had  an  actual  depth 
of  14i  feet. 

rJjrasBy  Island  Upper  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  11^  (13) 
miles,  is  shown  37  feet  above  bay  level,  from  a  white  tower  on  the 
piling  at  the  south  end  of  the  east  side  of  the  new  cut  through  Grassy 
Island. 

Grassy  Island  Lower  light.— A  fixed  white  ight,  visible  lOg  (12J) 
miles,  is  shown  30  feet  above  bay  level,  teom  a  white  tower  on  the  piling 
at  the  north  end  of  the  east  side  of  the  new  cut  through  Grassy  island. 

The  keeper's  dwelling  is  on  the  island  and  between  the  lights. 

Cantion. — The  distance  between  the  two  latter  lights  is  676  feet. 
They  are  not  range  lights ;  if  used  as  such  they  will  lead  ashore.  They 
only  mark  the  position  of  the  piling. 

Sable  Point  buoy. — A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  15  feet  water 
and  marks  the  end  of  the  »yit  which  extends  in  a  westerly  direction  3 
(3^)  miles  from  Sable  point. 

Buoys. — The  following  buoys  mark  the  eastern  side  of  the  New 
channel  at  the  entrance  to  Fox  river: 

A  black,  second-class  nun  buoy,  in  17^  feet  of  water,  on  the  following 
bearings:  Grassy  Island  lights  in  range  SSW.  ^  W.  (S.  24^  W.),  distant 
2,666  yards. 

A  black  spar  buoy,  in  14  feet  of  water,  on  the  following  bearings : 
Grassy  Island  lights  in  range  SSW.  |  W.  (S.  24°  W.),  distant  2,160 
yards. 


112 


aBEEN   BAY. 


A  black  spar  bnoy,  in  14  feet  of  water,  <m  the  following  bearings: 
Grassy  Island  lights  in  range  SSW.  ^  W.  (B.  24  W.),  distant  1,580 
yards. 

The  cut  into  Green  bay  is  marked  by  eight  even-numbered  red  spar 
bnoys,  all  of  which  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  entering. 

The  west  line  of  channel  of  Fox  river  between  Green  Bay  city  and 
De  Pere  is  marked  by  twelve  even-numbered  spar  buoys. 

Directions.— From  the  point  a  mile  SE.  (S.  45°  E.)  of  Long  Tail  Point 
lighthouse  steer  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  62°  w.),  leaving  Long  Tail 
Point  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand  close-to,  and  when  Sable  Point  buoy 
bears  a  little  abaft  the  beam  steer  S.  |  W.  (S.  2°  W.)  for  the  outer 
entrance  buoy  of  the  new  out;  then  as  this  buoy  is  approached,  paM 
eastward  of  it  and  close-to,  steering  SSW.  (S.  22°  W.),  which  course 
will  lead  £»ir  into  the  cut.  Follow  the  buoys  until  the  deep  water  at 
the  month  of  the  river  is  reached  and  the  inner  buoy  is  passed;  then 
take  mid'channel  for  Green  Bay  city. 

NoTB. — NE.  gales  usually  raise  the  water  at  the  mouth  of  the  Fox 
river  fix)m  1  to  2  feet  and  SW.  galea  lower  it  about  the  same. 

Ooaet — All  along  the  south  end  of  Green  bay  and  the  eastern  shore 
as  far  as  Bed  banks,  a  prominent  bluff,  is  shoaL  Between  Bed  banks 
and  Bed  Biver  bluff  there  are  no  shoals  outside  the  distance  §  mile, 
excepting  a  15  to  18  foot  ofBying  patch  2^  (3^)  miles  NE.  of  Bed  banks 
and  a  mile  offshwe;  beyond  this  to  Little  Sturgeon  bay  the  east  shore 
is  steep-to. 

Little  Sturgeon  bay  is  a  small  bay,  open  to  the  northward  and 
shoal.    Just  east  of  the  bay  is  a  shoal  bight. 

Snake  island  is  off  the  east  point  of  this  bight.  It  is  a  small  cir- 
cular island  surrounded  by  shoals.  From  the  bottom  oi  the  bight  a 
long  shoal  spit  extends  northward,  and  there  are  several  detached 
shoals  about  1^  (1^)  miles  offshore  betwei  n  Snake  island  uad  Sher- 
wood point. 

Caution. — Vessels  from  the  southward,  "raund  into  Sturgeon  bay* 
should  give  this  part  of  the  coast  a  bertii  of  1}  (2)  milee,  and  not 
change  course  into  Sturgeon  bay  until  Shorwood  Point  light  bears  SE. 
}  S.  (S.  3t>o  E.),  or  to  the  southward  of  this  bearing. 

Sturgeon  bay  is  of  importance  as  having  at  its  head  the  canal  lead- 
ing into  lake  Michigan.  This  bay  runs  SSB.  and  affords  good  anchor- 
age, and  is  the  re^  harbor  of  refuge  to  which  the  artifloial  lutfbor  and 
canal  (on  the  west  shore  of  lake  Michigan)  give  access. 

The  town  of  Sturg'on  Bay  is  on  the  east  shore  near  the  head  of  the 
bay  about  4^  (6)  miles  from  the  mouth  aad  3^  (4)  miles  from  the  Sfl. 
entrance  of  the  canaL 

A  high  hill,  called  Stevens  hill,  rises  back  of  the  town.  At  least  18 
feet  of  water  will  be  found  in  the  center  of  the  bay. 

Stnrgaon  Bay  Oanal  UghtB  are  under  the  control  of  tho  United 
States  Lightlioase  Board,  and  wre  as  follows: 


"^■' '■"..# 


STURGEON   BAY. 


113 


whig  bearings; 
I,  distaut  1,580 

ibered  red  spar 

entering. 

n  Bay  city  and 

8. 

!iOng  Tail  Point 
ring  Long  Tail 
^ble  Point  buoy 
I  for  the  outer 
proached,  paJM 
I,  which  eourae 
deep  water  at 
i  passed;  then 

nth  of  the  Fox 

mme. 

3  eastern  shore 

len  Bed  banks 

stance  ^  mile, 

.  of  Bed  banks 

the  east  shore 

lorthward  and 

is  a  small  dr- 
of  the  bight  a 
reral  detached 
»nd  Mid  Slier- 

Sturgeon  bay, 
niles,  and  not 
ight  bears  SE. 

;h«  canal  lead* 
t  good  anohor- 
al  harbor  and 

le  head  of  the 
from  the  SJB. 

I.    At  least  IS 

of  tho  United 


Northwest  entrance,  No.  2,  light— A  tixed  white  lantern  light,  11 
feet  above  the  bay  level,  on  top  of  a  square,  pyramidal,  nnpainted 
wooden  structure,  the  upper  part  inclosed,  ou  the  southwesterly  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  canal  from  Sturgeon  bay. 

Northwest  entrance  to  cut,  No.  3,  light— A  fixed  white  lantern 
light,  11  feet  above  the  bay  level,  on  top  of  a  square,  nnpainted 
wooden  skeleton  structure,  the  upper  part  inclosed,  on  the  south- 
westerly side  of  the  entrance  to  the  cut  in  Sturgeon  bay  leading  to 
the  canal,  and  4,50U  feet  northwesterly  from  light  No.  2. 

Southeast  entrance,  No.  1,  light — A  fixed  white  lantern  light,  15 
feet  above  lake  level,  on  top  of  a  square,  pyramidal,  inclosed  wooden 
structure,  painted  red,  on  the  northeasterly  side  of  the  entrance  to  the 
canal  from  the  harbor  of  refuge,  Lake  Michigan,  and  6,()54  feet  south- 
easterly from  light  No.  2. 

Sherwood  Point  light— A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  red  flash 
every  minute,  visible  13^  (15J)  miles,  is  shown  61  feet  above  the  bay 
level  from  a  square  tower  attached  to  the  north  end  of  the  dwelling, 
both  of  red  brick. 

Fog  signal — A  bell  on  Sherwood  point  is  struck  by  machinery  a 
single  blow  every  twelve  seconds. 

Dnnlap  Reef  range.— The  front  light  is  fixed  white,  and  is  shown 
from  a  red  tower  attached  to  a  white  house  with  a  red  roof.  It  is  visi- 
ble 9^  (lOf )  miles  and  is  18  feet  above  the  bay  level. 

The  rear  light,  also  fixed  white,  is  shown  from  a  square  tower  on  a 
white  dwelling,  both  with  red  roofs.  It  is  visible  11^  (13^)  miles  and  is 
30  feet  above  the  bay  level. 

The  lights  are  on  Dunlap  reef,  and  are  680  feet  apart  on  a  range  SSE. 
i  B.  (8.  28°  E.).  They  guide  through  a  narrow  channel  abreast  of 
Hills  point. 

Shoals. — ^There  are  numerous  shoals  in  this  bay,  but  they  are  marked 
by  buoys  and  lights. 

Quarry  Point  shoal  is  off  the  entrance  to  Sawyers  harbor  (south  of 
Sherwood  point);  there  is  but  6  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Buoy. — ^A  red  spar  buoy  marks  the  east  side. 

Hills  Point  shoal. — Shoal  water  here  extends  nearly  across  the  bay 
A*om  the  east  shore,  leaving  a  narrow  channel  between  it  and  Hills 
point,  and  is  marked  by  the  following  buoys:    . 

Hills  point  (outside),  a  black  spar  buoy  (No.  1)  in  15  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  western  edge  of  the  above  shoal. 

Hills  point,  a  black  nuu  buoy  (No.  3)  in  14  feet  of  water,  marks  the 
western  edge  of  the  same  shoal. 

Hills  point  (inside),  a  black  spar  buoy  (No.  6)  in  14  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  SW.  point  of  the  same  shoal. 

Dnnlap  Reef  or  Biliddle  Qronnd  shoaL— This  shoal  lies  in  mid- 
chanuel  NW.  of  the  town  and  west  of  Stevens  hill,    Dunlap  Beet 
lights  are  ou  this  middle  ground. 
1944— No.  108 8 


114 


OREEN  BAT. 


BnoyB.— Middle  ground,  (NW.  end),  a,  rod  and  black  horizontally 
striped  spar  buoy,  marks  the  NW.  end  of  the  shoal. 

West  channel,  No.  1,  a  black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water,  marks 
the  west  point  of  the  middle  ground,  and  is  a  guide  through  the  West 
channel. 

East  channel,  No.  2,  a  red  spar  buoy  ;u  18  feet  of  water,  marks  the 
NE.  edge  of  tiie  middle  ground,  and  is  «  guide  throDgh  the  Bast  ^-.hanuel. 

Middle  ground  (SE.  end),  a  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  buoy, 
marks  the  SE.  point  of  the  middle  ground. 

Directions. — A  vessel  can  stand  toward  the  bay  with  Sherwood 
Point  light  ahead  bearing  anywhere  betw^een  8.  by  W.  (8. 11°  W.)  and 
SE.  ^  8.  (8.  39°  E.).  When  about  a  mile  from  the  light,  steer  so  as  to 
round  the  point  at  about  4  mile  ott",  and  then  south,  passing  close  east 
of  Qtiariy  Point  buoy.  Bring  the  Dunlap  Reef  lights  in  range,  and 
stand  on  past  the  black  buoys  off  Hills  poiut  (these  mark  the  east  side 
of  the  channel). 

When  nearly  up  to  the  Middle  Ground  buoy  (NW.  end),  open  the 
lights,  and  pass  to  the  eastward  of  them  through  the  drawbridge;  then 
keep  nearly  in  mid-channel  until  the  entrance  to  the  canal  is  reache<1. 

There  is  good  wat«r  in  the  channel  to  the  westward  of  Dunlap  reef, 
but  the  turn  around  the  southern  end  is  too  sharp  for  vessels  bound 
through  the  canal. 

Caution. — Vessels  firom  the  canal  must  remember  that  the  channel 
through  the  bay  is  bnoyed  in  from  Green  bay;  therefore,  when  passing 
out  through  Sturgeon  bay  to  Green  bay,  the  red  buoys  should  be  left 
to  port  and  the  black  buoys  to  starboard. 

Monument  point  is  6%  (7§;  miles  NNE.  of  Sturgeon  bay,  and  Egg 
harbor  is  3 J  {^)  miles  beyond.  Monument  point  is  shoal  NE.  and  8  W. 
for  nearly  J  mile,  and  there  are  several  oflQying  shoals  along  this 
stretch  of  coast. 

Monument  shoal,  with  a  least  depth  of  8  feet,  lies  1^  (If)  miles  SE. 
of  Monument  point.  The  shoal  is  about  600  yards  long  ENB.  and 
WSW.  There  are  7-foot  shoals  closer  to  shore,  8.  aud  NNE.  of 
Monument  shoal. 

Buoy.— A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  to  mark  the  roost  westerly  point 
of  Monument  shoal. 

Caution.— Between  Sturgeon  bay  and  Egg  harbor  keep  at  least  1} 
(If)  miles  offshore  west  of  Monument  Shoal  buoy,  and  do  not  head  in 
for  Egg  harbor  until  3  (3^)  miles  beyond  the  buoy. 

Egg  harbor,  10^  (12)  miles  NE.  of  Sturgeon  bay,  is  j^  mile  wide  by 
f  mile  deep.    It  is  a  good  harbor  except  in  N.  and  NW.  gales. 

Hat  island.- The  coast  between  Egg  and  Eagle  harbors  is  steep-to, 
except  Fish  Creek  bay,  Which  is  shoal.  Hat  island  is  NNW.  of  Egg 
harbor  and  2,^  (2S)  miles  off  shore.  Shoals  extend  ^  mile  E.  and  SE. 
from  it. 

Detached  shoaL— A  detached  shoal  4  mile  square  lies  one  mile 
88W.  of  Hat  islaii4. 


« 


EAOLE  BLUFF — EAQLB  HARBOR. 


115 


lack  horizontally 

of  water,  marks 
trough  the  WcHt 

irater,  marks  the 
he  East  ^-.haiiMel. 
illy  striped  buoy, 

with  Sherwood 
(8.  no  W.)  and 
ht,  steer  so  as  to 
nssing  close  cast 
ts  in  range,  and 
»rk  the  east  side 

^  end),  open  the 
rawbridge;  then 
ianal  is  readied, 
of  Dunlap  reef, 
»r  vessels  bound 

hat  the  channel 
re,  when  passing 
8  should  be  left 

n  bay,  and  Egg 
al  NE.  and  SW. 
loals  along  this 

i  (If)  miles  BE. 
long  ENE.  and 

i.  and  KNE.  of 

it  westerly  point 

^eepat  least!} 
do  not  head  in 

j^  mile  wide  by 


bors  is  steep-to, 

NNW.  of  Egg 

mile  E.  and  SE. 

B  lies  one  mile 


Bagle  Bluff  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  l^  (16^)  miles,  is 
shown  76  feet  above  the  bay  level  from  a  square  towor  attached  to  the 
NW.  corner  of  a  dwelling  on  the  extreme  westerly  point  of  Eagle  bluff. 
Both  buildings  are  yellow,  with  red  roofs. 

Here  the  coast  is  dangerous  on  account  of  the  SE.  shoals  from  Cham- 
bers island  and  the  Strawberry  islands  with  their  shoals. 

The  Strawberry  Island  group  consists  of  three  or  four  islands,  the . 
aoatheru  one  being  the  largest.    They  are  connected  by  shoals  with 
sevenU.  small  detached  shoals  to  the  south.    With  the  shoalb  the  g^oup 
is  2^^-  (3)  miles  north  and  south  and  1  (1^)  mile  wide. 

Buoys. — Strawberry  channel,  SE.,  a  red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of 
water,  marks  the  SB.  end  of  this  group.    Pass  close  to  the  buoy. 

Strawberry  channel,  NE.,  a  red  spar  buoy  in  24  feet  of  water,  marks 
the  NE.  end  of  the  group. 

Chambers  island  lies  near  the  center  of  Green  bay.  The  east  and 
west  sides  of  the  island  extend  nearly  north  and  south,  the  east  side 
being  34  (3f)  and  the  west  side  If  (2)  miles  long. 

A  prominent  point  forms  the  NE.  end.  There  is  a  lake  back  of  it. 
There  are  1  wo  points  at  the  N  W.  end,  the  lighthouse  being  on  the  most 
northern  one. 

A  hill  rises  back  of  the  lightiiouse,  with  another  to  the  SE. 

The  south  side  is  almost  a  straight  line,  trending  2}  (2f )  miles  SE.  by 
E.  4  E.,  forming  a  long,  sharp  point  at  the  intersection  with  the  east  side. 

The  island  is  wooded,  and  much  of  its  coast  line  consists  of  low  bluffs. 

Chambers  Island  light — A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash 
every  minute,  visible  13 ,%  (16)  miles,  is  shown  68  feet  above  the  bay 
level  firom  an  octagonal  tower  on  the  NW.  corner  of  a  dwelling,  both 
being  yellow,  on  the  northern  point  of  the  NW.  end  of  the  island. 

Shoals. — ^A  reef  extends  f  mile  from  the  north  point,  and  the  bay  on 
the  north  side  is  full  of  shoals,  extending  f  mile  from  shore. 

Standing  along  the  west  side  of  the  island,  shoal  water  extends  about 
}  mile  from  shore.  Off  the  SW.  point  a  narrow  spit,  with  16  tu  17  feet 
of  water  on  it>,  makes  out  1  (1|)  mile  west. 

There  are  no  shoals  on  the  south  shore  more  than  4  mile  from  shore. 

A  spit  If  (2)  miles  long,  with  8  feet  least  wat<ei',  1^  (1^)  miles  from 
shore,  makes  out  from  the  SE.  point  in  the  prolongation  of  the  south 
shore.  Shoal  water  extends  f  mile  from  the  east  shore,  and  about 
midway  is  a  detached  14-foot  spot  1  (1^)  mile  from  shore. 

Caution. — Do  not  pass  between  Chambers  island  and  the  Straw- 
berries. 

Horseshoe  island  lies  off  the  entrance  to  Engle  harbor  }  mile  NE. 
of  Eagle  bluff.  The  shoals  around  the  island  do  not  extend  more  than 
}  mile  from  it. 

Bagle  harbor  is  eastward  of  Eagle  bluff,  and  affords  good  anchorage 
except  in  N.  or  NW.  gales. 

Excepting  the  head  of  the  bay,  off  the  town  of  Ephraim,  where 
BhofUs  extend  |  mile  firom  shore,  the  shore  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile. 


116 


OBEEN  BAT. 


Sister  bay,  next  NB.  of  Eagle  harbor,  is  open  to  the  north  and 
west.  Its  shores  are  steepto,  but  it  has  a  15foot  shoal  in  the  middle 
of  its  entrance. 

Sistor  shoals  lie  off  the  south  point  of  Sister  bay.  They  consist 
of  tliree  small  shoals  with  3  feet  over  them. 

Sister  islands  are  off  the  north  point  of  Sister  bay.  They  are  very 
small,  and  have  shoals  extending  I  mile  N  W.  and  SB.  and  i  mile  wide. 
They  are  f  mile  from  shore,  but  a  reef  extends  from  shore  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  islands  for  half  this  distance,  rendering  the  channel  between 
unsafe. 

Horseshoe  reefs  are  2^  (3)  miles  westward  of  Sister  islands.  They 
consist  of  two  shoal  patches  of  2  feet  and  one  of  16  feet. 

Buoy.— A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  36  feet  water  J  mile  eastward! 
of  the  northern  end  of  Horseshoe  reefs.  Vessels  must  pass  eastward  of 
this  buoy. 

Sister  bluff,  steep-to,  is  100  feet  high,  and  is  the  southern  entrance 
of  Ellison  bay. 

Ellison  bay  is  open  to  the  N.  and  NW.  Its  shores  are  steep-to,  and 
it  affords  protection  from  south  and  east  winds. 

Death  Door  bluff  is  theNW.  extreme  of  the  long  i)euiusnla  separat- 
ing Green  bay  from  lake  Michigan.  It  is  steep-to,  as  is  all  the  north 
coast  of  the  peninsula. 

Hedgehog  harbor,  between  Death  Door  blufi'  and  Tabid  bluff,  the 
north  point  of  the  peninsula,  affords  anchorage  and  protection  fk*om 
south  winds.  From  Table  bluff  the  ]SE.  shore  of  the  peninsula  curves 
around  to  the  eastward  and  south,  is  high,  and  forms  the  south  shore 
of  the  Fortes  des  Morts,  which  has  been  described  in  the  previous 
chapter. 


*mtm 


i  liJi^iTiT'ir'iyf'"  ■''^^^^^" ''  ''^'''"  ■ 


9  the  north  and 
•al  in  the  middle 


yr.    They  consist 

.  They  are  very 
and  i  mile  wide. 
Iiore  in  the  direo- 
ohanuel  between 

)r  islands.  They 
et. 

i  mile  eastward 
pass  eastward  of 

mthem  entrance 

are  steep-to,  and 

miusnla  separat- 
is  all  the  north 

Tabid  bluff,  the 
protection  from 
peninsula  carves 
I  the  south  shore 
in  the  previous 


CHAPTER  VII. 

liAKE  HURON. 

Lake  Huron  is  192  (221)  miles  long  from  Spectacle  reef  to  St.  Clair 
river,  and  85  (98)  miles  long  on  the  forty-fifth  parallel  abreast  of  Thun- 
der bay.  It  has  a  maximum  depth  of  750  feet  and  an  altitude  above  the 
sea  of  581.28  feet. 

The  north  and  NE.  shores  of  lake  Huron  are  mostly  composed  of 
sandstone  and  limestone,  aud  where  metamorpbic  rocks  are  found  the 
surface  is  broken  and  hilly,  rising  to  elevations  of  600  feet  or  more  above 
the  lake,  unlike  in  this  respect  the  southern  shores  skirting  the  penin- 
sula of  Michigan  and  southwestern  Ontario,  which  are  comparatively 
flat  and  of  great  fertility.  Georgian  bay,  in  tlie  nortlieastern  part  of  the 
lake,  lies  entirely  within  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  while  Thunder  bay 
on  the  west  and  Saginaw  bay  on  the  SW.  are  in  the  State  of  Michigan. 
The  chief  tributaries  of  the  lake  on  the  United  States  aide  are  Thunder 
Bay  river,  the  An  Sable,  and  the  Saginaw.  On  the  Canadian  side  are 
the  French  river  from  lake  Nipissing,  the  Severn  from  lake  Simcoe,  the 
Muskoka,  and  the  Nottawnsaga,  all  emptying  into  Georgian  bay. 

HABBOBS  OF  BEFUaS. 

Sand  Beach,  60  (57^)  miles  northward  of  the  St.  Clair  river,  on  the 
Michigan  side,  is  the  only  artificial  harbor  of  refuge  on  the  lake  on 
the  American  side.    Twenty -one  feet  can  be  taken  in. 

Goderich,  Canada,  E.  by  S.  from  Sand  Beach,  is  also  a  harbor  of 
refhge,  but  only  for  vessels  drawing  less  than  16  feet. 

NAVIGATION. 

As  a  rule  navigation  opens  in  the  middle  of  April  and  closes  the 
middle  of  December.    See  page  6. 

DANOBBS. 

The  outlying  dangers,  principally  at  the  east  entrance  to  the  Strait 
of  Mackinac,  have  been  described.  There  are  no  other  dangers  in  the 
lake,  excepting  those  in  the  different  bays  or  near  the  shore  line.  These 
will  be  described  as  met  with  in  the  description  of  the  coast. 

THE  OOAST. 

The  north  shore  of  the  lake  from  Detour  point  westward  is  described 
in  Chapter  III,  Strait  of  Mnckinao.  The  routes  from  Detour  point  are 
given  in  the  same  chapter,  as  also  is  a  description  of  Cheboygan. 

117 


118 


LAKE  HUBON. 


WEST  SHOBB. 

Coast — From  Gheboygnn  to  Nine-mile  point  the  const  trends  ESE. 
for  8f  (10)  uiiies,  and  can  be  approached  to  f  mile.  The  coast  tlien 
changes  direction  to  SE.  by  S.  for  G^  (7^)  uiilcs  to  the  NW.  point  of 
Hammond  bay. 

Hammond  bay  is  5^  (6)  miles  wide  between  its  NW.  point  and 
Forty-mile  point,  and  If  (2)  miles  deep.  There  are  no  dangers,  and  it 
a£fordb  shelter  from  till  winds  ft-om  E.  to  NW.  by  way  of  south.  The 
Oqneoc  river  empties  into  this  bay. 

Life  saving  station  at  Forty-mile  point. 

From  Forty-mile  point  the  coast  trends  5^  (6)  miles  east  and  5|  (6) 
miles  SE.  to  the  month  of  the  Trout  river,  eastward  of  which  is 
Bogers  City. 

Rogers  City  has  an  open  roadstead.  There  are  three  piers,  600  fleet 
apart,  at  which  wharfage  is  charged  at  the  rati)  of  50  cents  per  ton. 
There  are  no  tugs  or  pilots. 

Display  station. — The  United  States  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  at  Bogers  Gity. 

Directions. — The  center  wharf  has  the  best  water.  Bring  this 
wharf  to  bear  W^SW.  ^  W.  (8.  73°  W.)  and  run  in  for  it. 

At  3^  (4)  miles  eastward  of  Bogers  City  is  the  mouth  of  the  Swan 
river,  which  ofibrs  shelter  for  small  craft  in  all  southerly  winds,  and 
just  beyond  is  Adams  point,  where  the  coast  again  trends  southwest- 
ward  to  the  peninsula  of  Fresque  Be.  A  mile  SE.  of  Adams  point  is 
a  4-foot  shoal. 

Presqne  He  peninsula  is  1^  (1^)  miles  long  NW.  by  N.  and  SE. 
by  S.  Shoals  extend  from  both  sides  of  the  peninsula  for  over  |  mile, 
and  nearly  ^  mile  east  of  the  old  light  tower,  on  the  Honth  i^oint  of  the 
island,  is  only  12  feet  of  water.  The  bay  westward  of  Fresque  Ue 
affords  shelter  from  southerly  winds,  but  the  bottom  is  of  rock.  Near 
the  north  end  of  the  peninsula  is  a  light. 

Light — ^A  fixed  white  light,  visible  17^  (10|)  miles  in  clear  weather, 
near  the  north  end  of  the  peninsula,  is  shown  IL'3  feet  above  the  lake 
level  from  a  conical  white  tower  100  feet  high,  connected  with  a  yellow 
dwelling  by  a  covered  way. 

It  marks  the  turning  point  when  bound  through  the  Strait  of 
Mackinac. 

Fog  signal — A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
followed  by  silent  intervals  of  twenty-flve  seconds. 

The  fog-signal  house  is  on  the  beach  ^  mile  N.  by  W.  of  the  light 

Fresque  De  harbor,  south  of  the  peninsula,  forms  a  snug  anchorage 
for  small  vessels.  A  bar  with  14  feet,  greatest  depth,  closes  the  har- 
bor; inside  the  bar,  in  the  center  of  the  harbor,  is  a  space  ^  mile  in 
diameter  of  20  feet  depth;  the  rest  of  the  bay  is  shoal. 

ShoaL— There  is  a  9-foot  shoal  1,OOU  fards  E.  f  S.  (S.  82°  E.)  from 
the  old  light  tower. 


PRERQITE    ILE   HARBOR. 


119 


lonst  trends  ESE. 

The  (;oast  tUeii 

the  NW.  polut  of 

i  NW.  point  and 
10  dun{]fer8,  and  it 
ly  of  soath.    The 


B  east  and  5|  (6) 
rard  of  which  is 

ree  piers,  600  fleet 
60  cents  per  ton. 

reaa  has  a  spsoial 

hter.     Bring  this 
it. 

onth  of  the  Swan 
tUci-ly  winds,  and 
treniis  south  west- 
of  Adams  point  is 

T.  by  N.  and  8E. 
la  for  over  |  mile, 
«outh  point  of  tlie 
d  of  Presqne  He 
is  of  rock.    Near 

I  in  clear  weather, 
set  above  the  lake 
sted  with  a  yellow 

gh  the  Strait  of 

bs  of  five  seconds, 

^.  of  the  light. 

a  snug  anchorage 

til,  closes  the  har- 

a  space  ^  mile  in 

nl. 

1  (S.  82°  E.)  from 


This  shoal  is  surrounded  by  15  feet  of  water,  and  the  same  depth 
extendb  soutlieastward  200  yards. 

Range  lights.— Two  fixed  white  liglits  ato  vloible  (front)  8^  (0$)  and 
(rear)  U^  (12)  miles. 

The  front  light  tower  white,  is  on  the  west  shore  of  the  harbor,  and 
the  light  is  shown  18  t'eet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  rear  light  is  36  feet  above  the  lake  level,  on  a  white  dwelling, 
1,000  feet  W.  §  N.  (N.  86°  W.)  from  the  front  light. 

Directions. — When  in  a  depth  of  7  fathom 8,  come  on  the  range  W. 
J  N.  (N.  86°  W.)  and  run  in.  This  will  take  a  vessel  across  the  bar  in 
the  deepest  (14  feet)  water.  When  the  old  lighthouse  bears  NNK.  (N. 
23°  E.),  haul  a  short  df  <tance  to  the  southward  or  northward  of  the 
range  and  anchor  in  3  or  3^  fathoms  of  water.  The  anchorage  is  good 
in  any  weather. 

To  the  southeastward  of  Presquelle  harbor  is  a  small  bight  with 
several  shoals  of  5  feet  and  less;  the  most  outlying,  5  feet,  is  600  yards 
north  of  the  south  point  of  this  bight,  and  1,200  yards  off  shore.  As 
it  lies  abnost  on  the  edge  of  the  4-fathom  curve,  vessels  should  give 
the  locality  a  wide  berth. 

From  this  bight  the  coast  continues  SE.  4  (4^^)  miles  to  False 
Presqne  He  and  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile,  as  also  can  the  east 
and  south  coasts  of  False  Presqne  He.  A  spit  extends  ENE.  from  the 
south  point  of  the  island  1,200  yards,  and  another  88E.  600  yards. 

Fakie  Presqne  He  harbor  is  just  south  of  False  Presque  He.  The 
head  of  this  harbor  extends  inland  §  mile,  but  is  filled  with  flats;  flats 
also  extend  1  (1|)  mile  southeastward  and  ^  mile  ott'  shore  from  the 
BW.  point  of  the  harbor.  Three  hundred  yards  SE.  from  the  end  of 
this  spit  is  an  extensive  outlying  shoal,  with  a  least  depth  of  12  feet. 
East  of  the  south  end  of  this  shoal  nearly  600  yards  is  a  detached  spot 
of  17  feet,  and  south  of  the  shoal  300  yards  is  a  detached  spot  of  16 
lieet. 

AU  of  these  shoals  we  avoided  by  keeping  within  ^  mile  of  the  north 
shore  of  the  harbor. 

Directions.— Bun  in  on  a  NW.  course,  keeping  ^  mile  firom  the  north 
shore  of  the  harbor,  and  anchor  in  about  3  fathoms,  or  smaller  craft 
will  And  a  snug  berth  farther  in,  in  2^  fnthoms.  Good  shelter  is  found 
here  from  all  winds  excepting  those  between  south  and  east. 

BUdaie  island  lies  1^  (If)  miles  oft'  shore  4  (4yV)  miles  SE.  of  False 
Presqne  He  harbor.    It  is  a  mile  long  NW.  and  SB.,  and  nearly  |  mile 
NE.  and  SW.    A  spit  extends  southward  from  the  SE.  point  of  the 
island  for  over  j^  mile,  and  the  island  is  generally  surrounded  by  shoals 
to  the  distance  of  ^  mile,  except  the  north  and  NE.  sides,  which  are 
rather  more  steepto. 
Lifo-saving  station  is  on  the  NW.  point  of  the  island. 
Display  station.— The  United  States  Weather  Burean  has  a  special 
display  station  on  Middle  island. 
Shoals.— Midway  between  Middle  island  and  the  mainland  is  an 


120 


LAKE    HURON. 


extensive  shoal  with  a  least  depth  of  6  feet,  and  8W.  of  the  island  are 
patches  of  16  and  17  feet. 

ESE.  at  1,000  yards  from  the  8E.  point  of  tlie  island  is  a  3-foot  patch 
in  the  middle  of  an  extensive  shoal,  the  NB.  point  of  wliieh  is  a  mile 
eastward  of  the  south  point  of  the  island.  Discolored  water  marks 
this  shoal  in  calm,  and  breakers  in  rougli  weather. 

Buoy.— A  nun  buoy,  jiaintud  red,  and  moored  in  20  feet  of  water, 
marks  the  eastern  edge  of  this  shoal. 

Anohorage.— The  island  affords  a  lee  in  all  winds  and  there  is  good 
holdinff  gronnd  nnder  the  soutli  side  of  tlie  island. 

Direotioiis.— To  anchor  between  the  island  and  the  mainland,  vessels 
from  the  northward  must  pass  J  mile  outside  of  the  buoy,  and  when  it 
is  in  range  with  the  8E.  point  of  the  iHland  haul  up  to  WSW.  (8.  68° 
W.),  and  when  the  west  point  of  the  island  bears  N.  by  W.  (N.  11°  W.) 
haul  up  for  it,  and  anchor  in  4  or  4^  fathoms  about  ^  mile  from  the 
island. 

The  ooaat  firora  False  Presqne  lie  harbor  to  North  point  trends  south- 
westerly 14?J  (17)  miles.  North  of  North  point  the  shore  trends  to  the 
westward,  forming  a  largo  bight  filled  with  a  flat  and  shoals.  In  this 
bight  are  Rond  and  Crooked  islands  and  several  smaller  ones.  The 
flat  extends  eastward  3  (3^)  miles.  On  the  northern  part  of  it  is  Gull 
island,  f  mile  south  of  Gull  island  is  8ngar  island,  and  on  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  flat  is  Thunder  Bay  island,  1  (I J)  mile  long  NW.  and 
SE.,  with  an  average  breadth  of  i  mile.  The  flat  continues  300  yards 
southeastward  from  the  8E.  point  of  the  island.  Near  the  8E.  part  of 
the  island  is  a  lighthouse. 

Light— A  flashing  white  light  every  ninety  seconds,  visible  13J  (16J) 
miles  in  clear  weather,  is  shown  59  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a 
conical,  yellow  tower,  connected  with  a  yellow  dwelling  by  a  covered 
way. 

Pog  signaL— A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  eight  seconds 
duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  ten  seconds,  then  a  blast  of  two 
seconds  trnd  a  silent  interval  of  forty  seconds. 

The  fog-signal  house  is  8SE.  of  the  lighthouse. 

Ufe->aving  atatioa— The  life-saving  station  is  on  the  SW.  point  of 
the  island  ^  mile  from  the  lighthouse. 

Diaplay  atation.— The  United  8tate8  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  on  the  island. 

Anchoragaa.— Anchorage,  clay  and  sand,  is  found  north  of  Gull 
island.  The  harbor  between  Thunder  Bay  and  Sugar  islands,  13  feet  of 
water,  good  holding  ground,  gives  protection  from  all  winds.  8W.  of 
Thunder  Bay  island  and  south  of  Sugar  island  the  anohorage  is  not 
good,  the  bottom  being  rocky. 

Thunder  bay.— Between  North  and  South  points  the  bay  is  8|  (10) 
miles  wide,  and  from  this  line  in  to  the  mouth  of  Thunder  Bay  river  is 
nearly  the  same  distance.     The  north  shore  is  safe  to  approach  to 


f 


THUNDER   HAY — ^ALPRNA. 


of  the  island  are 

is  a  3-foot  patch 
'  which  ig  a  mile 
ed  water  marks 

20  feet  of  water, 

nd  there  is  good 

mainland,  vessels 
loy,  and  when  it 

0  WSW.  (8.  680 
irW.(N.  now.) 
^  mile  from  the 

int  trends  south- 
re  trends  to  the 
shoals.  In  this 
nller  ones.  The 
art  of  it  is  OoU 

1  on  the  eastern 
long  NW.  and 

binaes  300  yards 
the  SE.  part  of 

visible  13J  (16^) 
ike  level  from  a 
ig  by  a  covered 

of  eight  seconds 
)n  a  blast  of  two 


he  SW.  point  of 

an  has  a  special 

i  north  of  Gall 
lands,  13  feet  of 
winds.  SW.  of 
lohorage  is  not 


le  bay  is  8}  (10) 
ler  Bay  river  is 
»  approach  to 


l»i 


1 


}  mile,  excepting  sonth  of  North  point,  whoro  the  shonls  extend 
(14)  mile  SSE.,  the  extreme  soutli  end  being  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Buoy. — A  can  buoy,  p..hitcd  red,  is  moored  in  IS  feet  of  water  1 
(li)  mile  8.  by  E.  f  E.  from  North  point.  It  marks  the  extreme  end 
of  the  shoal  extending  soatheasterly  from  North  point.  Vessels  must 
pass  to  the  sonthward  c*'  this  buoy. 

On  the  western  and  so  hern  shores  of  the  bay  shonls  nnd  flats  extend 
some  distance  from  the  various  points  and  island.s,  but  otter  no  obstacle 
to  safe  navigation  if  vessels  keep  within  2^  (2^)  miles  of  tlie  northt  ru 
shore. 

GhrasB  island,  {  mile  oft'  shore,  lies  on  a  rocky  flat  at  the  head  of  the 
bay  nearly  1}  (2)  miles  northward  of  Partridge  point.  Three-fonrtiis 
mile  and  1  (1^)  mile,  respectively,  8E.  of  Grass  island  are  shonl  pntclies 
of  13  and  10  feet,  bat  they  offer  no  obstacle  to  navigation  if  the  northern 
shore  of  the  bay  be  kept  aboard. 

Partridge  point  extends  from  the  shore  1  (1^)  mile,  and  is  ^  mile 
broad.  South  of  the  point  ia  a  bight  1^  (1^)  miles  lung  und  wide,  but 
filled  with  a  flat,  which  extends  out  to  and  surrounds  Sulphur  island. 
The  flat  continues  northward  tVora  Sulphur  island  f  mile,  and  then 
curves  to  the  NW.,  almost  Joining  the  spit  extending  ^  mile  from  Par- 
tridge point  On  this  flat  is  a  6-foot  spot,  |  mile  N.  by  E.  from  the  north 
point  of  Sulphur  island.  East  of  this  north  point  1  (1^)  mile  is  a 
small  13-foot  shoal,  which  is  the  NW.  point  of  a  narrow  detached  shoal 
extending  j  mile,  with  14  feet  on  the  southeastern  end. 

South  of  this  spot  J  mile  is  a  small  17-foot  patch. 

Between  the  shoal  and  Sulphur  island  is  a  detached  14f >ot  patch. 

The  whole  sonth  shore  of  Thunder  bay  is  fllled  with  a  ro<;ky  flat 
extending  northward  from  South  point  toward  Bird  and  Scare  Grow 
islands  nearly  2^  (3)  miles.  The  edge  of  the  flat  ^  mile  north  of  Scare 
Grow  island  trends  W.  by  N.  to  the  western  i^hore  of  the  bay,  passing 
1^  (If)  miles  outside  of  Hard  Wood  point  and  1  (1^)  mile  outside  of 
Devil  river.  From  South  point  a  rocky  spit  extends  northeastward  a 
mile,  and  another  rocky  spit  eastward  the  same  distance. 

Alpena. — Thunder  Bay  river  empties  into  the  head  of  Thunder  bay, 
and  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  Alpena. 

Improvements. — The  general  project  calls  for  a  channel  16  feet  deep 
between  the  16-foot  curve  and  a  point  in  the  river  a  mile  above  its 
mouth,  the  width  varying  from  200  feet  at  the  outer  end  to  75  feet 
above.  Bed  rock  was  found  |  mile  above  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and 
the  improvements  were  not  carried  &rthef  than  this  point.  The  chan- 
nel has  shoaled  to  13^  feet. 

Light — A  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  (13)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is 
shown  53  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square,  brown,  pyramidal, 
open-framework  tower,  the  upper  part  inclosed. 

The  lighttower  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  Thunder  Bay 
river,  on  a  crib  57  feet  east  of  and  in  a  line  with  Gilchrist  wharf. 


i 


„4ae*«>ft»*«<^" 


smm^fmrntmaamm:'-' 


122 


LAKE    IIUKON. 


Pog  sigBaL — A  bell  Btrnck  by  inacliiiipry  ivery  ten  Reconds. 

Signal  Station.— Thuru  is  a  8ignal  station  two  blockH  NW.  of  the 
HghtlioiiRe. 

Display  station.— The  United  StatoN  Weather  Bnrean  lias  a  re^jular 
display  station  at  Alpena. 

Directions.— From  the  northward.— Hound  Tlmndcr  Bay  JHland 
8K.  point  at  a  distance  of  ^  mile,  then  8W.  by  W.  t,  W.  (S.  63°  W.) 
H  m)  mil  8,  nntil  the  bnoy  off  North  iniint  bears  north,  distant  J 
mile,  or  the  extreme  enstern  \r.nt  of  Norlh  i^int  X.  by  W.  ^  W.  (N. 
17°  W.),  distant  1^  (IJ)  miles,  tlicnco  NW.  by  W.  I  W.  (N.  66°  W.) 
7A  m)  miles  will  bring  a  vessel  j  mile  off  Thnniler  Buy  River  light 

From  the  southward  — When  east  of  Sonth  point  4^  (5)  miles,  a 
NW.  i  N.  (N.  3»o  w.)  courhe  I3§  (If.^)  mlhs  will  bring  a  vessel  }  mile 
off  Thnniler  Bay  River  light. 

Coast— Between  South  point  and  Bl«ck  river,  iff  (5)  miles  to  the 
Bonthward,  the  shore  shonid  not  be  aiipvonrhod  within  ij  (2)  miles. 

Black  RiXM  island,  a  mile  Ni*;.  of  Black  river,  is  snrronnded  \dth 
shoiils  which  extend  J  mile  east  from  it,  a  mile  NNE.  and  north  flrom 
it,  and  then  west  to  the  shore. 

Black  river.- Rocky  shoals  extend  1  (IJ)  mile  eastward  from  this 
river.  From  Ulack  river  the  shore  continues  rocky  to  Alcona,  3J  (4) 
miles  to  the  southward.  Here  the  coast  line  bends  to  the  westward, 
forming  a  shallow  bight  between  Alcona  and  Sturgeon  point,  3^  (4) 
miles  SSE.  of  Alcona. 

A  spit  extends  nearly  a  mile  ENE.  from  Sturgeon  point  and  on  the 
point  is  a  light. 

light— A  iixed  white  light,  visible  14  (16)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is 
exhibited  69  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical  white  tower,  con- 
nected by  a  covered  way  with  a  dwelling. 

The  lighthouse  is  on  the  easternnioeit  point  between  Thunder  and 
Saginaw  bays. 

Life-saving  statioa — The  station  is  75  yards  south  of  the  light- 
house. 

Coast — At  Sturgeon  point  the  coast  changes  its  direction  to  a  little 
west  of  south  and  continues  its  rocky  character.  Harrisville  is  3^  (4) 
miles  from  Sturgeon  point,  and  Spring  Mills  If  (2)  miles  beyond. 
Between  these  places  a  rocky  shoal  extends  off  shore  for  a  mile. 
Greenbnsh  is  3^  (4)  miles  south  of  Spring  Mills,  and  from  here  to  An 
Sable  light,  a  distance  of  10  (11^)  miles,  the  shore  continues  its  rocky 
character.  At  6  (7)  miles  northward  of  Au  Sable  river  there  is  a  9-foot 
spot  a  mile  offshore. 

Oscoda  and  An  Sable  are  at  the  month  of  the  An  Sable  river. 
The  shipments  from  the  port  are  principally  made  from  private  piers 
built  into  the  lake  entirely  outside  of  the  harbor. 

Light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  8^  (If)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is 
exhibited  32  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square,  brown,  pyramidal, 


OBCODA — TAWA8. 


128 


I  second R. 

ocks  NW.  of  the 

eau  lias  a  rr{;ular 

iiilor  Bay  iolaod 
t,  W.  (S.  630  W.) 
north,  distant  i 
.  by  W.  i  W.  (N. 
W.  (N.  66°  W.) 
>)\y  River  light. 
It  4^  (5)  mileH,  a 
g  a  vessel  }  mile 

(6)  miles  to  the 
i  1$  (2)  niiles. 
siirronnded  with 
I.  and  north  flrom 

itward  from  this 
;o  Alcona,  3^  (4) 
to  tlie  westward, 
eon  point,  3^  (4) 

point  and  on  the 

clear  weather,  is 
irhite  tower,  con- 
en  Thunder  and 
ith  of  the  light- 

rection  to  a  little 
i.rri8ville  is  3^  (4) 
I)  miles  beyond. 
Iiore  for  a  mile, 
from  here  to  An 
itindes  its  rocky 
'  there  is  a  9-foot 

An  Sable  river. 
)m  private  piers 

ulear  weather,  is 
'own,  pyramidal, 


open  framework  tower,  upper  part  inclosed.    There  is  an  elevated  walk 
ft-om  the  lighthouse  to  the  shore. 

The  tower  is  on  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  at  the  mouth  of  the 
river. 

DiapUiy  station.-— Tlio  United  States  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  at  Oscoda. 

Coast — The  shore  continues  its  southerly  direction  from  Au  Sable 
ii(  (6)  miles  to  Point  au  Sable.  Shoals  surround  this  i>oiiit  to  a  distance 
of  S  mile,  and  it  is  best  to  keep  at  Icjvst  1^%  (li)  niiles  oft"  slioie.  At 
Point  au  Sable  the  coast  bends  more  to  Avestward  to  Tawjw  (Ottawa) 
iwint,  6f  (7J)  miles  8W.  of  Point  an  Sable.  Tawas  point  has  a  sand 
spit  extending  from  it  for  nearly  a  mile  southwesterly  and  westerly. 
The  SW.  and  NW.  ends  of  this  spit  are  marked  by  buoys. 

BnojTS. — A  nun  buoy,  iiainted  retl,  is  moored  in  33  feet  of  water 
1  (li)  miles  SW.  f  W.  of  Tawas  (Ottawa)  point.  Is  is  placed  on  the 
extreme  SW.  point  of  the  shoal.  Vessels  must  not  pass  inside  of  this 
buoy. 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  1  (IJ) 
miles  N.  by  E.  of  Tawas  Point  buoy  and  marks  the  NW.  point  of  the 
shoal. 

Light — An  intermittent  white  light  with  red  sector  is  fixed  for 
twenty-five  seconds,  followed  by  an  eclipse  of  five  seconds.  The  light 
shows  red  over  the  flat  for  90<3,  from  bearing  NE.  to  bearing  8E.,  ami 
white  the  remaining  270^.  The  light  is  visible  in  clear  weather  14  (16) 
miles,  and  is  exhibited  70^  fe<>t  above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical, 
white  tower  connected  with  a  icd  dwelling  by  a  covered  way.  The 
lighthouse  is  near  the  SW.  end  of  Tawas  point. 

Wreck.— A  wreck  with  2  feet  of  water  over  it  lies  in  11  feet  water 
950  yards  8E.  by  E.  |  E.  (S.  Qo°  E.)  of  Tawas  lighthouse.  It  is  a 
dangerous  obstruction  to  coasters. 

LifeHMVing  station  is  1,100  yards  NE.  by  E.  from  the  lighthouse. 

Tawaa  bay  is  protected  by  Tawas  point,  a  narrow  peninsula  pro- 
jecting over  a  mile  southwesterly  from  the  mainland.  It  is  3J  (4)  miles 
wide  between  Tawas  point  and  the  sli  ore  west  of  the  point,  and  If  (2) 
miles  long  northwesterly  from  this  line. 

The  av<ulable  anchorage  grounds  are  contracted  to  a  space  a  little 
over  a  mL-)  in  width  by  the  flats  extending  from  the  point  and  the 
westicm  Bh«<re  of  the  bay.  There  are  no  dangers  outsida  the  flats  and 
the  bottom  .s  sand  and  clay.  The  bay  offers  secure  anchorage  in  all 
winds  excepting'  those  from  the  south. 

Tawas  and  Bast  Tawas  are  on  the  western  shore  of  the  bay. 

Display  station.— There  is  a  special  display  station  of  the  United 
States  Weather  Bureau  at  East  Tawas. 

Directions— From  the  northward  or  westward  steer  to  the  SW. 
or  West  until  Tawas  lighthouse  bears  north  l-^g  ( 1  J)  miles,  when  change 
eonrse  to  NW.  by  W.  ^  W.  ( N.  66°  W.)  for  the  mill  at  Tawas.    Bun  in 


•••rrmBgaiafe... 


.ammmmmmmmm 


mmt 


124 


LAKE   HURON, 


on  this  course,  passing  southward  of  Tawas  Point  buoy,  until  Tawas 
lighthouse  bears  *].  J  N.  (N.  81°  E.),  when  change  course  to  NB.  |  B. 
(N.  52°  E.),  and  run  into  the  harbor  and  anchor  in  3J  fathoms  of  water. 

From  the  southward.— Steer  nortli,  for  the  noddle  of  the  harbor, 
and  bring  the  lighthouse  on  Tawas  point  to  bear  E.  i  N.  (N.  84°  E.)  If 
(2)  miles,  when  proceed  as  above. 

Coast.— From  Tawas  bay  to  Gravelly  point  the  coast  trends  south- 
erly tor  13  (15)  miles.  The  shore  should  not  be  approached  within  1 
(H)  mile,  as  rocky  flats  extend  oflF  in  places  for  nearly  that  distance, 
especially  off  Mason  creek  and  Alabaster,  where  the  shoals  are  rather 
more  offlying.  There  is  only  5  feet  of  water  §  mile  SB.  of  Whitestone 
point  and  a  detached  ICfoot  shoal  l^'o"  (H)  miles  south  of  it  and  a  little 
over  a  mile  offshore. 

Gravelly  point,  the  inner  western  point  of  entrance  to  Saginaw  bay, 
projects  some  distance  from  the  mainland  southeasterly.  It  continues 
in  the  same  direction  for  2,*-  (2^)  miles  as  a  sand  spit.  There  is  11 
feet  of  water  l^  (If)  miles  SB.  of  the  point,  and  16  feet  at  the  SB. 
extreme  of  the  spit.  South  of  the  end  of  the  spit  a  short  distance  is 
a  17-foot  detached  patch.    The  spit  is  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Buoy.— A  nun  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  20  feet  of  water  2^ 
(2^)  miles  SBi  by  B.  of  Gravelly  point  and  marks  the  extreme  point  of 
the  shoal. 

Vessels  must  not  attempt  to  pass  between  this  buoy  and  tbe  shore. 

Saginaw  bay. — Between  the  outer  points  of  the  entrance.  Point  au 
Sable  and  Pointe  aux  Barques,  the  bay  is  22  (25^)  miles  wide.  It  is 
contracted  to  14  (16)  miles  between  Gravelly  and  Oak  points,  but  the 
entrance  channel  proper  between  Gravelly  point  and  Charity  island  is 
only  2i  (2f )  miles  wide  between  the  shoals. 

West  Shore.— The  head  of  the  bight  within  Gravelly  point  is  filled 
with  shoals.  The  3-fathom  curve  is  nearly  a  mile  eastward  of  Point  aux 
6 res,  and  just  within  it,  east  of  the  point,  is  a  7-foot  patch.  From  this 
patch  the  3-fathom  curve  trends  SW.  by  S.  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 
Outside  the  curve  there  are  no  dangers. 

The  Aux  Gres,  Rifle,  Pine,  Saginiu,  and  Pinconning  rivers  empty 
into  Saginaw  bay  on  its  western  shore. 

ShcaL— Oft"  the  mouth  of  the  Saginaw  river  the  4-fatbom  curve  is  3 
(3i)  miles  offshore.  A  shoal  with  16  feet  of  water,  and  extending  east 
and  west  nearly  a  mile,  lies  4  (4f)  miles  NNB.  of  the  mouth  of  the  Sagi- 
naw river.   It  is  a  mile  outside  of  the  3-fathom  curve. 

East  shore.— The  whole  southern  and  eastern  side  of  Saginaw  bay 
to  Sand  point  is  filled  by  a  flat  which  extends  from  the  eastern  shore 
7  (8)  miles.  The  flat  extends  nortuward  from  Sand  point  to  Little 
Charity  and  Charity  islands.  It  surrounds  these  islands  and  extends 
in  all  directions  from  the  Charity  islands  for  If  (2)  miles. 

This  flat  has  on  it  many  rocky  shoals  and  closes  the  eastern  entrance 
to  the  bay.    Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  enter  the  bay  southward  qf 


^^^g^^r^^^g^^ 


noy,  until  Tawas 

)ur8e  to  NB.  |  E. 
fathoms  of  water, 
le  of  tbe  harbor, 

N.  (N".  84°  E.)  If 

>aat  trends  soath- 
roached  within  l 
ly  that  distance, 
ihoals  are  rather 
E.  of  Whitestone 
1  of  it  and  a  little 

I  to  Saginaw  bay, 
ly.  It  continues 
ipit.  There  is  11 
feet  at  the  SE. 
short  distance  is 
loy. 

feet  of  water  2^ 
extreme  point  of 

'  and  tbe  shore, 
itrauce,  Point  au 
niles  wide.    It  is 
k  points,  but  the 
Oharity  island  is 

lly  point  is  filled 
?ard  of  Point  aux 
atcli.  From  this 
ead  of  the  bay. 

og  rivers  empty 

iathom  curve  is  3 
i  extending  east 
outhof  theSagi- 

of  Saginaw  bay 
lie  eastern  shore 
point  to  Little 
ids  and  extends 
es. 

eastern  entrance 
ay  southward  of 


8A6INAW  BAY  AND   RIVEK. 


126 


the  islands.  On  the  eastern  shore  are  Sebewaing  and  Pigeon  rivers, 
and  the  towns  of  Sebewaing,  Bayport,  Caseville,  Port  Crescent,  and 
Port  Austin. 

The  northwestern  edge  of  the  flat  is  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Buoy. — A  can  buoy,  painted  blacic,  is  moored  in  17  feet  of  water,  2^ 
(2^)  miles  NW.  by  W.  J  W.  of  Oharity  Island  lighthouse.  It  marks  the 
NW.  end  of  the  shoal  extending  from  Charity  island. 

Charity  Island  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12^^  (14)  miles  in 
clear  weather,  is  exhibited  45  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  conical 
white  tower,  connected  with  a  dwelling  by  a  covered  way. 

The  lighthouse  is  on  the  NW.  point  of  Charity  island. 

Approaching  Saginaw  bay  from  the  southward. — Vessels  must 
p0ss  at  least  1^  (li^)  miles  to  the  northward  of  Port  Austin  light;  then 
steer  W.  ^  S.  (S.  84°  W.)  22^  (25J)  miles,  which  will  lead  to  the  north- 
ward of  Charity  Island  buoy,  being  careful  on  approaching  it  to  keep 
it  well  open  on  the  port  bow,  to  avoid  the  shoal  extending  1^  (If)  miles 
northward  from  Charity  Island  lighthouse.  "Vessels  should  not  pass 
southward  of  the  island.  After  passing  the  buoy,  steer  SW.  by  S.  (S. 
34°  W.)  for  Saginaw  river,  leaving  Gravelly  Point  buoy  on  the  star- 
board hand. 

Saginaw  river,  with  its  tributaries,  drains  a  territory  of  some  5,800 
square  miles.  The  nver  proper  has  a  length  of  19  (22)  miles,  at  which 
distance  from  the  mouth  the  Tittabawasnec  and  Shiawassee  unite  to  tbrm 
the  main  stream.  The  cities  of  East  and  West  Saginaw  are  built  on  the 
upper  end  of  the  river  and  Bay  City  near  the  mouth.  The  river  baa 
a  large  volume  and  at  times  a  strong  current. 

Improvements. — Prior  to  improvements  theentrance  was  obstructed 
by  an  extended  bar  in  Saginaw  bay  a  mile  from  the  shore  and  ^  mile 
aerosB  between  the  lOfoot  contours,  with  a  minimum  depth  of  0  feet. 

On  January  1, 1895,  the  channel  across  the  outer  bar  had  been  dredged 
to  a  depth  of  14  feet  and  a  width  of  200  feet  from  the  month  of  the 
river  to  the  14-foot  curve.  It  is  not  safe  for  vessels  drawing  over  13 
feet  to  cross  the  bar.  It  is  proposed  to  Airther  increase  this  depth  to 
16  feet. 

finoys. — ^The  entrance  to  the  channel  is  marked  by  two  buoys — a 
black  spar  buoy,  No.  1,  in  13  feet,  on  the  east  side,  and  a  red  nun  buoy« 
No.  2,  in  13  feet,  on  the  west  side.  At  550  yards  S.  ^  W.  from  No.  1  is  a 
black  spar  buoy,  No.  3,  in  11  feet  of  water,  on  the  east  bank,  and  oppo- 
site, on  the  west  bank,  in  11  feet  of  water,  is  a  red  spar  buoy.  No.  4. 
Beyond  these,  at  intervals  of  550  yards,  the  spar  buoys  are  in  pairs, 
black  on  the  east  bank  and  red  on  tlie  west  bank,  all  in  11  feet  of 
water,  the  black  buoys  bearing  odd  numbers,  the  red  buoys  even  num- 
bers. Buoys  9  and  10  maiiE  the  commencement  of  deep  water  inside 
the  bar;  buoys  13  and  14  mark  the  mouth  of  the  river,  and  are  the  last 
on  the  course  8.  ^  W.  (8.  6°  W.).  A  short  distance  beyond  this  pair 
the  course  is  changed  to  8.  by  E.  ^  £!•  (S.  14°  E.). 


■TFffliirirffffli 


■ii>^' 


126 


LAKE   HURON. 


Range  lights.— Two  fixed  rwl  lighta^  viaiblo  in  clear  weather  (front-) 
7iV  (84)  and  (rear)  Hi  (13)  miles.  The  fron»  Hg^  is  shown  37  feet 
above  the  lake  level  and  the  rear  light  Gl  feet. 

Tiie  front  light  tower  is  at  the  west  entrance  i>oint  to  the  SNigwaw 
liver.  It  is  a  square,  red,  pyramidal,  opeu-framework  tower,  upper 
pai-t  inclosed,  on  a  crib. 

The  rear  light  is  2,330  feet  S.  ^  W.  (8.  6°  W.)  from  the  front  light, 
and  is  shown  from  a  square,  yellow  tower  attached  to  a  dwelling. 

Dry  dock.— At  Bay  City  the  dry  dock  is  310  feet  over  all,  42.foot 
gate,  and  has  13^  depth  over  sill. 

2>i8pla7  station.— The  United  States  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  at  Bay  City. 

Directions  for  entering.— Bring  the  lights  in  range  S.  ^  W.  (S.  6° 
W.)  when  2^  (2^)  miles  from  the  front  light,  and  steer  in  on  the  range, 
passing  between  the  spar  and  nun  buoyb  at  the  entrance  to  the  cut 
These  buoys  are  about  If  (2)  miles  from  the  front  light.  Keep  on  the 
range,  following  the  buoys  to  i  mile  from  the  fi-ont  light  until  Nos.  13 
and  14  are  about  one  point  abaft  the  beam,  when  change  course  to  S. 
by  B.  4  B.  (8. 14°  B.),  and  keep  in  mid-channel  until  oflf  the  Bay  City 
dry  dock,  when  haul  to  the  sontii  shore,  to  avoid  tlie  shoals  in  mid- 
chuiiucl  opposite  the  ships  at  McBwau^s  mill,  after  which  there  is  no 
obstruction  until  the  Belinda  Street  bridge  is  reached. 

Wreck.— About  800  feet  northerly  from  the  nun  buoy  (red)  and  60 
feet  westward  from  the  center  of  the  channel  is  a  wreck  forming  a  shoal. 
Several  vessels  have  struck  this  with  their  wheels.    (January  31, 1895.) 

Coast.— Between  Oak  point  and  Pointe  aux  Barques,  14  (16)  miles  to 
the  BNB.,  the  coast  has  several  indentations,  but  is  generally  bordered 
by  a  rocky  flat  which  extends  offshore,  in  places  If  (2)  miles.  Off  Port 
Crescent,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Partridge  river,  the  reef  is  broken,  and  a 
vessel  with  local  knowledge  can  approach  the  shore  close-to;  but  off- 
shore 1^  (If)  miles  is  a  narrow  detached  shoal,  least  water  5  feet,  run* 
iiing  north  and  south  for  over  a  mile.  Midway  between  Flat  Bock 
point  and  Pointe  aux  Barques  is  Port  Austin,  an  open  roadstead,  with 
several  piers. 

Pointe  aux  Barques  is  surrounded  by  reefs  which  extend  l^  (IJ) 
miles  NW.    Near  the  NW.  end  is  a  lighthouse. 

Port  Austin  Reef  light— A  fixed  white  and  flashing  red  light— fixed 
white  for  one  minute,  followed  by  five  consecutive  red  flashes  at  inter- 
vals of  twelve  seconds  during  the  next  minute— visible  14j^  (16f )  miles, 
is  exhibited  80  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square,  white,  pyram- 
idal, open-framework  tower,  upper  part  inclosed,  with  brown  fog- 
signal  building  on  a  high  crib. 

The  lighthouse  is  on  Port  Austin  reef,  1^  (IJ)  miles  fi-om  the  main- 
land. There  is  no  passage  between  the  light  and  the  mainland,  and 
vessels  should  give  the  light  a  berth  of  IJ  (If)  miles.  The  light  is 
known  as  Fort  Austin  light. 


1 


f 


POINTE   AUX    BARQUES SAND   BEACH. 


127 


xreathor  (front') 
shown  37  feet 


to  the  Sugwuw 
k  tower,  upper 

the  front  light, 
k  dwelling, 
over  all,  42-foot 

an  has  a  special 

B  8.  i  W.  (S.  6° 
in  on  the  range, 
ance  to  the  out. 
t.  Keep  on  the 
ht  until  No8. 13 
iige  course  to  S. 
flf  the  Bay  City 
shoals  in  midr 
licb  there  is  no 

loy  (red)  and  60 
forming  a  shoal, 
nnary  31, 1895.) 
U  (16)  miles  to 
erally  bordered 
eniles.  Off  Port 
s  broken,  and  a 
lose-to;  but  oS- 
E»ter  5  feet,  run* 
'een  Flat  Bock 
roadstead,  with 

ixtend  lA  (IJ) 

red  light— fixed 
Bashes  at  inter* 
14}  (16f )  miles, 
,  white,  pyram- 
th   brown  fog- 

from  the  main* 
I  mainland,  and 
I.    The  light  is 


Fog  s^;naL — A  lOinch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  seven  seconds, 
followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  eighty  seconds. 

Display  Station. — The  United  States  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  at  Pointe  aux  Barques. 

Coast. — Between  Pointe  aux  Barques  and  Burnt  Cabin  point  the 
reef  if.  somewhat  broken,  but  it  extends  off  the  latter  point  a  mile.  It 
follows  the  coast,  extending  out  from  a  mile  to  1}  miles,  and  at  Pointe 
aux  Barques  lighthouse  the  edge  of  the  reef  is  1§  (2)  miles  offshore. 
Just  south  of  Burnt  Cabin  point  is  a  life-saving  station,  and  a  little 
beyond  is  Grindstone  City.  New  river  is  If  (2)  miles  farther  SE.  and 
Huron  City,  at  the  mouth  of  Willow  river,  is  1  (IJ)  mile  beyond  it. 
Orion  rock,  with  6  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies  1  (1^)  mile  NW.  of  Willow 
lliver  wharf.    Two  miles  SK.  of  Huron  City  is  a  lighthouse. 

Pointe  mat  Barques  light — A  flashing  white  light  every  ten  sec- 
onds, visible  in  clear  weather  15^  (17^)  miles,  is  exhibited  80  feet 
above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical  tower  connected  by  a  covered  way 
with  a  dwelling,  both  white. 

Life-Saving  station  is  300  yards  south  of  the  lighthouse. 

Buoy. — A  bell  buoy,  black,  is  moored  in  33  fieet  water  2  (2|)  miles 
E.  ]f  S.  (S.  88<^  E.)  of  Pointe  aux  Barques  lighthouse.  It  marks  the 
reef  extending  offshore.    Vessels  must  pass  outside  this  bell  buoy. 

Coast — At  1  (14)  mile  NNE.  ftom  Pointe  aux  Barques  lighthouse  is 
%n  S  foot  slioal,  with  deeper  water  between  it  and  the  shore.    Between 

u>  te  aux  Barques  and  Sandbeach,  12,^  (14)  miles  SSE.,  the  reef  con- 
>  >  V'is,  and  in  places  extends  out  for  a  mile,  generally  f  mile.  Port 
Hope  is  halfway  to  Sand  Beach.  Halfway  between  port  Hope  and  Sand 
Beaeh  is  Forest  bay,  oft'  which  are  several  dangerous  ledges  running 
north  and  south  a  mile  fh)m  shore. 

Sand  Beach,  a  harbor  of  refuge,  is  just  north  of  Cranes  point  This 
is  the  only  place  of  shelter  in  the  vicinity  of  Pointe  aux  Barques,  an 
exposed  and  stormy  locality,  with  no  other  harbor  or  safe  anchorage 
for  60}  (80)  miles  along  a  rocky  and  dangerous  coast  The  entire  lake 
Huron  traffic  passes  within  sight  of  this  harbor.  This  includes  all 
through  traffic  to  and  from  lakes  Superior  and  Michigan. 

Improvements. — As  constructed,  the  harbor  works  are  built  ii^ 
threo  sections,  each  consisting  of  heavy  timber  cribs,  filled  with  stone. 
The  west  pier  incloses  the  harbor  on  the  north  shore  and,  starting  in 
shallow  water  750  feet  from  shore,  extends  ESE.  1,503  feet,  with  a 
width  increasing  from  19  to  26  feet. 

The  main  pier  extends  4,676  feetNW.  and  SE.,  with  a  uuitbrm  width 
of  38  feet.  The  south  pier  extends  north  and  south  1,956  feet,  with  a 
width  vajrying  tcom  26  to  18  feet,  and  protects  the  harbor  from  the 
eastward. 

The  north  entrance  is  300  feet  and  the  main  entrance  600  feet  wide. 

January,  1896:  The  east  and  north  entrances  have  both  been  dredged 
to  21  feet  below  two  of  g^nge^  ^»t  with  the  preTWMl'g  stage  of  water 


128 


LAKE    HURON. 


tlie  available  entrance  depth  is  not  over  20  feet;  equal  or  greater  depth 
adjoins  t,iie  main  breakwater,  inside,  at  nil  points  between  these  two 
entrances.  Vessels  can  reach  the  landing  pier  on  a  draft  of  about  12 
feet  at  the  present  stage  of  water. 

Directions. — Anchorage. — The  main  entrance  is  the  one  commonly 
used  by  all  vessels.  Tlie  southern  margin  of  it  is  bordered  by  a  rocky 
bottom  of  insufUcient  depth.  There  is  very  limited  holding  ground 
inside  the  harbor,  most  of  the  botfoni  being  rocky.  Steamers  go  directly 
to  the  main  pier  and  make  fast;  sailing  vessels  either  make  fast  to  the 
pier  or  anchor  on  the  west  side,  south  of  the  west  pier,  where  there  is 
limited  holding  ground. 

Life-saving  station.— There  is  a  railroad  pier  in  the  harbor,  at  the 
inner  end  of  which  is  a  life-saving  station. 

Display  station.— The  United  States  Weather  Bureau  has  a  special 
display  station  at  Sand  Beach. 

North  Entrance.— East  light,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  11$  (la^) 
miles  in  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  42  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a 
white,  pyramidal,  open-framework  tower,  upper  part  inclosed,  on  the 
end  of  the  breakwater,  east  side  of  the  north  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

West  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  about  9^  (11)  miles  in  clear 
weather,  is  shown  27^  feet  above  the  lake  level  Irom  a  skeleton  tripod 
on  the  end  of  the  breakwater,  west  side  of  the  north  eutrauce  to  the 
harbor. 

These  lights  mark  the  northern  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  refuge. 

Main  (east)  entrance.— North  (main)  light.— A  flashing  light,  alter- 
nately red  and  white  every  five  seconds,  visible  12-1^^  (14f )  miles  in  clear 
weather,  is  exhibited  64J  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  conical  brown 
tower,  surmounted  by  a  black  lantern. 

The  lighthouse,  with  brown  fog-signal  house,  is  on  a  rectangular  crib 
just  inside  the  north  side  of  east  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

Fog  signal— A  10-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  five  seconds' 
dnratioti,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  twenty-five  seconds. 

Bonth  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  9J  (11)  miles  in  clear  weather, 
is  exhibited  27J  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  skeleton  tripod  on  the 
end  of  the  breakwater,  south  side  of  the  east  entrance  to  the  harbor. 

These  lights  mark  the  eastern  or  main  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  refuge. 

Coast— From  Cranes  point  to  the  St.  Clair  river  the  coast  trends  8. 
by  E.  nearly  51  (58})  miles,  and  is  fronted  by  rocky  shoals  the  whole  dis 
tance,  but  can  be  safely  approached  anywhere  to  a  mile. 

Barnetville  is  a  mile  southward  of  Cranes  point,  and  Elm  creek  ^ 
(5J)  miles  farther  on. 

At  Elm  creek  a  dangerous  spit  extends  from  the  shore  f  mile  NB. 

Whiterock  town  is  If  (2)  miles  south  from  Elm  creek.  North  §  mile 
from  the  end  of  the  wharf  at  Whiterock  point  is  a  rock  out  of  water, 
known  as  White  rock.  A  ledge  with  4  or  5  feet  of  water  over  it  extends 
300  yards  SE.  fifom  the  rock,  Porestvillo  is  halfway  between  White- 
rock point  and  Indian  creek,  7|  (9)  miles  to  the  southward.    Booky 


-f 


PORT   SANILAC ST.    CLAIK   RIVER. 


129 


Teater  depth 

!u  these  two 

of  about  12 

16  commonly 
1  by  a  rocky 
ling  groaud 
■8  go  directly 
e  fast  to  the 
tiere  there  is 

irbor,  at  the 

las  a  special 

blellJ(13J) 
level,  from  a 
»sed,  on  the 
I  the  harbor, 
liles  in  clear 
iletou  tripod 
rauce  to  the 

f  refuge, 
r  light,  alter- 
iiiles  in  clear 
mical  brown 

lingular  crib 

Ive  secoudH^ 
ds. 

)ar  weather, 
ripod  on  the 
le  harbor, 
or  of  refuge. 
St  trends  S. 
le  whole  dis 

Im  creek  ^ 

mile  NE. 
^orth  §  mile 
ut  of  water, 
sr  it  extends 
rcen  White- 
trd.    Booky 


spots  are  found  along  this  stretch  of  the  coast  i  mile  o£f  shore.  Bich- 
moudville  is  a  short  distance  southward  of  Indian  creek.  From  here 
to  Port  Sanilac,  8§  (10)  miles  farther  sonth,  the  coast  continues  its  rocky 
character,  but  can  be  approached  somewhat  nearer  than  that  farther 
north.  Picnic  point,  3  (3J)  miles  north  of  Port  Sanilac,  is  the  south 
point  of  Pools  bay,  a  slight,  shallow  indentation  in  the  coast,  with 
Forester  at  its  northern  end. 

Port  Sanilac  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  llj  (13)  miles,  is 
exhibited  69  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  an  octagonal,  pyramidal 
white  tower,  connected  by  a  covered  way  with  a  red  dwelling. 

Coast— From  Port  Sanilac  to  Lexington,  10  (11  J)  miles  to  the  south- 
ward, the  coast  continues  in  the  same  direction,  and  of  the  same  general 
character.  At  Burchville,  6  (7)  miles  beyond  Lexington,  there  is  a 
detached  rocky  spot  of  17  feet,  f  mile  NE.  of  the  town  and  nearly  the 
same  distance  off  shore.  At  Lakeport,  3  (3J)  miles  south  of  Burchville, 
the  coast  changes  its  direction  slightly  to  the  eastward  and  trends  SSE. 
for  7f  (9)  miles  to  the  west  entrance  point  of  the  St.  Clair  river. 

North  of  this  point,  IJ  (If)  miles  and  If  (2)  miles,  are  16  and  17  foot 
shoals  f  mile  off  shore. 

Lake  Hnron,  foot  of  channeL— Jannary  1, 1896:  Work  in  progress 
for  channel  2,400  feet  wide  and  21  feet  deep.  The  east  half  of  this 
channel  is  completed. 

Shoals.— Corsica  shoal  with  16  feet  least  water  over  it,  Harlem  shoal 
with  17  feet,  and  Northwest  shoal  with  16  feet  lie  off  the  entrance  to 
St.  Clair  river. 

An  extensive  shoal,  15  feet  over  it,  has  been  reported  as  lying  2^ 
(2^)  miles  N.  by  E.  of  Port  Oratiot  lighthouse. 

Lake  Huron  UghtvesseL— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  Uf  (13}) 
miles,  is  shown  40  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  the  fore  masthead. 

The  vessel  has  two  masts,  is  schooner  rigged,  and  has  no  bowsprit. 
There  is  a  circular  black  cage- work  day  mark  at  the  fore  masthead  and 
a  small  black  smokestack  and  fog  signal  between  the  masts.  The  hull 
is  straw  color,  with  ^^Lake  Huron"  in  large  black  letters  on  each  side 
and  **2iro.  61"  on  each  bow. 

The  vessel  is  moored  1}  (If)  miles  N.by  E.  f  E.  (N.20o  E.)  from  Part 
Gratiot  lighthouse  in  20  feet  of  water. 

Fog  signal— A  6-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  Blast  of  two  seconds' 
duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  ten  seconds.  If  the  whistle 
is  disabled,  a  bell  will  be  rung  by  hand. 

Dredged  Cat  buoy.- A  red  spar  buoy  marks  the  edge  of  the  new 
out  near  Lake  Hnron  lightvessel  No.  61,  and  is  on  the  following  bearing: 
Fort  Gratiot  lighthouse  S.  by  W.  |  W.  (S.  18°  W.),  distant  IJ  (If)  miles. 

Fort  Oratiot  light— A  fixed  and  flashing  white  light,  flash  every 
one  minute,  is  exhibited  82  feet  above  the  lake  level  fh>m  a  conical  white 
tower,  with  a  red  dwelling  detached,  onthe  western  entrance  point  to 
St  Olah*  river.    The  light  is  visible  14f  (17)  miles  in  dear  weather. 
1944— No.  108 ^9 


130 


LAKE   HUSON. 


Fog  aignaL — An  8-ineh  steam  whistle  sonuds  a  Mast  of  tiiree  sec- 
onds' duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  seventeen  seconds.  The 
fog-signal  building  is  in  front  of  the  lightstation. 

Fort  Oratiiot  range  lights.— Both  lights  are  red,  the  front  light  67 
and  the  rear  light  80  feet  above  the  lake  level.  The  front  light  is  shown 
from  a  telegraph  pole  surmounted  by  a  white  triangle  as  a  day  mark, 
on  the  west  bank  of  the  river.  The  rear  lighthouse,  300  feet  BSW.  j 
W.  (S.  31°  W.)  of  the  front  light,  is  a  white  pyramidal  op^i-framework 
tower,  with  day  mark  S  feet  long  and  12  feet  wide. 

The  description  of,  and  directions  for,  St.  Olair  river  are  given  in  the 
next  chapter. 

CANADIAN  SHOBB  OF  LAKX  fiFBON. 

Dotoiur  paasago  and  Port  Collier  are  described  in  Chapter  II. 

Drummond  island  belongs  to  the  United  States ;  Oockburn  and  Qrand 
Manitoulin  islands  to  Oanada.  These  islands  form  the  eastern  part  of 
the  northern  shore  of  lake  Huron .  The  southern  shores  of  these  islands 
have  not  been  surveyed  and  no  description  can  be  given  of  them. 

Yessels  should  give  this  whole  coast  a  wide  berth. 

False  Detour  channel,  nearly  17  (19^)  miles  east  of  Detour  passage, 
is  6  (7)  miles  long  NE.  by  N.  and  SW.  by  S.,  witJi  im  averi^e  width  of 
1|  (2)  miles.  Apparently  there  are  no  dangers  if  a  mid-channel  course 
be  kept. 

Strait  of  Mliwrtfisanga,  the  next  passage  east,  is  a  little  longer  and 
broader  than  False  Detour  channel  and  takes  a  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  direction. 
This  passage  is  also  apparently  clear  in  mid-chann^ 

At  the  western  entranee  to  the  strait  o£f  the  southeastern  side  ci 
Gockbum  island  are  the  Magnetic  reefs.  They  extend  2^  (2|)  miles 
southeasterly  from  the  south  point  of  Godcburn  island  and  2^  {9) 
miles  into  the  strait. 

Mississai^;a  light— -At  the  southeastern  entrance  point  to  l^e  strait 
is  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  (15)  miles  in  clear  weather.  It  is  ex- 
hibited 46  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  white  square  tower  on  the 
SW.  point  of  Grand  Manitoulin  island.  It  sraves  as  a  guide  thf>oiigh 
the  strait. 

Fog  signal — A  steam  wildcat  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  eight  socMids' 
duration,  fcllowed  by  a  silent  interval  <^  two  minutes.  The  pitc^  of 
the  whistle  varies  during  the  blast. 

Shoals. — At  the  eastern  entrance  to  the  strait,  8.  by  E.  |  B.  (S.  20° 
M.)f  3  (8^)  miles  from  tiie  light,  is  a  detached  rook  «ind  shoaL 

Ghi-een  island,  a  little  farther  eastward,  is  connected  with  Manitoulin 
island  by  shoals. 

Dnok  islands,  five  in  number,  extend  south  off  the  coast  of  Mani- 
toulin island  12  (13f )  miles.  The  Inner  Duck  island  is  surrounded  by 
reefiSj  which  extend  northward  almost  to  Manitoulin  island.  Beeib  ex- 
tend off  the  north  shore  of  the  Western  Duck.  Middle  Dock  is  sur- 
rounded by  reefs.    Beefs  extend  off  the  eastern  edge  of  Outw  Duck, 


of  tiiree  see- 
leconds.   The 

front  light  67 
ight  is  shown 
i  a  day  mack, 
I  feet  SSW.  I 
sn-flramework 

i  given  in  the 


iftpter  II. 
rn  and  Qrand 
Ekstern  part  of 
these  islands 
[>f  them. 

ttour  passage, 
iri^e  width  of 
banuel  course 

ble  longer  and 
\  E.  direction. 

istern  side  ci 
2A  m  miles 
1  and  2A(a) 

ittotiiestmit 

her.    It  is  ex> 

tower  on  the 

snide  ths>ongh 

eight  soeiHidik' 
The  pitdi  of 

a.  I B.  (B.  20° 

lOaC 

th  Manitenlin 

soastof  Maui- 
urrounded  by 
nd.  Beefii  ex- 
)  Dock  is  sttf • 
r  Outw  Duck, 


DUCK  ISLANDS — STOKES    BAY. 


131 


and  l^  (If)  miles  southerly  from  its  8«)athern  -point.  Beefb  line  the 
north  and  eastern  shore  of  Great  Duck,  and  extend  a  mile  to  the  south- 
ward from  its  SE.  end.  There  is  a  detached  reef  ^  mile  off  the  north 
shore  of  Great  Duck.  The  passage  between  the  Duck  ii^ands  and 
Mtween  the  islands  and  the  shore  should  not  be  attempted.  The  SW. 
end  of  the  Great  Duck  is  marked  by  a  lighthouse. 

Light — A  revolving  red  and  white  light,  one  red  and  two  white 
flashes  every  two  minutes,  greatest  brilliancy  every  forty  seconds,  and 
visible  15  (17^)  miles  iu  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  64  feet  above  the 
lake  level  from  a  square,  white  tower,  with  dwelling  att8<ched. 

Fog  signaL — A  steam  horn  sounds  a  blast  of  eight  Beoonds,followed 
by  a  silent  inter  al         irty-flve  seconds. 

The  fog- sign     •  uilur      's  150  feet  SE.  of  th     i;    Aonse. 

Coast — From  abreasc  of  Inner  Duck  island  the  sonth  shore  of  Mani- 
tonlin  trends  48  (55^)  miles  ESE.  to  Owen  channel,  and  has  only  been 
partially  surveyed.  It  is  much  indented,  and  there  are  several  shoals 
a  mile  off  shore.  The  principal  bays  are  Portage,  Providence,  Michael, 
and  Thomas.  The  two  former  are  apparently  filled  with  shoals. 
Miehael  point,  the  sonthern  boundary  of  Micha^  bay,  extends  over  a 
mile  into  the  lake  and  is  continued  westward  2  (2^)  miles  as  a  narrow 
reef.  The  bight  between  Michael  and  Walker  points  is  blocked  by 
reefs.    On  the  western  end  of  Michael  point  is  a  lighthouse. 

Ifichael  Point  light — A  fixed  white  light,  visible  13  (15)  miles  in 
'  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  40  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  square, 
white  tower,  on  the  south  side  of  Grand  Manitonlin  island. 

Fog  signaL — A  hand  horn  answers  vessels'  fog  signals. 

Between  Hung^ord  point,  the  south  point  of  Manitonlin  island,  and 
eape  Hnrd,  18  (20|)  miles  to  the  southward,  are  Owen,  FitzwiIIiam,Yeo, 
Lucas,  Main,  MaoGregor,  Devil  Island,  and  Gape  Hurd  channels,  lead- 
ing into  Georgian  bay.  These  channels  are  formed  by  the  varions 
islands  in  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  and  are  described  in  StrpPLBHBNT— 
NoBTH  Channel,  and  GsosaiAN  Bat. 

ble  of  Ck»Te8  Ug^t— A  flashing  white  light,  flash  ten  seconds, 
eclipsed  fifteen  seconds,  visible  15  (174)  voiles  in  clear  weather,  is  shown 
99  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  white  drcnlar  tower  on  Gig  point, 
the  north  point  of  Cove  island. 

Fog  signal — A  steam  horn  sounds  a  blast  of  ten  seconds,  followed 
1^  a  silent  interval  of  one  hundred  and  ten  seconds. 

The  fog  horn  is  westward  of  the  lighthouse. 

Coast — Cape  Bnrd,  the  northwestern  point  of  Sangeen  peninsnla, 
extends  to  the  NW.  fit)m  the  mainland  of  Canada.  The  cape  is  low, 
flat,  and  covered  with  small  timber.  From  cape  Hnrd  the  coast  trends 
20  (23)  miles,  SB.  by  S.  to  Greenongh  point.  It  is  much  indented,  and 
is  lined  with  reefs  the  whole  distance.  From  a  point  2  (2^)  miles  north 
ei  Greenongh  point  a  reef  extends  2  (2^)  miles  southerly,  having  deep 
water  inside  it. 

Stokes  bay,  east  of  Greenough  point,  is  alinost  blocked  by  reefs. 


182 


LAKE  HUBON. 


and  in  its  entrance  is  Lyal  island,  connected  to  the  mainland,  to  the 
southward  and  eastward,  by  an  extensive  reef.  North  of  Lyal  island 
is  the  only  clear  water  in  Stokes  bay.  The  N  W.  point  of  Lyal  island  is 
marked  by  a  lighthouse. 

Lyal  light — A  revolving  white  light  every  fifteen  seconds,  visible 
12  (13^)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  51  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  from  a  square,  white  lighthouse,  with  a  dwelling  attached. 

The  light  is  a  coast  light  and  a  guide  to  Stokes  bay  and  to  a  small 
boat  harbor  close  by. 

Coast— Between  Lyal  island  and  Chiefs  point,  15  (17^)  miles  south, 
the  coast  is  lined  with  offlyiug  reefs  and  islands,  the  principal  of  which 
are  the  Ohegheto  islands.  This  part  of  the  coast  should  be  given  a 
berth  of  at  least  4^  (5)  miles. 

Between  Ohiefs  point  and  Chantry  island  the  coast  is  freer  from  reefs. 
Chantry  island  is  in  the  middle  of  an  extensive  reef  which  connects  it 
with  the  shore  and  extends  from  it  in  all  other  directions  for  over  i  mile. 

The  island  is  J  mile  long,  and  If  (2)  miles  WSW.  irom  the  mouth  of 
the  Saugeen  river.    On  the  north  point  of  the  island  is  a  lighthoui>e. 

Chantry  Island  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  15  (17^)  miles  in 
clear  weather,  is  exhibited  86  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  white, 
circular  tower  on  the  north  point  of  Chantry  island. 

Fog  signal — ^A  hand  horn  answers  vessels'  fog  signals. 

Southampton  is  at  the  month  of  the  Saugeen  river,  east  of  Chantry 
island. 

The  harbor  is  formed  by  a  breakwater  1,600  feet  long  extending 
easterly  from  the  old  breakwater  at  the  northern  end  of  the  island  and 
a  breakwater  2,000  feet  long  curving  from  the  mainland  to  within  400 
feet  of  the  end  of  the  breakwater  extending  from  Chantry  island. 
A  landing  pier  has  been  built  in  the  inner  harbor,  where  a  quantity  of 
stone  has  been  removed  from  a  shoal  adjoining  the  anchorage  ground, 
The  breakwaters  are  continuous  cribs,  filled  with  stone.  The  depth  of 
the  channel  is  reported  to  be  only  14  feet. 

Saugeen  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (11^)  miles  in  clear 
weather,  is  exhibited  30  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  mast  with  a 
brown  shed  at  the  base,  standing  on  a  crib  on  the  breakwater,  on  the 
north  side  of  the  mouth  of  the  Saugeen  river. 

It  serves  to  guide  fishing  boats  into  Saugeen  river. 

Soufhampton  Harbor  range  lights.— Front  light— Fixe^  red  to 
the  north,  white  in  the  harbor,  visible  7  (8)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is 
exhibited  29  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square  white  tower  on  the 
east  end  of  the  west  breakwater,  833  yards  NE.  J  E.  (N.  63"  B.)  from 
the  light  on  Chantry  island. 

Rear  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (11  J)  miles  in  clear 
weather,  is  exhibited  34  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  white,  square 
tower  on  the  shore  south  of  the  landing  pier,  2,100  yards  S.  by  E.  (S. 
11°  E.)  from  the  front  light. 


PORT  ELGIN — OODEBICH. 


133 


Qland,  to  the 
'  Lyal  iHlaiid 
jyal  island  is 

ionds,  visible 
ove  the  lake 
cached, 
id  to  a  small 

miles  south, 
ipal  of  which 
1  be  given  a 

er  from  reefs, 
h  connects  it 
r  over  ^  mile, 
bhe  mouth  of 
lighthoup.e. 
IH)  miles  in 
rom  a  white, 


itofOhantry 

g  extending 
te  island  and 
to  within  400 
mtry  island. 
i  quantity  of 
rage  ground, 
Ihe  depth  of 

dies  in  dear 

mast  with  a 

rater,  on  the 


Fixed  red  to 
r  weather,  is 
tower  on  the 
63"  B.)  from 

lies  in  clear 

rhite,  square 

8.byE.  (8. 


Dtreotioiia. — This  range  leads  to  the  opening  in  the  breakwater,  at 
the  north  end  of  the  harbor.  The  rear  light  must  be  opened  east  of 
the  front  light  to  clear  the  shoal  running  out  from  the  north  end  of 
Ghantry  island. 

Port  Elgin  is  in  the  bight,  3^  (4)  miles  south  of  Ghantry  island. 
The  reef  extends  northward  from  the  point  west  of  Port  Elgin  1^  (If) 
miles. 

Port  Elgin  light. — A  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  a  pole  on 
the  corner  of  a  shed  on  the  outer  end  of  the  Government  wharf. 

Coast — From  west  of  Port  Elgin  the  coast  trends  8  (9J)  miles  8W. 
to  Douglas  point,  and  should  not  be  approached  closer  than  1^  (If) 
miles  on  account  of  the  reefs  which  line  it  At  2  (2^)  miles  south  of 
Douglas  point  is  Inverhufon,  at  the  mouth  of  a  small  stream.  It  has 
one  pier  450  feet  in  length,  with  14  feet  at  the  outer  end.  From  here 
the  coast  trends  7  (8)  miles  SSW.  to  Kincardine,  where  there  is  a  small 
stream. 

BUncardine  range  lights.— Pront  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible 
8  (94)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  shown  37-  feet  above  the  lake  level 
from  a  square,  white  tower  on  the  north  pier. 

Main  (rear)  light,  1,185  feet  ESE.  (8.  68°  E.)  of  front  light,  is  an 
alternating  red  and  white  light  every  twenty  seconds,  visible  14  (16) 
miles  in  clear  weather.  It  is  exhibited  76  feet  above  the  lake  level 
iW>m  a  fawn-colored  octagonal  tower,  dwelling  attached,  on  a  high 
stone  foundation  on  the  hillside  in  the  town  of  Kincardine. 

The  front  light  is  visible  in  the  direction  of  the  range.  The  rear 
light  is  visible  from  all  points  seaward. 

The  range  leads  somewhat  to  the  northward  of  the  head  of  the  north 
pier. 

Point  Clark  is  7^  (8§)  miles  SW.  from  Kincardine  light,  the  coast 
between  being  bordered  by  a  reef  which  extends  a  mile  off  shore  in 
places.  Tiiere  is  a  reef  extending  from  the  point  1^  (If)  miles  west- 
erly, and  south  3  (3^)  miles  of  point  Glark  is  a  similar  reef.  On  point 
Glark  is  a  lighthouse. 

Point  Clark  light— A  revolving  white  light,  every  thirty  seconds, 
visible  15  (17^)  miles  in  clear  weather,  is  exhibited  87  feet  above  the 
lake  level  from  a  white,  circular  tower. 

Port  Albert  at  the  mouth  of  Nine-mile  river,  is  8  (9|)  miles  south 
of  the  last-mentioned  reef,  and  Goderich,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Maitland 
river,  is  8  (9^)  miles  south  of  Port  Albert.  All  this  xK>rtion  of  the  coast 
can  bo  approached  with  safety  to  ^  mile. 

Qoderich,  a  harbor  of  refuge,  is  an  inoloserl  basin,  with  a  channel 
cut  through  the  beach  connecting  it  with  deep  water  in  lake  Huron. 
The  sides  of  the  channel  are  protected  by  two  piers  extending  west  into 
the  lake;  the  north  pier  has  an  extension  to  the  ISW.  The  width 
between  the  piers  is  200  feet ;  depth  about  16  feet.  There  is  an  artificial 
bank  between  the  Maitland  river  and  the  harbor,  the  river  discharging 


-;;■   i 


ait«8gi»MB»EiM;:- 


;fl 


134 


LAKE   HUROK. 


into  the  lake  through  the  north  beach,  aud  not  into  the  harbor. 
There  are  clay  banks  from  GO  to  120  feet  high  on  each  side  of  the 
harbor.    Good  anchorage  off  the  piers;  clay  bottom. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul. 

Dims. — Tonnage  dnes  range  from  50  cents  to  $5. 

fiUgiud  station. — ^There  is  a  storm  signal  station  in  the  harbor. 

Gk>derieh  Main  light— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  18  (20|)  miles 
iu  etoar  weather,  is  exhibited  160  feet  above  the  lake  level  Arom  a  square, 
white  tower,  dwelling  attaohed,  on  the  high  bank  south  of  the  entrance 
to  the  harbor. 

Fog  signal — An  8-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  ten  seconds' 
duration,  followed  by  a  silent  interval  of  fifty  seconds. 

The  fog  signal  is  on  the  town  waterworks  building  on  the  bcach^  SB. 
by  E.  i  E.  from  the  outer  end  of  the  north  breakwater.  It  is  30  feet 
above  the  water,  aud  maintained  by  a  corporation. 

Gtoderich  range  lights— Front  light— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  5 
(5|>  miles  in  clear  weatlier,  is  exhibited  45  feet  above  the  lake  level 
from  a  6(iuare,  white,  open-frauiework  tower  on  the  north  pier  about 
117  feet  fk-om  its  outer  extremity. 

Rear  light — A  fixed  green  light,  visible  5  (5f )  miles  in  clear  weather, 
is  exhibited  34  feet  above  the  lake  level  from  a  square,  white  tower  on 
the  north  pier,  1,500  feet  E.  f  S.  from  the  front  light. 

These  lights  in  range  E.  $  S.  (S.  82°  E.)  lead  to  the  head  of  the 
breakwater. 

ZiifB-saving  station  is  between  the  breakwaters. 

Basrfleldi,  at  the  month  of  Bayfield  river,  is  10  (11^)  miles  south  of 
€k>derich.  There  is  a  harbor  composed  of  two  piers  aud  a  basin.  The 
north  pier  is  820  feet  and  the  south  875  feet  long,  with  a  width  of  200 
feet  between  them.    Depth  of  water  at  the  entrance,  10  feet. 

Lake  View  is  13  (15)  miles  south  of  Bayfield,  and  here  the  coast 
oommenoes  to  bend  to  the  westward  to  cape  Ipperwash,  the  end  of 
which  is  16  (174)  mUes  SW.  by  W.  (8. 50°  N.)  from  Lake  View.  The 
reef  extends  as  the  cape  is  approached,  and  suiTonnds  the  cape  for  a 
distance  of  1^  (If)  miles.  It  is  a  dangerous  reef,  having  only  5  feet  of 
water  a  mile  from  the  cape  aud  from  12  to  16  feet  at  its  outer  extremi- 
ties, between  cape  Ipperwash  and  Harris  point  there  are  bowlders 
and  rooky  points  within  a  mile  of  the  shore.  The  reef  continues  2  (2^) 
milee  south  of  Harris  point.  At  Errol  the  coast  changes  direction  to 
the  westward,  and  becomes  steep-to  as  far  as  the  oitranoe  to  the  St. 
Olair  river,  a  distance  of  9  (lOj^)  iiiles. 

Point  Bdward  range  lights  (iirivate  lights).— Two  fixed  lights, 
white  over  red,  fure  shown  from  ^ligh  open-framework  towers,  which  are 
oonspicuous  day  marks.  The  range  is  S.  j  E.  (3.  8°  E.),  and  leads  450 
liMt  west  of  Northwest  shoal,  the  most  we^»rly  of  the  slioal  spots. 


the  harbor, 
side  of  the 


liarbor. 
(  (20f )  milett 
om  a  sqaare, 
the  euirauce 

ten  seconds' 

e  boach^  SE. 
It  is  30  feet 

:ht,  visible  5 
le  lake  level 
1  pier  about 

lear  weather, 
lite  tower  on 

head  of  the 


ilea  south  of 
.  basin.  The 
width  of  200 
e(. 

re  the  coast 
L,  the  end  of 
View.  The 
16  cape  for  a 
>nly  5  feet  of 
Iter  extremi- 
ae  bowlders 
itinues  2  (2^) 
diroetion  to 
le  to  the  St. 

fixed  lii^ts, 
rs,  which  are 
nd  leads  450 
»al  spots. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

ST.  CliAIR  AND  DETROIT  RIVERS,  AND  I^KE  ST.  CLAIR. 

ST.  CLAIR  RIVER, 

St.  Clair  river,  the  ootlet  of  lake  Huron,  oommenoes  at  the  southern 
end  of  this  lake,  where  the  shores  of  the  United  States  and  Canada 
nearly  meet.  This  river,  in  connection  with  lake  St.  Clair  and  the 
Detroit  river,  forms  the  link  between  lakes  Huron  and  Erie.  It  is  39 
(46)  miles  in  length,  counting  from  the  ^-foot  curve  in  lake  Huron  to 
the  20  foot  curve  in  lake  St.  Clair.  As  the  proposed  improvementH  by 
dredging  will  form  a  continuous  deep  channel  between  these  curves,  it 
is  but  right  to  class  them  with  the  river  proper,  which  extends  from 
Fort  Oratiot  to  the  mouth  of  the  South  channel. 

The  proposed  channel,  from  the  20-foot  enrve  in  lake  Huron  into  the 
river  and  terminating  just  inside  of  Fort  Gratiot  lighthouse,  is  to  have 
a  depth  of  21  feet,  with  a  length  of  2,400  feet  at  the  Huron  end,  which 
will  be  continued  to  the  deep  water  in  the  St.  Clair  river.  January, 
1886,  the  eastern  half  of  the  channel  had  been  completed.  Thence 
through  the  river  the  navigation  is  easy  until  leaving  the  South  channel, 
when  the  flats  are  encountered. 

NOBTHBBN  APPROACH  TO  ST.  CLAIR  RIVER. 

From  Lak^wrt,  in  Michigan,  the  coast  of  lake  Huron  trends  SSE.  i 
E.  to  the  mouth  of  the  St  Clair  river,  and  the  coast  can  be  approached 
within  f  mile  until  near  Lake  Huron  l^btvessel,  when  the  ranges  must 
be  taken  up  for  entering  the  river. 

From  Errol,  on  the  Canadian  side,  the  wm*  trends  W.  by  S.,  and  it  is 
safe  to  approach  within  ^  mile  until  close  to  Fort  Gratiot  lighthouse. 

In  the  approach  to  the  river,  if  coming  firom  the  northward,  vessels  of 
light  draft  should  pftss  dose  to  the  lightvessel,  keeping  it  to  port  Ves- 
sel of  greater  draft  can  find  deepar  water  by  keeping  the  lightvessel 
to  starboard  1^  (IJ)  mUes  away  and  continuing  to  ap^oach  the 
Caaadian  shore  until  Fort  Gratiot  light  bears  SW.  by  W.  i  W.  (8.  50° 
W.),  distant  2  (24)  miles,  whence  a  course  WSW.  i  W.  (8.  70°  W.)  wUl 
lead  through  4  fathoms  untQ  the  Fwrt  Gratiot  range  is  made,  on  which 
range  vessels  should  enter  the  river.  When  fee  chtuiuel  is  cut  fcom 
t^e  lake  into  the  river  all  vessels  can  use  it 

If  oondng  firom  the  eastward,  vessels  should  bring  Fort  Gratiot  light 

18B 


136 


BT.  OLAIB  BIVER. 


to  bear  8W.  by  W.  J  W.  (8. 89°  W.),  distant  2  {2\)  miles,  and  then  keep 
a  course  of  W8W.  ^  W,  (8.  70°  W.),  antil  ou  tbe  Fort  Giutiot  rauge. 

At  the  entrance  of  the  river  are  Oratiot  (United  8tate8)  and  Huron 
(Canadian),  while  just  within  the  entrance  is  I'ort  Huron,  Mich.,  and 
Sarnia,  Ontario. 

The  lights  at  the  entrance  to  the  river  are  given  iu  the  previous 
chapter. 

Dry  dooka. — At  port  Huron  are  docks  of  210  and  412  feet  over  all, 
with  widths  of  gates  32  and  G2  feet,  and  depths  over  sills  of  13  and  18 
feet. 

DIBBOTIONS  FOB  ST.  CLAIB  BIVEB. 

Fort  Oratiot  range. — On  tbe  west  bank  of  this  river  and  near  the 
Grand  Trunk  Bailway  freight  house  and  dock  at  Fort  Gratiot  is  n  fixed 
red  light,  shown  from  a  telegraph  pole  surmounted  by  a  white  triangle 
for  a  day  mark.    The  light  is  57  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

About  300  feet  88W.  J  W.  (8.  31°  W.)  is  a  second  red  light  at  a 
height  of  80  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  shown  from  a  white  pyramidal 
framework  tower  with  a  day  mark  14  feet  long  and  10  feet  wide. 

This  range  will  carry  deep  water  into  the  river  and  clear  the  20-foot 
spot  lying  300  yards  8E.  from  Fort  Gratiot  lighthouse. 

After  passing  this  20-foot  spot  a  mid-channel  course  should  be  kept 
until  near  the  nonth  of  Black  river,  when  the  deepest  water  will  be 
found  near  the  Canadian  shore.  A  shoal  makes  out  fi*om  the  month 
of  Black  river  1,200  yards  to  the  southward,  with  a  greatest  widtli  of 
600  yards.  Twelve  feet  can  be  carried  over  this  shoal,  but  a  lookout 
must  be  kept  for  some  spots  of  gravel  and  rock,  on  which  there  are  but 
10  feet. 

Buoy. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  15  feet  of  water  to  mark  tbe 
easterly  side  of  this  shoal. 

Oantion  as  to  Anchoraga — From  Fort  Gratiot  light  to  below  the 
rapids  the  holding  ground  is  rocky  and  bad.  Off  Port  Huron  and 
Sarnia  it  is  clay  and  good.  Vessels  should  anchor  as  close  to  shore  as 
safety  will  permit,  so  as  to  leave  the  mid-channel  clear  for  passing 
vessels. 

Black  river. — If  intending  to  enter  this  river  it  is  well  to  know  that 
a  channel  has  been  dredged  from  the  8t.  Clair  river  to  Washington 
avenue.  The  width  varies  from  150  feet  at  the  mouth  to  60  feet  at  the 
upper  end.  In  January,  1896,  the  available  depth  at  low  water  near 
the  month  was  scant  15  feet,  and  near  the  upper  limit  of  improvements 
about  9  feet. 

Having  cleared  the  shoal  off  Black  river,  a  mid-channel  course  will 
carry  deep  water  until  approaching  Stag  island,  which,  with  the  shoals 
projecting  fr^m  its  north  and  south  ends,  divides  the  river  and  forms 
two  narrow  but  deep  channels,  through  either  of  which  deep  water  can 
be  carried,  remembering  that  in  the  Michigan  side  channel  there  is  a 
15-foot  spot  a  little  below  Stag  island  and  nearer  to  the  Michigan  shore. 
The  Canadian  channel  is  clear. 


8TA0   ISLAND — WOODTICK   ISLAND. 


187 


hiid  then  keep 
iitiot  raiigv. 
i)  and  Uuron 
D,  Mich,,  niid 

the  previous 

feet  over  all, 
of  13  and  18 


aid  near  tiie 
tiot  is  a  flxed 
hite  triangle 

d  light  at  a 
te  pyramidal 
wide. 
X  the  20foot 

ould  be  kept 
rater  will  be 
1  the  month 
;est  w  id  til  of 
nt  a  lookout 
here  are  but 

to  mark  the 

0  below  the 

Huron  and 

» to  shore  as 

for  passing 

0  know  that 
Washington 
)  feet  at  the 

water  near 
provementa 

.  course  will 

1  the  shoals 
'  and  forms 
p  water  cau 
}1  there  is  a 
dgan  shore. 


Conmiui  range  (Canadian).— ThL>  ft-ont  light,  a  fixed  white  light,  is 
shown  from  a  white,  skeleton-framed  tower  with  an  iiuilosod  top,  the 
side  facing  the  water  being  slatted.  It  is  18  feet  abovu  high  water  and 
visible  4  (l^)  miles. 

The  rear  light,  a  flxed  white  light,  07  feet  almve  high  wiiter,  visible 
4  (4A)  miles,  stands  i568  feet  8.  by  E,  ^  E.  (8.  13°  E.)  from  the  front 
light.    It  is  shown  from  a  square  white  tower. 

Both  of  these  towers  are  in  the  village  of  Corunna,  the  fr«mt  light 
being  near  the  old  wharf  at  the  foot  of  Fane  street,  while  the  rear 
light  is  on  the  west  side  of  Beresford  street.  Tho  course  8.  13°  E. 
carries  through  the  best  water  in  the  Canadian  channel  past  the 
shoals  at  the  head  of  Stag  island,  as  also  past  the  shoals  off  the  mouth 
of  Talfords  creek. 

Stag  island  is  about  li^  (1^)  miles  long,  with  shoals  exteiding 
northward  from  its  north  end  for  nearly  J  iDi^e,  and  southward  from 
the  south  end  f  mile. 

Buoys. — Near  the  north  end  of  the  northern  shoak  a  ret  and  black 
horizontally  striped  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  16  f^^et  watej ,  The.  s)-  >al 
extends  a  short  distance  north  from  this  buoy.  A  similar  but  '  is 
moored  in  12  feet  water  on  the  south  end  of  the  southern  shoal 

Cantion.— A  short  distance  to  the  southward  from  this  buoy  lue  two 
shoal  spots  of  17  feet  water,  and  one  of  the  same  dept?  v,\.  jt  from  the 
buoy  and  nearly  in  mid-channel  on  the  Michigan  side. 

Having  passed  the  shoals  near  Stag  island,  deep  water  continues  for 
IJ  (1§)  miles  to  a  shoal  nearly  in  mid-channel  and  extending  from  off 
Mooretown,  Canada,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Pine  river,  Mich.  The  shoal 
water  extends  for  a  distance  of  nearly  1,^  (1^)  miles,  with  a  least  depth, 
opposite  St.  Clair,  of  4  feet.  The  shoal  is  marked  by  tw  n  buoys,  and  is 
known  as  St  Clair  middle  ground. 

Bnoya.— A  spar  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  is 
moored  near  the  north  end  of  this  shoal  in  16  feet  of  water,  and  is 
about  660  yards  W.  J  S.  from  the  mouth  of  Baby  creek,  Canada. 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes,  is  moored 
near  the  south  end  of  this  shoal  in  17  fe'»t  of  water,  and  is  about  450 
yards  ENE.  from  the  north  side  of  the  ut  i"  of  Pine  river. 

Pine  river. — This  river  empties  into  the  iit,  Clair  river  at  St.  Clair. 
There  is  a  dredged  channel  from  its  mouth  to  ^he  shipyard,  10  feet 
deep  and  from  75  to  100  feet  wide. 

From  the  shoals  off  Pine  river  the  channel  is  clear  until  Marine  City 
is  reached,  a  distance  of  8f  (7^)  miles.  Off  Marine  City,  and  just  to 
the  northward  of  Woodtick  (Fawn)  island,  is  a  shoal  nearly  one  mile 
long,  with  a  least  deptL  of  16  feet,  and  not  buoyed.  The  main  channel 
is  on  the  Michigan  side  until  Woodtick  island  is  passed,  and  there  is  a 
narrow  channel  on  the  Canadian  side. 

Woodtick  island. — This  island,  with  its  shoals,  is  1^  (1^)  miles  long 
by  I  mile  wide;  the  shoals  are  marked  by  buoys.    There  is  a  channel  on 


138 


ST.   CLAIR   RIYEB. 


either  side  of  the  island,  that  of  the  United  States  being  the  straightest 
and  widest  and  most  frequently  used. 

BuojTB.— A  spar  buoy,  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  is 
moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  shoal  extending  north  from  Woodtick 
island  and  about  900  yards  from  the  northera  end  of  that  island;  the 
shoal  extends  to  the  northward  beyond  the  buoy. 

A  spar  buoy,  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  is  moored 
in  13  feet  of  water  on  the  end  of  the  shoal  extending  to  the  southward 
from  Woodtick  Island,  and  is  about  700  yards  from  the  south  point  of 
that  island. 

From  the  buoy  off  the  south  end  of  Woodtick  island  a  mid-channel 
course  can  be  kept  until  off  Babys  point. 

Belle  river.— This  river,  on  the  Michigan  side,  empties  into  the  S*. 
Clair  river  just  above  the  northerly  end  of  Woodtick  island,  and  in  the 
south  end  of  Marine  City.  It  has  a  (hedged  channel  50  feet  wide  and 
about  10  feet  deep  from  the  mouth  to  the  first  bridge,  and  thence  to 
the  Broadway  bridge  a  vessel  can  carry  9  feet. 

Chenal  Ecart^  (Canadian)  is  one  of  the  seven  months  of  the  St.  Clair 
river,  and  at  Babys  point  takes  its  direction  to  the  southeastward.  It 
is  very  narrow,  and  navigable  for  vessels  drawing  16  feet.  About  5 
(5f)  miles  from  Babys  point  a  second  dliannel  (Johnston)  makes  off 
to  the  southward. 

About  3  (3J)  miles  farther  on  Bear  creek  empties  into  Chenal  Ecart^. 
Neither  of  the  channels  lead  into  deep  water. 

South  channeL — Before  the  construetion  of  this  canal  the  St  Clair 
river  emptied  into  lake  St.  Clair  through  seven  principal  mouths  or 
passes,  the  one  most  used  being  the  Sooth  channel.  Where  the  river 
runs  into  lake  St.  Clair  there  were  formerly  numerous  shoals  and  flats; 
this  has  been  remedied  by  the  building  of  diJces  and  dredging,  a^  a 
straight  channel  made  carrying  20  feet. 

St  Clair  Flats  canaL — ^The  northern  or  river  end  of  the  channel  has 
a  bottom  width  of  650  feet,  and  from  that  narrows  gradually  until  the 
eanal  is  reached.  Between  the  dikes  a  depth  of  20  feet  is  to  be  main- 
tained with  a  width  of  300  feet  for  a  distance  of  7,221  feet.  From  tJ» 
lake  end  of  the  dikes  the  width  increases  gradually  until  a  bottom  width 
of  800  feet  is  attained,  and  this  width  is  continued  to  the  20'iootemve, 

FROM  BABYS  POINT  THBOUaH  SOUTB  CHANNEL. 

For  the  South  Channel  range  lights,  see  latest  United  States  List  of 
Lights  aud  Fog  Signals  on  the  l^orthem  Lakes  and  Rivers. 

Directions. — Keep  a  mid-channel  course  from  Babys  point  vntA  the 
npp«r  range  (No.  12-No.  11)  is  made,  when  bring  this  range  a  little  oh 
the  starboard  bow,  giving  the  buoy  (red  tmd  black  horizontal  stripes, 
in  16  feet  water,  900  yards  from  No.  12  light)  a  clearance  of  at  least  | 
mile.  If  the  range  is  kept  it  will  carry  into  14  feet  watw.  Con<tiiine 
as  above  until  the  Bassel  Island  (No.  11)  light  is  abeaia,  when  the  eopme 


«iC»»£fil£i£k£)Kei'L--l»« 


the  straightest 

mtai  stripes,  is 
from  Woodtick 
liat  island;  the 

[pes,  is  moored 

the  southward 

south  point  of 

a  mid-channel 

ies  into  the  Sk. 
and,  and  in  tho 

>  feet  wide  and 
,  and  thenee  to 

oftbeStChuf 
leastward.  It 
'eet.  About  5 
ion)  makes  off 

Dhenal  Ecart^. 

J  the  St  Glair 
pal  mouths  or 
'here  the  river 
oals  and  flats; 
edging,  a^  a 

lie  channel  has 
lally  until  the 
is  to  be  main- 
«t.  From  titer 
k  bottom  width 

>  2O'fo0t  eurve. 

States  Litt  of 
trs. 

point  vntA  the 
Age  a  little  oh 
zoutal  Btripes, 
9  of  at  least  | 
tex.  Oonitinne 
iieiithe«opn|6 


DIRECTIONS. 


139 


should  be  gradually  changed  to  the  southwestward  until  the  lower 
rauge  (No.  10-No.  11)  on  ftussel  island  is  made  astern.  This  range 
should  be  made  about  J  mile  below  the  lower  light,  No.  10,  and  the 
range  then  carried  to  a  little  below  Fish  dock,  when  will  be  made  the 
Herson  Island  lower  range  (No.  8-No.  7).  Soon  after  heading  on  this 
range  the  Squirrel  Shoal  buoy  (red  spar,  moored  in  17  feet  water  to 
mark  a  shoal  on  which  there  is  a  depth  of  13  feet)  should  be  made. 

Wreck. — A  schooner  lies  sunk  in  30  feet  water  about  150  feet  from 
the  west  bank  of  the  river  and  about  2,400  feet  SW.  from  Squirrel 
Island  buoy. 

When  abreast  of  this  buoy  the  course  should  be  changed  gradually 
to  the  southward,  keeping  closer  to  the  Michigan  shore  for  the  deeper 
water.  When  a  little  below  the  red  light,  No.  7,  of  the  lower  range, 
Squirrel  Island  buoy  (red  spar,  moored  in  11  feet  water  to  mark  the 
edge  of  the  flat  off  Squirrel  island)  should  be  seen,  and  when  it  bears 
nearly  South  the  upper  range  (No.  8-No.  9)  should  be  brought  on 
astern,  and  kept  until  off  Bassett  channel  and  Southeast  Bend  upper 
light,  No.  6.  This  light  shows  white  upstream,  and  when  it  changes  to 
red  the  course  should  be  gradually  changed  to  the  SW.  for  rounding 
the  Southeast  bend.  A  mid-channel  course  should  be  kept  past  the 
next  two  lights — Southeast  Bend  middle,  No.  5,  and  Southeast  Bend 
lower,  No.  4.  This  light  (No.  4)  shows  red  upstream,  changing  to 
white  at  the  time  a  vessel  should  change  its  course  to  take  the  ran;  ; 
No.  3-No.  2.  This  range  will  carry  nearly  a  mid-cbannel  course 
through  the  upper  part  of  the  Lower  reach,  but  do  not  go  too  close  to 
the  Canadian  side.  A  vessel  keeping  to  the  northward  of  a  line  join- 
ing lights  Nos.  4  and  1  will  koep  off  the  shoals.  Do  not  go  to  the 
northward  of  a  line  joining  lights  Nos.  3  and  4,  but  ou  approaching 
that  line,  if  on  the  range,  the  course  can  be  gradually  changed  to  the 
west,  and  a  mid-channel  course  will  carry  past  the  lights  until  the 
lower  range  (No.  1-No.  2)  is  nearly  made  astern. 

Vessels  should  not  go  westward  of  this  range,  but  should  keep  close 
to  it  until  nearing  the  Star  Island  hotel,  when  a  course  more  in  mid- 
channel  should  be  kept. 

When  §  mile  to  the  southwestward  of  Star  Island  hotel,  a  course 
SW.  I  8.  (S.  41°  W.),  with  the  lighthouse  on  the  upper  end  of  the  west 
pier  of  the  United  States  ship  canal  nearly  ahead,  will  carry  in  deep 
water  to  the  canal.  At  this  entrance  to  the  canal  the  width  is  296  feet. 
There  is  a  light  on  each  end  of  the  west  pier. 

St.  Clair  Flats  Canal  lights.— A  fixed  red  light,  visible  11|  (13) 
miles,  and  45  feet  above  the  river  level,  is  shown  from  an  octagonal 
tower  rising  from  the  corner  of  a  dwelling,  both  being  built  of  led 
brick.    It  is  on  the  NE.  end  of  the  west  pier. 

A  fixed  red  light,  visible  11^  (13)  miles,  shown  from  the  same  descrip- 
tion of  tower  and  ait  the  same  height  above  the  lake  level)  is  on  the 
S W.  end  of  the  west  piw  in  lake  St.  Qlair. 


140 


LAKE  ST.  GLAIB. 


LAKE  ST.  CLAIR. 

Laki  St.  Olair  is  of  irregular  shape,  being  23  (26J)  miles  long  from 
New  Baltimore  on  tlie  north  to  Belle  river  on  the  south,  and  21  (24) 
wide  miles  across  its  southern  part  in  an  east  and  west  direction. 

Anchor  bay,  the  northwestern  section  of  the  lake,  is  cut  off  by  a  bar, 
with  a  least  depth  of  8  feet  over  it  at  the  center.  This  bar  extends 
across  from  the  mouth  of  the  Olinton  river  to  the  mouth  of  the  Ohenal 
Aboutrond. 

Anchor  bay  can  be  approached  through  the  north  channel,  but  it  has 
a  bar  of  8  feet  least  water  at  its  mouth. 

New  Baltimore  and  Fairhaven  are  on  the  north  shore  of  the  bay,  the 
former  having  8  feet  and  the  latter  6  feet  off  the  ends  of  the  wharves. 

At  7  (8)  miles  south  of  New  Baltimore  is  Huron  point,  with  shoal 
water  off  it.  From  here  to  Milk  Eiver  point  there  is  but  12  feet  of 
water  1  (IJ)  mile  from  shore.  From  here  to  Windmill  point  vessels 
drawing  12  feet  should  not  approach  the  shore  nearer  than  |  mile.  On 
the  south  shore  Belle  River  station  is  the  only  town  of  any  size  between 
the  Detroit  river  and  the  Thames  river.  The  12.foot  curve  is  from  1 
to  1,^  (2 J)  miles  off  this  coast 

The  Thames  at  the  SE.  end  of  this  lake  is  the  only  river  of  any  impor- 
tance on  the  Ganadian  side,  and  at  its  mouth  are  range  lights. 

Thames  River  lights.— A  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  (13j^)  miles, 
is  shown  from  a  circular  white  tower.  It  is  on  the  south  shore  of  the 
mouth  of  the  river. 

A  fixed  white  light,  visible  6  (7)  miles,  is  shown  from  a  square  red 
tower.  It  is  300  feet  NW.  ^  N.  (N.  39°  W.)  from  the  main  light.  These 
two  lights  in  one  lead  over  the  bar.    This  bar  has  a  least  depth  of  7  feet. 

From  the  Thames  river  the  coast  trends  nearly  north  to  Mitchel  point 
and  north  and  west  of  the  point  is  Mitchel  bay. 

From  the  east  shore  the  12-foot  curve  averages  the  same  distance  as 
it  does  from  the  south  shore. 

The  north  shore  from  Mitchel  point  to  the  United  States  ship  canal  is 
low  and  marshy,  with  shoal  water  extending  off  over  If  (2)  miles. 

The  course  from  the  month  of  the  ship  canal  to  the  bar  of  the  Thames 
river  is  SE. 

The  middle  of  this  lake  has  an  average  depth  of  3^  fathoms,  mud 
and  clay. 

Grosse  Poirte  flats  extend  into  lake  St.  Olair  from  the  head  of  the 
Detroit  river. 

On  these  flats  at  the  ordinary  stage  of  the  lakes  a  depth  of  16  feet 
can  be  carried,  but  during  low  water  it  is  difficult  to  carry  more  than 
16  feet. 

A  channel  800  feet  wide  and  20  feet  deep  has  been  cut  through  the 
flats  from  the  20-foot  contour  in  lake  St.  Olair  to  the  Detroit  river. 

Grosse  Pointe  Ugfatressel,  No.  10,  is  moored  about  1^  (2)  miles 
east  of  Orosse  pointe. 


:^ff 


ilea  long  from 
b,  aud  21  (24) 
irection. 
t  off  by  a  bar, 
s  bar  extends 
of  the  Ohenal 

lel,  but  it  has 

f  the  bay,  the 
the  wharves, 
it,  with  shoal 
)ut  12  feet  of 
point  vessels 
Q  ^  mile.  On 
'  size  between 
irve  is  from  1 

of  any  impor- 

ghts. 

(13j^)  miles, 
shore  of  the 

a  square  red 
light.  These 
)pth  of  7  feet. 
Mitchel  point 

le  distance  as 

ship  canal  is 
2)  miles, 
f  the  Thames 

'athoms,  mud 

e  head  of  the 

}th  of  16  feet 
ry  more  than 

through  the 
oit  river. 
It^  (2)  miles 


LAKE  ST.  GLAIB — ^DXBECTIONB. 


141 


The  lightvessel  is  a  scow  with  one  mast,  with  a  circular  cage- work 
day  mark  at  the  masthead.  The  hull  is  painted  red  with  the  name  in 
large  black  letters  on  each  side,  and  N^o.  10  on  the  stern.  The  day 
mark  and  topmast  are  painted  black. 

The  light  is  fixed  white,  25  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  in 
clear  weather  lOJ  (11|)  miles. 

Fog  signal — During  thick  weather  a  bell  is  rung. 

Windmill  Point  light — A  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  red  flash 
every  fifteen  seconds,  visible  12f  (14J)  miles,  is  exhibited,  55  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  from  a  conical  white  tower  connected  v/ith  a  red  brick 
dweUing  by  a  covered  way.  The  tower  is  on  Windmill  point,  the  north 
side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Detroit  river. 

Lights. — The  following  lantern  lights  are  shown  from  pile  clusters  to 
mark  the  20-foot  channel  into  the  Detroit  river.  They  are  maintained 
by  the  Lake  Carriers'  Association. 

Lower  entrance  beacon. — A  fixed  white  light,  15f  feet  above  lake 
level,  on  the  pile  cluster  on  the  SE.  side  of  the  channel  at  the  lower 
entrance,  on  the  following  bearing:  Wiudwill  Point  lighthouse  WSW. 
J  W.  (S.  73°  W.),  distant  about  1  ^  (1|)  miles. 

Middle  beacon. — A  fixed  white  light,  15f  feet  above  lake  level,  on 
the  SE.  side  of  the  channel,  on  the  following  bearing:  Windmill  Point 
lighthouse  SW.  by  W.  f  W.  (S.  65°  W.),  distant  2-i%  (2^1^)  miles. 

Upper  beacon. — A  fixed  white  light,  15|  feet  above  lake  level,  on 
the  SE.  side  of  the  channel,  on  the  following  bearing:  Outer  end  of 
Fishers  dock  W.  J  S.  (8. 87°  W.),  distant  If  (l^)  mUes. 

DIBEOTIONS  ACROSS  LAKE  ST.  OLAIB. 

From  the  lighthouse  on  the  SW.  end  of  the  west  pier  a  course  of  SW. 
(S.  46°  W.)  for  IOt^  (12)  miles  will  carry  to  the  Grosse  Pointe  light- 
vessel,  which  leaves  to  port.  The  pile  beacons  by  day  and  lights  at 
night  mark  the  SE.  side  of  the  channel  into  the  Detroit  river. 

DETROIT  RIVER. 

From  the  southern  end  of  Groase  Pointe  channel  to  the  southern  end 
of  the  ship  canal  below  Amherstburg  this  river  is  27f  (32)  miles  long, 
with  a  navigable  depth  of  water  for  large  vessels  of  from  ^  to  ^  mile  in 
width  until  the  vicinity  of  Ballards  Beef  lightvessel  is  reached,  whence 
the  channel  narrows  decidedly  and  is  filled  with  shoal  spots  having  but 
17  feet  of  water  on  them. 

These  spots  are  about  the  center  of  the  main  channel  and  extend 
from  the  lightvessel  to  Fort  Maiden.  The  channel  from  Fort  Maiden  on 
is  narrow,  about  ^  mile,  until  |  mile  below  Bois  Blanc  lighthouse;  thence 
to  the  cut  which  is  to  be  dredged  through  the  bar  the  channel  wideus. 
This  cut  is  to  be  800  feet  wide  and  to  carry  a  depth  of  21  feet  from  the 
Detroit  river  into  lake  Erie.    It  has  been  completed  for  half  its  width. 

Detroit —The  city  of  Detroit  is  near  the  head  of  the  Detroit  river, 
and  has  deep  water  alongside  the  numerons  wharves. 


■■miiiHil 


^VX^SSt-tMS^SiS 


JH^^fi^fSggig 


142 


DETROIT  RTVEB. 


Dry  docks. — The  Detroit  Dry  Dock  Ootnpany  has  two  timber  docks, 
as  also  has  the  Clarke  Dry  Dock  Company.  The  largest  clock  is  365 
feet  on  blocks,  378  feet  over  all;  width,  gate  79  feet,  top  90  feet,  and 
depth  on  sill,  16  feet. 

Weatiier  signal  statloa— The  United  States  Weather  Barean  has 
a  special  station  at  Stanley  B.  Smith's  coal  dock,  5  miles  below  Detroit. 

Amherstburg  (Canadian)  is  on  the  Detroit  river  near  lake  Erie,  the 
deei>- water  channel  of  the  river  imssing  in  front  of  the  city. 

Note. — For  the  description  of  lights  and  ranges  in  the  Detroit  river 
see  the  latest  United  States  List  of  Lights  and  Fog  Signals  for  the 
Northern  Lakes  and  Waters. 

DIBBOTIONS  FOB  THE  DETBOIT  BIYEB. 

Isle  anz  Peches  buoy. — ^A  spar  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  in  16 
feet  of  water  on  the  edge  of  the  shoal,  extending  from  the  west  end  of 
the  Isle  aux  Peches. 

Belle  Isle  (east  end)  buoy.— A  spar  buoy,  painted  red  and  black 
in  horiasontal  stripes,  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  east  point  of 
the  shoal  off  the  head  of  Belle  isle.  It  is  also  a  mark  for  the  division 
of  the  channel,  which  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  Belle  isle. 

MAIN  OHAITNEL. 

A  vessel  having  passed  through  Orosse  Pointe,  channel  should  steer 
to  pass  4  luile  Arom  Windmill  Point  light,  and  when  this  light  is  abeam 
a  course  SW.  by  W.  f  W.  (S.  65°  W.)  will  carry  between  Windmill 
point  and  Isle  aux  Peches,  which  island  is  surrounded  by  shoal  water, 
with  a  spit  off  the  west  end.  Keep  the  coarse  8.  ft5o  W.  until  the 
Windmill  Point  range  comes  on,  when  bring  it  astern  and  stand  SW. 
(S.  45°  W.)  between  Isle  aux  Peches  and  Belle  Isle  buoys  until  Belle 
Isle  light  is  abeam.  From  here  a  mid-channel  course  can  be  kept  past 
Detroit  until  near  Fighting  island. 

NOBTHEBN  OHAimEL. 

Scott  Middle  Oronnd  bnoys.— No.  6  is  a  spar  buoy,  painted  red, 
moored  in  18  feet  of  water  on  the  north  point  of  this  middle  ground. 

A  mid-channel  course  should  be  kept  past  buoys  Nos.  4  and  2.  No. 
4  is  a  spar  buoy,  moored  in  24  feet  of  water  on  the  NW.  point  of  the 
middle  ground.  No.  2  is  a  spar  buoy,  moored  in  11  feet  of  water  just 
above  the  Belie  Isle  bridge. 

A  vessel  taking  the  northern  channel  should,  when  Windmill  Point 
light  is  abeam,  distant  |  mile,  steer  a  course  W.  f  S.  (S.  86°  W.)  until 
close  to  the  Scott  Middle  Ground  Upper  End  buoy.  Pass  this  buoy, 
as  also  buoys  No.  4  and  No.  2,  in  mid-channd,  leaving  them  to  port,  and 
then  through  the  draw  of  Belle  Isle  bridge,  after  which  a  course  dose 
to  Detroit  will  clear  the  spit  extending  west  from  Belle  isle  and  marked 
at  its  extremity  by  a  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  buoy  mowed 
in  13  feet  water.  Leave  this  uuoy  to  port,  after  jtassing  which  »  mid- 
ohan<~  r  I  course  cmi  be  taken  until  near  Fighting  island. 


f 


timlier  docks, 
»t  (lock  is  365 
p  00  fSeet,  and 

ST  Barean  lias 

>elow  Detroit. 

lake  Erie,  the 

ity. 

I  Detroit  river 

iguals  for  the 


moored  in  16 
le  west  end  of 

ed  and  black 
)  east  point  of 
>r  the  division 
isle. 


1  shonld  steer 
light  is  abeam 
een  Windmill 
J  shoal  water, 
W.  until  the 
id  stand  SW. 
7S  until  Belle 
L  be  kept  past 


,  painted  red, 
die  ground. 
4  and  2.    "So. 
.  point  of  the 
of  water  just 

indmill  Point 
86°  W.)  until 
iss  this  buoy, 
n  to  port,  and 
\  course  dose 
e  and  marked 
buoy  moored 
which  a  mid- 


DIBECTIONS. 


MAIN  OHAinnSL  OONTINXTED. 


143 


When  nearing  Fighting  island  keep  a  mid-channel  course  between 
Fighting  island  and  Michigan  until  the  Ecorse  range  comes  on,  when 
bring  it  astern  and  steer  S.  \  E.  (S.  2°  E.)  between  Grassy  and  Fight- 
ing islands,  until  Grassy  Island  light  is  abeam.  This  course  passes 
west  of  Fighting  Island  Bed  Spar  buoy  in  11^  feet  of  water,  marking 
the  elbow  of  the  flats  at  the  upper  end  of  Fighting  island,  and  east  of 
Grassy  Island  Black  Spar  buoy,  marking  the  elbow  of  the  Grassy  Island 
shoal.  When  abeam  of  Grassy  Island  light  the  Mamajuda  range 
should  come  on ;  bring  it  ahead,  and  steer  on  it  S.  f  W.  (S.  8°  W.),  pass- 
ing west  of  East  Bank  Bed  Spar  buoy  in  llj  feet  water  (marking  the 
east  side  of  the  channel  and  the  outer  point  of  Fighting  Island  bank), 
when  Grassy  Island  range  should  come  on  bearing  north;  then  steer 
south,  this  range  on  astern,  until  the  Grosse  Isle  North  Channel  range 
comes  on,  when  steer  on  it  8.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  12°  W.)  until  the  Grosse 
Island  South  Ohannel  range  comes  on,  when  bring  it  astern  and  steer 
S.  by  E.  ^  E.  (S.  17°  E.).  This  latter  range  should  come  on  when  just 
west  of  Fighting  Island  (lower)  Bed  Spar  buoy  in  0^  feet  of  water,  mark- 
ing the  east  side  of  the  channel  and  the  outer  edge  of  the  bank  at  the 
southern  end  of  Fighting  island.  The  range  passes  about  \  mile  east 
of  Ballards  Beef  lightvessel,  showing  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  6  (5f ) 
miles  (fog  signal,  a  bdl),  and  marking  the  easterly  end  of  Ballard  reef. 
This  course  (S.  17°  E.)  will  then  carry  over  and  between  several  17  and 
18  fo.>t  spots,  west  of  the  red  can  buoy  marking  Dougalls  rock  and  to 
abeam  and  east  of  North  Limekiln  Grossing  lightvessel,  No.  65,  showing 
a  fixed  white  light  (fog  signal,  a  bell),  and  moored  in  15  feet  of  water 
at  west  side  of  the  north  end  of  Limekiln  Grossing  dredged  channel. 
A  similar  lightvessel  is  moored  at  the  south  end  of  the  cut  on  west  side 
of  channel  in  15  feet  water.  Between  these  lightvessels,  steer  on  the 
Limekiln  Grossing  range  S.  1°  E.  until  abeam  of  South  Limekiln  Gross- 
ing lightvessel.  No.  64;  here  the  head  of  Bois  Blanc  Island  range 
(Canadian)  should  come  on,  when  steer  on  it  S.  by  W.  f  W.  (8. 20°  W.) 
until  abeam  of  the  front  light  of  the  Canadian  Limekiln  Crossing  range. 
A  near  mid-channel  course  should  now  be  kept  until  the  Amherstburg 
range  is  made.  It  is  preferable  to  keep  on  the  Bois  Blanc  island  side, 
to  clear  the  New  York  bowlders  marked  by  a' red  spar  buoy.  An 
obstruction  has  been  reported  as  lying  775  yards  SE.  ^  E.  (S.  47°  E.)  of 
Bois  Blano  Bange  rear  light,  and  is  almost  in  mid-channeL  After 
passing  west  of  the  red  spar  buoy  the  Amherstburg  range  will  come  on, 
when  bring  it  astern  and  stand  down  the  river,  heading  S.  by  W.  ^  W. 
(8. 14°  W.).  Bois  Blanc  light,  fixed  white,  on  the  south  end  of  Bois 
Blano  island,  visible  14  (16j^)  miles,  will  soon  be  passed,  and  below  this 
light  the  various  buoys  should  be  passed,  leaving  them  on  their  proper 
sides,  the  black  buoys  to  the  westward. 

Pontiac  shoal,  with  17  feet  over  it,  hard  bottom,  is  on  the  Amherst- 
burg range,  and  vessels  should  pass  east  of  it,  resuming  the  range  after 


[|^F^ftW^^^g^^|Bj^^^; 


144 


DETROIT  BITER. 


passing,  and  continue  on  it  until  the  red  buoy  oflf  Bar  point  is  abeam, 
when  change  course  to  S.  J  W.  (8. 10°  W.),  and  stand  down  through 
the  deep-water  dredged  cut  to  Detroit  Biver  (Bar  Point)  lighthouse; 
pass  east  of  the  lighthouse  and  into  lake  Erie.  The  east  half  only  (400 
feet)  of  the  cut  has  been  dredged  to  21  feet.  The  east  edge  of  this 
dredged  cut  is  marked  by  seven  red  wooden  spars. 

Bar  Point  Ughtvessel  is  moored  in  17  feet  of  water  off  Bar  Point 
shoal.  It  is  schooner  rigged,  two  masts,  no  bowsprit.  The  light  is 
fixed  white,  shown  from  three  lanterns  encircling  the  foremasthead. 
It  is  visible  11^^  (13^)  miles.  There  is  a  circular,  black  cage  work  day 
mark  at  the  foremasthead  and  a  small  black  smokestack  and  fog  signal 
between  the  masts.  The  hull  is  black,  with  M.  59,  Bar  Point  8ltoal 
in  white  letters  on  each  side. 

Pog  sigaaL— A  6-inch  steam  whistle  sounds  a  blast  of  ten  seconds 
every  thirty  seconds.  If  the  whistle  be  disabled  a  bell  will  be  rung  by 
hand. 

Detroit  River  (Bar  Point)  light— The  lighthouse  is  in  the  mouth  of 
the  river  and  is  a  conical  tower,  surmounted  by  a  lantern.  The  tower 
and  fog-signal  house,  both  brown,  on  hexagonal  pier.  The  light  is  fixed 
white  for  one  minute,  followed  during  the  next  minute  by  six  consecu- 
tive white  flashes  at  interval  of  ten  seconds.  The  light  is  55  feet 
above  the  lake  le^al  and  visible  12^  {l^)  miles. 

Pog  signal— A  lO-inch  steam  whistle  gives  blasts  of  five  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  twenty-five  seoonda. 


w 


oint  is  abeam, 
[lown  through 
it)  lighthouse; 
half  only  (400 
t  edge  of  this 

off  Bar  Point 
The  light  is 
foremasthead. 
sage  work  day 
iiud  fog  signal 
r  Point  8hoal 

f  ten  seconds 
ill  be  rung  by 

I  the  month  of 
a.  The  tower 
i  light  is  fixed 
y  six  consecu- 
^ht  is  55  feet 

'  five  seconds, 


CHAPTER  IX. 

IiAKE  ERIE. 

Lake  Erie  is  the  most  sonthem  of  the  Great  Lakes.  The  State  of 
Michigan  bounds  its  western  shore,  and  Ohio,  Pennsylvania,  and  New 
York  its  southern  and  southeastern  shores.  The  Province  of  Ontario, 
Canada,  bounds  the  northern  shore. 

The  lake  lies  between  41°  20'  and  42°  55'  N.,  and  between  78°  55' 
and  83°  30'  W.  It  is  nearly  elliptical,  the  m^jor  axis,  217  (260)  miles 
in  length,  lying  east.and  west.  Its  greatest  breadth  north  and  south  is 
52  (60)  miles,  its  circumference  573  (660)  miles,  and  its  area  about  10,000 
square  miles.  Its  elevation  above  the  sea  level  is  572.86  feet,  and  its 
surface  is  326.25  feet  above  that  of  lake  Ontario,  this  great  descent 
being  taken  up  by  the  Niagara  river  and  falls,  which  connect  the  two 
lakes  at  the  eastern  end,  its  western  end  being  connected  with  lake 
Huron  by  the  Detroit  river  and  St.  Olair  lake  and  river. 

There  are  four  important  canal  systems  which  connect  with  this 
lake:  The  Erie  canal,  extending  from  Buffalo,  N.  T.,  to  the  Hudson 
river;  the  Miami  and  Erie  canal,  from  Toledo  to  Cincinnati,  on  the 
Ohio  river;  the  Ohio  and  Erie  canal,  f^om  Cleveland  to  Portsmouth, 
on  the  Ohio  river,  and  the  WeUand  canal,  connecting  lakes  Erie  and 
Ontario,  this  latter  being  entirely  within  the  Dominion  of  Canada. 

Like  lake  Michigan,  the  coast  of  lake  Erie  is  comparatively  free  from 
indentations,  and,  excepting  the  western  end,  it  is  clear  of  islands. 

The  shores,  of  clay  and  sand,  are  generally  bold  and  elevated.  The 
meet  fertile  country  is  some  distance  from  the  banks,  except  at  the 
western  end,  where  the  growth  is  more  luxuriant  along  the  beach,  which 
here  is  of  fine,  white  sand. 

The  peculiar  features  of  lake  Erie  are  its  shallowness  and  its  clayey 
shores,  the  depth,  excepting  East  and  SE.  of  Long  point,  rarely  exceed- 
ing 100  feet. 

The  bed  of  the  lake  can  be  considered  as  in  three  di  dsions,  increasing 
in  depth  from  the  Detroit  river  to  the  outlet.  The  western  portion,  as 
far  as  Pointe  Pel^e  island,  has  a  level  bottom  with  an  average  depth  of 
30  feet.  The  middle  portion,  taking  in  the  principal  part  of  the  lake 
to  Long  point,  is  also  level  and  from  60  to  70  feet  deep.  Beyond  Long 
point  the  depths  vary  from  210  feet  near  the  point  to  40  and  30  feet  near 
the  eastern  shore. 

The  shallow  waters  of  this  lake  are  easily  disturbed  by  the  winds, 
1944--NO.  108— 10  145 


146 


LAKE  SBIE. 


aud,  for  this  reason  and  the  lack  of  good  harbors,  it  is  very  dangerous 
navigbtioD.  Loiigcontinued  storms,  with  the  wind  setting  along  the 
lalce  in  one  direction,  pile  up  the  water  to  ieeward  with  disastrous 
results.  BnfCalo  has  suffered  much  from  this.  The  retarn  of  the  wate**" 
after  a  storm  is  often  so  rapid,  especially  if  the  wind  changes  with  it, 
as  to  produce  powerful  currents.  On  one  oooasion  the  waters  burst  a 
passage  through  Long  point,  making  it  an  island. 

The  bottom  is  a  light,  clayey  sediment,  which  rapidly  accumulates 
from  the  wearing  away  of  the  shores. 

Along  the  coast  the  disintegrating  strata  are  frequently  seen  forming 
high  cliffs,  extending  back  into  elevated  plateaus,  with  rivers  cutting 
channels  through  them  and  carrying  the  excavated  matter  into  the 
lake.  Underground  water  courses  undermine  the  cliffs,  and  the  waves 
aid  in  breaking  them  down.  Landslides  are  of  frequent  occurrence  and 
render  the  water  turbid  a  long  distance  from  shore.  This  may  be  seen 
on  both  sides  of  the  lake.  Hear  Cleveland  the  reeeesion  of  the  coast 
Hue  has  been  particularly  remarkable.  From  here  the  terrace  oliffb 
(103  feet  high  at  Cleveland)  extend  east  to  Fairport 

There  is  an  immense  commerce  on  the  lake,  the  Welland  caual  being 
the  outlet  for  it  to  lake  Ontario. 


HABBOBS  OF  BSF17GB. 

Sandnsky,  for  vessels  of  17  feet  draft; 
ClOTeland,  for  vessels  of  19  feet  draft; 
Erie,  for  vessels  of  17  feet  draft; 
Bnffolo,  for  vessels  of  23  feet  draft; 
Fort  Colbome,  for  small  vessels; 
Dunkirk,  for  small  vessels; 
Month  of  the  Detroit  river,  and  possibly 
Rondeau  harbor. 

ANOHOBAaES. 

Good  anchorage  can  be  found  under  t9ie  lee  of  pofnx  3  Pel^  also  under 
Long  point;  between  Middle  and  South  Bass  islands,  as  well  as  under 
the  lee  of  other  islands. 

VA-yiGtANOS. 

As  a  rule,  navigati<m  opens  in  the  mid^  of  April  And  eloses  the 
middle  of  December.    Bee  page  6b 

PAITOBBS. 

East  of  l&e  meridlaii  of  pointe  Pelte  the  lake  is  remarkably  ftee 
from  outljring  dangers,  Seneca  and  Waverly  shoals  at  the  extreme  east- 
ern end,  and  a  reef  westward  of  Port  Maitland  on  the  north  diore,  being 
the  only  ones  weH  off  tihote.  The  northern  shore  of  the  lake  has  not 
been  thoroughly  surveyed,  and  there  may  esdst  some  unknown  efflyiug 
dangers,  but  the  coast  is  generally  steep-to. 


DANGERS — ROUTES — ISLANDS. 


147 


ery  dangerons 
ting  along  the 
ith  disastrous 
n  of  the  wate'"* 
langes  with  it, 
Heaters  burst  a 

7  accumnlates 

y  seen  forming 
rivers  catting 
latter  into  the 
and  the  waves 
Dconrrenceand 
is  maj  be  seen 
HI  of  the  coast 
B  terrace  olifb 

nd  canal  being 


el^alaonnder 
s  well  as  under 


and  doses  the 


emarkably  ftee 
le  extreme  east- 
rth  diore,  being 
be  lake  has  not 
rknown  offlyiug 


Weat  of  the  meridian  of  poiate  PeMe  the  water  is  shallow,  with 
many  islands,  between  and  aroiuid  which  are  shoals.  West  of  the 
islands  are  several  shuals.  From  the  western  and  southern  shores  of 
the  lake  in  this  locality  shoal  water  extends  out  somo  distance.  All  of 
these  dangers  are  described  under  the  islands  and  shores  of  the  lake. 

Southeast  ahoal  has  recently  developed  2j^  (3^)  miles  SE.  |  S.  (8. 
41°  E.)  of  the  Dummy  light.  It  has  probably  been  formed  by  vessels 
grounding  and  dumping  ballast  overboard.  This  locality,  especially 
to  the  westward  of  pointe  Pel^e,  should  be  navigated  with  caution  on 
account  of  shoal  water  and  the  various  wrecks  that  have  occurred. 

BOUTEB. 

Detroit  river  to  WeUand  canal  and  Bnffedo.— From  a  point  ^  mile 
SE.  of  Detroit  (Bar  Point)  light  an  ESE.  §  E.  (S.  75°  E.)  course  for  11^ 
(13|)  miles  will  take  a  vessel  a  mile  off  Golcbester  Beef  lighthouse  with 
it  abeam.  From  here  an  ESE.  |  E.  (S.  72°  E.)  course  for  14^1^  (16}) 
miles  should  take  a  vessel  to  a  point  with  Pel^e  Island  light  bearing 
SW.  and  the  Dummy  light  East.  Here  change  course  to  SE.  f  E.  (3. 
63°  B.)  for  7  (8)  miles,  when  the  Dummy  should  bear  NNW.  ^  W.- 
(N.  28°  W.),  distant  4f  (6J)  miles,  the  point  of  departure  for  all  ports 
on  the  lake.  Or,  with  the  wind  fresh  from  the  southward,  an  ESE.  (S. 
680  B.)  course  from  off  Detroit  Eiver  (Bar  Point)  light  for  llj  (ISf) 
miles  will  take  a  vessel  a  mile  south  of  Colchester  Eeef  light  abeam. 
Here  shape  course  ESE.  |  E.  (S.  77°  E.)  for  14^  (16J)  miles  to  the  point 
designated  above,  NE.  of  Pel^e  Island  light  and  west  of  the  Dummy. 

To  BnilUo.— From  off  Pel6e  Spit  lighthouse,  an  ENE.  }f  E.  (N.  69o 
E.)  course  for  115^  (133)  miles  will  take  a  vessel  If  (2)  miles  south  of 
Long  Point  lighthouse,  when  change  course  to  ENE.  (N.  68<^  E.)  fbr 
64  (62^)  miles.  This  will  ^dke  a  vessel  off  Buffalo  breakwater,  pass- 
ing northward  of  Waverly  shoal  and  buoy.  See  special  directions  for 
entering. 

To  Port  Oolbome  and  the  Welland  canaL— From  south  of  Long 
point,  NB,  by  E.  }  E.  (N.  59°  E.)  fbr  40^  (46 J)  miles  will  take  a  vessel 
off  Port  Oolborne  lights,  at  the  entrance  to  Welland  canal. 

ISLANDS  IN  THE  WESTERN  PART  OP  LAKE  ERIE. 

The  principal  islands  belonging  to  the  United  States  are  West  Sister 
island^  The  Bass  islands,  BatUesnake  and  Green  islands,  and  Kelley 
island. 

The  principal  islands  belonging  to  Canada  are  Middle  Sister,  Eart 
Sister,  The  Chickens,  Middle  island,  and  Pointe  Pel4e  island. 

UNITED-  STATES  ISLANDS. 

West  Sister  island.— This,  the  most  western  island,  lies  (the  Hght- 
house)  1^  <16)  miles  east  of  Orassy  point  and  7|  (8§)  miles  north  of 
Locust  point    It  is  |  mile  long  NE.  and  SW.  and  ^  mile  north  and 


148 


LAKE   ERIE. 


south  and  steep-to,  except  on  its  8E.  point,  from  which  a  rocky,  narrow 
spit  extends  ^  utile  SE.  with  3  feet  at  its  extremity. 

Light — On  the  8W.  point  of  West  Sister  island,  from  a  conical  white 
tower,  is  shown,  57  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light  visible 
13  (15)  miles.  It  is  obscured  on  the  NE.  side  of  the  island  by  trees 
fhrou£ch  an  arc  of  1^  points. 

A  red  light,  shown  at  this  station  in  place  of  the  white  light,  is  a  signal 
of  distress. 

Niagara  reef,  with  least  depth  of  7  feet,  is  J  mile  long  east  and  west 
and  ^  mile  north  and  south.  It  lies  near  the  track  of  vessels  from  West 
Sister  island  to  Oreen  island,  but  it  is  marked  by  a  buoy  and  can  be 
easily  avoided. 

Buoy. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  water  on  the  NE.  side 
of  the  reef. 

The  Bass  islands,  three  in  number,  with  small  outlying  islands  and 
shoals,  occupy  a  space  of  6  (7)  miles  north  and  south  by  4^  (5)  miles 
east  and  west.  The  various  channels  through  these  islands,  although 
deep,  should  not  be  attempted  by  strangers,  as  there  are  many  unmarked 
shoals,  and  no  directions  can  be  given  for  clearing  them. 

North  Bass  island  is  about  a  mile  long  north  and  south  and  nearly 
the  same  distance  broad;  its  southern  face,  however,  is  1^  (If)  miles 
broad,  being  widened  by  narrow  peninsulas  from  the  SW.  and  SE.  points 
of  the  island.  Shoals  extend  out  1  (1^)  mile  along  its  western  side,  and 
§  mile  off  at  other  points. 

The  channel  between  North  and  Middle  Bass  carries  from  3^  to  6 
fathoms,  but  there  is  a  detached  16-foot  spot  south  of  mid-channel  and 
nearer  to  Middle  Bass. 

Middle  Bass  island  lies  a  mile  south  of  North  Bass  (the  shores  of 
these  islands  are  nearly  parallel  east  and  west).  The  island  is  1^  (1^). 
miles  long  north  and  south  and  somewhat. narrower  than  North  Bass. 
The  NE.  point  extends  eastward  from  the  island  as  a  narrow  peninsula 
for  1  (IJ)  mile.  From  the  east  point  of  this  peninsula  to  the  west  point 
of  Sugar  island  (which  is  nearly  ^  mile  east  and  west,  and  connected  to 
Middle  Bass  by  shoals)  the  south  shore  of  the  channel  is  2^  (2f )  miles 
long.  Shoals  extend  ^  mile  eastward  from  the  end  of  the  peninsula. 
In  the  bight  south  of  the  peninsula  the  west  shore  of  the  island  can  be 
approached  to  a  4-fatb(>m  depth,  and  this  bight  affords  excellent  anchor- 
age and  protection  from  westerly  and  northerly  winds.  The  island  can 
generally  be  approached  to  J  mile  excepting  off  the  points,  which  should 
be  given  a  wider  berth. 

The  channel  between  Middle  and  South  Bass  islands  runs  east  and 
west,  and  after  passing  the  SE.  point  of  Middle  Bass  bends  to  the  NE. 
and  around  the  north  side  of  Ballast  island.  This  channel  carries  3^ 
to  6  feet  water.  There  is  no  passage  except  for  light-draft  vessels 
between  Ballast  island  and  South  Bass. 

Ballast  island,  a  small  circular  island,  steep-to  on  its  northern  face 


V 


t  rocky,  narrow 

a  couical  white 
ite  light  visible 
island  by  trees 

Ight,  is  a  signal 

l  east  and  west 
isels  from  West 
aoy  and  can  be 

>n  the  NE.  side 

ing  islands  and 
by  4^  (5)  miles 
ands,  although 
aany  unmarked 

uth  and  nearly 
is  1^  (Ig)  miles 
and  SE.  points 
3stern  side,  and 

)S  from  3^  to  6 
lid-channel  and 

9  (the  shores  of 
land  is  lA  iU). 
an  North  Bass, 
xrow  peninsula 
>  the  west  point 
id  connected  to 
is  2^  (2f )  miles 
the  peninsula, 
e  island  can  be 
:cellent  anchor- 
The  island  can 
s,  which  should 

i  runs  east  and 
inds  to  the  NE. 
nnel  carries  3^ 
it-draft  vessels 

s  northern  face 


RATTLERNAKE   ISLAND SCOTT   POINT    SHOAL. 


Ii9 


is  connected  to  South  Bass  isluiKi  by  Hhoals,  through  which,  and  nearer 
Bullast  island,  is  a  narrow  channel  with  14  feet  water. 

Bnoys. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  15  feet  of  water,  rooky  bot- 
tom, at  the  south  side  of  the  eastern  entrance  to  this  channel.  The 
south  side  of  the  channel  extends  650  yards  WNW.  from  this  buoy. 

A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  10  feet  of  water  at  the  inner  end  of 
the  channel. 

Rattlesnake  island  lies  u  mile  west  of  the  western  i>oint  of  Middle 
Bass.  It  is  S  mile  long  NW.  and  SE.  Shoals  extend  J  mile  off  its  NW. 
point.  A  small  detaclicd  rock  lies  nearly  at  the  end  of  the  shoal  water. 
The  rest  uf  the  island  is  steep-to. 

South  Bass  island,  the  largest  of  the  groui*,  i>^  south  of  Middle  Bass. 
Its  SE.  shore  is  3  (.'4)  miles  long,  while  the  NW.  coast  is  but  1  (IJ) 
mile.  On  the  north  coast  is  Put  in  Bay.  Its  8W.  face  is  steep-to  and 
affords  anchorage  and  protection  from  easterly  and  northeasterly  winds. 
Shoals  line  the  whole  SE.  coast  and  from  the  SE.  i)oint  extend  over  i 
mile  to  Starve  island,  and  some  distance  beyond.  Beyond  this  shoal  is 
a  small  detached  spot,  with  11  feet  over  it. 

Put  in  Bay  is  f  mile  wide  and  g  mile  deep.  Gibraltar  island  lies  in 
the  western  part  of  the  bay.  The  whole  western  part  of  the  bay  and 
the  eastern  side  for  some  distance  is  shoal,  but  snug  anchorage  can  be 
obtained  in  3J  to  5  fathoms,  protected  from  all  winds  from  the  East, 
South,  and  SW.    Port  Orchard  point  is  the  west  point  of  the  bay. 

Port  Orchard  Point  buoy,  red  spar,  is  moored  in  12  feet  of  water 
and  marks  the  elbow  of  a  rocky  shoal  extending  375  yards  NE.  from 
the  point,  and  thence  170  yards  toward  Gibraltar  island.  The  western 
edge  of  the  shoal  lies  140  yards  outside  the  point. 

Starve  Island  reef,  400  feet  iu  diameter,  least  water  11  feet,  lies  one 
mile  ENE.  of  Mouse  Island  reef.  The  track  of  vessels  lies  between  these 
two  shoals.  This  shoal  lies  exactly  on  the  range  of  Green  Island  light- 
house and  the  SW.  point  of  South  Bass  island.  When  Green  Island 
lighthouse  can  be  seen  open  south  of  South  Bass  island  vessels  are  clear 
of  the  shoal  to  the  southward.  Two-thirds  of  the  way  from  this  reef  to 
Starve  island  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  11  feet  of  water  over  it. 

Buoy. — A  red  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  SW.  end 
of  Starve  Island  reef.    Vessels  must  pass  south  of  this  buoy. 

Mouse  Island  reef,  least  water  12  feet,  lies  1  (l^)  mile  north  of 
Mouse  island. 

Buoy.— A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  NW. 
end  of  this  reef.  The  shoalest  wat,er  on  the  reef  is  150  yards  SW.  by  W. 
from  the  buoy.    Vessels  must  pass  north  of  this  bnoy. 

Scott  Point  shoal,  least  water  12  feet,  is  a  rocky  shoal  on  the  south 
of  the  channel.    It  is  400  yards  wide  and  from  its  NW.  end  stretches 
toward  and  halfway  to  Mouse  island,  leaving  a  channel  J  mile  wide . 
between  the  shoal  and  the  island.    SE.  of  this  shoal  is  an  IS-foot  patch 
J  mile  long  east  and  west. 


160 


LAKE  BRIB. 


Buoy.— -A  black  can  btioy  is  moored  in  16  feet  o*  Tausr  on  the  NH. 
end  of  the  shoal  and  lies  very  close  to  the  track  of  veswelH  thr>ai;h  the 
channel.    This  buoy  should  be  left  well  to  the  southward  in  passing. 

Shoftl  in  South  pawMg*. — In  the  (;hannel  leading  firom  eastward 
to  Green  island,  South  piissage,  is  a  sandy  shoal.  It  extends  1,000  feet 
in  an  easterly  and  westerly  direction  and  700  feet  north  and  sonth. 
Depth  of  water  over  this  area  is  ftom  17  to  18  feet;  it  gradually 
deepens  all  around  to  21  feet.  The  shoal  is  marked  by  a  buoy,  the 
bearings  ftom  which  are  as  follows:  Marblehead  lighthouse  SE.  |  S. 
(8.  41°  E.);  Middle  Island  lighthouse  NE.  f  N.  (N.  41°  E.).  The  buoy 
is  moored  SE.  |  E.  from  the  SW.  point  of  Sonth  Bass  island  and  dis- 
tant therefirom  3^  (3^)  miles. 

Thei«  are  four  detached  rocks  and  one  shoal  northeasterly  of  the 
above  shoal  within  a  distance  of  one  mile. 

Qr«en  island,  i  mile  long  east  and  west,  is  1  (1^)  mile  west  of  the 
extreme  west  point  of  Sonth  Bass  island. 

laght.— On  the  west  end  of  Oreen  island,  firom  a  square,  gray  tower, 
is  shown,  60  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a 
red  flash  every  minute,  visible  134  i^H)  miles.  The  light  is  obscured 
between  the  bearings  SW.  by  W.  (S.  66°  W.)  and  ^(W.  by  W.  (N.  66°  W.) 
by  the  woods  on  the  island. 

The  range  of  this  with  West  Sister  light  NW.  by  W.  |  W.  (N.  63°  W.) 
passes  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Niagara  reef. 

The  light  just  open  of  the  SW.  point  of  South  Bass  island  passes 
sonth  of  Starve  Island  reef.  Open  westward  of  the  west  end  of  Battle- 
snake  island,  it  immsbos  west  of  the  Chicken  island  and  east  of  East 
Sister  island. 

Kolley  ialand,  the  largest  of  the  United  States  islands,  is  2^  (3^) 
miles  north  of  Marblehead  light.  The  island  is  IJ  (If)  miles  north  and 
south  and  2§  (3)  miles  east  and  west.  The  NE.  end  of  the  island  forms 
a  narrow  point  a  mile  long.  There  are  many  small  open  bays  on  the 
North  and  SW.  coasts  of  the  island;  the  latter,  in  which  is  a  wreck, 
affords  anchorage  in  North  and  NE.  winds.  The  north  bay  affords  pro- 
tection from  all  southerly  winds.  The  East  and  SB.  shores  should  not 
be  approached  to  §  mile,  as  shoals  extend  off  in  places  to  nearly  that 
distance.  The  other  part  of  the  island  can  be  approached  somewhat 
nearer. 

Kelley  Island  reef  is  1,500  yards  NE.  from  the  NE.  point  of  Kelley 
island,  with  a  clear  channel  between.  The  I'eef  extends  ENB.  and 
WSW.  for  1  (li)  mile  and  is  600  yards  across  its  widest  part,  with 
least  water  6  feet. 

Buoy. — A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  east 
end  of  this  reef. 

Chill  Island  shoal,  north  point,  is  1  (1^)  mile  south  of  Middle 
Island  lighthouse  (Canadian),  the  international  bonndary  line  passing 
between.    The  shoal  from  its  north  end  extends  over  a  mile  SW.,  and 


7aUir  on  the  NH. 
iitelH  t.br>agh  the 
ird  ill  pasaing. 
i  ttom  eastward 
Ktends  1,(H)0  feet 
lorth  and  aoath. 
Bt;  it  gradnally 
I  by  a  buoy,  the 
ithouse  SE.  I  S. 
3E.).  Tbebaoy 
B  island  and  dis- 

bbeasterly  of  the 

mile  weet  of  the 

nare,  gray  tower, 
light  varied  by  a 
light  is  obeoared 

)yW.(K56oW.) 

^W.(N.63oW.) 

MB  island  passes 
est  end  of  Battle- 
ad  east  of  East 

slands,  is  a£  (S^) 
')  miles  north  and 
r  the  island  forms 
)pen  bays  on  the 
rhich  is  a  wreck, 
h  bay  affords  pro- 
shores  shonld  not 
ses  to  nearly  that 
)aohed  somewhat 

B.  point  of  Kelley 
ttends  ENB.  and 
ridest  part,  with 

water  on  the  east 

south  of  Middle 
dary  line  passing 
V  a  mile  SW.,  and 


CANADIAN   ISLAND!^. 


161 


flrom  its  sonthern  end  a  spit  extends  westward  ^  mile.    There  are  rocks 
above  water  on  the  south  end  of  this  shoul. 

Buoy. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet,  rooky  bottom,  on  the 
KE.  end  of  the  shoal.  Tlie  water  shoals  gradually  for  1,500  yards  &W. 
of  the  buoy,  where  the  rocks  show  above  water. 

CANADIAN  ISLANDS. 

Middle  Slater,  the  western  of  the  Canadian  islands,  lies  on  the 
eighty-third  meridian,  and  is  0^  (11)  miles  south  of  the  Canadian  shore 
of  the  lake.  It  is  a  small  rocky  island,  |  mile  NE.  and  SW.  The  island 
oan  be  approached  to  ^  mile  with  safety. 

Grecian  ahoal,  with  several  small  shoals,  least  water  12  feet,  lies  a 
mile  south  of  the  pier  at  Colchester  on  the  north  shore  of  the  lake. 
There  is  deep  water  between  the  shoal  and  shore. 

CrOloheater  reef,  a  small  patch,  least  water  8  feet,  lies  3^  (4)  miles 
SW.  by  S.  of  the  pier  at  Oolchenter  and  3  (3^)  miles  offshore.  It  lies 
just  south  of  the  track  of  vessels  to  poiute  Pel6e  and  is  marked  by  a 
lighthouse. 

Ught. — Near  the  SE.  end  of  the  reef,  from  a  red  lantern  on  a  white 
hexagonal  building,  standing  on  a  circular  stone  pi«x,  in  shown,  72  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light  visible  14  (16|)  miles. 

Fog  aignaL — A  bell,  rung  by  machinery,  gives  one  stroke  every 
fifteen  seconds. 

Wreck. — ^Tbe  wreck  of  the  schooner  Adama  lies  4^  (5)  miles  NW. 
by  W.  (N.  56°  W.)  from  Colchester  Reef  light. 

The  wreck  has  but  2  feet  of  water  over  the  bow  and  is  marked  by  a 
float,  with  two  white  lights  moored  200  feet  due  south  of  it. 

North  Harbor  laland  lies  %  (7^)  miles  ESE.  |  E.  of  Middle  Sister 
island.    The  island  is  a  rock  in  the  middle  of  a  shoal  h  mile  in  diameter. 

ShoaL— At  1  (1^)  mile  north  of  North  Harbor  island  is  the  SE.  end 
of  a  shoal  which  extends  |  mile  NE.,  and  is  4  mile  broad,  with  2  feet 
least  water. 

Beat  Slater  laland,  |  mile  south  of  North  Harbor  island,  is  §  mile 
east  and  west.  It  lies  on  a  shoal  ^  mile  wide,  which  extends  east  and 
west  for  over  a  mile. 

Sheala.— Between  ^  and  |  mile  NE.  of  the  east  point  of  East  Sister 
are  detached  shoals  of  18  and  7  feet  least  water;  the  latter  shoal  is  the 
farthest  out  and  is  ^  mile  long  ENE.  and  WSW. 

Hen  laland  is  2J  (3^)  miles  SE.  by  E.  of  the  east  end  of  East  Sister. 
It  is  a  small  circular  island  on  a  shoal  extending  i  mile  east  and  west, 
and  4  mile  north  and  south. 

Big  Chicken  laland  is  1^  (1^)  miles  SW.  of  Hen  island.  It  lies  on 
the  SW.  end  of  a  rocky  reef  extending  J  mile  NE.  from  the  island.  Its 
average  breadth  is  also  J  mile.  North  of  the  center  of  this  reef  are  dry 
rooks. 

Little  Chicken  laland  is  1^  (1^)  miles  east  of  Big  Chicken  island. 


152 


LAKE   ERIE. 


It  lies  toward  the  southern  edge  of  a  rocky  reef,  with  least  water  5  feet, 
near  the  northern  point  of  the  reef.  The  reef  has  a  breadth  of  about  J 
mile  and  extends  J  mile  NW.  and  4  mile  east  from  the  island.  There 
are  3^  fathoms  water  between  the  Ohicken  reefs,  but  the  passage  should 
never  be  attempted. 

Pointe  Pel^e  island,  the  largest  of  all  the  islands  in  lake  Erie,  is 
(north  point)  6J  (74)  miles  WSW.  of  PeWe  Spit  light  (the  Dummy). 
The  island  is  rectangular  in  shape,  with  an  average  length  of  4^  (5^) 
miles  and  a  breadth  of  3  (3 J)  miles.  Sheridan  point  is  the  NW.  point 
of  the  island,  and  between  this  and  Lighthouse  point  is  a  bay,  which 
affords  anchorage  and  shelter  from  southerly  and  easterly  winds.  Ves- 
sels should  not  shoal  under  4  fathoms.  Mosquito  point,  the  SW.  point 
of  the  island,  extends  to  the  southward  1 J  (If )  miles  as  a  narrow  spit. 
Mill  point  is  the  SB.  end  of  the  island,  and  off  this  point  is  a  detached 
shoal  extending  east  and  \,  st  IJ  (If)  miles,  with  a  breadth  of  J  mile. 
There  is  a  least  depth  of  13  feet  on  this  shoal.  Middle  point  is  between 
Mill  an^  Lighthouse  points.  Shoals  extend  a  mile  northward  from 
Lighthouse  point  and  also  line  the  whole  east  coast  of  the  island.  One 
mile  SB.  of  Middle  point  is  a  17-foot  spot.  The  northern  half  of  the 
west  coast  of  the  island  is  bold.  Shoals  extend  off  the  southern  half 
for  about  J  mile,  with  two  outlying  ISfoot  spots,  the  outer  one  |  mile 
offshore.  The  southern  point  of  the  island  has  a  shoal  spit  extending 
from  it  ^  mile  south,  and  from  the  east  side  of  this  point  shoals  extend 
in  places  to  the  distance  of  a  mile.  Ghickeuolee  reef,  an  extension  of 
this  shoal  to  the  eastward  for  nearly  2  (2^)  miles,  has  only  4  feet  of 
water  in  the  center.  Between  Ghickenolee  reef  and  Mill  Point  reef 
and  the  shore  of  the  island  is  a  bay,  which  affords  protection  from 
westerly  and  northerly  winds.  There  is,  however,  a  17-foot  spot  and 
an  :'«-foot  spot  in  the  middle  of  the  entrance  to  the  bay.  Between  the 
south  spit  point  and  Middle  island  are  several  detached  shoals,  least 
water  10  feet,  and  no  vessel  should  attempt  this  passage. 

liifewiaviiig  station  is  at  the  SB.  end  of  the  island  near  Mill  point. 

Idght — On  Lighthouse  point,  from  a  white  circular  lighthouse,  is 
shown,  45  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  9  (10^) 
miles. 

Middle  island,  1|  (2)  miles  south  of  the  south  point  of  Pointe 
Pel^e  island,  is  |  mile  east  and  west  and  i  mile  broad.  It  lies  north  of 
Qnll  Island  shoal  and  the  international  boundary  line  is  south  of  it. 
The  island  is  steep-to. 

Xiight. — On  the  east  point  of  Middle  island,  from  a  white  square 
lighthouse,  is  shown,  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  red  light, 
visible  12  (13$)  miles. 

Fcg  signal— A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Middle  ground. — Lying  almost  midway  between  Pointe  Pel6e  island 
and  Pel^e  Spit  lights  is  a  most  dangerous  unmarked  shoal.  It  is  just 
off  the  track  of  vessels  bound  to  pointe  Pel^e  from  the  West  and  SW. 


WEST  COAST. 


153 


last  water  5  feet, 
sadth  of  about  ^ 
I  island.  There 
)  passage  should 

in  lake  Erie,  is 
t  (the  Dummy), 
ength  of  4f  (5^) 
1  the  NW.  point 
is  a  bay,  which 
rly  winds.  Ves- 
t,  the  8W.  point 
s  a  narrow  spit 
nt  is  a  detached 
eadth  of  J  mile, 
point  is  between 
northward  from 
the  island.  One 
[lern  half  of  the 
16  sonthern  half 
outer  one  |  mile 
1  spit  extending 
nt  shoals  extend 
an  extension  of 
bs  only  4  feet  of 
Mill  Point  reef 
protection  from 
L7-foot  spot  and 
y.  Between  the 
led  shoals,  least 
ge. 

near  Mill  point. 
Etr  lighthouse,  is 
it,  visible  9  (10^) 

point  of  Pointe 

It  lies  north  of 

e  is  south  of  it. 

a  white  square 
fixed  red  light, 

isels. 

ante  Pel6e  island 
hoal.  It  is  just 
e  West  and  SW. 


It  is  a  mile  long  north  and  south  and  ^  mile  wide.  Least  water,  11  feet 
at  lowest  lake  level.  A  WSW.  and  ENE.  range  of  Pointe  Pelee  Island 
and  Pel^e  Spit'  lighthouses  passes  over  the  center  of  the  shoal.  Mid- 
way between  the  Middle  ground  and  Pointe  Pel^e  island  is  a  16-foot 
patch. 

Clearing  marks. — By  keeping  Lighthouse  Point  light  nothing  west 
of  SW.  by  W.  (S.  56°  W.)  and  Pel^e  Spit  light  nothing  north  of  E.  by  N. 
(N.  79°  E.)  a  vessel  will  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  shoaL 

G-mbb  reef  consists  of  several  12  and  16  foot  rocky  patches,  lying 
2  and  3  miles  WNW.  of  Pel^e  Spit  lighthouse.  The  reef  has  extended 
a  mile  to  the  eastward,  with  a  least  depth  of  16  feet.  This  lighthouse 
bearing  east  leads  clear  to  the  southward  of  these  shoals. 

Pointe  Pel6e  and  shoals  are  described  on  pages  174  and  175. 

UNITED    STATES   COAST   OF   LAKE  ERIE. 
HIOHIOAN. 

Coast. — ^The  west  coast  of  the  lake  from  pointe  Mouill^e,  the  west 
entrance  point  of  the  Detroit  river,  to  Grassy  jwint,  the  west  entrance 
point  of  the  Maumee  bay,  has  a  general  SW.  direction.  All  this  por- 
tion of  the  coast  has  flats  extending  off  it  for  some  distance.  Several 
rivers  and  creeks  empty  into  the  lake,  and  the  shore  is  generally  low 
and  marshy.  The  3-fathom  line  is  If  (2)  miles  SE.  of  pointe  Mouill^e, 
but  at  Stony  point  it  approaches  the  shore  to  4  mile.  To  the  west  of 
Stony  point  is  a  bight  filled  with  flats,  in  which  is  the  village  of  Brest. 

At  3^  (4)  miles  SSW.  of  Brest  is  the  Baisin  river,  at  the  mouth  of 
which  is  Monroe  harbor. 

Monroe  harbor  is  a  part  of  the  Baisin  river  about  2^^  (2^)  miles 
above  the  dredged  channel  which  forms  the  outlet  into  the  lake.  The 
mouth  is  protected  by  two  piers.  The  channel  is  4,000  feet  long  and 
100  feet  wide.  At  present  the  depth  of  water  over  the  bar  and  through- 
out the  greater  part  of  the  channel  to  the  wharves  is  about  8  feet. 

Reports  state  that  it  is  impossible  to  charter  a  vessel  drawing  over  7 
feet  for  Monroe. 

Monroe  light — On  a  crib  at  the  outer  end  of  the  north  pier  of  the 
entrance  to  the  channel  leading  into  the  Baisin  river,  from  a  square 
tower  on  a  white  dwelling,  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light,  46^  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  and  visible  11^  (13)  miles. 

Directions. — ^The  best  water  is  found  by  standing  in,  in  line  with  the 
straight  (inner)  section  of  the  north  pier  WJJW.  J  W.  (N.  69°  W.). 

Cantion. — Southwest  gales  lower  the  water  at  the  west  end  of  the 
lake  from  2  to  3  feet,  and  KE.  gales  raise  it  the  same  amount. 

South  of  Monroe  the  flats  extend  farther  from  the  shore,  and  almost 
fill  thiftt  i)ortion  of  the  lake  west  of  the  meridian  of  Monroe  light  and 
Oedar  point.  Strangers  should  not  enter  this  area  except  on  the  ranges 
and  in  the  axis  of  the  channels.    The  boundary  line  between  Michigan 


j!rr?S5s^i^£ 


aas^i:i£'.^^^asaa&igai8S^-;*rr,iii^"^;ari^JiaLii^sa«-fc-i» 


154 


LAKE  EBIK. 


and  Ohio  is  at  the  month  of  Ottawa  river,  western  portion  of  Mftamee 
bay. 

OHIO. 

Mawnee  bay,  between  Grassy  and  Cedar  points,  is  filled  with  flats. 
Maomee  river  empties  into  it,  and  a  short  distance  within  the  mouth 
of  the  river  is  the  city  of  Toledo. 

Depths  in  the  channel— January,  1896 :  Depth  in  the  New  Straight 
channel  from  the  river  to  deep  water  of  lake  Brie,  marked  by  buoys 
and  range  lights,  17  feet  on  axis  and  ranging  from  16  to  20  feet  on  the 
sides  of  channel. 

Dry  dock.— There  is  a  dry  dock  at  Toledo,  426  feet  in  length  over  aJ^ 
60-foot  gate,  and  with  a  depth  on  sill  of  16  feet. 

Buoys.— A  black  gas  buoy,  showing  a  fixed  white  light,  marks  the 
9B.  side  of  the  entranoe  to  Stort^ght  channel,  Maumee  bay,  and  a  red 
rmn  buoy  marks  the  NW.  side  of  the  entrance.  The  channel  in  is 
marked  by  black  spar  buoys  to  port,  and  red  spar  buoys  to  starboard  in 
entering.  A  red  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  'SW. 
bank  of  the  channel,  opposite  the  middle  of  the  pile  work,  to  show  the 
extreme  width  of  the  channel. 

LIGHTS. 

A  fixed  red  light  is  shown  from  a  lantern  suspended  from  the  red  spar 
buoy  No.  30,  marking  the  extreme  inner  end  of  the  straight  channel. 

Turtle  island.  On  Turtle  island,  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  from  a 
square  yellow  tower,  attached  to  a  dwelling,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
12^  ^l^)  miles,  is  exhibited  50  feet  above  the  lake  level.  The  light 
bearing  S.  by  B.  (S.  11°  E.)  is  obscured  by  the  chimney  to  the  dwelling. 

HAinC&B  BA.Y  BANQBB. 

yur^in  beacon.— On  the  south  bank,  from  a  white  dwelling  on  a  crib, 
at  the  elbow  of  South  and  Long  reaches,  a  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited 
274  fe®*  above  the  lake  level. 

East  beacon.— At  1,000  feet  northeastward  of  the  Main  beacon,  from 
a  brown  shaft  on  a  crib,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  Ught  42  feet  above  the 
lake  level.  This  light  shows  up  the  dredged  channel  to  the  southwest- 
ward,  and  als>o  in  the  direction  of  the  outer  end  of  the  New  Straight 
channel,  over  an  arc  of  60«>  between  the  bearings  8SW.  I W.  (S.  32° 
W.)  and  W.  |  S.  (S-  83°  W.),  the  entrance  to  the  channel  lying  about 
midway  between,  or  on  the  bearing  S.  58«>  W. 

South  beacon.— At  1,000  feet  to  the  southward  of  the  Main  beacon, 
from  a  brown  shaft  on  a  crib,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  Ught  43  feet  above 
the  lake  level. 

These  lights  form  the  following  ranges : 

Main  Beacon  and  South  Beacon  lights.— Bange  for  the  Old  chan- 
nel from  Turtle  island  to  the  New  Straight  channel. 

ICain  Beacon  and  Bast  Beacon  Ughts— Range  (back)  for  inner 
part  of  the  Straight  channel. 


Ion  of  Mftninm 


Uled  with  flat& 
khin  tbe  mouth 

e  New  Straight 
urked  hy  buoys 
9  20  feet  on  the 

length  over  all, 

[ght,  marks  the 
bay,  and  a  red 
)  channel  in  is 
to  starboard  in 
ter  on  the  NW. 
trk,  to  show  the 


•om  the  red  spar 
light  channel, 
the  bay,  from  a 
ite  light,  visible 
)yel.  The  light 
to  the  dwelling. 


elling  on  a  crib, 
ght  is  exhibited 

ain  beacon,  from 
i  feet  above  the 
0  the  sonthwest- 
le  New  Straight 
W.  i  W.  (S.  320 
mel  lying  abont 

he  Main  beacon, 
;ht  43  feet  above 


br  the  Old  ohan- 
(baok)  for  inner 


I 


HAU: 


jA.r — ^DmECTIONS. 


166 


Eaat  Beacon  ftnd  Main  Boaoon  lig^ta.- 

of  the  New  Straight  channel  from  the  lake. 


-Bange  for  the  outer  part 


IfANHATTAN  BANGS  LIGHTS. 

Front — The  front  beacon  stands  on  a  platform  8  feet  above  Ae  water 
on  a  substructure  of  red  iron  piles  in  3  feet  of  water  mH)  miles  SW. 
by  W.  J  W.  (S.  58°  W.)  from  the  front  light  of  Maumee  Bay  ranges. 
The  light  is  fixed  red  and  28  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Rear.— The  rear  beacon  is  a  skeleton  structure,  except  the  section 
immediately  below  the  lantern  is  inclosed,  and  is  3,470  feet  SW.  by  W.  | 
W.  (S.  58°  W.)  from  the  front  beacon.  The  light  is  flied  red  and  53 
feet  above  the  lake  level. 

Each  beacon  is  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  structure,  with  green  win- 
dow shutters,  and  is  surmounted  by  an  octagonal  lantern  with  red  roof. 
Each  light  is  visible  from  BSE.  |  E.  (S.  77°  B.),  through  south,  west, 
and  north  to  N.  by  E.  J  E.  (N.  13°  B.),  or  135°  to  the  northward  and 
136°  to  the  southward  of  the  range. 

Directions.— The  entrance  of  the  channel  is  2^^  (2J)  miles  B.  i  N.  (N. 
87°  E.)  of  Turtle  Island  light,  and  ia  marked  by  a  black  can  and  a  red 
nun  buoy.  Keep  in  over  3  fathoms  of  water  until  the  buoys  are  picked 
up  or  the  beacons  ^East  and  Main)  come  in  range  S.  58°  W.  Stand  in 
on  the  range  until  up  to  buoy  No.  14,  then  haul  a  little  to  the  westward 
to  pass  the  cribs  and  pile  work.  When  up  to  buoy  No.  16  bring  the 
Manhattan  range  on  and  steer  between  the  buoys  until  past  inner  end 
of  Channel  Buoy  TSo.  29.  From  this  point  steer  for  the  draw  of  the 
Wheeling  and  Lake  Erie  Railroad  bridge,  and  passing  Middle  Ground 
Buoy  No.  34,  steer  for  the  draw  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  bridge 
and  to  the  docks.    Seventeen  feet  can  be  carried  in  on  these  directions. 

Coaat— Locust  point  is  12J  (14)  miles  BE.  by  B.  J  B.  of  Cedar  point, 
the  shore  between  receding  slightly  from  the  line  joining  the  points. 
AD  this  part  of  the  coast  is  bordered  by  flats,  extending  off  about  If  (2) 
miles.  At  Locust  point  the  flats  widen  and  err?  id  5J  (6)  miles  in  the 
direction  of  Niagara  reef,  leaving  a  passage  of  on.  Ale  iv  width  between 
the  shoals  and  reef,  but  as  there  are  several  ro  ky,  detached  shoals  to 
the  westward  of  the  reef,  no  vessel  should  attempt  to  pass  inside  of 
Niagara  reef. 

iriagani  reeC  with  least  depth  of  7  f(^"  water,  is  J  mile  long  east 
and  west  and  i  mile  north  and  south.  It  lies  near  the  track  of  vessels 
from  West  Sister  island  to  Green  island,  but  it  is  marked  by  a  buoy 
and  can  be  easily  avoided. 

Buoy.— A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  NE. 
side  of  the  reef. 

Coaat— Scott  point  is  12J  (14)  miles  B.  by  8.  of  Locust  point,  the 
shore  between  receding  and  forming  a  bight  ^  (5)  miles  deep.  The  flat 
extends  ^  (fl)  miles  to  the  eastward  tcom  Locust  point,  then  turns 
sharply  to  the  S8W.  and  approaches  the  shore  to  a  mile,  ther.  extends 

to  the  eastward,  filling  the  bight  between  Locust  point  and  Moore  point, 


Mi 


■is9!i5S5*^.£X^K-i^j;ii.-"4i:iei^-:-i:-.'"^J^i-^A"Ai*iimJS&^ 


•'ds^^. 


166 


LAKE   EBIE. 


the  west  point  of  Catawba  island.  Between  Moore  and  Scott  points, 
Catawba  island  is  bluff  and  steep-to.  Just  north  of  Scott  point  is 
Mouse  island,  connected  to  the  point  by  a  flat. 

Port  Clinton  is  at  the  head  of  the  bight  between  Locust  and  Scott 
points. 

Depths.— The  chanusl  has  been  dredged  to  a  depth  of  10  feet  for  a 
width  of  100  feet  between  the  piers;  the  harbor  in  front  of  the  wharves 
has  been  dredged  for  a  width  of  200  feet  and  to  a  depth  of  about  10 
feet;  the  bar  has  been  dredged  outside  to  a  depth  of  10  feet. 

Light — On  the  west  pier,  20  feet  from  the  outer  end,  is  shown  a  fixed 
red  light,  25  I'eet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  8  miles. 

The  light  is  shown  ftom  an  octagonal  lantern  surmounting  a  square 

pyramidal  structure,  with  gallery  at  the  top,  on  a  platform  of  piles. 

The  structure  is  yellow,  with  white  trimmings  and  brown  foundation. 

Mouse  Island  reef,  least  water  12  feet,  lies  one  mile  north  of  Mouse 

island. 

Buoy. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  NW. 
end  of  this  reef.  The  shoalest  water  on  the  reef  is  150  yards  SW.  by 
W  from  the  buoy.    Vessels  must  pass  north  of  this  buoy. 

Starve  Zdland  reef,  400  feet  in  diameter,  least  water  11  feet,  lies  one 
mile  BNE.  of  Mouse  Island  reef.  The  track  of  vessels  lies  between 
these  two  shoals.  This  shoal  lies  exactly  on  the  range  of  Green  Island 
lighthouse  and  the  SW.  point  of  South  Bass  island.  When  Green 
Island  lighthouse  can  be  seen  open  south  of  South  Baas  island  vessels 
are  clear  of  the  shoal  to  the  southward.  Two-thirds  of  the  way  from 
this  reef  to  Starve  island  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  11  feet  of  water  over  it. 
Buoy. — A  red  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  SW.  end 
of  Starve  Island  reef.    Vessels  must  pass  south  of  this  buoy. 

Scott  Point  shoal,  least  water  12  feet,  is  a  rocky  shoal  on  the  south 
of  the  channel.  It  is  400  yards  wide  and  from  its  NW .  end  stretches 
toward,  and  halfway  to,  Mouse  island,  leaving  a  channel  ^  mile  wide 
between  the  shoal  and  the  island. 

Buoy. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  in  16  feet  of  water  on  the  NE. 
end  of  thd  shoal  and  lies  very  close  to  the  track  of  vessels  through  the 
channel.    This  buoy  should  be  left  to  the  southward  in  passing. 

Shoal  in  South  passage  —Two  shoal  spots  and  four  detached  rocks 
lie  easterly  of  Scott  Point  shoal.  The  most  southerly  one,  a  sandy 
shoal,  lies  W.  f  S.  (S.  82°  W.)  from  Carpenter  point,  Kelley  island,  dis- 
tant about  2tV  (2t%)  miles.    It  is  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Coast— Scott  point  (eastward)  to  Cedar  point:  This  portion  of  the 
coast  is  much  indented.  Flats  extend  off  the  east  side  of  Catawba 
i«land  |  mile.  Off  West  harbor,  which  is  tilled  with  shoals,  flats  and 
rocky  shoals  extend  in  a  spit  nearly  l-^  (IJ)  miles,  with  4  feet  near  its  end ; 
off  East  harbor,  also  filled  with  shop  la,  flats  extend  |  mile.  They  then 
near  the  shore,  and  close  to  the  United  States  life-saving  station  west 
of  Marblehead  lighthouse  the  shore  is  steep-to.    Sand  point  is  IJ  (2) 


I  Scott  points, 
Scott  point  is 

»cust  and  Scott 

of  10  feet  for  a 

of  the  wharves 

)th  of  about  10 

feet. 

3  shown  a  fixed 

8. 

xnting  a  square 
itform  of  piles. 
»wu  foundation, 
north  of  Mouse 

;er  on  the  NW. 
)  yards  SW.  by 
oy. 

II  feet,  lies  one 
Is  lies  between 
»f  Green  Island 

When  Green 
8  island  vessels 
>f  the  way  from 
jf  water  over  it. 
on  the  SW.  end 
buoy. 

)al  on  the  south 
' .  end  stretches 
Del  i  mile  wide 

iter  on  the  NE. 
iels  through  the 
passing. 
'  detached  rocks 
[y  one,  a  sandy 
jlley  island,  dis- 

8  portion  of  the 
ide  of  Oatawba 
ihoals,  flats  and 
'eet  near  its  end; 
lile.  They  then 
ng  station  west 
d  point  is  IJ  (2) 


8ANDU8KY  BAT. 


157 


miles  south  of  Marblehead  lighthouse.  Between  these  two  points  flats 
extend  across  to  Cedar  point,  filling  the  entrance  to  Sandusky  bay. 

North  of  this  portion  of  the  coast  are  numerous  islands  which  reach 
almost  to  the  north  shore  of  lake  Erie  and  among  which  are  numer- 
ous ahoals.    These  islands  and  shoals  are  described  on  pages  147-153. 

Marblehead  light. — On  the  northeastern  end  of  the  Marblehead 
peninsula  is  a  fixed  white  light,  shown  67^  feet  above  the  lake  level  and 
visible  14  (16)  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  a  white  conical  tower;  the 
dwelling,  light  buff,  is  westward  of  the  tower. 

Sandusky  bay  forms  a  natural  harbor,  separated  from  lake  Erie  on 
the  north  and  NW.  by  Marblehead  peninsula,  and  on  the  east  by  Cedar 
point,  which  is  also  a  peninsula.  This  bay,  which  is  from  8  to  12  feet 
deep,  is  protected  from  the  eSect  of  storms  by  a  bar  extending  across 
the  entrance,  except  for  a  short  distance  where  the  channel  passes 
Cedar  point.  The  depth  on  the  bar  is  from  4  to  6  feet,  excepting  where 
dredged. 

Cnrrenite. — The  currents  from  the  eastward  set  toward  Marblehead 
point,  being  deflected  at  times  so  that  they  enter  Sandusky  bay  between 
Marblehead  and  Cedar  points,  in  the  channel  and  across  the  flats;  then, 
flowing  eastward  in  the  bay,  they  follow  the  sast  shore  line  and  set 
southward  until  they  reach  the  extreme  south  shore,  when  they  are 
deflected  to  the  westward. 

^'ohnson  island,  a  large  island,  lies  just  within  Sand  point  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  bay. 

Sandusky  river  empties  into  the  WW.  part  of  the  bay,  12^  (14^) 
miles  by  channel  from  lake  Erie.  Fremont,  at  the  head  of  navigation, 
is  16g  (18)  miles  from  the  bay.    Eight  feet  can  be  carried  to  Fremont. 

Sandusky,  at  the  southeastern  end  of  the  bay,  has  numerous 
wharves  and  railroad  docks. 

Channel — The  channel  consists  of  an  outer  channel  across  the  bar 
at  the  entrance  to  the  bay;  depth  varies  from  15  to  18  feet;  a  natural 
channel  between  Sand  Point  and  Cedar  Point  shoals,  and  an  inner 
dredged  channel  in  one  straight  reach  leading  up  to  the  Baltimore  and 
Ohio  Eailroad  docks  in  the  city  of  Sandusky.  The  channel  is  2^  (SJ) 
miles  long,  and  the  bottom  and  banks  are  sandy  until  halfway  through 
the  straight  cut,  where  both  ate  soft.  The  dredged  channel  is  200  feet  in 
width  and  dredged  to  17  feet  depth  at  mean  lake  level,  but  has  shoaled 
some  in  places.  The  spar  buoys  on  the  banks  of  the  dredged  part  of 
the  channel  stand  within  a  few  feet  of  the  edge.  There  is  a  dred  -yed 
channel  89  feet  wide,  with  17  feet  depth  at  mean  lake  level,  extending 
in  front  of  the  docks  to  the  west  end  of  the  city. 

BUOYS. 

Outside  buoy,  No.  2,  is  a  red  can  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 
Outer  Bar  buoy,  No.  4,  is  a  red  8i)ar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 
Icner  Bar  buoy,  No.  6,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 


^^tr-'-SiS,«j::i.St5^a7'i^-i..-:i^ 


.fMT:X'.-^U:^SSiXS^-i'''- 


158 


LAKE  BBIX. 


C/':  - 


North  Shoal  (onter)  buoy,  Ifo.  8,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  iu  14  feet  of 
water. 

So«th  Sho«l  bnoy,  No.  1,  is  a  blaok  spar  buoy  in  13^  feet  of  water. 

North  Shoal  (innor)  bnoy,  Na  10,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of 
water. 

Sand  Point  bnoy,  No.  12,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet  of  water. 

Cedar  Point  bnoy,  Nol  3,  is  a  black  spar  buoy  in  12  feet  of  water. 

Turning  bnoy,  Na  14,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  iu  14  feet  of  water,  and 
marks  the  turning  point  into  the  New  Straight  channel. 

Bntranoa  to  Straight  Ohannal  (outer)  buoy,  Na  5,  is  a  black 
spar  buoy  in  14  feet  of  water  on  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  the 
dredged  ehannel. 

Bntranoe  to  Straight  Channel  (enter)  bnoy,  No.  16,  is  a  red  nun 
buoy  in  15  feet  of  water  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  dredged 
ohannol  and  of  the  SJS.  bank  of  the  deep  hole. 

Channel  buoys. — The  Straight  channel  is  marked  by  tbur  black  apar 
aind  three  red  spar  buoys,  and  the  -^ 

Ehid  of  Channel  (inner)  bnoy,  No.  24,  is  a  red  spar  buoy  in  13  feet 
of  water,  marking  the  west  side  of  the  inner  entrance  to  the  Stittight 
ohanneL 

Dock  Channel  bnoya.'^iT  buoys  mark  the  channel  extending 
along  the  city  docks. 

UOHXS. 

Cedar  Point  range  (front). — On  the  crib  at  the  outer  edge  of  Cedar 
point,  000  feet  NE.  of  the  main  (rear)  light,  is  a  fixed  red  light  28^  feet 
above  lake  level,  and  visiUe  7^  (8^)  miles.  The  light  is  shown  ft-om  a 
white  building  on  a  crib  and  is  moved  troax  time  to  time  eo  oori«spond 
with  the  [Rifting  of  the  Hue  of  best  water  at  ihe  ovter  bar.  This  light 
shoald  not  be  approached  nearer  than  ^  mile  on  the  nuige,  nor  passed, 
entering,  nearer  than  600  fieet. 

Sear  (mate). — On  Oedar  pdnt  is  a  fixed  white  light  48^  feet  above 
the  lake  level  and  visible  12$  (14^)  miles.  The  light  is  shown  fbem  a 
low  white  tower  on  a  dwelling. 

Sireotione. — The  Outside  buoy.  No.  3,  may  be  approached  firam  the 
eiistward  on  any  course  between  NW.  ti.nd  BE.  by  E.  It  is  just  to  the 
northward  of  the  Cedar  Point  range  line.  From  it  steer  SW.  |  W 
(S.  48°  W.),  on  the  rani^  past  North  Shoal  (outer)  buoy^,  No.  8,  to 
South  Shoal  bu  <-  No  < ,  tbMi  haul  to  the  westward  and  steer  a  course 
to  carry  between-.  Cedar  Point  buu",  No.  3,  and  Turning  buoy,  No.  ?.4. 
When  abreast  t  f  No.  14  haul  u.  ^^rt  for  the  entrance  to  the  straight 
chaunel  between  J>uoy8  Nob.  5  and  16,  and  stew  S.  hy  W.  J  W.  (8. 17° 
W.)  for  the  City  Hall  tower.  There  are  buoys  on  each  side  of  this 
channel. 

STBAIOHT  CHANNEL  BANO£. 

Front — A  fixed  white  light,  33^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown 
from  &  square  tower  attached  to  dwelling,  yellow,  standing  (m  square 


T 


'^siJawSts-; 


■.Mttifii^etiiit. 


I 


>y  in  14  feet  of 

feet  of  water. 
)y  in  14  feet  of 

et  of  water, 
feet  of  water, 
of  water,  and 

5,  is  a  black 
sntrance  to  the 

6,  is  a  red  nun 
to  tlie  dredged 

four  blaoli  spar 

bttoy  in  13  feet 
to  iho  StirtJght 

inel  <ateuding 


r  edge  of  Oedtur 
d  light  2^  feet 
g  sbown  {^om  a 
t  CO  con^espoHd 
>ar.  Thi8  light 
ige,  nor  passed, 

i;  48|  feet  above 
8  shown  trwm  a 

taohed  from  the 
It  is  just  to  the 
steer  8W.  |  W 
buoy>  No.  8,  to 
d  steer  a  oonrae 
tg  buoy,  No.  J4. 
to  the  straight 
W.  i  W.  (8. 17® 
Mh  side  of  this 


tevel,  ia  shown 
iding  cm  square 


T 


HUBON — ^VERMILLION. 


159 


red  crib.  The  crib  Is  in  6J  feet  of  water,  about  i  mile  NNW.  ^  W.  (N. 
32°  W.)  from  Oedar  Point  lighthouse  on  the  northerly  prolongation  of 
the  axis  of  the  Straight  channel. 

Rear.— A  fixed  white  light,  50  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown 
from  a  square  pyramidal  yellow  tower  on  a  square  red  crib.  The  light- 
house is  1,S00  feet  N.  by  E.  i  E.  (N.  17°  B.)  from  the  front  light.  The 
light  is  visible  12i^  (l4)  miles. 

Each  light  illamnates  an  arc  of  270°  between  S8E.  J  E.  (S.  28°  E.) 
and  NE.  by  E.  J  B.  (K  62°  E.)  through  east  and  south,  or  45°  to  the 
westward  of  the  range,  the  remainder  of  the  illuminated  arc  being  to 
the  eastward  of  the  range  and  showing  into  the  lake. 

Coast— From  Oedar  point  to  Huron  lighthouse  the  coast  trends  SB. 
for  81  (9J)  miles.  SB.  of  Cedar  point  the  shoal  bank  approaches  the 
shore,  and  the  S-fathom  line  is  less  than  J  mile  off  shore. 

ShoaL- A  rocky  shoal  of  18  feet  lies  f  mile  off  shore  aiid  1§  (IJ) 
mile  NW.  of  Huron  lighthouse;  it  has  4  to  4^  fathoms  around  it 

Huron  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Huron  river.  Piers  have  been  built 
and  the  bar  dredged,;  width  between  the  piers,  125  feet  The  piers 
extend  NE.  ^  N. 

Depth.— Chaanel  dredged  through  bar  at  entrance  to  depth  of  18 
feet  in  August,  1896.  Between  piers  17  feet  depth  is  maintained  over 
nearly  ftiU  widl^i.    Shifting  sands  cause  depths  to  vary  from  time  to 

time. 

Light— Twenty  feet  tram  the  end  of  the  west  pier  a  fixed  white  light 
is  shown  from  a  brown  skeleton  tower  4^4  feet  above  the  lake  level. 
It  is  visible  llf  (13J)  mUes. 

Direddons.- Keep  in  5  fiAthoms  until  the  light  is  made  out,  when 
bring  it  to  bear  ahead  SW.  J  S.  (S.  39©  W.)  and  stand  in  between  the 

piers. 

Ooaat— Yermiffion  lighthouse  is  8J  (9^)  miles  E.  by  N.  of  Huron 
ttghthoase,  the  shore  between  receding  to  tiie  southward  and  forming 
a  BlMOIew  bight  A  short  distance  to  the  eastward  ot  the  head  of  the 
Wght  the  flat  leaves  the  riwre  again  and  oxtwids  ia  a  spit  for  nearly  a 
mile;  it  then  follows  the  shore  at  the  distance  of  nearly  |  mile. 

Venuillion  is  at  the  month  of  tJie  Vermillioii  river.  The  bar  has 
been  improv*^  from  time  to  time  by  the  building  of  piers  and  dredging. 
Width  between  the  piers  130  feet  Direction^f  the  piers,  N.  J  W. 
(N.30W.). 

Bar.— .The  depth  between  the  piers  at  Vermillion  varies  less  than  at 
most  other  places  on  thr  lake.  The  depth  in  the  oUannel  at  mean- 
water  level  is  from  12  to  14  feet.  In  l^ovember,  1896,  10|  feet,  mean 
k^e  level,  was  found  <a  a  bar  which  had  formed  ac  the  mouth  of  the 


I4|^.-.On  the  west  pier,  25  feet  from  th*  outer  end,  a  fixed  red 
fight  is  shown  34^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  8;^  (9ji)  mile*, 
ftom  a  brown,  octagonal  structure. 


'itfi-asw:  ^mSM»gs!^' 


.:.^^^ssf^*'s^K^^^.^i^!^^^'^^i^^^^^^'i'^^^^'^^^^'^-'^-^^'~^-^i'!''^^^^^-<^^'- 


mm 


160 


LAKE   EKIL. 


Direotioiui. — Keep  in  over  4  fathoms  until  the  light  is  made  ont; 
bring  it  to  bear  aliead  S.  ^  E.  (S.  3°  E.)  and  stand  in  between  the  piers. 

Coast— Black  Itiver  lighthouse  (rear)  is  8§  (10)  miles  ENE.  J  E.  of 
Vermillion  lighthouse,  the  coast  between  trending  East  and  then  ENE. 
The  flats  to  the  eastward  of  Vermillion  extend  ^  mile  off  shore  for  a 
short  distance;  they  then  approach  the  shore  to  the  distance  of  ^  mile 
and  the  3-fathom  line  is  not  more  than  this  distance  from  the  shore  to 
Black  Biver  entrance. 

Lorain. — Black  River  harbor  is  in  the  township  and  city  of  Lorain, 
where  tbs  Black  river  empties  into  the  lake.  In  its  natural  condition 
there  was  only  3  feet  of  water  over  the  bar  at  the  mouth  of  the  river, 
but  this  has  been  improved  by  the  construction  of  piers  and  dredging. 
Width  between  the  piers  is  200  feet;  direction  of  the  piers  NW.  The 
Channel  is  75  feet  wide  between  piers  dredged  to  a  depth  of  18  feet  at 
mean  lake  level  in  May,  1895.  Shifting  sands  cause  these  depths  to 
vary  from  time  to  time. 

BANGE  LIGHTS. 

Front — On  the  west  pier,  29^  feet  from  the  outer  end,  47  feet  above 
the  lake  level  and  visible  12^  (14)  miles,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  shown 
from  a  square  pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above. 

Rear. — Near  the  shore  end  of  the  west  pier,  1,061  feet  from  the  front 
light,  are  three  fixed  lights — red,  white,  red — shown  vertically.  The 
lights  are,  respectively,  65^,  61^,  57^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  are 
shown  from  a  square  pyramidal  skeleton  tower,  the  foundation  of 
which  is  red,  the  skeleton  white,  and  the  roof  black. 

These  lights  form  a  range  for  entering  the  harbor. 

DirectionSv — Keep  in  5  fathoms  water  until  the  range  comes  on, 
when  stand  in  on  the  range  and  between  the  piers  into  the  harbor. 

From  Black  river  to  Avon  point  the  coast  trends  ENE.  tor  8  (9^)  miles 
and  the  3-fat)iom  line  is  nowhere  at  a  greater  distance  than  ^  mile  from 
the  shore.  Avon  point,  broad  and  rounding,  has  shoals  all  around  to. 
the  distance  of  ^  mile.  At  Avon  point  the  coast  bends  around  to  the 
SE.  and  then  takes  a  general  easterly  direction  to  Cleveland  Pier  lights, 
which  are  13J  (15J)  miles  E.  J  S.  from  Avon  point. 

Caution. — A  crib  (intake  of  Cleveland  waterworks)  lies  in  6  fathoms 
of  water  1  (1^)  mile  nearly  west  of  the  light  on  the  end  of  the  west 
breakwater  and  1  (1^)  mile  offshore.  It  is  a  serious  menace  to  naviga- 
tion, as  the  white  light  on  it  (an  ordinary  ship's  lantern)  is  irregularly 
lighted  and  often  not  lighted  at  all. 

Cleveland  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Cuyahoga  river,  which  was  orig 
inally  obstructed  by  a  long  sand  bar.  The  channel  was  crooked,  and 
the  depth  of  water  over  the  bar  was  bat  3  feet.  The  river  has  been 
straightened,  piers  have  been  built,  and  a  breakwater  constructed, 
forming  an  outer  harbor  and  making  it  a  safe  harbor  of  refuge. 

Breakwater. — ^The  shore  arm  of  the  west  breakwater  starts  from  a 
point  700  feet  west  of  the  old  bed  of  the  Cuyahoga  river  and  5,950  feet 


I 


CLEVELAND. 


161 


lit  is  made  out; 
weeu  the  piers. 
»  ENE.  i  E.  of 
and  then  ENE. 
off  shore  for  a 
tance  of  ^  mile 
>m  the  shore  to 

I  city  of  Lorain, 
ktoral  condition 
th  of  the  river, 
8  and  dredging. 
)ier8  NW.  The 
)th  of  18  feet  at 
hess  depths  to 


d,  47  feet  above 
ite  light,  shown 
B  above. 

)t  from  the  front 
vertically.  The 
[e  level,  and  are 
e  foundation  of 


'ange  comes  on, 
)  the  harbor. 
S.  for  8  (9^)  miles 
than  ^  mile  from 
als  all  around  to. 
ds  around  to  the 
iland  Pier  lights, 

lies  in  6  fathoms 
end  of  the  west 
eiiace  to  naviga- 
n)  is  irregularly 

which  was  orig' 
'^as  croolted,  and 
e  river  has  been 
ter  constructed, 
>f  refuge. 
)er  starts  from  • 
ar  and  5,960  feet 


west  of  the  west  ]>ier  of  the  present  channel.  Tliis  arm  rnuK  iutu  the 
lake  nearly  north  a  distance  uf  3,130  feet,  where  it  is  Joined  to  the  brealc- 
water  proper.  The  west  brealcwuter  io  nearly  i)nrallel  to  the  shore  and 
is  4,030  feet  long.  At  a  point  200  feet  from  its  eastern  end  a  spur  100 
feet  long  runs  at  right  angles,  breaking  the  force  of  the  heavy  seas  and 
currents  which  run  along  the  breakwater  during  northwesterly  gales. 
These  currents  add  greatly  to  the  difficulty  of  taking  vessels  into  the 
harbor. 

The  east  breakwater  commences  on  the  prolongation  of  the  west  arm, 
leaving  an  opening  of  600  feet.  It  is  intended  to  build  3,6<M)  feet  on  this 
line,  and  then  to  incline  toward  the  shore  for  a  farther  distance  of  2,000 
feet. 

A  spur  similar  to  the  one  on  the  west  breakwater  lias  been  con- 
structed.   In  1896,  2,600  feet  of  this  breakwater  had  been  comjileted. 

New  entranee. — There  is  an  opening  201  feet  wide  through  the  shore 
Arm  of  the  west  breakwater.  The  outer  end  of  this  opening  is  1,308 
feet  from  the  outside  angle  of  the  breakwater.  This  opening  has  been 
dredged  to  a  depth  of  16  feet. 

Depths. — In  September,  1896,  there  was  from  17  to  over  20  feet  in 
midchanuel  from  the  breakwater  to  the  L.  8.  &  M.  S.  railroad  bridge; 
from  the  bridge  of  the  L.  S.  &  M.  S.  railroad  up  stream  to  the-  crossing 
of  the  N.  Y.  P.  &  O,  railroad  there  was  a  depth  of  19  feet  below  the 
mean  level  of  Lake  Erie  and  a  width  of  130  feet;  from  the  crossing  of 
the  N.  Y.  P.  &  O.  railroad  to  the  transfer  lock,  depth  16J  feet  below 
the  same  level  and  width  of  130  feet;  above  the  transfer  lock  dredg- 
ing was  being  done  with  the  intention  of  attaining  a  depth  of  16^  feet 
below  the  same  level  and  a  wid)-h  of  100. feet  for  a  distance  of  2,000 
feet.  The  anchorage  in  the  harbor  of  refuge  is  accessible  to  vessels 
drawing  19  feet,  and  there  is  ample  room,  although  there  are  several 
18-tbot  spots.  The  deposit  from  the  river  and  the  lake  causes  the 
depths  to  vary  from  time  to  time. 

Branch  Hjrdrograpliic  Office. — The  United  States  Hydrographic 
Office  has  a  bramth  office  in  the  Arcade  building  at  Cleveland. 

The  office  is  supplied  with  all  the  latest  information  pertaining  to  the 
lakes,  also  nautical  books  and  instruments,  all  of  which  are  open  for  free 
eonsultation  or  reftoeuee  to  the  lake  mariners  or  other  interested  parties. 

TimebaU. — The  time  ball  is  dropped  by  the  branch  office  at  noon 
every  day  (Sundays  excepted)  from  the  flagsta'ft'  on  top  of  the  Arcade 
building.  The  ball  is  hoisted  five  minutes  before  noon,  central  standard 
time,  and  is  dropped  exactly  at  noon .  Should  the  ball  be  dropped  before 
the  exact  instant  at  noon  it  will  be  hoisted  immediately,  and  kept  up 
until  five  minutes  after  noon  (12h.  6m.)  and  then  lowered  slowly.  Should 
the  ball  fail  to  drop  exactly  at  noon  it  will  be  kept  mastheaded  until 
five  minutes  after  noon  (12h.  5m.)  and  then  lowered  slowly. 

Lifs-eaving  atatioii. — A  life-saving  station  is  at  the  west  side  of  the 
entrance  to  Cleveland  harbor. 
1944— No.  108 11 


162 


LAKE   ERIE. 


Dry  docks.— There  are  three  dry  docks.  The  longest.  4(r»  feet  over 
.all,  with  48  foot  gate,  has  a  depth  of  IG  feet  on  sill;  tlu  next  in  size, 
3(i0  feot  over  all,  with  50- foot  gate,  has  20  feet  over  sill;  the  third  is 
325  f»    t,  over  all,  45-foot  gate,  and  13^  feet  over  sill. 

LlftHTS. 

West  breakwater  (east  end).— On  a  crib  just  inside  of  the  end 
of  tht«  bicakwater,  from  a  brown,  octagonal,  pyramidal  tower,  35 J  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  light.  Hashing  alternately  red  and 
white,  the  intervals  between  the  flashes  being  ten  seconds.  The  light 
if«  visible  lij  (13)  miles. 

Fog  signal.— From  a  brown  house  on  the  same  crib  a  10-inch  steam 
whistle  is  sounded  as  follows :  Blast  three  seconds,  silent  interval  fifty- 
seven  Hoconds. 

East  breakwater  (west  end).— Near  the  west  end  of  the  East  break- 
water, from  a  mast,  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light  25  feet  above  the  lake 
level. 

Caution. — The  unfinished  work  on  the  east  end  of  the  east  break- 
water is  not  marked  by  a  light  or  day  mark. 

West  pier.— On  the  West  pier,  53  feet  from  the  outer  end,  from  a 
square,  brown,  pyramidal  tower,  is  shown,  47  feet  above  the  lake  level, 
a  fixed  white  light,  visible  llj  (13)  miles. 

East  pier.— On  the  East  pier,  37  feet  from  the  outer  end,  from  a  simi- 
lar tower  is  shown,  37  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  red  light,  visible 

7i  (SjJ)  mHeti. 

Dixeclioas.— When  off  the  breakwater,  bring  the  east  pier  light 
'fixed  red)  to  bear  8E.  by  S.  (S.  34^  E.)  and  run  in  through  the  opening 
anJ  between  tlie  piers. 

Caution. — With  westerly  winds  a  strong  set  makes  along  the  break- 
water^ and  caution  should  be  used  in  making  the  entrance. 

Coast— Cleveland  to  Fairport:  The  coast  trends  NE.  for  24J  (28^) 
miles  and  is  generally  safe  to  approach  to  the  distance  of  J  mile. 

At  1|  (2)  miles  west  of  Fairport  the  flats  extend  somewhat  farther 
from  the  coast,  and  along  here  vessels  should  not  approach  within  one 
mile. 

fairport  is  near  the  njouth  of  the  Grand  river.  This  river  was  orig- 
inally closed  by  a  hard  sand  bar,  but  it  has  been  improved  from  time  to 
time  by  the  building  of  piers  and  dredging,  so  that  there  is  now  usually 
a  19-foot  channel.  Width  between  the  piers  is  180  feet.  Direction  of 
the  piers,  N.  |  W. 

Bar. — ^A  dangerous  bar  works  across  the  mouth  of  the  piers  ftom  the 
westward,  with  crest  about  150  feet  from  end  of  the  west  pier;  some- 
times there  is  less  than  13  feet  on  crest.  An  outside  bw  also  forms. 
A  channel  was  dredged  through  the  bar  in  November,  1895,  to  18  feet 
depth.    Between  the  piers  the  depth  is  usualUy  17  feet. 

Life-daving  station. — ^The  life-saving  station  is  at  the  inner  end  of 
the  west  pier. 


FAIRPORT — ASHTABULA, 


163 


.  46r>  feet  over 

next  iu  size, 

I;  the  third  is 


de  of  the  end 
sower,  35J  feet 
lately  red  aud 
ds.    The  light 

,  10-inch  steam 
t  interval  fifty- 

)he  East  break- 
ibove  the  lake 

he  east  break- 

:er  end,  from  a 
the  lake  level, 

fid,  from  a  simi- 
Ml  light,  visible 

east  pier  light 
Lgh  the  opening 

long  the  break- 
ice. 

B.  for  2^  (284) 
of  ^  mile, 
newhat  farther 
)ach  within  one 

I  river  was  orig- 
'ed  from  time  to 
B  is  now  nsnally 
t.    Direction  of 

e  piers  fi*om  the 
est  pier;  some- 
bar  also  forms. 
1895,  to  18  feet 
J. 
;he  inner  end  of 


Note. — The  life-saving  .station  keeper  reports  as  follows,  November, 
180"):  The  only  dauyer  to  navigation  at  or  near  I'airport  is  the  natural 
formation  of  sand  bars  whicli  o«^curs  each  year,  wliii;h,  on  aeeount 
of  the  ext i»!uiely  low  stage  of  the  water,  are  dangerous  in  entering  the 
harbor.  The  outside  bar,  l,li(M)  feet  from  tlie  end  of  piers,  has  only  12 
feet  over  it  in  places,  but  by  keei)ing  well  to  the  eastward  in  entering, 
masters  will  avoid  slioal  spots.  The  inside  bar  is  nmch  worse,  there 
being  only  8  or  10  feet  of  water.  The  bar  is  about  00  feet  from  tlie  end 
of  the  piers.  There  is  a  dredge  at  work  cutting  a  channel  from  iu  range 
with  the  east  pier,  extending  west  about  75  feet,  with  a  IT^-foot  depth. 
In  entering  the  harbor,  unless  pei  tectiv  '  iliar  with  the  channel,  it 
would  be  advisable  to  take  a  tug. 

LIGHTS 

Fairport — On  the  bluff  on  the  east  side  ni  the  month  of  Grand  river, 
from  a  conical  gray  tower,  is  shown,  10L\^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a 
fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (18^)  miles. 

Range  (front). — Twenty-one  feet  from  the  outei-  end  of  the  east  pier, 
from  a  square  pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above,  is  shown, 
37  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  llj  (1.3)  miles. 

Range  (rear). — Near  the  shore  end  of  the  east  pier,  1,120  feet  in  the 
rear  of  the  front  light,  from  a  brown,  triangular,  pyramidal  skeleton 
tower  are  shown  three  lights,  4  feet  apart  and  placed  vertically.  The 
lights  are  red,  white,  red.  The  middle  light  (white)  is  52  feet  above  the 
lake  level. 

The  lights  form  a  range  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Directions. — Keep  in  over  5  fathoms  until  the  range  comes  on,  when 
stand  iu  on  the  range  and  between  the  piers  into  the  harbor. 

Coast — Fairport  to  Ashtabula :  The  coast  between  these  ports  trends 
ENE.  for  234  (203)  miles.  The  3-fathom  line  is  less  than  .>  mile  ott"  shore, 
excejit  jnst  west  of  Ashtabula,  where  there  is  17  feet  at  this  distance 

Ashtabula  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Ashtabula  river.  Originally  the 
bar  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  had  but  2  feet  of  water  over  it,  and  the 
rock  bottom  was  but  9  feet  below  the  surface  of  the  lake.  The  river 
has  been  improved  from  time  to  time  by  the  building  of  piers  and  dredg- 
ing.   Width  between  piers,  213  feet;  direction  of  piers,  N.  ^  B. 

Depths. — The  following  depths  of  water  have  been  reported  over  the 
bar  at  the  entrance  to  Ashtabula,  May  15,  1896 : 

On  line  of  west  pier,  15-Jj,  to  17  j%  feet. 

On  line  of  center  of  channel,  16/o  to  17-i^rt^  feet. 

On  line  of  east  pier,  15j%  to  16,%  feet. 

A  channel  20  feet  deep  and  75  feet  wide  has  been  dredged  along  the 
west  pier.    Vessels  will  find  the  best  water  along  the  west  pier. 

Shifting  sands  cause  these  depths  to  vary  from  time  to  time. 

Life-saving  station  is  ou  the  beach,  west  side  of  the  entrance  to 
the  river. 


'  -RB5;^SiW«6**»tt7i^*a*^i«^ 


164 


LAKE   ERIK. 
KANOE   LIGHTS. 


Ashtabula  (front).— On  the  west  pier,  27  J  feet  from  tlie  onter  end, 
from  a  Hqimrepyramklul  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above,  is  shown 
a  fixed  white  light,  35^  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  llj  (13) 

miles. 

Pierhead  (rear).— Near  tlie  shore  end  of  the  west  pier,  1,500  feet  in 
the  rear  of  the  front  light,  from  a  brown,  triangular,  pyramidal  skeleton 
tower  are  shown  three  lights-red,  white,  red-placed  vertically  and  4 
feet  apart.    The  middle  light  (white)  is  52  feet  above  the  lake  level. 

The  lights  form  a  range  for  entering  the  harbor. 

Pog  signal— At  Ashtabula  light  station  the  fog  signal  is  a  6incli 
steam  whistle,  which  sounds  as  follows:  Blast  three  seconds,  alternate 
silent  intervals  of  twelve  and  forty-two  seconds. 

Directions.— Keep  in  over  5  fathoms  until  the  range  comes  on,  when 
stand  in  on  the  range,  between  the  piers  into  the  harbor. 

Coast.— Ashtabula  to  Conneaut:  Between  these  ports  the  course 
continues  BNE.  for  11^  (13^)  mile.s,  and  the  3-fathom  line  is  nowhere 
at  a  greater  distance  than  i  mile  off  shore. 

Conneaut,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Conneaut  river,  is  very  near  the 
boundary  line  between  Ohio  and  Pennsylvania.  The  river  had  an 
original  depth  of  2  feet  over  the  bar.  The  bar  is  being  improved  and 
will  have  a  width  of  200  feet  between  the  piers.  Direction  of  the  west 
pier  is  N.  by  W.  4  W. 

The  railroad  co  .i'  any  h:\»  repaired  the  old  piers  to  some  extent  and 
dredged  the  entrar  l  j  tc  1.  feet.  Shifting  sands  cause  the  depths  to 
vary  from  time  t*:  time. 

LIGHTS. 

Conneaut.— On  the  bluff,  just  west  of  the  harbor,  from  a  square 
pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above,  is  shown  a  fixed  white 
light,  69  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  114  (13)  miles. 

Pierhead.— On  the  west  pier,  25  feet  from  the  outer  end,  from  two 
white  uprights,  is  shown,  20  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white 

Directions.— When  in  5  fathoms  bring  the  Pierhead  light  to  bear  8. 
byE.  J  E.  (S.  14°  E.)  and  stand  in  on  this  bearing  and  between  the 
piers. 

PENNSYLVANIA. 

Coast.— Just  eastward  of  Conneaut  is  the  boundary  line  between 
Ohio  and  Pennsylvania.  From  Conneaut  to  Presque  Isle  peninsula  the 
coast  trends  ENB.  for  19^  (22^)  miles.  The  shore  can  be  approached 
anywhere  in  this  stretch  to  i  mile.  The  depth  at  this  distance  is  gen- 
erally from  5  to  6  fathoms,  except  in  the  first  4^  (5)  miles,  where  it  is  4 
fathoms.  Nearly  a  mile  NW.  from  the  mouth  of  Crooked  creek  and  f 
mile  offshore  is  a  3^-fathom  spot. 

Presque  Isle  peninsula  trends  NNE.,  gradnally  bending  to  the 
eastward,  and,  widening,  protects  Erie  harbor  fifom  the  north  and  west. 


I 


ii 


"If 


I 


m  tlie  onter  end, 
e  above,  is  shown 
d  visible  llj  (13) 

pier,  1,B00  feet  in 
i^raniiilal  skeleton 
i  vertically  and  4 
the  lake  level. 

sifrnal  is  a  6-inch 
jccouds,  alternate 

fe  comes  on,  when 
bor. 

ports  the  course 
m  line  is  nowhere 

is  very  near  the 
Fhe  river  had  an 
ing  improved  and 
ection  of  the  west 

}  some  extent  and 
use  the  depths  to 


or,  from  a  square 
lown  a  fixed  white 
;)  miles. 

iter  end,  from  two 
jvel,  a  fixed  white 

lad  light  to  bear  S. 
;  and  between  the 


idary  line  between 
B  Isle  peninsula  the 
Ban  be  approached 
tiis  distance  is  gen- 
miles,  where  it  is  4 
rooked  creek  and  | 

lly  bending  to  the 
bhe  north  and  west. 


i 


F 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


2.2 


I.I 


1^ 


2.0 


1.8 


1.25 

1.4    III  1.6 

- 

^ 

6"     

► 

Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  873-4503 


A 


SLtf 


15' 


6^ 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


ERIE. 


165 


The  peninsula  is  much  indented  on  its  south  shore,  and  in  it  are  sev- 
eral small  lakes.  Tlie  west  shore  of  the  peninsula  should  not  be 
approached  within  |  mile.    Misery  bay,  at  its  SE.  end,  is  filled  with  flats. 

Presque  Isle  light.— On  the  northern  shore  of  Presque  Isle  penin- 
sula, 400  feet  from  the  lake,  from  a  square,  red  tower,  attached  to  a 
dwelling,  is  shown,  50  feet  above  the  iake  level,  a  light,  flashing  alter- 
nately red  and  white,  the  interval  between  the  flashes  being  ten  sec- 
onds. The  light  is  visible  13  (15)  miles.  When  the  trees  are  in  leaf 
this  light  is  partially  obscured  in  the  bight  at  the  entrance  to  Erie 
harbor. 

Brie  harbor  (Presque  Isle  bay),  protected  by  Presque  Isle  penin- 
sula, has  been  artificially  improved.  Outside  of  the  3-fathom  line  it  is 
over  15  (2)  miles  long  by  a  mile  broad,  the  width  being  somewhat 
contracted  by  a  spit  extending  into  the  harbor  from  the  middle  of  tlie 
south  shore  of  Presque  Isle  peninsula.  It  is  the  finest  natural  harbor 
on  the  lake,  and  has  accommodation  for  a  large  number  of  vessels. 

Erie,  on  the  south  shore  of  the  lake,  is  en  a  bluff,  and  has  a  large 
number  of  docks  and  wharves. 

Improvements.— The  present  works  consist  of  (1)  the  south  break- 
water, extending  northerly  from  the  main  shore;  (2)  a  pier  on  the  south 
side  of  the  entrance  channel,  extending  easterly  from  the  breakwater; 
(3)  a  pier  on  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  channel,  parallel  to  the  south 
pier  and  350  feet  distant,  and  (4)  a  catch  sand  jetty,  built  about  3,000 
feet  north  of  the  north  pier.  This  jetty  did  not  serve  its  purpose  and 
has  received  no  repairs  since  its  construction. 

Depth  in  the  channel— In  January,  189G,  the  depth  of  water  was 
not  less  than  18  feet  at  mean  lake  level,  or  not  less  than  16^  feet  at  low 
water  for  a  channel  width  of  not  less  than  250  feet. 

Currents. — Southwest  gales  cause  a  strong  incurrent  through  the 
channel  and  NE.  gales  a  strong  outcurrent. 

Buoys. — A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  18^  feet  of  water  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  inner  face  of  the  north  pier  and  marks  the  northern 
side  of  the  entrance  to  the  channel.  A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  16 
feet  of  water  on  the  prolongation  of  the  south  pier  and  250  yards  cut- 
aide  of  the  end  of  the  north  pier.  This  buoy  is  350  yards  witMu  the 
outer  edge  of  the  spit  extending  along  tho  south  side  of  the  entrance 
channel.  The  outer  edge  of  this  spit  is  south  of  the  north  outer  buoy. 
There  are  six  other  buoys  (red  to  starboard  and  black  to  port)  marking 
the  channel  in  entering.  The  inner  buoy,  on  the  north  bank,  is  a  gas 
buoy,  red,  showing  a  fixed  white  light. 

Life-saving  station.— There  is  a  life-saving  station  on  the  middle  of 
tlie  north  pier,  adjoining  the  light  station. 

LIGHTS. 

Brie.— Eastward  of  Erie  harbor,  on  a  high  bluff,  from  a  conical  tower, 
is  shown,  128  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  17 J 
(20)  miles. 


166 


LAKE   EKIE. 


The  light  is  obacnred  by  trees  on  Presque  Isle  peninsula  through  the 
greater  part  of  the  arc  between  the  bearing  SE.  by  E.  ^  E.  (S.  62°  E.) 
and  East. 

Presque  Isle  (north)  pierhead.— On  the  north  pier,  30  feet  from  the 
outer  end,  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal  tower  with  brown  trimmings, 
is  shown,  40  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  Hi  (13) 
miles.  With  Erie  Range  No.  1  in  line  bearing  SW.  by  W.  J  W.  (S.  62° 
W.)  it  forms  a  range  for  approaching  the  piers. 

Fog  signal.— At  this  station  a  bell  is  struck  by  macliiuery  every 
twenty  seconds. 

ERIE  UANGE. 

No.  1  (front). — On  the  north  pier,  8  feet  from  the  west  end,  from  a 
white  octagonal  lantern  on  a  square  white  tower,  is  shown,  21  lieet 
above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  wliito  light,  visible  9^  (lOf )  miles. 

Note. — After  passing  tliis  light  bring  it  in  range  astern  witli  No.  2, 
rear,  bearing  NE.  by  E.  (N.  56°  E.).  This  range  carries  through  the 
best  water  in  the  dredged  channel  into  deep  water  of  the  harbor. 

No.  2  (rear).— NE.  by  E.  (N.  56°  E.),  908  feet  from  No.  1  light,  is  a 
fixed  white  light,  46  feet  above  the  lake  level.  The  light  is  suspended 
from  a  white  mast  with  a  round  black  disk,  5J  feet  in  diameter,  above 
the  lantern. 

Erie  harbor. — Shoal. — North  of  the  elevator  300  feet  there  is  a  W- 
foot  shoal. 

Directions. — Coming  from  the  westward,  Erie  Main  light  (fixed 
white)  will  probably  be  made  out  first,  and  then  Presque  Isle  light 
(flashing  red  and  white).  This  latter  light  can  be  approached  to  one 
mile  and  Presque  Isle  peninsula  rounded  at  that  distance.  When  Erie 
Main  light  (fixed  white)  bears  S.  J  E.  (S.  6°  E.),  steer  for  it  on  this  bear- 
ing until  the  range,  Presque  Isle  pierhead  (fixed  red)  and  Erie  range 
No.  1  (fixed  white)  come  in  line  bearing  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  62°  W.); 
run  in  on  this  range,  passing  south  of  the  red  can  buoy  on  the  end  of 
the  shoal  extending  from  the  north  pier,  and  remembering  that  the 
outer  black  spar  buoy  No.  1  is  not  on  the  outer  end  of  the  spit  ou  the 
prolongation  of  the  south  pier,  but  halfway  between  tlie  outer  end  of 
the  spit  and  the  outer  end  of  the  south  pier. 

After  })assing  Erie  Range  light  No.  1 ,  bring  light  and  Erie  Range 
No.  2  (fixed  white)  in  range  astern,  bearing  is  jy  E.  (N.  56°  E.) ;  keep 
this  range  on  astern  and  run  in  between  the  buoys  in*^o  deep  water  of 
the  harbor. 

Approaching  from  the  eastward,  Erie  Main  light  (axed  white)  will  be 
made  out  first.  It  should  be  approached  ou  a  SW.  (nothing  to  the  west- 
ward) bearing  until  the  range  SW.  by  W.  J  W.  (S.  02°  W.)  comes  on, 
when  proceed  in  as  directed  above. 

Coast— From  Erie  to  Dunkirk  the  coast  trends  NE.  by  E.  for  38 
(43|)  miles.  The  shore  can  be  approached  anywhere  to  J  mile,  except 
one  mile  NE.  of  Van  Buren  point,  where  a  spit  extends  from  the  shore 


l*<^^?)l^fci»<iS*-^1j(lWjw'  t»-if^r^'^_ 


a  through  the 
E.  (S.  62°  E.) 

)  feet  from  the 
vn  trimuiings, 
i8iblelli(13) 

^  i  w.  (S.  02° 

.chiuery  every 


it  end,  from  a 

hown,  21  leet 

miles. 

rn  Avith  No.  2, 

s  through  the 

B  harbor. 

0.  1  light,  is  a 
t  is  suspended 
iameter,  above 

t  there  is  a  IS- 

n  light  (fixed 
que  Isle  light 
oached  to  one 
}.  When  Erie 
it  ou  this  bear- 
ed Erie  range 

1.  (S.  62°  W.); 
r  on  the  end  of 
ering  that  the 
he  spit  ou  the 
e  outer  end  of 

nd  Erie  Bange 

.660E.);  keep 

deep  water  of 

I  white)  will  be 
ng  to  the  west- 
W.)  comes  on, 

3.  by  E.  for  38 
( J  mile,  except 
from  the  shore 


DUNKIRK. 


167 


to  the  westward  for  a  little  over  a  mile.  There  are  only  5  feet  of  water 
ou  this  spit,  ^  mile  from  the  shore.  Several  small  creeks  empty  into  the 
lake  in  this  stretch  and  24^  (28)  miles  NE.  of  Erie,  on  Chautauqua 
creek,  is  Barcelona.  The  boundary  line  between  the  States  of  Penn- 
sylvania and  New  York  is  8§  (10)  uules  SE.  of  this  town,  just  east  of 
Twenty-mile  creek. 

NEW  YORK. 

Dunkirk  is  on  an  artificial  harbor,  protected  by  a  pier  and  a  partially 
completed  breakwater.  In  Jauuarj,  1890,  the  channel  entrance  had  a 
depth  of  13  feet  for  a  width  of  100  feet,  and  13  feet  at  the  docks.  A  sand 
bar  makes  out  from  the  beacon  light  in  a  NE.  direction,  ou  which  there 
is  only  12  feet. 

Buoys.— A  beacon  buoy,  black  spar,  is  moored  in  17  feet  of  water  at 
the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  channel.  It  may  be  rounded  on 
the  west  side  at  50  yards.  A  red  spar  buoy  (Outer  buoy)  is  moored  in 
14  feet  of  water  in  the  channel  close  to  the  south  side  of  the  entrance, 
and  marks  tlie  outer  end  of  a  ledge  of  rocks  just  covered,  extending 
along  the  south  bank  of  the  channel  nearly  to  the  Inner  buoy.  A 
straight  course  may  be  steered  between  these  (Outer  and  Inner)  buoys. 
Inner  buoy,  red  spar,  is  moored  in  10^  feet  of  water  on  the  south  side 
of  the  excavated  channel. 

LIGHTS. 

Duxikirk.— West  of  the  harbor  entrance,  on  a  bluff  point,  from  a 
square,  reddish  gray  tower,  is  shown,  82  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed 
white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every  90  seconds,  and  visible  14| 
(17)  miles. 

Dunkirk  pierhead.— On  the  easterly  end  of  the  west  breakwater, 
about  26  feet  from  the  channel  face  of  the  pier  entrance  to  Dunkirk 
harbor,  a  fixed  red  lens  lantern  light  is  shown  from  a  square,  dark  red, 
pyramidal,  open  framework  structure,  surmounted  by  a  square  lantern, 
with  white  roof,  and  having  a  balcony  with  black  hand  rail.  The  focal 
plane  of  the  light  is  41  feet  above  mean  lake  level. 

Directions.— Making  this  harbor  from  the  eastward,  steer  for  the 
entrance  between  Dunkirk  Pierhead  lighthouse  and  tlie  beacon  buoy, 
and  nothing  inshore  of  a  SW.  by  S.  (S.  34°  W.)  course.  From  the  v.  est- 
ward  keep  in  over  4  fathoms  until  the  Pierhead  lighthouse  bears  SW. 
by  S.  (S.  340  W.),  when  the  channel  entrance  can  be  run  for.  The  channel 
in  is  straight  and  marked  on  its  south  side  by  two  red  buoys. 

During  northerly  gales  a  heavy  swell  sets  into  the  harbor  past  the 
east  end  of  the  breakwater,  rendering  berths  at  the  docks  insecure. 

Coast— Dunkirk  to  Buffalo:  From  Dunkirk  to  Silver  creek,  7  (8) 
miles  NE.  by  E.,  the  shore  line  is  very  irregular  and  projects  into  the 
lake  in  several  small  points,  all  of  which  have  spits  extending  from 
them.    Here  it  is  best  to  keep  at  leii^^j  Ij^  (1^)  miles  from  the  shore. 


IfiR 


LAKE   ERIE. 


At  Silver  creek  tlio  coast  lino  chatiges  direction  to  the  NNW.  to  Stur- 
geon point,  which  is  lOi  (12)  miles  distant.  This  part  of  the  coast  is 
also  uneven,  with  several  projecting  spits  for  a  distance  of  a  mile.  Ofif 
Big  Sister  creek,  2§  (3)  miles  SW.  J  S.  of  Sturgeon  point,  and  1  (1^)  mile 
off  snore,  is  a  rocky  shoal,  with  C  feet  least  water.  The  ahoal  extends  J 
mile  NB.  and  SW.  and  is  i  mile  broad.  At  Sturgeon  point  the  coast 
lino  again  changes  direction  to  NB.  by  E.,  and  continues  for  lOJ  (llf ) 
miles  to  Hamburg,  where  it  again  changes  direction  to  a  little  west  of 
north,  and  so  continues  for  C  (7)  miles  to  the  entrance  of  Buffalo  har- 
bor. This  stretch  of  coast  is  rather  more  even,  but,  on  account  of  two 
rocky  and  extensive  ofHying  shoals  lying  north  of  Hamburg,  it  should 
not  be  approached  nearer  than  1  (IJ)  mile. 

Seneca  shoal  lies  3  J  (3^)  miles  off  Hamburg,  where  the  coast  changes 
its  direction  io  the  northward.  The  shoal  is  nearly  i  mile  north  and 
south  by  ^  mile  wide.    It  is  rocky,  with  a  least  dei)th  of  15  feet. 

Buoy.— A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet  of  water  on  the  NW. 
side  of  tlie  shoal.    The  15-foot  spot  is  100  yards  NB.  from  the  buoy. 

Waverly  shoaL-  The  NE.  end  of  this  shoal  lies  2  (2j»if)  miles  SW. 
by  W.  §  W.  (S.  63°  W.)  from  the  light  on  Buffalo  breakwater.  The 
shoal  is  100  fef>t  wide,  and  extends  700  yards  SW.  and  NE.  Least  water, 
13  feet,  is  400  feot  SW.  of  the  buoy.  There  is  a  small  16-foot  detached 
spot  a  little  eastward  of  the  north  end  of  the  shoal. 

Buoy.— A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  in 
13  feet  of  water  near  the  NE.  end  of  the  sho?!, 

Buffalo,  on  Buffalo  creek,  is  at  the  NB.  end  of  lake  Erie,  where  it 
contracts  to  form  the  Niagara  river.  It  extends  along  the  river  for 
some  distance,  and  on  the  opposite  shore  is  Fort  Erie. 

Improvements.— The  object  of  the  improvements  is  to  protect  the 
entrance  to  Buffalo  harbor,  the  south  shore  of  Buffalo  creek,  ^nd  to  form 
an  outer  hnrbor  of  refuge. 

The  improvements  are;  North  and  south  piers  at  the  entrance  to  the 
creek  (completed);  masonry  sea  wall  (completed);  sand-catch  or  pile 
pier,  and  breakwater  and  shore  arm. 

The  sand  catch  extends  into  the  lake  at  a  point  8,000  feet  southward 
of  the  south  pier.  The  breakwater,  commencing  about  on  a  line  of  the 
south  pier  extended,  lies  parallel  to  and  J  mile  from  the  shore.  This 
breakwater  has  its  full  length  of  7,600  feet.  The  shore  arm  of  the  break- 
water is  intended  to  cover  the  opening  between  the  south  end  of  the 
main  breakwater  and  the  shore,  leavi'igr  a  passageway  for  vessels.  Some 
1,150  feet  at  the  outer  end  of  this  shore  arm  had  been  completed,  but 
in  October,  1893,  it  was  so  badly  wrecked  by  a  storm  that  no  attempt 
has  been  made  to  repair  it. 

Depths.— Twenty-three  feet  can  be  carried  into  the  outer  harbor. 
The  Buffalo  river  and  Blackwell  canal  are  maintained  by  the  city  on  the 
basis  of  an  18-foot  depth  at  low  water,  as  established  by  the  city,  which 


rNW.  to  Stur- 
f  the  coast  is 
f  a  luile.  Off 
iiul  1  (li)  mile 
loal  extends  J 
oint  the  coast 
,s  for  lOi  (113) 
El  little  west  of 
(f  Buffalo  Uar- 
.ccoinit  of  two 
burg,  it  should 

>  coast  changes 
mile  north  and 
15  feet. 

ier  on  the  NW. 
m  the  buoy. 
2j\-)  miles  SW. 
akwater.  The 
.  Least  water, 
3-foot  detached 

y  is  moored  in 

Erie,  where  it 
g  the  river  for 

to  protect  the 
sek,  ^nd  to  form 

entrance  to  the 
d-catch  or  pile 

feet  southward 
on  a  line  of  the 
iie  shore.  This 
rm  of  the  break- 
outhendof  the 
•  vessels.  Some 
completed,  but 
}hat  710  attempt 

e  outer  harbor. 
y  the  city  on  the 
J  the  city,  which 


NIAGARA  RIVER. 


169 

Actual  depth  allows 


would  give  about  19  feet  at  mean  lake  level, 
about  10  feet  draft. 

Dry  docks. — There  are  four  docks,  with  lengths  over  all  of  390,  295, 
348,  and  349  feet;  widths  of  gates,  4(5,  40,  58J,  and  45  feet;  depths  (»f 
sills,  14,  llA,  9,  and  14  feet.  The  340-foot  dock  is  to  be  lengthened  to 
400  feet,  and  Avill  have  a  depth  over  sill  of  17  feet. 

BTJOYS   AT   THE   KNTRANOE   TO   THE  NIAGARA  RIVER. 

Horseshoe  reef. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  17  feet  of  water 
and  marks  the  south  end  of  Horseshoe  reef,  lying  between  Middle  reef 
and  Buffalo. 

It  also  marks  the  east  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Emerald  channel. 

Emerald  channel. — A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water 
and  marks  the  north  end  of  the  Middle  reef  and  the  south  side  of  the 
northern  entrance  to  Emerald  channel. 

Middle  reef. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  13  feet  of  water  and 
marks  the  west  point  of  Middle  reef.  Shoal  water  makes  out  from  the 
Canadian  shore  opposite  for  more  than  one-third  the  way  across,  leaving 
a  channel  about  \  mile  wide. 

Bird  Island  reef. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water 
and  njarks  the  western  point  of  a  reef  making  out  from  Black  Rock 
Harbor  piei,  near  its  upper  end.  There  is  from  4  to  9  feet  of  water 
between  the  buoy  and  the  pier;  17  feet  in  the  (;hannel  between  this  and 
the  buoy  opposite. 

Limekiln  reef. — A  red  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  14  feet  of  water,  700 
yards  from  the  Canadian  shore  and  nearly  opposite  Bird  Island  Reef 
buoy.  It  marks  the  eastern  point  of  a  reef  with  8  to  10  feet  of  water 
on  it.  The  range  from  this  buoy  to  the  west  shore  at  the  head  of 
Narrows  marks  the  west  side  of  the  channel. 

Southeast  shoal. — A  black  spar  buoy  is  mooi-ed  in  13  feet  of  water, 
about  100  yards  SE.  of  the  line  of  the  Niagara  River  range  lights,  and 
shows  the  limit  of  the  channel  above  the  line. 

Port  Erie  point. — A  red  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  10  feet  of  water  on 
the  Canadian  side  of  the  river,  and  shows  the  width  of  the  navigable 
channel  west  of  the  Buffalo  Waterworks  crib. 

Buoy. — A  red  nun  buoy  (Fort  Erie  Point  buoy)  is  moored  in  19  feet 
of  water,  1^  (If)  miles  N.  by  W.  J  W.  of  Buffalo  Breakwater  light. 

LIGHTS. 

Buffalo. — On  the  south  pier,  342  feet  from  the  outer  end,  from  an 
c»ctagODal  gray  tower,  is  shown,  74  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed 
white  light  visible  14  J  (10 J)  miles. 

Buffalo  breakwater. — On  a  crib  behind  the  north  end  of  the  break- 


170 


LAKE   ERIE. 


water,  from  a  square  white  structure,  is  shown,  41^  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  a  fixed  red  light  visible  llj  (13)  miles. 

Fog  signal. — On  the  same  crib  is  a  brown  fog-signal  house  alongside 
the  lighthouse.  The  fog  signal  is  a  10-inch  steam  whistle,  which 
sounds  as  follows:  Blast  three  seconds,  silent  interval  fifty-seven  sec- 
on<l8.  If  the  whistle  becomes  disabled  a  bell  is  struttk  by  machinery, 
a  treble  blow  every  thirty  seconds. 

Horseshoe  reef.— In  G  feet  of  water  on  Horseshoe  reef  (south  end  of 
Middle  reef),  from  a  square  white  beacon  on  a  masonry  pier,  is  shown, 
44J  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light  varied  by  a  white 
flash  every  ninety  seconds.    The  light  is  visible  12J  (14)  miles. 

Note.— The  Buffalo  Waterworks  Inlet  pier,  on  the  east  side  of  the 
channel  at  the  head  of  the  "Narrows  "  of  the  Niagara  river,  is  marked 
at  night  by  a  red  light  22  feet  above  the  water.  One  and  a  half  miles 
below  the  Inlet  pier  the  river  is  spanned  by  the  International  Railway 
bridge,  the  draw  of  which  is  marked  at  night  by  a  stationary  red  light 
on  each  end  of  the  drawpiers,  low  down  on  the  free  end  of  each  pro- 
tection pier,  and  on  each  side  of  the  pivot  pier,  where  it  is  crossed  by 
the  axis  of  the  bridge.  Three  square  lanterns,  each  15  'eet  above  the 
top  of  the  drawspan,  mark  its  ends  and  middle,  and  show  red  up  and 
down  stream  when  the  draw  is  closed;  but  when  the  draw  is  open  tlie 
lanterns  show  three  green  lights  in  line  up  and  down  stream,  with  the 
stationary  low  red  lights  making  the  width  of  the  openings. 

NIAGABA  EIVEB  BANGE. 

Front — On  the  berm  bank  of  the  Erie  canal,  nearly  abreast  of  the 
waterworks  pier,  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal,  open-framework 
structure,  upper  part  inclosed,  is  shown,  54^  feet  above  the  lake  level, 
a  fixed  white  light. 

Rear.— At  1,200  feet  NNE.  §  E.  (N.  30°  E.)  from  the  front  light,  from 
a  brown,  triangular,  skeleton  pyramid,  with  a  small  house,  15  feet 
above  the  ground,  surmounted  by  a  circular  gridiron  day  mark  of  slats, 
alternately  black  and  white,  is  shown,  102  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a 
fixed  white  light. 

These  lights  in  line  lead  through  the  shoals  at  the  entrance  of  the 
river  in  the  deepest  water. 

Caution. — Southwest  gales  raise  the  water  in  Buffalo  h»rbor  from 
3  to  6  feet,  and  gales  from  the  opposite  direction  lower  it  as  much. 

Life-saving  station. — A  life-saving  station  adjoins  Buffalo  light- 
house. 

Current — Inside  the  breakwater  the  current  sets  along  the  shore  to 
the  northward  2  miles  per  hour. 

Directions. — Vessels  should  run  in  with  the  Buffalo  Breakwater 
light  bearing  ENE.  (N.  68°  E.);  the  north  end  of  the  breakwater  may 
be  rounded  close-to.     Then  head  in  for  the  piers  of  Buffalo  creek. 


NIAGARA   RIVER. 


171 


ibove  tlie  lake 

ouse  alongside 
vliistle,  which 
ifty- seven  see- 
by  machinery, 

f  (south  end  of 
pier,  is  shown, 
ed  by  a  white 
miles. 

ist  side  of  the 
ver,  is  marked 
id  a  half  miles 
tional  llailway 
mary  red  light 
i  of  each  pro- 
-J  is  crossed  by 
^eet  above  the 
ow  red  up  and 
aw  is  open  tlie 
ream,  with  the 
ngs. 


abreast  of  the 
pen -framework 
the  lake  level, 

•ont  light,  from 
house,  15  feet 
'  mark  of  slats, 
le  lake  level,  a 

entrance  of  the 

lo  h»rbor  from 
it  as  much. 
Buffalo  light- 

ng  the  shore  to 

do  Breakwater 

reakwater  may 

Bufi'alo  creek, 


allowing  for  the  northerly  current,  or  round-to  in  the  outer  harbor 
behind  the  breakwater. 

Emerald  channel  lies  between  Middle  reef  on  the  west,  Bird  Island 
reef  on  the  north,  and  Horseshoe  reef  on  the  east.  The  channel  should 
only  be  attempted  by  light-draft  vessels.  The  current  sets  strongly 
across  it. 

Niagara  river  is  the  natural  outlet  from  lake  Erie  to  lake  Ontario. 
Its  width  north  of  the  waterworks  o,x\h  is  1,9()0  feet,  and  its  greatest 
depth  48  feet.  At  this  point  the  normal  current  is  5^  miles  an  hour, 
the  extreme  variation  in  the  level  of  the  river  when  unindueuced  by 
the  wind  being  but  2  feet.  During  SW.  gales  the  water  rises  as  much 
as  4  feet  in  a  few  hours,  and  at  such  times  the  current  attains  a  velocity 
ot  12  miles  iv\  hour. 

Two  miles  north  of  the  International  Railway  bridge  the  river  is 
divided  into  two  arms,  Tonawanda  channel  to  the  right  and  Chippewa 
channel  to  the  left.  Beyond  Grand  island  the  river  descends  to  the 
Falls.  Chippewa  is  just  at  the  junction  of  the  two  arms  on  the  Canadian 
side,  a  little  beyond  Navy  island. 

The  Horseshoe  reef  channel  has  a  depth  of  18  feet  for  a  width  of  400 
feet  at  mean  lake  level  (January,  1896). 

When  passing  this  reef  the  ranges  should  be  followed  as  far  as  the 
red  can  buoy  only.  From  this  point  vessels  should  head  to  the  west  of 
the  inlet  pier  or  waterworks  crib  and  pass  that  between  300  and  600 
feet  distant,  keeping  to  the  westward;  if  tliey  are  closer  than  that, 
they  might  strike  a  shoal,  with  15^  feet  on  it,  some  hundred  yards  or  so 
below  the  crib. 

When  opposite  the  ferry  landing  on  the  Canadian  shore,  but  not 
before  reaching  this  point,  they  uhould  head  for  the  upper  buoy  of  the 
bridge  channel. 

In  going  down  Strawberry  channel,  the  best  way  will  be  found  about 
50  feet  from  the  three  black  spar  buoys.  The  last  rock  in  the  <.!)annel 
is  now  being  removed,  and  it  is  being  deepened. 

Black  Rock  harbor  is  a  canal  3  (3^)  miles  long  and  from  100  a  800 
feet  wide,  formed  along  the  river  from  Buffalo  to  Square  island,  and  a 
pier  extending  from  its  lake  end.  The  canal  is  used  only  by  light-draft 
vessels  to  avoid  the  strong  current  of  the  Narrows.  Seven  feet  can  be 
carried  thr<mgh.    There  are  no  dangers. 

Chippewa  channel  is  8§  (10)  miles  long,  and  from  650  to  1,150  yards 
broad,  except  at  Navy  island,  where  it  is  contracted  to  460  yards. 
There  is  a  gooi'  channel  on  either  side  of  Navy  island.  Using  the 
channel  to  tlie  right,  keep  the  Navy  Island  shore  aboard  to  avoid  the 
shoal  extending  from  the  NW.  point  of  Grand  island.  Both  shores  of 
Chippewa  channel  are  bold,  and  there  are  the  following  unmarked 
dangers: 

A  rock  a  few  feet  under  water  lies  250  feet  from  the  Canadian  shore 


172 


LAKE  ERIB. 


with  tlie  SE.  point  of  Grand  island  bearing  N.  J  E.  (N.  3°  E.),  distant 
850  yards. 

A  shoal  makes  out  one-fourth  the  way  across  the  river  from  the  i)oint 
of  the  Canadian  shore,  just  below  Beaver  island. 

A  reef,  3  feet  under  water  and  400  yards  long,  lies  300  yards  ft-om 
the  SW.  shore  of  Grand  island  nearly  opposite  Black  creek. 

This  channel  is  rarely  used  except  by  excursion  steamers.  The  cur- 
rent is  from  3  to  4  miles  per  hour. 

Tonawanda  channel  lies  on  the  east  side  of  Grand,  Strawberry, 
and  Frog  islands.  Length,  7  (8)  miles  from  the  point  of  Strawberry 
island  to  Tonawanda  island ;  its  breadth  is  from  350  to  1,000  yards.  It 
is  not  safe  to  attempt  to  carry  more  than  12  feet  between  Grand  and 
Tonawanda  islands.  The  best  water  is  on  the  Grand  island  side.  It 
is  contemplated  dredging  a  channel  18  feet  deep  from  lake  Brie  to  the 
north  end  of  Tonawanda  harbor.  The  enrrent  is  flrora  3  to  5  miles  per 
hour,  depending  on  the  width  of  the  channel. 

Buoys.— Red  and  black  buoys  mark  parts  of  the  channel,  and  there 
is  a  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  spar  buoy  on  Iron  Works  shoal 
off  Tonawanda.    Strangers  should  always  employ  a  pilot. 

Tonawanda  to  Niagara  falls. — In  the  American  channel  A-om  Ton- 
awanda to  Schlosser  docks  vessels  of  12  feet  draft  can  navigate  with 
the  aid  of  a  pilot.  The  channel  at  the  foot  of  Buckhorn  island  is  marked 
by  spar  buoys  Nos.  2  (red),  1  (black),  and  3  (black).  The  buoys  are 
placed  in  13  feet  of  water.  The  harbor  inside  Connors  island  and  oppo- 
site Schlosser  docks  is  being  improved ;  this  harbor  is  500  ffeet  wide  and 
nearly  J  mile  long.  The  dredged  channel  leading  to  northward  of  Con- 
nors island  is  marked  by  spar  buoys  Nos.  5  (black),  4  (red),  7  (black),  6 
(red),  and  8  (red),  '^o.  5  buoy  is  placed  in  14J  feet  of  water;  Nos.  4, 7, 
6,  and  8  were  placed  in  13  feet  of  water. 

The  current  in  the  river  abreast  Connors  Island  harbor  is  If  miles  per 
hour. 

There  are  ten  spar  buoys  (private)  placed  to  mark  bars  and  shoals 
near  Niagara  falls. 
The  captains  of  the  tugs  are  the  only  pilots. 

TSBIR  CAKTAL. 

The  Erie  canal  connects  lake  Erie  with  the  Hudson  river  at  Troy 
and  Albany,  and  with  lake  Ontario  at  Oswego.  Distance  to  Albany 
by  canal  is  351  statute  miles,  7-foot  depth,  72  locks,  length  of  locks  110 
feet. 

A  description  of  the  Canadian  shore  of  lake  Erie  will  now  be  given 
(p.  173). 


JO  E.),  distant 

TOin  the  iH)int 

M)  yards  ft-om 

)ek. 

Brs.    The  ciir- 

1,  Strawberry, 
[)f  Strawberry 

000  yards.  It 
en  Grand  and 
land  side.  It 
,ke  Erie  to  the 
to  5  miles  per 

mel,  and  there 

1  Works  shoal 
t. 

anel  from  Ton- 
navigate  with 
land  is  marked 
rhe  buoys  are 
land  and  oppo- 
3  feet  wide  and 
thward  of  Oon- 
id),  7  (black),  6 
ater;  Nos.  4, 7, 

r  is  If  miles  per 

ars  and  shoals 


river  at  Troy 
bnce  to  Albany 
:th  of  locks  110 

1  now  be  given 


TABLE  OF   DISTANCES.  178 

CANADIAN  COAST  OK  LAKE  ERIE. 

ONTABIO. 

Table  of  direotion$  aitd  dittanoet  between  lighUtaUoim  on  the  north  and  ninth  »horti  a/  the 
lake(theouler  pier  lights  are  taken). 


SUtionH. 


Pelde  spit  to  Cedar  point,  Sandusky 

Bluok  river 

Cleveland 

Fairport 

Ashtabula  

Presqne  Isle,  Erie 

Dunkirk 

Bondeau  harbor  to  CUxlni'  point,  Sandusky . 

Black  river 

Cleveland 

Fairport 

Ashtabula 

Presque  Isle,  Erie 

Port  Stanley  to  Cedar  point,  Sandusky 

Black  river 

Cleveland 

Fairport 

Ashtabula 

Prouque  Isle,  Eiie 

Long  point  to  Cedar  point,  Sandusky 

Black  river 

Cleveland 

Fnirport 

Ashtabula 

Presqne  Isle,  Erie 

Dunkirk 

Port  Dover  to  Dunkirk * 

Port  Maitland  to  Presqne  Isle,  Erie 

Dunkirk 

Port  Colbome  to  Fairport 

Ashtabnla 

Presqne  Isle,  Erie 

Dunkirk 


Uireotiona, 


19°  W. 
30ioE 
58"  E  . 
83'^E.. 

89°  E. 

81°  E. 

75i°  E 
.36}°  W 
14i°W 
11°E.. 
•13J°E. 
67i°E. 
860E.. 
42i°  W 
31°  W. 
17io  w 

2}°W. 
221°  E. 
59°  E.. 

eii°  w 

55i°  W 
49i°  W 
48i^W 
4(H°  W 
5i°W 
83i°E. 
644°  E. 
29i°W 
24iOE. 
53J°  W 
49}°  W 
4H0  W 
11"  W. 


Nautinal 
mllM. 


244 

28 

41 

55 

76 

108 

145 
57 
48i 
45i 
41 
54 
HO 
95i 
83 
72} 
54 
49* 
67i 

133 

96A 
71} 
51 
23i 
3U 
41* 
47i 
23,90 
lllA 
89i 

23 


Statute 
mile*. 


28,», 

32i 

474 

634 

874 

1244 

167 
65} 
.'j5i 
52} 
474 
62,^, 
92i'„ 

1104 

95,«„ 
83} 

62Vi, 
56A 

153iV 

131} 

111 

824 

58} 

27 

36 

48 

54J 

274 

1284 

102} 

654 

264 


NORTH  8HOBB. 

Coast. — From  Bar  point  the  coast  trends  about  8|  (lO^)  miles  SE. 
by  E.  to  Little  point,  at  Colchester,  and  forms  the  NE.  entrance  shore 
of  the  Detroit  river.  Leaving  the  river,  shoal  water  is  found  some  dis 
tance  from  the  shore,  the  immediate  entrance  to  the  river  being  shoal, 
except  in  the  channel.  As  Colchester  is  approached,  the  shoals  close 
in  on  the  shore  and  at  Colchester  extend  only  ^  mile  off. 

drecicui  shoals. — Several  shoals,  least  water  12  feet,  lie  about  a  mile 
off  Colchester  pier,  with  deep  water  between  the  shoals  and  shore. 
!  Colchester  reef  and  light    See  page  151. 


i 


174 


LAKE   ERIE. 


n 


Coast — At  Littl»  point  tliu  coiiHt  line  chun^^eH  diruction  to  about 
ENE.  lor  Ui  (10i|)  miles  to  Kiugavillc.  Sliouls  extend  \  mile  from  Nliore, 
widening  out  to  over  ^  ndlo  before  reacliing  Kiugeville  harbor. 

KingBVille  harbor  in  formed  by  two  converging  i)ievH,  extending 
about  (euHt  pier)  SIC.  and  (west  pier)  S.  by  K.  into  the  lake.  Width 
between  outer  ends  of  piers  150  feet;  about  8  feet  can  be  carried  in,  if 
the  eaHt  pier  ia  kept  aboard. 

KINOMVIL    K   RANQK  LIGHTS. 

Front — On  the  outer  end  of  tlie  east  breakwater  pier,  from  a  lantern 
on  a  pole,  is  shown,  27  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  red  light, 
visible  5  (5f )  miles. 

Rear.— On  the  top  of  a  bank  at  the  head  of  the  east  pier,  1,000  feet 
N.  by  W.  (N.  11°  W.)  of  the  front  light,  from  a  white,  square  light 
house,  lantern  red,  is  shown,  55  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  12  (13t^)  miles. 

These  lights,  in  line  N.  by  W.  (N.  11°  W.),  lead  to  the  entrance  of 
Kiugsville  harbor.    Leave  the  red  light  to  starboard  in  entering. 

Coast— Leamington  lighthouse  is  6  (7)  miles  east  of  Kingsville 
lighthouse,  with  Ruthven  dock  about  midway  between.  After  leaving 
Kingsville,  the  shore  can  be  approached  to  ^  mile. 

Leamington  light — On  the  shore  near  the  pier,  from  a  white  square 
tower,  is  shown,  48  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible 
12  (13,8^)  miles. 

ShoaL — South  of  the  light  and  on  the  east  side  of  the  pier  is  a  shoal 
running  out  about  1,200  feet,  with  4  feet  over  it. 

Coast — At  Leamington  the  coast  line  changes  direction  to  the  south- 
ward, and  so  continues  S%  (10)  miles  to  the  south  end  of  pointe  Pel6e. 
This  whole  stretch  is  steep-to,  the  3-fathom  line  following  the  coast 
about  1,000  feet  off. 

Pointe  PeWe,  a  narrow  sharp  point,  extends  southward  into  the  lake 
for  a  distance  of  about  8§  (10)  miles. 

Excellent  anchorage  in  5  fathoms,  mud,  may  be  had  behind  the  point, 
with  shelter  from  easterly  and  northeasterly  winds.  The  eastern  side 
of  the  point  also  affords  anchorage  in  5  fathoms,  with  shelter  from 
westerly  and  northwesterly  winds.  Shoals  extend  from  this  side  of  the 
point  ^  mile. 

Pointe  Pelde  spit  extends  south  from  the  point  1|  (2J)  miles.  It 
curves  to  the  eastward  toward  its  southern  part  and  then  to  the  west- 
ward, thus  forming  a  hook.  The  northern  part  of  the  spit  is  ^  mile 
broad,  with  but  2  feet  water  on  it  one  mile  from  the  point.  Near  the 
south  end  of  the  spit  the  Dummy  has  only  one  foot  over  it.  Eastward 
of  the  Dummy  about  If  (2)  miles  are  several  shoal  spots,  least  water 
15  feet,  with  a  clear  channel  between,  but  this  channel  should  not  be 
attempted.  Pel^e  Spit  lighthouse,  bearing  NW.  by  W.  (N.  56°  W.), 
clears  these  shoals  to  the  southward. 

"Wrecks.— The  wreck  of  the  Wind  and  Wave  lies  in  30  feet  water 
nearly  1 1^^  (1^)  miles  NE.  by  E.  J  E.  (N.  62°  B.)  from  Point©  Pel6e  Uiiht. 


~TK*«'  ^^"*!!IS 


POINTE  P£L£E — RONDEAU   HARBOFt. 


175 


uii  to  aliont 

)  t'rum  HliorB) 

bor. 

't,  extending 

ike.     Width 

carried  in,  if 


oni  a  lantern 
d  red  light, 

)r,  1,000  feet 
qiiare  light- 
i  fixed  white 

entrance  *>£ 
tering. 
if  Kingsville 
ifter  leaving 

ivhite  square 
light,  visible 

ier  in  a  shoal 

to  the  south- 
pointe  Pel6e. 
ig  the  coast 

into  the  lake 

nd  the  point, 

eastern  side 

shelter  from 

lis  side  of  the 

!^)  miles.  It 
L  to  the  west- 
jpit  is  i  mile 
it.  Near  the 
i.  Eastward 
),  least  water 
tioold  not  be 
(N.  56°  W.), 

to  feet  water 
e  Fel^e  ll{,-ht. 


The  wreck  of  the  Walter  l[,  Oatlex  lien  in  17  feet  water  1  (\\)  mile 
ESE.  (S.  08"  U.)  from  the  same  ligiit. 

The  wreck  of  the  Darid  Vance  lies  in  40  feet  water  l^\,  (Ij)  miles 
SW.  by  W.  (8.  56^  W.)  of  the  light.  Soundings  of  19  feet  liave  been 
obtained  over  this  wreck  and,  as  it  lies  almost  in  the  track  of  paHsing 
vessels,  great  caution  should  be  observed  when  in  this  locrality. 

The  wreck  of  the  Little  Wifigdhiokon  lies  25  (28^')  miles  S.  \  W.  (8. 
3°  W.)  from  Rondeau  piers,  and  30  (34^)  miles  E.  g  N.  (N.  8(P  K.)  from 
Polnte  Pel(''e  light.  The  schooner's  spars  project  about  10  feet  above 
water.  The  wreck  lies  a  little  southward  of  the  regular  course  between 
Buffalo  and  Pointe  Pelce. 

Southeast  shoaL— At  2^^  (3j^)  miles  8K.  'i  8.  (8.  41'^  E.)  from  the 
Dummy  light  is  the  center  of  a  large  shoal,  with  a  least  depth  (.f  13  feet 
(at  h)we8t  lake  level).  From  this  spot,  as  a  center,  shoal  water  extends 
in  all  directions  for  nearly  §  mile.  Between  Southeast  shoal  and  the 
Dummy  are  several  16  and  18  foot  spots,  and  it  is  not  safe  for  vessels 
to  pass  north  of  the  shoal. 

Orubb  reef  consists  of  several  12  and  16  foot  rocky  patches,  lyirig 
from  13  (2)  to  2A  (3)  miles  WNW.  of  Pelde  Spit  lighthouse,  with  deep 
water  between.  The  reef  has  extended  to  the  eastward  for  a  mile,  with 
a  least  depth  of  16  feet.  This  lighthouse,  bearing  east,  leads  well  clear 
of  the  shoals  to  the  southward. 

Rocky  shoaL— About  midway  between  Grubb  reef  and  the  Middle 
ground  is  a  rocky  shoal  i  mile  in  diameter,  within  the  5-fathom  line, 
with  a  least  depth  of  17  feet. 

Pel6e  Spit  (the  Dnxniny)  light— On  a  caisson,  about  If  (2)  miles 
south  from  the  extreme  end  of  pointe  Pelee,  from  a  white,  octagonal 
lighthouse  on  a  steel-faced  pier,  is  shown,  76  feet  above  t!»e  lake  level, 
a  white  light,  revolving  every  one  and  a  half  minutes,  and  visible  16 
(174)  miles. 

Pog  signal. — A  steam  horn  sounds  blasts  of  seven  seconds' duration, 
with  silent  intervals  of  forty-five  seconds. 

Coast— The  east  coast  of  pointe  Pel^e  trends  north  10  (llj)  miles 
to  Muddy  creek  and  Two  creeks.  It  then  changes  direction  to  the  NB. 
by  E.  i  E.  for  26^  (30J)  miles  to  Rondeau  harbor. 

Rondeau  harbor  is  a  small  natural  harbor  suitable  for  very  light- 
draft  vessels.  The  entrance  is  protected  by  breakwaters  and  piers,  but 
inside  the  harbor  is  quite  shallow.  The  eastern  side  of  the  harbor  is 
protected  by  Pointe  aux  Pins. 

Current— SE.  gales  raise  the  water  considerably  in  this  harbor. 
With  SW.  gales  the  waters  run  out  in  a  very  strong  current,  and  at 
such  times  it  is  dangerous  for  vessels  to  be  in  the  harbor. 

BANGE  LIGHTS. 

Pront— On  a  crib- work  block  on  the  outer  end  of  the  east  pier,  from 
a  white,  square,  open  framework,  is  shown,  34  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a 
fixed  white  light,  visible  11  (12g)  miles.  This  light  is  visible  only  over 
a  small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  alignment. 


;»»-^e?^«>. 


176 


LAKE   £BIE. 


Rear.— At  780  yards  N.  by  E.  ^  B.  (N.  15°  E.)  from  the  front  light  is 
shown,  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  red  and  white  light  alternating 
every  one  and  a  half  minutes.    The  light  is  visible  14  (10^)  miles. 

The  alignment  of  these  lights  leads  to  the  entrance,  and  the  lights 
must  be  left  to  starboard  on  entering. 

Coast— The  west  point  of  Long  Point  island  is  ENE.  i  E.  66  (76) 
miles  from  I'ointe  aux  Pins,  the  coast  line  between  ttrs  trending  NE. 
to  Port  Stanley,  and  then  E.  by  S.  forms  an  open  bight  with  Port 
Stanley  at  its  head.  Many  rivers  and  creeks  empty  into  the  lake  along 
this  stretch  of  the  coast. 

Port  Stanley  light. — On  tLe  west  i)ierhead,  from  a  white  square 
lighthouse,  42  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  flxed  white  light, 
visible  11  (12§)  miles. 

Life-saving  station  in  the  harbor  at  Port  Stanley 

Port  Burwell. — A  bar  has  formed  across  the  mouth  of  the  harbor, 
which  has  shoaled  the  waLer  to  8  feet. 

Port  Bruce. — A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  on  a  pole  at  Port  Bruce. 
This  light  is  a  private  light,  nud  not  under  the  control  of  the  marine 
department  of  Canada. 

Port  Burwell  light. — Three  hundred  and  thirty-three  yards  inshore, 
from  an  octagonal  lighthouse, 96  feet  above  the  lake  level, is  sliown  a- 
fixed  white  light,  visible  15  (17J)  miles. 

Long  Point  island,  formerly  Long  point,  is  a  long  narrow  island 
projecting  eastward  nearly  17J  (20)  miles  from  the  main  shore.  It  is 
over  1|  (2)  miles  wide  at  Bluff  point,  the  northeastern  point  of  the 
island,  and  from  Bluff  point  tapers  to  its  eastern  sharp  extremity.  Long 
point.  At  Pottohawk  point,  the  NW.  point,  it  is  2^  (3)  miles  wide  and 
then  tapers  to  the  west  end  of  the  island,  leaving  a  small  bight  par- 
tially filled  with  shoals  between  the  KW.  and  NE.  points.  All  the 
southern  shore  can  be  approached  to  f  mile,  but  from  Long  point  west, 
on  the  north  shore,  the  shoals  gradually  widen  out  until  Bluff  point  is 
reached,  where  they  extend  northeasterly  for  2-j%  (3)  miles,  leaving  a 
little  clear  water  between  the  outer  end  of  the  spit  and  the  shoals  which 
border  the  island.  At  Pottohawk  point  the  shoals  again  approach  the 
shore,  and  between  this  point  and  the  mainland  to  the  north  is  the 
eastern  entrance  to  Inner  bay,  protected  on  the  NW.  by  the  mainland 
and  on  the  SE.  by  Long  Point  island.  The  southern  entrance  to  Inner 
bay  is  betveen  the  island  and  the  mainland,  but  it  is  narrow,  and  is 
reported  as  having  silted  up.  The  bay  is  fit  only  for  very  small  craft. 
Port  Bowan  is  on  its  western  shore.  The  deepest  water  in  lake  Erie  l|| 
found  south  and  east  of  Long  point. 

LifeiBaving  station  at  Port  Bowan  in  Inner  bay. 

LIGHTS. 

TVest  end  of  Long  point. — On  the  east  side  of  the  new  channel, 
from  a  square  white  tower,  dwelling  attached,  is  sliown,  52  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  a  red  light,  revolving  every  minute.  The  light  is  visible 
from  all  points  seaward  a  distawtie  of  12  (13|)  miles. 


LONG   POINT — PORT   MAITLAND. 


177 


the  front  light  is 
light  alternating 

:  (14>^)  miles. 

ice,  and  the  lights 

ENE.  i  E.  60  (76) 

irs'  trending  NB. 

bight  with  Port 

nto  the  lake  along 

tu  a  white  square 
fixed  white  light, 


ath  of  the  harbor, 

ole  at  Port  Bruce, 
itrol  of  the  marine 

iree  yards  inshore, 
:e  level,  is  sliowu  a  • 

)ng  tuirrow  island 
main  shore.  It  is 
stern  poi'tt  of  the 
rp  extremity,  Long 
(3)  miles  wide  and 
;  a  small  bight  par- 
fj.  points.  All  the 
ai  Long  point  west, 
until  Bluff  point  is 
(3)  miles,  leaving  a 
id  the  slioals  which 
again  approach  the 
X)  the  north  is  the 
N.  by  the  mainland 
n  entrance  to  Inner 
it  is  narrow,  and  is 
br  very  small  craft, 
cater  in  lake  Erie  l| 


if  the  new  channel, 

liown,  52  feet  above 

The  light  is  visible 


When  a  lifeboat  is  required  at  this  station  the  liglit  is  obscured 
toward  Port  Kowau. 

Long  point. — On  the  eastern  extremity,  from  an  octagonal  light- 
house, Oo  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  white  light,  revolving 
every  minute,  visible  13  (15)  miles. 

Fog  signal — The  fog-signal  building,  white,  is  200  yards  soutli  of 
the  light.  The  signal,  a  steam  horn,  sounds  blasts  of  seven  seconds' 
duration,  with  silent  intervals  of  thirty  seconds. 

Outer  bay  of  Long  point — North  of  Long  point,  between  the  island 
and  the  main  shore,  Outer  bay  is  14f  (17)  miles  wide  and,  from  this  line, 
13  (15)  miles  deep  to  its  western  shore.  The  bay  affords  excellent  anchor- 
age, and  is  protected  from  all  winds  from  south  to  north  by  way  of  west. 

Fort  Dover  is  on  the  NW.  shore  of  Outer  bay.  The  harbor  is  at 
the  mouth  of  the  Lynn  river,  having  two  parallel  piers,  each  about  1,000 
feet  long.  Depth  of  water  at  end  of  pier  12  feet ;  inside  the  harbor  8 
feet.    There  are  no  pilots. 

Reefs. — A  reef  If  (2)  miles  long,  with  3  feet  of  water  over  it,  lies 
about  one  mile  off  shore. 

A  reef  lies  one  mile  SE.  of  Port  Dover  lighthouse  and  is  about  | 
mile  from  shore.  Between  the  reef  and  the  shore  there  are,  in  places, 
from  12  to  14  feet,  but  there  is  no  safe  passage  for  vessels  on  account  of 
bowlders.  Outside  of  the  reef,  100  yards,  the  water  is  from  15  to  25 
feet  deep. 

Port  charges. — Vessels  over  100  tons,  50  cents  per  day;  under  100 
tons,  25  cents  per  day. 

Light. — On  the  west  pier,  from  a  white  hexagonal  lighthouse,  20  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  iixed  Avhito  light,  visible  8  (9:^)  miles. 

Nanticoke  shoal,  with  7  feet  water,  lies  4J  (5/o)  miles  S.  00°  W. 
from  Peacock  point  and  11^  (13)  miles  N.  3°  W.  from  the  east  end  of 
Long  point.  The  spot  is  a  small  rocky  ledge  and  under  a  depth  of  18 
feet  is  J  mile  long  K"W.  and  SE.  by  J  mile  wide,  the  shoalest  spot  being 
in  the  middle. 

When  in  this  vicinity,  vessels  should  not  shoal  to  less  than  8  fathoms. 

Coast. — Port  Dover  to  Port  Maitland :  The  coast  trends  easterly  for 
27f  (32)  miles,  with  several  small  projecting  points. 

Tecumseh  shoal. — To  the  westward  of  Grand  River  bluff  and 
(reported  as  lying)  from  3  to  8  statute  miles  off"  shore  is?  Tecumseh 
shoal,  which  extends  westward  and  parallel  with  the  shore  for  several 
miles.  At  low  water  rocks  on  the  shoal  uncover.  This  shoal  is  charted 
about  3  miles  off  shore  and  the  same  distance  iu  extent  east  and  west; 
it  is  probable  that  it  is  of  larger  size  and  farther  off"  shore.  When  iu 
this  locality  Port  Maitland  light  should  be  kept  well  open  of  Hydes 
point,  the  first  point  west  of  Port  Maitland,  to  clear  the  east  end  of 
Tecumseh  shoal. 

Port  Maitland  is  on  the  Grand  river,  at  the  head  of  a  small  biglit, 
to  the  eastward  of  Grand  Eiver  bluff. 

1944— No.  108 12 


4^ 


178 


LAKE   ERIE. 


Light— Oil  the  west  pier  at  Grand  River  entrance,  from  a  wliite 
open  frame,  51  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  10  (llA)  miles. 

Mohawk  bay,  a  small  dip  in  the  coast  line,  is  just  eastward  of  Port 
Maitland,  and  between  Barbed  and  Selkirk  points.  Barbed  point  is 
surrounded  by  a  rocky  reef  which  extends  to  the  southward  nearly 

4  mile. 

Mohawk  island,  about  400  yards  in  diameter,  lies  in  the  center  of 
the  bay  and  outside  the  line  joining  the  points.  It  is  surrounded  by 
rocks,  shoals  extending  nearly  a  mile  southeasterly,  on  which  are 
many  rocks.    This  shoal  has  a  breadth  of  over  J  mile. 

Anchorj^e.— There  is  deep  water,  clay  bottom,  midway  between 
Mohawk  island  and  Barbed  point,  which  affords  anchorage  in  winds 
from  west  to  east  by  way  of  north. 

Mohawk  Island  light.— On  the  island,  from  a  white  circular  light- 
house, is  shown,  G4  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  white  revolving  light, 
showing  three  flasliea  at  intervals  of  thirty  seconds,  followed  by  an 
eclipse  of  seventy -five  seconds.  A  complete  revolution  is  made  in  two 
and  one-fourth  minutes.    The  light  is  visible  10  (11  J)  miles. 

Coast— Between  Selkirk  point  and  Morgan  point,  6  (7)  miles  to  the 
eastward,  is  Moulton  bay,  open  to  the  southward.  At  11  (12§)  miles 
E.  by  S.  from  Morgan  point  is  Abino  point.  The  coast  between,  project- 
ing in  small  points,  has  several  bights  open  to  the  southward.  From 
all  these  points  shoals  extend  off  some  distance.  Sugarloaf  point,  the 
west  point  of  Gravel  bay,  on  which  is  Port  Colborue,  is  surrounded  with 
shoals,  and  the  east  point  of  this  bay  has  shoals  extending  off  a  mile, 
the  bay  being  filled  with  shoals.  Windmill  point  is  4J  (5)  miles  NE.  of 
Abino  point,  with  two  bights  filled  with  shoals  between.  From  Wind- 
mill point  to  the  mouth  of  the  Niagara  river  shoals  line  the  coast,  and 
Windmill  point  should  be  given  a  berth  of  l-ft-  (IJ)  miles.  The  coast 
may  be  approached  somewhat  nearer  as  the  river  entrance  is  neared. 

"Waverly  shoal  lies  oft"  this  portion  of  the  coast,  the  NE.  end  lying 
2  {2-,\)  miles  SW.  by  W.  |  W.  (S,  63°  W.)  from  the  light  on  the  Buffalo 
breakwater.  The  shoal  is  100  feet  wide  and  extends  700  yards  SW.  and 
NE.,  least  water  12  feet,  400  feet  SW.  of  the  buoy.  There  is  a  16-foot 
spot  a  little  eastward  of  the  north  end  of  the  shoal,  and  an  18-foot  spot 
in  line  with  the  buoy  and  breakwater  light,  and  J  mile  from  the  latter. 
Buoy.— A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  in 
13  feet  of  water  near  the  NE.  end  of  the  shoal. 

Port  Colborne  is  at  the  entrance  of  the  Welland  canal.  The  en- 
trance to  the  harbor  has  been  improved  by  piers. 

Beacon.— A  vertically  striped  red  and  white  beacon,  surmounted  by 
a  globe,  stands  on  the  outermost  crib  of  the  east  pier. 

Main  light— On  the  head  of  the  west  pier  from  a  white  octagonal 
tower,  on  a  brown  cylindrical  base,  surmounted  by  a  -red  lantern,  is 
shown,  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  14  (16J) 
miles. 


from  a  wliite 
)d  white  light, 

stwanl  of  Port 
;arbed  point  is 
tliward  nearly 

ft  the  center  of 
surrounded  by 
on  which  are 

dway  between 
srage  in  winds 

circular  light- 
evolving  light, 
followed  by  an 
is  made  in  two 
iles. 

(7)  miles  to  the 
1 11  (12§)  mUes 
Btween,  project- 
thward.  From 
rloaf  point,  the 
urrouuded  with 
ding  off  a  mile, 
(5)  miles  NE.  of 
I.  From  Wind- 
B  the  coast,  and 
les.  The  coast 
lice  is  neared. 
e  NB.  end  lying 
t  on  the  Buffalo 
}  yards  8W.  and 
lere  is  a  16-foot 
i  an  18-foot  spot 
from  the  latter, 
loy  is  moored  in 

canal.    The  en- 

,  surmounted  by 

white  octagonal 
ii.red  lantern,  is 
,  visible  U  (IGJ) 


1 

I 


PORT  COLBORNE. 


179 


Crib  light. — On  a  cnb,  •  st  side  of  the  entr<an(;e,  2,030  feet  N.  by  B. 
^  E.  (N.  12°  B.)  of  the  (.'  light,  is  shown,  35  feet  above  the  lake  level, 
a  fixed  red  light  visible  ^  y.^)  miles. 

Fog  signal — At  the  main  lightstation  a  fog  horn  sounds  blasts  of 
eleven  seconds  every  one  and  a  half  minutes. 

Shoal. — A  bar  runs  across  from  the  east  to  the  west  pier. 

Sixtet>»  feet  may  be  carried  to  within  100  feet  of  the  south  end  of  the 
east  unbroken  pier,  but  inside  scant  15  feet  will  be  found. 

There  is  a  sand  spit  making  out  southwesterly  from  the  simth  end  of 
this  pier  (continuous  part),  and  100  feet  distant  there  is  but  13  feet  at 
the  edge  of  tlie  track. 

The  deepest  water  track  is  very  narrow,  and  a  vessel  only  her  own 
width  out  of  it  will,  in  all  probability,  find  one  foot  less  water. 

In  the  above  remarks  it  is  assumed  that  there  are  14  feet  on  the  dock 
sill,  with  a  liability  of  a  change  of  one  foot  either  way. 

Directions.— The  alignment  of  the  lights  N.  by  E.  J  E.  (N.  12'^  E.) 
gives  the  deepest  water  entering  the  canal,  and  clear  of  Sugarloaf  reef. 
The  main  light  must  be  left  to  port  and  the  crib  light  to  starboard  in 
entering.  The  main  light  is  visible  from  all  points  seaward ;  the  crib 
light  is  visible  in  the  line  of  range  and  into  the  harbor. 

Welland  canaL — The  c&nal  flanks  the  Niagara  river,  and  is  26| 
statute  miles  in  length  from  Port  Colborne  to  Port  Dalhousie.  Its 
dimensions  are  as  follows :  Number  of  lift  locks,  25  (270  by  45  feet) ;  total 
rise  of  lockage,  326f  feet ;  depth  of  water  on  the  sills,  14  feet.  Thirteen 
feet  can  be  carried  through  at  present.  There  are  two  pairs  of  guard 
gates  and  one  guard  lock. 


CHAPTER    X. 


liAKE  ONTARIO. 

Lake  Ontario  is  the  eastern  and  smallest  of  the  Great  Lakes.  The 
length  of  the  lake  between  Sacketts  Harbor  and  Burlington  Bay  lights 
is  105  (190)  miles,  and  its  greatest  breadth  46ia,-  (54)  miles ;  its  maximum 
depth  738  feet,  and  its  elevation  above  the  sea  246.01  feet. 

Its  basin  drains  29,760  square  nkiles,  including  the  lake  surface  •,  1 
7,240  square  miles. 

By  reason  of  its  greater  depth  the  surface  of  lake  Ontario  is  less  dis- 
turbed by  storms  than  lake  Erie.  It  is  much  less  obstructed  by  ice,  the 
lake  never  freezing  except  near  the  shore,  and  navigation  is  rarely 
interrupted. 

Th<5  chief  tributaries  are  the  Niagara,  Genesee,  and  Oswego  rivers  on 
the  south  shore  and  the  Trent  on  the  north  shore. 

The  south  shore  of  the  lake  from  the  Niagara  river  east  to  the  St. 
Lawrence  is  in  the  State  of  New  York. 

All  of  the  north  and  west  shores,  and  the  south  shore  from  the  Niagara 
river  west,  is  in  the  Province  of  Ontario,  Canada. 

NAVIGATION. 

The  two  great  evils  to  navigation  are  fog  and  snow. 

There  are  no  tides  and  but  light  currents  for  the  master  to  contend 
with  on  the  lake,  and  as  these  are  the  most  uncertain  of  all  elements 
for  the  navigator  to  calculate  and  allow  for,  it  reduces  very  much  the 
percentage  of  danger  in  lake  navigation;  hence  the  safe  navigation  of 
the  lake  is  confined  to  a  correct  compass,  with  a  knowledge  and  frequent 
use  on  the  part  of  the  master  of  the  azimuth  tables,  the  precaution  to 
take  cross- bearings  of  prominent  points,  and  from  them  plotting  the 
position  frequently  on  the  chart;  also  the  familiar  use  of  the  chart  in 
laying  courses  and  correcting  the  same  for  variation  and  deviation. 

DANOEBS.  •. 

With  the  exception  of  the  shoals  among  the  islands  at  the  NB.  end, 
lake  Ontario  is  remarkalily  free  from  outlying  dangers.  Off  the  mouth 
of  the  Niagara  river  are  several  offlying  shoals,  known  as  the  Niagara 
bar.  They  are  not  only  in  the  course  of  vessels  entering  and  leaving 
Niagara  river,  but  also  are  a  menace  to  all  vessels  bound  to  or  from  the 
Welland  canal  and  the  lower  lake  ports.  On  the  west  coast  of  the  lake, 
south  of  Port  Credit,  is  an  offlying  shoal,  the  position  of  which  is  not 
well  determined.    Off  Shoal  bay  and  Prince  Edward  island,  on  the 

180 


ROUTES. 


181 


it  Lakes.    The 

^toD  Bay  lightH 

i';  its  maximum 

jt. 

lake  surface  •,  1 

}ario  is  less  dis- 
cted  by  ice,  tlie 
atiou  is  rarely 

swego  rivers  on 

east  to  the  St. 

om  the  Niagara 


3ter  to  contend 
of  all  elements 
very  much  the 
'e  navigation  of 
ge  and  frequent 
le  precaution  to 
m  plotting  the 
of  the  chart  in 
d  deviation. 


it  the  NE.  end, 
Off  the  mouth 
as  the  Niagara 
ng  and  leaving 
d  to  or  from  the 
oast  of  the  lake, 
of  which  is  not 
island,  on  the 


north  coast,  are  several  offlying  shoals.  There  are  several  shoals  SE, 
of  False  Duck  lighthouse.  From  Calf  island  a  spit  extends  SVV.  for 
1^  {1%)  miles,  with  only  10  feet  on  it;  Charity  shoal,  with  5  feet  over  it, 
lies  ^^y  (3)  miles  SE.  of  Pigeon  island.  Big  Bar  shoal,  south  of  Amherst 
island,  and  an  extensive  shoal,  with  4  feet  over  it,  lying  WSW.  from 
Snake  Island  light,  are  the  principal  shoals  in  the  NE.end  of  the  lake. 

ROUTES. 

TVelland  canal  to  Cape  Vincent — From  3i  (4)  miles  north  of 
Port  Dalhonsie  outer  light  steer  ENE.  J  E.  (N.  7()oE)  for  0^  (11)  miles, 
when  Fort  Niagara  light  should  bear  South ;  change  course  to  ENE. 
I  E.  (N.  72°  E.)  i'or  118  (136)  miles,  when  Galloup  Island  lighthouse 
should  bear  abeam,  distant  2  (2^)  miles;  here  change  course  to  N.  by  B. 
i  E.  (N.  17°  E.)  for  11^  (ISJ)  miles,  which  should  take  a  vessel  %  mile 
west  of  Tibbets  Point  lighthouse;  from  here  to  the  anchorage  off  Cape 
Vincent  keep  about  ^  mile  offshore, 

Welland  canal  to  Kingston. — From  3J  (4)  miles  north  of  Port 
Dalhonsie  outer  light  ENE.  i  E.  (N.  70°  E.)  for  112  (129)  miles  should 
take  a  vessel  3^  (4)  miles  south  of  False  Duck  light;  continue  this 
course  for  5  (5f )  miles,  when  False  Duck  light  should  bear  WNW.  (N. 
68°  W.),  and  a  vessel  will  clear  to  the  eastward  of  Harris  shoal ;  at 
this  point  change  course  to  N.  by  E.  g  E.  (N.  18°  E.)  for  17^  (20^) 
miles,  when  Snake  Island  light  should  be  abeam;  this  course  passes 
within  a  mile  of  Nine-mile  (Gage)  Point  lighthouse  and  between  the 
two  unmarked  shoals  north  of  it.  Do  not  pass  east  of  a  line  joining 
Nine-mile  (Gage)  Point  and  Pigeon  Island  lights  until  close  up  to 
Snake  Island  light.  Continue  N.  by  E.  g  E.  (N.  18°  E.)  from  abeam  of 
Snake  Island  light  for  I  mile,  or  until  this  light  bears  SSE.  g  E.  (S.  30° 
E.)  and  Center  Brother  Island  light  bears  W.  J  N.  (N.  87°  W.),  when 
change  course  to  ENE.  \  E.  (N.  70°  E.)  and  run  along  the  shore,  keep- 
ing not  more  than  \  mile  off  to  avoid  the  two  12-foot  patches  oft' 
Kingston,  which  should  be  kept  to  starboard  if  unmarked. 

Vessels  of  15  feet  draft  may  pass  between  Sinicoe  and  Snake  islands. 
The  channel  is  buoyed  on  the  east  side  of  Snake  island,  and  by  keep- 
ing the  Snake  Island  buoy  close  aboard,  or  leaving  two-thirds  of  the 
passage  to  the  eastward,  you  can,  by  steering  to  the  northward  slowly 
as  you  pass  Snake  island,  keep  good  water;  but  you  can  not,  with  a 
vessel  drawing  over  11  feet,  steer  straight  for  Kingston  when  abreast 
of  Snake  islands 

Caution. — Unless  a  vessel  is  well  satisfied  of  her  po3ition,  the  above 
directions  should  be  used  with  caution,  as  the  two  unmarked  shoals 
SW.  of  Snake  island  lie  close  to  the  track. 

UNITED  STATES  COAST  OF  LAKE  ONTARIO. 

The  United  States  coast  of  lake  Ontario  comprises  all  the  shore  of 

the  lake  from  the  Niagara  river  eastward  to  the  town  of  Cape  Vincent. 

In  the  following  description  the  Canadian  shore,  from  the  Welland 


182 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


canal  to  the  Niagara  river,  will  also  bo  considered ;  as  also  the  coast  of 
Wolfe,  or  Long  island,  from  opposite  Cape  Vincent  to  Browns  {loint. 

Port  Dalhousie,  at  the  Ontario  entrance  to  the  Wellaiid  canal,  has 
two  piers  200  feet  apart  and  2,000  feet  in  length,  extending  about  north 
into  the  lake.  Fourteen  feet  can  be  carried  between  the  piers  and  into 
tlie  canal,  but  13  feet  only  are  allowed  at  present. 

Front  light — About  26  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the  east  pier  a 
fixed  white  light  is  show)',  42  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  white 
square  tower.    It  is  ArisiMe  11  (12|)  mil-^s. 

Main  light— On  tho  same  pier,  298  feet  S.  J  E.  (S.  3°  E.)  from  the 
outer  light,  is  a  white  light,  revolving  every  minute.  It  is  shown  from 
a  white  circular  tower,  55  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  is  visible  12 
{13|)  miles.    This  light  shows  from  the  east  to  west  througli  south. 

Pog  signal. — At  the  Front  light  station  is  a  fog  bell  which  is  rung  by 
hand  in  answer  to  signals  from  passing  vessels. 

ShoaL— There  is  an  18-foot  detached  shoal  J  mile  NNE.  f  E.  of  the 
outer  pier  light. 

Coast — Welland  canal  to  the  Niagara  river :  The  coast  trends  6|  (7|) 
miles  NB.  by  E.  J  E.,  then  changes  direction  Co  the  eastward  for  2,«o- 
(2J)  miles  to  fort  Massassauga,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Niagara  river. 
Shoals  border  this  coast  and  extend  off  shore  in  places  f  mile.  Off  the 
mouth  of  the  Niagara  river  are  several  oiflying  patches. 

Shoahs.— At  2-,%  (3^)  miles  W.  by  N.  of  Fort  Niagara  light  is  tlio 
south  end  of  a  detached  shoal  |  mile  off  shore,  with  16  feet  least  water, 
and  extending  north  and  south  f  mile.  At  2  /V  (3)  miles  NNW.  from  the 
light  is  the  center  of  a  shoal,  13  feet  least  water,  which  entends  east 
and  west  J  mile.  Between  these  two  shoals  are  detached  spots  with 
IS,  11,  15  and  16  feet  over  them.  These  shoals  are  known  as  the 
Niagara  bar,  and  are  a  menace  to  all  vessels  bound  in  or  out  tlie  river, 
as  well  as  to  vessels  bound  to  or  from  the  Welland  canal  and  lower 
lake  ports.  Not  being  properly  located,  they  are  the  cause  of  many 
disasters. 

Bell  buoy. — A  bell  buoy  is  moored  at  the  opening  of  navigation  on 
these  shoals,  on  the  Canadian  side  of  the  channel,  by  the  Niagara 
Navigation  Company.    Its  position  is  not  to  be  entirely  relied  upon. 

Buoy. — On  a  rocky  spit,  extending  a  mile  North  and  NW.  from  Fort 
Niagara,  is  a  black  spar  buoy.  It  is  moored  in  14  feet,  §  mile  from  shore 
and  J  mile  inside  the  3-fathom  curve. 

The  water  shoals  gradually  inside  the  buoy  to  a  depth  of  6  feet  close 
to  the  shore.  Abreast  the  outer  face  of  Fort  Niagara  a  spur  of  the  reef 
projects  a  little  beyond  the  range  of  tlie  buoy  and  the  outer  comer 
of  Fort  Niagara  wharf. 

Niagara  river. — This  river  is  navigable  for  6  (7)  miles  to  Lewiston 
on  the  United  States  shore,  and  Queenstown  on  the  Canadian  shore. 
Its  width  is  about  500  yards;  depth  from  4  to  12  fathoms,  with  muddy  or 
rocky  bottom.    The  banks  are  bold  and  higli,  and  there  are  no  dangers. 


lo  the  coast  of 
owns  {)oint. 
iiid  canal,  has 
g  about  north 
piers  and  into 

he  east  pier  a 
from  a  wliite 

o  E.)  from  the 
is  sliown  from 
i  ia  visible  12 
agh  sonth. 
ich  is  rung  by 

m.  S  E.  of  the 

;  trends  6|(7|) 
tward  for  2^g 
S'iagara  river, 
mile.    Off  the 

a  light  is  the 
et  leaat  water, 
fNW.  from  the 

entends  east 
led  8i)ot8  with 
known  as  the 

out  tlie  river, 
rial  and  lower 
aase  of  many 

navigation  on 
r  the  Niagara 
relied  upon. 
^W.  from  Fort 
nile  from  shore 

of  6  feet  close 
pur  of  the  reef 
J  outer  comer 

as  to  Lewiston 
madian  shore, 
with  muddy  or 
ire  no  dangers. 


NIAGARA   MVER — OLCOTT. 


183 


Youngstown  and  Niagara  are  just  within  the  river  mouth  on  the  United 
States  and  Canadian  shores,  respectively. 

Current— At  Lewiston  the  current  is  about  4  miles  an  hour,  decreas- 
ing to  3  miles  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  and  to  J  mile  about  2  miles  from 
slKire  The  strength  of  the  river  current  and  the  depth  of  water  in  the 
mouth  of  the  river  and  at  the  west  end  of  the  lake  are  materially 
affe(!ted  by  winds  blowing  up  or  down  the  lake.  The  former  wind 
decreases  the  current  and  raises  the  water,  and  the  latter  produces  tlie 
opposite  effect.  The  difference  in  level  is  sometimes  as  much  as  3  feet. 
Fort  Niagara  light— On  the  high  east  bank  of  the  river  and  J  mile 
within  its  nu/uth,  from  a  gray,  octagonal  tower,  79^  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  14^  (16f )  miles.  It  is  obscured 
when  bearing  about  SE.,  through  an  arc  of  a  few  degrees,  by  tall  trees 
near  the  shore. 
Life-saving  station  at  Fort  Niagara. 

Directions.— Approach  the  shore  with  Fort  Niagara  light  bearing 
sonth.  When  3J  (4)  miles  north  of  the  light  bring  Fort  Massassauga 
ahead  S.  by  W.  (S.  11°  W.)  and  stand  in  for  it.  When  ^  mile  from  the 
fort  keep  off  a  little  to  the  westward  to  clear  the  edge  of  the  spit 
extending  from  Fort  Niagara,  and  when  Fort  Niagara  light  bears  SB. 
f  E.  (S.  53°  E.)  stand  in  for  it,  passing  SW.  of  the  black  spar  buoy, 
and  shape  a  mid-channel  course  up  the  river. 

Coast— Niagara  river  to  Wilson  harbor :  The  coast  trends  ENB.  J 
E.  for  IOt^  (12)  miles.  There  is  a  detached  16-foot  spot  1  (IJ)  mile 
NE.  by  N.  of  Fort  Niagara,  and  the  water  is  shoal  ^  mile  f  •  om  the  shore 
between  these  places. 

Wilson  is  at  the  mouth  of  Twelve-mile  creek.  Wilson  harbor 
entrance  has  been  improved  by  two  piers.  There  is  only  a  depth  of  9 
feet  in  the  channel  at  mean  lake  level. 

Coast— Wilson  to  Olcott:  The  coast  continues  in  the  same  direction 
for  5J  (6)  miles  and  has  the  same  characteristics. 

Rock.— A  rock  is  reported  as  lying  about  1£  (2)  miles  west  of  Olcott 
lightstation.  It  extends  east  and  west  J  mile  and  is  the  same  distance 
oft"  shore.  There  is  only  4  or  5  feet  water  on  the  rock  (November,  1895). 
Olcott  is  on  Eighteen-mile  creek.  Olcott  harbor  has  been  improved 
by  the  building  of  piers  and  dredging;  width  between  the  piers,  200 
feet;  direction  of  piers,  N.  |  W. 

ChanneL— Between  the  piers  the  channel  is  180  tfeet  wide,  the  limiting 
lines  being  10  feet  from  the  piers,  and  from  the  shore  end  of  the  piers 
it  decreases  to  98  feet  in  width  at  the  Main  Street  bridge.  Depth  in 
the  channel,  13  feet,  measured  from  mean  lake  level.  A  sand  bar  is 
reported  as  forming  about  60  feet  from  the  piers,  with  about  6  or  7  feet 
over  it  (November,  1895). 

Light— On  the  west  pier,  30  feet  from  the  outer  end,  is  a  square  pyram- 
idal tower,  brown  below  and  white  above,  exhibiting  a  fixed  white 
light  30j  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible  10§  (12^)  miles. 


184 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


Coast— Oloott  to  Thirty-mile  point:  Tlift  coast  continnes  nearly 
ENH.  (or  lOA  (1-)  miles,  and  tlie  shoals  are  somewhat  nearer  the  shore. 

Thirty-mile  point,  Just  westward  of  (Jolden  Hill  creek,  is  rouudin^ 
and  only  a  slij^ht  projection  from  the  coast  line,  and  here  the  coast 
chanfjes  direction  to  the  east. 

Light. — On  the  point,  from  a  square  prray  tower  rising?  from  the  north 
point  of  a  dwelling,  71  ^  fi'ct  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  white  light, 
flashing  every  ninety  seconds,  visible  1-4^  (l<4)  miles. 

Thirty-mile  point  to  Oak  Orchard  harbor.— Oak  Orchard  light  is 
125  (143)  miles  east  of  Thirty-mile  Point  lightj  the  coast  between  cau 
be  approached  to  a  mile  with  safety. 

Oak  Orchard  harbor,  on  Oak  Orchard  creek,  has  been  improved  by 
the  construction  of  two  piers,  200  feet  ai)art,  extending  to  the  12-foot 
curve,  and  a  shore  protection  to  the  east  pier,  91  feet  long.  The  channel 
has  a  depth  of  1.'3  feet  at  mean  lake  level  for  its  whole  width  between 
the  i)iers,  excei)tiug  10  feet  along  each  pier.  Direction  of  the  piers, 
N.  'i  K. 

Light. — On  the  west  i>ier,  27  feet  from  the  outer  end,  from  a  square, 
pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above,  29iJ  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  is  shown  a  iixed  white  light,  visible  10'^  (12^)  miles. 

Caution. — The  shore  eastward  of  Oak  Orchard  harbor  should  not  be 
followed  on  account  of  a  reef  extending  IJ  (2)  miles  ENE.  from  the 
lighthouse. 

Directions. — Approaching  from  the  eastward,  do  not  bring  the  light 
to  bear  scmth  of  SW.  until  a  mile  offshore,  when  stand  in  with  the 
lighthouse  bearing  South. 

Coast — From  Oak  Orchard  harbor  the  coast  trends  east  9^  (10$) 
miloa  to  the  Devils  Nose,  a  prominent  bluff  77  feet  high.  A  rocky  spit 
extends  2  (2|)  miles  ENE.  from  Oak  Orchard  harbor,  its  outer  edge 
being  nowhere  over  $  mile  from  shore;  shoals  then  follow  the  shore  line, 
at  an  average  distance  of  about  ^  mile,  until  the  Devils  Nose  is  reached, 
where  they  extend  out  over  J  mile.  At  the  Devils  Nose  the  coast 
changes  direction  a  little  to  the  southward  for  9^  (11)  miles,  when  it 
bends  again  to  the  southward  and  trends  2J  (2J)  miles  8E.  by  S.  to 
Braddock  point.  Shoals  line  all  this  portion  of  the  coast  and  in  places 
extend  oft"  |  mile.  At  Braddock  point  the  shore  changes  its  character, 
becoming  lower,  and  between  this  point  and  Charlotte  harbor,  6  (7) 
miles  SE.,  there  are  several  bays  and  ponds,  fronted  by  shoals, extending 
off  shore  over  J  mile. 

Braddock  Point  light  station. — A  fixed  white  light  shown  from  a 
black  lantern  surmounting  an  octagonal,  pyramidal,  red-brick  tower 
attached  to  the  west  side  of  a  two-story  redbrick  dwelling  with  black 
slated  roof.  The  parapet  and  gallery  of  the  tower  are  brown.  The 
tower  and  dwelling  are  on  ground  about  7  feet  above  mean  lake  level 
and  stand  about  100  feet  back  from  the  shore  line.  The  focal  plane  of 
the  light  is  92^  feet  above  mean  lake  level  and  the  light  is  visible  15f 


CHARLOTTE — PULTNEYVILLE. 


185 


innes  nearly 
rer  the  shore. 
;,  is  ruuuiliiiK 
ire  the  coast 

'om  the  iioith 
a  white  light, 

thard  light  is 
between  can 

improved  by 
:o  the  12-f(H)t 

The  channel 
idth  between 

of  the  piers, 

[■oni  a  square, 
hbove  the  lake 

should  not  be 
STE.  from  the 

ring  the  light 

I  in  with  the 

east  9i  (lOf) 
A  rocky  spit 
:s  outer  edge 
;he  shore  line, 
)se  is  reached, 
ase  the  coast 
ailes,  when  it 
SE.  by  S.  to 
and  in  places 
its  character, 
harbor,  6  (7) 
als,  extending 

shown  from  a 
i-brick  tower 

II  g  with  black 
brown.    The 

ean  lake  level 
focal  plane  of 
is  visible  ISf 


(17^)  miles.  The  light  illuminatcH  180o  of  the  horizon  and  h  visible 
from  all  points  of  approach  from  the  lake,  excepting  from  tlic  eastwani 
to  the  southward  of  the  bearing  W.  by  N. 

A  small  one  story  red  building  and  a  red-brick  barn  are  located  near 
the  tower  to  the  southward,  and  a  red-brick  oil  house  Htaiuls  between 
the  tower  and  lake. 

Charlotte  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  G-eneseo  river.  Charlotte  harbor  is 
the  i)ort  of  Rochester,  which  is  IJ  (2)  miles  above  the  head  of  tlio  navi- 
gable part  of  the  river.  The  entrantic  to  the  harbor  has  been  impiovd 
by  the  building  of  piers  and  dredging. 

ChanneL — Dredging  in  tlie  fall  of  1894  and  spring  of  1895  nmde  a 
16-foot  depth  in  the  channel  at  extreme  low  water  for  a  width  of  about 
112  feet  at  the  inner  end,  narrowing  to  about  90  feet  at  the  outer  end, 
midway  between  the  piers.    The  material  is  all  sand  and  silt. 

LIOHTS. 

Genesee  light — On  the  west  pier,  30  feet  from  the  outer  end,  a 
fixed  re<l  light,  visible  lOJ  (12J)  miles,  is  shown,  31J  feet  above  the 
lake  level.  The  tower,  square,  pyramidal,  is  painted  brown  below  and 
white  above. 

Charlotte  Harbor  light— At  the  shore  end  of  the  west  pier,  1,923 
feet  from  the  outer  end,  three  lights  (fixed  red,  fixed  white,  and  fixed 
red,  arranged  vertically,  with  the  white  light  in  the  middle)  are  shown 
60  feet  above  tlie  lake  level  from  a  square,  white,  pyramidal,  skeleton 
structure. 

Fog  signal — The  fog-signsil  house,  brown,  is  near  the  outer  end  of 
the  weat  pier,  immediately  south  of  the  lighthouse.  The  fog  signal,  a 
6-inch  steam  whistle,  sounds  a  blast  of  three  seconds,  followed  by  a 
silent  interval  of  fifty  seven  seconds.  If  the  whistle  is  disabled  a  bell  is 
struck  by  machinery  every  thirty  seconds. 

Life-saving  station  at  east  side  of  entrance  to  harbor. 

Directions. — When  in  not  less  than  6  fathoms,  or  about  a  mile  from 
shore,  bring  Genesee  and  Charlotte  Harbor  lights  in  line  SW.  by  S. 
(S.  34°  W.)  and  stand  in. 

Coast — The  oxjast  from  Charlotte  trends  3  (3J)  miles  ESE.  to  Iron- 
diquot  bay,  the  entrance  of  which  is  entirely  closed  by  shoals.  The 
country  around  this  bay  is  more  elevated,  being  from  120  to  180  feet 
high.  From  the  bay  the  coast  trends  4^  (5J)  miles  ENE.  to  Lyons 
point.  Shoals  extend  North  and  NE.  from  this  point  ^  mile.  Smoky 
point  is  5J  (6)  miles  east  of  Lyons  point,  the  coast  between  being  shoal 
J  mile  offshore.  From  Smoky  point  the  coast  continues  easterly  5§ 
(6J)  miles  to  Pultneyville.  At  2^^  (2J)  miles  west  of  Pultneyville  a 
shoal  spit  extends  J  mile  from  shore,  with  14  feet  at  its  outer  end. 

Pnltne3rville. — Pultneyville  harbor,  at  the  mouth  of  Salmon  creek, 
has  been  improved  by  the  building  of  piers  and  by  dredging,  but  it  is 
only  available  for  small  craft. 


186 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


CoMt— Pnltneyville  to  Big  Sodas  bay:  Fairbanks  point,  l^  (2) 
miles  east  of  Paltneyville,  is  a  slight  projoctiou  on  the  coast  and  has 
shoal  -water  extending  off  it  for  ^  mile.  The  entrance  to  Big  Soflns  bay 
is  1-i  (H)  miles  from  Fairbanks  point,  the  coast  between  trending  a  lit- 
tle sonth  of  east.  Shoals  extend  off  f  mile  from  the  shore  bordering 
the  bay. 

Big  SodUB  bay.— The  entrance  to  Big  Sodas  bay  is  between  Sodns 
and  Charles  points  and  has  been  improved  by  dredging  and  by  build- 
ing piers.  The  bay,  5  (5^)  miles  lonj;,  2  (2|)  to  3  (3^)  miles  wide,  ia  deep 
and  landlocked,  and  midway  between  Oswego  and  the  Genesee  river. 

Channel— The  channel,  120  to  150  feet  wide,  rans  diagonally  across 
the  space  between  the  piers,  from  about  50  feet  from  the  outer  end 
of  the  west  pier  to  about  50  feet  from  the  inner  end  of  the  east  pier, 
upon  a  course  about  S.  J  E.  (S.  8"  E.).  The  best  depths  in  the  lake 
and  in  the  bay  lie  upon  the  prolongations  of  this  channel  line,  upon 
which  all  dredging  has  been  done  since  1892  to  16  feet  depth  below 
extreme  low  water  (or  18  feet  5  inches  below  mean  lake  level).  Tlie 
cut  is  not  completed  outside  the  pier  end.  Its  governing  depth  is  about 
12^  feet  below  extreme  low  water  (or  16  feet  below  mean  lake  level). 
The  material  is  sand  and  gravel,  with  a  few  cobblestones  along  the 
east  side.    Inside  the  bay  there  is  good  anchorage. 

LIGHTS. 

Big  Sodns  bay.— On  Sodus  point  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a 
flash  every  two  minutes,  is  shown  70  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a 
square  tower  with  a  dwelling  attached.  The  light  is  visible  13|  (Ifl) 
miles. 

Big  Sodns  (onter).— On  a  crib,  30  feet  firom  the  outer  end  of  the 
west  pier,  a  fixed  white  light,  32^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown 
from  a  square  pyramidal  tower,  brown  below  and  white  above.  The 
light  is  visible  lOJ  (12J)  miles. 

Big  Sodns  (inner).— On  the  west  pier,  1,530  feet  S.  |  W.  (S.  4°  W.) 
fi-om  the  outer  light,  a  fixed  red  light,  24  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is 
shown  from  a  white,  square,  pyramidal  tower,  surmounted  by  a  lantern 
with  copi)€r  roof.    The  light  is  visible  7J  (8J)  miles. 

Directions.— The  outer  light  may  be  approached  on  any  bearing 
from  ESE.  to  SW.,  but  not  inshore  of  these  bearings.  When  about  2 
(2i)  miles  offshore  bring  the  lights  in  line  S.  |  W.  (S.  4°  W.)  and  stand 
in.  The  mid-channel  course  from  the  inner  light  in,  past  Sand  point,  is 
SE.  I  S.  (S.  44°  E.). 

Coast.— Big  Sodus  bay  to  Little  Sodus  bay:  Between  these  bays  the 
coast  is  fringed  with  shoals  which  extend  off  in  places  J  mile.  These 
bays  are  12  J  (14)  miles  apart,  and  at  Big  Sodus  bay  the  coast  changes 
direction  to  the  northeastward.  In  this  stretch  several  creeks  empty 
into  the  lake.  East  and  Port  bays,  their  entrances  closed  by  shoals, 
also  lie  along  this  stretch. 

Little  Sodns  bay,  on  which  is  Fair  Haven,  is  2  (2|)  miles  long  north 


point,  lij  (2) 
loaHt  luiil  has 
ligScKlnnbay 
rending  alit- 
>re  bordering 

^tween  Sodus 
md  by  build- 
wid«,  la  deep 
Bneseo  river, 
penally  across 
he  outer  end 
the  east  pier, 
)  in  the  lake 
lel  line,  npon 
b  depth  l)elow 
i  level).  Tlic 
iepth  is  about 
in  lake  level), 
aes  along  the 


t,  varied  by  a 
)  level,  from  a 
isible  13|  (10) 

Br  end  of  the 
jvel,  is  shown 
)  above.    The 

W.  (S.  4°  W.) 
)  lake  level,  is 
d  by  a  lantern 

1  any  bearing 

When  about  2 

W.)  and  stand 

Sand  point,  is 

these  bays  the 
I  mile.  These 
coast  changes 
1  creeks  empty 
>sed  by  shoals, 

liles  long  north 


LITTLE   SODUS   BAY — OSWEGO. 


187 


and  flonth  and  $  mile  wide.  It  is  deep  and  landlocked  and  midway 
between  Oswego  and  Great  Sodus. 

The  entrance  to  the  bay  has  been  improved  by  dredging  and  by 
building  piers,  the  object  being  to  contract  the  entrance  to  tlie  bay  to 
a  width  of  250  feet,  and  to  maintain  a  channel  2()0  feet  wide  and  10 
feet  deep  at  extreme  low  water. 

Channel — The  channel  lies  about  midway  between  the  piers  and 
parallel  with  them,  130  feet  wide,  50  feet  from  the  west  pier  and  05  f»et 
from  the  east  one.  During  the  fall  of  1896  the  entrance  was  greatly 
improved  by  dredging  a  channel  130  feet  wide,  16  feet  deep  below 
extreme  low  water  (17  feet  5  inches  below  mean  lake  level),  through 
the  12-foot  shoal  of  hardpan  and  bowlders  which  has  hitherto  obstnicted 
the  entrance.  This  excavation  was  extended  380  feet  outside  the  west 
pierhead,  and  vessels  should  keep  on  the  prolongation  of  the  channel 
Une  until  well  out  in  the  lake  and  in  the  bay  to  avoid  shoals  on  the 
sides.  The  governing  depth  is  now  12J  feet  below  extreme  low  water 
-  (or  15  feet  at  mean  lake  level),  because  of  a  deposit  of  silt  between  the 
piers  where  there  has  been  no  dredging  for  many  years.  This  will  be 
removed,  giving  a  15-foot  entrance  at  extreme  low  water  (or  17  feet  6 
inches  at  mean  lake  level).    Inside  the  bay  there  is  good  anchorage. 

LIGHTS. 

Pair  Haven  (outer). — Twenty-eight  feet  from  the  outer  end  of  the 
west  pier  at  the  entrance  to  the  bay,  a  fixed  white  light,  31^  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  a  square  pyramidal  tower,  brown  below 
and  white  above.    The  light  is  visible  lOJ  (12^)  miles. 

Fog  BignaL — A  bell  struck  by  machinery,  a  double  blow  every 
twenty  seconds. 

Fair  Haven  (inner). — Near  the  inner  end  of  the  west  pier  a  fixed 
white  light,  20^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  a  white  mast' 

DirectionB. — Fair  Haven  outer  light  may  be  approached  bearing 
between  SSW.  J  W.  (S.  28°  W.)  and  E.  by  S.  (S.  79°  E.),  but  nothing 
inshore  of  these  bearings.  When  about  2  (24)  miles  off  the  light,  bring 
the  range  lights  in  line  S.  ^  E.  (S.  7°  E.)  and  stand  in  between  the  piers. 
The  lights  in  line  from  within  the  bay  serve  also  as  a  range  for  making 
the  channel  between  the  piers  when  leaving. 

Coast — Little  Sodus  bay  to  Oswego:  From  the  bay  the  coa«t  trends 
NE.  by  N.  for  6 J  (6)  miles  to  Nine-mile  point;  here  it  changes  its  direction 
and  trends  NE.  by  E.  the  same  distance  to  the  breakwater  at  Oswego. 

ShoaL — At  3J  (4)  miles  SW.  of  Oswego  Breakwater  light  a  rocky 
ghoal  spit  extends  off  shore  f  mile,  and  0  only  feet  near  its  outer  end. 
Although  not  a  serious  menace  to  navigation,  yet  disabled  cratt  have 
been  driven  on  the  shoal. 

Currents  in  the  vicinity  of  the  shoal  are  generally  very  light  and 
eastward  toward  the  St.  Lawrence. 

Oswego,  at  the  mouth  of  Oswego  river,  is  the  principal  United 
States  port  on  lake  Ontario. 


188 


LAKE  ONTARIO. 


Improvemanta — An  outer  liarbor  l«  lorraed  by  the  west  break- 
water which,  0,o;«  feet  Ioiik,  iiich)8eH  100  acres  outside  tlie  9-foot  eurve 
of  wliat  was  f(»riiierly  the  lalie  front.  It  starts  from  the  main  sliore 
nearly  a  mile  westwar*!  of  the  mouth  of  the  river  and  extends  east- 
ward on  a  Hue  Rencrally  parallel  to  the  lake  front  and  1,200  feet  from 
it,  to  a  point  oi)iM)8ite  the  cntrancto  to  the  inner  harbor.  The  shore  arm 
is  9104  feet  long,  extending  from  the  shore  into  the  lake  to  the  18-foot 
depth.  There  is  a  break  140  feet  wide  in  the  lake  arm  near  the  shore 
arm;  this  break  will  bo  permanent.  It  has  served  as  a  convenient 
entrance  for  vessels,  and  it  also  improves  the  sanitary  condition  of  the 
harbor. 

There  are  also  two  inner  piers,  with  shore  arms,  which  protect  the 
immediate  entrance  to  Oswego  river,  tlic  west  pier  also  partially  pro- 
tecting the  outer  harbor. 

The  entrance  to  the  outer  (west)  basin  is  exposed  to  the  force  of  NB. 
gales,  and,  in  strong  winds  ftom  this  direction,  it  is  almost  imijossible 
for  a  sailing  vessel  t(»  enter. 

Depths. — January,  1896:  The  outer  harbor  has  an  available  depth  of 
18  feet  at  extreme  low  water,  this  depth,  with  sand  bottom,  being  at  the 
entrance.  The  inner  harbor  hjis  a  15-foot  depth  at  extreme  low  water 
up  to  the  Northwestern  Elevator  and  to  the  coal  trestles  slip.  The 
deep  water  now  extends  for  the  fVill  width  of  the  river  up  to  a  line  316 
feet  south  from  the  north  side  of  the  elevator. 

Lights.— Oswego. — Near  the  inner  end  of  the  west  pier,  75  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  shown  from  an  octagonal, 
pyramidal,  gray  tower,  with  an  oil  room  attached.  The  light  is  visible 
l^  (16^)  miles. 

Oswego  breakwater. — On  a  crib  inside  the  east  angle  of  the  break- 
water, and  1,250  feet  NW.  by  N.  (N.  Mo  W.)  from  Oswego  light,  is  a 
fixed  rod  light,  39  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  llj  (l^)  miles. 
It  is  shown  from  a  brown,  octagonal,  pyramidal  tower. 

Fog  signal — At  this  station  the  fog  signal  is  a  bell,  struck  by 
machinery  every  twelve  seconds. 

Life-saving  station  at  east  side  of  entrance  to  harbor. 

Directions. — From  the  northeastward  Oswego  light  should  not  be 
brought  to  bear  inshore  of  the  bearins  SSW.  (8.  23°  W.).  When  a  mile 
offshore  bring  the  two  lights  in  line  SE.  by  S.  (S.  34°  E.)  and  stand  in 
for  the  entrance  to  the  river,  leaving  the  lights  to  starboard. 

EAST  SHOEE  OF  LAKE  ONTABIO. 

Cantion. — Compass  bearings  can  not  bo  closely  relied  npon  at  the 
eastern  end  of  lake  Ontario.  In  the  neighborhood  of  the  Main  Duck 
islands  it  has  been  frequently  observed  that  there  is  a  great  deviation 
of  the  compass,  sometimes  as  great  as  a  point  at  a  time.  This  renders 
navigating  very  uncertain  in  thick  or  foggy  weather.  This  deviation 
is  due,  most  probably,  to  numerous  superficial  deposits  of  iron  ore.  An 
examination  of  the  magnetic  observations  that  have  been  made  in  the 


OSWEOO— -STONY   POINT. 


189 


went  break* 
I  0-fuot  <;urve 
)  main  shore 
)xteudH  east- 

00  feet  from 
he  Hhore  arm 
to  the  18- foot 
ear  the  shore 
i  convenient 
idition  of  the 

1  protect  the 
partially  pro- 

I  force  of  NB. 
St  imiiossible 

lable  depth  of 
,  being  at  the 
De  low  water 
es  slip.  The 
I  to  a  line  316 

pier,  75  feet 
in  octagonal, 
ight  la  visible 

of  the  break- 
go  light,  is  a 
.^  (134)  naWes. 

ill,  struck  by 


ihonld  not  be 
When  a  mile 
I  and  stand  in 
brd. 


npon  at  the 
le  Main  Duck 
reat  deviation 

This  renders 
^his  deviation 
iron  ore.  An 
n  made  in  the 


Province  of  Ontario,  Canada,  nhows  that  thore  are  numerous  localities 
in  the  region  iinmediatciy  above  laKi  Ontario  where  there  arc  conMiilcr- 
ai»Ie  l<M'al  irreguluritieH.  The  <lipn  at  Kin 'ston  and  Helleville,  at  the 
foot  of  lake  Ontario,  and  at  Fr.  -  ott,  on  the  Ht.  F.awrence  river,  are 
among  the  most  irregular  ri'corded  on  the  Magnetic  Bin  vey  of  Canada, 
and  it  is  certain  that  both  the  compass  and  the  dipping  needh  will  be 
subject  to  notable  and  irregular  local  iiiHuences  in  the  eastern  portion 
of  the  lake.  At  Hrc  jkville,  about  lU  miles  west  of  Prescott,  and  at 
Cornwall,  about  4(J  miles  oast  of  that  place,  the  auoimily  disappears. 

Coast— From  Oswego  the  coast  trends  5.^  (0)  miles  ^K.  to  the  west 
end  of  a  wide  bluff  point,  the  east  end  of  which  is  Nine-mile  point. 
At  this  point  the  coast  bends  to  the  southeastward  for  li|  (2)  miles  to 
Pleasant  point,  where  it  again  (changes  direction  to  the  eastwanl  for 
H  (3?)  miles  to  the  mouth  of  Little  Salmon  river,  where  there  is  a  life- 
saving  station. 

Texas  is  about  a  mile  up  this  river.  From  here  the  coast  continues 
easterly  for  a  short  distance,  when  it  changes  direction  to  almost  north, 
and  so  continues  for  17^  (1^0)  miles  to  Stony  creek,  tbrming  the  eastern 
shore  of  the  lake.  There  are  many  creeks  and  several  closed  ponds  or 
bays  along  this  stretch,  but  all  are  useless  for  navigation  purposes. 

I'ort  Ontario  on  the  Salmon  river  is  35  (4^)  miles  NE.  of  Texas  life- 
saving  station  (destroyed).  There  is  another  life-saving  station  SiJ  (10) 
miles  north  of  the  Salmon  river.  South  of  Stony  creek  and  ]}  mile  off- 
shore is  Drowned  island,  surrounded  by  shoals  and  connected  to  the 
shore  by  a  shoal  spit. 

Between  Stony  crnek  and  Stony  point  are  two  small  rocky  bays,  par- 
tially  filled  with  shoals.  From  Texas  to  Stony  point  the  shore  is  com- 
paratively steep-to,  rocky,  and  without  a  harbor. 

Stony  point  is  the  eastern  i)oint  of  the  bay  at  the  NE.  end  of  lake 
Ontario,  which  is  partially  closed  by  a  chain  of  islands  stretching 
WNW.  from  Stony  point  to  South  Bay  point  on  the  Canadian  side. 

Stony  Point  light— A  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  white  flash  every 
two  minutes,  is  shown,  38  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  square  gray 
tower  attached  to  a  dwelling.    The  light  is  visible  11^  (134)  miles. 

Stony  island  lies  nearly  2  (2^)  miles  from  the  mainland,  north  of 
Stony  point,  the  channel  between  being  deep  and  free  of  dangers.  The 
island  is  narrow  and  extends  3^  (4)  miles  NE.  and  SW.  with  a  greatest 
width  of  1  m)  mile  at  its  southern  end,  tapering  to  a  narrow  point 
at  its  NE.  end.  The  island  is  almost  divided  by  a  lake  extending  NE. 
and  SW.  On  the  NW.  side  of  Stony  island  lies  Dutch  John  bay;  it  is 
f  mile  wide  at  its  entrance  and  ^  mile  deep,  has  ample  water  and  affords 
a  snug  anchorage  and  protection  from  south  and  east  winds.  The  N  W. 
point  of  the  island  is  shoal  4  mile  oft',  the  southern  face  for  ^  mile,  and 
the  SW.  point  is  prolonged  S  W.  for  2  (24)  miles  by  Calf  island  and  Calf 
Island  spit.  The  latter,  narrow  and  rocky,  extends  1  (14)  mile  from 
Calf  island,  and  has  10  feet  near  its  oxtremity.  The  rest  of  the  island 
is  steep-to. 


190 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


Buoy. — A  blac;k  uuu  buoy  is  moored  iu  15  feet  near  the  eud  of  Calf 
Island  spit. 

Little  Galloup  island  lies  about  midway  between  Stony  island  and 
Galloup  island,  2/o-  (2^)  miles  to  tbe  westward.  The  island  is  if  mile 
long  and  half  as  broad.  Sboals  extend  nearly  ^  mile  NE.  from  tbe 
NE.  end  of  the  island,  and  ^  mile  SW.,  South,  and  SE.,  from  tbe  SW. 
end.    A  small  islet  lies  on  the  NE.  sboal. 

Galloup  island  is  4^  (5^)  miles  long  and  has  an  average  breadth  of 
about  a  mile.  Sboals  extend  nearly  ^  mile  from  the  NE.  end  and  f  mile 
from  tbe  SW.  end  of  the  island,  tbe  main  shore  of  tbe  island  being 
steep-to.  Behind  a  rocky  reef  on  the  NE.  end  of  tbe  island  is  Gills 
harbor,  suitable  only  for  very  small  craft.  The  NW.  end  has  a  slight 
indentation  known  as  No.-*tb  pond;  ^  mile  oft'  this  part  of  the  island 
is  a  14-foot  sboal,  narrow  a  <d  extending  |  mile  NE.  and  SW.  The 
channel  between  Galloup  and  Stony  islands,  with  the  exception  of  the 
shoals  surrounding  Little  Galloup,  is  deep,  but  should  not  be  attempted. 

Galloup  Island  light — On  the  SW.  end  of  Galloup  island  is  a  fixed 
white  light  shown  58^  feet  above  the  lake  level,  from  a  conical  gray 
tower  connected  by  covered  way  with  dwelling.  Tbe  light  is  visible 
13  (15)  miles. 

Galloup  Island  shoal  lies  1 A  (1^)  miles  NW.  from  the  SW.  end  of 
Galloup  island.  It  is  G20  yards  long  and  300  yards  wide,  with  least 
v/ater  (C  feet)  near  its  NE.  eud.  There  is  deep  water  between  Galloup 
island  and  shoal.  This  sboal  is  much  dreaded  and  has  been  the  cause 
f^f  several  wrecks. 

Buoy. — A  black  nun  buoy  is  moored  in  18  feet  on  the  west  side,  and 
100  yards  from  tbe  southern  end  of  this  rocky  sboal.  Pass  to  the  west- 
ward of  this  buoy. 

Henderson  bay. — From  Stony  point  tbe  coast  trends  North  and  NH., 
forming  a  low  peninsula  and  protecting  Henderson  bayou  the  SW. 
Tbe  bay  is  4J  (5^)  miles  wide  between  Snow  Shoe  point  and  Horse 
island,  and  about  2  (2J)  miles  long,  with  ample  water  and  good  bottom 
for  anchorage.  The  eastern  end  of  tbe  bay  has  shoals  extending  a 
mile  off  shore.  The  SW.  end  is  steep- to,  and  here  are  Whites  bay  and 
Henderson  harbor ;  oa  iue>  latter  is  Port  Henderson.  Shoals  and  islands 
lie  across  tbe  month  of  the  bay,  leaving  two  narrow  channels;  the  east- 
ern one  is  between  Gull  and  Snake  Island  shoals  on  tbe  one  side  and 
Horse  island  on  the  other.  Sboals  extend  westward  f  mile  from  Horse 
island.  This  passage  is  deep  and  should  be  used  in  entering  tbe  bay. 
The  shoal  extending  NE.  from  Six  Town  point  is  known  as  Lime  Bar- 
rel sboal  and  has  only  3^  feet  on  its  shallowest  part..  It  is  not  safe  to 
enter  Henderson  bay  except  by  daylight,  because  of  the  shoals,  low- 
land, and  tha  abs»>nce  of  lights  and  other  marks. 

Note. — Tbe  island  designated  on  the  chart  &s  Gull  is  Snake,  and 
Snake  is  Gull. 

Black  River  bay  is  over  a  mile  wide  at  its  entrance  and  extends 


4/ 


I-  the  end  of  Calf 

Stony  island  and 
e  island  is  ^  mile 
lile  NE.  from  the 
E.,  from  the  SW. 

v^erage  breadth  of 
E.  end  and  g  mile 
the  island  being 
lie  island  is  Gills 
.  end  has  a  slight 
tart  of  the  island 
3.  and  SW.  The 
B  exception  of  the 
not  be  attempted, 
p  island  is  a  fixed 
)m  a  conical  gray 
tie  light  is  visible 

m  the  SW.  end  of 
s  wide,  with  least 
•  between  Galloup 
las  been  the  cause 

the  west  side,  and 
Pass  to  the  west- 

ds  North  and  NE., 
I  bay  on  the  SW. 

point  and  Horse 
r  and  good  bottom 
toals  extending  a 
re  Whites  bay  and 
Shoals  and  islands 
hannels;  the  east- 
n  the  one  side  and 

f  mile  from  Horse 
I  entering  the  bay. 
lown  as  Lime  Bar- 
;..  It  is  not  safe  to 
of  the  shoals,  low- 

Glull  is  Snake,  and 

ranee  and  extends 


SACKETTS   HARBOR — CHAUMONT   BAY. 


191 


4f  (5J)  miles  NB.,  the  shores  of  the  bay  coutrjicting  slightly  as  its  head 
is  approached.  This  bay  has  deep  water  and  the  shores  are  steep-to, 
except  at  its  head  (where  the  Black  river  empties),  which  is  filled  with 
flats;  here  the  bay  opens  out  to  the  SE.,  forming  Mnskalonge  bay, 
which  is  very  shoal.  The  town  of  Dexter  is  a  mile  within  the  mouth  of 
the  Black  river. 

SackettB  harbor  is  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  bay,  just  Avithin 
Horse  island.  Tliis  harbor  is  protected  by  a  natural  spur  of  loose  rock 
and  gravel,  about  800  feet  in  length,  extending  easterly  from  the  shore, 
forming  a  small  sheltered  bay.  January  15, 1896 :  The  entrance  (380 
feet  wide)  is  defined  (on  the  west)  by  Shiphouse  point  and  the  mooring 
crib,  and  on  the  east  by  the  railroad  wharf.  The  mooring  crib  runs 
about  south  into  the  harbor  190  feet  from  the  end  of  Shiphouse  point. 
It  stands  upon  a  2-foot  shoal  which  extends  40  feet  around  it.  Tliere 
is  10  feet  depth  at  extreme  low  water  (or  12  feet  5  inches  at  mean  lake 
level)  at  50  feet  from  mooring  crib  and  elsewhere  in  the  harbor  except 
near  the  wharves.  The  best  depth  along  wharf  is  ot  the  north,  200 
feet  of  the  railroad  wharf  on  east  of  entrance,  where  there  is  9  feet  at 
extreme  low  water  (or  11  feet  5  inches  at  mean  lake  level). 

Directions. — Entering  the  harbor,  Shiphouse  point  may  be  rounded 
cU)seto,  and  the  eastern  wharves  of  the  town  steered  for.  A  narrow 
sandbar  extends  two-thirds  of  the  way  from  Shiphouse  point  to  the 
southern  wharves. 

SackettB  Harbor  light. — On  Horse  island  a  fixed  white  light,  47 
feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  a  square  red  tower  attached 
to  a  dwelling.    The  light  is  visible  12 J  (14)  miles. 

Coast — From  Bull  Rock  point,  the  north  entrance  point  to  Black 
river,  to  Pillar  i>oint,  1^  (IJ)  miles  NW.,  the  shore  recedes,  forming  a 
small  bay,  almost  filled  with  shoals,  extending  out  from  both  points  for 
nearly  ^  mile.  From  Pillar  point  the  coast  trends  to  the  NE.  and  East 
to  the  head  of  Guifin  bay. 

O-offin  bay. — The  shores  of  this  bay  are  steep-to,  except  at  its  head, 
where  GuflQn  creek  empties.  One  mile  up  this  creek  is  the  town  of 
Dexter.  Vesuvius  point  and  Cherry  island  form  the  north  shore  of 
this  bay  and  separate  it  from  Chaumont  bay. 

Chaninont  bay  to  Cherry  island  has  the  same  entrance  as  Gufiin  bay, 
the  SE.  face  of  Point  peninsula  forming  the  northern  entrance  shore. 
The  bay  has  from  3^  to  4  fathoms,  mud  bottom  in  the  center  and  west- 
ern half,  but  the  eastern  half  is  filled  with  shoals,  wiiich  extend  out  as 
a  spit  almost  to  the  center  of  the  bay.  Catfish  river  empties  into  this 
bight,  and  on  it  is  the  town  of  Chaumont. 

Three-mile  bay,  a  small  iudentation  on  the  north  shore,  has  3} 
fathoms  at  its  entrance,  but  its  head  is  shoal.  A  town  of  the  same 
name  is  on  this  bay. 

Coast. — Point  peninsula  is  5J  (6)  miles  long  NE.  and  SW.  [^s  SE, 
face  is  steep-to,  except  around  the  SW.  point,  which  is  shoal  ^  mile  of£, 


192 


LAKE    ONTARIO. 


Several  wrecks  have  occurred  ou  tbiH  point,  and  it  Hhonld  be  given  a 
wide  berth.  Between  the  SW.  point  and  Tibbetts  point,  9^  (11)  miles 
NNW.,  the  coast  ia  very  irregular  and  broken.  About  midway  between 
the  points  are  Fox  and  Grenadier  islands,  connected  with  each  other 
and  with  the  shore  by  shoals,  which  line  all  this  part  of  the  coast.  A 
shoal  spit  extends  one  mile  west  from  the  west  end  of  Grenadier  island, 
and  vessels  rounding  thi.s  spit  should  not  shoal  to  less  than  10  fathoms. 

Baird  point  is  the  southern  point  of  a  small  shoal  inlet  known  as  Mud 
bay,  into  which  Mud  creek  empties. 

Stony  point  is  the  north  point  of  Mud  bay.  Between  Stony  point 
and  Grenadier  island  vessels  with  local  knowledge  will  And  good  anchor- 
age and  protection  from  all  but  Avesterly  winds. 

A  rocky  spit  extends  a  mile  west  from  Stony  point,  and  north  of  this 
point  is  Wilson  bay. 

Wilson  point,  the  north  point  of  Wilson  bay,  has  a  shoal  spit  extend- 
ing i'l  mile  from  it,  and  4  iuil<)  ^i^oiu  the  end  of  the  si)it  is  a  detached  14- 
foot  shoal. 

Fuller  bay  lies  between  Wilson  and  Tibbetts  points,  the  southeastern 
entrance  point  to  the  St.  Lawrence  river. 

Tibbetts  Point  light. — On  the  jmint  a  fixed  white  light,  68f  feet 
above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  from  a  round,  gray  tower  with  oil  room 
at  the  base,  the  keeper's  dwelling  being  to  the  northward.  The  light  is 
visible  13-j%  (16)  miles,  and  marks  the  turning  point  for  the  south  and 
best  channel  into  the  St.  Lawrence  river. 

From  Tibbetts  point  the  coast  trends  2fg  (2^)  miles  NE.,  to  the  town 
of  Gape  Vincent,  and  is  steep-to,  except  around  and  near  the  point. 

Cape  Vincent  is  on  the  south  sliore  of  the  St.  Lawrence  river,  near 
the  entrance  to  the  South  channel,  and  is  the  first  United  States  port 
after  entering  the  river. 

CANADIAN   SHOUB. 

Hinckley  point,  of  Wolfe  or  Long  island,  is  opposite  Gape  Vincent, 
and  from  here  the  coast  of  the  island  trends  4-,%  (5J)  miles  S  W.  to  Bear 
point,  ^  mile  off  which  is  a  detached  14-foot  shoal.  The  shore  between 
the  points  is  straight,  with  one  shallow  indentation,  and  is  steep-to. 

Bear  point  is  a  narrow  peninsula  ^  mile  long,  and  is  almost  connected 
to  the  11-foot  detached  shoal  by  a  spit,  leaving  a  very  narrow  channel 
between,  but  this  channel  should  not  be  attempted  or  the  point  rounded 
inside  of  %  mile.  All  the  SW.  end  of  Wolfe  island  should  be  given  a 
wide  berth  as  it  is  a  dangerous  shore. 

Shoal. — A  small  patch  with  less  than  15  feet  on  it  is  reported  as  lying 
about  li^'u  (IJ)  miles  south  of  Bear  point,  locally  known  as  "  New  Found 
shoal"  (probably  "Allen  Otty  shoal"). 

Long  point  is  a  similar  but  longer  peninsula  projecting  from  Wolfe 
island  l-j^o  (IJ)  miles,  and  ia  farther  extended  to  the  SW.  for  1  (IJ)  mile 
by  a  narrow  spit  with  10  feet  at  its  SW.  extremity  and  only  5  feet  at  ^ 
mile  from  the  point.    There  have  been  many  wrecks  on  this  point. 

Sand  bay,  1^  (2)  miles  wide  between  Bear  and  Long  points,  is  open 


ilil  be  given  a 
:,  9^  (11)  miles 
idway  between 
itli  each  utber 
'  tbe  coast.  A 
euadier  island, 
lan  10  fathoms, 
i  known  as  Mud 

en  Stony  point 
id  good  aucbor- 

d  nortb  of  this 

oal  spit  extend- 
a  detached  14- 

le  southeastern 

Ugbt,  68$  feet 
.'  with  oil  room 
I.  Tbe  light  is 
the  south  and 

E.,  to  tbe  town 
ir  the  point, 
ince  river,  near 
«d  States  port 


I  Cape  Vincent, 
lesSW.  toBear 
shore  between 
I  is  steep-to. 
most  connected 
narrow  channel 
3  point  rounded 
aid  be  given  a 

^sported  as  lying 
1,8  "  New  Found 

ing  from  Wolfe 
'.  for  1  (IJ)  mile 
only  5  feet  at  ^ 
this  point, 
points,  is  open 


ALLEN   OTTY   SilOAL SLMCOE   ISLAND. 


193 


to  tbe  SW.,  but  att'orda  shelter  from  northerly  and  easterly  winds.  A 
narrow  spit,  17  feet  at  its  outer  end,  projects  nearly  ^  mile  from  near 
the  center  of  tbe  bead  of  the  bay,  otherwise  the  shores  of  the  bay  may 
be  approached  to  rj  mile. 

Allen  Otty  or  Keill  shoal  lies  1.^  (2)  miles  SSVV.  from  Itear  point 
and  2iAj  (2$)  miles  NE.  i  E.  of  Charity  shoal.  It  is  a  narrow  shofil, 
700  yards  long,  with  from  15  to  18  feet  over  it;  is  unmarked  and  lies  400 
yards  nortb  of  the  range  between  Charity  Shoal  buoy  and  Tibbetts 
Point  lighthouse.  It  should  be  avoided  in  rougii  weather  even  by 
light-draft  vessels. 

Charity  shoal  lies  3,^,  (-1^)  miles  SW.  by  S.  from  Bear  point  and  4$ 
(5^)  miles  west  from  Grenadier  island.  This  rocky  shoal  is  J  mile  long 
NE.  and  SW.  and  350  yards  wide.     It  has  a  least  depth  of  5  I'eet. 

Buoy. — A  red  and  black  horizontally  striped  can  buoy  is  moored  in 
18  feet,  300  yards  from  the  southern  end  of  Charity  shoal.  It  is  0^  (7J) 
miles  SW.  by  W.  from  Tibbetts  Point  ligiithouse. 

ShoaL — A  dangerous  shoal  is  reported  as  lying  about  l,^o  (1*)  miles 
SE.  of  Charity  shoal,  and  is  locally  known  as  "East  Charity  shoal." 

Pigeon  Island,  2,^,  (3)  miles  NW.  by  W.  from  Charity  shoal,  is  3i 
(4)  miles  SW.  by  W.  from  the  end  of  Long  point.  The  island  is  very 
small  and  lies  in  the  center  of  a  shoal  which  extends  from  it  ^  mile 
NE.  and  SW.,  the  latter  portion  of  the  shoal  being  J  mile  wide.  The 
lighthouse  should  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  one  mile  in  rounding 
tbe  island. 

Pigeon  Island  light — The  lighthouse,  painted  white,  is  on  the 
center  of  tbe  island.  From  it  is  shown  a  white  light,  revolving  every 
seventy  seconds,  67  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  is  visible  12  (13j^) 
miles. 

Fog  signal — A  weak  band  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Reeds  bay,  between  Long  and  Bells  points,  is  2  (2^)  miles  wide. 
Tbe  head  of  the  bay  is  filled  with  a  roci^y  flat,  and,  although  it  offers 
protection  from  NE.  winds,  would  hardly  serve  as  a  good  anchorage  on 
account  of  its  rocky  bottom. 

Coast — Bells  point,  a  very  narrow  peninsula,  has  a  reef  just  outside 
it,  and  the  whole  point  is  surrounded  by  shoals  which  extend  off  shore 
f  mile.  Between  Bells  point  and  another  narrow  peninsula  point  1^ 
(tj^)  miles  to  the  northward,  tbe  coast  lino  bends  to  the  eastward,  and 
forms  a  small  bight  filled  with  reefs  and  shoals. 

Horseshoe  island,  J  mile  long  and  \  mile  broad,  lies  ^  mile  off  the 
northern  peninsula  point  and  is  connected  to  it  by  shoals  which  sur- 
round the  island  and  extend  ^  mile  SW. 

Bateau  channel,  between  Horseshoe  and  the  Wolf  islands  on  tl  e 
south  and  Simcoe  island  on  the  north,  is  narrow  and  useless  for  any 
but  small  craft. 

Simcoe  island  is  3^  (3$)  miles  long  NE.  and  SW.  and  1  (1|)  mile 
wide  at  its  widest  part.    Its  SE.  face  is  steep- to,  but  elsewhere  shoals 
1944— No.  108 13 


194 


LAKE    ONTARIO. 


extend  out  for  soino  distance,  and  its  NW.  point  ia  almost  connected 
to  the  shoals  extending  from  Snake  island,  but  the  channel  between 
the  shoals  is  buoyed,  barrel  buoys  on  the  Snake  island  side.  Shoals 
extend  from  its  NE.  end  to  Garden  island  and  Ferguson  point  of  Wolf 
island  and  fill  up  all  the  intervening  space  between  this  line  and 
Wolf  island.  Its  SW.  end  has  shoals  extending  from  it  J  mile,  and  on 
this  end  is  a  lighthouse. 

Nine-mile  (O-age)  Point  light.— The  lighthouse  is  at  the  SW. 
extreme  of  the  island  and  is  a  circular  tower  painted  white.  From  it, 
45  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  12 
(13|)  miles. 

Fog  signaL— A  steam  fog  horn  gives  blasts  of  eight  seconds,  with 
silent  intervals  of  twenty-two  seconds. 

Clearing  mark.— This  light  and  Pigeon  Island  light  in  line,  bearing 
S.  J  Fi.  (S.  3°  E.),  passes  close  west  of  a  small  15-foot  shoal  (unmarked) 
lying  1  (li)  mile  SW.  of  Snake  Island  light  and  well  clear  to  the 
eastward  of  the  large  shoal,  least  water  4  feet  (unmarked)  lying  in  a 
parallel  direction  to  Simcoe  island  and  nearly  1^  (2)  miles  from  it. 

Snake  island  is  a  small  island  lying  near  the  NW.  extreme  of  a 
circular  shoal  with  4  leet  on  its  center.  This  shoal  and  the  shoal 
extending  from  Simcoe  island  half  close  this  entrance  to  the  St.  Law- 
rence river.  Vessels  drawing  over  15  feet  should  not  attempt  to  pass 
between  Snake  and  Simcoe  islands,  but  shouUl  keep  west  and  north  of 
Snake  island. 

Snake  Island  'light— The  lighthouse  is  square,  with  dwelling 
attached,  and  is  built  on  a  crib  on  Snake  Island  shoal.  From  it,  35 
feet  above  the  river  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  red  light,  visible  0  (7)  miles. 
Directions.— Vessels  of  15  feet  draft  may  pass  between  Simt^oe  and 
Snake  islands.  The  channel  is  buoyed  ou  the  east  side  of  Snake  island, 
and  by  keeping  the  Snake  Island  buoy  close  aboard,  or  leaving  two- 
thirds  of  the  passage  to  the  eastward,  you  can,  by  steering  to  the 
northward  slowly  as  you  pass  Snake  island,  keep  good  water,  but  you 
can  not,  with  a  vessel  drawing  over  11  feet,  steer  straight  for  Kingston 
■when  abreast  of  Snake  island. 

"Wolfe  or  Long  island.— All  the  north  shore  of  this  island  is  bor- 
dered by  shoals.  Garden  island  lies  on  the  outer  edge  of  these  sht)al8 
just  west  of  Ferguson  point.  Browns  or  Knapps  point,  a  rocky  penin- 
sula 2 ,%  (2J)  miles  NE.  of  Ferguson  point,  has  a  small  bay  soutli  of  it, 
but  it  is  shoal  and  only  suitable  for  very  small  craft. 

Browns  or  Knapps  Point  light— The  lighthouse  on  the  north  of 
this  point  is  square  and  painted  white.  From  it,  28  feet  alwve  the  river 
level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (llj)  miles. 

Shoal— At  i»ff  (1)  mile  WSW.  3  W.  from  Browns  Point  lighthouse  is 
anll-footdetached  shoal  spot  lying  almostiu  mid-channel.    It  is  usually 
marked  by  a  beacon  buoy,  and  vessels  bound  up  or  down  the  St.  Law- 
rence river  should  keep  the  tnainland  aboard,  which  is  here  steep-to. 
For  Kingston,  see  page  20.5. 


most  connected 
lanuel  between 
il  Hide.  Shoals 
1  point  of  Wolf 
I  tbi»  Hue  and 
b  ^  mile,  and  on 

is  at  the  SW. 
rhite.  From  it, 
ight,  visible  12 

it  seconds,  with 

in  line,  bearing 
loal  (numarked) 
i\\  clear  to  the 
:ked)  lying  in  a 
les  from  it. 
V.  extreme  of  a 
1  and  the  shoal 
to  the  St.  Law- 
attempt  to  ])a8s 
est  and  north  of 

,  with  dwelling 
al.  From  it,  35 
sible  G  (7)  miles, 
'een  Simt^oe  and 
of  Snake  island, 
or  leaving  two- 
steering  to  the 
[  water,  but  you 
rht  for  Kingston 

lis  island  is  bor- 

e  of  these  shoals 

t,  a  rocky  penin- 

bay  south  of  it, 

on  the  north  of 

t  alK)ve  the  river 

es. 

lint  lighthouse  is 

lel.    It  is  usually 

»wn  the  St.  Law- 

1  here  steep-to. 


TABLE   OF    DISTANCES. 


CANADIAN   COAST   OF    LAKE   ONTARIO. 


195 


Table  of  dinctioiit  and  ilittaiices  hetweeu  light  statioim  on  Ihe  north  and  south  ahorea  of  the 
lake  {the  outer  pier  lights  are  taken). 


Statlona. 


Gibraltar  (Lighthouse)  point  to — 

Port  Dulhousie 

FortNiagara 

Olcott 

Oak  Orchard 

Big  SodiiB  buy 

Fair  Haven 

OBWego 

Whitby  harbor  to — 

Port  DulhouHie 

Fort  Niagara 

Olcott 

Oak  Orcliard 

Big  8o<1ns  bay 

Fair  Haven 

Oswego 

Cobnrg  to — 

Port  Dalhniisie 

Fort  Niagara 

Olcott 

Oak  Orcliard 

Charlottu  harbor 

Big  Sodns  bay 

Fair  Plaven 

Oswego 

Presqu'  lie  to  — 

Port  Dalhousie 

Fort  Niagara 

Olcott 

Oak  Orchard 

Charlotte  harbor 

Big  Sodas  bay 

Fair  Haven 

Oswego 


Dlrectious.  Nnutloal    j  Stntnto 

miles.      I    mileH. 


8.13°  E.. 
S.  34°  E  . 
S. 60}°  E 
8. 741'-'  E  . 
S.79°E.. 
8. 82°  E . . 
8. 86°  E . . 


8.2HOW. 
8.10°W.. 
8. 16°  E  . . 

8. 48}°  E . 
8. 67}°  E . 
8. 72}°  E  . 

S.  77i°  E . 


S.47i°\V. 
8.44°\V.. 
8.34iOAV. 
8.2i°W.. 
8. 30i°  E . 
8. 52i°  E  . 
8.60i°E. 
8. 68J°  E . 


8.6C  W,. 

S.54i°W. 
8.50°  W.. 
S.32°\V.. 

8. 3J°  E  . . 
8.35°  E.. 
8. 47i°  E  . 
8.58i°E. 


24} 
25,1, 
33 
53} 
106 
lldi 
124 

40| 

35 

31 

41} 

90 
100 
105} 

64i 

56J 

43A 

33J 

46i», 

64A 

71i 

76 

82i 

73-:^; 

59i 

42i 

43i 

52 

56i 

58A 


28} 
29i 
38 

eii^b 

122 

134V„ 

142} 

46} 

40A 

35} 

48,J„ 
103} 
115,15 
121} 

74i 

64} 

49} 

38} 

64 

74} 

82t 

87i 

95 

85 

68^ 

49 

50 

59A 

64} 

67i 


Niagara  river.— For  a  description  of  this  river  and  the  offlying  shoals, 
see  page  182. 

Niagara  river  to  Welland  canaL— The  coast  trends  west  for  2-^ 
(2J)  miles,  then  changes  its  direction  to  SW.  by  W.  J  W.  for  6f  (7^) 
miles  to  the  entrance  of  the  Welland  canal.  Shoals  line  this  coast  and 
extend  off  shore  in  places  f  mile. 

Fort  Dalhousie. — See  page  182. 

ShoaL— There  is  an  18-foot  detached  shoal  J  mile  NNE.  5  B.  of  the 
outer  pier  light. 

Coast. — Port  Dalhousie  to  Burlington  bay:  The  coast  trends  21 


196 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


(24T*,r)  miles  W.  by  N.  to  the  south  end  of  the  narrow  sand  spit  separat- 
ing Burlington  bay  from  lake  Ontario.  Except  for  about  5  (5i|)  miles 
west  of  Port  Dalhousie,  it  is  everywhere  steep-to  and  has  no  offlying 
dangers.  There  are  several  creeks  in  this  stretch,  which  afford  good 
shelter  and  boat  landings. 

Burlington  bay  is  a  large  sheet  of  deep  water,  free  from  danger,  the 
entrance  to  which  is  by  a  canal  cut  through  the  sand  spit  which  sepa. 
rates  it  from  lake  Ontario.  There  is  a  shoal  approaching  the  docks,  but 
it  is  well  buoyed  and  the  navigation  is  safe. 

Burlington  canal  is  between  two  breakwater  piers,  built  and  main- 
tained by  the  public  works  department  of  Canada.  The  canal  is  2,300 
feet  long,  and  varies  in  width  from  170  feet  at  the  outer  end  to  106  feet 
near  the  inner  end,  and  carries  1 4  feet  of  water.  The  south  pier  extends 
420  feet  farther  into  the  lake  than  the  north  pier.  The  canal  is  crossed 
near  the  middle  by  a  swing  bridge  of  the  Grand  Trunk  Railway. 

Danger  signal — At  night  this  bridge  is  marked  in  the  center  by  a 
red  danger  signal. 

RANGE  LIGHTS. 


Front  light. — The  lightliouse  is  near  the  outer  end  of  south  pier;  it 
is  ;?0  feet  high,  circular  and  i)ainted  white.  From  it,  at  30  feet  above 
the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  flxed  white  light,  visible  4  (4^*^;)  miles. 

Main  (rear)  light. — The  lighthoiise  is  a  gray,  circular  building,  79 
feet  high,  built  on  the  beach  near  the  middle  of  the  south  pier,  and 
I,r)70  feet  SW.  by  W.  ^  AV.  (S.  58°  W.)  from  the  front  light.  From  the 
lighthouse,  at  75  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  15  (17^)  miles. 

Fog  signaL — A  hand  horn  answers  signals  from  vessels. 

Storm  signals. — There  is  a  signal  mast  on  Burlington  beacii,  in  lati- 
tude 43°  16'  N.  and  h)ngitude  79°  54'  W.,  from  which  the  Canadian 
storm  signals  are  shown. 

Storms. — October  and  November  are  the  months  in  which  severe 
storms  are  most  frequent.  The  wind,  invariably  commencing  at  SE., 
works  around  through  South  to  West  and  NW.,  the  time  of  the  hardest 
blow  being  usually  when  the  barometer  begins  to  rise  as  the  wind  gets 
around  to  west. 

Hamilton  is  the  manufacturing  center  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada. 
Its  population  is  about  50,000,  and  it  has  direct  railway  communication 
with  all  parts  of  the  Province  and  the  United  States.  There  are  ample 
wharves.  There  are  no  port  charges  or  dues,  and  no  pilotage.  The 
United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul. 

Directions. — Vessels  making  the  canal  from  the  lake  shoul*;  \n-lug 
the  two  lights  in  range  SW.  by  W.  J  W.  (S.  58°  W.)  and  keep  them  in 
one  until  close  to  the  front  light,  which  should  be  left  to  port  and  passed 
at  a  distance  of  about  100  feet.  In  a  heavy  sea  from  the  NE.,  vessels 
drawing  11  or  12  feet  are  liable  to  strike.  Vessel  men  who  know  the 
harbor  will  not  attempt  to  risk  (;oiniiig  in  during  a  NE.  storm,  but 


OAKVILLE — TORONTO. 


197 


id  spit  separat- 
out  5  (5i|)  miles 
has  no  offlying 
ich  afford  good 

•om  danger,  the 
pit  whicli  sepa. 
g  the  docks,  but 

built  and  main- 
le  canal  is  2,300 
end  to  106  feet 
ith  pier  extends 
canal  is  crossed 
Railway, 
the  center  by  a 


f  south  pier;  it 
at  30  feet  above 
^u)  miles, 
lar  building,  79 
south  pier,  and 
ght.  From  the 
xed  white  light, 

■*els. 

>n  beach,  in  lati- 

[i  the  Canadian 

n  which  severe 
aencing  at  SE., 
le  of  the  hardest 
IS  the  wind  gets 

niou  of  Canada. 

communication 

Ihere  are  ample 

>  pilotage.    The 

Ice  shoul  '•  hriug 
id  keep  them  in 
port  and  passed 
the  NE.,  vessels 
who  know  the 
N£.  storm,  but 


anchor  under  Toronto  point  till  the  sea  goes  down.    After  having 
passed  through  the  canal  the  course  is  SW.  to  the  wharves  of  the  city. 

Coast. — Hamilton  to  Toronto:  From  Burlington  the  coast  trends 
ab(mt  2J  {26i)  miles  N  E.  by  N.  to  the  Ilumber  river,  and  has  only  a  few 
slight  indentations  where  creeks  empty.  It  is  steep-to,  excepting  off 
Clarkson,  midway  between  Oakville  and  Port  Credit.  The  chart  shows 
a  shoal,  position  doubtful,  nearly  a  mile  oft"  shore. 

Oakville  is  at  the  mouth  of  Sixteen-mile  creek. 

Oakville  light — On  a  cribwork  block,  near  inner  end  of  main  pier,  is 
the  lighthouse  level,  31  feet  high,  white,  Avith  a  red  lantern.  The  light, 
fixed  white,  is  39  feet  above  the  lake,  and  visible  11  (12§)  miles. 

Port  Credit  is  at  the  mouth  of  the  Credit  river. 

Port  Credit  light. — The  lighthouse,  square  and  painted  white,  is  on 
the  outer  end  of  the  north  breakwater  pier.  The  light,  fixed  white,  is 
37  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  11  (12§)  miles. 

Huxnber  bay,  into  which  the  Ilumber  river  emj)tie8,  is  just  west  of 
Toronto  harbor,  the  western  part  of  the  city  being  on  the  bay. 

Toronto,  tbe  capital  of  the  Province  of  Ontario,  is  between  the  rivers 
Humber  and  Don,  and  has  a  well-sheltered  barbor  suitable  for  light- 
draft  vessels.  The  city  is  the  seat  of  the  provincial  Government,  with 
the  oHicial  residence  of  the  lieutenant-governor  and  the  Government 
buildings. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  a  vice  and  deputy 
consul. 

Observatory. — The  Magnetical  and  Meteorological  Observatory,  in 
the  University  grounds,  stands  108  feet  above  the  lake  in  latitude  -^^ 
39'  35.9"  N.  and  longitude  79^  23'  39.75"  W. 

Toronto  harbor  is  formed  by  an  island  inclosing  a  harbor  of  xiearly 
3^  square  miles.  There  are  two  entrances,  both  artificial,  to  the  'uarbor. 
The  western  entrance  is  directly  in  front  of  Queens  wharf,  and  separates 
tbe  island  from  the  main ;  the  eastern  entrance,,now  being  constructed, 
is  at  the  SE.  end  of  the  barbor.  At  present  these  entrances  will  not 
admit  of  vessels  of  heavy  draft. 

Qibraltar  (Lighthouse)  Point  light— On  the  SVY.  side  of  the  point 
is  a  white  hexagonal  lighthouse  with  keeper's  dwelling  near.  From 
this  lighthouse,  66  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  white  light, 
revolving  every  forty-five  seconds.    The  light  is  visible  18  (20f )  miles. 

Fog  signal — The  fogsigual  building  of  wood,  white  with  brown  roof, 
is  1,150  feet  SSW.  §  W.  from  the  lighthouse.  The  fog  signal  is  a  steam 
horn,  which  sounds  blasts  of  seven  seconds,  with  intervals  of  ninety 
seconds. 

Queens  "Wharf  light — On  the  west  end  of  the  wharf,  from  a  white 
hexagonal  building,  at  23  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is  shown  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  9  (10^)  miles. 

Fog  signal-  -A  fog  bell,  attached  to  tbe  tower,  is  rung  by  hand. 

Queens  Wharf  rear  light — On  extension  shoreward  of  wharf,  200 
feet  N.  23°  E.  from  outer  light,  is  a  red  octagonal  lighthouse,  from  which 


198 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


t. 


\n  shown,  37  feet  abttve  the  lal^-.  Bvel,  a  fixed  red  light  visible  8  (9t^) 
miles.  The  two  lights  in  line  lead  clear  of  the  point  of  bar,  running 
Hoiith  of  and  parallel  to  the  wliarf. 

Tiiese  lights  are  maintained  by  the  Toronto  harbor  commissioners. 

Life-saving  station  at  inner  side  of  Toronto  island  near  the  east  end. 

East  Pier  light. — A.  temporary  light,  established  by  the  Government 
of  ('anada  on  tlie  East  pier  at  the  East  gap  or  Eastern  entrance  to 
Toronto  harbor,  has  been  put  in  operation. 

Tiio  light  is  fixed  red  and  10  feet  above  the  lake  level.  It  should  be 
visible  (I  (6,i^,)  miles  from  all  points  of  approach. 

The  light  is  shown  fioni  a  column  surmounting  a  hexagonal  iron 
shed.  Tlie  building  is  U  feet  high  and  is  gray  in  color.  It  stands  on 
the  pier  100  feet  from  its  outer  eiul,  but  will  be  moved  nearer  the  end 
of  the  pier  and  raised  as  soon  as  the  construction  work  is  finished. 
Another  light  to  range  with  it  will  also  be  established  later. 

The  light  is  intended  to  guide  vessels  approaching  Toronto  to  the 
entrance  through  the  East  gap.  Mariners  will  have  to  allow  for  the 
projection  of  the  pier  la?ieward  beyond  the  light. 

Buoys. — A  bell  and  five  can  buoys,  all  red,  mark  the  bank  to  the 
South  and  SW.  of  Lighthouse  point.  The  bell  and  can  buoy  to  the  east 
are  in  5  fathoms.  The  can  buoys  to  the  west  are  in  8  fathoms,  except 
No.  12,  which  is  in  21  feet.  It  is  not  safe  for  vessels  to  go  inside  the 
buoys,  as  the  bank  rises  very  abruptly.  An  addition.al  red  spar  buoy 
is  placed  on  the  NW.  point  of  the  island. 

Directions. — West  cbianneL — The  red  spar  buoy  on  the  starboard 
side  of  the  channel  is  in  14  feet  of  water,  with  the  lighthouse  bearing 
N.  7^  E.,  distant  020  feet. 

One  black  buoy  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel  at  the  entrance, 
with  the  White  lighthouse  bearing  N.  57°  E.,  distant  7.50  feet. 

There  are  11  feet  of  water  in  mid-channel.  The  best  water  is  on  the 
south  side  of  the  channel  near  the  breakwater. 

Directions. — Bast  channeL — The  buoys  in  this  channel  are  placed 
as  follows: 

Three  black  spar  buoys  on  the  west  or  port  side  coming  into  the  bay. 
There  is  15  feet  of  water  below  zero  in  this  channel.  The  channel  is  400 
feet  between  the  buoys  and  cribs.  Landmarks  for  entering  are  the 
cupola  of  St.  Lawrence  hall  in  line  with  a  point  midway  between  the 
tower  of  Metropolitan  church  and  St.  Michaels  cathedral  spire. 

A  black  spar  buoy  is  placed  on  the  boiler  shoal  to  the  south  of  the 
gap.    Vessels  should  not  go  to  the  NW.  of  it. 

Harbor  regulation. — The  speed  of  any  vessel  entering,  leaving,  or 
within  the  harbor  is  limited  to  4  knots  per  hour.  Vessels  offending  are 
subject  to  a  fine  of  *20. 

Coast. — From  Toronto  (Gibraltar  light)  the  coast  trends  15t^  (18) 
miles  NB.  by  E.  to  Port  Union  on  the  Rouge  river.  Just  north  of 
Port  Union  is  Frenchman  bay  or  Pickering  harbor. 


t  visible  8  (9^) 
of  bar,  running 

rtnimissioners. 
?ar  tho  east  end. 
the  Government 
em  entrance  to 

1.    It  should  bo 

hexagonal  iron 
r.  It  stands  on 
I  nearer  the  end 
'ork  is  finished, 
later. 

Toronto  to  the 
to  allow  for  the 

:he  bank  to  the 
buoy  to  the  east 
fathoms,  except 
to  go  inside  the 
1  red  spar  buoy 

>n  the  starboard 
[ithouse  bearing 

at  tho  entrance, 

50  feet. 

;  water  is  on  the 

uinel  are  placed 

ing  into  the  bay. 
je  channel  is  400 
iutering  are  the 
vay  between  the 
ral  spire, 
the  south  of  the 

ring,  leaving,  or 
els  offending  are 

brends  15t^  (18) 
Just  north  of 


FRENCHMAN   BAY PRE8QU*   ILE   HARBOR. 


199 


Frenchman  Bay  or  Pickering  light— On  the  East  pierhead  is 
sliown,  51  feet  above  lake  level,  a  fixed  green  light,  visible  10  (U.^) 
miles. 

At  7  (8)  miles  ENE.  j}  E.  of  this  liglit  is  Whitby,  and  5  {o'^)  niiles 
beyond,  Oshawa  harbor. 

Whitby  light— On  the  West  pier,  12  feet  above  the  lake  level,  is 
shown  a  fixed  white  liglit,  visible  5  (5'i)  miles. 
Oshawa  light— A  fixed  white  light  is  shown  from  the  pierhoa<l. 
Darlington  light,  .just  east  of  Raby  head  and  7  (H)  miles  E.  by  N. 
from  Oshawa  liglit,  is  shown  on  pierhead  in  Darlington  harbor.     It  is 
fixed  white  and  visible  .'3J  (4)  miles. 

Note.— Tliese  three  last  mentioned  lights  are  not  under  the  marine 
department  of  Canada. 

Newcastle  (Bond  Head)  light  on  outer  end  of  East  Breakwater 
pier,  is  29  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  10  (Hi)  miles.  The  light 
is  fixed  wliite  and  maintained  by  tho  Newcastle  Harbor  Company. 

Peach  Stone  reef  is  3  (3A)  miles  east  of  Bond  head,  and  3  (34)  miles 
beyond  this  reef,  ott"  Port  Cranby,  is  another  reef  close  to  shore.  ENE. 
of  Port  Granby  4^  (5,^, )  miles  is  Port  Britain,  and  4  (4/^;)  miles  farther 
in  the  same  direction  is  Port  Hope,  at  the  mouth  of  Jones  creek.  Peter 
rock  lies  close  to  shore,  midway  between  Port  Hope  and  Coburg. 

Port  Hope  light,  fixed  white,  is  shown  40  feet  above  lake  level,  110 
feet  from  extremity  of  East  breakwater.  It  is  visible  4  (4-,9t,)  miles,  and 
is  not  under  marine  department  of  Canada. 

Port  Hope  harbor.— The  channel  between  piers  is  200  feet  wide,  at 
tl)e  entrance,  with  a  depth  of  17  feet.    Eleven  feet  can  be  carried  to  tlie 
middle  dock. 
Storm  signals  are  shown. 
Life-saving  station  is  in  basin  at  Port  Hope. 
Peter  Rock,  or  OuU  Island,  light  is  fixed  white,  45  feet  above  lake 
level  and  visible  10  (HA)  miles. 

Coburg  lights.— Corporation  light  is  shown  on  East  pier,  20  feet 
above  lake  level.    It  is  a  fixed  white  gas  light  and  visible  8  (9^)  miles. 
Life-saving  station  in  basin  at  Coburg. 

East  Pierhead  light  Axed  white,  is  409  feet  S.  10°  W.  outside  of 
Corporation  light.  It  is  shown  23  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  is  visible 
9  (lOj^)  miles. 

West  Pierhead  light,  fixed  red,  is  shown  on  the  West  pier,  at  elbow, 
190  feet  from  extremity.  It  is  20  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  0 
(7)  miles. 

Shoal  bay,  17  (19J)  miles  east  of  Coburg,  has  several  shoals  in  its 
entrance.  Colborne  harbor  is  between,  and  just  west  of  Colborne,  off 
Ogden  point,  is  a  reef. 

Presqn'  He  harbor  is  separated  from  Shoal  bay  by  an  irregular- 
shaped  peninsula,  the  south  shore  of  which  is  line<l  with  reefs.  Off  the 
entrance  to  the  bay  are  several  shoals  lying  almost  in  mid-channel. 


H 


200 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


Prasqn'  He  light— On  tliu  cAHt  poiut  of  the  peninanla,  from  a  white 
octugniial  tower,  is  shown,  67  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light, 
visible  KJ  (1/5)  miles. 

Salt  Point  light  is  shown  from  a  white  square  building  on  extrtMnity 
of  Siind  spit  north  of  Pres(|u'  lie  light.  Tlie  light,  fixed  white,  is  2J 
feet  above  the  lake  level  and  is  visible  4  (4,3j[)  miles. 

Brighton  harbor  has  two  piers,  each  about  KK)  yards  long.  There 
is  about  i;{  feet  depth;  vessels  keep  in  center  of  bay,  and  in  passing 
out  into  the  lake  k<!ep  well  to  the  east  shore.  There  are  no  jiort  charges 
or  pilots. 

Brighton  ranges.— No.  3  light— At  7,20<»  feet  from  end  of  canal 
piers  and  3,9-'0  feet  from  Itrighton  wharf,  from  a  white  square  building 
on  an  octagonal  i)ier  is  shown,  29  feet  above  lake  level,  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  3  (.'M)  miles. 

No.  2  Ught— At  r>,3(i()  feet  S.  07°  W.  from  No.  3  light,  and  1,440  feet 
from  Brighton  wharf,  is  a  fixed  white  light  45  feet  above  the  lake  level 
and  visible  0  (7)  miles.  The  lighthouse  Is  a  white  square  building  on 
a  square  pier. 

No.  1  light.— At  1,420  feet  S.  65°  E.  from  No.  2  lijbt,  and  1,100  f»  et 
from  Brighton  wharf,  is  a  fixed  white  light  28  feet  above  the  lake  level 
and  visible  (>  (7)  miles.  The  lighthouse  is  a  white  square  building  «)U 
a  square  pier. 

Brighton. — Directions. — No.  3  light  tower  stands  in  1;>  feet  of  water 
in  the  axis  of  the  Murray  cauiil  and  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel, 
w!.ich  bears  SW.  by  W.  ^  W.  (S.  r,So  VV.);  in  one  w;^h  No.  2  light,  it 
leads  up  from  the  canal  through  the  center  of  thecbauiiel,  and  is  to  lie 
left  100  feet  on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing  up.  After  having  passed 
it,  if  brought  directly  ahead,  it  will  guide  through  the  remainder  of  the 
dredged  channel. 

Prince  Edward,  a  large  island,  is  deeply  indented  on  all  sides  by 
numerous  bays.  It  is  separated  from  the  mainland  by  Quinte  bay  and 
the  channels  leading  to  it.  Ofi"  the  south  shore  of  the  island  are  numer- 
ous outlying  shoals,  and  the  prominent  points  have  reefs  extending 
from  them  for  some  distance. 

Wellers  bay  is  at  the  western  end  of  Prince  Edward  island  and 
directly  opposite  Presqu'  He  harbor.  There  are  shoals  in  the  approach 
to  this  bay. 

Wellers  Bay  lights.— At  the  SW.  end  of  Quinte  Carrying  Pla<!e  is  a 
white  square  lighthouse,  from  which  is  shown,  2G  feet  above  the  lake 
level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (11  J)  miles.  At  508  feet  N.  46^  E. 
from  the  front  light  is  a  fixed  red  light  37  feet  above  the  lake  level  and 
visible  7  (8)  miles.    The  lighthouse  is  a  white  square  building. 

Directions. — The  alignment  of  the  lights  leads  clear  of  the  extrem- 
ity of  spit  off  Bald  head,  and  gives  best  water  (10  feet)  over  Wellers 
bar,  3,300  feet  outside  the  spit.  Vessels  entering  keep  the  alignment 
N.  4G°  E.,  until  the  spit  is  passed  at  a  distance  of  150  feet. 

Nicholson  point,  the  SW.  point  of  Prince  Edward,  has  Nicholson 


SANDY    BAY — TRAVERSE    POINT. 


201 


,,  from  a  white 
ed  white  light, 

?  on  extremity 
id  wliite,  i8  22 

*  long.  There 
nd  in  imHHJiig 
o  i>ort  churgen 

end  of  canal 
luare  building 
a  Dxed  white 

and  1,440  feet 

the  lake  level 

re  building  on 

and  1,100  0  et 
the  lake  level 
:'e  building  on 

i>  feet  of  water 
f  the  channel, 
No.  2  light,  it 
%  and  is  to  l)e 
having  passed 
luainder  of  the 

•n  all  sides  by 
luinte  bay  and 
nd  are  nuiner- 
efs  extending 

rd  island  and 
the  approach 

{ring  Place  is  a 
.bove  the  lake 
feet  N.  463  e. 
lake  level  and 
Iding. 

>f  the  extrem- 
)  over  Wellers 
the  alignment 

St. 

has  Nicholson 


island  lying  oil'  it.    About  a  mile  south  of  the  west  ])oint  of  Nicholson 
island  is  Scotch  Bonnet  or  Kgg  island. 

Light-  >n  this  little  island  is  a  fixed  white  light,  ftl  feet  above  the 
lake  level  and  visible  12  {l3^^^)  miles.  The  white  circular  light  tower 
has  a  dwelling  attached. 

Reef. — South  1^  (1.^)  miles  from  Egg  Island  light  is  the  north  end  of 
a  reef  which  extends  2  {2i\,)  miles  in  a  SSW.  direction ;  east  of  its  south 
en<l  is  a  small  detached  reef. 

Sandy  bay,  between  Nic-holson  and  West  points,  is  a  deep  bay,  open 
to  the  southward.  The  town  of  Wellington  is  at  its  head,  and  here  is 
a  lifeboat  station,  itehiud  the  shore  of  the  bay  is  West  lake,  in  which 
are  several  islands. 

Little  Sandy  bay  is  between  West  and  Wicke<l  points  and  inshore 
of  this  l)ay  is  I'^ast  lake.  Both  West  and  Wicked  points  have  reefs 
extending  from  them,  that  from  Wicked  ])oint  being  extensive  and 
extending  over  2  {'2^^„)  miles  in  a  southwesterly  direction  and  about  the 
same  distance  alongsliore  to  the  eastward. 

Wicked,  or  Salmon,  Point  light,  fixed  red,  is  shown  on  extremity 
of  point  from  a  white  square  lighthouse  with  dwelling  attached.  It  is 
40  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  8  (0,-,i)  niiles. 

Soup  harbor  is  between  Wicked  and  Peter  points.  It  has  a  small 
lake  at  its  head. 

Peter  point,  the  most  southerly  point  of  Prince  Edward  island,  lias 
a  reef  extending  from  it  to  the  southward.  This  reef  is  about  1/u  (IJ) 
miles  broad,  surrounding  Peter  point,  and  extends  directly  south  to  a 
point,  the  southern  extremity  being l,*„(li)  miles  south  of  Peter  point. 

Peter  Point  light,  revolving  white  every  thirty-five  seconds,  is  02 
feet  above  the  lake  level  and  is  visible  13  (15)  miles.  The  light  building 
is  a  white,  circular  tower. 

Pog  signal — Close  in  front  of  the  tower,  16  feet  above  the  water,  is 
a  steam  fog  horn,  which  iu  foggy  weather  gives  blasts  of  nine  seconds, 
with  silent  intervals  of  twenty-eight  seconds.  The  building  is  white, 
with  brown  roof. 

Gnll  point,  next  east  of  Peter  point,  has  a  reef  extending  from  it  for 
nearly  a  mile.  The  shore  of  Prince  Edward  between  Gull  and  South 
Bay  points  is  slightly  indented  and  in  places  lined  with  rocky  reefs. 

South  Bay  point  is  the  SE.  extremity  of  Prince  Edward  island.  Off 
it  are  Timber  and  False  Duck  islands,  both  of  which  are  nearly  con- 
necte<l  to  the  point  by  shoals. 

ShoaL— ^t  1^  (1^)  miles  SSE.  from  South  Bay  Point  light  is  a 
detached  12-foot  shoal. 

South  Bay  Point  light — On  Traverse  point,  from  a  white  square 
lighthouse,  dwelling  attached,  is  shown,  36  feet  above  the  lake  level,  a 
fixed  red  light,  visible  10  (11^)  miles. 

False  Duck  Island  light,  fixed  white,  is  shown  on  the  eastern  point 
of  the  island,  68  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  is  visible  13  (15) 
miles. 


■WiKMii 


«ia#ww«sa«wft*»irTwih'<vai>wiff  »■  • 


. ...  jihiiaBiiaMst..- 


202 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


Fog  sigiuiL — A  Iiniul  horn  answers  Higiiiils  from  vonnelH. 

William  shoal,  I'J  t'cct  water,  and  Harris  shoal,  22  fuet  water,  lie 
botw«'en  Kala*)  Duck  antl  Main  Dnek  isliinds,  luavin^  a  clear  cbauuel  of 
.'U  (1)  miles  b(>tweon  Harris  alioal  and  the  Main  Duck. 

Main  Duck  island  is  a  narrow  island  nearly  2  (2,'*j,)  miles  east  and 
west.  The  whole  sontherii  shore  is  lined  with  shoals  and  reefs,  and 
this  shore,  as  well  as  the  westeru  point  of  the  island,  should  not  be 
approached  nearer  than  a  mile. 

Yorkshire  island. — From  the  east  point  of  Main  Duck  island  a 
shoal  extends  over  a  mile  in  a  northeasterly  direction,  and  on  this  shoal 
is  Yorkshire  island. 

Between  Yorkshire  and  (l^alloup  islands  is  a  wide  and  deep  passage, 
with  no  danger  excei»t  Galloup  shoal,  lying  a  mile  west  of  (lalloup 
Island  light.  This  shoal  is  buoyed,  but  has  been  the  cause  of  many 
wrecks. 

Prince  Edward,  or  South,  bay,  a  deep  indentation  in  Prince  Ed- 
ward island,  lies  between  South  Bay  and  IMoasant  (Indian)  iwints. 

Flats  point  is  in  the  southwestern  part  of  Prince  Edward  bay. 
There  is  a  lifeboat  station  on  the  point  next  east  of  Flats.  Waupoos 
island  ami  Green  island  lie  in  Prince  Edward  bay  on ,  its  northern 
shoii?.  North  of  (ireen  island  is  cape  Vesey,  and  from  this  cape  to 
Pleasant  (Indian)  point  the  shore  of  Prince  Edward  is  steep- to  and  can 
be  safely  approached.  Both  the  north  and  south  shores  of  the  bay  are 
formed  by  long,  narrow  peninsulas  extending  NE.  and  easterly  from 
Prince  Edward  island. 

Pleasant  (Indian)  Point  light,  at  entrani^e  to  Adolphas  reach,  Bay 
of  Quiute,  is  fixed  \\  hite,  52  feet  above  the  lake  level,  and  visible 
10  (11^)  miles.  The  light  is  shown  from  a  white  octagonal  building 
with  red  lantern. 

Big  Bar  shoal,  detached  and  with  18  feet  over  it,  lies  4i  (5J)  miles 
ESB.  3  E.  from  Pleasant  Point  light. 

Murray  canal  is  a  straight  cut,  -without  locks,  5-^  (6J)  miles  long 
between  extremities  of  piers,  80  feet  wide  on  the  bottom  and  12  feet 
deep,  below  the  ordinary  low-water  level  of  lake  Ontario,  joining 
Presqu'  He  harbor  with  the  Bay  of  Quinte.  Its  axis  is  ENI-].  and  WSW., 
and  it  is  crossed  by  one  railway  and  three  highway  bridges.  At  each 
end  of  the  canal  crib- work  piers  have  been  built  on  either  side  into  the 
shallow  M  ater,  and  beyond  them  channels,  dredged  200  feet  wide,  have 
been  continued  until  water  of  the  same  depth  as  that  in  the  canal  was 
reached.  The  dredged  cut  at  the  east  end  extends  2,300  feet  beyond 
the  ends  of  the  piers,  and  is  for  its  whole  length  in  the  axis  of  the 
canal. 

By  day  the  center  of  the  swings  of  the  bridges,  and  by  night  ^he 
lights  on  the  same  (white  if  swings  are  open,  red  if  closed),  in  range, 
will  indicate,  with  sufficient  accuracy,  the  middle  of  the  dredged  chan- 
nel and  of  the  canal.  Each  bridge  is  passed  to  the  southward  of  the 
swing,  which  is  somewhat  to  the  northward  of  the  axis  of  the  canal. 


elH. 

i  feet  wator,  He 

•laav  chaiuiel  of 

miles  east  and 

and  rcufa,  and 

,  bIiouUI  not  be 

Diivk  island  a 
tid  on  this  slioal 

1  deep  passage, 
rest  of  (lalloup 
cause  of  many 

1  in  Prince  Ed- 
ian)  iK)ints. 

0  Edward  bay. 
lats.  Waupoos 
)n ,  its  nortlieru 
tin  tbis  cape  to 
teepto  and  can 
8  of  the  bay  are 
d  easterly  from 

phas  reacb,  Bay 
rel,  and  visible 
igonal  building 

ea  4i  (5J)  miles 

(6J)  miles  long 
lx)m  and  12  feet 
')utario,  joining 
&fE.andW8\V., 
idges.  At  each 
jer  side  into  the 

feet  wide,  have 
n  the  canal  was 
,300  feet  beyond 

the  axis  of  the 

d  by  night  ^he 
osed),  in  range, 
e  dredged  chan- 
)Uthward  of  the 

1  of  the  canal. 


BAY    or   QUINTB. 


MtrnUAY   CANAL  LIOHTS. 


203 


On  the  north  pier,  M  t«et  from  tins  outer  end,  west  entrance  to  canal, 
is  a  iixod  rt'dliglil,  1  I  feet  above  the  lake  levehind  visible  4  (I, "„)  miles. 

Above,  the  ctMitcr  it'  the  swing  pier  of  Lovatfs  bridge,  (>,4'J0feet  from 
west  (Mitranceto  ciiiial,  is  h  llxed  white  mid  red  Ii«lit,;r»  feet  above  lake 
level  and  visible  i>  (7)  miles. 

Above  the  center  jjier  of  Hmitiilield  bridge,  7,700  feet  east,  from  pre- 
ceding, is  a  tlxed  white  and  red  lig'ut,  ii-i  feet  above  lake  level  and 
visible  0  (7)  miles. 

Above  the  center  of  the  swing  pier  of  the  (Jcntral  Ontario  Railway 
bridge,  0,(»00  feet  from  the  preceding,  is  a  flxeil  white  and  red  light,  20 
feet  above  the  lake  li  vel  and  visible  4  (4,'i,)  miles. 

Above  the  center  of  the  swing  pier  of  the  Carrying  Place  Highway 
bridge,  l,r»()0  feet  east  of  the  preceding,  is  a  tlxed  white  and  red  light, 
35  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible  G  (7)  miles. 

On  the  north  j)ier,  30  feet  from  outer  end,  at  east  entrance  to  Murray 
canal,  is  a  fixed  red  light,  19  feet  above  the  lake  level  and  visible 
4  (4i\y)  miles. 

Bay  of  Quinte. — Tlie  name  is  applied  to  all  the  waters  north  of 
Prince  Edward  island  which  separate  it  from  the  mainland,  although 
the  bay  proper,  apparently,  is  the  large  indentation  in  the  northern 
and  central  part  of  the  island.  The  bay  is  connected  with  Presiin'  lie 
harbor  and  lake  Ontario  by  the  Murray  canal  on  the  west,  and  with 
lake  Ontario  and  the  St.  Lawrence  river  by  Adolphus  reach  and  North 
channel  on  the  east.  On  the  north  shore  of  the  bsiy  the  Trent,  Moira, 
Salmon,  taid  Napaneo  rivers  empty.  Bast  of  the  Napanee  river  is 
Casey  point,  and  between  it  and  Barker  point  is  a  narrow  buet  known 
as  ITay  bay.  The  channel  north  of  Pleasant  point  is  Adolphus  reach, 
which,  with  North  channel,  leads  into  the  north  branch  of  tlie  St.  Law- 
rence river.  Adolphustown  is  at  the  west  end  of  Adolphus  reach,  and 
Collins  bay  at  the  east  end  of  the  North  channel.  Trenton  near  the 
mouth  of  the  Trent  river,  Belleville  at  the  moutli  of  the  Moira  i  iver, 
Shanuonville  near  the  mouth  of  the  Salmon  river,  and  Doseronto  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Napanee  river  £.\re  the  principal  towns  on  the  north  sliore 
of  Quinte  bay.  On  the  south  shore  of  the  bay,  west  of  Green  point, 
are  Big  and  other  islands. 

Trenton,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Trent  river,  has  a  good  but  not  large 
harbor.  The  depth  of  water  vstries,  but  it  usually  averages  11  feet. 
There  is  a  bur  along  the  west  bank  of  the  river,  and  vessels  approaching 
keep  to  the  east  and  approach  in  a  line  about  the  center  of  the  river. 
There  are  buoys  after  turning  to  the  east  going  down  the  bay  of  Quinte 
toward  Belleville.  Between  Trenton  and  Belleville  a  bar  stretches  along 
the  middle  of  the  bay,  and  vessels  usually  keep  along  the  south  shore. 
There  is  a  current  of  about  2  miles  an  hour  in  the  bay  except  during 


204 


LAKE    ONTARIO. 


heavy  west  winds.  The  prevailing  winds  in  summer  are  SW.  No  port 
charges  or  pih.tage. 

Storm  signals  are  shown  at  the  outside  lumber  wharf  on  east  side 
of  river. 

Hallowell  bay,  at  the  head  of  which  is  Picton,  is  east  of  Green 
point  and  opposite  Barker  point,  on  the  main  shore. 

yUINTE   BAY   LIGHTS. 

Nigger  Island  Shoal  light  is  fixed  white,  27  feet  above  the  bay 
level,  and  visible  10  (lU)  miles.  The  lightliouse  is  a  square  tower, 
surmounted  by  a  square  lantern,  the  whole  painted  white.  It  is  27  feet 
in  height  from  the  deck  of  the  pier  to  the  top  of  the  lantern.  It  stands 
on  a  crib  work  pier,  sunk  in  11  feet  of  water,  on  the  north  side  of  the 
steamboat  channel  and  near  the  western  extremity  of  the  shoal  running 
southwestwardly  from  Nigger  island  toward  Potters  island. 

Directions. — Vessels  upon  leaving  the  swing  of  the  Belleville  bridge, 
bound  up,  can  steer  directly  for  the  light  on  a  course  WSW.  (S.  G8° 
W.),  and  should  pass  the  light,  leaving  it  about  300  feet  on  the  north 
side  or  starboard  hand.  Vessels  leaving  the  Murray  canal,  bound  down, 
after  passing  the  red  buoy  off  Onderdonk  shoal  can  also  steer  directly 
for  the  liglit  on  a  course  NE.  (N.  45°  E.).  When  within  4,000  feet  of  it 
they  should  open  it  half  a  point  on  the  starboard  bow,  so  as  to  clear  the 
north  extreme  of  the  shoal  extending  from  Potters  island.  At  2,000 
feet  distant  they  should  change  their  course  so  as  to  pass  it,  leaving  it 
300  feet  to  the  northward,  or  on  the  port  hand,  and,  after  passing  the 
most  easterly  black  buoy  on  Potters  Island  shoal,  can  shape  their  course 
directly  for  the  swing  of  Belleville  bridge. 

Bay  of  Quinte  Bridge  light,  Immediately  west  of  Belleville,  is  fixed 
white  south  of  southern  opening  j  fixed  white  north  of  northern  opening; 
red  light  at  each  end  of  drawspan  when  bridge  is  closed;  two  green 
lights  at  each  end  of  drawspan  when  bridge  is  open.  The  light  is  18 
feet  above  the  bay  level  and  is  visible  3  (3J)  miles.  The  center  pier  of 
swing  span  is  195  feet  from  the  south,  or  Prince  Edward  County,  shore. 
A  channel  100  feet  wide  lies  both  north  and  south  of  the  swing  pier. 
When  draw  is  open  two  green  lights,  flanked  by  two  white  lights,  will 
be  seen,  and  vessels  must  pass  between  a  green  and  a  white  light. 
The  light  is  maintained  by  the  bridge  company. 

Belleville  light— On  the  SE.  edge  of  shoal,  at  entrance  to  the  Belle- 
ville harbor,  is  a  fixed  white  light,  38  feet  above  the  bay  level  and  visible 
11  (12§)  miles. 

Telegraph  Island  light,  between  Trident  point  and  Deseronto,  is 
fixed  white,  40  feet  above  the  bay  level  and  visible  12  (13-i%)  miles. 

Deseronto  light,  fixed  white,  is  shown  from  square  tower  on  roof  of 
freight  shed  oa  the  railway  wharf.  The  light  is  44  feet  above  the  bay 
level,  visible  11  (12§)  miles,  and  serves  as  a  guide  to  Deseronto  from 
Belleville,  Picton,  and  Napanee. 

Amherst  island,  a  large  island  o:i  the  soutli  side  of  North  ;hannel, 


are  SW.    No  port 

vharf  oil  east  side 

is  east  of  Green 


let  above  the  bay 
8  a  square  tower, 
liite.  It  is  27  feet 
[intern.    It  stands 

north  side  of  the 
the  shoal  running 
island. 

s  Belleville  bridge, 
rse  WSW.  (S.  08° 
)  feet  on  the  north 
anal,  bound  down, 
also  steer  directly 
lin  4,000  feet  of  it 
',  so  as  to  clear  the 
island.  At  2,000 
pass  it,  leaving  it 

after  passing  the 
shape  their  course 

Belleville,  is  fixed 
northern  opening ; 
slosed;  two  green 
1.  The  light  is  18 
The  center  pier  of 
ird  County,  shore, 
af  the  swing  pier, 
white  lights,  will 
nd  a  white  light. 

ranee  to  the  Belle- 
y  level  and  visible 

and  Deseronto,  is 
J  (13^%)  miles. 
e  tower  on  roof  of 
eet  above  the  bay 
o  Deseronto  from 

i)f  North  ;hannel, 


AMHERST   ISLAND — KINGSTON. 


205 


is  9  (10^)  miles  NE.  and  SW.,  and  about  3  (3^)  miles  north  and  south 
through  its  center.  Pig  point  is  the  west  point  of  the  island  and  is 
steepto,  as  is  the  whoie  north  shore  to  the  shoal  extending  north  over 
l-j%  (1^)  miles  from  the  NE.  end  of  the  island.  This  shoal  is  a  mile 
broad,  and  on  it  are  several  islets;  the  outer  ones  are  Brother  and  Cen- 
ter Brother  islands;  the  bar  is  4  mile  from  the  point.  Amherst  bay  is 
an  indentation  on  the  south  shore  of  Amherst  island.  The  west  point 
of  this  bay  is  surrounded  by  reefs,  and  a  short  distance  off  is  Lagoon 
island.  Emeric  point,  the  east  point  of  Amherst  bay  and  the  SE.  point 
of  the  island,  is  also  shoal,  and  off  it  is  Nut  island.  The  little  bay 
inside  of  Nut  island  is  shoal  and  rocky.  The  eastern  shore  of  Amherst 
island  is  shoal,  and  in  places  there  are  outlying  shoals  about  f  mile 
offshore. 

Salmon  island,  1^  (1^)  miles  ESE.  ^  E.  from  Brother  island,  is  on 
the  northern  part  of  a  large  shoal,  which  is  almost  connected  with  the 
shoiil  from  Amherst  island.  It  extends  South,  SE.,  and  SW.  from  Sal- 
mon island  for  about  ^  mile.  Vessels  should  not  attempt  to  pass  south 
or  west  of  Salmon  island. 

Center  Brother  Island  light. — On  the  northernmost  point  of  the 
island,  from  a  white,  square  lighthouse  with  red  lantern,  is  shown,  31 
feet  above  the  lake  level,  a  fixed  white  light,  visible  10  (Hi)  miles. 

Outlying  shoals. — Halfway  between  the  NE.  end  of  Amherst  island 
and  Siiucoe  island  is  the  center  of  an  extensive  shoal,  least  water  4 
feet.  From  its  c£"*;er  the  shoal  extends  §  mile  NE.  and  SW.,  and  is 
the  same  distancu  broad.  East  of  this  shoal  %  mile  is  a  small  shoal, 
least  water  15  feet,  which  lies  1  (IJ)  miles  SW.  of  Snake  Island  light. 
By  keeping  Nine-mile  (Gage)  Point  and  Pigeon  Island  lights  in  line,  a 
vessel  will  clear  both  shoals,  but  passes  close  to  the  SW.  edge  of  the 
smaller. 

ShoaL — At  2  (2-i^)  miles  East  from  Center  Brother  Island  light  is  a 
lofoot  shoal  (unmarked),  which  lies  ^  mile  off  shore. 

Kingston,  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  is  on  the  Great  Cata- 
raqui  river.  It  is  of  importance  as  a  naval  station,  is  fortified,  and 
commands  the  entrance  of  the  Rideau  canal. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul. 

Dry  dock. — There  is  a  Government  dock,  280  feet  over  all,  width  of 
gate  55  feet,  and  depth  over  sill  IG  feet.  It  can  be  lengthened  313  feet 
by  moving  caisson. 

Ekingston  harbor  has  depths  of  from  12  to  15  feet.  There  is  good 
anchorage  off  the  shipyard. 

Directions. — The  best  approach  from  the  west  is  west  of  Snake  island 
and  close  .ilongshore  inside  of  the  two  12-foot  shoals,  marjced  by  beacon 
buoys,  lying  off  the  city  about  ^  mile.  In  approaching  from  the  east- 
ward the  main  shore  should  be  kept  aboard  to  avoid  the  11-foot  shoal, 
marked  by  beacon  buoy,  a  mile  west  of  Browns  Point  light. 

Leading  marks. — Barryfleld  Range  lights  and  targets  in  line  carry 
clear  of  shoals  to  Kingston. 


t 


M 


206 


LAKE   ONTARIO. 


Storm  signals  are  shown  from  staff  on  Folgers  wharf. 

Kingston  light,  a  fixed  white  gas  light,  is  shown  from  the  City  Hall 
clock.    It  is  visible  9  (10^)  miles. 

Buoys.— Penitentiary  shoal,  Myles  shoal,  and  Bolivia  shoal,  in  Kings- 
ton harbor,  are  marked  by  wooden  spar  buoys  surmounted  by  slat- work 
globes  or  si)lieres. 

These  buoys  are  painted  in  red  and  black  bands  and  are  moored  as 
near  the  middle  of  the  shoals  ss  possible,  in  12  to  14  feet  of  water. 

Vessels  should  give  the  buoys  a  good  berth,  as  the  shoals  extend  some 
distance  from  them. 

RANGE  LIGHTS. 

Front— At  370  feet  East  from  the  end  of  Kingston  bridge  is  a  fixed 
white  light,  48  feet  above  the  river  level,  and  visible  12  {iZ,%)  miles. 
It  is  shown  from  a  red  tripod,  with  white  oval  beacon  at  its  top  aud 
browu  shed  at  its  base. 

Roar.— Fifteen  hundred  feet  NE.  |  N.  (N.  35°  E.)  from  the  front 
light  is  shown  from  a  similar  lighthouse,  75  feet  above  the  river  level, 
a  fixed  white  light,  visible  12  (13j%)  miles.  The  lights  show  over  a 
small  arc  on  each  side  of  the  alignment,  which  leads  inside  of  Car- 
ruthers  and  Point  Frederick  shoals. 

Point  Frederick,  fortified,  separates  Kingston  harbor  from  Navy 
bay,  which  is  shoal ;  and  Point  Henry,  also  fortified,  separates  Navy 
from  Dead  Man  bay.    Cedar  island  lies  off  Dead  Man  bay. 

For  the  south  shore  and  Browns  (Kuapps)  Point  light,  see  page 
194 


rf. 

m  the  City  Hall 

shoal,  in  Kings- 
ed  by  slat-work 


i  are  moored  as 
5t  of  vrater. 
als  extend  some 


iridge  is  a  fixed 
12  (i3.%f)  miles. 
X  at  its  top  and 

from  the  front 
the  river  level, 
ts  show  over  a 
I  inside  of  Oar- 

•bor  from  Navy 

jeparatcs  Navy 

)ay. 

light,  see  page 


INDEX. 


Paga 

Abbaye  point 24 

sboal  east  of 8 

buoys 24 

Abiiio  point 178 

Adams  point 118 

shoal  near 118 

Adolpbus  reach 202 

Adolphiistown 203 

Agate  bay,  Minnesota 30 

fog  signal 30 

light 30 

harbor,  Michigan 22 

directions 22 

island 39 

light 39 

point 22 

Agents,  Hydrographic  office 239 

Abna])ee 76 

harbor 76 

directions 76 

lights 7i> 

river 76 

Alabaster 124 

Albany  island 50 

Albertport 133 

Alcona 122 

Allen  Otty  shoal 193 

Alpena 121 

directions 122 

display  station 122 

fog  signal 122 

improvements 121 

light 121 

signal  station 122 

Amherst  bay 205 

island 204 

outlying  shoals 205 

Amherstburg 142 

lights 143 

Amygdaloid  island 8 

rooks  oif 8 

Anchor  bay 140 

Ausels  point 106 


Page. 

Apostles  islands 37 

anchorage 37 

Arthur  port 33 

directions 32 

Ashland 18 

sunken  cribs 18 

Ashtabula 163 

directions 164 

fog  signal 164 

life-saving  station 163 

lights 164 

river 103 

bar 163 

An  Sable 122 

light 28,122 

point 28,53,123 

river 122 

spit 8 

Austin  port 125 

Aux  Barques  point 70, 127 

light 127 

Cheues  point 52 

Frenes  point 45 

Gres  point 124 

river 124 

Mines  point 36 

Avon  point 160 

B. 

Baby  creek 137 

Babya  point 138 

Bailey  harbor 74 

baoys 75 

directions 75 

lights 75 

shoals ,    75 

Baird  point 192 

Bald  Head 200 

Tomhill 103 

Ballards  reef 143 

buoy 143 

fog  signal 143 

lightvessel 143 

Ballast  island 148 

207 


-..jjmmmi»m.y 


208 


INDEX. 


Vage. 

Ballast  islaiul  buoyH 14!) 

Bank  point 100 

sho:il 100 

buoy 100 

Bar  i.oint 144, 173 

fo;;  signal 144 

lii{litve»Hi.'l 144 

Hhoal 144 

Baraga 24 

Barcelona 167 

Barbed  point 47,178 

Bhoaloff 47 

Bnrkbay 16 

point 16 

Barker  point 203 

Barnotvillo 128 

Barryfield  lightB 205 

Bass  islands 148 

lake 98 

BasButt  cbunuel 139 

Batchowana  bay 36 

Bateau  channel 193 

rock 38 

patch  near 9 

Battle  island 34 

light 34 

Bay  City 125 

directions 126 

display  station 126 

dock 126 

of  Qiiinto 203 

bridge  light 204 

lights 204 

north  channel 203 

Bayfield 17,134 

river 134 

rock 44 

Bayport 125 

Bear  creek 138 

lake 95 

point 192 

shoaloff 192 

Beaver  bay 30 

island 66,172 

buoy 66 

fog  signal 67 

harbor 66 

directions 67 

light 66 

life-saving  station- 66 

light 67 

shoals 66 

Tail  point 49 

Belle  Isle 142 

buoys 142 


PaKn. 

Belle  isle  light 142 

river 138,140 

station 140 

Bellevil.fi 204 

bridge 204 

light 204 

directions 204 

harbor 204 

light 204 

Bellows  island 94 

Bells  point 44,193 

Benona 99 

Benton  harbor 103 

canal 103 

Bete  Grise  bay 23 

Betsio  lake 95 

point 95 

fog  signal 95 

light 95 

life-saving  station 95 

Biddle  point 57,69 

Big  Bar  shoal 202 

Big  Bay  de  Noqnette 106 

point 25 

spit,  north  of 8 

Chicken  island 151 

fork 32 

island 43 

point 43 

Sable 97 

lake 97 

life-saving  station 97 

light 97 

Rock  point 93 

Sister  creek 168 

Sodusbay 186 

channel 186 

directions 186 

lights 186 

Trout  bay 31 

Bird  island 121 

reef 169 

buoy 169 

Black  bay 33 

shoal  in  entrance 33 

creek 172 

bay 33 

light 33 

(Holland)  lake 101 

river 33, 102, 122, 136, 160 

bar 160 

bay 190 

harbor 160 

directions 160 

lights 160 


PaKO. 

142 

138,140 

140 

204 

204 

204 

204 

204 

204 

94 

44,193 

99 

103 

103 

23 

95 

95 

95 

95 

Ektion 95 

57,69 

202 

106 

25 

thof 8 

151 

32 

43 

43 

97 

97 

ig  station 97 

97 

93 

168 

186 

186 

IS 186 

186 

31 

121 

169 

169 

33 

ince 33 

172 

33 

33 

101 

33, 102, 122, 136, 160 

160 

190 

160 

la 160 

160 


INDEX. 


209 


Page. 

Black  river  island 122 

life-saving  Htation 122 

light 122 

shoals 122 

Rock  harbor 171 

Blackwell  canal 168 

Blake  point 38 

shoal,  east  of 9, 38 

Blnff  point 176 

Bois  Blauc  island 56, 143 

coast  of 66 

life-saving  station 56 

light 56,143 

shoalofl' 56 

lights 143 

Bolivar  shoal 206 

buoy 206 

Bond  Head 199 

light 199 

Boot  island 50 

Bourassas  point 70 

Bowers  Harbor 94 

Bowlderreef 66 

bnoy 66 

Boyer  bluff 72 

Braddock  point 184 

light 184 

Brest 153 

Brighton 200 

directions 200 

harbor 200 

lights 200 

Britain  port 199 

Brother  island 205 

Browns  point 194 

light 194 

shoal  off 194 

Bmceport 176 

Bruise  bay 35 

river 35 

rocks,  west  of 9 

point 60 

Bnckhom  island 172 

Buffalo 168 

creek 168 

harbor 168 

breakwater 169 

buoys 169 

caution 170 

currents 170, 171 

depths 168 

directions 171 

docks 169 

— fogsignal 170 

improvements 168 

1944— No.  108 14 


I'agn. 

Buffalo  harbor  life-saving  station  . . .  170 

lights 169,170 

river 168 

Hull  Rock  point 191 

Bum  iHland 109 

Burlington  bay 30, 196 

canal 196 

danger  signal 196 

directions 196 

^"fogsignal 196 

lights 196 

storms 196 

storm  signals 196 

Burchville 129 

Burnt  Bluff 106 

Cabin  point 127 

Burwellport 176 

C. 

Calf  island 189 

spit 189 

buoy 190 

Calumet 91 

buoys ■ '  91 

caution 91 

currents 93 

directions 92 

dry  dock 92 

Illinois  Steel  Company's  harbor.     92 

life-saving  station 91 

light,  fog  signal 91 

river 91 

bar 91 

buoys 91 

caution ; 92 

Cana  island 74 

light 74 

Canoe  rocks 38 

shoal,  ENE.  of 9 

Cape  Gargantua 35 

Hurd 131 

channel 131 

Ipperwash 134 

Vincent 192. 

Caribou  island '. 39 

fog  signal 39 

■ light 39 

shoals  off 10 

Carlton  bay 49 

Carp  lake 95 

river 51,95 

point 95 

Carpenter  point 156 

Carruthcrs  shoal 206 

Carrying  Place   Highway   Bridge 
light 202 


210 


INDEX. 


Pagn. 

Cnsevillo 125 

CuMt-y  point 203 

(.'iiHtln  j)oiut 27 

Cut  island 37 

anclioragi! 37 

Cntuwbft  inland 156 

Cutfish  river 191 

Cntlicad  point 95 

Catholic  MiMsiou  lijjbts 44 

Cavo  point .' 75 

Cedar  inland 206 

point 154,158 

ran^e 158 

HlioalH 157 

river 109 

buoy 10{» 

caution 109 

barbor 109 

directions 109 

lights 109 

shoals 109 

Center  Brother  inland 205 

light 205 

Centerville 78 

shoal  SE.  of 78 

Central  Ontario    Railroad  Bridge 

light 203 

Chanibtrs  island 109, 115 

light 109,115 

shoals 115 

Chantry  island 132 

fogsignal 132 

light 132 

Chappel  rock 27 

Charity  island 125 

buoy 125 

light 125 

Little 124 

shoals  off 124 

shoal 193 

buoy.. 193 

Charles  point 186 

Charlevoix 93 

harbor , .     93 

directions 93 

lights 93 

Charlotte 185 

harbor 185 

channel 185 

— directions 185 

fogsignal 185 

life-saving  station 185 

lights 185 

Cbaumont 191 

bay 191 

Chautauqua  creek 167 


Page. 

Cheboygan 58 

directions 53 

fogsignal 53 

improvenieutn 63 

lights 53 

range  lights 53 

river 53 

buoy 53 

Cheltenham  shonl 91 

Chenal  Aboutroiid 140 

Hearts  138 

Cbnqtiauiogon  bay 18 

point 18 

fog  signal 18 

light 18 

wreck ig 

Cherry  island 191 

Chicago 85 

Branch  Ilydrograpbic  olJice 88 

breakwaters,  lights 87 

cribs 87 

currents 89 

directions 89 

dry  docks 88 

fog  signals 87 

Four-mile  crib  light 88 

harbor 85 

fog  signals,  lights 87 

of  refuge 85 

Hyde  Park  cribs,  1  ights 88 

Lake  View  cribs,  lights 87 

landmark 87 

life-saving  station 88 

onter  breakwater  lights 87 

pilotage 89 

river 85 

signals 89 

shoals  near 90 

time  ball 88 

tugs,  wharfage 88 

waterworks   crib,     fog   signal, 

light 87 

Chickens,  the i5i . 

ieefs 162 

Chickenolee  reef 152 

Chiefs  point 132 

Chippewa 171 

channel 171 

harbor 37 

-point 107 

Choyyecape 35 

Church  point 44 

range  lights 44 

Clarke  point 91,133 

light 133 


Pag*. 

B8 

53 

53 

53 

53 

53 

53 

53 

91 

140 

138 

18 

18 

18 

18 

18 

191 

85 

pliic  ortice 88 

its 87 

87 

89 

89 

88 

87 

;ht 88 

85 

igbts 87 

85 

lights 88 

lights 87 

87 

1 88 

lights 87 

89 

85 

89 

90 

88 

88 

,     fog   sigual, 

87 

151. 

152 

152 

132 

171 

171 

37 

107 

35 

44 

44 

91,133 

133 


INDEX. 


211 


Page. 

Clarke  point  shoal 91 

hiioy 91 

caution 91 

Clarkson 197 

shoal  off 197 

Clny  banks 98 

Cleveland 160 

approach,  caution 160 

Branch  Hydrographio  office 161 

breakwater 160 

caution 162 

dopt'is  in  channel 161 

directions 162 

docks 162 

fog  signal 162 

lifo-sav  ing  station 161 

lights 162 

time  ball 161 

Clinton  point 18 

port 156 

light 156 

river 140 

Coburg 199 

life-saving  station 199 

lights 199 

Cockbnrn  island 130 

Col  borne 199 

harbor 199 

port 178 

Colchester 151,173' 

reef 151,173 

fogsignal 151,173 

light 151,173 

wreck 151 

Collier  port 47 

Collins  bay 203 

Conneaut 164 

river 164 

depths  in 164 

directions 164 

lights 164 

Connors  island 172 

harbor 172 

point 12,14 

ligbts 12 

Copper  harbor 22 

directions 22 

ligbts 22 


Minepoint 36 

,  rocks  near 10,36 

Corboy  point 36 

light 36 

Corona  shoal 107 

buoy 107 

Corunna 137 


Pagw. 

Corunna  lights ]  37 

Corsica  shoal 129 

Cove  Island 131 

fogsignal 131 

light 131 

Crab  island 47 

Cranes  point 128 

Credit  port 197 

ligbt 197 

river 197 

Crescent  port 125 

Crisps  lifu-saving  station  . . . , 28 

Crooked  creek 164 

island 120 

Cross  village 93 

Crystal  lake 95 

Currents 1 

Lake  Erie 5 

Huron 5 

Michigan 4 

Ontario 5 

Superior 3 

Niagara  river 171, 183 

Strait  of  Mackinac 58 

Cnyabogariver I6O 


Dalhonsie  port 182 

Dangers,  Lake  Erie 146 

Huron 117 

Michigan 61 

Ontario igQ 

Superior 7^9 

Dark  Hole  passage 45 

rangelights 45 

Darlington  harbor 199 

light 199 

Davignon  point 41 

Deadman  bay 2O6 

Deans 77 

Death  Door  bluff 116 

De  P<Sre  town m 

Deseronto 204 

light... 204 

Detour  passage 45,130 

oastshore 47 

west  shore 46 

toLakeErie 49 

Huron 49 

Michigan 48 

■Georgian  bay 49 

47,49,70,106 


point. 


fogsignal 47 

light 47 

poat-offiee 46 


312 


INDEX. 


Detonrreef 46 

buoy 46 

sboal 46 

buoy 46 

Detroit 141 

island 72 

pasHage 72 

shoals 72 

river 141 

Iiuoys 143 

directions 142 

docks 142 

fog  signal 144 

light 144 

lightvessel 144 

main  chunnel 142 

northern  channel 142 

signals 142 

to  Buffalo 147 

Wellandcanal 147 

Devil  island 16 

fog  signal 17 

light 16 

shoaloff 37 

channel 131 

river 36,121 

Devils  Nose 84 

Dexter 191 

Dis  point 47 

Dollar  bay 21 

Don  river 197 

Dougalls  rock 143 

buoy 143 

Doughertys  harbor 94 

Douglas 102 

point 133 

Dover  port 177 

Drisco  shoal 108 

buoy 108 

Drowned  island 189 

Drummoud  island 47,130 

Duck  island 44 

Great 131 

fog  signal 131 

light 131 

range 44 

islands 130 

dangers 130 

Inner 130 

Middle 130 

Outer 130 

Western 130 

lake 99 

Duluth 11 

bay 11 


Page. 

Dnlnth  canal 11 

caution ,     12 

current 11 

Connors  Point  range  lights  —     12 

fog  signal 13 

harbor 11 

life-saving  station 12 

lights 12 

North  Channel  east  range  lights    12 

North  Channel  west  range  lights    13 

note 12 

obstruction 11 

Ohio  Dock  light 12 

pilots 12 

Rice  Point  range  lights 12 

South  Channel  range  lights 13 

to  Ontonagon 13, 14 

port  Arthur 14 

St.  Marys  river 13 

West 11 

Dummy,  the 175 

light 175 

Duncan  bay 37,53 

Dunkirk 167 

harbor 167 

buoys 167 

directions 167 

improvements 167 

lights 167 

Dunlap  reef 113 

buoys 113 

lights 113 

Dutch  John  bay 189 

Dyke,  the 11 

B. 

Eagle  bluff 116 

light 115 

harbor 22,116 

directions 22 

lights 22 

fog  signal 22 

island 16 

river 21 

dangers 7 

harbor 21 

directions 21 

light 22 

East  bay 186 

Bank  buoy 143 

Charity  shoal 193 

harbor 156 

Huron  island.. ^ 

lake 201 

Moronbay 61 


H 


INDEX. 


Page. 

11 

,     12 

U 

go  lights  ....     12 

13 

11 

1 12 

12 

it  riiuge  lights    12 
strange  lights    13 

12 

11 

12 

12 

ights 12 

ige  lights 13 

13,14 

14 

Br 13 

11 

175 

175 

37,53 

167 

167 

167 

167 

8 167 

167 

113 

113 

113 

189 

11 

115 

115 

22,115 

22 

22 

22 

16 

21 

7 

21 

DB 21 

22 

186 

148 

193 

156 

25 

201 

61 


Paga, 

East  Neebish  1  ights 44 

Sister  island 161 

shoals 151 

Twin  river 77 

Easteni  shoal 75 

b«oy 75 

Ecorse  range 143 

Etlwnrd  island 33 

point 134 

lights 134 

Egg  harbor 114 

island 201 

light , 201 

reefnear 201 

Eighteen-mile  creek 183 

Eleven-foot  shoal 107 

bnoy 107 

—— fog  signal 107 

lightvessel 107 

Elgin  port 133 

light 133 

Elk  lake 93 

Ellison  bay 116 

Elm  creek 128 

spit 128 

Emerald  channel 171 

buoy 169 

Emerick  point 205 

Empire  bluffs 95 

Encampment  crib  light 45 

island 30 

shoal 9 

Ephraim  town 115 

Eponfette  point 69 

town 69 

Erie 165 

harbor 165 

buoys 165 

currents 165 

depth  in  channel 165 

directions 166 

fogsignal 166 

improve      nts 166 

life-saving  station 165 

lights 166,166 

shoalin 166 

Erie  canal 172 

lake.     (See  Lake  Erie. ) 

Enroll 134 

Escanaba 108 

light 108 

shoals 108 

Evanston 84 

fogsignal 84 

light 84 


213 


Page. 


FairiHland 47 

Fa'  banks  point 186 

>  iiirhnven 110 

FiiirHimn 186 

directions 187 

fog  signal 187 

lights  187 

Fairport 102 

bar 162 

note 163 

(Mreotions 103 

life-saving  station 162 

lights...! 162 

False  Detour  channel 130 

Duck  island 201 

fogsignal 202 

light 201 

Presqne  He  harbor 119 

dangers 119 

directious 119 

Farmers'  Ridge  passage 44 

lights 44 

Fawn  island 137 

Ferguson  point 194 

Fighting  island 143 

buoy 143 

Fish  creek 18 

bay 114 

Fishermans  island 93 

shoal  near 93 

Fitzwilliam  channel 131 

Five-foot  shoal 46 

buoy 46 

Flat  rock  point 126 

Flats  point 202 

Fluor  island 34 

Fond  du  Lac 16 

Fools  bay 129 

Forest  bay 127 

Forester 129 

Forestville 128 

Fort  Erie 168 

point 169 

buoys 169 

Gratiot 129 

fogsignal 130 

lights 129,130,136 

shoalSE.of 136 

Mackinac 58 

Maiden 141 

Massassauga 182 

Niagara 182 

life-saving  station 183 

-light 183 


214 


INDEX. 


PiiBe. 

FortWillclnH 23 

linhtH 23 

William 32 

i«,rty-inil<)  jxHut 118 

Iifo-8aviii({atatioii 118 

Fonrt<(flii-iiiilo  ]ioint 19 

— lot;  signal 19 

litlit.. 19 

Bpit  oft" 7 

Fox  JHland 192 

Fox  inlaii<l» 67 

jioiiit 80 

Hhoals  near 80 

river Ill 

buoys Ill 

note 112 

Frnukfort 95 

directions 96 

harbor 96 

fog  Higual 96 

life-saving  station 96 

light 96 

shottl 96 

Frechette  point 42 

range 42 

Frederick  point 206 

shoals 206 

Freedom  village 53 

Fremont 157 

French  river 117 

Frenchraans  bay 198 

light 199 

Frog  island 172 

Frying  Pan  island 46 

light 46 

Fuller  bay 192 

Fugards  point 60 

O. 

Oa£Phey  point 46 

shoalsSE.of 46 

Gage  point 194 

fogsignal 194 

light 194 

Gallonp  island 190 

light 190 

Little 190 

shoal 190 

buoy 190 

Garden  bay 106 

blufif 106 

island 64,194 

shoals 65 

buoy.... 65 

•^— river 43 


rage. 

Garden  river  resell 43 

Gargantna  oapo 35 

harbor 36 

light 35 

Garlio  ]ioint 25 

Goueseo  river 185 

light 185 

George  hike 44 

lights 44 

Georgian  bay 131 

channels 131 

Gheghuto  islands 132 

Gibraltar  island 149 

point 197 

■ light 197 

Gig  point 131 

fogsignal 131 

light 131 

Gilchrist ol) 

Gills  harbor 190 

Glen  Arbor 95 

Goderich 133 

directions IJI 

dues 134 

fogsignal 134 

harbor  of  refuge 133 

improvements 133 

life-saving  station 131 

lights I3.i 

signal  station 134 

Golden  Hill  creek 184 

Good  Harbor  bay 93 

Goose  island BO 

reef  near 50 

Gooseberry  river 30 

reef  off 9, 30 

Gonlaisbay 29,30 

point 29,36 

river 30 

Grace  harbor 37 

Graham  shoals 51 

buoys 51 

currents 51 

Grandby  port 199 

Grand  Haven 100 

caution 101 

currents 101 

directions 101 

fogsignal 101 

harbor  of  refujje 100 

life-saving  station 101 

lights 100,101 

shoal 100 

Grand  island 27,171 

harbor 26 


Page. 

43 

35 

36 

35 

25 

185 

185 

44 

44 

131 

131 

132 

149 

197 

197 

131 

131 

131 

o9 

190 

95 

133 

l»l 

134 

134 

133 

133 

1 131 

131 

134 

184 

95 

60 

50 

30 

9,30 

29,30 

29,3« 

30 

37 

51 

51 

51 

199 

100 

101 

101 

101 

101 

riifjo 100 

tatioii 101 

100,101 

100 

27,171 

26 


INDEX. 


215 


Ciranil  iHlitiiil  huibor  liKlits 20, 27 

(linu'flc.im 20,27 

liKht 27 

Orniid  Miinitoiiliii  iitlmi<l I'M) 

Griiiid  MiiniiH  liiirhor 28,  .'10 

lot;  »in;iial 28,30 

lij,'lit 28,30 

(■riiiKl  I'lirtngo  Imy 9 

ruckH i) 

Orniul  I'ortul 27 

river 100,103,177 

I.lnir 177 

'I'riivt'rHo  l)ay 93 

rtinsftioim 94 

(Nist  linn 93 

light 94 

wust  arm 93 

Ornii(ll),v  ])ort 199 

Granite  islaiul 25, 33 

Ibi?  8i<;nal 25 

light 25 

point 25 

rocks  in  line  with 8,9 

Griiss  iHliinil 121 

slioals  o. 121 

Grassy  island Ill,  113 

lights 111,143 

caution Ill 

point 11, 10, 154 

Gratiot 130 

ri  vor 21 

Gravclltay 178 

Gravelly  island 71 

shoal 71 

bnoy 71 

point 124 

spit 124 

buoy 124 

Gray  reef 63 

fog  signal 03 

liglit 63 

Great  Cataraqui  river 205 

Lake  river 35 

Grecian  shoal 151, 173 

Green  bay 70,106 

city Ill 

buoys Ill 

directions 112 

lights Ill 

shoals Ill 

island 110, 130, 150, 202 

light 110,150 

point 2ai 

Greenbush 122 

Greenough  point 131 


Vagp. 

(in  iiadler  island 192 

GrindMtoiio  i^ity 127 

point 35 

<  iros  cap 29,  51 

caution 52 

(JrosH  point 51 

(IrosHo  111)  Ht.  Martin 51 

islo  lights 113 

point 81 

buoy 84 

ciibs 84 

fog  signal 84 

iKV-siivJTi!,'  station 84 

liglit 84 

Hlioal 84 

polntc 140 

channel 1 10 

Hats 140 

fog  signal 141 

ligbtvcsscl 140 

Gnibli  reef 153,  175 

shoals  near 153,  175 

({nftin  bay 191 

creek 191 

Gull  island 30,60,71,120,  190 

1  ight 199 

reef 66 

Blioal 30,  00, 150 

buoy 00, 151 

islands 38 

reefs  near 9, 38 

point 201 

rock 23 

bnoy 23 

light 23 

shoal  south  of 7 

buoy 7 

Gulliver  lake 69 

B. 

Hallowell  bay 204 

Hamburg 168 

Hamilton 196 

Hamlin 97 

Hammond  bay 118 

Hancock 21 

Harbor  point 93 

Hardwood  poi!it 121 

Harlem  shoal 129 

Harris  point 134 

shoal 202 

Harrisvillo 122 

Harwood  point 45 

bnoj' 45 

lights 45 


S16 


INDEX. 


V»gf. 

Hut  iMlUIKl 04,111 

Hhoiil  near 64,114 

— —  point 31 

iraybiiy 203 

• 1  mVo  rhitnnel 42 

— biioyH 42 

ilin-ctionn 42 

-^— (liHtaiice  tii1>le 42; 

WgUU 42  I 

Hen  islnml 151 

Hen  aixl  CliickxiiH  lights 45 

HendorHon  Imy 10<) 

Imrbor VM 

port 190 

Henry  jioint 206 

Heniiitu  i  Innd 14 

HerHon  iHlaud 13it 

lijrhtH ISO 

Hi'iTinglake 06 

HcBBel  village 50 

HibbardB  rock 36 

Highisland 66 

Hills  point 113 

shoal 113 

— buoys 113 

Hinckley  point 192 

Hog  island 64,72,94 

— reef 64 

buoy 64 

Holland 101 

currents 102 

directions 101 

lake 101 

life-savingstation 101 

lights 101 

Hope  port 199 

light 199 

Horse  island 1:«1 

light 192 

Horseshoe  island 115, 193 

reefs 116,16.? 

buoy , 116,169 

light 170 

Houghton 21 

point 17 

Hoyt  shoal 46 

buoy 46 

Hughes  point 69 

Humber  bay 197 

river 197 

Hungerford  point 131 

Hurdcape 131 

Huron 159 

bay 24 

city 127 


Pat*, 

1 1  UTon  (lepths  i  n  channel 159 

directions 169 

islands 25 

fog  Hjgnal 26 

light .^ 

lake.     (.SVo  Lake  Huron. ) 

light 169 

tnountains 25 

point 140 

port 13 

dock 18 

river 24,159 

point 24 

shoiil  NFi.  of 8 

shonl  near 169 

Hyde  Park  cribs 90 

lights 90 

shoals 90 

buoys 90 

Hydcs  point. 177 

Hydrographio  Oftico  agents 239 

publications 233 

I. 

He  aux  Oalots 64 

buoy 64 

fogsignal 64 

light 64 

reef 64 

La  Salle 50 

Marquette 60 

St.  Martin 51 

Illinois  Steel  Company's  harbor 91 

Indian  creek 128 

point 44,106,202 

lights 45,202 

shoal IW 

town 108 

Inner  bay 176 

Inverbnron 133 

Ippcrvrash  cape 134 

Irondiquot  bay 185 

Iron  Works  shoal 172 

Iroquois  island 29 

point 29 

fogsignal 29 

light 29 

Isabelle  point 23 

shoal  water 7 

Pcches 142 

buoy 142 

Isle  aux  lioiihes 30 

shoalsnear 9 

Cbtpean 38 


INDEX. 


217 


Pkg*. 

el 159 

159 

25 

25 

.•% 

Iiiroii.) 

169 

26 

140 

13 

18 

24,159 

24 

i'.,of 8 

159 

90 

90 

90 

90 

177 

gents 239 

233 

64 

64 

al 64 

64 

64 

50 

50 

51 

^'h  harbor 91 

128 

44,106,202 

45,202 

IW 

108 

17« 

133 

134 

185 

172 

29 

29 

29 

29 

23 

7 

142 

142 

30 

lear 9 

38 


Fnge. 

lileKoyal* ^^ 

light 38 

— BhoalH  n«ar 8 

Itle  of  Coven l-*! 

fog  signal 131 

light 131 


Jack  FiHh  bay ** 

Jacks  Uliiir 1»* 

liickBon  harbor 72 

JeiikiiiH  rook •*■* 

buoy •** 

Johimoti  island 187 

Johnston  channel 138 

Jones  creek 199 


Kalamnxoo 102 

river 102 

directions 102 

lights 102 

KaniiniBtiquia  river 32 

lights 32 

Keill  shoal. 193 

Kelley  island 150 

reef 150 

buoy 150 

Kemps 80 

Kenosha 83 

daymark 83 

^—  directions 83 

harbor 83 

life-saving  station 83 

lights 83 

pilots 84 


tugs. 


83 


Kewaunee 76 

directions 77 

fog  signal ■ 77 

baruor 77 

caution 77 

llfe-sav  ng  station 77 


lights 

river 

Keweenaw  bay 

——point 

point  (small) 

sboalnear 7 

Kincardine 133 

lights 133 

Kingston 205 

directions 205 

dock 205 

harbor 205 


l*ni[(<. 

K  iugston  harltor  buoys 206 

lights 206 

storiu  signals 206 

KiuKHvillo 174 

harbor '74 

lights 174 

Knapps  point •'•'l 

lijjht 194 

Knife  island -9 

river *-•••     29 

Knob  island 31 

lijrht 31 

rockHW.of 9 

X.. 

L'Anse  town 24 

La  Harbo  point 51 

Lac  la  Belle 23 

Lac  Tracy " 

Lagonu  island 2(B 

liSke  ( Jeorge 44 

range 'II 

—  F.rie U5 

anchorages 146 

Cana<lian  const 1"3 

islands 151 

cauti(m lf>3 

currents 1  >  •"> 

dangers 116 

harbors  of  refuge 146 

islands  in  western  part 147 

navigation 6, 146 

north  shore 173 

routes 147 

table  of  directions  and  dis- 
tances     173 

U.S.  coast 153 

U.  S.  islands 147 

wrecks 174 


Huron 117 

Canadian  shore 130 

currents l-  ■"* 

dangers 117 

dimensions 117 


east  shore 131 

harboref  of  refuge 117 

lightvessel 129 

fog  signal 129 

navigation 6, 117 

northeast  shore 130 

west  shore 118 

Michigan -*  -  -    59 

currents 1>  * 

dangers 61 

east  shore 92 


218 


INDEX. 


I'BgC. 

Lakii  Micliii,'an  harbors  of  refuge 60 

islanilH 62,  70 

iiiivigatioii 6,  fiO 

north  shoro OH 

nmtes (Ji 

shore 62 

west  slioro 70 

Nipissing 117 

Ontario 180 

'  Canadian  roast 182, 192, 105 

caution 181 

cnrnints 1,  5 

dangers 180 

east  shore 188 

caution 188 

navigation 180 

routes 181 

table  of  directions  and  dis- 
tances    195 

-' U.  8.  coast 181 

St.  Clair 140 

directions l-il 

Flats  Canal 138 

lights 139 

middle  ground 137 

buoys 137 

Superior 6 

anchorages 6 

Canadian  shore 31 

current 1,  3 

dangers,  north  shore 9 

south  shore 7 

hai'iors  of  refuge 6 

islands  in 37 

Canadian 38 

United  Stat«s 37 

navigation 6  i 

• north  shore 29  i 

■ routes 13  ! 

south  shore 16  ! 

View.  134  I 

crib  lights 134  ' 

Lakeport 129  I 

Lamb  island 34  | 

light 34  I 

Lansing  shoal , 65,  69  ; 

buoy 65  : 

La  Pate  hill 32  i 

La  Pointe 17  ' 

anchorage 3"  < 

light 18 

Laugljing  Fisii  point 26 

spit  oH' 8^ 

Leach  island 36  ; 

rocks  off 10,  36  I 


I'age. 
Leamington 174 

light 174 

Lewis  point 44 

lyowiston 182 

Lexington 129 

Lighthouse  point 04, 152, 197 

light 94,152,197 

Lily  pond 19 

Lime  Barrel  shoal 190 

Limekiln  Crossing,  lights 143 

lightvessel 143 

reef 169 

huoy 169 

Lincoln 97 

Linden 21 

List  of  Hydrographic  Office  agents..  239 

publications 233 

l^ittle  Bay  do  Nociiiette 108 

buoys 108 

shoals 108 

Charity  island 124 

Chicken  ishuid 151 

Fork 32 

Fort  light 84 

river 84 

Galloup  island 190 

Gull  island 71 

Iron  river 8 


■  spit. 


point. 


Sable 


-  lake  . 
light. 


8 

173 

98 

98 

98 

Sable  lake  . . . .' 97 

Salmon  river 189 

life-saving  station 189 

Sandy  bay 201 

Sodns  bay ]87 

channel 188 

directions 188 

lights 188 

Sturgeon  bay 1 12 

Summer  island 70 

Tail  point m 

Traverse 93 

bay 93 

anchorage 93 

directions 93 

fog  signal 93 

light 93 

Lizard  islands 36 

rocks  near 10, 36 

Lock  point 38 

Locust  point 155 

Lone  rock 18 


I'age. 

174 

174 

4t 

182 

129 

04, 152,  li)7 

94,152,197 

19 

190 

g!it« 143 

113 

169 

169 

97 

21 

Office  Mgeiits..  239 

ibliciitinns 233 

te.... 108 

loys 108 

oak 108 

124 

151 

32 

84 

84 

190 

71 

8 

8 

173 

98 

98 

98 

97 

189 

ing  station 189 

201 

187 

188 

113 188 

188 

112 

70 

- Ill 

93 

93 

ye 93 

ns 93 

al 93 

93 

36 

10,36 

38 

155 

18 


INDEX. 


219 


Pagn. 

Long  island 17,176,194 

point 176,192 

• island 176 

■ fog  signal 177 

life-saving  station 176 

West  point,  light 176 

light 177 

. Outerbay 177 

Tail  point Ill 

fog  signal Ill 

light Ill 

shoal Ill 

buoy Ill 

Lookout  point 47 

Lorain 160 

bar 160 

directions 160 

lights 160 

Lovatts  Bridge  light 203 

Lower  reach 139 

lights 139 

Lucas  channel 1 31 

Lucille  island 31 

Ludington 97 

har1)or 97 

directions 98 

fog  signiil 97 

life-saving  station 98 

lights 97 

Lyalisliurd 132. 

light 132 

Lynn  river 177 

Lyons  point ^ 185 

M. 

Mac  Oregor  channel 131 

Mackinac  City 54 

fog  signal 54 

light 54 

fort 58 

harbor 57 

anchorage 58 

buoy 57 

current 58 

directions. 57,58 

island 57 

light 58 

point,  old 54 

fog  signal 54 

light 54 

Strait 48 

islands  in 55 

north  short) 49 

shoals  in 55 

South  channel : 55 


Pn^o. 

Mackinac  Strait  soutli  shore 52 

town 57 

directions 57,58 

pilots 58 

tugs 58 

wharfage 58 

Madison  Parle  shoal 90 

buoy 90 

Magdalene  island 17 

anchorage 37 

spit  off 7 

Magnetic  reefs 130 

Main  channel,  Georgian  bay 131 

Dnck  island 202 

Maitland  port 177 

river 133 

Major  shoal 57 

buoy 57 

Maiden  fort 141 

Mamainse  point 36 

Mamajnda  lights 143 

shoals 143 

Manhattan  lights 41, 155 

Manistee 96 

directions 97 

fog  signal 97 

harbor 96 

lake 96 

life-saving  station 97 

lights 97 

r  i  ver 96 

Manistiquo 69 

river 69 

Manitoba  shoal 35 

Maniton  island 23,  38 

fog  signal 23 

light 23 

rocky  ilat 7 

Paynicu  shoal 62 

buoy 02 

Manitoulin  island 130 

Manitowoc 78 

directions 78 

dock 78 

fog  signal 78 

harbor 78 

lights 78 

shoals  off 78 

river 78 

Mnplo  island 36 

Marblehcud  life-saving  station 156 

light 157 

peninsula 157 

point 157 

Marine  city 137 


220 


IKDEX. 


PRgO. 

Marinette 109 

Marquette 26 

I'ay 26,50 

fogsignal 26 

island 50 

life-Having  Htation 26 

lights 26 

1  ightbonse,  rocks  east  of 8 

Martin  reef. 50 

buoy 50 

Mason  creek 124 

slioalsoff 124 

Massassauga  fort 182 

Maunieebay 154 

depths  in  channel 154 

directions 155 

lights 154,155 

straight  channel 154 

buoys 154 

river 154 

McCargoe  cove 37 

McGnlpin  point 54 

light 54 

McKay  mount 32 

McKellars  harbor ^...     34 

MoLeod  bay 52 

shoalsin 52 

Menagerie  island 38 

light 38 

shoals  ENE.  of 9 

Mendota 23 

light 23 

Monekannee 29,109 

Menominee 109 

directions no 

harbor no 

light 110 

river 109 

shoals 110 

Merida  shoal 45 

Miami  and  Erie  canal 145 

Mica  bay 35 

slioal 10,36 

Michael  bay 131 

point 131 

reef  oflf 131 

fog  signal 131 

light 131 

Michi^'.'in  city 104 

directions,  current 104 

life-saving  station 104 

lights 104 

island 33 

light 18 


Page. 

Michigan  island,  shoab  near 7 

lake.     (See  Lake  Michigan). 

Michipicoteu  harbor 35 

island 33 

fog  signal 39 

light 39 

shoalsnear 10 

—  river 35 

Middle  Bass  island 148 

Middle  bluff 106 

ground 152 

clearing  marks 153 

shoal 75,113 

huoy 75,114 

"land 25,119,152 

anchorage 120 

hnoy 120 

directions 120 

display  station 119 

fog  signal 152 

life-saving  station II9 

light 152 

shoals 119 

huoy 120 

Xeebish 43 

caution 43 

cut 43 

point 152 

™ef 169 

hnoy leg 

shoal Y2 

buoy 72 

wrecks 72 

Sister  island 151 

village 93 

Mille  Coqnins 69 

point 69 

shoal 69 

Mill  point 152 

reef 152 

Milk  river 140 

point 140 

Milwaukee gi 

hay go 

shoals 81 

buoy 81 

cribs 80 

currents gl 

directions gi 

docks 81 

- — fogsignal gi 

harbor go 

life-saving  station 81 

lights 80,81 

river 81 


INDEX. 


221 


Vnge, 

near 7 

ichigan). 

35 

38 

39 

89 

10 

35 

148 

106 

152 

153 

75,113 

75,114 

25,119,152 

120 

120 

120 

119 

152 

ion 119 

152 

119 

120 

43 

43 

43 

152 

169 

169 

72 

72 

72 

151 

93 

69 

69 

69 

152 

152 

140 

140 

81 

- 80 

81 

81 

80 

81 

81 

81 

61 

80 

81 

80.81 

81 


Page. 

Milwankee  tngs,  wharfage 81 

South 81 

Minnesota  point 11 

life-saving  station 11 

Misery  hay 165 

Mission  point 57,94 

light 94 

Mississanga  strait 130 

fog  signal 130 

light 130 

shoals  in 130 

Mitchelbay 140 

point 140 

Moffat  harbor 34 

Mohawk  bay 178 

anchorage 178 

island 178 

light 178 

Moira  river 203 

Mondors 21 

Monroe 153 

harbor 153 

caation 153 

directions 153 

light 153 

Montague ...  .  98 

Montreal  islac        36 

reef    «         10,36 

river 18,36 

shoal 10,36 

Monument  point Ill 

shoal 114 

buoy 114 

Moore  point 155 

Mooretown 137 

Moranhay,  East 51 

West 51 

Morgan  point 178 

Morgans  reef 90 

buoys 90 

Mosquito  point 152 

Mouill^e  point 153 

Moultonbay 178 

Mouse  island 149,156 

reef 149,156 

buoy 149,156 

Mndbay 74,192 

creek 192 

lake 46 

buoy 45 

Muddy  creek 175 

Murray  canal 202 

lights 203 

Mnskallonge  life-saving  station 28 

Moskalonge  bay 191 


Pago. 

Muskegon 99 

directions 100 

caution 100 

fog  signal 99 

harbor 99 

buoy 100 

lake 99 

shoals 100 

life-saviug  station 100 

lights 99 

river 99 

Muskoka  river 117 

Myles  shoal 206 

buoy 206 

N. 

Nauticoke  shoal 177 

Napunee 204 

river 203 

Navigation  of  the  lakes 6 

Navy  bay 206 

island 171 

Ned  point 44 

Neebish,  east,  lights 44 

middle 42 

Nemadji  river 11, 14 

New  Baltimore 140 

Found  shoal 192 

Mission  point 94 

river 127 

Newcastle 199 

light 199 

Newell's  wood  wharf 46 

Niagara 183 

fort 182 

life-saving  station 183 

light 183 

river  (Lake  Erie) 171 

buoys  at  entrance 169 

caution 170 

current 171 

lights 170 

narrows,  the 170 

note 170 

pilots 172 

(Lake  Ontario) 182,195 

bar 182 

current 183 

directions 183 

shoalsoff 182 

buoys 182 

reef 148,155 

buoy 148,155 

Nicholson  island 201 

point 200 


222 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Nigger  islnnd 204 

shoal 204 

'■ ligl»t 204 

Kiuo-fbot  sboal 73 

bnoy 73 

Nine-niilo point 43, 52, 187, 189, 194 

fogsignal 194 

light 43,194 

river 133 

Nipigonbay 34 

cantiou 34 

region 31 

river 34 

strait 34 

Nipissiiig  lake 117 

North  liar  lake 96 

Bass  island 148 

bay 74 

buoya 74 

shoals 74 

channel 12 

lights 13 

Fox  island 67 

Graham  shoal 51 

buoy 51 

hai'bor 22 

island 151 

shoal 151 


Mauitou  island 68 

life-saving  station 68 

wreck 68 

point 120 

Savage  island 36 

Twin  island 37 

spit  oflf 37 

Nortliport  bay 94 

shoals 94 

harbor 94 

point 94 

North  Unity. 95 

Northwest  shoal 129 

Nottawasaga  river 117 

Nut  island 205 

O. 

Oat  creek 81 

island 17 

point 126 

Oaklandshoal 00 

buoys 90 

Oak  Orchard  creek 184 

harbor 184 

caution 184 

directions 184 

light 184 


Page. 
Oakville iffj 

light 197 

Oconto  river no 

Ogden  poiot 199 

Ogontzbay 106 

Ohio  Central  Coal  Dock  light 12 

and  Erie  canal 145 

Olcott ig3 

channel 183 

harbor 153 

J'ght 183 

ro('k  west  of I83 

Old  Mission  point 94 

light 94 

Point  Mackinac 54 

fogsigual 54 

light 54 


Onderdouk 204 

Ontario  lake.    (See  Lake  Ontario). 

port 189 

Ontonagon jg 

lights 18 

river jg 

Oqneoc  river ng 

Orion  rock 127 

Oronto  bay ig 

Orville  town 69 

Oscar 21 

Oscoda 122 

display  station 123 

Oshawa 199 

harbor 199 

light 199 

Oswego 187 

directions igg 

fog  signal igs 

harl)or igg 

depths  in igg 

improvements 188 

life-saving  station I88 

lights 188 

river 187 

shoal  weat  of 137 

currents , 187 

Ottawa  point ^ 123 

Otter  head 35 

Outer  bay 176 

island 17 

anchorage 37 

fogsigual 17 

light.... 17 

shoals  near 7 

Pancake  shoal 10,36 

shoals 73 

buoy 73 

Owen  channel 181 


INDEX. 


223 


Page. 
...  197 
...  197 
...  110 
...  199 
...  106 
...  12 
. ..  145 
...  183 
...  183 
...  183 
. ..  183 
...  183 
...  91 
...  94 
..  54 
..  54 
..  54 
..  204 

..  189 
..  18 
..  18 
..  18 
..  118 
..  127 
..  18 
..  69 
..  21 
..  122 
..  123 
..  199 
..  199 
. .  199 
..  187 
..  188 
..  188 
..  188 
..  188 
..  188 
.  188 
.  188 
..  187 
..  187 
..  187 
.  123 
.  35 
.  176 
.  17 
.  87 
.  17 
.  17 
.   7 
10,36 
.  73 
.  73 
.  131 


P.  rage. 

Paliiimlos 30 

Faliuers  point 41 

—— buoy 44 

— range  lights 44 

Pancake  point 36 

——  shoal 36 

buoy 36 

— niiutinn 10,  36 

Pajis,  the 33 

Patent  bay 70 

Hhoals 70 

Parisian  island 29,36 

rocks  off 10,29,36 

Partridge  point 44, 121 

lights 44 

river 126 

Passage  island 38 

cantion 9 

fogsignal 38 

light .• 38 

Patterson  point 62, 69 

Paw  Paw  river 103 

Payment  doeks 44 

lights 44 

Peach  stone  reef 199 

Peacoek  point 177 

Peare  river 33 

Pel<^e  Pointe 174 

spit 174 

light 174 

Pelkieroef 62 

Peninsula  harbor 35 

directions 35 

light 35 

point 107, 191 

bnoy 107 

cantion 107 

light 107 

Penitentiary  shoal 206 

bnoy 206 

Pensankee  point 110 

shoal 110 

Pentwater 98 

directions 98 

harbor 98 

lake 98 

life-saving  station 98 

lights 98 

tugs 98 

Pequaming  point 24 

» spit  off 8 

Pdre  Marquette  lake 97 

Peshtigo  point 110 

river 110 

'—shoals 110 


Pngfl. 

Peshtigo  shoals  buoy 110 

Peter  point 201 

fog  signal 201 

light 201 

rock 199 

light 199 

Pic  island 35,38 

Pickards  wharf 68 

Pickering  harbor 198 

light 199 

Picnic  point 129 

Pictou 204 

Pictured  rocks 28 

Pie  island 32 

light 32 

rocks  SE.  of 9 

wharf 32 

Pig  point 205 

Pigeon  bay 31 

island 193 

fog  signal 193 

lights 193 

point 31 

caution 9 

river 31,126 

Pike  creek 83 

Pilgrim  river , . . .    21 

Pillar  point 191 

Pilot  island 45,73 

fogsignal 73 

lights 45,73 

shoal 73 

Pinconning  river 124 

Pine  lake 93 

river 51,9.3,124,137 

River  bay 31 

Pipe  island 46 

light 47 

Platte  river 95 

point 95 

Pleafiunt  point 189,202 

— light 202 

Plum  island 72 

buoy 72 

day  mark 72 

shoals 72 

Poereef 55 

buoy 56 

fogsignal 56 

light 56 

Point.    (See  proper  name.) 

ofWoods 46 

bnoy 45 

light« 45 

peninsula 191 


224 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Pointe  anx  Barques 126 

buoy 127 

■ display  station 127 

life-saving  station 127 

light 127 

Pinj 43,175 

Monill<;e 153 

Pelde 153,174 

island 152 

life-saving  station 152 

light 152 

spit 174 

fog  signal 174 

light 174 

wrecks  near 174 

Pnntiao  shoal 143 

buoy 143 

Poplar  point 106 

Porcupine  mountains 18 

Porphyry  point 33 

light 33 

rocks  west  of 9 

Port  Albert 133 

Arthur 33 

light 33 

signals 33 

Austin 125 

fog  signals 127 

light 126 

reef 126 

Port  bay 186 

Britain 199 

Bruce 176 

light 176 

Burwdl 176 

light 176 

Clark 133 

light 133 

Clinton 156 

harbor 156 

depthsin 156 

Colborne 178 

bar 179 

beacon 178 

directions 179 

fogsignal 179 

lights 178,179 

skoal 179 

Collier 47 

Credit 197 

light 197 

Crescent 125 

Dalhonsie 182,195 

fogsignal 182 

. lights 182 


Port  Dalhousie  shoal  off 182 

Dover 177 

light.. 177 

port  charges 177 

reefs 177 

Elgin 133 

light 133 

Granby 199 

Hendorson 190 

Hope 127,199 

harbor 199 

life-saving  station 199 

light 199 

signals 199 

Ilnron 136 

dock 136 

Maitland 177 

light 178 

Ontario 189 

Orchard 149 

point 149 

buoy 149 

Sowan 176 

life-saving  station 176 

Sanilac 129 

light 129 

Samia 136 

Stanley 176 

life-saving  station 176 

light 176 

Union 198 

Washington 79 

harbor 79 

directions 80 

lights 80 

wharfage,  tugs 80 

Portage  bay 31,70,131 

entry 8 

flatin 8 

lake 19,96 

canal 19 

directions 20,96 

fogsignal 20 

life-saving  station 20 

lights „..  20,96 

river 19,24 

improvements 19 

lights 20 

village 75 

Porte  des  Morta 73 

buoys 73 

caution 73 

current 73 

directions 73 

light 78 


INDEX. 


225 


182 

177 

177 

177 

177 

133 

133 

199 

190 

127,199 

199 

an 199 

199 

199 

136 

136 

177 

178 

189 

149 

149 

149 

176 

on 176 

129 

129 

136 

176 

sn 176 

176 

198 

79 

79 

80 

80 

80 

31,70,131 

8 

8 

19,96 

19 

20,96 

20 

itatioo 20 

20,96 

19,24 

19 

20 

75 

73 

73 

'73 

73 

73 

73 


Page. 

Porters  island 22 

Potter  reef 62,69 

Potters  island 204 

Pottohawk  point 176 

Poverty  island 70 

fogsignal 70 

light 70 

-■ passage 71 

shoal 71 

buoy 71 

Powells  point 27 

Presquelle.... 25 

harbor 

directions 119 

False 119 

fog  signal 118 

lights 119 

shoal 118 

peninsula 118 

fogsignal..... 118 

light 118 

Isle  bay 166 

light 165 

peninsula 164 

Presqa' He  harbor 199 

light 200 

Prinee  Edwards  bay 202 

island 200 

Providence  bay 131 

Pultneyville 185 

harbor 185 

Put  In  bay 149 

Pyramid  point 95 

Q- 

Qaarry  point 113 

shoal 113 

buoy 113 

Quebec  channel 14 

light. 15 

dock 15 

harbor 39 

fogsignal 39 

light 39 

shoals 39 

'■ — buoys 39 

Queenstown 182 

Quintebay 203 

carrying  place 200 

lights 204 

Rabbits  Back  peak 51 

Raby  Head 199 

Bacine 82 

1944— No.  108 15 


rage 

Kacine  buoys 82 

directJous 83 

fog  signal 82 

harbor 82 

life-saving  station 82 

lights 83 

point 82 

reef 82 

buoys 82 

signals 83 

Rainbow  cove 37 

Hains  island 42 

-aisin  river 153 

jpberry  island 17 

light 17 

Rattlesnake  island 149 

Raynolds  reef 55 

buoy 55 

Rawley  bay 74 

shoals 74 

buoy 74 

Rawleys  point 77 

Red  Bank 112 

bluflf 112 

Cliflf 17 

RedRiver  bluff 112 

Red  Sucker  Cove 9i 

Reeds  bay 193 

Rice  point 11 

lights 12 

Richards  reef 67 

Ricbmondville 129 

Rideau  canal 205 

Rifle  river 124 

Rochester.    (See  Chai  lotto) 185 

Rock  harbor 37 

island 30,71 

caution 9 

light 71 

passage 72 

shoals 72 

Rock  of  Ages 8 

shoals  near 8 

Rocky  island 37,70 

anchorage 37 

ahoals 7 

shoals 71 

Rogers  city...: 118 

directions 118 

— display  station 118 

Rond  island 120 

Rondeau  harbor 175 

current 175 

lights 175 

Boot  river 82 


226 


INDEX. 


Page, 

Koot  river  light 82 

lioso  shoal 65,63 

buoy 65,63 

caution 66 

RosH  port 34 

directioDH 34 

Kouge  river igg 

Ronudisland 46,57,107 

ligUts 45,57 

shoal 57 

buoy 57 

lake 93 

Rowan  port 176 

Rudder  Head  point 36 

Rush  lake 96 

Russell  island 139 

buoy 139 

lights 139 

8. 

Sable  point m 

buoy ;ili 

Sacketts  harbor 191 

directions ^...  191 

light 191 

Saddlebag  island 50 

Saginaw  bay 124 

buoys 125 

dangers 124 

directions 125 

eastshore 124 

light 126 

shoal 123 

west  shore 124 

City,  east 125 

west 125 

river 125 

buoys 126 

directions 126 

display  station 126 

improvements 125 

lights...; 126 

wreck 126 


Saginin  river 124 

Saint  Clair 137 

riatsoanal 138 

lights 139 

—  middle  ground ...  137 

—— buoys. .  137 

lake.    (See  Lake  St.  Clair). 

river 135,138 

caution 136 

directions 186 

northern  approach 135 

proposed  channel 135 


Saint  Clair  river  shoal 136 

buoy 136 

South  channel 138 

Helena  island 53 

buoy 62 

caution 53 

ligbt 53 

harbor 53 

— ' sboal 62,62 

buoy 62 

Ignace  channel 34 

island 34 

point 51 

Joseph 103 

directions 103 

foggigual 103 

harbor 103 

island 40 

life-saving  station 103 

light* 108 

river 103 

signal  station lOS 

Lawrence  river 193 

Louis  bay n  ig 

river n 

current H 

caution 13 

Martin  bay 50 

ilo 60 

island 71 

point 60 

shoals 71 

buoy 71 

Marys  Falls  canal 40 

lights 40 

river 40 

caution 43 

dir'^ctions 42, 43 

liKbts 41 

Canadian  canal 40 

buoys,  lights 41 

Vital  island 107 

point 49,107 

Salmon  crook 185 

island 205 

point 201 

light 201 

river 189,203 

Salt  point 29 

light 200 

Salter  island 34 

Sand  bay 36 

Beach 127 

harbor  of  refuge 127 

anchorage 128 


INDEX. 


227 


Vtgt. 

136 

136 

Duel 138 

52 

62 

52 

52 

52 

62,62 

62 

34 

34 

51 

103 

103 

103 

103 

40 

ion 103 

108 

103 

103 

192 

11,16 

11 

11 

12 

50 

50 

71 

60 

71 

71 

40 

40 

40 

43 

42,43 

41 

anal 40 

,  lights....     41 

107 

49,107 

185 

205 

201 

201 

189,203 

29 

200 

34 

36 

127 

127 

128 


Page. 

Sand  Beach  directioiM 128 

display  station 128 

fog  signal 128 

in>provementH 127 

life-saving  station 128 

lights 128 

island 16,37 

anchorage 37 

light 16 

slioalwater 7 

point 24,27, 108, 124, 167 

light 24,27 

shoal 27 

buoy 27,108 

Sandusky 157 

bay 157 

currents 167 

channel 167 

buoys 167 

directions 168 

lights 163,159 

river 157 

Sandy  bay 201 

islands 36 

caution 10,36 

point 24 

spit 8 

Sanilac 129 

light 129 

Sarnia 136 

Saogatuok 102 

Saugeen  light 132 

peniusnla 181 

river 132 

Saukriver 79 

Saukahead 25 

SaultSte.  Marie 40 

canal 40 

lights 11 

Saunders  point 108 

buoy 108 

shoals 108 

Sawyers  harbor 113 

Scammon  barber 60 

Scare  Crow  island 121 

Scotch  Bonnet  island 202 

light 202 

Scott  middle  ground 142 

bmoys 142 

point...  149,155 

shoal 149,156 

buoy 149,156 

Scotts  point 69 

Search  bay 60 

Sebewaing 125 


I'age. 

Sebewaing  river 126 

Seiches 2 

Selkirk  point 178 

Seneca  shoal 168 

buoy 168 

Seul  Choix  point 69 

fog  signal 69 

light 69 

Seven-mile  point 93 

Severn  river in 

Shannonville 203 

Sheboygan 79 

directions 97 

fog  signal 79 

life-saving  station 79 

lights .78,79 

reef 78 

buoys 79 

river 79 

signals 79 

tugs 79 

Shelter  bay 26 

Sheridan  point 152 

Sherwood  point 112 

fogsignal 113 

light 113 

shoals 113 

Shiawassee  river 125 

Shiphouse  point 191 

Shoal  bay 199 

Shot  point 26 

spit 8 

Silver  creek 78,167 

islet 33 

Simcoe  island 194 

Sinunonsreef 62 

fogsignal 63 

light 63 

Simpson  island 84 

Siskiwitbay 16,37 

Sister  bay ne 

bluff 116 

islands 116 

shoals 116 

Six-mile  point  lights 42 

Sixteen-mile  creek 197 

Six  Town  point 190 

Skilligallee  light 64 

Slate  islands 34,38 

shoalsoff 10 

Sleeping  Bear  hill 95 

point 95 

Smithfield  Bridge  light 203 

Sm'-ky  point 185 

Snake  island 112,194 


S!l 


228 


INDEX. 


Snake  iHland  direotiona 194 

light 194 

Hhoal 194 

Snow  Shoe  point 190 

SodiiH  point 186 

Soiij.  Iiarbor 201 

Soiitli  Unas  i(*lunil 149 

bay 27,202 

point 189,201 

light 201 

SoHth  channel IH,  138,192 

directions 138 

lights 138,139 

Chicago 91 

Fox  island 68 

* buoy 67,68 

cantion 68 

fogsignal 67 

light 67 

shoals 67 

South  Graham  shoal 51 

buoy 51 

harbor 22 

haven 102 

directions 102 

caution 102 

harbor 102 

life-saving  station 102 

light 102 

signals 102 

Mauitou  island 68 

fogsignal 68 

harbor 68 

light 68 

Park  shoal 90 

bnoy 90 

South  Passage,  Lake  Erie 150, 156 

shoals  in 150,156 

point 120 

river 106 

Sandy  island 36 

Twin  island 37 

anchorage 37 

shoals 7 

Southanipton 132 

harbor 132 

directions 133 

improvements 132 

lights 132 

Southeast  Bend 139 

lights 139 

shoal 147,169,175 

buoy 169 

South  Park  shoal 90 

— — buoy 90 


P«ge. 

Sonthport  light 83 

Spar  island 31 

Spectacle  reef 55 

buoy 55 

fogsignal 56 

light 66 

Spider  islands 74 

flats 74 

Spring  mills 122 

Square  Island 171 

Squaw  island 66 

buoy 66 

fogsignal 65 

light 65 

shoals 66 

point 108 

Squirrel  island 44,139 

buoy 44,130 

shoal 139 

bnoy 138 

Stagisland 137 

buoys 137 

caution 137 

Stanley  port 176 

Stannard  rock 25 

beacon 26 

fogsignal 26 

light 26 

Star  Island 139 

Starve  island 149,166 

reef 149,156 

buoy 149,156 

Stoamboat  island 16 

Stevens  hill 112 

Stockton  island 17 

anchorage 87 

Stokes  bay 131 

light 132 

Ctony  creek 189 

island 189 

lake 98 

point 106,153,189,192 

light 189 

Straiitof  Mackinac 48 

rcurrent 58 

directions 67 

islandsin 55 

north  shore 49 

routes I 48 

shonlsiu 55 

South  channel 56 

shore 62 

Mississanga ISO 

fogsignal 130 

light. 130 


INDEX. 


229 


Fig*. 

83 

31 

B6 

55 

56 

66 

74 

74 

122 

171 

65 

65 

65 

65 

65 

108 

44,139 

44,130 

139 

139 

137 

137 

137 

176 

25 

26 

26 

26 

139 

149,166 

149,156 

149,156 

16 

112 

17 

37 

131 

132 

189 

189 

08 

)6, 153, 189, 192 

189 

48 

58 

57 

55 

49 

48 

55 

b1 55 

, 52 

130 

130 

130 


Page. 

Btrait  of  MiuiBsaitga  shoaU 130 

Strawberry  islands 116, 171 

buoys 115 

channel 115, 171 

—— shoals 115 

Strong  iitlnnd 50 

Sturgeon  bay 112 

buoys,  caution 114 

caution 112 

directions 114 

ioit,  signal 113 

lights 113 

shoals 113 

canal 75 

directions 76 

fog  signal 75 

note 76 

life-saving  station 76 

lights.... 75,112 

harbor  of  refuge 75 


point 122,168 

— life-saving  station 122 

light 122 

Snckerrivor 28 

Sugar  inland 44,120,148 

rapids 43 

Sugarloaf  point 178 

— ^reef 179 

Sulphur  island 121 

Summer  island 70 

Superior  bay 10, 14 

buoys 14 

hghta 15 

city 14 

fog  signal 15 

light 14 

pilots 16 

routes 16 

lake,    (See  Lake  Superior.) 

West 16 

dock 16 


Surveyors  reef 50 

Suttons  bay 94 

point 94 

Swan  river 118 

Swedeton  creek 21 

Sweets  point 46 

buoy 46 

light 46 


Table  blnflf 116 

Table :  directions  and  distances,  Lake 

Erie 173 


I'njfe. 
Table :  directions  and  distauces.L.tku 

Ontario 169 

Talfords  creek 137 

Ta(|uanienon  island 29 

river 29 

Tawas 123 

East 123 

bay 123 

buoys 123 

directions 123 

display  station 123 

life-saving  station 123 

point 123 

buoys 123 

light 123 

gpitoff 123 

. wreck  off 123 

Tecuniseh  shnal 177 

Telegraph  inland 204 

light 204 

Torracti  bay 34 

point 30 

Texas  - 189 

life-saving  station 189 

Thames  river 140 

lights 140 

The  Bass  Islands 148 

Chickens 151 

Dummy 175 

light 175 

Thirty-mile  point 184 

light 184 

Thomas  bay 131 

Thompson  island 31 

Three-mile  bay 191 

town 191 

Thunder  bay 32,120 

. anchorages 120 

directions. 32, 122 

island 120 

.'lisplay  station 120 

fog  signal 120 

life-saving  station 120 

'■ light 120 

river 120 

■ directions 122 

— fog  signal 122 

■ improvements 120 

light 120 

signals 122 

cape 32 

: fogsignal 32 

light 32 

rocks  SE.  of 9 

Tibbetts  point 191 


230 


iimEz. 


Page. 

Tibb«tta  point  ll^ht 191 

Timber  island 201 

Tittabii wosMce  river 126 

Tobin  liarl)or 37 

reef 50 

Todd  harbor 37 

Toledo 163 

dock 163 

Tooawitnda 172 

channel 172 

buoys 172 

harbor 172 

isldnd 172 

Topsail  inland 44 

caution 44 

lights 44 

Torch  bay 21 

lake 21 

Toronto 197 

buoys 198 

directions,  East  channel 198 

West  channel 198 

fog  signals 197 

harbor 197 

regulations 198 

life-saving  station 198 

lights 197,198 

observatory 197 

Trail  creek 104 

Train  bay 26 

island 26 

shoals 8 

point 26 

shoals 8 

Traverse  bay 59 

city 94 

island 24 

shoal  water 8 

point 23,201 

light 201 

Trenton 203 

signals 204 

Trent  river 203 

Trident  point 204 

Trout  bay 27 

island 65 

point 27 

river 118 

Tuckers  point 94 

Turtle  island 154 

ligbt 154 

Twelve-mile  creek 192 

Twenty-mile  creek 167 

Twin  island,  shoals  off 7 

^— river 77 


Psge. 

Twin  river  fog  signal 77 

liKhts 77 

point 77 

Two  creeks 77, 175 

Harbors 39 

fog  signal 30 

lights 80 

■ Heart  river 28 

life-saving  station 28 

Islands  river 30 

rocks  off 9 

Rivers 77 

directions 78 

life-saving  station 78 

light 77 

tugs 78 


Ulao 80 

Union  bay i8 

port 198 

V. 

Valley  creek 24 

Van  Biiren  point 166 

Vermilion  point 28 

• life-saving  station 28 

shoal  off ■    28 

Vermillion 159 

river 159 

bar 169 

directions 160 

light 159 

Vesey  cape 202 

Vesuvius  point 191 

Victoria  island 31 

light 31 

rooks  SW.  of 9 

Vidal  shoal 41 

Vienna  shoal 64 

buoy 64 

Vincent  cape 192 


Walkerpoint 131 

Washburn 17 

lights 17 

Washington  harbor 37, 72 

island 72 

Wangoshance  island 54, 62 

point 54,92 

16-foot  ahoal 55 

buoy...- 55 

shoal 64,62 

caution 64 


TNDEX. 


281 


vat* 

77 

77 

77 

77,176 

30 

30 

80 

28 

ation 28 

30 

0 

77 

78 

» 78 

77 

78 

80 

18 

198 

24 

166 

28 

28 

;    28 

169 

159 

169 

160 

159 

202 

191 

31 

31 

9 

41 

64 

64 

192 

131 

17 

17 

37,72 

72 

54,62 

54,92 

, 65 

55 

64,62 

54 


I'ngo. 

WaiiifORhanro  Rbonl  foi;  Klgnsl 56 

liijlit 65,62 

WaiikeKitn M 

(1iro<3tionf< M 

hnrhor S4 

liRlltH H4 

V/anpooB  ixlanil 202 

WunswiiiiKoiiing  l>ay Ill 

WiuoIyBhonl 73,  KiH,  178 

1,i,„y 73,168,178 

VVeh'onio  jhIiiiiiIn 32 

Welland  cimnl 179 

—— to  Oapo'V'iiu'ent 181 

Kingston 181 

WellerH  Iniy 200 

bar 200 

(liri'ctionH 200 

lijrht 200 

WcllinKton  201 

West  channel 17 

Dnliith 16 

harbor 150 

lake 201 

Moraii  bay 51 

point 201 

Sister  island 147 

light 148 

Superior  16 

Twin  river    77 

Whaleback  shoal 108 

buoys 108 

Whiskey  island 65 

shoah« 66 

bnoy 65 

Whitby 199 

light 199 

Whitofishbay 29,75,80 

point 28,75 

— fog  signal 29 

light 28 

shoal 75 

buoy 75 

Whitehall 98 

White  lake 98 

shoals 99 

river 98 

directions 99 

harbor 99 

life-saving  station 99 

lights 99 

rook 128 


PafA 

White  rook  point 128 

town 128 

shoal 63 

bnoy KJ 

fog  signal B3 

light 03 

W hi t«'H  buy 190 

Whitestono  point 124 

Wicked  point 201 

light 201 

Wiggins  point •. ..  70 

slioal 70 

WlUiniii  shoal 202 

WillianiH  island 26 

landing 27 

shoals 8 

bnoy 27 

Willow  rivor 127 

wharf l*?? 

Wilson l,o 

bay 192 

harbof ; 183 

island 34 

point _? 

Wind  point 62 

lights 82 

Windmill  point 141,178 

lights 141 

Winter  point 43 

lights 45 

WisconHiu  point 15 

Wolfe  island 194 

Wood  island  , 26 

shoal 8 

Wood  tick  island 137 

shoals 187 

l>uoy8 138 

Wright  island 37 

T 

Yeo  channel 131 

York  island 17 

spit 7 

Yorkshire  islr  nd 202 

Youngsiovn 183 

Z. 

Zela  point 56 

shoal 56 

buoy 56 


LIST  OF  HYDROGRAPIIIC  OFFICE  PCBLICATIONS,  ETC. 


vo. 


TITLE   OF   BOOK. 


PniCE. 


22 


45 


99 


100 


104 


64 


73 


78 


23 


25 


102 


105 


16 


NORTH  ATLANTIC   OCEAN. 

General  Examination  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  By  Capt.  Charles 
Philippe  De  Kerhallet.    Translated  by  Capt.  R.   ll.   Wynian, 

U.S.N.    8vo.    1870.    llydrographic  Office 

Supplement  No.  1.    1886.    Hydrographic  Office 

General  Directions  for  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  From  the  French  of 
F.  Labrosae.  Second  edition.  Translated  by  Lieut.  Commander 
J.  B.  Coghlan,  U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1873.    Hydrographic  Office 

Nova  Scotia,  Bay  of  Fundy,  and  South  Shorn  of  (iulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence to  Miramithi  Bay.    Compiled  by  R.  H.  Orr.    8vo.    1891. 

Hydrographic  Office 

Supplemen";.    1896.     Hydrographic  Office 

Gulf  and  River  St.  Lawrence  and  Cape  Breton  Island,  including 
Cape  Breton,  Magdalen,  and  Anticosti  Islands.    Compiled  by 

R.H.  Orr.    8vo.    1891.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement..  1894.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Depths  that  Can  be  Carried  into  the  Harbors  and  Anchorages 
on  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  Coasts  of  the  United  States.  Prepared 
by  Gnstave  Herrle.    (Pamphlet.)    1893.    Hydrographic  Office... 

The  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean  Sea. 
Vol.  I.    The  West  India  Islands,  including  the  Bahama  Banks 
and  Islands,  and  the  Bermuda  Islands.    Third  edition.    Com- 
piled by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    189^     Hydrographic  Office... 
Supplement.    Third  edition.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean  Sea. 
Vol.  II.  The  Coast  of  the  Mainland  from  Key  West,  Florida, 
U.  S.,  to  the  Orinoco  River.  Venezuela,  with  the  Adjacent  Islands, 
Cays,  and  Banks.  Third  edition.  Revised  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N. 
8vo.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador.  Compiled  by  Lieut.  W.  W.  Gil- 
patrick  and  Ensign  John  Gibson,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1884.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador.  Supplement.  8vo.  1886.  Com- 
piled by  Licit.  R.  G.  Davenport  and  Ensign  John  Gibson,  U.  8.  N. 

Hydrographic  Office '• 

Supplement  No.  2.    1891.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  No.  3.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

Winds,  Currents,  and  Navigation  of  tho  Gulf  of  Cadiz,  the  Western 
Coast  of  the  Spanish  Peninsula,  aud  the  Strait  of  Gibraltar,  by 
Capt. B. H.  Wyman, U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1870.    Hydrographic  Office... 

General  Examination  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  By  Capt.  A.  Le 
Gra«,  I.  F.  N.  Translated  by  Capt.  R.  H.  Wyman,  U.  S.  N.  8vo. 
1870.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Azores,  Madeiras,  Salvages,  Canaries,  and  Cape  Verde  Islands. 
Second  edition.  Revised  by  R.  C.  Kay.  8vo.  1892.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office - 

Supplement.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office 

West  Coast  of  Africa.    From  Cape  Spartel  to  Cape  Agulhas,  in- 
cluding the  Islands  in  Bight  of  Biafra,  Ascension,  St.  Helena, 
Tristan  da  Cuuha,  and  Gongh  lalr^nds.    Second  edition.    Com- 
piled by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1893.    Hydrographic  Office. . . . 
Supplement.     1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

Memoir  of  the  Dangers  rnd  Ice  in  the  North  Atlantic.  (Pam- 
phlet.)   1868.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

233 


2.00 
.10 


2.00 


1.50 
.20 


1.50 
.10 


.25 


1.50 
.20 


L50 
LOO 


.60 
.20 
.20 


1.00 
2.00 


.80 
.10 


L50 
.10 

.20 


234  LIST  OF   HYDROGBAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS. 

Lilt  of  Hydrographio  Office publicationa,  etc. — Contiuued. 


NO. 


93 


54 
65 


58 


84 


96 


41 


412* 


41a 


92 


20 


TITIJE  OF   BOOK. 


PRICE. 


85 


NORTH  ATLANTIC  OCEAN— Continued. 

Ire  and  Ice  Movements  in  North  Atlantic  Ocean.  By  Ensign  Hneli 
Kodiuau,  U.  S.  N.    (Pamphlet.)    1890.    Hydrogiaphio  Office. .... 

SOUTH  ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 

East  Coast  of  South  America.  From  the  Orinoco  River  to  Ca,.e  Vir- 
gins,  including  Falkland,  South  Georgia,  Sandwich,  and  South 
Shetland  Islands.     Second  edition.    Compiled  by  R.   C.  Rav. 

U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1894.     Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office 

Navigation  of  the  Strait  of  Magellan.  Translated  from  the  French 
hy  Commodore  J.  C.  P.  de  Kraflit  and  Commander  William  Gib- 
son, U.  S.  N.    (Pamphlet.)    188.3.     Hydrographic  Office 

Remarks  by  Capt.  M.  A.  Lelf-vre,  of  the  French  Navv,  on  the  voy- 
age of  the  Vaudreuil  through  Patagoniau  Channels  and  Magellan 
Strait.  Translated  by  Lieut.  George  M.  Totten,  U.  S.  N.  (Pam- 
phlet.)   1874.    Hydrographic  Office 


PACIFIC  OCEAN. 

General  Examination  of  tlio  Pacific  Ocean.    By  Capt.  Charles  Phil- 
ippe De  Kerhallet,  French  Imperial  Navy,    Translated  under  the 
direction  of  Commodore  Charles  Henry  Uavis,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1867 
Supplement  No.  1.    1886.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Navigation  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Translated  from  the  French 
of  Mons.  F.  Labrosse,  by  Lieut.  J.  W.  Miller,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1874. 
Hydrographic  Office.    Republished  1893 

The  West  Coast  of  Soutli  America,  including  Magellan  Strait,  Tierra 
del  Fuego,  and  the  Outlying  Islands.  .Second  edition.  Compiled 
by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.    8vo.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office..:.... 

West  Coast  of  Mexico  and  Central  America,  from  the  United  States 
to  Panama,  including  the  Gulfs  of  California  and  Panama.  Sec- 
ond edition.  Compiled  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1893.  Hy- 
drographic Office 

Supplement.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office..  ......'.*."..',..",.'.". . 

The  Coast  of  British  Columbia.  From  Juan  de  FncaStrait  to  Port- 
land Canal,  including  Vancouver  and  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 
Compiled  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.   S.  N.    8vo.    1891.    Hydrographic 

Office 

Supplement.    Third  edition.    1895.    Hydrographic  Office.!!! 

List  of  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean.    8yo.    1871. 

Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  No,  2.    1891.    Hydrographic  Office!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 

Supplement  to  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean.  Com- 
piled and  arranged  by  Commander  William  Gibson,  U.  8.  N.  8vo. 
1880.     Hydrographic  Office 

List  of  Reported  Dangers  in  the  South  Pacific  Ocean.  Compiled 
and  arranged  by  Lieut.  J.  E.  Pillsbury,  U.  S.  N.  8vo.  1879.  Hy- 
drographic) Office ____ 

Supplement.     li~"i.    Hydrographic  Office !!.!!!!!!!!!!!! 

Ice  and  Ice  MovementM  in  Bering  Sea  and  tha  Arctic  Basin.  By 
Ensign  E.  Simpson,  U.  S.  N.  (Pamphlet.)  1890.  Hydrographic 
Office 


Supplement  No.  2  to  Directory  for  Boring  Sea  and  Coast  of  Alaska! 
1895.    Hydrographic  Office 


INDIAN  OCEAN. 

Sailing  Directions  of  the  Indian  Ocean,  the  Winds,  Monsoons,  Cur- 
rents, and  Passages,  including  also  the  Java  Sea,  Suln  Sea,  Ara- 
fura  Sea,  and  the  Philippine  Islands.    Compiled  by  Lieut.  F.  E. 

Sawyer,  U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1887.    Hydrographic  Office 

Revised  Supplement.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 


$0.20 


1.50 
.10 


,20 


,20 


L50 
,10 


L50 


1.50 
.10 


L60 
.20 

LOO 
.16 


LOO 


LOO 
.15 


.20 
.20 


LOO 
.20 


LIST  OP   HYDROGRAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS. 
List  of  Bydrographio  Office  publications,  e/o.— Contiuued. 


235 


PRICE. 

Kn  Hugh 
fllce 

a,.e  Vir- 
d  South 
C.  Ray, 

$0.20 
1.50 

.10 

>  French 
am  Oib- 

.20 

the  voy- 

lagellan 

(Pam- 

.20 

les  Phil- 
nder  tbo 
o.    1867. 

1.50 
10 

French 
9.    1874. 

1.50 

t,  Tierra 
onipiled 
a 

d  States 
a.    Sec- 
ts.   Hy- 

1.50 

toPort- 
lalands. 
graphic 

.10 
1.60 

)flace.... 
.    1871. 

.20 
1  00 

.15 

Com- 
t.    8vo. 

9mpiled 
9.    Hy. 

1.00 
1.00 

in."  By' 
fifraphio 

18,  Cur- 
sa,  Ara- 
t.  F.  E. 

.15 

.20 
.20 

1.00 
.20 

NO. 


24 


108 


108 

Part  III 

Supp. 

108 

Part  III 

Supp. 

108 
Part  IV 


30 
31 

32 


72 

9 

13 

17 
71 

106 

66 

57 
90 
91 


TITLK  OF  BOOK. 


PRICK. 


INDIAN  OCEAN— Continued. 

General  Examination  of  Indian  Ocean,  with  Directions  for  the  Navi- 
gation of  Torres  Straits,  ttc.  By  Capt.  Charles  Philippe  De  Ker- 
fiallet,  I.  F.  N.  Translated  by  Capt.  R.  H.  Wyman,  U.  S.  N.  8vo. 
1870.    Hydrographic  Oflice 


LAKES. 

Sailing  Directions  for  the  Great  Lakes  and  Connecting  Waters. 

Second  edition.     Revised  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  8.  N.     8vo.    1896. 

Hydiographio  Oflice 

Sailing  Directions  for  Lake  Huron,  Straits  of  Mackinac,  3t.  Clair  and 

Detroit  Rivers  and  l^ake  St.  Clair.    Prepared  by  Lieut.  D  H. 

Mahan,  U.  S.  N.,  assisted  by  R.  C.  Ray,  U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1895. 

Hydrographic  Office 

Sailing  Directions  for  North  Channel  of  Lake  Huron  and  Georgian 

Hay.    Prepared  by  Lient.  D.  H.  Mahan,  U.  £  N.,  assisted  by  R.  (\ 

Ray,  U.S.  N.    8vo.    1895.    Hydrographic  Oflice 

Sailing  Directions  for  Lake  Erie  ana  Lake  Ontario^  St.  Clair  and 

Detroit  Rivers,  and  Lake  St.  Clair.    Prepared  by  Lieut.  D.  H. 

Mahan,  U.  8.  N.,  assisted  by  R.  C.  Raj,  U.  8.  N.    8vo.    1896. 

Hydrographic  Oflice 


LIGHT  LISTS. 

List  of  Lights  (No.  1)  of  N^rth  and  South  America  (excepting  the 
United  States),  including  the  West  Indies  and  Pacific  Islands. 
Compiled  by  Boyntou  Leach.    4to.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office.. 

List  of  Lights  (No.  2)  of  South  and  East  Coasts  of  Africa  and  the 
East  Indies,  including  the  East  India  Islands,  China,  Japan, 
Australia,  Tasmania,  and  New  Zealand.  Compiled  by  Boynton 
Leach.    4to.    1896.    Hydrographic  Office 

List  of  Lights  (No.  3)  of  the  West  Coasts  of  Africa,  Europe,  and  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  including  the  Adriatic,  the  Black  Sea,  and  the 
Sea  of  Azof.  Compiled  by  Boynton  Leach.  4to.  1895.  Hydro- 
graphic  Office 


NAVIGATION  BOOKS. 

List  of  (Geographical  Positions.  By  Lient.  Commander  F.  M.  Green, 
U.8.N.    4to.    1883.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

The  New  American  Practical  Navieator.  liy  Nathaniel  Bowditch, 
LL.  D.    8vo.    Edition  of  1896.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Bowditob's  Ueeful  Tables.  8vo.  Edition  of  1896.  Bureau  of  Navi- 
gation   , 

Projection  Tables.    8vo.    1869.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  Latitude  between  61^  N.  61°  S.  By 
Lients.  Seaton  Scbrocder  and  W.  H.  H.  Southerland,  U.  8.  N.  4to. 
Edition  of  1893.    Hydrographic  Office 

Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  latitude  between  40°  N.  and  50° 

N.    For  the  Great  Lakes.    4to.     1894.     Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  to  106.    Equation  of  Time  for  the  vears  1894,  1895, 
1896,  and  1897 

Arctic  Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  latitude  between  70°  and 
80°.  Prepared  by  Lieuts.  Seaton  Schroeder  and  Richard  Wain- 
wright,  U.  S.  N.    12mo.    1881.    Hydrographic  Office 

Tables  for  Finding  the  Distance  of  an  Object  by  two  Bearings. 
(Pamphlet.)    1874.    Hydrographic  Office 

The  Development  of  Great  Circlo  Sailing.  By  G.  W.  Littlehales. 
8vo.    1889.    Hydrographic  Office 

Table  of  Meridianul  Parts  for  the  Terrestrial  Spheroid,  Compres- 
sion  j^^ns.  By  G.  W.  Littlehales  and  J.  S.  Siobert.  3vo.  1839. 
Hydrographic  Office 


$2.00 


LOO 
LOO 

LOO 

.25 
.25 
.25 


.75 

2.25 

L26 
L50 

4.25 
.50 
.10 

.80 

.20 

LOO 

1.20 


236  LIST  OP  HYDROOBAPHIC  OPPICB  PUBLICATIONS. 

Lilt  of  HydrograpMo  Office  puhlinatioiu,  «te.— Continued. 


NO. 


109 

109a 

111 


77 


TITLK  OF  BOOK. 


101 


87 


110 

65 
65a 
656 
76 

97 


94 


NAVIGATION  BOOKS— Continued. 

ContribntioHB  to  Terrestrial  MaRnotism— The  Variation  of  the 
Compass.  Compiled  by  Lient.  Channcey  Thomas,  U.  8.  N.  8vo 
1894.    Hyrtrographic  OfiSce 

Contributions  to  Terrestrial  Magnetism— The  "Variation  "of  "the 
Compass.  Compiled  by  G.  W.  Littlehales,  C.  E.  8vo.  1895. 
HTdrographio  Office 

Tables  showing  the  Local  Mean  Tinie"ortheSu"n'8*Vi8ible 'Rising 
and  Setting  for  Each  Degree  of  Latitude  between  60°  N.  and  60* 
8.,  and  for  Each  Degree  of  the  Sun's  Declination.  Prepared  by 
Ensign  George  Wood  Logan,  U.  S.  N.    4to.    1896.    Hydrographic 


METEOROLOGICAL. 

Practical  Hints  in  regard  to  West  India  Hurricanes.    Bv  Lient. 

v^>Vl?'"''^-®-^V*^'-    (Pan'PW**-)    Hydrographic  Office.... 
Nautical  Monograph  No,  5,    The  Great  Storm  off  the  Atlantic  Coast 

ot  the  Unit«d  States,  March  11-14,  1888.    By  Everett  Harden. 

U. 8. N.    1888.    Hydrographic  Offlci 


SURVEYS. 

The  Methods  and  Results  of  the  Survey  of  the  West  Const  of  Lower 
^^VrS[°'*  ^y  *'**'  Officers  of  the  U.  8.  S.  nanger  during  the  season 
of  18^  auft  1890.  By  Lieut.  O.  W.  Lowry,  U.  8.  N.V  and  G.  W 
Littlehales.    8vo,    1892.    Hydrographic  Office ....,, 

SIGNALS. 

International  Signal  Code.  Revised  and  corrected  to  1894,  includ- 
ing the  semaphore  and  storm  signal  service  of  the  maritime  coun- 
tries, the  life-saving  service  and  time  ball  system  of  the  United 
States.    8vo.    1894.    Bureau  of  Navigation.... 


PRICK. 


MISCELLANEOUS  PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Gulf  Stream.  By  Lieut.  Commander  .John  E.PillBbnrr.U.  8  N 
(Pamphlet.)    1894.     Hydrographic  Office 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Differences  of  "Lon"jt'i'- 
tude  in  the  West  Indies  and  Central  America.  By  Lieut.  Com- 
mander F.M.Green,  U.S.  N,    4to.    1877.    Bureau  o^  Navigation. 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Differences  of  I^niti- 
tude  on  the  East  Coast  of  South  America.  By  Lieut.  Commander 
F.  M.  Green,  U.  8.  N.    4to.    1880.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Keport  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longitude  in  the 
East  IndiM,  China,  and  Japan.  By  Lient.  Commander  F.  M. 
Green,  y.  S.N.    4to.    1881-&.    Bureau  of  Navigation 

Kwort  of  Telejfraphic  Determinations  of  Longitudes  in  Mexico. 
Central  America,  and  West  Coast  of  South  America.  By  Lieut 
Commander  C.  H.  Davis,  Lieuts.  J.  A.  Norris  and  Charles  Laird, 
U.  S.  N.    4to.    1885.     Bureau  of  Navigation 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longiude's'in'MMi'c'o"' 
Central  America,  the  West  Indies,  and  on  the  North  Coast  of 
South  America,  with  the  Latitudes  of  the  Several  Stations.  By 
Lieuts.  .1.  A.  Norris  and  Charles  Laird,  U.  8.  N.  To  which  is 
appended  a  Report  on  Magnetic  Observatione  in  Mexico  and  the 
West  Indies,  ^y  Lieut.  Charles  Laird  and  Ensigns  J.  H.  L. 
Holoombe  and  L.  M.  Garrett,  U.  S.  N.  4to.  1891.  Bureau  of 
Navigation 

^^^'ti"*^**^?  I>»teniational  Met^rolc"sio"c"oni^"arp"a"ri8,""l'm 
By  Lieut.  Aaron  Wwd,  U.  8.  N.    (Pamphlet.!    1890 


(Pamphlet.)    18! 
'  Not  for  sale. 


$1.00 
1.00 

.30 

.10 


(*) 


3.00 


.10 


(•) 
(*) 
(•) 

C) 


(•) 


.20 


LIST  OF  HYDBOGRAPHIC   OFFICE   PUBLICATIONS. 

LUt  of  Eydrograskio  Office  pubHoationa,  eto.— Coutinuod. 


237 


PRICK. 


NO. 


TITLK  OF   UOOK. 


$1.00 
1.00 

.30 

.10 

(*) 


MISCELLANEOUS  PUBLICATIONS-  Continued. 

95  The  Average  Form  of  Isolated  Submarine  Peaks,  and  the  interval 
which  should  obtain  between  deep-sen  soimdings  taken  to  dis 
close  the  character  of  the  bottuin  of  the  ocean.     By  G.   W. 

Littlehales.    8vo.    1890.    Hydrosniphic  Office 

98  Report  on  Uniform  System  for  .Spelliug  Foreign  Geographic  Names. 
By  Lieut.  C.  M.  McCarteney,  U.  8.  N.,  Boynton  Leacli,  and 
Gustavo  Herrle.    (Puuiphlct.)    1891.     Hydrographic  office 

lOS  Submarine  Cables ;  Instruments  and  Implements  Employed  in  Cable 
Surveys;  Theory  of  Cable  Laying;  3peciti cations  and  Costs; 
Babmarine  Cable  Systems  of  the  World.  Prepared  by  G.  W. 
Littlehales.    8vo.    1892.    Hydrographic  Office 

107  Wrooks  and  Derelicts  in  the  North  Atlantic  Ocean.  1887  to  1893, 
inclusive.    4to.    1894.    Hydrographic  Office 


PRICE. 


$0.70 

C) 

1.00 

C) 


*  ITot  for  aale. 


(*) 


3.00 


.10 


(•) 


(*) 


(•) 


C) 


C) 


.20 


AGENTS  FOR  THE  SALE  OF  HYDROGRAPHIC  OFFICE  CHARTS, 
SAILING  DIRECTIONS,  ETC. 


AGENTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Geo.  B.  Carpenter  &  Co.,  Nos.  202-208  South  Water  street,  Chicago,  111. 

Rand,  McNally  &  Co.,  Nos.  166-168  Adams  street,  Chicago,  111. 

H.  Channon  &  Co.,  Nos.  24  and  26  Market  street,  Chicago,  111. 

The  Marine  Kecovd  Publishing  Co.,  No.  308  Royal  Insurance  Building,  Chicago,  111. 

The  M.  I.  Wilcox  Cordage  Supply  Co.,  Nos.  210-216  Water  street,  Toledo,  Ohio. 

Burrows  Brothers'  Company,  Nos.  23-27  Euclid  avenue,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

The  Marine  Rocord  Publishing  Co.,  Western  Reserve  Building,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

The  Marine  Review,  No.  516  Perry  Paine  Building,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

Wm.  J.  Sell,  No.  830  State  street,  Erie,  Pa. 

H.  D.  Edwards  &  Co.,  Nos.  16-24  Woodward  avenue,  Detroit,  Mich. 

J.  W.  Westcott,  foot  of  Woodward  avenue,  Detroit,  Mich. 

Howard  C.  Bristol,  V.  S.  Signal  Observer,  East  Tawas,  Mich. 

Kendall  Marine  Reporting  Company,  Port  Huron,  Mich. 

Capt.  A.  O.  Kruger,  Marquette,  Mich. 

P.  M.  Church,  SauU  Sainte  Marie,  Mich. 

A.  Hirsch,  Duluth,  Minn. 

John  8.  Parsons,  comer  West  Cayuga  and  Water  streets,  Oswego,  N.  Y. 

Oeo.  Hall  Coal  Comi>any,  Ogdensbnrg,  N.  Y. 

Matthews,  Northrup  &  Co.,  Nos.  179-183  Washington  street,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

Joys  Bros.  &,  Co.,  No.  205  East  Water  street,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 

Charles  S.  Barker,  West  Superior,  Wis. 

Frank  Long,  Publisher,  Sturgeon  Bay,  Wis. 

C.  H.  Cuuimings,  Eastport,  Me. 

N.  C.  Wallace,  Millbridge,  Me. 

Albert  W.  Bee,  Bar  Harbor,  Me. 

Spear,  May  &  Stover,  No.  408  Main  street,  Rockland,  Me. 

George  Bliss,  Waldoboro,  Me. 

William  O.McCobb,  Booth  Bay  Harbor,  Me. 

Charles  A.  Harriinan,  bath.  Me. 

William  Senter  &  Co.,  No.  61  Exchange  street,  Portland,  Me. 

P.  A.  Chisolm,  No.  161  Main  street,  Gloucester,  Mass. 

Charles  C.  Hutchinson,  No.  152  State  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

Samuel  Thaxter  &  Son,  No.  125  State  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

E.  St.  Croix  Oliver,  Vineyard  Haven,  Mass. 

C.  R.  Sherman  &  Son,  New  Bedford,  Mass. 

George  A.  Stockwell,  No.  12  Board  of  Trade  Building,  Providence,  B.  I. 

J.  M.  K.  South  wick.  No.  185  Thames  street,  Newport,  B.  I. 

C.  C.  Ball,  Block  Island. 

James  H.  Stivers,  No.  72  Water  street,  Stonington,  Conn. 

A.  H.  Kellam,  New  Haven,  Conn. 


t ) 


240 


LIST   OP   AGENTS. 


T,  8.  &  J.  D.  Negus,  No.  140  Water  street,  New  York  City. 
R.  Merrill's  Sons,  No.  110  Wall  street,  New  York  City. 
Michael  Rupp  &  Co.,  No.  39  South  street,  New  York  City. 

D.  Eggert's  Sons,  No.  3  Hanover  street,  New  York  City. 
John  Bliss  &,  Co.,  No.  128  Front  street.  New  York  City. 
Thomas  Manning,  No.  45  Broadway,  New  York  City. 

E.  Stoiger  &  Co.,  No.  2.5  Park  Place,  New  York  City. 
Frank  M.  Porch,  customhonso,  Bridgeton,  N.  .J. 
Riggs  &  Bro.,  No.  221  Walnut  street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

F.  J.  81oane  &  Co.,  corner  Pratt  street  and  Speer's  whtirf,  Baltimore,  Md. 
M.  V.  O'Neal,  No.  502  East  Pratt  street,  Baltimore,  Md. 

J.  .1.  Chapman,  No.  608  Thirteenth  street,  Washington,  D.  C. 

W.  H.  Lowdermilk  &  Co.,  No.  1424  F  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

J.  II.  Iliikcox,  No.  906  M  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Wm.  BiiUentine  &.  Sons,  No.  428  Seventh  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 

R.  Bell's  Sons,  South  Fairfax  street,  Alexandria,  Ya. 

C.  F.  Greenwood  &  Bro.,  No.  158  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Vo. 

Vickery  &  Co.,  No.  124  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Va. 

Frank  Stanton,  No.  1301  Market  street.  Wheeling,  W.  Va. 

Godfrey  Hart,  No.  24  South  Front  street,  Wilmington,  N.  C. 

W.  N.  Harris,  with  Geo.  Harris  &  Co.,  North  Water  street,  Wilmington,  N.  C. 

James  Allen  &  Co.,  Charleston,  S.  C. 

J.  P.  Johnson,  customhouse.  Savannah,  Ga. 

W.  S.  Cherry  &,  Co.,  No.  89  Bay  street,  Savannah,  Ga. 

J.  W.  Howell,  customhouse,  Femandina,  Fla. 

The  H.  and  W.  B.  Drew  Co.,  Jacksonville,  Fla. 

Robert  Ransom,  Titusville,  Fla. 

Brelsford  Bros.,  Palm  Beach,  Fla. 

H.  B.  Boyer,  Key  West,  Fla. 

Alfred  Brest,  office  of  lighthouse  inspector,  Key  West,  Fla. 

Babbitt  &  Co.,  Franklin  street,  Tampa,  Fla. 

C.  D.  Webster,  Nos.  83  and  85  Tarpon  avenue,  Tarpon  Springs,  Fla. 

Henry  Horsier  &  Co.,  Nos.  706  and  708  South  Palafox  street,  Peusacola,  Fla. 

McKenzie,  Oerting  &  Co.,  No.  599  South  Palafox  street,  Pensaoola,  Fla. 

K.  B.  Harvey,  Funta  Gorda,  Fla. 

Costello  &  Bates  Co.,  Nos.  24  and  26  Front  street.  Mobile,  Ala. 

Jas.  I.  Friar,  Pascagoula,  Miss. 

L.  Frigerio  (widow).  No.  1019  Canal  street,  New  Orleans,  La. 

Woodward,  Wight  &  Co.,  Nos.  38,  40,  42  Canal  street,  New  Orle&ns,  La. 

Frigerio  &  SchuUy,  No.  85  Royal  street,  New  Orleans,  La. 

Chas.  F.  Trube,  Galveston,  Tex. 

£.  M.  Burbeck,  corner  Fifth  and  D  streets,  San  Diego,  Cal. 

W.  L.  Banning,  San  Pedro,  Cal. 

StoU  &  Thayer  Co.,  No.  139  South  Spring  street,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

H.  A.  C.  McPhail,  Santa  Barbara,  Cal. 

8.  S.  Amheim,  No.  8  Stuart  street,  San  Franoisco,  Cal. 

Dillon  &  Co.,  No.  310  California  street,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Louis  Weule,  No.  418  Battery  street.  Son  Francisco,  Cal. 

H.  Luwrenson,  No.  6  Market  street,  San  Friuioisco,  Cal. 

James  £.  Matthews,  Eureka,  Humboldt  County,  Cal. 

Griffon  &,  Reed,  Astoria,  Oreg. 

J.  K.  Gill  &  Co.,  Nos.  28  and  30  First  street,  Portland,  Oreg. 

Waterman  &  Katz,  Port  Townsend,  Wash. 

Yaughen  &.  Morrill,  Tacoma,  Wash. 

Boeringer  &  Co.,  Tacoma,  Wash. 

Frank  F.  Dow,  New  Whatcom,  Wash. 


moTe,  Md. 

D.  C. 
;on,  D.  C. 


mington,  X.  G. 


Fla. 

usacola,  Fla. 
>la,  Fla. 


B&na,  La. 


}al. 


LIST   OF   AUUiNlU 


241 


Lowman  iV.  Han  ford,  Snnttl«,  Wash. 
W.  11.  riiiiiphroy,  Kc-iittlo,  Wagh. 
Edward  De  Urofl,  Sitka,  Alaska. 

AGENTS  IN  KOREinN  PORTS. 

'1.  N.  Hibhen  &  Co.,  No.  fiO  Oovernnitnt  Htrct^t,  Victoria,  nritisli  Pnlir  ibi.-*. 

Albo  t  IKTord,  No.  58  Cordova  stroit,  N'uiiconvor,  liritiHli  Columbia. 

(iiirrctt  Hyrne,  St.  .IdIiik,  Nowfoim.llMiid. 

Alex,  llaiii.  Port  Ihiwkesbiiry,  NovuSrofia. 

Robert  U.  Co^cHwell,  Halifax,  Nova  Scotia. 

J.  &  A.  McMillan.  St.  .John,  Now  ItniiiHwick. 

Heam  &  Harrison,  No.  ICIO  Notro  Danio  street,  Montroal,  Canada. 

Hiintor  &,  Grant,  Ilaiiiilton,  Ontario. 

T.  Darling  &  Co.,  NaHsaii,  Ualiania. 

E.  J.l).  Astwood,  TnrkH  Inland. 

Edwin  W.  Wilson,  Nos.  11  and  43  Obispo  stroot,  Havana,  Cnba. 

Jnan  B.  Carbo,  United  States  vice-consul,  CienfuogoH,  Cuba. 

•J.  P.  Thorson,  St.  Thomas,  West  Indies. 

JamoB  Gall,  Kingston,  Jamaica. 

John  A.  Donnaticn,  Port  of  Spain,  Trinidad,  West  Indies. 

0.  Anncianx,  United  Status  cousulat<!,  Harbados,  West  ludiea. 

Conrad  Eiinbeck,  C.  E.,  Guaymos,  Mexico. 

Para,  Brazil,  at  the  consniate. 

Manuel  Bottini,  Montevideo,  Uruguay. 

Arthur  B.  Dallas,  Pemambuco,  Brazil. 

St.  Helena  Island,  at  the  consulate. 

John  Newton,  No.  2  Calle  do  la  Constitucion,  Callas,  Porn. 

Philip,  Son  &  Nephew,  Non.  41  to  51  South  Castlo  street,  Mvornool.  Enirhind. 

Alexander  Dobbie  &  Sou,  No.  18  Clyde  Place,  (ilnsgow,  Scotiaaa. 

V.  «&  M.  Lepetit,  No.  15  Rao  do  Paris,  Havre,  Frauto. 

Eckordt  «fe  Messtorif,  Hamburg,  Germany. 

Charles  Ganpp  &  Co.,  Hongkong,  China. 

Russell  L.  Webb,  Manila,  Philippine  Islands. 

Dorsey  Mohun,  Consnlato,  Zanzibar,  £.  Afric*. 


1944— No.  108 16 


I 


1 


f 


y 


